Fichas Técnicas - Sistema de Extinción PDF

4007ES Fire Control Panels
UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM, NYC 4007ES Hybrid, Fire Detection and Control Panel with Addressable and/or Conventional
Fire Dept Approved*
Initiation
Features
Compatible with Simplex ES Net and 4120 fire alarm networks
Satisfies a variety of new and retrofit applications
4.3" (109 mm) diagonal color touchscreen display:
• Provides detailed system status and point information
• Supports dual language selection, including unicode character
languages
• A custom background display appears when operation is normal
Eight Point Zone/Relay Module:
• Each point is selectable as an IDC input or Relay output, Class A IDCs
require 2 points (one out and one return); one module is standard, up
to 3 additional modules can be field installed for a total of 4 eight point
zone/relay modules per system 13.6.2.1 ítem 8
• Each point on the IDC/Relay Module can be configured as a control
relay rated 2 A @ 30 VDC (resistive) as either normally open or
normally closed
• Can be powered directly from the power supply or through the
optional 25 VDC Regulator Module
• IDC end-of-line resistor value can be selected from a wide range of
resistance values for retrofit convenience
Electrically isolated IDNet+ addressable initiating device SLC: Figure 1: 4007ES Hybrid Panel Front View
• Provides built-in short circuit isolation for monitoring and control of
TrueAlarm analog sensors and IDNet communications monitoring and Software Feature Summary:
control devices; for use with either shielded or unshielded, twisted or • Current and previous panel configuration maintained in on-board
untwisted single pair wiring; outputs are Class A or Class B memory
• Standard panel SLC provides up to 100 addressable points; optional • An internal Ethernet service port is available for service computer
additional loop expansion modules provide an additional isolated loop connections to perform configuration updates, downloads and
with short circuit isolation for the IDNet+ channel; each loop expansion uploads; report downloads, and system software
module also provides an additional 75 addressable points • Internal USB interface allows a memory stick to store job revisions,
update revised jobs and panel software, and save detailed system
Power Supply Features:
reports from the panel
• Four Notification Appliance Circuits (NACs) selectable as Class A or
Class B with 6 A total available current Optional modules and connections include:
• NAC end-of-line resistor value can be selected from a wide range of • Fire Alarm Network Interface Card for ES Net or 4120 network
resistance values for retrofit convenience • Peer-to-Peer network communications, supports either Class B or
• Additional notification power capacity is available using the 4009 IDNet Class X operation
NAC Extender • Point or Event DACT assembly for IP Communicators
• Battery backup charging of up to 33 Ah; up to 18 Ah for cabinet • Up to two additional IDNet+ addressable device output loop
mounted batteries and up to 33 Ah batteries for mounting in close- connections with short circuit fault protection and with 75 additional
nippled remote battery cabinet point capacity each
General Mechanical: • Front mounted 48 LED annunciator with custom label inserts; LEDs
are programmable for up to 24 IDC zones of alarm and trouble
• Red or platinum cabinet; rated NEMA 1 and IP30
annunciation or other custom annunciation requirements
4007ES Listings reference: 13.6.2.1 ítem 1 • Remote LED annunciator support via RUI communications port for use
• UL 864 - Control Units, System (UOJZ); Control Unit Accessories, with UTP wiring
System, Fire Alarm (UOXX); Control Units, Releasing Device Service • Dual RS-232 ports (for printer, PC annunciator or third party interface)
(SYZV) 13.6.2.1 ítem 2 • TrueInsight Remote Gateway
• UL 2017 - Emergency Alarm System Control Units (CO detection), (FSZI) • Alarm relays and auxiliary relays
• ULC-S559 - Central Station Fire Alarm System Units (DAYRC) • City connections, with or without disconnect switch
• ULC-S527 - Control Units, System, Fire Alarm (UOJZC); Control Unit • 4003EC Voice Control Panels
Accessories, System, Fire Alarm (UOXXC); Control Units, Releasing
• 4009 IDNet NAC Extenders to extend NAC capability for power and
Device Service (SYZVC)
distance
• Battery brackets for seismic area protection (see Mechanical
Description.)
* This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7165-0026:0378 for allowable
values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this document. NYC Fire Dept COA #6191A. At the time of publication only UL and ULC listings are applicable to ES Net network products.
Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products
S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

4007ES Hybrid, Fire Detection and Control Panel with Addressable and/or Conventional Initiation
Introduction Touchscreen Display with LED Status Indicators

4007ES Series Fire Detection and Control Panels provide extensive
installation, operator, and service features with point and module
capacities suitable for a wide range of system applications. Panels can
be configured for stand-alone or networked fire control operation.
The convenient and intuitive color touchscreen provides easy access
for typical system response actions and for detailed system review or
configuration updates with password control to limit user access.
Flexible for new and retrofit applications. Standard conventional IDCs
and addressable IDNet+ communications provide flexibility for both
new and retrofit systems. IDC and NAC end-of-line resistor values are
selectable to match a wide range of existing initiating device circuits and
notification appliance circuits.
13.6.2.1 ítem 12
ES panel compatibility with ES Net
Simplex ES Network (ES Net) is a next generation IP based fire network
that uses industry standard network technology and infrastructure and
allows for simplified network upgrades, easy terminal connectivity and IP Figure 2: Touchscreen Display with LED Status Indicators
file transfer between nodes; and advanced network diagnostics.
ES fire alarm control panels can be upgraded to operate on an ES
Operator Screen Reference
network by adding an ES Net NIC to the panel.
To upgrade an existing 4120 network to ES Net, all of the 4120 NIC cards Main Menu Screen provides System Alarm Screen identifies
on the network loop must be replaced with ES Net NICs. easy navigation to the function active alarms with custom labels
required. Buttons A, B, and C have displayed, arrows allow navigation
Note: ES NICs and 4120 NICs cannot be mixed on the same network programmable functions. through the list.
loop.
For more detailed information on ES Net, consult datasheet S4100-0076,

and talk to your local Simplex product supplier.
Operator Interface
Convenient Status Information System Trouble Screen identifies
Trouble Log Screen allows review
With the locking door closed, the glass window allows viewing of active troubles with custom labels
of past troubles with time stamp
the display status LEDs. The user interface is a 4.3" diagonal color displayed, arrows allow navigation
and point details shown.
touchscreen LCD with separate status LEDs as shown below. through the list.
LED indicators describe the general category of activity being displayed
with the LCD providing more detail. For the authorized user, unlocking
the door provides access to the control functions and allows further
inquiry by scrolling the display for additional detail.
Operator Interface and Software Features

• Convenient and detailed operator information is easily accessed using Point Information Screen allows User Access Login Screen
a logical, menu-driven touchscreen display with password access review of point details, arrows allow controls access to panel operations
control navigation through the information. as determined per panel.
• Multiple automatic and manual diagnostics for maintenance reduction
• Alarm and Trouble History Logs (up to 1000 entries for each, 2000 total
events) are available for viewing from the display or for printing to a
connected printer, or downloaded to a service computer
• Module level ground fault searching assists installation and service by
locating and isolating modules with grounded wiring
• WALKTEST silent or audible system test performs an automatic self-
resetting test cycle and supports up to 8 WALKTEST groups Mechanical Description
• Install Mode allows grouping of multiple troubles for uninstalled • Locking door with polycarbonate window
modules and devices into a single trouble condition (typical with future • Latching front panel assembly swings forward for convenient internal
phased expansion); with future equipment and devices grouped into access
a single trouble, operators can more clearly identify events from the • Smooth box surfaces are provided for locally cutting conduit entrance
commissioned and occupied areas holes exactly where required
• Modules are power-limited (except as noted, such as relay modules)
• Battery compartment (bottom) accepts two batteries, up to 18 Ah, to
be mounted within the cabinet without interfering with module space;
charger capacity is up to 33 Ah; for batteries greater than 18 Ah, refer
to Module and Accessories Selection Information for external battery
cabinet details
Page 2 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

• Cabinet assembly design has been seismic tested and is certified to TrueSense Early Fire Detection
IBC and CBC standards as well as to ASCE 7 categories A through F, Multi-sensor 4098-9754 provides photoelectric and heat sensor data
requires battery brackets as detailed on data sheet S2081-0019 using a single 40070ES IDNet+ address. The panel evaluates smoke
activity, heat activity, and their combination, to provide TrueSense
IDNet+ Addressable Device Control early detection. For more details on this operation, refer to data sheet
The 4007ES Hybrid provides an IDNet+ addressable initiating device S4098-0024 .
Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) that supervises wiring connections and
the individual device communications status on the SLC. With 2-wire Diagnostics and Default Device Type
IDNet+ SLCs, initiation, monitoring, and control devices such as manual
fire alarm stations, TrueAlarm sensors, control relays, and sprinkler Sensor Status
waterflow switches can communicate their identity and status and TrueAlarm operation allows the control panel to automatically indicate
receive fire alarm system control. Additional addressable interface when a sensor is almost dirty, dirty, and excessively dirty. The NFPA 72
modules include circuit isolators, conventional IDC zone adapters, and requirement for a test of the sensitivity range of the sensors is fulfilled
interface to other system circuits such as fans, dampers, and elevator by the ability of TrueAlarm operation to maintain the sensitivity level of
controls. each sensor. CO Sensors track their 10 year active life status providing
indicators to assist with service planning. Indicators occur at: 1 year, 6
months, and end of life.
IDNet+ Addressable Device Operation
Each addressable device on the IDNet+ communication channel Modular TrueAlarm sensors
is continuously interrogated for status condition such as: normal, TrueAlarm sensors use the same base and different sensor types (smoke
off-normal, alarm, supervisory, or trouble. Both Class B and Class A or heat sensor) and can be easily interchanged to meet specific location
operation is available. Sophisticated poll and response communication requirements. This allows intentional sensor substitution during building
techniques ensure supervision integrity and allow for "T-tapping" of construction when conditions are temporarily dusty. Instead of covering
the circuits for Class B operation. Devices with LEDs pulse the LED to smoke sensors (causing them to be disabled), heat sensors may be
indicate receipt of a communications poll and can be turned on steady installed without reprogramming the control panel. The control panel
from the panel. With addressable devices, the location and status of the will indicate an incorrect sensor type, but the heat sensor will operate at
connected device is monitored, logged, and displayed on the operator a default sensitivity to provide heat detection for building protection at
interface LCD with each device having its own 40 character custom label that location.
for precise identification.
IDNet+ Addressable Channel Capacity
TrueAlarm Addressable Sensor Operation The 4007ES Hybrid provides an isolated output IDNet+ signaling line
Addressable initiating device communications include operation of circuit (SLC) that supports up to 250 addressable monitor and control
TrueAlarm smoke and temperature sensors. Smoke sensors transmit points intermixed on the same pair of wires. (250 total requires two
an output value based on their smoke chamber condition and the CPU 4007-9803 IDNet+ Loop Expansion Modules.)
maintains a current value, peak value, and an average value for each
Table 1: IDNet+ SLC Wiring Specifications
sensor. Status is determined by comparing the current sensor value to
its average value. Tracking this average value as a continuously shifting Specification Rating
reference point filters out environmental factors that cause shifts in Maximum Distance 0 to 125 4000 ft (1219 m); 50 ohms
sensitivity. from Control Panel per
126-250 2500 feet (762 m); 35 ohms
Device Load
Total Wire Length Allowed With
Up to 12,500 ft (3.8 km); 0.60 µF
"T" Taps for Class B Wiring
Maximum Capacitance
1 µF
Between IDNet+ Channels
0.8 mA supv., 1 mA alarm; 2 mA per
Figure 3: TrueAlarm Figure 4: TrueAlarm Photo/ Loading per device
activated device LED
Photo Sensor with Base Heat Sensor in CO Base Shielded or unshielded, twisted or
Wire Type and Connections
Programmable sensitivity untwisted wire*
Connections Terminal blocks for 18 to 12 AWG
Programmable sensitivity of each sensor can be selected at the control
panel for different levels of smoke obscuration (shown directly in Compatibility includes: IDNet communicating devices and TrueAlarm
percent) or for specific heat detection levels. To evaluate whether the sensors including QuickConnect and QuickConnect2 sensors; see data
sensitivity should be revised, the peak value is stored in memory and can sheet S4090-0011 for additional reference.
be easily read (or downloaded as a report) and compared to the alarm
Note: * Some applications may require shielded wiring. Review your
threshold directly in percent.
system with your local Simplex product supplier.
CO sensor bases
CO sensor bases combine an electrolytic CO sensing module with a
TrueAlarm analog sensor to provide a single multiple sensing assembly
using one system address. The CO sensor can be enabled/disabled,
and can be used in LED/Switch modes and custom control. Refer to
S4098-0052 for more details.
TrueAlarm heat sensors
TrueAlarm heat sensors can be selected for fixed temperature detection,
with or without rate-of-rise detection. Utility temperature sensing is also
available, typically to provide freeze warnings or alert to HVAC system
problems. Readings can selected as either Fahrenheit or Celsius.
Page 3 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

Power Supply Output and Zone/Relay Module

Details
Power supply output details
• RUI Communications controls up to 10 remote devices at up to 2500 ft
(762 m) for single run, or 10,000 ft (3048 m) total if wiring is Class B and
T-tapped; selectable as Class B or Class A
• Compatible RUI remote equipment includes: 4606-9202 and
4606-9205 Color Touchscreen Annunciators (up to 6 total), 4100
Series 24 I/O and LED/Switch modules, 4602 Series LED/Switch and I/
O Annunciator modules, including 4602-9101 Status Command Units
(SCU), and 4602-9102 Remote Command Units (RCU)
• IDNet+ SLC Output provides electrically isolated Class B or Class A
communication; standard capacity is up to 100 addressable points
with expansion for up to 250 points using up to two 4007-9803 IDNet+
Loop Expansion Modules (as described in IDNet+ Addressable Channel
Capacity) 13.6.2.1 ítem 3
• 6 A Output Rating. This includes current for: special application
notification appliances; IDNet devices; module currents; and auxiliary
output current (battery charging, CPU, and power supply current does
not subtract from the 6 A); when NACs are controlling Regulated 24 DC
Appliances, total NAC current available is 3 A
• Four on-board Class B/Class A NACs, rated 3 A each for Special
Application appliances; selectable for SmartSync horn and strobe
control, or strobe synchronization; rated 2 A each for Regulated 24 DC
appliances 13.6.2.1 ítem 7
• NAC end-of-line (EOL) resistor values are selectable as: 10 kΩ, 3.9 kΩ,
4.7 kΩ, 5.1 kΩ, 5.6 kΩ, or 15 kΩ
• Battery Charger is dual rate, temperature compensated, and charges
up to 18 Ah sealed lead-acid batteries mounted in the battery
compartment, and charges up to 33 Ah batteries mounted in an
external cabinet 13.6.2.1 ítem 11
• Battery and Charger Monitoring includes battery charger status and
low or depleted battery conditions; status information provided to the
master controller includes analog values for: battery voltage, charger
voltage and current, actual system voltage and current, and NAC
current
• Low Battery Voltage Cutout is selectable when required (required for
ULC listing applications)
• 2 A Auxiliary Output (AUX/SNAC) can be selected either as resettable
auxiliary power of 2 A @ 24 VDC, or selected to be a simple NAC (SNAC)
for sounder base power, 4-wire detector power, or door holder power
Zone/relay module details
• Select as IDC or Relay; configure up to 8, Class B IDCs, or up to 4, Class
A IDCs; or up to 8, Relay outputs rated 2 A resistive @ 30 VDC (N.O.
or N.C.); or combinations of IDCs and Relays; each zone is separately
configurable as an IDC or Relay output
• IDC Support. Each IDC supports up to 30, two-wire devices
• IDC EOL resistor values are selectable as: 3.3 kΩ, 2 kΩ, 2.2 kΩ, 3.4 kΩ,
3.9 kΩ, 4.7 kΩ, 5.1 kΩ, 5.6 kΩ, 6.34/6.8 kΩ, and 3.6 kΩ + 1.1 kΩ; see
instructions for more details
Page 4 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

4007ES Mounting and Module Location Reference
Table 2: Module locations

Key Description
A CPU and User Interface assembly.
B Location for optional 4007-9805 LED Module.
C Power Supply Assembly.
4007-9806 SDACT location.
D Note: The SDACT includes a 650-1838 flat mounting bracket (available separately). Some pre-existing systems with an angled SDACT
bracket will need to be replaced with the flat mounting bracket when a Network Interface Card is installed.
Location for 4007-9801 Zone/Relay Module, 4007-9812 Dual RS-232 Interface, 4007-9804 Dual Class A IDNAC Isolator (DCAI), or (as
E
shown) 4007-9802 25 V Regulator Module
F Primary location for 4007-9801 Zone/Relay Module, or 4190-6106 TrueInsight Remote Service Gateway.
G Location for additional 4007-9801 Zone/Relay Module.
H Identical to Block G above.
I 4007-9807 or 4007-9808 City Circuit Module, or 4007-9809 Relay Module.
J 4007-9803 IDNet+ Loop Expansion Modules, maximum of two (two are shown).
K Identical to block J above.
Block L is an additional block that sits on spacers above Block G and H. The 4007-9810 or 4007-9817 NIC can be mounted in block L
L with or without modules mounted below it in blocks G and H. When fiber media cards are used and an SDACT is present, the SDACT
requires a 650-1838 flat mounting bracket (ordered separately).
M Battery location for up to 18 Ah batteries. Note: No conduit entry or wiring in this area, 14-7/8" (378 mm) wide.
Note: A system ground must be provided for Earth Detection and transient protection devices. This connection shall be made to an approved, dedi-
cated Earth connection per NFPA 70, Article 250, and NFPA 780.
Page 5 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

Product Selection
Table 3: 4007ES Hybrid Product Selection
Model Color Description Supv. Alarm
4007-9101
Red
4007-9101BA 4007ES Hybrid with 4 conventional NACs, 6 A output power supply/battery charger and
145 mA 190 mA
4007-9102 1 IDNet+ SLC for up to 100 addressable points
Platinum
4007-9102BA
Both models above include (1) 4007-9801 Zone/Relay Card 83 mA 351 mA
Note:
1. Models with (BA) are available assembled in the USA by adding suffix "BA".
2. The current draw for the 4007ES Hybrid Panel (without included modules) does not subtract from the 6 A of power available for optional modules
and external loads. For power supply loading calculations include all modules plus all external loads and exclude the 4007ES Hybrid Panel current. For
battery standby calculations include all modules, all external loads, and the base 4007ES Hybrid Panel current.
Module and Accessories Selection Information

Table 4: Factory Programming Options
Model Description
4007-8810 Factory Programming (select)
4007-0831 Custom Labels and Programming (requires 4007-8810)
Table 5: Field Installed Optional Modules
Model Description Supv. Alarm
Eight Point Zone/Relay Module, each point is selectable as an IDC input or Relay output, Class A IDCs
4007-9801 require 2 points (one out and one return); one module is included as standard, select up to 3 additional; 83 mA max 351 mA max
current shown is for 8 Class B IDCs with 4 in alarm, detector current is added separately
with 1
190 mA 445 mA
module
25 VDC Regulator Module; 2 A maximum output; use to power Zone/Relay modules
with 2
4007-9802 connected to initiating devices requiring nominal 25 VDC voltage. Refer to technical 290 mA 801 mA
modules
publication 579-832 2-Wire Detector Compatibility Chart for application details.
with 3
390 mA 1156 mA
modules
IDNet+ Loop Expansion Module; provides an additional isolated loop with short circuit isolation to
4007-9803 the existing IDNet+ channel, also provides an additional 75 addressable points to the IDNet+ channel NA NA
capacity, maximum of two
Panel Mounted 48 LED Status Annunciator Module; provides 24 Yellow LEDs, 20 Red LEDs, no LEDs on 10 mA 10 mA
4007-9805 and 4 Red/Green LEDs that are programmable for up to 24 IDC zones of alarm and trouble with LEDs
1.75 mA per LED, 105 mA max
annunciation, or as required for custom annunciation requirements on
SDACT Module for Point or Event Reporting
4007-9806 30 mA 40 mA
Order 2080-9047 connection cables as required (see cable details under accessories)
4007-9807 City Circuit Module with Disconnect Switch 20 mA 36 mA
4007-9808 City Circuit Module without Disconnect Switch 20 mA 36 mA
4007-9809 Relay Module; relays for Alarm, Supervisory, and Trouble; rated 2 A resistive @ 32 VDC 15 mA 37 mA
Dual RS-232 Interface Module; Compatible with Simplex remote printer, PC annunciator or third party
4007-9812 60 mA 60 mA
interface (two ports/connections maximum)
Table 6: Field Installed Optional Network Modules
Model Description Supv. Alarm
TrueInsight remote service
4190-8001* gateway module and programming
selection
TrueInsight remote service gateway
Required Selection 62 mA 73 mA
module installation kit; includes
4190-6106 * module and harness; configured
for dynamic IP address operation
unless ordered with 4190-4016
4190-4016 * TrueInsight remote service gateway module for fixed IP Addressing; optional, select if application will use fixed IP address
Note: * Refer to data sheet S4100-0063 for additional TrueInsight service gateway details
Page 6 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

Network Interface and Network Media Card Product Selection

4007ES fire alarm control units are compatible with Simplex ES Net network or 4120 network fire alarm products.
• Refer to datasheet S4100-0076 for additional information on compatible ES Net fire alarm products.
• Refer to datasheet S4100-0056 for additional information on compatible 4120 network fire alarm products.
• Refer to datasheet S4100-0061 for additional information on the Building Network Interface Card.
Table 7: Batteries
Model Capacity Battery Mounting Details
2081-9272 6.2 Ah
2081-9274 10 Ah 12 V Batteries for cabinet mounting; select one battery model per system standby requirements; order quantity
2081-9288 12.7 Ah of two; to be wired in series for 24 VDC
2081-9275 18 Ah
2081-9287 25 Ah For remote mount in Battery Box 4009-9801 Batteries for remote mounting; see battery cabinet details
2081-9271 33 Ah For remote mount in Battery Box 4009-9802 below
Table 8: Battery accessories
Model Color Capacity Dimensions Description
16 ¼" W x 13 ½" H
For up to 25 Ah
4009-9801 Beige x 5 ¾" D (413 mm x
batteries External battery cabinet without charger, with locking solid door
343 mm x 146 mm)
and battery harness; for close-nippled mounting to fire alarm
25 ¾” W x 20 ¾” H
For up to 33 Ah control panel cabinet
4009-9802 Beige x 4 ⅛” D (654 mm x
batteries
527 mm x 105 mm)
Table 9: Accessories
Model Description
2080-9047 DACT cable, 14 ft (4.3 m) long, RJ45 plug one end, spade lugs on the other; order one per phone line connection required
2975-9812 Red semi-flush box trim; 1 7⁄16" (37 mm) wide, four corners and trim pieces for top, bottom, and sides
2975-9813 Platinum semi-flush box trim; 1 7⁄16" (37 mm) wide, four corners and trim pieces for top, bottom, and sides
2081-9031 Platinum semi-flush box trim; 1 7/16” (37 mm) wide, four corners and trim pieces for top, bottom, and sides
4081-9002 3.3 kΩ, 1 W end-of-line resistor for Class B non-addressable initiating zones
4081-9018 10 kΩ, 1 W end-of-line resistor harness for non-addressable NACs
General Specifications
Table 10: General specifications
Specification Rating
120 VAC Input 2 A maximum @ 102 to 132 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Input Power
240 VAC Input 1 A maximum @ 204 to 264 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Power Supply Output
Including module currents and auxiliary power outputs; 6 A total Output switches to
Rating
4007ES Hybrid Power Supply battery backup during
3 A each for Special Application Appliances
Output Ratings NAC Ratings mains AC failure or
2 A each for Regulated 24 DC Appliances
brownout conditions
Auxiliary Power Tap 2 A maximum, 24 VDC nominal (19.5 to 31.1 VDC)
Simplex horns, strobes, and combination horn/strobes and speaker/strobes (contact your
Special Application Non-Addressable Appliances
Simplex product representative for compatible appliances)
Power for other UL listed appliances; use associated external synchronization modules
Regulated 24 DC Non-Addressable Appliances
where required
UL and ULC listed for battery charging of 6.2 Ah up to 33 Ah (batteries larger than 18 Ah
Battery Charger Ratings Battery capacity range
require a remote battery cabinet)
(sealed lead-acid
Charger characteristics and Temperature compensated, dual rate, recharges depleted batteries within 48 hours per
batteries)
performance UL Standard 864; to 70% capacity in 12 hours per ULC Standard S527
Table 11: Custom background and environmental details
Item Description
Supported file types: JPG, BMP, GIF, and PNG
Custom Background Display Details Recommended image type is JPG, recommended image size is 480 x 240, and the file size
limit is 100 kb
Operating Temperature 32° to 120°F (0° to 49° C)
Environmental
Operating Humidity Up to 93% RH, non-condensing @ 90° F (32° C) maximum
Page 7 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

Additional 4007ES and Network Product Reference

Table 12: Additional 4007ES and network product reference
Subject Datasheet
Serial DACT (SDACT) for 4100ES, 4010ES, 4007ES S2080-0009
Seismic Battery Brackets Reference S2081-0019
4003EC Voice Control Unit S4003-0002
4007ES Panels with Addressable Notification S4007-0002
4007ES Extinguishing Release Applications S4007-0003
4009 IDNet NAC Extender S4009-0002
4009 IDNAC Repeater S4009-0004
External 110 Ah Battery Charger for 4100ES, 4010ES S4081-0002
Graphic I/O Modules for 4100ES, 4010ES, 4007ES S4100-0005
Interface to VESDA Air Aspiration Detection Systems S4100-0026
NDU with SPS Power Supplies for 4120 Network S4100-0036
InfoAlarm Command Center with SPS Power Supplies S4100-0045
Multiple Signal Fiber Optic Modems for 4120 Networks S4100-0049
BACpac Ethernet Module S4100-0051
4120 Network Products and Specifications S4100-0056
Building Network Interface Card (BNIC) S4100-0061
SafeLINC Internet Interface S4100-0062
TrueInsight Remote Gateway S4100-0063
ES Net Network Products and Specifications S4100-0076
NDU with SPS Power Supplies for ES Net S4100-0077
InfoAlarm Command Center with EPS Power Supplies S4100-0101
NDU with EPS Power Supplies for 4120 Network S4100-0102
NDU with EPS Power Supplies for ES Net S4100-0104
PC Annunciator S4190-0013
TrueSite Workstation S4190-0016
TrueSite Incident Commander S4190-0020
24-Pin Dot Matrix Fire Alarm System Remote Printer S4190-0027
SCU/RCU Annunciators S4602-0001
4606 Series Color Touchscreen LCD Annunciators S4606-0003
Page 8 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

4007ES Hybrid Additional Reference
Figure 6: 4606-9205 (Platinum) Color

LCD Touchscreen Remote Annunciator
Figure 5: 4007ES Hybrid with optional

Figure 7: 4606-9202 (Red) Color LCD
48 LED Annunciator Module (4007-9805)
Touchscreen Remote Annunciator
Page 9 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

© 2019 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision and are subject to change without
notice. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex® product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co.
Simplex, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are
registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019
4007ES Fire Control Panels
UL, ULC Listed; FM, NYC Fire Automatic Extinguishing, Deluge and Preaction Sprinkler System Releasing Control
Dept Approved*
Features
Releasing control using the Simplex 4007ES Fire Alarm Control
Panel to provide**:
• Coverage for multiple areas of Automatic Extinguishing Release and/
or Deluge and Preaction Sprinkler System Release including audible
escalation of events
• Control of compatible Listed/Approved 24 VDC automatic control
actuators
• Releasing appliance circuits (RACs) by connecting Notification appliance
circuits (NACs) to Suppression Release Peripherals for actuator
supervision and control
• Additional actuator circuit control NACs are available using 4009 IDNet
Addressable NAC Extenders with Suppression Release Peripherals
Audible Escalation of Events:

• Temporal or 20 bpm march time pattern for first cross-zone alarm; 120
bpm march time pattern to indicate releasing timer active; On steady
to indicate releasing timer expired and actuator is activated
• Requires NACs dedicated to conventional horn control (not SmartSync
operation) with strobes controlled on separate NACs
4009 IDNet NAC Extenders provide:

• Up to eight NACs for notification requirements and input to
suppression release peripherals, controlled via IDNet
4090-9005/4090-9006 Suppression Release Peripheral (SRP) with

Dual Command Control:
• Dual command control requires IDNet and an activated NAC to initiate
release
• NAC provides wiring supervision to the actuator including monitoring
of coil continuity and short circuit supervision to the coil supervision
module
Suppression Release Peripheral control features:
• An on-board DC-DC regulator compensates for voltage drops to the
peripheral and ensures proper control circuit voltage over a wide
operating range
• Provides a single RAC for control of actuators for up to 2 A using a 3 A
NAC input (1 A using a 2 A NAC input) 13.6.2.1 ítem 9
Related system components:

• 4007ES Series control panel with Releasing Appliqué
• Dedicated NAC output from 4007ES (or compatible NAC Extender)
• Coil supervision module, one per RAC
• Maintenance Switch, one per RAC
• Abort Switch Figure 1: 4007ES Series Releasing
Control Typical Block Diagram
4007ES Listings reference:
• UL 864 - Control Units, System (UOJZ); Control Unit Accessories,
System, Fire Alarm (UOXX); ; Control Units, Releasing Device Service Introduction
(SYZV) When combined with Suppression Release Peripherals, the 4007ES
• UL 2017 - Emergency Alarm System Control Units (CO detection), (FSZI) series fire alarm control panel provides actuator supervision and control
for use in automatic extinguishing, and deluge or preaction releasing
• ULC-S559 - Central Station Fire Alarm System Units (DAYRC)
systems. Hazard area initiating and notification devices are controlled
• ULC-S527 - Control Units, System, Fire Alarm (UOJZC); Control Unit using either conventional or addressable circuits per standard 4007ES
Accessories, System, Fire Alarm (UOXXC); Control Units, Releasing capabilities. The necessary releasing system logic is implemented within
Device Service (SYZVC) the 4007ES control panel as required for the local application.
* NYC Fire Dept COA #6191A. Additional listings may be applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the
property of Tyco Safety Products Westminster. ** Release Control operation described in this document is also available with 4007ES Control Panels with software revision 3.03 or higher. Refer to data
sheet S4007-0001 for model 4007ES control panel details including IDNet communications information.
S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Automatic Extinguishing, Deluge and Preaction Sprinkler System Releasing Control
Automatic Extinguishing Release Systems When used, connect to an addressable Supervised IAM model
These systems automatically activate electrically controlled actuators 4090-9001 or similar addressable adapter module. The Simplex
for the release of a fire extinguishing agent (such as dry chemical, water abort switch and the IAM mount in a single gang box, 2-1/2"
spray, foam, CO2, or clean agent) in response to fire detection device minimum depth.
inputs as determined by programming of the host fire alarm control 9. Addressable Manual Releasing Stations are used to initiate
panel. activation of the releasing actuators with the appropriate time delay
Automatic Extinguishing Release System Panels are required to implemented by the fire alarm control panel.
have a minimum of 24 hours of standby power. Initiating devices must 10. Notification Requirements. Each hazard area typically requires
be Listed/Approved for the application, and may be wired either Class A general audible and visible fire alarm notification and additional
or B. Control actuators must be electrically compatible with the control dedicated NACs for area releasing status notification. Suppression
panel circuits and power supplies, and are wired Class B to provide coil releasing is compatible with conventional panel mounted NACs as
supervision. well as for use with the 4009 IDNet NAC Extender.
11. Additional Suppression Release Peripheral Reference. Refer to
Deluge or Preaction Sprinkler Systems Installation Instructions 579-385.
These systems automatically activate water control actuators in
response to fire detection device inputs. Additional Releasing Systems Reference
Deluge Sprinkler Systems employ open sprinkler heads and For additional information, refer to Factory Mutual Research Corporation
provide water flow when the fire detection system activates a common (FMRC) "FMRC Approval Guide," FM Approval standard "Automatic
automatic water control actuator. They are used to deliver water Releases for Preaction and Deluge Sprinkler Systems."
simultaneously through all of the system sprinkler heads. This type of Please note that proper operation of releasing control systems requires
system is applicable where the immediate application of large quantities that the system design, installation, and maintenance be performed
of water over large areas is the proper fire response. correctly and in accordance with all applicable local and national codes,
Preaction Sprinkler Systems are similar to deluge systems except and equipment manufacturer's instructions. No liability for total system
that normally closed sprinkler heads are used and supervisory air operation is assumed or implied.
pressure is maintained in the pipe. Operation requires both an activated
sprinkler head and an activated fire alarm initiating device with specific
programming determined at the host fire alarm control panel.
Releasing System Requirements

1. Releasing actuators are controlled from a Suppression Release
Peripheral (4090-9005 or 4090-9006). Connections are 2-wire,
Class B releasing circuits with only one 24 VDC actuator per
circuit. Where applicable, two, 12 VDC actuators in series, or one
12 VDC actuator with manufacturer supplied resistor may be used
(refer to the actuator manufacturer's installation documentation for
additional details and requirements).
2. Coil Supervision Module 2081-9046 must be wired electrically
before the actuator and located in the actuator wiring junction box.
The connected RAC provides continuity supervision of the actuator
coil and wiring and provides short circuit supervision to the coil
supervision module.
3. Cross-zoning or other alarm initiation logic per system
requirements, is to be implemented by programming at the fire
alarm control panel.
4. UL Listed Automatic Extinguishing Releasing operation
requires that: battery standby must be a minimum of 24 hours
with 5 minutes of alarm and that listed actuators are used, refer to
Suppression Release Peripheral Wiring Reference.
5. FM Approved Automatic Extinguishing Release requires
secondary standby to be a minimum of 24 hours with 5 minutes of
alarm. Actuators must be electrically compatible.
6. FM Approved Deluge and Preaction Sprinkler operation
requires that: initiating device circuits be Class A and wired to Listed/
Approved devices; standby power capacity must be a minimum of
90 hours with 10 minutes of alarm; and that compatible Automatic
Water Control Valves must be used. (Refer to actuator list in the
Specifications section.)
7. Maintenance Switches, one per RAC, are required per NFPA 72,
the National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code to allow the system to be
tested or serviced without actuating the fire suppression systems.
Their use may not be allowed in some jurisdictions, always confirm
local requirements. When used, Simplex Maintenance Switches are
required to ensure that operation initiates a supervisory condition.
8. Abort Switches are available when abort operation is required.
Page 2 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Product Selection
Table 1: 4007ES Releasing Control System Modules
Model Description Reference
Required, one per RAC, mounts in the releasing actuator wiring junction box; see
2081-9046 Coil Supervision Module
Specifications section for details
One per RAC; flush or surface mount; indicator lamp models require separate 24
2080 Series* Maintenance Switches
VDC wiring
2080-9056* Flush mount As required, connects via an IDNet addressable interface module; mounted on a
Abort Switch single gang stainless steel plate; installation requires a single gang box, 2-1/2" (64
2080-9057* Surface mount
mm) minimum depth
* Refer to data sheet S2080-0010 for Abort and Maintenance switch details.
Table 2: Releasing Appliqués, Required for 4007ES Suppression Releasing Applications

Model Description
4007-9830 English
Suppression Releasing Appliqué; field applied
4007-9830CAF French
Table 3: Suppression Release Peripheral and Accessories

Model Description Reference
Requires mounting box 2975-9227,
4090-9005 Basic Suppression Release Peripheral on mounting plate
ordered separately
Suppression Release Peripheral mounted in NEMA 1 red box;
4090-9006 Includes LED indicator on front of door
required for ULC listing
2975-9227 NEMA 1 red mounting box; required for 4090-9005
These items are included with model
Red LED IDNet communications indicator option kit; mounts on
4090-9812 4090-9006
door of 2975-9227 box
Note: Refer to control panel programming manual 579-1167 for further information on suppression release panel programing.
Page 3 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

4007ES Hybrid Panel Releasing System One-Line Connection Reference
Figure 2: 4007ES Hybrid Panel Releasing System One-Line Connection Reference
Page 4 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

4007ES Fully Addressable Panel Releasing System One-Line Connection Reference
Figure 3: 4007ES Fully Addressable Panel Releasing System One-Line Connection Reference
Page 5 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Suppression Release Peripheral Wiring Reference
Figure 4: Suppression Release Peripheral Wiring Reference
Page 6 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Specifications
Table 4: Suppression Release Peripheral 4090-9005 and 4090-9006 Specifications

Communications IDNet, one address
with 4007ES 2 A maximum At nominal 24 VDC, regulated; refer to NAC Power Requirements for
RAC Output Rating
with 4009 IDNet NAC Extender 1 A maximum more detail
NAC Power Requirements Voltage 16 to 32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC)
Supervisory Current No additional current required, circuit appears as standard end-of-line (EOL) NAC loading
Note:
RAC Current NAC Current RAC Current NAC Current
4007ES NACs are rated at 3 Alarm Current Reference 0.5 A 0.845 A 1.25 A 2.14 A
A; 4009 IDNet NAC Extender (RAC current = actuator 0.75 A 1.28 A 1.5 A 2.56 A
NACs are rated at 2 A, Extender current) 0.87 A 1.5 A 1.75
3A
expansion NACs are rated 1.5 A 1A 1.71 A 2A
Wire Connections Screw terminals for input and output wiring, 18 to 12 AWG wire (0.82 mm² to 3.31 mm²)
Up to 2500 ft (762 m) from the IDNet source module
IDNet Wiring Distance Reference Up to 10,000 ft (3048 m) total Class B wiring distance including T-Taps
Compatible with Simplex 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors
Dimensions See installation reference in Compatible UL Listed Valves and Actuators
Operating Temperature 32° to 120° F (0° to 49° C) indoor operation only
Operating Humidity Range 10 to 90% RH at 90° F (32° C)
Table 5: Coil Supervision Module 2081-9046 Specifications

Construction Epoxy encapsulated
Dimensions 1-3/8" W x 2-7/16" L x 1-1/16" H (34 mm x 62 mm x 27 mm)
Wiring 18 AWG (0.82 mm²) wire leads, color coded
Current Rating 2 A Maximum; internally fused at 3 A, non-replaceable
Compatible UL Listed Valves and Actuators

Table 6: Compatible UL Listed Valves and Actuators
Manufacturer Model Number Electrical Ratings
AUTOMAN II-C Assembly (solenoid 17728; coil 25924) 24 VDC, 750 mA
AUTOMAN II-C Explosion-Proof Releasing Device (solenoid 31492;
24 VDC, 750 mA
coil 31438)
AUTOMAN II-C Assembly (solenoid 68739; coil 25924) 24VDC, 750 mA
Solenoid Electric Actuator (solenoid 73111; coil 73097) 24 VDC, 1 A
ANSUL
*CV90 HF Electric Actuator 73327 24 VDC, 570 mA
LP CO2 w/ASCO solenoid 422934 24 VDC, 442 mA
LP CO2 double action 24 VDC solenoid 430948 24 VDC, 438 mA
LP CO2 3-way selector valve solenoid 433419 24 VDC, 438 mA
Electric Actuator 24 VDC solenoid 570537 24 VDC, 250 mA
Solenoid Electric Actuator (uses solenoid: Flow Control
609500/671S)
Solenoid Coupling Assembly 21006401 (uses solenoid: Flow
Control 609500/671S)
LPG 24 VDC, 542 mA
LPG128/145/190/230-50/55 FM-200 valves (uses solenoid: Flow
LPG128-90UL iFLOW and FM-200 valve (uses solenoid: Flow
71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2 (Skinner coil H111C2) 24 VDC, 420 mA
73212BN4TN00NOC111C2 (Skinner coil C111C2) 24 VDC, 420 mA
Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2 (Skinner coil C322C2) 24 VDC, 830 mA
73218BN4UNLVNOH111C2 (Skinner coil H111C2) 24 VDC, 410 mA
73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 (Skinner coil C111C2) 24 VDC, 410 mA
8210A107 (097617-005D coil) 24 VDC, 750 mA
ASCO 8210G207 (238310 coil) 24 VDC, 440 mA
8211A107 (097617-005D coil) 24 VDC, 750 mA
Page 7 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019


8262H182 (238910 coil) 24 VDC, 483 mA
HV2628571 (23810 coil) 24 VDC, 442 mA
HV2648581 (23810 coil) 24 VDC, 442 mA
EF8210G001MBMO (238714 coil) 24 VDC, 450 mA
R8210A107 (097617-005D coil) 24 VDC, 700 mA
T8210A107 (097617-005D coil) 24 VDC, 700 mA
ECH Electrical Control Head (551201) 24 VDC, 1700 mA
Pyro-Chem Explosion-Proof Electric Actuator (570147) 24 VDC, 396 mA
Removable Electric Actuator (570209) 24 VDC, 200 mA
304.205.010 – Electrical Actuator Suppression Diode 24 VDC, 250 mA
Hygood
304.209.001 – Electrical Actuator Bridge Rectifier 24 VDC, 250 mA
Minimax Model MX1230 without diode 24 VDC, 500 mA
Versa CGS-4292-NB3-S20000 24 VDC, 438 mA
Burkert 5282 2/2-Way Solenoid Valve 24 VDC, 333 mA
TSP 304205030 24 VDC, 0.5 A
Tyco Safety Products
TSP 304700001 24 VDC, 830mA
Masteco MSC-01 24 VDC, 1.7A
Note: * For 24 VDC, 450 mA activation, requires a 73886 (21.5 ohm, 23 watt) in-line resistor shipping assembly ordered separately. For additional
information refer to the manufacturer’s technical documentation.
Compatible FM Approved Water Control Valves

4007ES Control Panels are assigned to FM Release Control Panel Group 3. Group 3 FM Approved Release Control Panels are compatible will all
FM Approved Solenoid Valves rated at 22 Watts or less. For verification of agency listings and power requirements refer to the solenoid valve
manufacturer's technical documentation.
Page 8 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Suppression Release Peripheral Installation Reference Diagram
Figure 5: Suppression Release Peripheral Installation Reference Diagram
Note: Figure 5 shows:

1. 2975-9227 box, red with white lettering (supplied with 4090-9006)
2. 4090-9812 LED indicator option (supplied with 4090-9006)
3. 4090-9005 Suppression Release Peripheral assembly (supplied with 4090-9006)
Page 9 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Additional Product Data Sheet Reference
Table 7: Additional Product Data Sheet Reference

Subject Data Sheet
Releasing System Abort and Maintenance Switches S2080-0010
4007ES Panels with Conventional Notification S4007-0001
Addressable Manual Stations for Releasing Applications S4099-0006
S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019
4007ES and 4007ES Hybrid Fire Alarm
Systems
579-1167 Rev. K
*05791167K*
This page is intentionally blank
1 Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information............................................................................................ 7
Contents
2 Getting started...................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.1 Requirements and Compatibility.................................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.2 Downloading the Software............................................................................................................................................................................ 8
2.3 Installing the Software....................................................................................................................................................................................8
2.4 Starting the Programmer............................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3 User Interface......................................................................................................................................................10
3.1 Menus.............................................................................................................................................................................................................10
3.2 Toolbar Icons................................................................................................................................................................................................. 12
3.3 Tabs and Sub-Tabs........................................................................................................................................................................................ 14
3.4 Status bar.......................................................................................................................................................................................................14
4 Working with jobs............................................................................................................................................... 15
4.1 Creating Jobs..................................................................................................................................................................................................15
4.2 Opening Existing Jobs...................................................................................................................................................................................15
4.3 Setting Job Preferences................................................................................................................................................................................ 16
4.4 Job Notes........................................................................................................................................................................................................16
4.5 Saving Jobs..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
4.6 Building a Job.................................................................................................................................................................................................17
4.7 System Requirements.................................................................................................................................................................................. 17
4.8 Archiving a Job............................................................................................................................................................................................... 17
4.8.1 Opening an archived file............................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
4.9 Backing up a job............................................................................................................................................................................................17
4.9.1 Restoring a Backup file............................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
5 Panel Information and Configuration.............................................................................................................. 19
5.1 Notice to users, Installers, AHJ, and other Involved Parties.................................................................................................................... 19
5.2 Panel Information......................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
5.3 System Options............................................................................................................................................................................................. 19
5.4 User Access Level Configuration................................................................................................................................................................. 23
5.5 Passcode Configuration............................................................................................................................................................................... 24
5.6 Features Configuration.................................................................................................................................................................................24
6 Specifying Hardware Components...................................................................................................................25
6.1 Hardware Tab Overview............................................................................................................................................................................... 25
6.2 Adding Hardware.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
6.3 Adding a City/Relay Card..............................................................................................................................................................................26
6.4 Adding the Additional IDNet Loops............................................................................................................................................................ 26
6.5 Removing Hardware..................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
6.6 Editing Properties..........................................................................................................................................................................................26
6.7 Annunciator Numbers..................................................................................................................................................................................27
6.8 Annunciator Number Sharing Rules...........................................................................................................................................................27
6.9 Editing Basic Card Properties...................................................................................................................................................................... 27
7 Editing Standard Component Properties........................................................................................................ 29
7.1 Accessing Properties.....................................................................................................................................................................................29
7.2 Editing the Unit Properties.......................................................................................................................................................................... 29
7.3 Editing the CPU..............................................................................................................................................................................................29
7.3.1 Viewing the Panel ID tab............................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
7.4 Editing the Color User Interface..................................................................................................................................................................31
7.4.1 Editing the Annuniator Settings tab........................................................................................................................................................................ 32
7.4.2 Editing the Point Editing tab......................................................................................................................................................................................33
7.4.3 Editing the Display Options tab................................................................................................................................................................................33
7.4.4 Editing the Access Levels tab....................................................................................................................................................................................34
7.5 Editing the IDNAC Power Supply.................................................................................................................................................................34
7.5.1 Editing the Data Entry tab..........................................................................................................................................................................................35
7.5.2 Editing the AuxNAC tab.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 35
7.5.3 Editing the Aux Relay tab........................................................................................................................................................................................... 36
7.6 Editing the IDNET Multiloop........................................................................................................................................................................ 37
7.6.1 Editing the IDNet Point Editing tab..........................................................................................................................................................................38
7.6.2 Editing the Loop Editing tab......................................................................................................................................................................................38
7.7 Editing the NAC Power Supply.................................................................................................................................................................... 39
7.7.1 Editing the Data Entry tab..........................................................................................................................................................................................39
4007ES and 4007ES Hybrid Fire Alarm Systems
7.7.2 Editing the NACs tab................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40

7.7.3 Editing the AuxNACs tab............................................................................................................................................................................................ 40
7.8 Editing the Zone/Relay Card........................................................................................................................................................................ 41
7.8.2 Auto Fill Window...........................................................................................................................................................................................................42
7.9 Editing the Serial DACT Card Per Point...................................................................................................................................................... 43
7.10 Editing the Event DACT Card..................................................................................................................................................................... 46
7.11 48-LED Module............................................................................................................................................................................................ 48
7.11.1 Editing the Point Editing tab................................................................................................................................................................................... 48
7.11.2 In High Level Mode................................................................................................................................................................................................... 49
7.11.3 In Low Level Mode.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 49
7.12 Editing the 4120 Network Interface Card................................................................................................................................................ 50
7.12.1 Editing the Card Properties Tab.............................................................................................................................................................................50
7.12.2 Editing the Network Info tab...................................................................................................................................................................................50
7.12.3 Editing the Service Port Tab....................................................................................................................................................................................50
7.13 ES Net topologies........................................................................................................................................................................................53
7.14 ES Net port types........................................................................................................................................................................................ 54
7.15 About Supplemental Traffic....................................................................................................................................................................... 55
7.16 Editing the ES Net Network Interface Card............................................................................................................................................. 55
7.16.1 Editing the Card Properties Tab.............................................................................................................................................................................55
7.16.2 Editing the Card Configuration tab....................................................................................................................................................................... 55
7.16.2.1 Class X Network................................................................................................................................................................................................... 55
7.16.2.2 Configuring a multiple ring network...............................................................................................................................................................56
7.16.2.3 Class B Network...................................................................................................................................................................................................58
7.16.3 Configuring a system to use the supplemental traffic channel.....................................................................................................................59
7.16.4 Pairing the network ports........................................................................................................................................................................................59
7.16.5 Ground Fault detection............................................................................................................................................................................................60
7.16.6 ES Net ports options and settings........................................................................................................................................................................ 60
7.16.7 Editing the Virtual Service Port.............................................................................................................................................................................. 61
8 Adding the IP Communicator............................................................................................................................64
8.1 Deleting an IPC.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 64
8.2 Adding an internal IPC..................................................................................................................................................................................64
8.3 Adding a close-nippled IPC.......................................................................................................................................................................... 64
8.4 Adding a remote IPC.....................................................................................................................................................................................64
9 Configuring the IP Communicator....................................................................................................................65
9.1 Editing LAN Ethernet operation.................................................................................................................................................................. 65
9.2 Editing the IP Communicator settings........................................................................................................................................................65
10 Using the Central Station Configuration Tool............................................................................................... 66
10.1 Launching Central Station Configuration Tool........................................................................................................................................ 66
10.2 Editing the general settings....................................................................................................................................................................... 66
10.2.1 Configuring the communication paths................................................................................................................................................................ 66
10.2.2 Configuring reporting settings............................................................................................................................................................................... 67
10.2.3 Configuring the e-mail server settings................................................................................................................................................................. 67
10.3 Editing Events and Points.......................................................................................................................................................................... 68
10.3.1 Editing the mapping types...................................................................................................................................................................................... 68
10.3.2 Editing the event codes........................................................................................................................................................................................... 68
10.3.3 Editing the local codes............................................................................................................................................................................................. 69
10.3.4 Editing the points...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 69
10.4 Building the configuration file and viewing reports............................................................................................................................... 69
10.4.1 Viewing reports.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 69
10.4.2 Building and downloading the configuration..................................................................................................................................................... 69
11 Editing TrueAlert Devices Properties..............................................................................................................70
11.1 Point Editing for TrueAlert Device.............................................................................................................................................................70
11.1.1 TrueAlert ES AO Appliance Point Editing............................................................................................................................................................. 70
11.1.2 TrueAlert ES VO Appliances Point Editing........................................................................................................................................................... 70
page ii 579-1167 Rev. K

11.1.3 TrueAlert ES VO-H Appliances Point Editing.......................................................................................................................................................71

11.1.4 TrueAlert ES VO-L Appliances Point Editing........................................................................................................................................................72
11.1.5 TrueAlert ES VO-LH Appliances Point Editing.....................................................................................................................................................72
11.1.6 TrueAlert ES AV Appliance Point Editing.............................................................................................................................................................. 72
11.1.7 TrueAlert ES AV-H Appliance Point Editing..........................................................................................................................................................74
11.1.8 TrueAlert ES AV-L Appliance Point Editing...........................................................................................................................................................74
11.1.9 TrueAlert ES AV-LH Appliance Point Editing....................................................................................................................................................... 75
11.1.10 ISO Options.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 76
11.1.11 Repeater Options....................................................................................................................................................................................................76
11.1.12 DCAI Options............................................................................................................................................................................................................76
11.1.13 TrueAlert STRB Appliances Point Editing...........................................................................................................................................................77
11.1.14 TrueAlert Horn Appliance Point Editing.............................................................................................................................................................77
11.1.15 TrueAlert A/V Appliances Point Editing..............................................................................................................................................................77
12 Viewing, Adding, and Editing Lists.................................................................................................................. 79
12.1 List Tab......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 79
12.2 Sort Function............................................................................................................................................................................................... 79
12.3 Custom Label Spell Check..........................................................................................................................................................................79
12.4 Managing Points......................................................................................................................................................................................... 80
12.5 Turning Autogen Off and On from the General List Tab........................................................................................................................80
12.6 Basic Operations......................................................................................................................................................................................... 81
12.7 Adding a User-Defined List........................................................................................................................................................................ 81
12.8 Editing an Existing User-Defined List....................................................................................................................................................... 81
12.9 Latching Supv Verification..........................................................................................................................................................................81
12.10 WalkTest™.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 82
12.10.1 Editing group properties....................................................................................................................................................................................... 84
12.11 Elevator Recall List.................................................................................................................................................................................... 84
12.12 Zone Lists...................................................................................................................................................................................................85
13 Custom Control.................................................................................................................................................87
13.1 Custom Control Overview..........................................................................................................................................................................87
13.2 Role of Lists and Pseudo Points................................................................................................................................................................87
13.3 Anatomy of a Custom Control Equation..................................................................................................................................................87
13.4 Using a Ladder Logic Diagram to Evaluate an Equation........................................................................................................................88
13.5 Custom Control Window............................................................................................................................................................................89
13.6 Selecting User Program..............................................................................................................................................................................90
13.7 Adding Input Statements........................................................................................................................................................................... 91
13.8 Adding Output Statements........................................................................................................................................................................91
13.9 Floor Above/Floor Below Wizard...............................................................................................................................................................92
13.10 Selecting Floor Tab....................................................................................................................................................................................93
13.11 General Information.................................................................................................................................................................................94
13.12 Specifying Floor Names........................................................................................................................................................................... 95
13.13 Specifying Input and Static Points.......................................................................................................................................................... 95
13.14 Using the Selective Signaling Wizard......................................................................................................................................................96
13.15 Selecting Selective Signaling Wizard Tab............................................................................................................................................... 96
13.16 Setting General Options...........................................................................................................................................................................97
13.17 Setting Zone Names................................................................................................................................................................................. 97
13.18 Linking Initiating and Notification Points...............................................................................................................................................98
13.19 Using the Sounder/Relay Base Wizard...................................................................................................................................................99
13.20 Activating Base on Alarm.........................................................................................................................................................................99
13.21 Common Ground Fault LED Control.................................................................................................................................................... 100
13.22 Suppression Release Introduction....................................................................................................................................................... 101
13.23 Suppression Release General Capabilities.......................................................................................................................................... 102
13.24 Applying Appliqué...................................................................................................................................................................................103
13.25 Suppression Release Device and Point Types.....................................................................................................................................103
13.26 Suppression Release Signal Responses...............................................................................................................................................105
13.27 Suppression Release Use Cases........................................................................................................................................................... 105
13.27.1 Use Case: Common Configuration...................................................................................................................................................................105
page iii 579-1167 Rev. K

13.27.2 Use Case #1: 10 Second Delay Abort............................................................................................................................................................. 106

13.27.3 Use Case #2:NYC Abort...................................................................................................................................................................................... 106
13.27.4 Use Case #3: IRI Abort........................................................................................................................................................................................ 107
13.27.5 Use Case #4: Immediate Release.....................................................................................................................................................................107
13.28 Step 1. Defining Hazard Area................................................................................................................................................................ 108
13.29 Step 2. Specifying Initial Data and Options......................................................................................................................................... 109
13.30 Step 3. Specifying Abort Switch Operation..........................................................................................................................................111
13.31 Step 4. Setting Timer Options............................................................................................................................................................... 112
13.32 Step 5. Specifying Hazard Area Points................................................................................................................................................. 113
13.33 Deleting Hazard Area............................................................................................................................................................................. 115
13.34 Editing Existing Hazard Area................................................................................................................................................................. 115
13.35 Scheduling Options for Self-Test Wizard............................................................................................................................................. 116
13.36 Step 1. Creating a New Self-Test........................................................................................................................................................... 116
13.37 Step 2. Selecting Start Time and Frequency of the Self-Test.............................................................................................................118
13.38 Step 3. Selecting Self-Test Triggering Point and Point List................................................................................................................ 119
14 File Transfer.....................................................................................................................................................121
14.1 USB File Transfer.......................................................................................................................................................................................121
14.2 Files Transferred....................................................................................................................................................................................... 122
14.3 IP File Transfer...........................................................................................................................................................................................122
14.3.1 File Transfer Connection to the PC.....................................................................................................................................................................122
14.3.2 Starting the IP File Transfer Utility.......................................................................................................................................................................123
14.3.3 IP Communication Parameter Settings............................................................................................................................................................. 124
14.3.4 Downloadable Files.................................................................................................................................................................................................126
14.3.5 Upload/Reports Tab................................................................................................................................................................................................127
14.3.6 Type of Transfer.......................................................................................................................................................................................................128
14.3.7 Launching an Ethernet Terminal session..........................................................................................................................................................128
14.3.7.1 Connecting to a panel using the Ethernet port........................................................................................................................................ 128
15 Port Vectoring................................................................................................................................................. 130
15.1 Choosing Event Groups to Route........................................................................................................................................................... 130
16 Amon Point Type............................................................................................................................................ 131
16.1 AMON Pt Type Tab....................................................................................................................................................................................131
16.2 Adding a Point Type................................................................................................................................................................................. 131
16.3 Editing a Point........................................................................................................................................................................................... 133
16.4 Deleting a Point.........................................................................................................................................................................................134
17 Adding or Editing Network Information...................................................................................................... 135
17.1 Role of the Network Programmer.......................................................................................................................................................... 135
17.2 Public Versus External Points..................................................................................................................................................................135
17.3 General Network Programming Guidelines.......................................................................................................................................... 135
17.4 4007ES Programmer Network tab..........................................................................................................................................................136
17.5 Gaining Access to the Network Information......................................................................................................................................... 137
17.6 Editing the Network Name and Node Number.................................................................................................................................... 137
17.7 Procedure to Declare Public Points........................................................................................................................................................ 138
17.8 Procedure to Declare External Points.................................................................................................................................................... 139
17.9 Programming Network Alarm Silence....................................................................................................................................................140
17.10 Programming Central Network Silence............................................................................................................................................... 140
17.11 Programming Distributed Network Silence........................................................................................................................................ 142
17.12 Programming Central Network Reset.................................................................................................................................................. 142
17.13 Programming Distributed Network Reset........................................................................................................................................... 143
17.14 Distributed Configuration......................................................................................................................................................................145
18 ULC programming requirements................................................................................................................. 147
18.1 Required Operations................................................................................................................................................................................ 147
18.1.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 147
18.1.2 Procedure..................................................................................................................................................................................................................147
18.2 Alarm Cutout Timer Feature................................................................................................................................................................... 149
page iv 579-1167 Rev. K

18.2.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 149

18.2.2 Enabling Alarm Cutout Timer...............................................................................................................................................................................149
18.2.3 Programming the LED............................................................................................................................................................................................149
18.3 Releasing Specific Controls and Indications..........................................................................................................................................151
18.3.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 151
18.3.2 Pre-Discharge LED Programming (Red LED).................................................................................................................................................... 153
18.3.3 Discharge LED Programming (RED LED)........................................................................................................................................................... 154
18.3.4 Abort Switch Active................................................................................................................................................................................................. 155
18.3.5 Abort Switch Trouble during Normal Supervisory Conditions.....................................................................................................................155
18.3.6 Releasing Service Signal Silence Programming - Optional (Pushbutton and Yellow LED).................................................................... 158
page v 579-1167 Rev. K

1 Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS Follow the instructions in this installation manual. These instructions must be followed to avoid
damage to this product and associated equipment. Product operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.
DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX™ PRODUCT THAT APPEARS DAMAGED Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect
the contents of the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim with the carrier and notify an
authorized Simplex product supplier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD Disconnect electrical field power when making any internal adjustments or repairs. All repairs should
be performed by a representative or an authorized agent of your local Simplex product supplier.
STATIC HAZARD Static electricity can damage components. Handle as follows:

• Ground yourself before opening or installing components.
• Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all times.
FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS – PART 15. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference
when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct
the interference at his own expense.
SYSTEM REACCEPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in
accordance with NFPA72® after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after any
change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to
ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change,
up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
page 7 579-1167 Rev. K

2 Getting started
The 4007ES Panel Programmer is a software program designed to create “jobs” that are used to configure and program the 4007ES
and 4007ES Hybrid Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACU). The 4007ES Panel Programmer must be installed on a computer that can be either
physically or remotely connected to the FACU.
Important: Verify FACU System Programmer, Executive, and Slave Software compatibility when installing, or replacing system compo-
nents. Refer to the Technical Support Information and Downloads website for compatibility information.
2.1 Requirements and Compatibility

Computer requirements:
The Programmer must be installed on a Computer that has the following requirements:
• Windows 7, or a more recent operating system.
• Removable media for job archives and backups.
• 1 CD-ROM drive, for access to the documentation CD.
• 1 Ethernet port or optionally 1 serial port & assorted cables for communication with the ES Panel.
Programmer Requirements:
To install and open the Programmer, the user must have the following:
• Internet access in order to download the software.
2.2 Downloading the Software

To download the 4007ES panel programmer software:
1. Connect to Internet.
2. Connect to the simplex-fire.com Tech Support website (registration is required).
3. Navigate to the Distributor Support, then Technical Support page.
4. Once in the Software Download area, click the 4007ES Hybrid. This should be the latest revision of the ES Programmer for the
4007ES panel.
5. Once the file is loaded a security warning will ask you if you wish to proceed. Click Run.
6. An authorization request to copy the file to your computer’s C Drive appears. Click OK. The file 4100ESProg will then start to
download to the C directory of your computer.
2.3 Installing the Software

To install the software:
1. Go to the computer C Drive and open the 4100ESProg folder.
2. Double click on the ES programmer executable file (.exe).
3. The Software Licensing agreement appears. Read the agreement and click Next to continue the installation.
4. A prompt window requesting the user to specify the destination folder for the programmer files appears.
- Click on the Next button to accept the default destination. It is recommended that you choose the default folder Simplex. When the
correct entry is specified, click on Next to continue.
5. Progress indicators appear, displaying the progress of the file copy operations.
6. The next prompt requests that the user restart the computer.
Note: Before restarting the computer be sure that all open files have been saved.
7. Click on Finish to restart and complete the installation.
Important: Verify the system software compatibility when installing, or replacing system components. For information about compatibility,
refer to the Software Downloads section in the Technical Support area on the Simplex Fire website: https://simplex-fire.com.
page 8 579-1167 Rev. K

2.4 Starting the Programmer

To Start the ES Panel Programmer:
1. Open the Windows Start menu.
2. Click on the All Programs menu.
3. Click on the Simplex menu item.
4. Click on the version of the ES Panel Programmer you want to open and a menu appears.
5. To start the Programmer select ES Panel Programmer from the menu.
Note: The following options are also available from the ES Panel Programmer menu:
- Compare: This option allows the user to compare job revisions.
- IP File Transfer: This option opens the IP File Transfer menu.
- Job builder: Select this option to build a Job.
- Tera Term: This option opens the Tera Term connection.
- Uninstall ES Panel Programmer: Click on this option to uninstall the ES Panel Programmer.
Figure 1: Starting the ES Panel Programmer
See page Creating Jobs for information on how to create a new job.
page 9 579-1167 Rev. K

3 User Interface
The user interface has menus, icons, tabs, sub-tabs, and a status bar that help the user navigate through the programmer and create jobs.
The following sections detail the user interface and the options associated with each item.
Figure 2: 4007ES Programmer Interface
3.1 Menus
The menus are located at the top of the ES Panel Programmer:
Consult the following tables for the description of the menu items.
Table 1: File Menu
Menu Item Description Menu Item Description
New Creates a new job. Archive Archives the job.
Open Opens an existing job. Backup Backs up the job.
Close Closes the current job. Restore Restores the previous saved version of the job.
Save Saves the current job. Export Allows the user to:
Save as Allows you to copy or rename the current • Export data to service sales tools
job.
• Export user points to text file
• Export XLG point data
Reports Generates a digital job report. Import Allow the importation of user points from another
file.
View report Brings up the latest report. DB Compare Compares the job to previous revisions of itself.
Print set up Configures the hard copy print specifications. Current Job The name of the current job.
Print Label Prints labels for the FACU cards. Exit Exits the current job.
Table 2: Edit Menu
Menu Item Description
Cut Copies and deletes the selected content.
Copy Copies the selected content.
Paste Inserts the previously cut or copied material into the selected area.
Preferences Allows the user to configure certain aspects of the programmer.
page 10 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 3: View Menu

Revision History Allows the user to enter notes about the changes made for each revision.
*Tab List* Click on the option to open the corresponding tab. The choices are:
• Panel: Allows the user to access the following sub-tabs: General Info, System Options, Access
Levels, Passcode Assignments, and Feature.
• Hardware: Allows the user to add and remove components and configure their properties.
• Point: Allows the user to edit TrueAlert devices.
• List: Allows the user to access the following sub-tabs: General List, Latching Supv Verification,
Alarm Verification, WalkTest, and Elevator Recall.
• Custom Control: Allows the components of the ES FACU to be controlled with user-definable
custom control equations.
• TrueAlert Zone: Allows the user to view the points in each TrueAlert zone.
• Port Vectoring: Allows the user to program cards to output only specific groups of events.
• AMON Pt Type: Allows the user to create custom point types.
• Zone Lists: Allows the user to view the lists sorted by zone.
Displays a mandatory and an optional checklist that lets the user know which steps have been
Checklist
completed in the programming process.
Toolbar Click in the checkbox to make the tool bar icons visible.
Status Bar Click in the checkbox to make the status bar visible.
Table 4: Tools Menu
Notes Allows the user to enter notes about the changes made for each revision.
Table 5: Build Menu
Menu Item Allows the user to:
Build Job Build the job.
View Build Log Click to view the log of previous builds for this job.
Table 6: Transfer Menu
USB Transfer the job data from the computer to the USB key.
Click on To Panel to transfer the job data to the local panel or to a remote panel (via the
Ethernet Connection
Network, if applicable)
Table 7: Terminal Menu
Enables a Ethernet Terminal session to be established to the local panel or to a remote panel
Ethernet Connection
(via the Network, if applicable)
Enable a serial connection between the FACU and the Perle Box. This option cannot be used for
Serial
panel serial downloads.
Settings Access the service port connection settings.
Table 8: Help Menu
Help Topics Click to access the 4007ES Programmer Help.
Click to access basic information, copyright of the programmer software, and the revision of the
About Programmer
programmer being used.
page 11 579-1167 Rev. K

3.2 Toolbar Icons

The toolbar icons are shortcuts to popular programmer commands. Table 9 explains each icon and the command it is attached to.
Table 9: Icons and Commands
Icon Name Allows the user to:
New Click to create a new job.
Open Click to open an existing job.
Save Click to save the current job.
Cut Click to cut the selected information from its current location.
Copy Click to copy the selected information.
Paste Click to paste cut or copied data.
Print Click to print the current job.
Build Job Click to build the current job.
File Transfer Click to initiate a file transfer.
Checklist Click to make the checklists appear.
Note Click to add a note to the job.
About Click to access basic information and copyright of the programmer software.
page 12 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 9: Icons and Commands

Icon Name Allows the user to:
Help Topics Click to access the 4007ES Online Help.
Exit Click to exit the programmer.
page 13 579-1167 Rev. K

3.3 Tabs and Sub-Tabs

Each tab represents a specific component or feature of the job that must be configured. The tabs are placed in sequential order and
should be completed in that order. Certain tabs are made up of multiple sub-tabs that are found at the bottom of the page. All sub-tabs
must be opened and configured to complete the job.
Table 10: Tab list
Icon Name Sub-Tabs Allows the user to:
Panel General Info Enter and view the general panel and branch information.
System Options Set the system options for the job.
Access Levels View the default user levels for specific tasks. Right click on the user
level to view and edit its properties.
Passcode Assignments View and edit the passcode assigned to each user level.
Features Enable or disable certain features with specific dongles and codes.
Hardware Tree View Display the panel components in a branch structure.
Grid View Display the panel components in a grid structure.
Point -NA- Display the list of all the points in the FACU.
Double click on any of the points to view and edit their properties.
List General list View all the Panel lists.

Latching Supervisory View and edit the items on the Latching Supervisory Verification list.
Verification
Alarm Verification View and edit the items on Alarm Verification list.
WALKTEST View and edit the items on the WALKTEST list.
Elevator Recall View and edit the items on the Elevator Recall list.
Custom Control Create custom control equations which allow operations to be
Custom Control
customized per job.
Floor Above/Floor Below Control the areas in which the NACs are activated.
Wizard
Selective Signaling Wizard Control the NACs that are activated.
Sounder/Relay Base Operation Customize the default operation of select smoke detectors
Wizard
TrueAlert Zone -NA- View the points in each TrueAlert zone.
Port Vectoring -NA Assign certain cards to specific groups of events.
AMON Point Type -NA- View the analog monitor (AMON) points.
Zone Lists -NA- View the lists sorted by zone.
Network Add and edit the lists of public and external points.
• Network Information
• Network Points
3.4 Status bar

The Status bar is found at the bottom of the Programmer window and indicates the:
• Programmer status
• Time
page 14 579-1167 Rev. K

4 Working with jobs

A job is a file that contains specific programming and configuration information for the FACU.
This chapter explains the basics surrounding creating and saving jobs, however, it is important to consult the section Panel Information
and Configuration, for crucial information on how to configure and program the job.
4.1 Creating Jobs

When the programmer is opened on a computer for the first time, a prompt window appears automatically requesting that the user create
a job. If a job has been previously saved on the programmer it automatically opens when the programmer is started.
To create a new job:
1. Start the ES Panel Programmer:
- If this is the first job saved for the FACU, the New Job window opens automatically.
- If a previous job opens, click on the New icon or select New from the File menu to open the New Job window.
2. In the New Job window, select the job type:
- 4007 for the addressable panel
- 4007H - for the Hybrid panel.
3. Enter the job number.
The job name should be 8 characters long and start with a number.
- Year. This is a two-digit field. Use the last two digits of the current year to indicate the year in which the job is programmed.
- Month. This is a single character field. Use the numbers and letters shown in the example below to indicate the month in which the
job is programmed. See Creating Jobs.
- File Type. This field is a single letter, used to indicate the panel type. There is currently only a single supported type.
- Number. This is a three-digit field used to track how many of a specific job type have been programmed during the month. For
example, if the File type is 4100ES, enter the number of 4100ES jobs programmed during the month.
- Job Version. When archiving a job, you can use letters to differentiate the jobs once they have been archived. For example, once job
103E123A is archived, new edits should be saved to 103E123B.
Table 11 describes the naming convention format.
Table 11: Job Naming Convention

YEAR MONTH FILE TYPE NUMBER JOB VERSION
1 = Jan E=4100ES
2 = Feb
3 = Mar
4 = Apr
5 = May
6 = Jun
7 = Jul
8 = Aug
9 = Sep
A = Oct
B = Nov
C = Dec
00 5 E 001 A
4. Select the path to the file in which the job will be stored. It is preferable that the default folder C:\4100UJOBS be used for job
storage.
4.2 Opening Existing Jobs

To open an existing job:
1. Start the ES Panel Programmer.
2. Click on the Open icon or select Open from the File menu to access the Open window.
3. Open the job’s folder. It will have the same name as the job.
4. Once in the folder, open the “.SDB4100U” file.
page 15 579-1167 Rev. K

4.3 Setting Job Preferences

To set the job preferences:
1. Once in the job, open the Edit menu and select Preferences. Preference allows the user to configure the following options:
- Job: Click on the Reload Job checkbox to automatically reload the last saved job each time you start the programmer.
- Toolbar Icon Size: Use to select large or small icons for the programmer toolbar.
- Checklist: There are two preference settings for this option.
- Reminder: If this box is selected, the programmer generates a reminder dialog each time you exit a screen whose corresponding
entry in the Programmer Task Checklist has not been marked as complete. For example, if you view the General Information tab and
its checklist entry is not marked as complete, the programmer will ask whether you want to mark the task as complete when you exit
the screen.
- Build Warning: Attempting to build a job when all mandatory checklist tasks are not marked as complete causes the programmer to
generate warning messages in the job builder screen.
- Default Central Station Email Address: This option allows you to set the default central station email address used by a per point
SDACT. The address that you enter here automatically appears in the email address field of the SDACT card's programming screen.
Note: This option does not apply to the IP Communicator. See Using the Central Station Configuration Tool.
- Report Print Cover page: Select this box so that a cover page is printed with every report.
- Editing Allow mixed case labels (non-English jobs only): This option is made to accommodate the characteristics of non-English
languages.
2. Click on OK once all the options are set.
4.4 Job Notes

To leave a note for the job on the programmer:
1. Once in the job, either click on the Notes icon or open the Tool menu and select Notes.
2. The Notes window opens and the user can type in relevant job notes.
These notes are saved with the job for future reference.
4.5 Saving Jobs

There are two saving options in the programmer, Save and Save As. The Save option is used to save the job in progress, the Save As option
is used to save the job with a new name.
To save a job with Save:
• Click on the Save icon.
• Open the Edit menu and click on the Save option.
Note: When you click on the save option, the programmer overwrites the previous information and there is no way to backtrack to the
previous job.
To save a job with Save As:

1. Open the File menu and click on the Save As option.
2. Select either the Copy option or the Rename option:
- Copy: This option saves a copy of the currently open job under a new name in a new directory. This option allows you to open and
reuse the previous version.
- Rename: This option saves the job under a new name and deletes the content of the previous job folder. For example, if a user
renames job 333 as job 444, a new job folder named 444 appears and the job folder 333 is empty.
Note: Conventionally, performing a Save As > Copy is the first action a technician takes when opening an existing job to create a new
revision. This way, if complications arise, the technician can return to the previously saved revision.
page 16 579-1167 Rev. K

4.6 Building a Job

A job needs to be “built” before it can be downloaded. This process transforms the .SDB file into a CFIG file that is compatible with the
FACU.
Note: All configuration options and panel information must be complete before building the job. Any errors detected during the build will
abort the process.
To build a job:
1. Open the job.
2. Make the programming changes.
3. Start the build by either clicking on the Build icon or by selecting the Build item from the Build menu.
4. The Revision History window appears and the user must enter:
- Their name.
- A brief description of the edits that were made to the current revision.Once the information has been entered click on OK.
5. The Job Builder window then appears and displays all the elements in the job and their build status.
Once the compilation is complete, the final dialogue in the window will read either:
- Build Complete: This means the build has been successful and the job is ready to be downloaded to the FACU.
- Build Aborted: This means that errors were found while the job was being built and that the job build was aborted. The errors that
caused the job to abort are listed in the Job Builder window.
4.7 System Requirements
4.8 Archiving a Job

Once a job is archived, it is saved as a read-only .SDA4100U file that can no longer be opened for editing. To archive a job:
1. Save the job.
2. Open the Edit menu and click on the Archive menu item.
3. The Programmer Archive Utility window opens and requests that the user name the file and select the directory to which the file
will be saved.
4. Click on Archive. A progress meter appears, showing the progress of the operation. When this bar disappears, the archive
operation is complete. The archived file is saved as .SDA4100U.
4.8.1 Opening an archived file

1. Open the File menu and click on the Restore menu item.
2. The Programmer Restore Utility window opens. Use the Look In search box to locate the archived file.
3. Once the file is located, click on it so that its name appears in the File Name box.
4. Click on Continue.
5. The Browse for Folder window appears and requires that the user select the directory and file to which the file will be restored. It
is recommended to use the 4100UJOB Folder.
6. If a file with that name already exists, the user will be prompted to:
- Overwrite the existing file
- Rename the file
- Cancel the operation: This will result in an error file and the programmer will return to the last saved job.
7. The archived file will then open as a read-only job. To save the job as a different version in the 4100U folder, the user must use
the Save As function.
4.9 Backing up a job

Backing up a job creates a compressed version of the job and stores it as a read/writable .SDC4100U file on either a removable storage
medium or a remote disk.
To back up a job:
1. Open the File menu and select the Backup menu item.
2. The Programmer Backup Utility window opens and requests that the user name the file and select the directory to which the file
will be saved.
3. Click on Backup. A progress meter appears, showing the progress of the operation. When this bar disappears, the backup is
complete.
page 17 579-1167 Rev. K

4.9.1 Restoring a Backup file

To restore a Backup file
1. Open the File menu and click on the Restore menu item.
2. The Programmer Restore Utility window opens.
Use the Look In search box to locate the backup file.
3. Once the file is located, click on it so that its name appears in the File Name box.
4. Click on Continue.
5. The Browse for Folder window appears and requires that the user select the directory and file to which the file will be restored.
6. If a file with that name already exists, the user will be prompted to:
- Overwrite the existing file
- Rename the file
- Cancel the operation
7. The backup file will then open as normal job.
page 18 579-1167 Rev. K

5 Panel Information and Configuration

This section focuses on items found in the Panel tab. Information in this section must be completed and the options must be configured
before the job is successfully built.
5.1 Notice to users, Installers, AHJ, and other Involved Parties

This product incorporates field programmable software. In order for the product to comply with the Standard for Control Units and
Accessories for Fire alarm systems, UL864, certain programming features or options must be limited to specific values or not used at all as
indicated in Table 12.
Table 12: Programming Features and Options
Program Feature Permitted in Settings Permitted
Possible Settings
or Option UL864? (Y/N) by UL
AC Fail delayed reporting to the central station Yes 1, 2, or 3 hours
Editing group properties DC group tab ON until completion
Yes ON until RESET ON until completion
ON until SILENCE
3.1
2.6
Editing Custom Control equations that change 3.1
2.2
sensitivity levels (set Alarm Thresholds) for ISN- 550 Yes 2.6
Photo smoke detectors 1.8
2.2
1.4
1.0
LVSUPV - Latching Verified Supervisory Smoke
No
Detector
LVSDUCT - Latching Verified Supervisory Duct
No
Smoke Detector
MACOFIRE - Carbon COFIRE, COPRI2 COSUPV
Yes
Monoxide Fire Algorithm COSUPV, UTILITY UTILITY
Immediate Release (No Delay),
Immediate Release (No Delay),
10 Second Delay,
Suppression Release Wizard Yes 10 Second Delay, System
System Reset after GREATER of Reset after GREATER of
remaining time or 10s, IRI Abort,
Remaining time or 10s
Reset Original Time Delay, NYC
Enabled/Disabled (60-3600
Alarm Cutout Timer Yes 60 seconds or greater
seconds)
5.2 Panel Information

Panel information provides identification reference for the technicians who created the jobs.
To enter the panel information:
1. Click on the Panel tab and select the General Information sub-tab.
2. Fill out the information requested on the page:
- Panel Information: This section requests information about the panel.
- Branch Information: This section requests information about the branch of the company and other useful information.
- Programmed by: This section requests information about the people who programmed the FACU (branch, customer information).
- Hardware Edit Lock: When this option is checked, the user cannot add or remove any hardware.
- Comment: Enter any comments about this specific FACU.
5.3 System Options

ES System Options are global attributes that allow the user to configure specific application options as well as configure certain elements
of the panel's display.
To access the System Options screen:
1. Click on the Panel tab and select the System Options sub-tab.
2. Configure the options that appear on the page.
page 19 579-1167 Rev. K

The following tables list and define the different options.
Table 13: General System Options

Description
Option
(“dflt” indicates the default setting)
Date Format
dflt
- Select MM-DD-YY for the panel to display the date by month, day, and year (example: January 4th
2013 = 01-04-13).
- Select DD-MM-YY for the panel to display the date by day, month, and year (example: January 4th
2013 = 04-01-13).
dflt
Time Format - Select 12 Hour for the panel to display the time as “a.m.” and “p.m.” (example: 6:00 a.m., 6:00 p.m.)
- Select 24 Hour for the panel to display the time on a 24h clock (example: 6h00, 18h00.)
dflt
Unit Format - Select Fahrenheit for the panel to display Imperial units.
o
(example: 96 F, 6 ft)
- Select Centigrade for the panel to display Metric units.
o
(example: 36 C, 1.83 m)
- Select Global acknowledge to allow every point reporting the same alarm state (alarm,
dfl
Acknowledge Option
trouble, priority 2, or supervisory condition) to be acknowledged at once by pressing the according
Acknowledge button. (Example: If 5 Trouble conditions are present on the system and global
acknowledge is enabled, one press of the Trouble Ack button acknowledges all five Troubles at the
same time.)
- Select Individual Acknowledge to ensure that each point reporting an alarm state must be
acknowledged individually. (example: If five Trouble conditions are present, acknowledge each one
individually.)
Standard Select the system listing standard. The options are:
dfl
- None
- UL (US)
- ULC (Canada)
Service Reset Select Service Reset to allow an operator to reset the system even though the device causing the alarm
has not restored to normal.
The typical application for this would be when a malfunctioning initiating device (detector or sensor
consisting of a base and removable head) causes an alarm, but will not reset even though the off-normal
condition is no longer present. With this option enabled, the head can be removed and the system
(including the local energy masterbox, if provided) can be reset. Without this option enabled, removing the
head will cause the system to abort the reset because it will not have seen the alarmed point/zone having
restored to a normal state, and it will not be possible to reset the local energy masterbox. The default
setting for this option is disabled.
Combined Alarm and If checked, pressing the Reset button performs an alarm reset followed by a hardware reset. If this
Hardware Reset option is not selected, an alarm reset is performed if there are fire alarms or supervisories in the system.
Otherwise, a hardware reset is performed.
Display First Alarm When this option is selected, the display alternates between the summary screen (with the number of
active alarms, troubles, etc.) and the screen showing detailed information on the first alarm received by the
system.
If this option is not selected, the screen indicating the number of alarm conditions on the system is
displayed.
page 20 579-1167 Rev. K


Description
Option
Non Steady Audible When enabled, this option allows you to select the type of operation for Non Steady Audible Evacuation
Evac Signals. The term Non Steady Audible Evacuation Signal refers to any Notification Appliance capable of
sounding a coded signal. The default setting for this option is not enabled. Choices are:
- California Code 1. A coding pattern consisting of 12 beats within a 10 second span of time, followed
by a 2 ½ second pause. This sequence repeats four times (four rounds) and then terminates (i.e., the
total coding pattern lasts approximately one minute).
- California Code 3. Same coding pattern as California Code 1, however the sequence repeats
12 times (12 rounds) and then terminates (i.e., the total coding pattern lasts approximately three
minutes).
- Fast March Time. A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of ¼ second
pulse on, ¼ second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
13.6.2.1 ítem 26 - March Time. A coded signal that uses 60 beats per minute. Each beat consists of ½ second pulse on,
½ second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
- Slow March Time. A coded signal that uses 20 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1.5 second
pulse on, 1.5 second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
- Temporal 4. A CO gas warning that is a repeated sequence of four cycles of 100 msec on with 100
msec off, followed by 5 seconds off.
- Temporal. A three-pulse coding pattern consisting of three ½ second pulses, each separated by a ½
second silence. Each three pulse group is separated by 1 ½ seconds of silence. Pattern repeats until
alarm silence.
- On Steady.
Note: If the coding pattern selected here is not supported by the notification appliance, it will be replaced
by a default one.
Non Steady Visual When enabled, this option allows you to select the flash pattern output by Non Steady Visual Signals. The
Evac term Non Steady Visual Signal refers to any Visual Notification Appliance capable of emitting a pattern of
flashes (such as incandescent visuals). The default setting for this option is not enabled.
Choices are:
- March Time. A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of ¼ second pulse
on, ¼ second off.
- Slow March Time. A coded signal that uses 20 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1½ second
pulse on, 1½ second off.
- Temporal. A three-pulse coding pattern consisting of three ½ second pulses, each separated by a ½
second silence. Each three pulse group is separated by 1 ½ seconds of silence.
Note: This option cannot be used for public mode signaling as defined in Section 4-4 of NFPA 72-99.
Alarm Cutout Timer With this option you can set a duration (up to 60 minutes) that specifies how long signals sound following
an alarm. For example, with this option set at 3 minutes, building signals sound for three minutes and then
automatically stop. After the signals stop, the alarm condition remains active at the panel.
If Alarm Silence/Reset Inhibit option is active, it takes precedence over this option. See description of
Alarm Silence/Reset Inhibit below for more information.
The range for this option is 60-3600 seconds. The default value is 180 seconds. The default setting for this
option is not enabled. Set the point type for visual NACS to SVISUAL to have them turn off at the same
time as the audible signals.
Note: See Appendix A for ULC Programming requirements when using this feature for ULC applications.
This option disables the Alarm Silence and System Reset buttons for a user-definable duration that
ranges from 1 to 60 minutes. The timer is activated only by the first alarm (i.e., subsequent alarms do not
reset the timer).
Alarm Silence/ Reset If this option and the Alarm Cutout Timer are both enabled, this option takes precedence. For example, if
Inhibit the Alarm Cutout Timer is set to one minute and this option is set to 2 minutes, signals continue to sound
after one minute.
The default setting is not enabled.
Note: This option must be enabled for Canadian jobs.
page 21 579-1167 Rev. K


Description
Option
Door Drop on AC Fail Option is grayed out
Door Drop on Alarm Option is grayed out
AC Failure Delay Specifies the time delay (HH:MM) in reporting an AC failure trouble to the city circuit (if AC fail is the only
trouble) or Central Station if an SDACT is installed.
Note: This feature does not apply to the IP Communicator.

The time and date that appeared on the panel before the CFIG DOWNLOAD are automatically set after
Auto Set Panel Time
download is complete. This option will not work if the time/date was not set prior to the download (i.e.
and Date
system time/date invalid trouble at the panel).
Table 14: Active Status Reminder System Options
Option Description
Fire Reminder The Fire Reminder option programs the system to periodically sound the piezo if an uncleared Alarm
condition exists at the panel, thereby reminding system operators about the uncleared condition.
By default, this option is enabled and the Resound Time is set to 8:00.
To modify the Active Status Reminder settings, do the following:
a. Make sure the box labeled Enabled is checked.
b. Set the interval at which the piezo should sound. The range is from 0 to 18 hours. The
default is 8 hours.
Pri2 Reminder The Pri2 Reminder option programs the system to periodically sound the piezo if an uncleared Priority 2
Alarm (security) condition exists at the panel, thereby reminding system operators about the uncleared
condition.
default is 8 hours.
Supv Reminder The Supv Reminder option programs the system to periodically sound the piezo if an uncleared
supervisory condition exists at the panel, thereby reminding system operators about the uncleared
condition.
default is 8 hours.
Trbl Reminder The Trbl Reminder option programs the system to periodically sound the piezo if an uncleared Trouble
condition exists at the panel, thereby reminding system operators about the uncleared condition.
default is 8 hours.
Local If there is a per point serial DACT in the system, this setting specifies whether the piezo on the local panel
Annunciation will sound. This option is useful in situations where the panel is located in a public area (such as a lobby)
and the occupant does not want the piezo repeatedly sounding.
Note: This feature does not apply to the IP Communicator.
page 22 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 15: Recurring Trouble Filter System Options

Option Description
General Description: These options stop a recurring trouble event from continuously dialing the central station or from generating
SafeLINC email events if the programmed criteria are met (number of occurrences of that point in the trouble log within the specified
elapsed time frame).
Number of times the point is found in the Trouble log (0=no filtering; default for pre-existing jobs upgraded to
Occurrences
12.06). Value is selectable from 0 and 2 to 10. By default, it is set to 3.
Number of minutes in which the Troubles must be found. Value is selectable from 1 to 1440 minutes. By
Elapsed Time
default, it is set to 60.
Table 16: Addressable Appliances Preferred Default System Options

Option System Options
General Description: This option allows System Options to be selected for TrueAlert ES appliances that can be configured
identically or independently through the ES Programmer software.
To use the System Options to configure TrueAlert ES appliances:
- The appliance's jumpers and configuration switches must be set to the correct setting. For example, if a specific candela value
is selected in the system options, the device should be set to FACP. On the other hand, if system option is set to “Hardware”, the
candela flag at the device should be set to any other position than FACP.
- The appliance's candela and coding type in the power supply's Point Editing tab in the programmer must be set to "System
Default".
When a specific candela value is selected, that value applies to all compatible appliances that have their configuration switches set to
FACP*.
When Hardware Specified is selected, it is the appliance's locally configured candela value that is used.
Candela - cd - cd - cd - Hardware
- cd - cd - Weather Proof 75 cd Specified
- cd - cd - Weather Proof 185 cd
Note: When a specific candela value is selected, a warning window appears to notify the user that in the event that an appliance can-
not be set to the selected Preferred Default System Option, a compatible default value is assigned to the device by the programmer.
For example: If the System Option is set to 20 cd and there is a UL Weatherproof device (that has no 20 cd setting), the Programmer
assigns a value of WP75 cd to the UL weatherproof device.
Table 17: Addressable Appliances Preferred Default System Options,

Value for Indoor Value for
Assigned Candela Value Value for Weatherproof, UL
Appliances Weatherproof, ULC
15 cd 15 cd 15 cd 20 cd
20 cd 30 cd WP75 cd 20 cd
30 cd 30 cd WP75 cd 30 cd
75 cd 75 cd 75 cd 75 cd
110 cd 110 cd WP185 cd 75 cd
135 cd 135 cd WP185 cd 75 cd
185 cd 185 cd WP185 cd 75 cd
WP75 cd 75 cd WP75 cd 75 cd
WP185 cd 185 cd WP185 cd 75 cd
HARDWARE Device candela jumper setting determines the output.
Table 18: Compatible Alert Tone Value

Assigned Tone Compatible Tone for Appliances
Broadband / 520HZ / Slow Whoop / Bell / Siren / Hi / Lo / Chime /
Temporal coding and Broadband tone.
Hardware Specified
5.4 User Access Level Configuration

User access levels can be configured on the programmer for display functions to determine their access level.
page 23 579-1167 Rev. K

Each access level automatically has access to the level below it. For example, a technician authorized for level 1 is only able to access
functions that are tagged as level 1. A technician with a level 3 authorization level however, has access to functions tagged as levels 1, 2 and
3.
Note: Passcodes can be attributed to user levels 2, 3, and 4 to restrict the access to certain functions. For more information consult the
Passcode Configuration section.
To associate user levels with a display function:
1. Click on the Panel tab and select the Access Levels sub-tab.
2. Double click on the table entry to open its Object Properties window.
3. Select one of four user levels for the display function.
Basic display functions, such as System Reset and Change Time and Date, are usually assigned to user level 1. More sensitive display
functions, such as Remote Download, are typically assigned to user level 2, 3, or 4.
4. Click on OK to confirm the selection.
5.5 Passcode Configuration

Numeric passcodes can be created to grant specific access level to up to 20 different operators.
Each access level automatically has access to the level below it. For example, a technician authorized for level 1 is only able to access
functions that are tagged as level 1. A technician with a level 3 authorization level however, has access to functions tagged as levels 1, 2,
and 3.
To create a passcode:
1. Click on the Panel tab and select the Passcode Assignments sub-tab.
2. Double-click on a table entry to open Object Properties window.
3. Enter a passcode, composed of up to ten numbers.
4. Assign the access level to the passcode.
5.6 Features Configuration

The Features sub-tab provides information on the functionalities of the ES Panel Programmer which can be used with the software key
currently plugged into the Programmer PC.
To configure the functionalities:
1. Click on the Panel tab and select the Features sub-tab.The usable features are listed in the Programmer/Runtime Features
window.
2. To enable the options under Programmer and Runtime on the left panel, enter the software key provided by an authorized
Simplex representative with the appropriate access codes.
3. Click on Update Access Codes to complete the action.
Note: This sub-tab also prompts the user to enter the CPU Number. To get the CPU number, from the panel, press on Menu >
System info > Panel Serial Number. Enter the number in the designated box.
page 24 579-1167 Rev. K

6 Specifying Hardware Components

The hardware components that are part of the FACU must be entered into the programmer so that the user can configure their properties
according to the job requirements.
This chapter explains how to add and remove the hardware elements that are entered into the programmer.
6.1 Hardware Tab Overview

The Hardware Tab Window uses a drag and drop interface, consisting of a palette of available icons on the right-hand side of the screen
and a work area on the left-hand side of the screen. There are two available views:
• Tree View: This view displays the hardware in a branch structure. The hardware appears linked to the bay into which it is installed.
• Grid View: This view displays the hardware in a grid structure and groups the hardware by type. This view also features search and
sorting options for elements already added to the FACU.
Table 19 lists the available hardware icons and their descriptions.
Table 19: Hardware Tab Icons
Icon Meaning
Panel Icon This icon permanently resides in the top left corner of the work area. The panel icon represents all of the non-
networked, RUI-linked components controlled by a single CPU. A single panel may, for example, actually be multiple
boxes, some residing at one location and some at another location.
Highlighting this icon and hitting Shift-Right Arrow at the same time expands the entire hardware tree.
Unit Icon The unit icon does not represent actual equipment. It corresponds to a location at which the box resides.
Click on the + sign to expand the contents of a unit and see the box.
Box Icon The box icon typically represents a standard bay box. There is also an option that represents a custom box.
Click on the + sign to expand the contents of the box.
Logical Card Icon Logical cards are not hardware; instead they represent all of the analog pseudo points, digital pseudo points, or
lists used on the system.
Double click on the card to access its properties.
Physical Card Icon Physical cards are actual hardware, including: monitor, signal, relay, annunciator, display, interface, and power
cards.
LED Module Icon This icon represents the fixed-48 LED Module. The module is installed directly in a recess of the dress panel.
6.2 Adding Hardware

There are two ways to add a hardware component to the programmer:
• Drag and drop
• Right click + add
To add a hardware component to the programmer using drag and drop:
1. Locate the hardware component that you want to add from the Available Hardware window on the right of the programmer
screen.
2. Click on the hardware and drag it into the Hardware Configuration window on the left of the programmer screen, into the proper
directory:
- Units must be placed in panel icons.
- Boxes must be placed in units.
- Cards must be placed in boxes.
3. When the component is in the proper place, release the mouse. If the component was successfully added, it appears in the
Hardware Configuration menu. If the component cannot be added to the configuration, an error message appears with the
problem diagnosis.
To add a hardware component to the programmer using click + add:
page 25 579-1167 Rev. K

1. Right click in the Hardware component window.

An action list appears.
2. Select the type of hardware you want to add to the programmer from the action list:
- Add Unit: The Unit Properties box automatically opens.
- Add Box: The Add Box window opens and displays the available boxes.
- Add Card: The Add Card window opens. Use the drop-down menus to select the card you want to add. If the card cannot be added
to the configuration, an error message appears with the problem diagnosis.
To add multiple boxes or cards at one time, use the right-click method. Specify the number of boxes/cards to add in the Quantity field.
6.3 Adding a City/Relay Card

To add a City/Relay card:
1. In the Hardware Configuration window, double click on the IDNAC or the NAC power supply component.
2. Click on the Data Entry tab.
3. Select the radio button that corresponds to the card you want to add (City connect or Relay).
6.4 Adding the Additional IDNet Loops

To add additional loops in the IDNet expansion loop card:
1. In the Hardware Configuration window, double click on IDNAC power supply, then double click on IDNet+ Multiloop.
2. Click on the Loop Editing tab.
3. Select the first unused card 2: loop B isolator.
4. Change the device type to Isolator/Expanded point capacity.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 with the second unused card 2: loop C isolator.
6.5 Removing Hardware

To remove hardware components from the programmer:
1. Locate the hardware component in the Hardware Configuration window.
2. Right click on the hardware to open the action list.
3. Select Delete.
4. A warning message appears warning you that deleting a hardware component deletes all references to that component. Click
Yes if you wish to continue. If the component cannot be deleted, a second warning appears with the specifics of why the
component cannot be deleted.
Note: Before deleting a hardware component, it is important to evaluate that component’s role in the programmer and make
sure that all other elements attached to that component have been redirected.
6.6 Editing Properties

To access the Properties dialog, right click on a Unit icon in the work area and then click on Properties. For more information on the cards
and modules’ Properties window, refer to Chapter 6. For the Box Properties window, refer to Figure 3.
• Description: Enter descriptive text for the unit.
• AC Breaker Location: Enter the location of the breaker to which the power supplies within the unit's boxes connect.
Figure 3: Box Properties Window
page 26 579-1167 Rev. K

6.7 Annunciator Numbers

Every card in a 4007ES Panel job must have an associated annunciator number, whether it is an annunciator or not. Annunciator numbers
are assigned in the following manner: when a new unit is added to a job, the unit is assigned the next available annunciator number.
When the first annunciator card is added to such a unit, it also assumes the unit's annunciator number.
As additional annunciators are added to the unit, there are several cases where the annunciators share their annunciator numbers. Any
additional annunciator cards of the same type added to the same unit also shares this number.
When an additional annunciator card of a different type is added to the unit, that annunciator card is given an annunciator number distinct
from the number assigned to the earlier annunciator type.
A card’s annunciator number is important for correct LED Switch operation. For example, a lamp test switch only lights lamps/LED on cards
with the same annunciator number.
Exception to the rules above:
• Internal and external LCD Annunciators require their own annunciator number and do not share numbers even with their own kind.
6.8 Annunciator Number Sharing Rules

These rules apply to the annunciator sharing arrangement:
AN Rule 1 - The CPU is annunciator number 0.
AN Rule 2 - Annunciators of the same type in the same unit share annunciator numbers.
6.9 Editing Basic Card Properties

All cards, regardless of whether they are the standard system cards (such as the system power supply) or an option card, include the basic
properties. The basic card properties are listed below.
• Card Address. A unique number used to identify the card within the system. This number must correspond to the card address dip
switch settings on the card.
- Address 001 IDNAC/NAC power supply
- Address 002 IDNet and multiloop
- Address 003 Color user interface
Note: It is usually easier to first add the card to the job with the programmer and then set the dip switches with the address automatically
assigned by the programmer.
• Card Custom Label. This field describes the card's function, location, or some other descriptive text.
• Unit, Box, Bay, and Block (location). The values shown in the fields reflect the location in which the card icon was placed when you
added it with the programmer. It is possible to change these values; however, the new values must reflect the new physical location of
the card.
• Symbolic ID. The values shown in this field provide a quick reference for the user, for example, M3 and SIG4. They represent the
IDNAC or IDNET channels on the card. The symbolic ID field is present in card properties that contain the IDNET or IDNAC channels.
They can be remembered, or not, depending on user choice when the card numbers in the system are changed.
To gain access to the Card Properties dialog, do either of the following:
• Double click on any card icon in the work area.
• Right click on any card in the work area. When the list of choices appears, click on Properties.
A window similar to Figure 4 appears.
page 27 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 4: Card Properties Window - Color User Interface shown as example

Edit these fields as follows:
• Enter a descriptive name in the Card Custom Label field.
• Use the Unit, Box, Bay, and Location (block) fields to change this information if necessary. If you specify invalid information (for
example, attempt to assign a card to a fully populated bay), the programmer outputs an error message to indicate the problem.
page 28 579-1167 Rev. K

7 Editing Standard Component Properties

4007ES FACUs come equipped with a standard set of hardware components. This chapter details the programming for those cards.
7.1 Accessing Properties

1. Open the Hardware tab.
2. Select the hardware component from the Hardware Configuration window and double-click on it to open the editing window.
7.2 Editing the Unit Properties

Each 4007ES set-up automatically requires a unit in the programmer.
To edit the unit:
The Unit Window requests that the user enters the following information:
• Description: Enter a description that identifies the particular FACU.
• AC Breaker Location: Enter the location of the breaker that powers the unit’s power supply.
7.3 Editing the CPU

The 4007 CPU window has the four following tabs, Card Properties, Service Port, Ethernet, and Panel ID.
To edit the Card Properties tab (Figure 5):
Enter the card’s custom label. This label should make the card easily identifiable.
The following fields in the tab are filled by the programmer and cannot be edited:
• Card address
• Card description
• Card default label
• Annunciator address
• Unit number
• Box number
• Bay number
• Location
To edit the Service Port tab (used as an output for ExacTech and TrueInsight):
1. Configure the communication settings by selecting the Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, and Stop Bits fields to the values required by
the attached device. It is recommended that you use the following default settings whenever possible.
- Baud Rate: 115,200
- Data Bits: 8
- Stop Bits: 1
- Parity: None
2. Click on the Port Data button. The RS323 Port Data Entry window opens (Figure 5).
3. Click the Gen. Info tab. Enter the information requested. Click on Apply and then OK to confirm the selection (Figure 5).
- Device Type: For a CPU card service port, this field is permanently set to COMMAND.
- Header Label: This field specifies the first line of banner text that appears at the top of the CRT screen.
- Port ID Label: This field specifies the second line of banner text that appears at the top of the CRT screen. It is typically used to
designate the port connection. For example, “Port 2, Command Center.”
page 29 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 5: 4007 CPU - Gen Info Tab

- Port Default SET Priority CPU Card Only: This is the system priority level assigned to commands issued from the service port. The
range is 2 to 15 and the default is 9.
4. Click on the Access Level tab in the RS232 Port Data Entry window (Figure 6). This tab allows you to set the access level for
the various system operations that can be carried out via the service port. To set an access level for one of the service port
operations, scroll through the list of functions and highlight the function. Use this control to associate an access level with the
function. Click on Apply and then OK to confirm the selection.
Figure 6: 4007 CPU Access Levels and Port Options

Note: These access levels apply only to actions performed through the service port, not for operations made at the panel dis-
play.
5. Click on the Port Options tab in the RS232 Port Data Entry window. This tab contains options that apply to the way data appears
on the display connected to the service port. These are read-only fields. Click OK to return to the Service Port tab.
6. Click in the TrueInsight Remote Service Gateway box to enable the use of the Remote Service Gateway.
To edit the Ethernet tab:
1. Click the Use Default box or enter the name that the building network has attributed to the FACU.
2. Click on Apply to confirm the selection.
7.3.1 Viewing the Panel ID tab

Click the Panel ID tab to display the unique identifier for the currently loaded job.
page 30 579-1167 Rev. K

7.4 Editing the Color User Interface

The Color User Interface window has five main tabs to edit. The Card Properties tab, Annunciator Settings tab, the Point Editing tab, the
Display Options tab, and the Access Level tab.
To edit the Card Properties tab:
1. Enter the card’s custom label. This label should make the card easily identifiable.
2. If required, select a unit, a box, and a bay number.
• Card address
• Location
page 31 579-1167 Rev. K

7.4.1 Editing the Annuniator Settings tab

To edit the Annunciator Settings tab
The annunciator settings for a remote color touchscreen LCD annunciator determine the operation of the keyswitch. By default, the
operations are disabled, except:
• Fire Alarm Display/scrolling
• Supervisory display/scrolling
• Disable display scrolling
To set the properties:
1. Click on the Hardware tab.
2. Expand the unit, the box, and the bay combination in which the annunciator resides.
3. Double click on the annunciator's icon.
Figure 7: Color User Interface - Annunciator Settings Tab
4. Click on the Annunciator Setting tab, see Figure 7.

5. This sheet has a series of rows on the left, identifying the functions that can be performed from the annunciator. Each row has
two checkboxes: Keyswitch Required and Override on Alarm. Check or uncheck these boxes, using the following guideline.
- Keyswitch Required. A checkmark in the Keyswitch Required box to the right of a function's row indicates the function is ignored
unless a key is inserted in the annunciator's key switch and the position of the key is on.
- Override on Alarm. A checkmark in the Override on Alarm box to the right of a function's row indicates that if the Key Switch
Required box is checked, the key switch is not required during an alarm situation.
page 32 579-1167 Rev. K

7.4.2 Editing the Point Editing tab

To edit the Point Editing tab:
For each control key:
1. Select a switch mode from the drop-down list.
2. Enter a reference address. Press F9 to access the TagList window.
3. Edit the point’s custom label if required. This label should make the point easily identifiable.
4. Check the Invert Pushbutton State box to switch down the point.
Figure 8: Color User Interface - Point Editing Tab

- Reference Label
- Point
- Point Type
For each LED:
1. Select the appropriate mode from the drop-down list.
2. Enter a reference address.
Note: Depending on the switch mode, a LED can be associated to a control key. To do so, the reference address of the LED must
be the same as the reference address of the control key.
3. Select the appropriate point type from the drop-down list.
a. The default point type for the first two LED points are LEDRED
b. The default point type for the third LED point is LEDGREEN
4. Edit the point’s custom label if required. This label should make the point easily identifiable.
• Reference Label
• Point
• Invert Pushbutton State (grayed out)
7.4.3 Editing the Display Options tab

To edit the Display Options tab: If needed, check the Reverse Display of custom label and status line. To use custom external files for the
primary and/or the alternate MsgLib:
1. Click on Import.
2. Browse to import the appropriate MsgLib.
3. Click on Open.
4. Edit the Name and Date fields.
page 33 579-1167 Rev. K

By default, the System is Normal image is displayed. To edit this image:

1. Check the Enable Custom Image check box.
2. Click on Import Image...
3. Browse to select the appropriate image.
4. Click on Open > Apply
Figure 9: Color User Interface - Display Options
7.4.4 Editing the Access Levels tab

To edit the Access Levels tab:
The Access Level tab of the color user interface card cannot be edited. You can view the access level for the various functions in the
system, but cannot change them.
Figure 10: Color User Interface - Access Levels
7.5 Editing the IDNAC Power Supply

The IDNAC Power Supply is part of the 4007ES Hardware Configuration. It has five main tabs to edit. The Card Properties tab, the Data
Entry tab, the AuxNAC tab, the Aux Relay tab, and the Point Editing tab. For more information on the 4007ES Hybrid power supply, refer to
the Editing the NAC Power Supply section.
• Card address
page 34 579-1167 Rev. K


• Unit number
• Box number
• Bay number
• Location
7.5.1 Editing the Data Entry tab

To edit the Data Entry tab:
1. Configure the Depleted Battery Cutout option. If selected, the power supply card shuts itself off after detecting a depleted battery
condition when no AC power is present. If this option is selected, a jumper must be installed on the power supply (on S527), for
Canadian operation. It is unselected by default.
2. Select the optional cards that are connected to the power supply card. The choices are:
- None
- City Connect
- Relay
Figure 11: IDNAC - Data Entry Tab

3. Click in the 25V Regulator box if a 25V regulator card, 4007-9802, is used with the FACU.
4. Click OK to confirm the selection.
7.5.2 Editing the AuxNAC tab

To edit the AuxNAC tab:
1. Select a point type from the drop-down menu.
2. Edit the AuxNAC point type custom label. This label should make the point easily identifiable.
3. Click on Apply > OK to confirm the edits.
page 35 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 12: IDNAC - AuxNAC Tab
7.5.3 Editing the Aux Relay tab

To edit the Aux Relay tab:
1. Select a point type from the dropdown menu.
2. Edit the Aux Relay point type custom labels. This label should make the point easily identifiable.
3. Click on Apply > OK to confirm the edits.
Figure 13: IDNAC - Aux Relay Tab

1. Select the card options you want to apply to the devices added to the IDNAC Power Supply.The choice are:
- Code Candela Rating on Magnet with Test Mode off
- LEDs Blink when polled
2. Configure the devices that are attached to the IDNAC Power Supply.
page 36 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 14: IDNAC - Point Editing Tab
3. Depending on the selected device, enter the required information in the Properties section. Consult Chapter 7 for the details on
how to edit points for TrueAlert devices.
- ISO: Custom label
- Repeater: Custom label, Depleted battery cutout, Repeater operation (Class B Spur, Class A Spur, Class A Loop)
- DCAI: Custom label, Loop 1 address (filled by the programmer)
- Loop 2 address: Unused, need to be assigned by the person programming the panel
- Custom Label
- TrueAlertES Appliances: AV (Audible/Visual), VO (Visual Only), AO (Audible Only)
- TrueAlert Appliances: STRB, Horn, A/V, ASTRB
7.6 Editing the IDNET Multiloop

The IDNet Multiloop can contain up to 250 points. The card has three main tabs to edit. The Card Properties tab, the Point Editing tab, and
the Loop Editing tab.
2. Click in the box beside the following functions to activate them:
- Only activate TrueAlarm device LEDs
- Activate Signal IAM LEDs
• Card address
• Unit number
• Box number
• Bay number
• Location
• Total of configured points
• Total of available points
page 37 579-1167 Rev. K

7.6.1 Editing the IDNet Point Editing tab

The Point Editing tab is used to define the points on the IDNet loop. Once the Verification points are defined, they must be associated to a
zone. The other types of points can also be associated to a zone, but it is not mandatory.
1. Select an IDNet point to configure in the table.
Figure 15: IDNet Multiloop - Point Editing Window
2. Assign a device type to the IDNet point.

3. Assign a point type to the IDNet point.
4. Enter a custom label. This label should make the IDNet point easily identifiable.
5. Tag the IDNet point to a Zone by clicking on Zone List. The TagList window is displayed ().
a. Scroll through the list and select the zone to populate.
b. Press the space key. A “>>” symbol appears to the left of each point to indicate that it is selected.
Figure 16: TagList Window
6. Click OK. If an error message is displayed, click OK and make the appropriate modifications.
7. Click Apply > OK to confirm the edits.
7.6.2 Editing the Loop Editing tab

The Loop Editing tab is used to define the loops on the IDNet Multiloop card. To edit the loops, follow the same steps as for the Point
Editing tab, but skip step 3, since there is no point type for loops.
page 38 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 17: IDNet Multiloop - Loop Editing Window
7.7 Editing the NAC Power Supply

The NAC Power Supply is part of the 4007ES Hybrid Hardware Configuration. The card has four main tabs to edit. The Card Properties tab,
the Data Entry tab, the NACs tab, and the AuxNAC tab.
• Card address
• Unit number
• Box number
• Bay number
• Location
7.7.1 Editing the Data Entry tab
1. Configure the Depleted Battery Cutout option. If selected, the power supply card shuts itself off after detecting a depleted battery
condition when no AC power is present. If this option is selected, a jumper must be installed on the power supply (on S527), for
Canadian operation. It is unselected by default.
2. Select the optional cards that are connected to the power supply card. The choices are:
- None
- City Connect
- Relay
3. Select the NAC options for the wiring. The choices are:
- 4 Class B
- 4 Class A
4. Click in the Wheelock Devices (Code 3) box if ONLY Wheelock device are used with the FACU.
5. Click in the 25V Regulator box if a 25V regulator card is used with the FACU.
6. Click Apply > OK to confirm the edits
page 39 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 18: NAC - Data Entry Tab
7.7.2 Editing the NACs tab
To edit the NACs tab (Figure 19):

1. Select a circuit to configure in the table.
Figure 19: NAC - NACs Tab
2. Select a point type from the Point Type drop-down list.

3. Enter a custom label.This label should make the point easily identifiable.
4. Select the EOL resistance from the EOL Resistance drop-down list.
7.7.3 Editing the AuxNACs tab

1. Select a circuit to configure in the table.
page 40 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 20: NAC - AuxNAC Tab

2. Select a point type from the Point Type drop-down list.
3. Enter a custom label.
This label should make the point easily identifiable.
7.8 Editing the Zone/Relay Card

The 4007-9801 Zone/Relay card allows monitoring of up to eight Class B zones or four Class A zones, or control up to eight relay contacts.
Up to four cards can be used. The card has two main tabs to edit. The Card Properties tab and the Point Editing tab.
1. The panel assigns an address when a Zone/Relay card is added. Set the card address to match the programmer assigned
address.
3. Select the location for each Zone/Relay card. By default, the selected block is F (bottom left corner). The other choices are block E,
block G, and block H.
• Unit number
• Box number
• Bay number

1. Select the device type. The choices are:
- MONA Class A Monitoring Device
Note: If MONA is selected for a point, a confirmation window is displayed explaining that the next point is reserved for the system
and the next point’s device type, point type, and labels change automatically change. These fields then become non-editable.
- MONB Class B Monitoring Device
- Relay device
2. Select the point type.
4. Select the EOL resistance from the EOL Resistance drop-down list.
page 41 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 21: Zone / Relay Card / Point Editing Tab

6. Tag each point to a Zone by clicking on Zone List.
The TagList window is displayed (Figure 16).
a. Scroll through the list and select the zone to populate.
b. Press the space key. A “>>” symbol appears to the left of the point to indicate that it is selected. Click OK. If an error message is
displayed, click OK and make the appropriate modifications.
7.8.2 Auto Fill Window

The auto fill function allows you to fill up the information for one point and then use this information to automatically fill the information
for the other points. To invoke this function, select a point in the Point Editing tab grid and press F4. The Auto Fill window appears.
The following fields in the Auto Fill window are pre-filled with the values from the highlighted point (from the Point Editing tab):
• All
• Point Forward
• Selected
1. Select to which point you want to apply the auto fill from the Auto Fill drop-down menu.
The choices are:
- All (programmer changes all the points on the card to match the auto fill selection)
- Point Forward (programmer changes the highlighted point and all subsequent points on the card to match the auto fill selection)
- Selected (programmer changes the highlighted point to match the auto fill selection)
2. To apply the same custom label to other points, check the Custom Label check box.
3. To add an identification number after the label, check the Automatically increment last number in custom labels check box.
4. The following fields are grayed out:
- Reference Address
- Coding Type
- Candela Rating
- Mode
page 42 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 22: Zone / Relay Point Editing - Auto Fill Window
5. Click on OK to confirm the edits.
Note: If the point selected is a MONA, the Auto Fill affects only the primary points (1, 3, 5, or 7) for the custom label since the sec-
ond points (2, 4, 6, or 8) are reserved. However, if the Alt Custom Label is checked, both the first and the second point of a MONA
are affected.
7.9 Editing the Serial DACT Card Per Point

The 4007-9806 serial DACT interface card can be programmed per point or by event. The 4007-9806 serial DACT per point has six main
tabs to edit. The Card Properties tab, the Basics tab, the Event Codes tab, the Local Points tab, the Point Types tab, and the Points tab.
Note: Alternatively, you can configure the IP Communicator with the Central Station Configuration Tool to perform Central Station report-
ing. See Configuring the IP Communicator and Using the Central Station Configuration Tool for information.
To edit the Card Properties tab per point:
1. The panel assigns an address when a DACT card is added. Set the card address to match the programmer assigned address.
3. Select a card address, from 0 to 31.
• Box number
• Bay number
• Location
To edit the Basics tab (Figure 23):
The Basics tab can be used to set up the basic communication information of the DACT to DACR link. The following fields in the tab can be
edited:
• Phone and Account Numbers
- Primary (1)#
- Secondary (2)#
- Account (1)#
- Account (2)#
page 43 579-1167 Rev. K

• Central Station Line #

• Dial Mode
- Tone
- Pulse
- Tone else Pulse
• Miscellaneous
- Report AC Failure Delay
- Test Report Time
- Send Unmapped Points
- IP Communicator
Figure 23: DACT Card - Basics Tab

• Central Station Email Address. Check the box to enter an email address and the .CSV file is automatically sent to Central Station.
Automatic email can only be used with Per Point DACTs and must be set up in advance with Central Station.
To edit the Event Codes tab (Figure 24)
The Event Codes tab allows you to edit the event codes associated with each of the 4007ES Panel point types.
1. Click on the Point Types drop-down list box and select the point type whose event codes needs to be changed. (The Next and
Previous buttons allow you to scroll through the list without clicking on the drop-down list box.)
2. Click on the Enable Edit check box at the top left of the window.
3. A warning window appears. Click on Yes.
Figure 24: DACT - Event Codes Tab
Note: Do not edit event codes without prior authorization and direction from the central station.
4. The non-editable fields remain grayed out. Define the appropriate event codes for both the Event and the Restoral columns.
To edit the Local Points tab (Figure 25)
The Local Points tab allows you to edit the local points associated with each of the 4007ES Panel point types.
1. Click on the Enable Edit check box at the top right of the window.
page 44 579-1167 Rev. K

Note: Do not edit local points without prior authorization and direction from the central station.
3. The non-editable fields remain grayed out. Define the appropriate local points for both the Event and the Restoral columns.
Figure 25: DACT - Local Point Tab

The Point types tab allows you to add new point types, delete, or edit existing point types.
To edit an existing point: (Figure 26)
1. Click on a point in the grid.
2. Edit the appropriate fields for both the Event and the Restoral columns.
3. Edit the SDACT point type name and the SDACT point type description if necessary.
4. Click Apply to confirm the edits
To delete an existing point:
1. Click on a point in the grid.
2. Click on Delete.
3. Click on Apply to confirm the edits.
Figure 26: DACT - Point Types Tab

To add a point:
1. Click on Add.
2. Edit the SDACT point type name and the SDACT point type description. These labels should make the points easily identifiable.
3. Edit the appropriate fields for both the Event and the Restoral columns.
page 45 579-1167 Rev. K

To edit the Points tab

1. To edit a point, click on the point or use the up and down arrow with the <space bar> to toggle point selection.
2. Depending on the point, edit the fields as necessary. The non-editable fields remain grayed out.
Figure 27: DACT - Points Tab
7.10 Editing the Event DACT Card

The 4007-9806 DACT “per event” has five main tabs. To edit the Card Properties tab, the Basics tab, the Event Codes tab, the Local Points
tab, and the Points tab.
Note: Alternatively, you can configure the IP Communicator with the Central Station Configuration Tool to perform Central Station report-
ing. See sections Configuring the IP Communicator and Using the Central Station Configuration Tool for information.
To edit the Card Properties tab per event:
1. The panel assigns an address when a DACT card is added. Set the card address to match the programmer assigned address.
3. Select a card address, from 0 to 31.
• Box number
• Bay number
• Location
To edit the Basics tab (Figure 28):
The Basics tab can be used to set up the basic communication information of the DACT to DACR link. The following fields in the tab can be
edited:
• Phone and Account Numbers
- Primary (1)#
- Secondary (2)#
- Account (1)#
- Account (2)#
• Central Station Line #
• Communications Format
- SIA
- 3/1
page 46 579-1167 Rev. K

- 4/2
- BFSK
• Pulse Communication Format (available when 3/1, 4/2 or BFSK is selected)
- Format rate 10 PPS or 20 PPS
- Communication Format Frequency 1.9KHz Data/1.4KHz ACK or 1.8KHz Data/2.3KHz ACK
• Dual Mode
- Tone
- Pulse
- Tone else Pulse
• Miscellaneous
- Report AC Failure Delay
- Test Report Time
- Send Unmapped Points
- IP Communicator
Figure 28: DACT Event Reporting - Basics Tab

To edit the Event Codes tab(Figure 24)
1. Select the Enable Edit checkbox.
3. Define the appropriate local points for both the Event and the Restoral columns.
The Local Points tab allows you to edit the local points associated with each of the 4007ES Panel point types.
To edit the Local Points tab (Figure 25)
1. Select the Enable Edit checkbox at the top right of the window.
3. Define the appropriate local points for both the Event and the Restoral columns.
To edit the Points tab (Figure 27)
1. To edit a point, click on the point or use the up and down arrow with the <spacebar> to toggle point selection.
2. Depending on the point, edit the fields as necessary. The non-editable fields remain grayed out.
page 47 579-1167 Rev. K

7.11 48-LED Module

The 48-LED Module has two main tabs to configure. The Card Properties tab and the Point Editing tab.
1. Enter a card address for the 48-LED Module.
2. Enter the card’s custom label.
This label should make the card easily identifiable.
- Card description
- Card default label
- Annunciator address
- Unit number
- Box number
- Bay number
- Location

From the Point Editing tab, two view choices are available.
High Level Modes: organizes the LEDs in pairs. Under this view, the Mode options are more limited:
• OO | On/Off
• TO | Trouble/On
Low Level Modes: shows each LED as individually configurable.
Figure 29: 48-LED Module High Level
page 48 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 30: 48-LED Module Low Level
7.11.2 In High Level Mode

1. Select a column and then a point that needs to be edited.
LED pairs are yellow and red.
2. Select the Mode from the Mode drop-down list.
Under this mode, only three options are available. If an error is detected, a red “X” is displayed in the HW Ref column. Pass the mouse
over the row to display the tool tip describing the problem.
- OO : On/Off
- TO: Trouble On
3. Create Reference Address for the points by pressing F9.
- Select an address from the table. Scroll through the list and press the space key to select an address. A “>>” symbol appears indicate
that it is selected.
4. Enter a point custom label.
This label should make the point easily identifiable.
5. When editing the 8 points of the Display Column 6, LED pairs can be either yellow/red or yellow/green.
6. Repeat for each point that needs to be edited.
7.11.3 In Low Level Mode

1. Select a column and then a point that needs to be edited.
Point type:
- For the even-numbered points 2 through 40, the default LED point type is LEDRED.
- For the odd-numbered points 1 through 39, the default LED point type is LEDYELLOW.
2. Select the Mode from the Mode drop-down list.
3. Create Reference Address for the points by pressing F9.
- Select an address from the table. Scroll through the list and press the space key to select an address. A “>>” symbol appears indicate
that it is selected.
4. When editing the 8 points of the Display Column 6:
page 49 579-1167 Rev. K

- For the even-numbered points, the default LED point type is LEDRED. The address of the point depends on the LED point type
selected. The point type can be changed to LED green.
- For the odd-numbered points, the default LED point type is LEDYELLOW.
7.12 Editing the 4120 Network Interface Card

The 4120 NIC Interface window has three main tabs to edit:
• Card Properties tab
• Network Info tab
• Service Port tab
7.12.1 Editing the Card Properties Tab

Enter the card’s custom label. This label should make the card easily identifiable. If required, select a unit, a box, and a bay number. The
following fields in the tab are filled by the programmer and you cannot edit them:
• Location
7.12.2 Editing the Network Info tab

Use the Network Info tab to configure important network operation.
Set the fields within the Network Info tab as follows:
• Comm Style. Click Class B networks to represent a single line or star topology. With these types of networks, a single short, ground
fault, or open circuit on the network communication channel causes a trouble, and all nodes beyond the fault operate in local, or
standalone mode. Click Class X networks to represent a closed loop ring. With these types of networks, any single open, short, or
ground fault on the communication channel will not interrupt communication between nodes on the network.
• Left Port/Right Port. The NIC card contains two ports, a left port and a right port. Each can have one of the following types of media
connected to it RS485, fiber, or modem. The setting must agree with the type of media module installed on the port.
• Network Sync Enable. When this check box is selected, Network Sync is enabled. Network Sync enables all notifications devices
connected to different panels, on the same 4120 network, to be synchronized. They simultaneously flash or sound when there is a
fire alarm. Network Sync is supported on a full network, 99 nodes, as long as all nodes either support network sync, or are safe to
use with network sync. Ensure that all nodes are safe to use with Network Sync and are using the proper firmware revision before
enabling this feature.
7.12.3 Editing the Service Port Tab

Configure the communication settings (Figure 31) by selecting the Baud Rate, Parity, Data Bits, and Stop Bits fields to the values required by
the attached device. It is recommended that you keep the following default settings.
• Baud Rate: 9600
• Data Bits: 8
• Stop Bits: 1
• Parity: None
page 50 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 31: Network Service Port Tab
Click on the Port Data button. The RS232 Port Data Entry window opens (Figure 32).
page 51 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 32: Access Level Tab in the RS232 Port Data Entry window
Click the Gen. Info tab. Enter the information requested. Click on Apply and then OK to confirm the selection
• Device Type: This field is permanently set to CRT80U.
• Header Label: This field specifies the first line of banner text that appears at the top of the CRT screen.
• Port ID Label: This field specifies the second line of banner text that appears at the top of the CRT screen. It is typically used to
designate the port connection.
• Port ID Alt Label: This field specifies the Alternate Port ID Label.
Click on the Access Level tab in the RS232 Port Data Entry window (Figure 32). This tab allows you to set the access level for the various
system operations that can be carried out via the service port. To set an access level for one of the service port operations, scroll through
the list of functions and highlight the function. Use this control to associate an access level with the function. Click on Apply and then OK
to confirm the selection.
page 52 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 33: RS232 Port Data Entry window
Note: These access levels apply only to actions performed through the Network service port, not for operations made at the panel display.
Click on the Port Options tab in the RS232 Port Data Entry window. This tab contains options that apply to the way data appears on the
display connected to the service port. These are read-only fields. Click OK to return to the Service Port tab.
7.13 ES Net topologies

With ES Net, you can deploy and interconnect fire alarm panels and workstations in a variety of ways. Using ES Net's flexible ring-based
topology, you can bridge together or cascade rings.
Depending on local code, and if redundant paths are not required for specific segments of a network, it is also possible to connect panels
and workstations (otherwise known as network nodes) using a bus topology.
page 53 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 34: Examples of possible topologies for ES Net
7.14 ES Net port types

You can configure two types of ports on a Fire Net:
• Fire Network port
• Fire Network Spur port
A Fire Network port type is configured when a port is part of a redundant ring. A ring is anything from a two node "bridge"
interconnecting rings together up to the maximum size ring of 99 nodes. This configuration also assumes that this port will be part of a
pair to guarantee redundancy. If an odd number of Fire Network ports are configured on a NIC, an error appears when you click Save or
Apply in the Card Configuration dialog box.
Fire Network Spurs are for applications where 1) a node is part of the network but the link connecting it to the rest of the system does not
have to be redundant, or 2) a network is configured in Class B. Under certain jurisdictions, for example, this node could be an annunciator
panel.
If you select the Class X option for a network, a break detected on ports set as Fire Network will create the following troubles:
• A link down trouble for this port
• A Fire Network link down trouble
• A Degraded Class X trouble
However, on a Class X network, if a break is detected on a port set as Fire Network Spur, then this condition will create the following
troubles:
• A link down trouble for this port
• A Fire Network link down trouble
page 54 579-1167 Rev. K

7.15 About Supplemental Traffic

Through the ES Net NIC, supplemental traffic can be transported over the redundant Fire Network. Supplemental traffic may consist of
either communications between a TSW Server and its remote clients or communications between third party Ethernet appliances.
The supplemental traffic channel is available by configuring ES Net NIC Ethernet based ports (on board ports A or B, or extra ports
available through an Ethernet media module). Ports configured for supplemental traffic are part of their own "virtual" network, entirely
independent of the Fire Network.
TSW Remote Clients leveraging supplemental traffic through a connection to a Fire Panel ES Net NIC card may require special installation
instructions. Refer to 579-834 TrueSite Workstation Installation and Checkout Instructions for more details.
Note that supplemental traffic is not allowed on networks where physical media is DSL. If such media cards exist in the configuration, the
job build will fail.
Forwarding of supplemental traffic frames happens at a low level layer that has no concept of IP addresses; this means that to allow
communications between devices on this channel, the user may have to configure IP addresses and/or related protocol parameters for
every equipment leveraging the supplemental channel.
7.16 Editing the ES Net Network Interface Card

The ES Net NIC Interface window has two main tabs to edit
• Card Properties tab
• Card Configuration tab
7.16.1 Editing the Card Properties Tab

Enter the card’s custom label. This label should make the card easily identifiable. If required, select a unit, a box, and a bay number. The
following fields in the tab are filled by the programmer and cannot be edited:
• Location
7.16.2 Editing the Card Configuration tab

This tab allows configuring the ES Net card operation and the Virtual Service Port.
The ES Net NIC has two networks: Panel Net, that is internal to the panel, and Fire Net that connects the panels on a network, and is totally
separate from Panel Net.
Panel Net is a network consisting of the CPU card and its Ethernet based slave cards. The Fire Net is a redundant network connecting
the ES Net NICs together. The Fire Net can have up to 99 nodes of different types, fire panels or workstations. To participate with an ES
Net based network, configure a card for either a Fire Network or Fire Network Spur port type. Port C on the NIC card is solely used to
connect to the 4007 CPU and Display board Ethernet Connector (J1). Port D is typically used to provide Service port functionality (default).
Use the Panel Net port type to connect other Ethernet slave cards to the CPU card. This port type provides supervision of the link and
declares a port trouble if the link goes down.
• Comm Style. Select Class B network if the nodes are cascaded without forming a ring. With these types of networks a broken link
between nodes will cause a trouble and node beyond the fault will operate in local or standalone mode. Select Class X networks if
nodes are part of a closed loop ring. With these types of networks a single broken link will not prevent the nodes from being able to
communicate between each other.
The following information shows how Comm Style and ports are configured for different network topologies.
7.16.2.1 Class X Network

The example in Figure 35 shows a four-node Class X network with a mix of Ethernet and single mode fiber.
page 55 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 35: Four-node Class X mixed media single ring

Table 20: Four-node Class X mixed media network configuration options
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4
Comm Style Class X Class X Class X Class X
Port A Fire Network Unused Unused Fire Network
Port B Unused Unused Fire Network Fire Network
Port C Host Host Host Host
Port D Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port
Media Module 1 Single Mode Fiber Single Mode Fiber Single Mode Fiber Unused
Port E Unused Fire Network Fire Network Unused
Port F Fire Network Fire Network Unused Unused
Media Module 2 Unused Unused Unused Unused
Port G Unused Unused Unused Unused
Port H Unused Unused Unused Unused
7.16.2.2 Configuring a multiple ring network

Figure 36 shows a seven-node network, composed of two bridged rings and a single panel connected by a Fire Network Spur.
Figure 36: General view of a seven-node, multi-ring network
page 56 579-1167 Rev. K

This network is configured so that it will declare a Class X trouble whenever a break occurs on any of the rings, but not on the spur. The
network is composed of a mix of Ethernet and fiber links as shown in Figure 37. Note the proper pairing of the ports (for example, Port A
into Port B, Port E into Port F, or Port G into Port F) to ensure that no miswire or link down condition is declared.
Figure 37: Seven-node Class X network with a Fire Network Spur

Table 21: Seven-node Class X network with a spur, mixed media network configuration options
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 (TSW) Node 4 Node 5 Node 6 Node 7
Comm Style Class X Class X Class X Class X Class X Class X Class X
Fire Network
Port A Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Unused Unused Unused
Spur
Fire Network
Port B Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Unused Unused Unused
Spur
Port C Host Host Host Host Host Host Host
Port D Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port Service Port
Single Mode Single Mode Multi Mode Multi Mode
Media Module 1 Unused Unused Unused
Fiber Fiber Fiber Fiber
Port E Unused Unused Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Unused
Port F Unused Unused Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Fire Network Unused
Multi Mode
Media Module 2 Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused Unused
Fiber
Port G Unused Unused Unused Fire Network Unused Unused Unused
Port H Unused Unused Unused Fire Network Unused Unused Unused
page 57 579-1167 Rev. K

7.16.2.3 Class B Network

Figure 38 is an example of a four-node network similar to Figure 37, but it is configured in Class B. Note that all ports connecting the four
nodes together are configured as Fire Network Spurs as the bus topology is not providing any redundancy.
Figure 38: Four-node Class B mixed media network
Table 22: Four-node Class B mixed media network configuration options

Node1 Node2 Node3 Node4
Comm Style Class B Class B Class B Class B
Port A Unused Unused Unused Fire Network Spur
Port B Unused Unused Fire Network Spur Unused
Port E Unused Fire Network Spur Fire Network Spur Unused
Port F Fire Network Spur Fire Network Spur Unused Unused
page 58 579-1167 Rev. K

7.16.3 Configuring a system to use the supplemental traffic channel

See Figure 39 for an example of a four-node, single-ring network, but with third party Ethernet appliances or TSW Remote Clients
connected to nodes 1 and 3.
Figure 39: Four-node single ring network with supplemental traffic sources
The following configuration would be required to establish the supplemental traffic between these two nodes:
Table 23:
Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 Node 4
Comm Style Class X Class X Class X Class X
Port A Fire Network Unused Supp. Channel 1 Fire Network
Port B Supp. Channel 1 Unused Fire Network Fire Network
Port E Unused Fire Network Fire Network Unused
Port F Fire Network Fire Network Unused Unused
7.16.4 Pairing the network ports

You must pair ports correctly to create a Fire Network. Depending on the media type, if you do not pair the ports correctly, links between
nodes may not work, or in the case of Ethernet, it may result in a miswiring condition.
When you are pairing fiber-media card ports, match the wavelengths on each side of the fiber link, ensuring that the TX wavelength on one
node matches the RX wavelength on the other node, see Figure 40. If you pair them incorrectly, a Port Link Down trouble appears on
both ports.
page 59 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 40: Pairing fiber-media card ports

When you pair DSL media card ports, ensure Port E or G on one end of a link connects to ports F or H on the other end. If you pair them
incorrectly, as with fiber media, a Link Down trouble appears on both ports. Ethernet ports A, E and G on the ES Net NIC or on the ES Net
Ethernet media card can detect ground fault conditions. If code requires that a Ground Fault condition is detected and annunciated for a
link, correct port pairing must be respected.
To pair the ports correctly, ensure that a port with ground fault detection capabilities (Port A, E or G) connects to a port without ground
fault detection capabilities (Port B, F or H). If you do not respect this port pairing, a miswired trouble results.
7.16.5 Ground Fault detection

Correctly paired DSL and Ethernet links detect ground fault conditions. This option is the default selection for both media.
Depending on local code, ground fault detection may not be required or desirable. To disable this feature, uncheck the Link requires
Ground Fault Protection check box in the port Advanced Settings.
Note: You must deselect this option for the ports on each end of the link, that is at each node. Failing to do this results in a miswired trou-
ble.
7.16.6 ES Net ports options and settings

The following table describes the ES Net NIC network ports.
Table 24: ES Net NIC network ports
Port List options Advanced settings options Pairing options
Fire Network
Fire Network Spur Link requires Ground Fault
Protection is the default
Port A PanelNet Pair with port B, F or H
option if the port is not
Supp. Channel 1 UNUSED
UNUSED
Fire Network
Protection is the default
Port B PanelNet Pair with port A, E, or G
option if the port is not
Supp. Channel 1 UNUSED
UNUSED
Always connect Port C to the
Port C Host N/A
master controller CPU.
page 60 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 24: ES Net NIC network ports

Port List options Advanced settings options Pairing options
Port D is the Service Port
on the front panel,except in
configurations using a BNIC,
PanelNet
Port D N/A or a gateway card. When there
Service Port
is a BNIC or a gateway card in
the configuration, set port D to
PanelNet.
Fire Network
For Ethernet, pair port E with
PanelNet (Only for Ethernet Protection is the default
port B, F or H. For fiber media
Port E Media Module) option if the port is not
or DSL, pair port E with port F
Supp. Channel 1 (Only for UNUSED (Not applicable for
or H
Ethernet Media Module) Fiber)
UNUSED
Media Card 1
Fire Network
For Ethernet, pair port F with
port A, E, or G. For fiber media
Port F Media Module) option if the port is not
or DSL, pair Port F with Port E
or G.
UNUSED
Fire Network
For Ethernet, pair port G with
port B, F or H. For fiber media
Port G Media Module) option if the port is not
or DSL, pair port G with port F
or H
UNUSED
Media Card 2
Fire Network
For Ethernet, pair port H with
port A, E, or G. For fiber media
Port H Media Module) option if the port is not
or DSL, pair port H with port E
or G.
UNUSED
7.16.7 Editing the Virtual Service Port

Pressing the ellipsis next to the Virtual Service Port displays the ES Net Service Port configuration dialog, see Figure 41.
page 61 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 41: ES Net Card Virtual Service Port

In the Gen Info tab, enter the information requested. Click Apply and then OK to confirm the selection (Figure 32).
• Device Type: This field can either be set to COMMAND or COMPUTER. The default Device type for the port is COMMAND. If a
supervised port is required, device type can be set to COMPUTER.
• Header Label: This field specifies the first line of banner text that appears at the top of the CRT screen.
• Port ID Label: This field specifies the second line of banner text that appears at the top of the CRT screen. It is typically used to
designate the port connection.
• Port ID Alt Label: This field specifies the Alternate Port ID Label.
• Port Default SET Priority: This is the system priority level assigned to commands issued from this port. The range is 2 to 15, and the
default is 9.
Click the Access Levels tab in the Port Data Entry window (Figure 42). This tab allows you to set the access level for the various system
operations that can be carried out via the service port. To set an access level for one of the service port operations, scroll through the list
of functions and highlight the function. Use this control to associate an access level with the function. Click Apply and then OK to confirm
the selection.
page 62 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 42: ES Net Virtual Service Port Access levels and Port Options window
Note: These access levels apply only to actions performed through the Network service port, not for operations made at the panel display.
When the port is set to COMMAND, the port options are read only; only when the port is set to COMPUTER that the options are modifiable.
To toggle the state of the port options, highlight the option and press the Spacebar key.
page 63 579-1167 Rev. K

8 Adding the IP Communicator

You can add an IP Communicator (IPC) card to a job to enable central station reporting. To add the IPC complete the following steps:
1. In the Available Hardware pane, expand INTERFACE.
2. Drag and drop the IPC to the Hardware Configuration pane.
8.1 Deleting an IPC

Only one IPC can exist in a job. If you want to add a different IPC to the job, first remove the existing IPC.
To remove the IPC, complete the following steps:
1. In the Hardware Configuration pane, right-click the IP Communicator and select Delete to open the confirmation window.
Note: When the IPC is located in the IP Communicator, delete the 4100-IPCBOX- IP Communicator Box.
2. In the confirmation window, do one of the following:
- Click Yes to preserve central station configuration
- Click No to discard central station configuration
8.2 Adding an internal IPC

For internally mounted IPCs, configure a 4007-9818 IP Communicator.
To add a IPC to the job, do the following:
2. Drag and drop the 4007-9818 IP Communicator to the Hardware Configuration pane.
8.3 Adding a close-nippled IPC

If the IPC is close-nipple mounted in an external box, add a 4100-IPCBOX- IP Communicator Box to the job.
To do this, complete the following steps:
1. In the Available Hardware pane, expand Units.
2. Drag and drop a Default Unit Type to the 4007 Fire Alarm Panel in the Hardware Configuration pane to create Unit 1.
3. In the Available Hardware pane, expand Boxes.
4. Drag and drop the 4100-IPCBOX- IP Communicator Box to Unit 1 in the Hardware Configuration pane.
8.4 Adding a remote IPC

If the IPC is remote mounted in an external box, you must add a 4100-IPCBOX- IP Communicator Box and a Fire Panel Ethernet Switch
to the job.
To do this, complete the following steps:
1. In the Available Hardware pane, expand Units.
2. Drag and drop a Default Unit Type to the 4007 Fire Alarm Panel in the Hardware Configuration pane to create Unit 1.
3. In the Available Hardware pane, expand Boxes.
4. Drag and drop the 4100-IPCBOX- IP Communicator Box to Unit 1 in the Hardware Configuration pane.
6. Drag and drop the Fire Panel Ethernet Switch to Box 1 of Unit 0 in the Hardware Configuration pane.
page 64 579-1167 Rev. K

9 Configuring the IP Communicator

Use the IP Communicator to perform central station reporting. To program central station reporting through the IP Communicator, see
Using the Central Station Configuration Tool.
9.1 Editing LAN Ethernet operation

By default, the IPC automatically obtains its IP address from the building LAN it is connected to. When the building network requires the
IPC to use a static IP, you must then configure the LAN Ethernet operation.
To configure the LAN Ethernet operation, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Options tab of the IP Communicator window.
2. From the Ethernet Operation list, select Automatic/DHCP or Static IP.
3. Optional: If you select Static IP, enter the IP addresses for the following fields: Address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway,
Primary DNS, and Alternate DNS.
4. Click Apply.
9.2 Editing the IP Communicator settings

Central station reporting is an optional function of the IPC. Use the IP Communicator tab to enable central station reporting and invoke
the Central Station Configuration Tool. If a DACT is already programmed to report to the central station it can continue to perform that
function. In that case, do not enable the central station connection in the IP Communicator.
To configure the IPC for central station reporting, consult Using the Central Station Configuration Tool.
page 65 579-1167 Rev. K

10 Using the Central Station Configuration Tool

Use the Central Station Configuration Tool to configure the IP Communicator (IPC) to report to the central station. The Central Station
Configuration Tool is included with the ES Panel Programmer version 4.02 or later. The ES Panel Programmer invokes the Central Station
Configuration Tool.
Central station reporting is an optional feature of the IPC. If a DACT is already programmed for central station reporting it can continue to
perform that function.
10.1 Launching Central Station Configuration Tool

You can launch the Central Station Configuration Tool from within the ES Panel Programmer. Alternatively, you can launch it directly from
Windows Explorer.
To open the Central Station Configuration Tool from the ES Panel Programmer, complete the following steps:
1. Click the Hardware tab.
2. In the Hardware Configuration pane, double-click the IP Communicator to open the IP Communicator window.
3. Click the IP Communicator sub tab.
4. Select the Enable Central Station Connection check box and click Configure Central Station to open the Central Station
Configuration Tool.
Click File and select Exit to close the Central Station Configuration Tool and return to the ES Panel Programmer.
10.2 Editing the general settings
10.2.1 Configuring the communication paths

Use the Accounts sub tab to configure communication paths, account codes and phone numbers or IP address. You can configure central
station reporting to have one, or two communication paths. Central station provides the account codes.
To configure the communication paths, do the following:
1. Click the General tab and click the Accounts sub tab.
2. In the Central Station Primary Communication Path section, enter the account code.
3. From the Interface list, select the communication path type: PhoneLine, Ethernet, or Cellular.
- If PhoneLine is selected, enter the Phone Number.
- If Ethernet or Cellular is selected, enter the source port number, destination IP address, and the destination port number.
4. Optional: In the Central Station Alternative Communication Path section, repeat steps 2 to 3 to configure a secondary
path.
Note:
- If the primary communication path is PhoneLine. You must configure a secondary communication path.
- If the primary communication path is Ethernet or Cellular, you cannot configure PhoneLine for the secondary path.
- If the primary communication path is Ethernet or Cellular, you cannot configure the same communication type for the
secondary path.
page 66 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 43: Communication paths
10.2.2 Configuring reporting settings

Use the Options sub tab to configure the following:
• Reporting Type specifies how the IPC reports to the central station. Select Per Point to transmit changes to specific point status.
Select Event to transmit events of a specific type.
• Report AC Failure Delay is the amount of time that should pass following an AC power failure before the IPC contacts the central
station to report the AC failure. This setting is intended to prevent the central station from being overloaded with AC power failure
events following a power outage. You must enter a time between 1 to 3 hours to be compliant with UL and NFPA.
• Send Unmapped Points. Mapped points are selected points that report status changes to the central station. Unmapped points are
points that are part of the FACU job but you have not configured in the Central Station configuration Tool.
• Test Report Period is the frequency at which the IPC reports the panel status, normal or off normal, to the central station.
• Central Station Line#. The central station assigns the line number for the account. They use the line number for reference when you
contact them.
• Central Station Email. The e-mail address for contacting the central station.
To configure these settings, complete the following steps:
1. Click the General tab and click the Options sub tab.
2. In the Reporting Type section, click Per Point or Event.
3. In the Report AC Failure Delay field, enter the AC failure delay. You must enter a duration between 1 to 3 hours to be compliant
with UL and NFPA.
4. Optional: Select the Send Unmapped Points check box to report a generic code to the central station for unmapped points.
5. In Test Report Period, enter the duration between 1 to 6 hours.
6. In Central Station Line #, enter the line number for the central station.
7. In Central Station Email, enter the e-mail address for central station.
8. Click Apply.
10.2.3 Configuring the e-mail server settings

The e-mail server setting applies to all jobs configured with your PC. To enable the Central Station Configuration Tool to send e-mails on
event notifications, you must specify an SMTP e-mail server. Contact your company IT department to determine the SMTP server address,
port, from address, and authentication settings. This is similar to setting up an e-mail client program.
page 67 579-1167 Rev. K

To configure the e-mail server settings, do the following:

1. Click the Options sub tab.
2. Click Configure Email Server to open the Email Server Settings window.
3. In the SMTP Server Address field, enter the SMTP server address.
Note: If the SMTP server is not reachable over the TCP/IP network, the Email Server Settings window displays Email Service
Status: Abnormal.
4. In the Port field, enter the port number.
5. In the From Email Address field, enter your e-mail address.
6. Optional: Select the Requires a secure connection (SSL) check box to enable this setting.
7. Optional: Select the Requires Authentication check box, to enable this setting.
8. In the User Name and Password fields, enter your credentials.
9. Click OK and Apply to test e-mail server settings.
If the settings are correct, Email Service Status: Normal is displayed and the Central Station Configuration Tool can send emails.If the to-
address is invalid, the SMTP server attempts to send the message and eventually sends an Message Undeliverable notice to the From
Email Address.
Important: If the ES Programmer PC is running an anti-virus program, you may need to add an exception for the CSCT process
(CSConfigTool.exe) to send emails.
Refer to your specific anti-virus vendor documentation for information about adding exceptions. For McAfee, the process is as follows:
1. Click Start and select All Programs, McAfee, and VirusScan Console.
2. Double-click Access Protection.
3. Select Prevent mass mailing worms from sending mail and click Edit.
4. Add CSConfigTool.exe to the Excluded Processes list.
Note: Ensure that there are no spaces before or after the comma between process names, for example outlook.exe,msimn.exe.
5. Click OK until the Access Protection Properties window closes.
Note: When you build a job, the Central Station Configuration Tool automatically e-mails a report to the central station using the
e-mail address you provide if you select Per Point as the reporting type.
10.3 Editing Events and Points
10.3.1 Editing the mapping types

Use the Event Codes tab to edit, add, or delete mapping types.
Note: Mapping types in the Central Station Configuration Tool, are similar to point types when programming a DACT with the ES Program-
mer.
To edit the mapping types, do the following:

1. Click the Event Codes tab to display the list of mapping types and descriptions.
2. Click the pencil icon next to the mapping type or description to enable editing and enter changes.
Note: If you rename the mapping type, all points using that mapping type update to reflect the new mapping type name.
To add a mapping type, do the following:
1. Click the Add Mapping Type icon to open the Add New Mapping Type window.
2. Enter a name and description for the mapping type and click OK.
To delete a mapping type, select the mapping type and click the Remove Mapping Types icon.
10.3.2 Editing the event codes

Use the Event Codes tab to edit the event codes associated with each of the ES panel mapping types. If an event occurs to a point
associated with one of the mapping types, the IPC sends the specified event code to the central station.
Note: Do not edit event codes without prior authorization and direction from the central station.
To edit the event codes, do the following:
1. Click the Event Codes tab to display the list of mapping types and event codes.
page 68 579-1167 Rev. K

2. From the Mapping Type list, select the mapping type for which you want to change the event codes, to display the associated
event codes.
3. In the Event Codes section, select the Enable Edit check box.
4. Optional: Select the Hide Unused check box to view only the events codes in use.
5. Click the pencil icon next to the Event Code or Restoral Code, and enter changes.
10.3.3 Editing the local codes

Use the Local Codes tab to do the following:
• Set the event codes received by the central station when the IPC detects an error,
• Modify the event codes for automatic test reporting
Note: Define the communication path troubles in the mapping types, not in local codes.
To edit the local codes, do the following:

1. Click the Local Codes tab to display the Local Event, Restoral, and Miscellaneous codes.
2. Select the Enable Edit check box.
3. Click the pencil icon next to the code you want to edit and edit codes as directed by the central station.
10.3.4 Editing the points

Use the Points tab to do the following:
• Select the points that have events routed to the central station. By doing this, you can prevent unnecessary messages, such as when a
pseudo point turns on and off, from being sent to the central station.
• Assign points to groups. This is a feature of CID communication format only. Use groups to split a large number of points into sub-
groups, such as all of a building smoke detectors. Groups are typically used to group points by location, for example, each floor in
a building can be a group. The central station can use the group information to provide the fire department with an approximate
location of the point in alarm.
To select points and assign points to groups, do the following:
1. Select a point.
2. Select the check box to enable the point to send events to the IPC.
3. In the CID Group field, enter the group number of the point.
4. In the CID Number field, enter the number for the point identifier.
Note: If you selected Per Point reporting type, you can edit Mapping Type. See Configuring reporting settings for informa-
tion about reporting types.
10.4 Building the configuration file and viewing reports
10.4.1 Viewing reports

Use the report feature to view a summary of your configurations.
To view a report, do the following:
1. Click Tools and select Reports.
2. Select the report type you want to view, the options are as follows:
- All, General
- Event Codes
- Local Codes
- Points
10.4.2 Building and downloading the configuration

The configuration for central station reporting is built in the ES Panel Programmer when you build the job.
The central station reporting configuration is downloaded to the FACU as part of the job. You do not need to download it separately.
For information using the ES Panel Programmer to build and download the job to the FACU, see section File Transfer
page 69 579-1167 Rev. K

11 Editing TrueAlert Devices Properties

TrueAlert devices are edited through the Point Editing tab on the IDNAC Power Supply.
To access this tab:
1. Go to the Hardware Configuration window.
2. Double click on the IDNAC Power Supply icon.
3. Click on the Point Editing tab.
11.1 Point Editing for TrueAlert Device
11.1.1 TrueAlert ES AO Appliance Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert ES Audible Only (AO) appliances.
The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 25: TrueAlert ES AO Point Editing Options(Continued)
Option Description
Custom Label This field can be used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
Alternate Label This field is used to enter an alternative description of the appliance.
Select the Style that corresponds to the appliance or device you are programming.
Available settings: • Indoor
Style
• Weatherproof UL
• Weatherproof ULC
Horn Type Broadband Multitone
Tone BROADBAND BROADBAND, 250 HZ, BELL, SLOW WHOOP, SIREN, HILO, CHIME, HARDWARE
Select the Coding Type to set the cadence of the audible signal.
System Default This sets the coding to the value determined in the System Option tab.
Temporal A three-pulse coding pattern consisting of three ½ second pulses, each separated by a ½
second silence. Each three pulse group is separated by 1 ½ seconds of silence. Pattern
repeats until alarm silence.
March 20 A coded signal that uses 20 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1 ½ second pulse on, 1
½ second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
Coding Type
March 60 A coded signal that uses 60 beats per minute. Each beat consists of ½ second pulse on, ½
second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 120 A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of ¼ second pulse on, ¼
On Steady On steadily.
Temporal 4 A CO gas warning that is a repeated sequence of four cycles of 100 msec on with 100 msec
off, followed by 5 seconds off.
Set the appliance volume:
High To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
Volume Low To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
Hardware Selecting this option sets the appliance to the setting indicated on the appliance's
configuration switch or jumper.
Note: The "Copy/Paste/ Special Paste" feature can be used to configure multiple devices identically.
11.1.2 TrueAlert ES VO Appliances Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert ES Visual Only (VO) appliances.
Table 26: TrueAlert ES VO Point Editing Options(Continued)
Option Description
System Default. Sets the candela value to the one selected in the System Option
Style • Indoor. tab.
Available candela options: 15 candela
30 candela
page 70 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 26: TrueAlert ES VO Point Editing Options(Continued)

Option Description
75 candela
110 candela
135 candela
185 candela
Hardware. Selecting this option sets the appliance to the setting indicated on the
appliance's configuration switch or jumper.
tab.
15 candela
• Weatherproof UL. 75 candela
Available candela options: WP 75 candela
WP 185 candela
tab.
20 candela
• Weatherproof ULC.
30 candela
Available candela options:
75 candela
Operation Select the type of operation the appliance will signal.
General Evac. The strobe is automatically associated with the “ALL VISUAL” VNAC by default. The
“alarm/alert” switch on the device must be set to "Alarm".
Other When this mode is selected the user is confirming that the strobe does not have
a default assignation to a particular VNAC and that the VNAC must be specified by
the user.
Mounting Select the mounting location of the appliance: wall-mounted or ceiling-mounted.
Candela Select the candela output of the appliance. The selection varies according to the appliance style.
11.1.3 TrueAlert ES VO-H Appliances Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert ES Visual Only High Candela (VO-H) appliances.
Table 27: TrueAlert ES VO-H Point Editing Options
Option Description
Custom Label This field is used to describe the appliance's function, location, or other descriptive information.
System Default. Selecting this option sets the candela value to the one selected in
the System Option tab.
110 candela
Style • Indoor.
135 candela
Available candela options:
185 candela
the user.
Mounting Only a ceiling-mounted appliance is allowed.
page 71 579-1167 Rev. K

11.1.4 TrueAlert ES VO-L Appliances Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert ES Visual Only LED Strobe (VO-L) appliances.
Table 28: TrueAlert ES VO-L Point Editing Options
Option Description
• Indoor. 15 candela
Style
• Weatherproof UL/ULC. 30 candela
the user.
Mounting Only a wall-mounted appliance is allowed.
11.1.5 TrueAlert ES VO-LH Appliances Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert ES Visual Only LED Strobe High Candela (VO-LH) appliances. The following editing options are
available for this appliance:
Table 29: TrueAlert ES VO-LH Point Editing Options
Option Description
Style
• Weatherproof UL/ULC. 135 candela
the user.
11.1.6 TrueAlert ES AV Appliance Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert ES Audible/Visual (AV) appliances. The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 30: TrueAlert ES AV Point Editing Options
Option Description
page 72 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 30: TrueAlert ES AV Point Editing Options

Option Description
Style Select the Style that corresponds to the appliance or device you are programming.
15 candela
30 candela
• Available candela options: 110 candela
135 candela
185 candela
tab.
15 candela
• Weatherproof UL. 75 candela
• Available candela options: WP 75 candela
WP 185 candela
• Weatherproof ULC. 20 candela
30 candela
• Available candela options:
75 candela
Select the type of operation the appliance will signal.
Operation
the user.
Temporal A three-pulse coding pattern consisting of three ½ second pulses, each separated
by a ½ second silence. Each three pulse group is separated by 1 ½ seconds of
silence. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 20 A coded signal that uses 20 beats per minute. Each beat consists of 1 ½ second
pulse on, 1 ½ second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
Coding Type
March 60 A coded signal that uses 60 beats per minute. Each beat consists of ½ second
pulse on, ½ second off. Pattern repeats until alarm silence.
March 120 A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of ¼ second
Temporal 4 A CO gas warning that is a repeated sequence of four cycles of 100 msec on with
100 msec off, followed by 5 seconds off.
Note: The "Copy/Paste/Special Paste" feature can be used to configure multiple devices identically.
page 73 579-1167 Rev. K

11.1.7 TrueAlert ES AV-H Appliance Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert ES Audible/Visual High Candela (AV-H) appliances. The following editing options are available for this
appliance:
Table 31: TrueAlert ES AV-H Point Editing Options
Option Description
135 candela
• Available candela options:
185 candela
the user.
Mounting Only a ceiling-mounted appliance is allowed
Coding Type
11.1.8 TrueAlert ES AV-L Appliance Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert ES Audible/Visual LED Strobe (AV-L) appliances. The following editing options are available for this
appliance:
Table 32: TrueAlert ES AV-L Point Editing Options
Option Description
• Indoor.
• Weatherproof UL/ULC
15 candela
page 74 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 32: TrueAlert ES AV-L Point Editing Options

Option Description
30 candela
the user.
Horn Type Broadband
Tone BROADBAND
Coding Type
11.1.9 TrueAlert ES AV-LH Appliance Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert ES Audible/Visual LED Strobe High Candela (AV-LH) appliances. The following editing options are
available for this appliance:
Table 33: TrueAlert ES AV-LH Point Editing Options
Option Description
• Weatherproof UL/ULC 135 candela
the user.
page 75 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 33: TrueAlert ES AV-LH Point Editing Options

Option Description
Horn Type Broadband
Tone BROADBAND
Coding Type
11.1.10 ISO Options

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert Isolators. The following editing options are available for this device:
Table 34: TrueAlert Isolator Editing Options
Option Description
11.1.11 Repeater Options

Use this device type to edit Repeaters.
The 4009 IDNAC Repeater is a TrueAlert ES Addressable device that extends the maximum wiring distance supported by the IDNAC
Signaling Line Circuit (SLC). Consult the 4009 IDNAC Repeater manual 579-1019 for more information. The following editing options are
available for this device:
Table 35: Repeater Editing Options
Option Description
Current Draw (Amps) This information is not available.
Depleted Battery When this option is selected the Repeater shuts itself off after detecting a depleted battery condition when no
Cutout AC power is present. This option is de-selected by default.
Select the option that corresponds to the Repeater’s wiring style.
• For local Class B Wiring select "Class B Spur"
Repeater Operation
• For local Class A Loop Wiring select "Class A Spur"
• For extended Class A Loop Wiring select "Class A Loop"
11.1.12 DCAI Options

Use this device type to edit DCAI cards.
Note: A warning appears if the number of DCAI cards added to the Point Editing table does not correspond to the number of cards added
to the job.
The 4100-6103 Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI) card converts the Class B output of an IDNAC into two isolated Class A outputs. Consult the
DCAI manual 579-1029 for more information. The following editing options are available for this device:
page 76 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 36: DCAI Editing Options

Option Description
Loop 1 Address The Loop 1 Address is automatically set by the programmer.
Loop 2 Address This virtual address does not need to be adjacent to the loop 1 hardware address.
11.1.13 TrueAlert STRB Appliances Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert Strobe (STRB) appliances. The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 37: TrueAlert STRB Point Editing Options
Option Description
tab.
15 candela
Style • Indoor. 30 candela
110 candela
Select the type of operation the appliance will signal.
Operation
General Evac. The strobe is automatically associated with the “ALL VISUAL” VNAC by default.
Candela Select the candela output of the appliance.
11.1.14 TrueAlert Horn Appliance Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert Horn appliances. The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 38: TrueAlert Horn Point Editing Options
Option Description
Style Select the Indoor Style
Temporal A three-pulse coding pattern consisting of three ½ second pulses, each separated by a ½
second silence. Each three pulse group is separated by 1 ½ seconds of silence. Pattern
repeats until alarm silence.
Coding Type
March 60 A coded signal that uses 60 beats per minute. Each beat consists of ½ second pulse on, ½
March 120 A coded signal that uses 120 beats per minute. Each beat consists of ¼ second pulse on, ¼
Volume High To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
Low To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
11.1.15 TrueAlert A/V Appliances Point Editing

Use this device type to edit TrueAlert Strobe Audible/Visual (A/V) appliances. The following editing options are available for this appliance:
Table 39: TrueAlert AV Point Editing Options
Option Description
Indoor. System Default. Sets the candela value to the one selected in the System Option
Style
Available candela options: tab.
15 candela
page 77 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 39: TrueAlert AV Point Editing Options

Option Description
30 candela
75 candela
110 candela
The strobe and horn appliances is automatically associated respectively with the “ALL VISUAL” and "ALL AUDIBLE"
Operation
VNAC by default.
Candela Select the candela output of the appliance.
Coding Type
Volume High To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
Low To use this option the appliance's configuration control must be set to Panel.
page 78 579-1167 Rev. K

12 Viewing, Adding, and Editing Lists

A list is a group of similar points, sharing a common name, that can be monitored or controlled as if they were a single point. For example,
when you use a switch to turn on a list populated with control points, all of the points in the list turn on.
The 4007ES includes the following types of lists.
• Automatically Generated, Read-Only System Lists. These lists are created based on the point type assigned to the point. Points
cannot be manually added or deleted from these lists.
• Automatically Generated, Editable System Lists. These are lists created based on the point types you assign to the point. These
lists are only editable after the automatic list generation property is turned off for the list.
• User-Defined Lists. Switches, LEDs, and Custom Control equations all make use of these types of lists. Switches typically control lists
made up of control points (relays), or standard NACs (horns/strobes). LEDs can be programmed to monitor a list and turn ON when
any point in the list activates. Custom Control equations typically use lists of monitor points to indicate when a specific output action
should occur, and the points affected by the output action are typically specified in a user-defined list of control points.
• Zone Lists. This option allows you to create up to 512 lists grouping together points in one defined zone.
This chapter describes the programming of the four list categories, General Lists, WalkTest Lists, Latching Supv Verification Lists, and
Elevator Recall Lists, used by the FACU.
Note: The Alarm Verification Tab can still be accessed through the List Tab, but it cannot be used.
For information on using lists for the Install Mode feature, consult the 4007ES Operator’s Manual (579-1165).
12.1 List Tab

Select the List Tab to display the List Tab window. By default when you select the List Tab, the General List subtab, located on the bottom
left of the window, is selected. This window contains an entry for every list in the system.
The subtabs running across the bottom of the window allow you to display only the lists associated with a specific system category. For
example, clicking on the alarm verification subtab displays only the lists associated with alarm verification.
12.2 Sort Function

The Sort function allows you to sort and display lists in ascending or descending order based on list-specific criteria (the criteria shown in
the Sort Dialog is different for each type of list). To sort lists, do one of the following:
Figure 44: Sort Window

• Press F5 function key. When the Sort Dialog (shown above) appears, click on the Column drop-down list box to select the criteria to
use for the sort operation. Next, select whether the sort should be in Ascending or Descending order and click on OK.
• Click on a column title. Clicking on one of the column titles in the List Tab window automatically sorts the list in descending order.
Clicking on the same column title again sorts the lists in ascending order.
• Right click in the list window. Right Click in the list window. When the list of options appears, select Sort. Click on the Column drop-
down list box to select the criteria to use for the sort. Next, select whether the sort should be in Ascending or Descending order and
click on OK.
12.3 Custom Label Spell Check

Spell Check allows you to validate the spelling of custom labels. Using Spell Check, incorrectly spelled words can be automatically corrected
or suggested alternatives can be substituted.
1. Position the pointer in the point list and press the F7 button. (Alternatively, you can right-click in the List window and select Spell
Check when the list of options appears.)
2. Correct the misspelled word in any of the following ways. (Use the Ignore and Ignore All buttons to ignore the misspelled word.)
- Click on the Change or Change All button to accept the suggested spelling in the “Change to” field.
- Type the correct spelling in the “Change to” field and press the Change or Change All button.
page 79 579-1167 Rev. K

- Scroll through the Suggestions drop-down list, click on one of the entries, and then click on the Change or Change All field.
The Search and Find functions allow you to specify a specific search criteria (such as a specific custom label) and then search the List
Window for the selected data.
1. Position the pointer in the List Window and press the CTRL + F key combination. (Alternatively, you can right click in the List
Window and select Search or Find from the list that appears.)
2. Enter the Search text in the Search What field. Click on the Search in Column field and select the column in which to search. Click
on Search Next to start the search.
3. Press the F3 key to continue searching the List Window for another occurrence of the item you are searching.
12.4 Managing Points

Default custom control programming within the system automatically adds points to system lists based on their point type, a process
known as auto list generation, or autogen. For example, adding a signal point with the SSIGNAL point type automatically adds the point to
system list L8, Fire Alarm Points Off on Silence.
In some applications, however, you need to turn a system list's autogen property off, so that you can manually move points into or out of
the system list. This is particularly true when editing WalkTest, Latching Supv Verification, and Elevator Recall groups.
Be aware that when working with the system lists, four icons are used to indicate the status of the system list.
This symbol represents an auto-generated list with the autogen property turned on. When autogen is turned on, points cannot be
manually moved into or out of the list.
This symbol represents an auto-generated list whose autogen property cannot be altered. The list is permanently set to autogen on
and cannot be edited.
This symbol represents an auto-generated list with the autogen property turned off.
N/A Indicates that the list is not automatically generated.
A system list's autogen property can be turned on and off in one of two places:
• General List Tab. Clicking on the General List tab displays all lists (system and user) currently defined on the panel. Refer to “Turning
Autogen Off and On from the General List Tab” for specific information on doing this.
• WalkTest, Latching Supv Verification, Elevator Recall Tabs. Each of these tabs displays a window that allows you to move points
into the appropriate lists. Within each window, you can toggle the autogen property to allow points to be moved into and out of the
lists. Refer to the specific section for information on turning off autogen for Latching Supv Verification, WalkTest, or elevator recall.
12.5 Turning Autogen Off and On from the General List Tab
1. Click on the List tab at the top of the programmer.
2. Click on the General List subtab at the bottom of the window.
3. Right click on the list whose autogen property you want to change.
Select Properties from the list that appears. A dialog similar to Figure 45 appears.
Figure 45: List Properties Window

4. Click on the AutoGen field and change the setting.
page 80 579-1167 Rev. K

12.6 Basic Operations

User-defined lists allow a range of points to be controlled (turned on or off, for example) by turning a switch on, or via a Custom Control
command. Lists associated with LEDs allow the status of system attributes or components to be monitored.
12.7 Adding a User-Defined List

To add a general-purpose list and populate it with points:
1. Open the List Window by selecting the List Tab at the top of the Programmer.
2. Open the TagList window by either pressing the Insert key or right clicking in the List Window and selecting Add List.
3. You can select points for the list using a combination of the following three methods. When you select points, the TagList window
adds the “>>” character to the left of the point to indicate that the point is tagged.
- Use the spacebar to select/deselect specific points. Click on the point you want to select and then press the spacebar once to tag
the point; press it again to deselect the point.
- Click on the Tag All icon, located at the top of the TagList window. This selects every point in the Taglist.
- Click on the Tag by Type dialog to tag points based on their point type or device type.
- Click on Clear All Tags (eraser) to erase all the tags.
- Click on Tags Up to sort the tagged points to the top of the list.
- Click on Sort to sort either HW Ref, Point Name, Device Type, Point Type or Custom Label columns in the TagList window in
ascending or descending order
- Click on Filter to sort points according to predefined criteria, such as: Device Type, Point Type and Custom Label.
- Click on Search to look for a point in one of the five columns in the TagList window.
- Click on Help to open the ES Panel Online Help.
4. Click on the OK button in the TagList window. A dialog box appears, prompting you to name the list. Enter descriptive text and
click on OK.
12.8 Editing an Existing User-Defined List

To edit an existing list (i.e., add additional points or delete points from the list):
1. Open the list's Tag List by either right clicking on the list and selecting Tag List from the menu that appears, or click on the list and
press the F9 key.
2. When the tag list appears, click on the points you want to add or delete. Press the spacebar to toggle whether the point is tagged
(included in the list) or not. Tagged points are identified by the “>>” to the left of the point name.
3. Click on OK to accept the changes.
4. Edit the List Label and the Alternate List Label.
5. Press OK.
12.9 Latching Supv Verification

The ES Panel's Latching Supv Verification (LVS DUCT and LVSUPV) feature activates a supervisory condition when a device crosses the
threshold. This means that the supervisory condition on the panel does not clear until the point restores to normal and a system reset is
performed.
The ES FACU supports both Domestic (United States) and Canadian versions of supervisory verification. Refer to “Selecting Canadian or
Domestic (US) Operation” for information on enabling the Canadian or domestic version of alarm verification.
Moving Points between Groups
By default, initiating devices with a latching verification point type are initially put in Supv Verification Group 0.
To put points into other Supv Verification groups:
2. Click on the Latching Supv Verification tab at the bottom of the List Window.
3. Click on the Supv Verification group into which you want to move points. Right click and select Tag List.
4. Use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each point you want to move into the group. A point is selected when a “>>” appears to
the left of the point. Repeat this step to select other points.
Selecting Canadian or Domestic (US) Operation
Canadian alarm verification works somewhat differently from the domestic (US) version. Table 40 shows Canadian and domestic (US)
operation for the alarm verification feature.
page 81 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 40: Canadian/Domestic Operation

Type Operation
Retard Stage. If a point specified within one of the alarm verification lists enters an alarm state, the system delays
the annunciation of the alarm for 15 seconds
Canadian Operation Reset Stage. When the 15 second timer expires, the system attempts to reset the initiating device for five seconds.
Confirmation Stage. After the five second timer expires, the system evaluates the state of the initiating device for
10 additional seconds. After 10 seconds, if the device is still in alarm, the system immediately annunciates the alarm.
Retard Stage. If a point specified within one of the alarm verification lists enters an alarm state, the system delays
the annunciation of the alarm for 30 seconds
Domestic (US)
Reset Stage. When the timer expires, the system attempts to reset the initiating device for five seconds.
Operation
Confirmation Stage. After the timer expires, the system evaluates the state of the initiating device for up to 120
additional seconds. After this duration, if the device is still in alarm, the system immediately annunciates the alarm.
To select Canadian or Domestic (US) operation ( Figure 46 ), follow these steps:
1. Right click on one of the groups and select Properties. The Alarm Verification Properties dialog appears.
2. Click on the Alarm Verification tab.
3. Click on the drop-down list box and select Canadian or Domestic operation.
Note: You only need to set the Verification Timer field for one of the alarm verification groups. The programmer sets this field to
the same value for all other groups.
Figure 46: Alarm Verification Properties Dialog

Renaming a Group
The default names for the groups are Supv Verification Group 0 through Supv Verification Group 7.
To add a more descriptive name to the group, follow these steps.
1. Right click on the group whose name you want to change and select Properties. The Alarm Verification Properties dialog appears.
2. Click on the List tab in the dialog.
3. Enter a name for the group in the Description field.
4. Click the Apply button, followed by the OK button to close the dialog.
12.10 WalkTest™
WalkTest allows the function of the system's initiating devices and signals to be tested by a single person. Conducting a WalkTest requires
you to perform the following general steps.
• Step 1. Create WalkTest Groups. The ES Panel supports up to eight WalkTest groups. This allows the building to be divided into small
portions for the WalkTest, and allows the rest of the building to be protected by the fire alarm panel. Each group has a list of monitor
points (initiating devices) and a list of the signal circuits that activate when one of the monitor points within the group activates.
• Step 2. Enable WalkTest Options from Front Panel. These options include the following:
- Which WalkTest Group is enabled.
- Whether the group's signals turn on when a monitor point in the same group activates. Turn this option off to perform a silent
WalkTest on the system.
- Whether logging of WalkTest information is enabled or not. (Enable this option to perform a silent WalkTest. Refer to the 4007ES
Operator's Manual (579-1165) for information on setting these options.)
• Step 3. Manually Activate Initiating Devices in Each Group and Interpret Signals. Individually activate each initiating device in the group,
using the manufacturer’s recommended test equipment. Make sure to proceed in a logical manner (i.e., start with the lowest IDNet
address and work toward the highest). Each time you activate an initiating device, the system’s signals pulse a code that allows you to
verify exactly which initiating device triggered the signals. For hardwired monitor zones, the signal code corresponds to the number of
page 82 579-1167 Rev. K

the zone. (For example, if the zone number is eight, the signals pulse eight times to indicate zone eight.) For IDNet devices, the first set
of pulses from the signals correspond to the channel. The signals then pause momentarily and the next set of pulses corresponds to
the number of the device on the channel. For example, if you activate an IDNet smoke detector with an address of M1-25, the signals
would sound once to indicate channel one, pause for a short duration, and then sound two pulses followed by a pause and then five
pulses to indicate device 25. In some cases, immediately after verifying the function of an initiating device, you may also want to verify
its ability to generate a trouble condition. To do this, cause a trouble on the device and then listen to the signals. The signals sound
steady for 4 seconds to indicate trouble conditions, and then reset.
Moving Points between Groups
The WalkTest list consists of eight groups. The purpose of these groups is to allow a technician to conduct a WalkTest in a specific area of a
building (or different buildings), and limit the activation of the building signals to only the intended area.
WalkTest Group 0 initially contains all of the monitor points and all of the signal points wired to the panel. Each WalkTest group consists of
two lines: one for monitor zones and one for signal/relays.
Follow these steps to move points from WalkTest Group 0 (where they are initially placed) into other WalkTest groups. Signal/relay points
can exist in multiple groups, but monitor points can be in only one group at a time.
2. Click on the WalkTest tab at the bottom of the List Window. A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 47 appears.
Figure 47: WalkTest Tab

3. Right click on WalkTest Group 0 and select Properties. A properties dialog appears. Click on the WalkTest tab in the dialog.
Remove the checkmarks from the Monitor and Control checkboxes. Click the Apply button, followed by the OK button to close
the dialog.
4. Select the monitor points to move as follows:
a. Right click on the WalkTest group into which you want to move the points (for example, using Figure 47, right click on the line
called LST WALKTEST GROUP X). When the list of options appears, select Tag List.
b. In the Tag List, use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each monitor point you want to move into the group. Press the space
bar to tag or un-tag points to be added or deleted. A point is selected when a “>>” symbol appears to the left of the point.
c. Repeat these steps to move other monitor points into the group. When you move points, the points are automatically
unselected in WalkTest Group 0 - Monitor Points and moved into the group you chose.
5. Select the signal/relay points to move as follows:
a. Right click on the WalkTest group into which you want to move the signal/relay points (for example, using Figure 47, right click
on the line called LST WALKTEST GROUP X - SIGNALS/RELAYS). When the list of options appears, select Tag List.
b. In the Tag List, use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each signal/relay point you want to move into the group. Press the
spacebar to tag or un-tag points to be added or deleted. A point is selected when a “>>” symbol appears to the left of the point.
c. Repeat these steps to move other signal/relay points into the group.
d. The points that you selected in Step b above are not automatically deleted from WalkTest Group 0 - Signals/Relays list. If you
do not want these points to be in both groups, you need to open up the WalkTest Group 0 - Signals/Relays list and delete the
points. To do this, right click on WalkTest Group 0 - Signals/Relays list. Select Tag List. When the list of points appears, use the
page 83 579-1167 Rev. K

mouse or arrow keys to highlight each point you want to unselect from WalkTest Group 0. Press the spacebar to deselect the
highlighted point. Points do not have the “>>” symbol to their left when they are unselected.
12.10.1 Editing group properties

Each WalkTest group includes a set of properties that allow you to control the way in which points within the group operate.
To edit the properties for a group:
1. Click on the WalkTest tab at the bottom of the List Window.
2. Double click on one of the WalkTest groups to view its properties window.
(Alternatively, you can right click on the group and select Properties from the menu that appears.)
3. Use the guidelines listed below to set the properties for the WalkTest group.
Table 41: WalkTest Group Property Guidelines

Tab Properties
Setting the properties in this tab affects all WalkTest groups.
Monitor. A check in this box means monitor points are automatically inserted in Group 1 - Monitor Zones. If you
uncheck this box, you can move points from one group to another. However, at a later point, if you recheck this box,
the points you previously moved to other groups will be moved back to Group 1.
WalkTest Control. A check in this box means control points (signals/relays) are automatically inserted in Group 0 - Signals/
Relays. If you uncheck this box, you can move points from one group to another. However, at a later point, if you
recheck this box, the points you previously moved to other groups will be moved back to Group 1.
On. Allows you to set the duration of each tone within the PNIS code.
Off. Allows you to set the duration of silence between tones of the PNIS code.
Setting the properties in this tab affects only the selected group.
Monitor. A counter that tracks the number of devices in the group.
Group Control. A counter that tracks the number of devices in the group.
Reset Delay. Allows you to shorten or lengthen the reset time used by the monitor device. For example, increase
the delay in cases where canned smoke does not clear from a smoke detector quickly enough.
Description. Allows you to change the description of the group’s monitor or control lists. For example, you can
List
change the name of the WalkTest Group 0 - Signals/Relays to a more descriptive name, if necessary.
4. After making changes to the WalkTest Group properties, click on the Apply button to apply the changes and then click on OK to
close the window.
12.11 Elevator Recall List

The Elevator Recall list is made up of five groups, each corresponding to an elevator shaft numbered from one to five. Each shaft group
contains three lists - one for the primary recall points, one for the alternate recall points, and one for the shutdown points.
The Elevator Shaft 1 group initially contains all of the system's monitor points and all relays with the following point types - PRIMARY,
ALTERN, and SHAFT (shutdown).
page 84 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 48: Elevator Recall Tab
Moving Between Points:

Follow these steps to move points from Elevator Shaft 1 group (where they are initially placed) into other elevator shaft groups. Signal/relay
points and monitor points can exist in multiple groups at the same time.
2. Click on the Elevator Recall tab at the bottom of the List Window.
3. Select the monitor points to move:
a. Right click on the Elevator Shaft group into which you want to move monitor points (for example, using Figure 48, right click on
the line called LST ELEVATOR SHAFT X PRIMARY MONITOR ZONES). When the list of options appears, select Tag List.
b. In the Tag List, use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each monitor point you want to move into the group. Press the
spacebar to tag or un-tag points to be added or deleted. A point is selected when a “>>” symbol appears to the left of the point.
c. Repeat these steps to move other monitor points into the group.
d. Points that you move from Elevator Shaft 1 Primary Monitor Zones list to another group are not automatically deleted from
Elevator Shaft 1 Primary Monitor Zones list. To delete points from this list, you need to highlight the Elevator Shaft 1 Primary
Monitor Zones list, press F9 to see the tag list, and then highlight the point you want to delete and hit the space bar.
4. Select the signal/relay points to move as follows:
a. Right click on the Elevator Shaft group into which you want to move the signal/relay points (for example, using Figure 48, right-
click on the line called LST ELEVATOR SHAFT X PRIMARY RELAY). When the list of options appears, select Tag List. When the list of
options appears, select Tag List.
b. In the Tag List, use the mouse or arrow keys to highlight each signal/relay point you want to move into the group. Press the
space bar to tag or un-tag points to be added or deleted. A point is selected when a “>>” symbol appears to the left of the point.
c. Repeat these steps for the Alternate and Shaft lists within the selected group.
d. If you want to delete relay points from the Elevator Shaft 1 Primary Relay list, you need to first right click on the Elevator Shaft
1 Primary Relay list, select Properties, and set the AutoGen field to No. Next, press F9 to see the tag list, and then highlight the
point you want to delete and hit the space bar.
Editing Group Descriptions
Each Elevator Recall group includes a description property that allows you to change the label of the group. To edit the group's description:
1. Click on the Elevator Recall tab at the bottom of the List Window.
Double click on the appropriate Elevator Recall list.
2. Edit the description field and click on the Apply button.
Click OK to close the screen.
12.12 Zone Lists

The Zone List tab provides a way to group alarm conditions into zones (up to 512 zones). When grouped into zones, when an alarm occurs,
a list of affected zones is displayed on the panel's touchscreen. It is then possible to touch the zone in alarm to display all the points that
are in alarm in that particular zone.
To create a Zone List:
1. Open the Zone List tab in the programmer.
2. Double click on an empty Zone List. The Zone List Properties window opens.
page 85 579-1167 Rev. K

3. Enter a custom label to describe the Zone List.

4. Enter an alternate custom label to describe the Zone List.
5. Click on the Select Point button; the Tag List window opens.
6. Select the points that you want to include in the list.
page 86 579-1167 Rev. K

13 Custom Control
With Custom control the components of the ES FACU—hardware points, pseudo points, and lists—can be controlled with user-definable
custom control “equations.”
This section describes using Custom Control to create custom programming applications for the ES Panel FACU.
13.1 Custom Control Overview

ES Panel Custom Control — which is a wizard-based application used to create Custom Control Equations — provides a way to override
the ES Panel’s default operation and for the ES Panel to function in a facility-specific way. Each Custom Control equation has a similar form:
one half of the equation, called the input side, is used to monitor the state of specific system inputs (initiating devices, for example). The
other half of the equation, called the output side, is used to control specific system outputs (such as relays, notification appliances). The
output side executes only when the state of the input side is true. Another way to think about Custom Control equations is to consider
them as If/Then commands. If the input side of the equation is true, then execute the output side.
13.2 Role of Lists and Pseudo Points

Using lists and pseudo points (both user-defined and system) improves the efficiency of Custom Control equations and makes it possible
for a range of facility-specific operations to be programmed.
• Digital Pseudo Points. Digital pseudo points store a value of ON or OFF.
• System Digital Pseudo Points, with these you can track when common actions (such as a system reset) have occurred and activate
facility-specific outputs as necessary.
• User-defined digital pseudo points can be used to signal that a specific event has occurred. (For example, turn on a user-defined pseudo
point to indicate when a water tank is full.)
• Analog Pseudo Points. Analog Pseudo Points store analog values that can be used in Custom Control equations.
• System Analog Pseudo Points store analog values (the number 128, for example), and can be used as a threshold value within a Custom
Control equation. (For example, perform some output action when the value of the Number of System Troubles analog pseudo point
(A2) reaches a specific value.)
• User Analog Pseudo Points store user-defined analog values. The exact function of an analog user pseudo depends on its point type—
counter, timer, or analog value.
• List Pseudo Points. With User-Defined Lists you can refer to a specific group of devices using a single reference. For example,
creating a user-defined list called “Floor 1 Pull Stations,” and populating it with only the pull stations from floor 1 provides a way to
monitor all of the pull stations on the floor without writing an equation for each pull station.
13.3 Anatomy of a Custom Control Equation

As mentioned above, every Custom Control equation has an input side, consisting of input statements, and an output side, consisting of
output statements.
Input Statements are typically used to monitor the status of a point or list, or perform an action such as delay, cycle, compare two values,
or save/recall values. Every input statement begins with an Opcode, which is the action that the input is performing (for example, monitor
point status, recall memory register). The Custom Control wizard then displays a series of opcode-specific dialogs. For example if the
Opcode is Point Status, the dialogs prompt the user for Qualifier about the condition (such as, alarm, trouble) and point being monitored.
Figure 49: Input Statement Example

Output Statements are the actions that occur only when the input side of the equation is true. Every output statement begins with an
Opcode, which is the general action that occurs when the input side is true. The opcode is followed by a series of opcode-specific dialogs,
with which you can specify exactly how the selected opcode functions. For example, if you are using the Set Opcode, the wizard displays
a series of dialogs, with which you can specify a qualifier (for example, on, off) and the point (a signal, for example) on which you want the
output action to execute.
Figure 50: Output Statement Example

Using Logical Operators (AND, OR, NOT) you can link multiple input statements to form logical expressions. Logical operators are only used
with input statements and are not used with Output statements. ES Panel Custom Control uses the following logical operators.
• AND Operator. With the AND logical operator you can put a group of points in series so that only the activation of all points at the
page 87 579-1167 Rev. K

same time causes the Output side of the equation to occur. In the following example, Zone1 and Zone2 must both be in alarm (FIRE)
before the output (Hold ON SIG3) executes.
Figure 51: Logical Operator: AND

• OR Operator. With the OR operator you can put a group of points in parallel, meaning the activation of any one of the points causes
the output side of the equation to execute. In the following example, if either Zone1 or Zone2 enters an alarm state, the output (Hold
ON SIG3) executes.
Figure 52: Logical Operator: OR

• NOT Operator. Use the NOT Operator to specify that a condition must not be true in order for the output to execute. In the following
example, the output side of the equation (print message “Smoke not dirty” executes only if the condition of M1-1 is NOT dirty.
Figure 53: Logical Operator: NOT
13.4 Using a Ladder Logic Diagram to Evaluate an Equation

A ladder logic diagram is a “sketch” of the equation used to evaluate (predict the outcome) of a custom control equation before it is
entered into the programmer. Use the following conventions when creating ladder logic diagrams:
• Draw a solid, vertical line on the left side of the sketch to represent the starting point for the equation. Use a vertical dashed line to
divide the sketch into an input side and an output side.
• Use two vertical, parallel lines to represent each input statement. Add text between the lines to describe the input statement.
• Use a circle to represent each output statement. Add text within or beside the circle to describe the output statement. In the following
example, the output side of the equation contains a single output statement, HOLD ON SIG 1. This action only occurs if the input side
of the equation, which monitors point M 2-1 for the presence of a fire condition, is true.
• Represent the OR logical operator by positioning inputs on top of one another as shown in the example below. Represent the AND
logical operator by positioning the inputs beside one another.
page 88 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 54: Logic Diagram

The example shown above can be interpreted as: If point M2-1 or M2-2 or M2-3 and M2-4 are in a trouble state, hold on Relay 1. M2-4 is
the key here. At least one of the three on the left (M2-1, M2-2, and M2-3) must be in a trouble state AND M2-4 must also be in a trouble
state.
13.5 Custom Control Window

Selecting the Custom Control tab from the main programmer window displays the Custom Control Window shown in Figure 55. This
window contains two halves.
• The left half lists user-defined and system-only (non-editable) programs. Click on the + sign to the left of an entry to expand the
contents of that entry.
• The right half of the window is used for creating user-defined Custom Control equations. With the Equation Comment text entry
box you can enter descriptive text explaining the operation of the equation. The Equations Area contains a text entry box for creating
and editing an equation’s input and output statements. The Add button starts the Custom Control Wizard and is used to create
new equations. The Edit button is used to edit existing equations. The Taglist button starts a taglist that can be used for selecting/
deselecting points in an existing equation.
Figure 55: Custom Control Window
page 89 579-1167 Rev. K

13.6 Selecting User Program

Note: You cannot write custom control on InfoAlarm switches and LEDs.
The first step in defining a new custom control equation is to add the equation to a User Programs.
To add a new custom control equation:
1. Right click on one of the user programs, located at the bottom of the program list, and select Add Equation from the list of
options.
Figure 56: Add Equation

2. The Custom Control Program Properties dialog (Figure 57) appears.
Enter a name for the equation in the Label field and click on OK.
Figure 57: Equation Properties

The Equations section of the Custom Control window updates to include the [INPUTS], [END INPUTS] etc, entries.
page 90 579-1167 Rev. K

13.7 Adding Input Statements

The second step in creating a new Custom Control equation is to add input statements to the equation. Repeat the steps in this section
until all input statements in the equation have been defined.
1. In the Equations box, position the cursor just to the right of [INPUTS].
Figure 58: Positioning the Cursor

2. Click Add. The dialog shown in Figure 59 appears.
Figure 59: Select Input Opcode Dialog
3. Click on the drop-down list box, select one of the Opcodes, and click Next.
Opcodes available: Select Opcode, Select Input Qualifier, Select Item, Select Point.
4. The next dialogs displayed by the wizard depend on the Opcode you selected in Step 3.
Follow the Wizard’s windows to create input for the equation.
5. The Finish button becomes available when all dialogs related to the input Opcode have appeared.
Click it to finish defining the input statement.
13.8 Adding Output Statements

The third step in creating a new Custom Control equation is to add output statements to the new equation. Repeat the steps in this
section until all output statements in the equation have been defined.
1. In the Equations box, position the cursor just to the right of [OUTPUTS].
2. Click on the Add button.
The dialog shown in Figure 59 appears.
3. Click on the drop-down list box, select one of the output Opcodes, and click the Next button.
page 91 579-1167 Rev. K

Opcode available: Select Item, Set/Reset Priority, Select Point.

4. The next dialogs displayed by the wizard depend on the Opcode you selected in Step 3.
Follow the Wizard’s windows to create the output for the equation.
5. The Finish button becomes available when all dialogs related to the output Opcode have appeared.
Click it to finish defining the output statement.
13.9 Floor Above/Floor Below Wizard

This application limits the activation of NACs to the floor on which the activated initiating device is located, referred to as the fire floor, and
the floors immediately above and below the fire floor.
Figure 60: Floor Above/Below

In Figure 60, an activated smoke detector or pull station on Floor 3 activates the NACs on Floors 2, 3, and 4.
page 92 579-1167 Rev. K

13.10 Selecting Floor Tab

1. Start the Floor Above/Below Wizard by clicking on the Floor Above/Floor Below Wizard tab, which is located along the bottom left
part of the Custom Control window.
2. Right click in the blank area above the tab. When the list of options appears, select Create Floor Group. (The ES Panel refers
to each set of floor above/below equations as a Floor Group. This is the name of the group or area that the floor above/below
program has control over.) Enter a name for the Floor Group in the dialog that appears.
Figure 61: Create Floor Group
Figure 62: Select Group
page 93 579-1167 Rev. K

13.11 General Information

After you enter a name for the floor group, click Next. A dialog appears, with this dialog you can specify general information about the
application.
Figure 63: Floor Above/Below Data

Specify this information as follows:
• Program #. Use this entry to specify the Custom Control user program in which this application is to be stored. Three programs are
available for user programs.
• Number of Floors. This specifies the total number of floors controlled by the floor above/below equations.
• Control # of Floors Above. When a fire occurs, this setting determines how many floors above the fire floor are notified.
• Control # of Floors Below. When a fire occurs, this setting determines how many floors below the fire floor are notified.
• Type (select all that apply)
- Non-Audio. Select if using non-audio notification appliances
- Smoke. Select this option to control smoke control (damper/AHU) points
Click Next when you are finished.
page 94 579-1167 Rev. K

13.12 Specifying Floor Names

The Floor drop-down list box contains an entry for all floors (i.e., if you set number of floors to 10 in the previous screen, there are 10
entries). To enter a floor's name, first click on the drop-down list box to select the floor and then enter a descriptive label in the Floor Label
text box. Enter any comments in the Comment box at the bottom of the dialog.
Figure 64: Specify Floor Names
13.13 Specifying Input and Static Points

Enter information for the other fields in this screen as follows:
• Alarm Points. Identifies the floor's input points (such as, detectors, pull stations).
• Non-Audio Points. Identifies the floor's non-audio (horns, strobes) notification points.
• Air ON Points. Identifies the pressurization fan and damper ON points.
• Exhaust ON Points. Identifies the exhaust fan and damper ON points.
• Air OFF Points. Identifies the pressurization fan and damper OFF points.
• Exhaust OFF Points. Identifies the exhaust fan and damper OFF points.
For each of these selections, when you click on the button, a taglist appears, with which you can select specific points. Press the space bar
to select a point. A “>>” symbol appears to the left of the point to indicate that it is selected.
Figure 65: Input and Static Points
Note: The user list is created starting from the first available user list and the number of list used depends on the chosen configuration.
Click Next. A dialog containing the Custom Control equations generated by the wizard appears. Click Finish.
page 95 579-1167 Rev. K

13.14 Using the Selective Signaling Wizard

Selective Signaling is typically used to limit the activation of NACs to the area or floor on which an activated initiating devices is located. In
the following example, an activated initiating device on Floor 2 triggers only the NACs located on Floor 2.
Figure 66: Selective Signaling
13.15 Selecting Selective Signaling Wizard Tab

Start the Selective Signaling Wizard by clicking on the Selective Signaling Wizard tab, which is located along the bottom left part of the
Custom Control window.
Right click in the blank area above the tabs. When the list of options appears, select Create Group. (See Figure 67.)
Figure 67: Create Selective Signaling Group

The dialog shown in Figure 67 appears, prompting you for the name of the area/group. Enter a name for the group in the dialog and click
Next.
page 96 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 68: Naming Group
13.16 Setting General Options

After you enter a name for the group, click the Next button. A dialog appears, with this dialog you can specify general information about
the application.
Figure 69: General Information

Specify the following:
• Program #. If necessary, specify an alternate program number for the selective signaling application.
• Number of Signal Zones. Enter the total number of signal zones affected by the application.
- Type (select all that apply).
- Visual. Select to use visual notification appliances in the application.
- Audible. Select to use audible notification appliances in the application.
- TrueAlert Zones (Addressable). Select to use addressable TrueAlert zones (wired to 4009T or TrueAlert Power Supply) in the
application.
- TrueAlert Zones (Non-Addressable). Select to use non-addressable TrueAlert appliances (2-wire with independent control of audibles
and visuals) in the application.
13.17 Setting Zone Names

Click on the Zone drop-down list box and select the zone number. Enter a label for the zone in the Signal Zone Label box. Click on Next to
continue.
page 97 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 70: Zone Names
13.18 Linking Initiating and Notification Points

Using the screen shown below you can link initiating and notification points to one another. If one of the specified initiating devices
activates, only the notification appliances linked to the initiating device activates.
Figure 71: Linking Initiating and Notification Devices

Note:
The user list is created starting from the first available user list and the number of list used depends on the chosen configuration.
1. Click on the button labeled Alarm Points. A tag list appears. Use the up and down arrow keys to move through the list. Use
the spacebar to tag (select) a point. A “>>” symbol appears to the left of the point when it is selected. Click OK to continue. The
previous screen appears.
2. In Notification Points in this Signal Zone, click the notification appliance you want to turn on when the tagged initiating
devices activate. The choices are: Visual Points, Audible Points, TrueAlert Zones (Addressable), and TrueAlert Zones
(Non-Addressable). A tag list appears. Use the up and down arrow keys to move through the list. Use the spacebar to tag
(select) a point. A“>>” symbol appears to the left of the point when it is selected. Click OK to continue. The previous screen
appears.
3. You can also activate other notification signal zones when a tagged initiating device activates. To do this, click on the Notification
Zones button to the right of the Other Signal Zones Notified label. A tag list appears. Use the up and down arrow keys to
move through the list. Use the spacebar to tag (select) a point. A “>>” symbol appears to the left of the point when it is selected.
Click OK to continue. The previous screen appears.
4. Click Next to continue. A screen showing the equations created by the wizard appears. Click Finish.
page 98 579-1167 Rev. K

13.19 Using the Sounder/Relay Base Wizard

Using the Sounder/Relay Base Wizard you can change the default operation of single station smoke detectors. Note that the default
operation—sounder activates when the alarm threshold is passed and deactivates when the smoke level drops back below the threshold
—is programmed using the TPHOTO device type. To use the wizard to change the default operation, you must assign a device type of
SPHOTO or RPHOTO to the device.
1. Start the Sounder/Relay Base Wizard by clicking on the Sounder/Relay Base Operation Wizard tab, which is located along the
bottom left part of the Custom Control window.
2. Right click in the blank area above the tabs. When the list of options appears, select Create Point Group. A figure similar to Figure
72 appears.
Figure 72: Creating Point Group
3. Enter a Name for the group in the Point Group field and enter any comments in the Comments box. Click Next to continue.
Refer to the appropriate section below for specific information.
13.20 Activating Base on Alarm

Activate base on Alarm configures the single station detectors to activate when the alarm threshold is reached and to turn off on either
reset or silence.
1. To select this option, select the radio button labeled Alarm—Activate Base on Alarm.
2. If necessary, you can select a different Custom Control user program. To do this, click on the control to the right of Program # and
select the appropriate program number. Click Next to continue.
Figure 73: Sounder/Relay Base Information

3. A dialog similar to the following appears. Select the operation for the device as either “Hold Device ON until Reset” (sounder or
relay remains activated until reset) or “Hold Device on until Silence” (sounder or relay remains activated until signal silence).
page 99 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 74: Specifying Device Operation

Note: List number L256 is the next available list. It is not specifically L256.
4. Click on the Group Points button. A tag list, containing single station points appears. Use the up and down arrow keys to move
through the list. Use the spacebar to tag (select) a point. A “>>” symbol appears to the left of the point when it is selected.
Figure 75: Tagging Points
5. Click OK to continue. The previous screen appears. Press Next to continue. A screen showing the Custom Control statements
appears. Click Finish.
13.21 Common Ground Fault LED Control

Select and utilize the LED Yellow point type for custom control ground fault LED trouble indications:
Program the Color User Interface, Point Editing Tab as follows:
HW Ref. Switch Mode Ref. Address Ref. Label HW Ref. LED Mode
3-1-1 SMPL 3-2-1 ON P535 Ground Fault
3-1-2 SMPL 3-2-2 SMPL
3-1-3 SMPL 3-2-3 SMPL
Add the following custom control equation to the 4007ES IDNAC Addressable Panel:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
1-0-9 | CARDSTAT | CSP | POSTIVE EARTH
OR STATUS ON
1-0-10 | CARDSTAT | CSP | NEGATIVE EARTH
OR STATUS ON
1-0-27 | CARDSTAT | CSP | POSITIVE EARTH ON RUI
OR STATUS ON
1-0-28 | CARDSTAT | CSP | NEGATIVE EARTH ON RUI
OR STATUS ON
2-0-8 | CARDSTAT | CSP | IDNET+ EARTH TROUBLE
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
page 100 579-1167 Rev. K

P535 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | COMMON GROUND FAULT LED

[END OUTPUTS]
Add the following custom control equation to the 4007ES Hybrid Panel:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
1-0-3 | CARDSTAT | CSP | POSITIVE EARTH GROUND
OR STATUS ON
1-0-4 | CARDSTAT | CSP | NEGATIVE EARTH GROUND
OR STATUS ON
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P535 | DIGITAL | UTILITY | COMMON GROUND FAULT LED
[END OUTPUTS]
13.22 Suppression Release Introduction

This section describes how to configure Suppression Release Hazard Areas using the programmer.
Suppression Release refers to the release of water or chemical agents in response to alarm conditions. Suppression Release operation is
limited to hazard areas, which are collections of initiating devices, signaling appliances, and releasing peripherals, powered by NACs, that
are set up to respond to alarm conditions.
page 101 579-1167 Rev. K

13.23 Suppression Release General Capabilities

The 4007ES panel is capable of controlling either a preaction/deluge sprinkler system or an agent release extinguishing system.
• The number of hazard areas that the 4007ES panel is capable of monitoring is restricted by the hardware and point capacity of the
panel. Each hazard is defined as a separate area containing its own 4090-9005 or -9006 releasing peripheral and solenoid.
• Table 42 lists the number of Notification Appliance Circuits required by each hazard area of the 4007ES.
Table 42: Number of NACs for Hazard Area
Each hazard area requires three to five conventional or virtual NACs, depending on the use case and options selected. One conventional
NAC is required to power the Suppression Release Peripheral (SRP). The other outputs can either use conventional NACs or Virtual
Notification Appliance Circuits (VNACs). The information below describes the operation associated with the available suppression release
NAC/VNAC point types.
- The RELSIG circuit for audible notification typically consists of a horn and provides escalating cadence patterns to identify the stage of
events (i.e., first alarm, confirmed alarm, release).
- The RELWVIS circuit for visual notification is used to alert when the first stage of a cross-zoned releasing sequence occurs or when a
delayed action is used.
- The RELVIS circuit for visual notification is activated when the releasing output activates and remains on until System Reset. It can
be used in systems without cross-zoning and without a delay timer to indicate the release output activation. It can also be used in
systems with cross-zoning or a delay timer to provide a separate indication that the release output activation has occurred outside
entrances of the hazard area.
- The SUPRELS circuit controls the power to the SRP. This circuit must be a conventional NAC, not an addressable VNAC.
- The RELISIG circuit controls audible and visual notification appliances when the system is configured to have a NYC Abort Investigation
timer. Although an audible signal type, this NAC can connect sounders and strobes to the same circuit as required by NYC
requirements. The audible portion of these appliances activates on steady when the NYC investigation timer activates and turn off
when the investigation timer reaches zero. The NYC Abort option does not comply with UL 864.
• The releasing peripheral activates its output, which attaches to the solenoid, only when the designated initiating devices and the NAC
connected to the release peripheral are active at the same time. This prevents a malfunctioning input from triggering a release.
• Releasing signaling patterns are as follows:
- Dual Detector Application. Temporal on first alarm (can also be configured as 20 beats per minute). Signal changes to 120 BPM on
second alarm. When the releasing appliances activate, the tone changes to Steady.
- Single Detector Application. When an initiating device in the hazard area activates, the system does one of two things: If a delay timer
is used, the NACs play a 120 BPM signal as the timer counts down. This changes to a Steady pattern when release occurs. If no delay
timer is used, the releasing appliances activate as soon as a single detector enters an alarm state. In this case, the NACs sound a
Steady tone pattern and no distinct pre-discharge tone pattern plays.
- Alarm Triggered by Activation of Manual Release Station. If a delay timer is used, the system plays a 120 BPM signal on the NACs as
the timer counts down. When the delay timer reaches zero, the releasing outputs activate and the signal changes to a steady tone.
page 102 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 76: Suppression Release Overview
13.24 Applying Appliqué

A self-adhesive appliqué (4010-9830 English or 4010-9830CAF French) must be ordered separately and applied to the front door of the
unit when it is used as a suppression release system. This appliqué is used to indicate that the 4007ES panel is programmed to work as a
releasing panel and all releasing circuits must be disabled prior to servicing. Apply the label to any area on the front door.
13.25 Suppression Release Device and Point Types

Suppression release device and point types are shown in the table below. Assign the applicable device and point types to the suppression
points before programming hazard area information.
Refer to section Programming Points inside the Online Help of the 4007ES Panel Programmer for information on programming the points.
page 103 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 43: Valid Device and Point Types

Point Type Description Valid Device Types AutoGenerates to Following Lists:
RELSIG Releasing audible SIGA, SIGB, CHAN2A, CHAN2B, CHAN4A, L0 - Coding Group 0
circuit CHAN4B, PCHAN4A, PCHAN4B, SIGIAM, L1 - Coding Group 1
NULLSIG, PS_SIGA, PS_SIGB, MFIO_SIGA,
L50 - Walk Test Group 0 - signals/relays
MFIO_SIGB, MSOUND, MSIGA, MSIGB, VNAC
L139- Local Mode Operation Points
RELISIG NYC investigation SIGA, SIGB, CHAN2A, CHAN2B, CHAN4A, L0 - Coding Group 0
bell/strobe circuit CHAN4B, PCHAN4A, PCHAN4B, SBZAM, SAZAM, L1 - Coding Group 1
NULLSIG, PS_SIGA, PS_SIGB, MFIO_SIGA, L48 - TrueAlert Zone OFF on SILENCE
RELVIS Release visual SIGA, SIGB, CHAN2A, CHAN2B, CHAN4A, L0 - Coding Group 0
circuit CHAN4B, PCHAN4A, PCHAN4B, SBZAM, SAZAM, L13 - Fire Alarm Visuals OFF on RESET
SIGIAM, NULLSIG, PS_SIGA, PS_SIGB, MFIO_SIGA,
L49 - TrueAlert Zone OFF on RESET
RELWVIS Releasing warning SIGA, SIGB, CHAN2A, CHAN2B, CHAN4A, L0 - Coding Group 0
visual signal CHAN4B, PCHAN4A, PCHAN4B, SBZAM, SAZAM, L13 - Fire Alarm Visuals OFF on RESET
SIGIAM, NULLSIG, PS_SIGA, PS_SIGB, MFIO_SIGA, L49 - TrueAlert Zone OFF on RESET
SSABRT Shorted MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50,
Suppression Agent 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM,
Abort Zone MBZAM
SSDUMP Shorted MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50, L18 - General Fire Alarm Monitor Zones
Suppression Agent 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM, L30 - Alarm Verification Group 0
Manual Dump MBZAM, ADRPUL, CANPUL
L61 - Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones
SUPRELS Suppression RELEASE, SIGA, SIGB, CHAN2A, CHAN2B,
Release Output CHAN4A, CHAN4B, PCHAN4A, PCHAN4B,
SBZAM, SIGIAM, SAZAM, NULLSIG, PS_SIGA,
PS_SIGB, MFIO_SIGA, MFIO_SIGB
SUPRELS Suppression (Agent OUTPUT
(Graphic24) Discharge) Release
Output
SUPDET Suppression Agent MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50, L18 - General Fire Alarm Monitor Zones
Monitor Zone 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM, L30 - Alarm Verification Group 0
MBZAM, ADRDET, GENIAM, NULLMON,500PSM, L61 - Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones
APM500, CM520, DM520, DMC520, IHN135,
IHN200, 500CMB, 500CMC, 500CMAB, L139- Local Mode Operation Points
500CMAC, 500CMAD, 500CMAE, TFXCDM,
501CMB, LPBD520, MD501, MD501EX, MD901,
MDR901,MDS901, MF401, MF501,MF501HA,
MF501EX, MF901, MF901HA, MFR901HA,
MFS901HA,MER901, MFS901, MR501, MR501EX,
MR501T, MR501TEX, MR901, MRR901, MRS901,
MS502EX, MU901, MU912, S251, S252PLUS, All
PHOTO Device types, All ION Device types, all
HEAT Device types
SUPDUMP Suppression Agent MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50, L18 - General Fire Alarm Monitor Zones
Manual Dump 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM, L30 - Alarm Verification Group 0
MBZAM, ADRPUL, CANPUL L61 - Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones
page 104 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 43: Valid Device and Point Types

Point Type Description Valid Device Types AutoGenerates to Following Lists:
SUPABRT Suppression Agent MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50,
Abort Zone 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM,
MBZAM
SUPPRES Suppression Agent MONA, MONB, SMONA, SMONB, SCAN50, L18 - General Fire Alarm Monitor Zones
Pressure Mon 4002MA, 4002MB, IAM, SECIAM, MAZAM, L30 - Alarm Verification Group 0
MBZAM
L61 - Coding Group 1 - Monitor Zones
13.26 Suppression Release Signal Responses

This section describes the responses of the suppression release signals.
Alarm Silence/System Reset
- RELSIG, RELISIG turn off on alarm silence.
- RELSIG, RELISIG resounds after alarm silence when there is a state change on those signals (for example, 2nd detector activates in a
cross-zone, delay expires, abort activated).
- RELVIS, RELWVIS turn off on system reset.
- If not already silenced, RELSIG, RELISIG will turn off on system reset.
- SRP output stays on until system reset.
13.27 Suppression Release Use Cases
13.27.1 Use Case: Common Configuration

The following use cases share some common configuration, listed in this section. Specific configuration is listed under each use case.
Panel: A 4007ES IDNAC with the following points.
IDNet points:
• Manual release point: MBZAM with SSDUMP point type at address M1-11-0.
• Automatic Release Points: Two Smoke detector devices with SUPDET point types at addresses at M1-18-0 and M1-19-0.
• Abort Switches: One IAM with point type SUPABRT at address M1-35-0.
• SRP: One SRP (RELEASE) with point type SUPRELS at address M1-36-0.
True Alert Zone

• SIG913 is configured as RELSIG (Releasing horn circuit) and has at least one audible device from the IDNAC channel.
• SIG914 is configured as RELWVIS (Releasing Warning Visual Signal) and has at least one visual device from the IDNAC channel.
AuxNAC
• SIG3 set as SUPRELS point type.
Create a Hazard Area in Custom Control, Suppression Release Wizard

• Create Hazard Area window
a. Hazard Area Name: Area 1
b. Comments: n/a
Initial data window

• Program#: 3.
Note: It is always 3 for a 4007ES.

• Check Enhanced Power Supply because we have an IDNAC channel.
• Check Cross Zone (Dual Detector).
• Set First Stage Audible Notification to Temporal.
page 105 579-1167 Rev. K

Note: The other options are Slow March Time (March20) and Fast March Time (March120). Fast March Time should not be used because
the Second Stage Audible Notification is fixed at Fast March Time.
Timer Configurations
• Set Manual Release at 30 seconds and check the box.
• Set Detector Release Delay at 60 seconds and check box.
Hazard Area Lists window

• Press Manual Release Points and select the manual release point at M1-11-0.
• Press Automatic Release Points and select Automatic Release Points at M1-18-0 and M1-19-0.
• Press Abort Switches and select Abort Point at address M1-35.
• Press Release Warning Points and select SIG914.
• Press Suppression Dump Points and select SIG3 and M1-36-0.
• Press Release Notification Audible NACs and select SIG913.
13.27.2 Use Case #1: 10 Second Delay Abort

Specific Configuration
Abort Logic Window
• Set System Release after GREATER of Remaining Time Delay or 10 seconds .
Table 44 describes actions and their corresponding responses.
Table 44: 10 Second Delay Abort, Actions and Responses
Action Response
First detector is triggered. RELSIG turns on at low cadence (Temporal). RELWVIS turns on.
Manual device or second detector is triggered. RELSIG turns on at high cadence (March120). RELWVIS stays on.
Abort switch is pressed and maintained for approximately 60 While the abort switch is pressed the RELSIG stays in high cadence
seconds after the RELSIG is in high cadence. and RELWVIS stays on.
RELSIG stays on in high cadence. RELWVIS stays on for 10 seconds
or for the remainder of the automatic release timer, whichever is
Release the Abort Switch
greater. When the timer expires RELSIG and SUPRELS turn on steady
and RELWVIS remains on.
13.27.3 Use Case #2:NYC Abort

Specific configuration
True Alert Zone
• SIG912 is configured as RELISIG (Releasing Investigation Circuit) and has at least one audible device from the IDNAC channel.
Abort Logic Window
• Set NYC
Hazard Area Lists Window
• Press Release Investigation Points and select SIG912.
Table 45: NYC Abort, Actions and Responses
Action Response
First detector is triggered. RELISIG turns on steady.
• RELISIG turns off.
Second detector is triggered. • RELWVIS turns on.
• RELSIG turns on at high cadence (March120).
page 106 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 45: NYC Abort, Actions and Responses

Action Response
• Automatic Release Timer countdown is reset to the original value.
• RELISIG turns on steady for 90 seconds.
• RELWVIS turns off.
• RELSIG turns off.
Press and release the abort
switch. Note: If the abort switch is pressed and released after the second alarm while the investigation timer is
running, the investigation timer will not be reset and will continue to countdown until it reaches zero. When
the investigation timer reaches zero, RELSIG and RELWVIS will turn back on and the automatic release timer
will begin to countdown. If the abort switch is pressed and released again while the automatic release timer
is running, a new full cycle of investigation and automatic release delay will start.
• RELISIG turns off.
• RELWVIS turns on.
Investigation Timer expires • RELSIG turns on at high cadence (March120) for the full period of the Automatic Release Timer.
• RELSIG turns on steady, RELWVIS stays on, SUPRELS NAC turns on steady and SRP output turns on
steady after the full Automatic Release Timer expires.
13.27.4 Use Case #3: IRI Abort

True Alert Zone
• SIG915 is configured as RELVIS (Releasing Visual Signal) and has at least one visual device from the IDNAC channel.
Abort Logic window
• Set IRI Abort.
• Press Release Notification Visible NACs and select SIG915.
Table 46: IRI Abort, Actions and Releases
Action Response
First detector is triggered. RELSIG turns on low cadence (Temporal). RELWVIS turns on.
Abort switch is pressed and
No change.
held.
Second detector is triggered
while abort switch is still • RELSIG goes on high cadence (March120). RELWVIS stays on.
pressed. Keep the abort
• SRP output does not turn on including after Automatic Release Timer expires.
switch pressed for more than
one minute.
After 10 seconds or the remaining value of the release timer, whichever is greater, RELSIG goes on steady.
RELWVIS stays on. RELVIS goes on. SUPRELS NAC goes on steady and SRP output goes on steady.
Note:
Abort switch is released • If a second alarm condition occurs while the Abort switch is still pressed, the automatic release timer
resets to the value that has been configured for it. It begins to count down and will stop at 10 seconds.
When the abort switch is released, the panel starts the release timer countdown at the value of the
countdown timer or at 10 seconds, whichever is greater.
• Pressing the abort switch again and releasing it, when a second alarm is triggered, has no effect.
13.27.5 Use Case #4: Immediate Release

This use case is the simplest case. No abort switch, no release timers and no cross zone verification.
IDNET points
• Manual release point: MBZAM with SSDUMP point type at address M1-11-0.
• Automatic Release Points: One Smoke detector devices with SUPDET point types at address at M1-18-0.
• SRP: One SRP (RELEASE) with point type SUPRELS at address M1-36-0.
True Alert Zone
• SIG913 is configured as RELSIG (Releasing horn circuit) and has at least one audible device from the IDNAC channel.
page 107 579-1167 Rev. K

• SIG915 is configured as RELVIS (Releasing Visual Signal) and has at least one visual device from the IDNAC channel.
AuxNAC
• SIG3 set as SUPRELS point type.
Create a Hazard Area in Custom Control, Suppression Release Wizard,
• Create Hazard Area window.
1. Hazard Area Name: Area 1
2. Comments: n/a
Initial data window
• Program#: 3
Note: It is always 3 on a 4007ES.
• Check Enhanced Power Supply because we have an IDNAC channel.

• Uncheck Cross Zone (Dual Detector).
Note: Without cross zone the audible notification automatically defaults to Fast March Time (March120).
Abort Logic Window
• Set Immediate Release (No Delay) .
Timer Configurations
• Uncheck Manual Release to set it a 0.
• Uncheck Detector Release Delay to set it at 0.
• Press Manual Release Points and select the manual release point at M1-11-0.
• Press Automatic Release Points and select Automatic Release Points at M1-18-0.
• Do not add any devices to Abort Switches.
• Do not add any devices to Release Warning Points.
• Press Suppression Dump Points and select SIG3 and M1-36-0.
• Press Release Notification Audible NACs and select SIG913.
• Press Release Notification Visible NACs and select SIG915.
Table 47: Immediate Release, Actions and Responses
Action Response
First detector is triggered RELSIG turns on steady. RELVIS turns on. SUPRELS NAC turns on steady and SRP output turns on steady.
13.28 Step 1. Defining Hazard Area

1. Click the Custom Control tab.
2. Click the Suppression Release Wizard subtab. A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 77 appears.
page 108 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 77: Create Hazard Area Menu Choice
3. Right click on the blank area of the screen labeled Hazard Area.
4. Click on Create Hazard Area from the menu that appears. A screen similar to the one shown below appears.
5. Enter a name for the hazard area in the Hazard Area Name field and enter any applicable comments. Click Next to continue.
Figure 78: Naming Hazard Area
13.29 Step 2. Specifying Initial Data and Options

The next screen, shown in Figure 79, prompts you to specify the following information.
• Custom Control Program Number. This is the program number under which the suppression release custom control equations
created by the wizard are stored. In the case of a 4007ES, Program # 3 is the only one that can be used.
• Cross Zone (Dual Detector). Check this box to enable cross-zoned (dual detector) operation. Cross-zoned applications require that
two automatic initiating devices in different areas enter an alarm state before the releasing appliance can activate.
Note: To achieve true cross zoning, the initiating devices must be wired to either Monitor cards or ZAMs. Dual detector operation, which
requires two detectors to activate, can use TrueAlarm initiating devices.
page 109 579-1167 Rev. K

13.6.2.1 ítem 4 y 5
• First Stage Audible Notification. Click on the drop down list box and set the audible notification appliance pattern used for the first
stage of a cross-zone (dual detector) alarm. Choices include Slow March Time, Temporal, or Fast March time*. When cross-zoned (dual
detector) is enabled, this is the audible NAC tone pattern plays following activation of the first detector. When the second detector
activates, the pattern is always Fast March. This option is not applicable if Cross Zone (Dual Detector) check box is not selected.
Note: *Fast March time is not recommended, for example, there would be no change in pattern when transitioning from the first stage
alarm to the second stage alarm.
Figure 79: Cross Zone (Dual Detector) Options

Click Next to continue programming when you have set these options to the appropriate values.
page 110 579-1167 Rev. K

13.30 Step 3. Specifying Abort Switch Operation

Using the next screen you can specify the action that occurs when the abort switch is released.
Important: For all choices except the International Risk Insurers (IRI) Abort method, pressing and holding the abort switch prevents agent
release for as long as the switch is held in, unless a Manual Release switch is operated, which overrides the Abort Switch operation. For IRI
Abort, the abort switch must be pressed and held before the second alarm activation occurs to prevent release.
Figure 80: Abort Switch Options

Set this option to one of the following choices:
• Immediate. If a confirmed alarm exists, for example, two detectors on separate zones for a cross zoned system or a single detector
in a single alarm system and the release timer equals zero, the Suppression Release peripheral activates its output immediately upon
release of the abort switch.
• 10 Second Delay. If a confirmed alarm exists (for example two detectors on separate zones for a cross zoned system or a single
detector in a single alarm system), the Suppression Release peripheral activates its output after a 10 second delay.
• 10s/Remaining. Similar to the 10 Second Delay except when the abort switch is released, the delay used is the remaining time left on
Automatic Release Delay Timer or 10 seconds, whichever is greater.
• IRI Abort -- Cross Zoned System Only (Does not comply with UL 864). When a single alarm is present, pressing the abort switch
prevents the output on the Suppression Release Peripheral from activating. If a second alarm condition occurs while the Abort switch
is still pressed, the investigation timer continues to countdown and the automatic release timer resets to its configured value. When
the investigation timer reaches zero, the automatic release delay timer will begin to countdown. When the abort switch is released,
the panel starts the release timer countdown at the value of the release timer or at 10 seconds, whichever is greater.
• Original Delay (Does not comply with UL 864). If a confirmed alarm exists, such as two detectors on a cross-zoned system or a
single detector in a single alarm system, releasing the abort switch resets the delay timer interval to the value set for the Automatic
Release Delay Timer.
• NYC Abort (Does not comply with UL 864). Pressing the Abort switch does the following:
• Warning bell and strobe turn on (NAC associated with RELISIG point type).
• Evacuation visuals turn off (NAC associated with RELWVIS point type).
• Evacuation audibles turn off (NAC associated with RELSIG point type).
• Automatic Release Timer countdown stops at its current value.
Releasing the Abort switch starts the 90-second Investigate Timer. When the Investigative Timer expires, the following occurs:
• Warning bell and strobe turns off
page 111 579-1167 Rev. K

• Evacuation visuals turn on

• Evacuation audibles turn on at 120 BPM
• Reload the Automatic Release Timer with the programmed value
If the abort switch is pressed and released after the second alarm while the investigation timer is running, the investigation timer does not
reset and continues to countdown until it reaches zero. When the investigation timer reaches zero, the evacuation visuals and audibles
turn back on and the automatic release timer begins to countdown. If the abort switch is pressed and released again while the automatic
release timer is running, a new full cycle of investigation and automatic release delay starts.
Click Next to continue.
13.31 Step 4. Setting Timer Options

Using the next screen you can set values for the Manual Release, Detector Release, and the Releasing Cutout.
Figure 81: Timer Configuration Options

Use the following guidelines when setting these values:
• Manual Release. The Manual Release Time Delay is a programmable timer that specifies the delay between the activation of a
manual release switch and the activation of releasing appliances. The default setting for this timer is 10 seconds. A setting of 0 causes
the releasing appliances to immediately activate after a manual release switch activates. This delay is programmable from 0-30
seconds. 13.6.2.1 ítem 6
• Detector Release Delay. The Automatic Release Time Delay is a programmable timer that delays the activation of the releasing
appliance circuits. This timer starts immediately after receiving a confirming alarm (cross zoned system) or a first alarm (single
alarm system). When the timer expires, the releasing appliances activate (assuming the abort switch is not active). This delay is
programmable from 0-60 seconds.This delay makes evacuation of the protected space possible before the agent is released. Consider
a delay timer when occupants could be present in the protected space.
- Cross-Zoned System. The occupants receive a warning signal of the first alarm and receive an evacuation signal on the second
alarm. Implementing a warning signal makes it possible to investigate the alarm before the second (confirmed) alarm. Implementing
a delay on the second alarm gives time for occupants to evacuate, and where required, for the ventilation fans and dampers to shut
down prior to the release activation.
- Single Alarm System. A selection of “0” seconds activates the releasing circuit at the same time as when the NACs signal an initial
warning. A delay provides time for occupants to evacuate, and where required, for the ventilation fans and dampers to shut down
prior to the release activation.
• Releasing Cutout. The Releasing Cutout Timer is a programmable timer that specifies the length of time the output on the
Suppression Release Peripheral is held on. When the timer expires, the solenoid turns off (or cuts out), which stops the water flow
or release of the extinguishing agent. This option is typically used on Deluge systems and is not intended for use with all releasing
page 112 579-1167 Rev. K

systems and releasing devices. A selection of “0” means the solenoid does not “cut out” and remains on until the system is reset. The
Countdown Timer is programmable from 0-30 minutes.
13.32 Step 5. Specifying Hazard Area Points

The next screen, shown in Figure 82, contains seven buttons, each corresponding to one of the suppression-release system lists. Points are
automatically assigned to the appropriate list based on the suppression release point type assigned to the point.
Figure 82: Tag List Buttons
Note: List numbers L256 through L262 are the next available lists. They are not specifically L256 through L262.
Each button accesses a tag list, with this you can select (tag) the specific points to associate with the hazard. Follow these steps to tag
points:
1. Click on the button corresponding to the type of suppression points you want to select. The TagList screen shown in Figure 83
appears.
2. The TagList screen displays all points with the relevant suppression release point type. To select a specific point for inclusion in
the hazard area being programmed, click on the point to highlight it and then press the space bar.
page 113 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 83: Tagging Points

3. Click OK when you are finished selecting points. The screen containing the Tag List buttons (Figure 82) reappears. Click Next
when all points associated with this hazard area have been chosen.
Review the options selected for the hazard area using the screen shown in Figure 84. Use the scroll bar to check the selections for all
options. If necessary, click Back to return to one of the option selection screens to change a choice. When all of the options are set
correctly, click Finish.
Figure 84: Reviewing Options
page 114 579-1167 Rev. K

When you click Finish, an icon and label appear in the list of hazard areas shown in Figure 85.
Figure 85: Icon Added Following Programming
13.33 Deleting Hazard Area

To delete an existing Hazard Area:
1. Right click the name of the hazard area (see Figure 85) and select the Delete Hazard Area option. A dialog appears warning you
that all Custom Control equations associated with the hazard area will be deleted.
2. Click Delete associated list and pseudo points
3. Click Yes
Figure 86: Deleting Hazard Areas
13.34 Editing Existing Hazard Area

Existing hazard areas can be edited in the following ways:
• Using the Wizard. Right-click the name of an existing equation (see Figure 85) and select Edit Hazard Area. The wizard screens
reappear in sequence. Reselect the options for the hazard area as necessary.
• Properties. Right click on the name of an existing equation and select Properties. A properties sheet, containing a series of tabs
across the top, appears. Each tab corresponds to one of the groups of suppression options. Click on each tab and reselect the
options for the hazard area as necessary.
• Custom Control Equations. Right click on the name of an existing equation and select Manual Edit. Edit the Custom Control
equations using Manual Edit, this eliminates the ability to use the wizard to edit the equations. After selecting this option, click on
Custom Control subtab on the far left at the bottom of the Custom Control window. Select the program containing the hazard area's
equations.
page 115 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 87: Manual Edit
13.35 Scheduling Options for Self-Test Wizard

Select the following options in the Self-Test Wizard to set up one or more schedules to run the scheduled self-tests:
• Frequency
• Day
• Time
• Triggering pseudo point
Note: An automatic self-test can be launched from the TSW instead of the FACU. The pseudo point is a trigger to execute the scheduled
self-test. The triggering point is optional. The purpose is to select a digital pseudo point to launch a scheduled self-test by overriding the
usual date and time condition. For example, a public TSW digital point can be added to the job as external point and used to trigger a self-
test. The user can run an automatic self-test at any time and on multiple panels at the same time.
Important: The system pseudo point P503 RUN SCHEDULED SELF-TEST cannot be used as a triggering point. Doing so will lead to unpre-
dictable behavior.
After configuring the date and time select the following options:
• List of SIGs
• Volume
• Trouble on fault
13.36 Step 1. Creating a New Self-Test

1. Click on the Custom Control tab.
2. Click on the Scheduled Self-Test Wizard subtab, right click inside the blank area of the Scheduled Tests and select the Create
Self-Test option. A screen similar to the one shown in Figure 88 appears.
3. Complete the Self-Test Name and Comments fields
4. Click Next.
page 116 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 88: Wizard entry screen
5. The next screen, shown in Figure 89, specifies the Custom Control Program Number. This is the program number under
which the self-test custom control equations created by the wizard are stored. No specific program number is reserved for use by
Self-Test equations. Click Next.
page 117 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 89: Initial Data Screen
13.37 Step 2. Selecting Start Time and Frequency of the Self-Test

To select time and frequency of the Self-Test:
1. In the Self-Test Start Time area select the time to run the Self-Test.
2. In Recurrence Pattern, click the frequency and the day that the self-test is going to run.
3. Click Next.
page 118 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 90: Self-Test Time and Recurrence (Weekly Configuration Shown as an Example)
13.38 Step 3. Selecting Self-Test Triggering Point and Point List

1. In Self-Test Triggering Point, click Select Pseudo Point to choose a pseudo point that will be used to activate Self-Test (Figure
91).
2. Inside Self-Test Options, click Select Point List to choose the points list for Self-Test.
- In Volume select whether horns on sounder devices will be disabled during Self-Test.
- In Trouble on Fail select yes or no to choose if a trouble will be generated if self-test fails.
- Click Next.
3. In the summary screen that appears, ensure that all of the settings are configured correctly and click Finish to complete the Self-
Test Wizard. Table 48 lists all the default values for the Scheduled Self-Test Wizard.
page 119 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 91: Self-Test Triggering Point and Point List

Table 48: Default Values for the Self-Test Wizard Settings
Setting Value User Options Input Validation
Self-Test Time 2:00 am User can edit hour and minute
User cannot continue to next page
Weekly No day selected while no day is checked. User can
select more than one day.
Two options: By choosing the second option, the
- Day 1 of each month Input validation required as the
user can configure the test not to
Monthly number of days varies from 28 to
- First Sunday of each execute every month; quarterly or
31.
month biannual execution.
Two options:
Two options for the user to select Input validation required. A Self-
Yearly - First of January between the date or day of the Test schedule with the wizard will be
- First Sunday of January week. executed at least once a year.
Triggering Point and Triggering or point list not User cannot continue to next page
Self-Test Options selected by default if a point list is not selected.
Volume NORMAL
Trouble on Fail NO
page 120 579-1167 Rev. K

14 File Transfer
There are two methods of performing file transfer in the 4007ES. The preferred method is to use a USB portable storage device (also
called thumb drive, key, memory stick, etc.) to transfer files between the 4007ES USB port and the service PC. The secondary method is by
connecting a cable between the Ethernet port and the service PC. Both methods are explained in this chapter.
For the 4606-Series Color Touchscreen LCD Annunciator, the preferred file transfer method is also to use USB portable storage device.
Partial file transfer can also be performed using the RUI addressable connection to the panel, but the transfer speed is slower.
14.1 USB File Transfer

To Upgrade Software using a USB Storage Device:
1. Insert the USB storage device into the 4007ES Panel and upload the job currently running on the panel. The job is uploaded into
a zip folder. The USB storage device must be formatted with FAT32 file system.
2. Take the USB storage device out of the panel and insert it in the PC.
3. Unzip the job and open it using the same version of the Programmer as the Master .BIN file running in the panel. For example, if
4007_3.02.03.bin is the file in the panel, then Programmer version 3.02.04 must be used.
Note: To check which Master BIN file is running in the panel, press the Menu button on the panel, then browse to System Info
and then to Software Revisions. The Master BIN file version appears on the 4007ES panel display and it is different from the
4100ES and 4010ES.BIN files.
4. Save the job, build it, and then re-open it using the most recent version of the Programmer.
5. Click on the Transfer menu option and then on USB.
6. In the USB Transfer window (Figure 92), click CFIG, Panel Exec and Include Binary Files checkboxes and make sure the files
are attached.
Note: Selecting the Panel Exec and Include Binary Files makes it possible for the USB transfer to select the correct
panel bootloader, kernel, file system, panel UI slave and other listed slaves in the compatibility file (on the USB key /bins/
compatibility.xml).
Figure 92: USB Transfer Window
7. Select the appropriate mass storage device and click on the Download button to download the files to the USB storage device.
If older files are detected, the Overwrite Files dialog box appears. Click on the Yes button to replace the old files with the new
ones.
8. Disconnect the USB storage device from the PC and insert it into the USB port located on the CPU board that is mounted on the
inner door panel of the 4007ES. Files that need to be updated are flagged for an upgrade on the panel display (Figure 93).
page 121 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 93: System Upgrade Window
9. Press the Process Upgrade button on the touchscreen and confirm the selections.
10.
When prompted, press the button to take a snapshot of the existing panel software to be able to go back to the original files,
if necessary.
11. After the panel reboot, press on the System Upgrade button to verify that no software is marked for an upgrade and disconnect
the USB storage device by pressing the Eject USB button located under the Mass Storage.
The panel has now been upgraded with a new job and the latest software.
14.2 Files Transferred

The following is an example of the files that can be transferred using a USB storage device:
File Description
4007_3.02.03.bin Master Controller file
bootloader_1.01_cpu801-4007es.bin File to update/boot Linux and file system
filesystem_1.01.01_cpu801-4007es.bin Root file system for the 4007ES
IDNACPS_1.01.bin Addressable panel power supply file
IDNet2_1.01.03.bin IDNet file
kernel_1.01_cpu801-4007es.bin Linux kernel with modifications for the 4007ES
MsgLib_UTF8_3.01.bin English display message library file
MsgLibF_UTF8_3.01.bin French display message library file
NACPS_1.01.01.bin Hybrid panel power supply file
panelui_1.01.02_cpu801.bin Panel user interface file
userfilesystem_4007es.bin System file (Manufacturing use only)
zonerelay_1.01.01.bin Zone/Relay card file
14.3 IP File Transfer

IP file transfer operates over the Ethernet service port, with files directly copied to the file system and activated. New Slave Exec data is
then downloaded by the master once it is running.
14.3.1 File Transfer Connection to the PC

The Ethernet service port is located on the CPU board behind the inner door assembly (see Figure 94) and connects to the Service PC
using a standard straight (non-crossover) Ethernet Patch Cable. If an ES Net card is used to provide connectivity to a network, the Service
PC must be connected to the Service Port Ethernet connector on the ES Net Card (Port D).
page 122 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 94: Front Panel Ethernet Service Port
14.3.2 Starting the IP File Transfer Utility

This feature enables a download of the Fire Alarm Control Unit (FACU) software features (Panel Exec, Slave Exec, etc.). This provides a
means for recovering previous configurations (via the File Transfer “History/Undo” tab). This also makes it possible for the FACU to continue
operating during file download operation. FACU down-time is minimal.
The ES Panel IP File Transfer utility can be started from within the ES Panel Programmer or from the Windows Start menu. To start the File
Transfer:
• From within the Programmer.
Two ways of connecting to the panels are possible while the programmer is running:
a. Click on the Transfer icon, located along the menu bar at the top of the programmer window (as shown in Figure 95 )
Figure 95: Transfer Icon

b. In the menu, click Transfer, and click Ethernet Connection. The following options appear (see Figure 96):
i. Panel for loaded job. When you choose this option, the ES Panel Programmer automatically selects the relevant panel
for the loaded job, and the IP File Transfer dialog box appears. If this panel is remote (for example, accessed via the ES
Net Network), ensure that Remote Download option is enabled.
Figure 96: Ethernet Connections
ii. Local Panel: When you click this option, the ES Panel Programmer connects to the local node, and the IP File Transfer
dialog box appears
iii. Select Panel: To manually select the node you want to connect to, click this option and the Select Panel/Network dialog
box appears. The Select Panel/Network dialog box lists the panels that are currently visible on the ES Net network.
page 123 579-1167 Rev. K

• From the Start Menu. Click the Start button. Move the pointer to the Programs option. When the list of choices appears, move the
pointer to the Simplex option and click on the option containing the programmer. A list of options appears. Click on IP File Transfer.
When start-up procedure has been completed, the File Transfer Utility appears.
Figure 97: IP File Transfer
14.3.3 IP Communication Parameter Settings

If the IP File Transfer is launched from within the ES Programmer, the job loaded in the programmer will be used to identify the destination
panel (whether local or remote) and be used by the IP FT to directly connect to it. However, if no job is currently loaded in the Programmer
or if the Select Panel menu is chosen, the Select Panel/Network dialog displays (see Figure 98 ).
page 124 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 98: Select Panel/Network Dialog
This dialog can also be launched by pressing the Panel Selection button on the IP File Transfer dialog.
The Panel list in the Select Panel/Network dialog box automatically updates as panels are discovered over the network. Use this dialog
to select a panel and connect to it directly. The Select Panel/Network dialog box shows the following information for each node:
Network Name: type a network name in this field to filter entries by network name.
Node #: type a node number in this field to filter entries by node number.
To filter by Panel name: type a panel name to filter the list.
To filter by Type: type a panel to filter the list.
To filter by Source: type mDNS or DNS to filter the list based on protocol used for resolving name/address of the panel. Click the Selected
Panel Details drop down button to see the Host Name and IP Address of the panel.
If a panel is not listed, it may be because it is not advertised on the network. In this case, it is also possible to manually search for the panel
by using the text box at the top of the dialog. To do so, complete the following steps:
• Type the IP address into the text box and click Search Panel Address.
• The following messages appear depending on the search result:
- Panel already in list.
- Panel found, added to list using its IP address as identification (Figure 99).
- Panel not found.
• When the search finds the panel, double click on the panel you want to connect to or highlight it and press Connect to this Panel.
Note: The Search Panel Address button is enabled only when you enter a valid IP address.
page 125 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 99: Manually adding a panel using the Search function
14.3.4 Downloadable Files

The following types of files can be downloaded to the ES FACU through its file transfer utility.
• CFIG File. This is the built job file, consisting of all programming definitions in a binary format, that the panel's CPU can execute.
• Slave Exec. Module-specific slave Exec files execute on intelligent slave modules (listed below) and define the way in which the slave
module operates. Occasionally, changes to the functionality of a slave module may require you to download a new slave Exec file. (For
example, a change to the IDNet Slave Exec file may be necessary to provide support for new, additional device types.) The following
4007ES modules are “intelligent” slave devices that use a module-specific Slave Exec file.
- 25 Volt Regulator - IDNet+ Expansion Card

- Zone/Relay Card - CPU Bootloader Files.
- SCU/RCU - LED Module
- SDACT - Remote UI
• CFIG Text File. A panel with a missing or corrupt CFIG file can be restored to proper operation by downloading a CFIG text file to the
panel. The CFIG text file is automatically built and placed in the same job directory as the “executable” CFIG file (file ending in .CFG
extension).
• Panel Exec (Master). The Panel Exec file is the “operating system” that runs on the panel’s CPU module. It manages interactions
between system components. Occasionally, changes to the functionality of the operating system may require that a new Panel Exec
file be downloaded.
1. To download a software feature, make sure the Service Mode (Jumper 7) is enabled.Select the type of file you want to
download by clicking on the radio button next to the file you want to download. The options are:
- CFIG and all Execs
- CFIG
- Slave Exec
- Panel Exec
- CPU Bootloader
- Primary Msglib
- Alternate Msglib
page 126 579-1167 Rev. K

Important: Selecting the CFIG and All Execs option makes it possible for the IP Transfer to download the correct panel bootloader, panel
UI slave and other slaves to the panel, in addition to the job.
2. Once the selection has been made, use the checkboxes to select the download options:
Download to a running panel: Select this option to download the file to a running panel. Once this option is selected, there are
3 ways in which the changes can be applied:
- Automatically after the download. Select the Apply download changes after download box to have the downloaded changes
applied immediately after the download. This is the program’s default setting.
- When the system reboots: If the Apply download changes after download button is not selected, the downloaded changes will
be saved and applied once the system is rebooted.
Exclude the recovery file. This box option can be used when downloading a CFIG, it will result in a faster download.
Preserve current Install mode list: Select this box to keep all the points you have placed in install mode in install mode once
downloaded changes have been applied. This is highly recommended.
3. Use the File name box to select the file you want to download to the panel.
4. Click on the Download button to start the process.
The following are additional functions accessible from the Download tab:
View Final Status of Last Panel Update: Click on this button to bring up the final status of the last panel update.
14.3.5 Upload/Reports Tab

The default option for this feature is to upload the job that is currently running in the FACU. The file that is uploaded is a compressed
image of the programmer job file. Therefore, there is no need for an “unbuild.” The file is uploaded to its default location. (C:\4100UJOBS
\JobName). This tab also has options for uploading all FACU reports. The reports are uploaded to the “reports” subdirectory of the current
job directory. The report file is given a descriptive name, appended with the current date (e.g., AlarmLog_2010_3_11.txt).
Figure 100: Upload/Reports Tab

To upload a file or a report:
1. Click on the Upload/Reports tab near the top of the IP File Transfer window. See Figure 100.
2. Select the type of file you want to upload by clicking on the radio button next to the item.
3. Chose one of the following:
page 127 579-1167 Rev. K

Panel Configuration/Job TrueNAC Reports

- Job Associated with CFIG (SDB4100U) All Last
Panel Logs Self-Test
- Alarm Log - Trouble Log All Last
Reports
- TrueAlert Report - TrueAlarm Status - TrueAlarm Service - TrueAlarm CO Service
4. Use the File name box to select the directory on your PC you want to upload the report to.
5. Click on the Upload button to start the upload.
14.3.6 Type of Transfer

In addition to the upload of the CFIG file, other types of information from the Panel can also be uploaded to the ES Panel Programmer.
Note: The following reports can also be transferred to the USB storage device.
• TrueAlert Report: It is a report generated by the panel. It provides information such as Point ID, Device Type, and Candela rating for
all TrueAlert devices.
• TrueNAC Report: It is a report generated by the panel following the completion of a TrueNAC diagnostic test. The report indicates all
devices’ pass or fail status along with nominal current, predicted worst case current and predicted worst case voltage threshold at the
minimum TPS operating voltage. By selecting this option you can choose between downloading the report for All TrueAlert devices on
all TPSs or only for the Last TrueNAC diagnostics performed on a specific TPS and SLC.
• Panel Logs: With this selection you can select between uploading an Alarm Log or the Trouble Log, produced as a result of Alarm or
Trouble conditions reported to the Control Panel, onto the ES Panel Programmer.
• TrueAlarm Status Report: A report providing the following information for each point:
- Device Number
- Custom Label
- Current Sensitivity of the Point
- Point Status: Normal, Trouble, Alarm
- Almost Dirty Status: Points that are almost dirty have an asterisk in this field to denote this status.
• TrueAlarm Service Report: A report providing the following information for each point:
- Device Number
- Custom Label
- Alarm Level (sensitivity level of the device)
- Average Value
- Current Value
- Percent of Alarm: Shows the current value for the sensor. Value is shown as a percentage of 100 percent (alarm). For example, if the
value shown is 9%, it means that the sensor is currently at 9% of the value required to trigger an alarm.
- Peak Value: Shows the highest value that the sensor has reached. Value is shown as a percentage of 100 percent (alarm). For
example, if the value shown is 9%, it means that the peak value experienced by the sensor was 9% of the value required to trigger an
alarm.
- Current State: Possible values include Normal, Trouble, Dirty, Excessively Dirty, and Almost Dirty.
• TrueAlarm CO Service Report: This report provides the following information regarding the CO devices:
- Custom Label (custom description of device)
- Current Device Value (PPM)
- End-of-Life Date
• Device Status (Normal, Trouble)
14.3.7 Launching an Ethernet Terminal session

It is possible to launch a terminal session to an ES Panel using the ES Panel Programmer. Depending on your system/Network
configuration, you can connect to the local panel or to a remote panel (for example, if it is part of an ES Network).
14.3.7.1 Connecting to a panel using the Ethernet port

Complete the following steps to initiate a terminal session using an Ethernet connection:
1. Use a straight through Ethernet cable to connect the service PC to the CPU Card Ethernet Service port or to the ES Net NIC card
page 128 579-1167 Rev. K

Service Port, if populated (by default, ES Net NIC Port D).

2. Click Terminal, and select Ethernet Connection (Figure 101)
Figure 101: Connecting to a panel using the Ethernet port

3. The following options appear:
- Panel for loaded job: When you click this option, the ES Panel Programmer automatically launches a terminal session for the
panel for which the current job belongs (if one is currently loaded). This is a useful option when the local Panel is part of an ES Net
Network and the user wants to reach the panel for which this job belongs. If the job belongs to the local panel, connection will be
local.
- Local Panel: When you click this option, the ES Panel Programmer launches a terminal session for the panel into which the PC is
connected.
- Select Panel: To manually select the node you want to connect to, click this option. The Select Panel/ Network dialog appears
(Figure 102). Click on the panel for which a terminal session is required.
Once the panel is selected, a Tera Term terminal session is established with this panel (if a connection can be made).
Figure 102: Select Panel/Network Dialog
page 129 579-1167 Rev. K

15 Port Vectoring
The term port vectoring refers to the way in which certain cards can be programmed to output only specific groups of events. This section
describes programming the ES FACU port vectoring option.
Note: User editing of the DACT port vectoring is not permitted in UL 864. User editing of the IP Communicator port vectoring is not per-
mitted in UL864 if you use the IP Communicator to connect to the central station.
15.1 Choosing Event Groups to Route

To choose event groups to route:
1. Click on the Port Vectoring tab, located just beneath the row of icons, to view the window used to route events to the RS-232
port, the DACTs, or IP Communicator. A window similar to the one shown in Figure 103 appears.
Figure 103: Port Vectoring Tab
2. In the Available Ports list, located on the left side of the window, click on the line containing the port you want to program. If you
choose RS-232, all of the event types shown in the figure are available for routing. If you choose one of the DACTs, the following
event types are not available:
- System Reset
- Alarm Silence
- SMPL Print Statements
- Walk Test Events
- ACTIVE State Events
- Time/Date Updates
3. In the Event Types list, located on the right side of the window, select the checkboxes corresponding to the event types that you
want to route to the device selected in Step 1.
page 130 579-1167 Rev. K

16 Amon Point Type

This chapter describes creating custom point types (referred to as AMON point types) for use with analog monitor ZAMs. These point types
allow descriptive text and device-specific settings to be associated with a point name.
16.1 AMON Pt Type Tab

The AMON Pt Type tab (Figure 104) is for use only with IDNET analog monitor ZAMs. It allows you to create a custom point type that
specifies how the ES Panel system should interpret (i.e., react to) incoming analog data from the device attached to the ZAM. This point
type can then be assigned to the ZAM using the IDNET point editing screen, which is accessible through either the Hardware or Point tab.
For example, if you have an analog device that measures the amount of liquid within a tank, you can use this tab to create a point type that
specifies what the unit of measurement is (gallons, for example) and what the threshold values for an alarm should be (generate an alarm
when the tank is half empty, for example).
Figure 104: AMON Point Type Tab
16.2 Adding a Point Type

The AMON Point Type Tab uses a wizard-style interface that guides you through the process of creating an AMON point type.
1. To start this wizard, right click in the blank space just below the Point. When the menu appears, click on Add. A dialog similar to
the one shown in Figure 106 appears.
Figure 105: Initial AMON Point Type Dialog

2. Enter data in the initial dialog’s fields, as follows:
- Point Type Name. Enter a seven-character name for the point in this text entry field. This point name can then be assigned to the
analog ZAM point editing screen. The point editing screen is accessible through either the Hardware Tab or the Point Tab.
- Alarm Type. The alarm type you choose determines how the ES Panel reacts when the device attached to the ZAM crosses the
threshold that you define for it. (The threshold is defined in a step below.) Choices for this field are as follows:
page 131 579-1167 Rev. K

Table 49: Alarm Type

Alarm Type Description
FIRE Causes the system to generate a fire alarm when the device crosses the threshold.
Creates a latching supervisory condition when the device crosses the threshold. This means that the
LATSUPV supervisory condition on the panel does not clear until the point restores to normal and a system
reset is performed.
MPR12 Generates a priority 2 alarm when the device crosses the threshold.
SUPERV Generates a supervisory condition when the device crosses the threshold.
TROUBLE Generates a trouble condition when the device crosses the threshold.
Defines the point to be a pseudo point, having a value of either ON or OFF. Typically used as a trigger
UTIL
for custom control (i.e., perform some action if the point turns ON).
- Decimal Display. This field specifies the degree of precision for the device reporting data (how many digits after the decimal place
the device reports). If the device reports data one unit at a time, choose the XXXX. option. If the device reports data in 10ths of a unit,
choose the XXXX.X option. If the device reports data in 100ths of a unit, choose the XXXX.XX option.
3. Click the Next button to view the dialog shown in Figure 106.
Figure 106: 4mA and 20mA Values Dialog

4. Enter data in the 4mA and 20mA Values dialog (refer to Table 50).
Table 50: 4mA and 20mA Values
Field Description
The “unit” (ppm, gal, psi, etc.) text that appears on the front panel display when you display the
Eng Unit Text current value of the device via the front panel. For example, if a monitor device with a monitoring
capability of parts per million is attached to the ZAM, you might put ppm in this field.
This is the lowest value that the device reports. When the device is at this value, it draws 4mA of
4mA Value
current from the ZAM.
This is the highest value that the device reports. When the device is at this value, it draws 20mA of
20mA Value
current from the ZAM.
5. Click the Next button. A dialog similar to the one shown in Figure 107 appears.
page 132 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 107: Threshold Unit Values Dialog
6. In the Threshold Unit Values Dialog, you can specify up to three thresholds.
- Threshold Checkbox. Select this box if you want the system to generate an event (the specific type of event depends on what you
chose for Alarm Type in Step 2) when the device being measured goes above the value that you specify in the Unit field.
- Unit Field. This is the value that the device must pass to trigger the alarm condition.
7. Click Finish.
16.3 Editing a Point

To edit an existing point:
1. Right click on the point you want to modify.
2. Click on Properties.
3. Modify the AMON Properties as required.
page 133 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 108: Editing an AMON Point Type

4. Click Apply > OK.
16.4 Deleting a Point

To delete an existing point:
1. Right click on the point you want to delete.
2. Click on Delete.
3. Click on Yes to confirm.
page 134 579-1167 Rev. K

17 Adding or Editing Network Information

This chapter describes the following network-related procedures.
• Defining the panel's Public and External points.
• Setting the Network Information fields for the panel.
17.1 Role of the Network Programmer

Programming a network of 4007ES FACUs requires the use of two programmers, as follows.
• Network Programmer. Use this programmer to create a new network or edit an existing network. Opening an existing network job
with the network programmer spawns the ES Panel programmer, which can then be used to declare the public and external points for
that node.
• ES Panel Programmer. The ES Panel programmer works along with the Simplex Network Programmer. It allows you to specify the
panel's public points, external points, and Node numbers.
17.2 Public Versus External Points

A public point is a point connected to this panel that you want to be visible to other nodes on the network. In other words, when the
status of the point changes, you want it to annunciate its status on the other node. There is no limit to the quantity of public points for
4007ES network panels.
An external point is a point on another node. Declaring it to be an external point allows its status to be annunciated on this panel. The
4007ES supports up to 100 external points.
For example, when you want changes to the status of the panel’s points to report to a central annunciator, such as a TSW, you would
use the ES Panel programmer to declare the panel’s points (or a subset of its points) public. Likewise, on the TSW, you would declare the
panel’s points as external.
17.3 General Network Programming Guidelines

Use the following guidelines when programming
• All nodes must have the same version or a compatible version of software and firmware.
• All nodes must use the same baud rate.
• To reduce Net activity and increase efficiency, it is recommended that you do the following:
- Avoid making control points Public.
- Program all control functions in the node that contains the control points.
- Use Lists to minimize the network traffic. (Nest only one list within a main list.) Do not make a list Public that already contains
External Points.
- Do not use the SET command when writing Custom Control for a Network node unless absolutely necessary. It acts on every poll
cycle and slows down the network response time. Use TRACK rather than SET whenever possible.
• Do not make an NDU point Public above offset 1535. This only applies to the 4100+.
• Never set the value of an External Analog Pseudo Point through the Network.
• Do not use P210, P211 or P212 at the same time for Network System Reset.
• Use P217 for Network Signal Silence.
• Avoid Version Mismatch. If you change a label or device type or point type on a point that is EXTERNAL to other nodes, you must build
and download all nodes that have an external copy of the point. If you change the Job Title in the General Info screen, or the Network
Prefix in the Network Points in the Info Screen, you must build all nodes and download all nodes.
page 135 579-1167 Rev. K

17.4 4007ES Programmer Network tab

The Network Tab provides access to the dialogs used to add and edit the lists of public and external points. Click on the Network Tab to see
the screen shown in Figure 109.
Figure 109: Network Tab
page 136 579-1167 Rev. K

17.5 Gaining Access to the Network Information

The network information fields are contained within the Panel tab. To access these fields, do the following:
1. Click on the Network tab, shown in the upper right corner of Figure 110.
2. Click on the Network Information subtab on the bottom left of the window.
Figure 110: Network Tab, Showing Network Information
17.6 Editing the Network Name and Node Number

The Network Information tab includes the following fields. Use the guidelines outlined in the table when setting these fields.
Field Guidelines
Advanced Network Click on the Advanced button and use the dialog that appears to change the network to
Network which the 4007ES panel is assigned.
Information Node Click on the Advanced button and use the dialog that appears to change the node
number of the 4007ES panel.
Master Select to use this panel as the network’s master timekeeper. Only one master timekeeper
Timekeeper per network.
Annunciate Select if you wish to have other panel’s common trouble messages annunciated on this
Common Troubles panel.
Annunciate Network Select if you wish to have this panel’s Network messages sent to the system’s
Troubles annunciators.
Annunciate Extra Node The Annunciate Extra Node Option prevents a node from annunciating an Extra Node
Troubles Trouble following the addition of a new node. Guidelines for setting this option are as
follows:
• Unselect this option on nodes without a need to annunciate events from the new node.
• Select this option on the node that functions as the network's central annunciator.
page 137 579-1167 Rev. K

Field Guidelines
Auto Gen List When selected, this option adds the external points from other nodes to the system lists
Externals on this node. When it does this, it adds the points to the list based on the point type of
the point.
Miscellaneous Network Prefix Enter descriptive text in this field. This text appears when the more info. field is selected
Network Information on a TSW.
Special Analog Checking this option prevents analog detectors from sending status on initialization if the
Initialization value is not an alarm or trouble condition. However, if the analog value indicates an alarm
or trouble condition exists, the detector will send its state.
If you select this option and you have Custom Control equations that contain the
Compare Opcode and Current Value qualifier, be aware that the equation will not trigger
on network initialization, but will trigger on subsequent value changes. Also, if analog
detectors have a numeric value on a GCC screen, the screen will not update until the
point's value changes after network initialization.
Note: To avoid Network Initialization troubles, all network nodes must be set the same
way.
Inhibit Priority-Only EQBs This option prevents network EQBs from being generated for status changes that only
affect priority and not the status of the point. For example, a Custom Control equation
triggers that modifies the priority of a public control point, putting the point to the reset
priority but not changing its state. If this option is selected, no EQB will be generated. The
side effect of choosing this option is that there will be a display mismatch of the priority
between the owner and the external node.
Note: Select this option only if required to reduce network traffic.

Inhibit Sounder-EQBs This option prevents TrueAlarm sounder/relay base (non-combo points) from generating
network EQBs when only the status of the sounder/relay changes. If the sounder/relay
is turned on or off without a threshold or logical state change on the sensor portion of
the device, no EQB will be generated to external nodes. Status changes to the device that
involve a logical status change (e.g. alarm, trouble), or a sensor threshold level change will
still report.
Note: Select this option only if required to reduce network traffic.

Extended Point Range This option is only for a large TSW node of more than 62,500 user points. When this
for TSW Guidelines option is ON, public points are external to other TSW nodes and appear in the high point
range, greater than 65534, of the other TSW nodes. When this option is OFF, public points
are external to other TSW nodes and appear in the low point range, less than 65535, of
the other TSW nodes. This option only applies to ES panels.
17.7 Procedure to Declare Public Points

Use the following procedure to define the panel’s public points.
1. Click on the Network tab shown in the upper right corner of Figure 109.
2. Right click on the Public Points folder and select the Edit Public choice. The tag list is shown in Figure 111.
3. Position the highlight on a point and press the space bar to tag the point. A >> symbol is shown to the left of the point to indicate
that it is selected. (To remove this symbol and deselect a point, highlight the point and press the space bar again.)
To select a contiguous group of points, click on the first point in the group, press the SHIFT key and click on the last point in the group
you want to select.
page 138 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 111: Public Points Tag List
17.8 Procedure to Declare External Points

Use the following procedure to define the panel’s external points.
1. Right click on the External Points folder and select the Edit Externals choice. The dialog shown below appears. Click on the drop
down list box and select the number of the node containing the points you want to declare external.
Figure 112: Select Network Node

2. Click OK. The tag list shown in Figure 113 appears. This taglist contains all of the points that are currently declared public on the
node selected in Step 1 above.
page 139 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 113: Tag List for External Points

3. Position the highlight on a point and press the space bar to tag the point. A >> symbol is shown to the left of the point to indicate
that it is selected. (To remove this symbol and deselect a point, highlight the point and press the space bar again.)
To select a contiguous group of points, click on the first point in the group, press the SHIFT key and click on the last point in the group
you want to select.
17.9 Programming Network Alarm Silence

The sections below describe programming Network Silence and Network Reset. These options can be configured to work in either of the
following ways:
• Central Network Silence and Reset. With this type of configuration, only one node (known as the Central Network Silence/Reset
Node) is capable of initiating a Network Silence or Network Reset.
• Distributed Network Silence and Reset. This setup allows a Network Silence or Network Reset to be initiated from any node on
the network.
17.10 Programming Central Network Silence

Any 4007ES node can be configured as the Central Network Silence Node. Programming Central Network Silence does not invalidate
inhibit and cutout timers on each node. Each node handles these functions locally. The figure below provides an overview of Central
Network Silence. In this figure, Node 1 serves as the Central Network Silence Node. Each node’s P217 pseudo has been declared external
on Node 1 and L106 on this node has been edited to include the external points.
page 140 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 114: Central Network Silence

Follow these steps to program Central Network Silence.
1. Open the network job, using the network programmer. Open the job for the node you have designated as the Central Network
Silence Node.
2. When the ES Panel programmer appears, click on the Network tab at the top of the programmer.When the Network window
appears, click on the Network Points subtab at the bottom of the Network window.
3. Right click in the Network window. When the choices appear, click on Edit Externals. A dialog similar to the following appears.
Click on the drop down list box and choose one of the nodes on the network.
Figure 115: Select Network Node
4. Click OK to close the dialog. When you do this, a tag list containing the public points from the selected node appears. Click on
P217 Network Signal Silence and press the space bar to select the point. Click OK to close the taglist.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for every node on the network.
6. Click on the List tab at the top of the programmer. When the List window appears, click on the General List subtab at the
bottom of the window. Scroll through the list, right click on L106 - External Alarm Silence Points and select Tag List.
7. Click on the Filter icon at the top of the Tag List. When the list of choices appears, click on the Network Externals check box.
Click on the OK button. All of the External Points appear.
8. Click on each entry for P217 - Network Signal Silence (each node on the network should have an entry) and press the space
bar to add the entry to L106. N:P217 represents the Node Number.
page 141 579-1167 Rev. K

17.11 Programming Distributed Network Silence

This setup allows a Network Silence to be initiated from any node on the network. The figure below provides an overview of Distributed
Network Silence. In this figure, each node's P217 pseudo has been declared external on the other nodes and L106 on each node has been
edited to include the external points.
Figure 116: Distributed Network Silence

To configure Distributed Network Silence, follow the steps in section “Programming Central Network Silence” of this chapter for each node.
Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for every node on the network.
17.12 Programming Central Network Reset

Note: Do not reset a Node using Central Network Reset if you cannot see all the alarms associated to that node. When reset is pressed,
P210 goes ON in every node it can reset. If the node where reset is activated has no alarms, it immediately turns ON the P211 pseudos on
all nodes. However the system in alarm is not ready for this and latches.
Note: If a TSW has a UT connected to it, put P210 of the UT into L0 to reset the UT.
Any 4007ES node can be configured as the Central Network Reset Node. Keep the following in mind when programming Central Network
Reset.
• This application performs separate internal Detector Reset and System Reset.
• All General Alarm Points must be monitored and SMPL-controlled by the Central Node.
• System Points involved:
- P210 Network Detector Reset/L103 External Detector Reset Points
- P211 Network System Reset/L104 External Control Reset Points
page 142 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 117: Central Network Reset

1. Open the network job, using the network programmer. Open the job for the node that will serve as the Central Reset Node.
2. When the ES Panel programmer appears, click on the Network tab at the top of the programmer. When the Network window
3. Right click in the Network window. When the choices appear, click on Edit Externals. A dialog appears. Click on the drop down
list box and choose one of the nodes on the network.
P210 and press the space bar to select the point. Click P211 and press the space bar to select the point. Click OK to close the
taglist.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for every node on the network.
6. Click on the List tab at the top of the programmer. When the List window appears, click the General List subtab at the bottom
of the window. Scroll through the list, right click on L103 and select Tag List.
7. Click on the Filter icon at the top of the Tag List. When the list of choices appears, click the Network Externals check box. All
of the External Points appear.
8. Click on the entry for P210 and press the space bar.
9. Repeat Steps 6 through 8 for every node on the network.
10. Click on the List Tab at the top of the programmer. When the List window appears, click the General List subtab at the bottom
of the window. Scroll through the list, right click L104 and select Tag List.
All of the External Points appear.
12. Click on the entry for P211 and press the space bar.
17.13 Programming Distributed Network Reset

With Distributed Network Reset, the following occurs:
• Each node controls its own General Alarm Points.
• System Reset can be initiated from any node and all other nodes may also experience the reset operation.
• System Points involved: P212 Detector/System Reset, and 105 External Entire System Reset Points.
page 143 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 118: Distributed Network Reset

To configure Distributed Network Silence, do the following on each node.
1. Open the network job, using the network programmer.Open the job for one of the nodes.
2. When the ES Panel programmer appears, click on the Network tab at the top of the programmer.When the Network window
3. Right click in the Network window. When the choices appear, click on Edit Externals. A dialog similar to the following appears.
Click on the drop down list box and choose one of the nodes on the network.
Figure 119: Choose Node
P212 and press the space bar to select the point. Click OK to close the taglist.
5. Click on the List tab at the top of the programmer. When the List window appears, click on the General List subtab at the
bottom of the window. Scroll through the list, right click on L105 and select Tag List.
All of the External Points appear.
page 144 579-1167 Rev. K

7. Click on every entry for P212 and press the space bar to add the entry to L106.
17.14 Distributed Configuration

The digital pseudo points P463 and P464 are used to raise a trouble when a CO sensor is within 6 or 12 month of its expiration date. A
transition from off to on of the digital pseudo point will trigger a check on all CO sensors within the local panel. On site, where multiple
panels are linked together over the network, it is possible to synchronize the 2 digital pseudo points on every node. To do so, the remote
node must declare the local node’s P463 as External, since P463 and P464 are always public by default. Once P463 is imported to the
remote node’s job, its L170 is automatically updated to include the imported digital pseudo point. The same applies to P464 and L171. So
when the remote node P463 is turned on, default SMPL equation 0-164 will turn the local node’s P463 to on. To declare an external point,
refer to the section “Procedure to Declare External Points” in this chapter.
Figure 120: Distributed Configuration

1. Open the network job by using the network programmer.
2. Open the job for the node that will serve as the central reset node.
3. When the ES Panel programmer appears, click the Network tab at the top of the programmer.
4. When the Network window appears, click the Network Points subtab at the bottom of the Network window.
5. Right click in the Network window.
6. When the choices appear, click on Edit Externals.
A dialog box appears.
page 145 579-1167 Rev. K

7. Click on the drop-down list box and choose one of the nodes on the network.
8. Click on OK to close the dialog.
A tag list containing the public points from the selected node appears.
9. Click on P463 and press the space bar to select the point.
10. Click on P464 and press the spacebar to select the point.
11. Click OK to close the taglist.
12. Repeat Steps 5 to 11 for every node on the network.
page 146 579-1167 Rev. K

18 ULC programming requirements

This appendix describes ULC programming requirements.
18.1 Required Operations
18.1.1 Introduction
To comply with ULC standards, there are indicators and a key that must be programmed and labeled, as outlined in this section. The LED
indicators required are for Manual Evacuation, Ground Fault, and AC Power On. User Button 1 is designated as the Manual Evacuation key.
18.1.2 Procedure
For ease of programming, there is a check box in the Card Properties section of the Color User Interface properties. Follow the steps
outlined below to program the ULC required items.
1. Click the Hardware tab and expand the Unit 0, Box 1, Bay 1, and Block A icons to display the Color User Interface icon, see
Figure 122. Click the + signs to the left of the Unit 0, Box 1, Bay 1, and Block A icons to expand them.)
2. Right click the Color User Interface icon (highlighted in Figure 122) and select Properties.
3. Click check box S527 Operation, as shown in Figure 122.
4. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Figure 121: Expanded View of Hardware Configuration
page 147 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 122: Color User Interface Properties with S527 Operation Check Box
Note: In compliance with ULC requirements, the slide-in label for LEDs on the user interface must be labeled as shown in Figure
123.
Figure 123: ULC Labeling Requirements for LEDs
page 148 579-1167 Rev. K

18.2 Alarm Cutout Timer Feature
18.2.1 Introduction
To comply with ULC standards when using the Alarm Cutout Timer feature, there must be a yellow LED dedicated to indicate when the
timer has expired.
Note: The LEDs adjacent to the LCD must be used for other ULC indication requirements, therefore the inclusion of the Alarm Cutout
Timer feature will require the additional LED Module (4007-9805).
18.2.2 Enabling Alarm Cutout Timer

To enable the Alarm Cutout Timer, do the following:
1. Click the Panel tab.
2. Click the Systems Options subtab located at the bottom of the programmer.
3. Click the Alarm Cutout Timer checkbox.
Specify the timer value on the Seconds box to the right of the checkbox.
18.2.3 Programming the LED

1. Click the Point tab.
2. Scroll until the points with the Digital device type are visible. Select a point which has an empty custom label field. (For purposes
of demonstration, pseudo point P700 has been selected.)
3. Right click on the point selected and select Properties.
4. Enter the description in the custom label field, as shown in Figure 124.
5. Click OK.
Figure 124: Pseudo Point Properties

1. Review Chapter 8 of this manual for the process of creating Custom Control equations.
2. Create the equation shown below in Figure A-5, which turns the assigned pseudo point ON when the Alarm Cutout Timer expires.
3. Create a second equation, shown in Figure A-6, which turns the assigned pseudo point OFF when a subsequent alarm resounds
the signaling devices and when the system is reset.
page 149 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 125: Custom Control Equation to Turn ON Pseudo Point
Figure 126: Custom Control Equation to Turn OFF Pseudo Point

1. Review the section detailing how to program the LED module, see Chapter 6.
2. Select a YELLOW LED to program. Set the Mode to ON and set the Reference Address to the pseudo assigned in Step 1, as
shown in Figure A-7.
3. Click OK.
page 150 579-1167 Rev. K

Figure 127: LED Module Properties
18.3 Releasing Specific Controls and Indications
18.3.1 Introduction
To comply with ULC standards when using the 4007ES for releasing service, program a Pre-Discharge red LED, a Discharge red LED, and the
abort switches to cause a system trouble when activated (UL864 requires a system supervisory which is default). You may need to program
a Releasing Service Signal Silence button with yellow LED. If your releasing job includes abort switches, you are required to program an abort
trouble LED.
Note:
1. Since the LEDs adjacent to the LCD must be used for other ULC indication requirements, the inclusion of releasing service in the
panel requires the additional LED Module (4007-9805).
2. If you have multiple Hazard Areas, repeat the steps below for each Hazard area as required. Label the insert for the LEDs
page 151 579-1167 Rev. K

appropriately to identify the function and the hazard zone that is being referred to.
page 152 579-1167 Rev. K

18.3.2 Pre-Discharge LED Programming (Red LED)

A Pre-Discharge LED Programming (Red LED) is required for every Hazard Area.
The Pre-Discharge LED activates whenever the system is in the Pre-Discharge State. The LED will be off when the system has discharged.
An example program follows.
1. Open the suppression releasing wizard for that hazard and write down the list number created for Manual Release Points and
Automatic Release Points (L268 and L269 in this example).
2. Pick any available digital pseudo point (P720 in this example) and program it to turn ON whenever a point in the lists from step 1
are detected going active.
3. Write an equation to turn off the LED when the zone releases.
page 153 579-1167 Rev. K

4. Write (or add to an existing equation) the equation to turn off the digital pseudo during system startup or upon system reset.
5. Choose an available RED LED on the LED Module (under the Hardware tab in the programmer) and set its mode as "ON" and
set the reference address to the list that was assigned.
18.3.3 Discharge LED Programming (RED LED)

Discharge LED Programming (RED LED) is required for every Hazard Area.
The Discharge LED activates when the suppression release device is in the released state (solenoid is activated). The LED clears upon
system reset or when the solenoid is deactivated. Below is an example program.
2. Click the Suppression Release Wizard subtab.
3. Right-click the title (next to the wizard graphic) and select Properties to open the Hazard Area.
4. Select the Points tab and write down the List assigned to Suppression Dump Points.
5. Choose an available RED LED on the LED Module located under the Hardware tab.
Set its mode as "ON" and set the reference address to the list that was assigned.
page 154 579-1167 Rev. K

18.3.4 Abort Switch Active

Program a LED to display that an abort switch is active in a hazard area. The LED will be on whenever an abort is activated in during a
releasing service alarm. It will not turn on during normal supervisory conditions.
1. Open the digital Pseudo Point list and look for a digital pseudo point created by the Suppression Release Wizard called SupRel
Abort Switch Activate- yourhazardname .
It should be towards the end of the list as the wizard just selects the next available digital pseudo point.
2. Choose an available Yellow LED on the LED Module located under the Hardware tab.
Set its mode as "ON" and set the reference address to the digital pseudo point that was assigned.
18.3.5 Abort Switch Trouble during Normal Supervisory Conditions

This programs the panel such that an abort switch causes a trouble when activated during normal supervisory conditions. If the hazard
area enters alarm while the abort switch is pressed, or the abort switch is activated while the hazard area is in alarm the abort switch will
behave normally.
Warning: In order to program the Abort Switch Trouble During Normal Supervisory Conditions function, disable the Suppression
Release Wizard in custom control. The equations stay in custom control but you are not able to edit them through the wizard. Any future
changes to the hazard area will need to be manual.
1. Change / Program the abort IAMs type from SUPABRT to a UTILITY point type in the Hardware tab for the IDNet devices. These
IAMs should have already been assigned to the Hazard Area in the Suppression Release Wizard. If not, assign them now.
page 155 579-1167 Rev. K

2. Configure three unused digital pseudo points to be used as two new troubles and a supervisory point. Label them as follows
(change HAZNAME to the appropriate label for your hazard area):
3. In the Suppression Release Wizard that you are working on, right click the title (next to the wizard graphic) and select
Properties to open the Hazard Area.
4. Select the points tab and write down the lists assigned to Abort Switches and Automatic Release Points.
5. Enable Manual Editing of the suppression release wizard equations.
Warning: When you enable manual edit the Suppression Release Wizard cannot be used to modify this hazard area.
Right click the wizard for that hazard and select Enable Manual Edit. Click Yes in the confirmation box.
page 156 579-1167 Rev. K

6. Click the List tab in the Programmer and right click the list for the abort switches made during step 3 and select where used to
show all the custom control equations this list is referenced in.
Find these equations in the custom control user equations and whenever the abort switches list is referenced for status SUPV, change
it to ABNORM. For example:
7. Add a HAZNAME - Abort Switch Trouble equation to annunciate troubles from this abort switch as shown below when the
hazard area is not in alarm.
Use the lists you wrote down from above as the input lists and the trouble digital pseudo point you created with the Abort Active -
No Alarm as the output.
8. Add a HAZNAME - Abort Switch Short Circuit equation to annunciate short troubles from this abort switch as shown below.
Use the abort list you wrote down from above as the input lists and the trouble digital pseudo point you created the Abort Switch
Short as the output.
page 157 579-1167 Rev. K

9. Add a HAZNAME - Abort Switch Supervisory equation to annunciate a supervisory when the abort switch is activated in alarm
as shown below.
Use the lists you wrote down from above as the input lists and the supervisory digital pseudo point you created the Abort Switch
Active as the output.
18.3.6 Releasing Service Signal Silence Programming - Optional (Pushbutton and Yellow LED)
The Releasing Service Signal Silence button (and Yellow LED indicator) is used instead of a silence for all systems that contain releasing
and standard evacuation zones. The separate silence LED is used to ensure that someone trying to silence the evac zone does not
inadvertently silence a releasing zone thereby disabling the warning of a possible toxic release. When this feature is used, the normal signal
silence will not silence the special service NACs (such as, releasing warning NACs). The Releasing Service Signal Silence button should not
prevent the release, it only silences the warning NACs. Note that an escalation of the releasing sequence (going from warning to released)
will not re-sound the warning NACs.
An example program follows. In this example both the visual and audible Release Notification NACs are silenced.
See the following for a program example:
Warning: In order to program the Releasing Service Signal Silence function, disable the Suppression Release Wizard in Custom Control.
The equations will stay in Custom Control but you will not be able to edit them through the wizard. Any future changes to the hazard area
will need to be manual.
1. Program a button and a LED for Releasing Service Signal Silence (RSSS).
a. Move the power LED function to the 4010-9805 LED module because the panel defaults to the bottom LED programmed as
power when configured for ULC operation.
This vacates a LED next to the silence button.
b. If a second Hazard Zone is required, do the same for the ground fault trouble.
To move the functionality of the LED mimic the mode, reference address, point type and any custom labels to an available LED.
c. Configure the switch as Mode PBT* and select an available digital pseudo point as a reference address.
The Custom Label appears on the display for the switch.
Note: In this example, the lowest switch, next to the ground fault LED, is chosen.
d. Label it appropriately for the hazard area you are silencing.
e. Configure the LED to as Mode ON and have it track another available digital Pseudo.
page 158 579-1167 Rev. K

2. Check if there are any manual or automatic alarms in the system and if someone is requesting to silence the NACs.
The equation below checks this.
- If there is an alarm in the system AND someone is pressing the RSSS button (indicated by the pseudo chosen for the button) the
output holds the NACs off at a higher priority than releasing would normally turn them on.
- If your job specific requirements specify that the releasing NACs turn on at a higher priority you may need to adjust these numbers.
The pseudo for the LED is also held on indicating the releasing NACs are silenced.
3. Add to the reset equation for the pre-discharge LED above to reset the NACs and the LED during a system reset or startup.
4. Disable the Suppression Release Wizard to delete the default equation written by the Suppression Release Wizard to
silence the NACs on system silence.
page 159 579-1167 Rev. K

If it is not deleted it will still silence the hazard area.
a. Right click the wizard for that hazard and select enable Manual Edit.
b. Click Yes in the confirmation box that follows.
c. Return to your custom control equations and find the equation that the Suppression Release Wizard labeled On System
Silence - yourhazardname
d. Right click and select Delete.
© 2019 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision and are subject
to change without notice. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex® product supplier for the latest status. Listings and
approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. Simplex, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized
use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
579-1167 Rev. K
4007ES and 4007ES Hybrid Fire Alarm
Systems Installation Manual
579-1102 Rev N
*05791102N*
1 Cautions, warnings, and regulatory information..............................................................................................3
Contents
2 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 4
2.1 4007ES product list......................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Glossary............................................................................................................................................................................................................5
3 Installation............................................................................................................................................................. 6
3.1 Mounting the 4007ES panels.........................................................................................................................................................................6
3.2 Trim Kit............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7
3.2.1 Trim kit application.........................................................................................................................................................................................................7
3.3 Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................8
3.3.1 Safety ground/ ferrite bead......................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.3.2 AC supply wiring............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
3.3.3 Battery guidelines........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
3.4 Power..............................................................................................................................................................................................................10
4 NAC power supply.............................................................................................................................................. 12
4.1 NAC power supply specifications................................................................................................................................................................13
4.2 NAC section overview................................................................................................................................................................................... 13
4.3 Specifications.................................................................................................................................................................................................14
4.3.1 Wiring parameters....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
4.3.2 Wiring distances........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
4.3.3 Class A wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 16
4.3.4 Class B wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
4.4 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
5 IDNAC power supply.......................................................................................................................................... 19
5.1 Power supply specifications........................................................................................................................................................................ 20
5.2 IDNAC section overview............................................................................................................................................................................... 20
5.3 Specifications.................................................................................................................................................................................................21
5.4 Wiring parameters........................................................................................................................................................................................ 21
5.5 IDNAC Class B wiring tables.........................................................................................................................................................................22
5.6 IDNAC Class B wiring.................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
5.7 Compatible devices and appliances........................................................................................................................................................... 24
5.8 Auxiliary relays section overview................................................................................................................................................................ 27
5.9 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................................................................................ 28
5.9.1 SLC channel trouble LED codes............................................................................................................................................................................... 29
5.9.2 System trouble LED codes........................................................................................................................................................................................ 30
6 4007ES power supplies...................................................................................................................................... 31
6.1 Power supplies specifications..................................................................................................................................................................... 31
6.2 Wiring guidelines...........................................................................................................................................................................................31
6.3 IDNet Section overview................................................................................................................................................................................ 31
6.4 Device addressing, Class A and Class B..................................................................................................................................................... 32
6.5 Wiring parameters........................................................................................................................................................................................ 33
6.6 Class A Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................ 34
6.7 Class B Wiring................................................................................................................................................................................................ 34
6.8 Auxiliary power selection............................................................................................................................................................................. 35
6.9 RUI section..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 36
6.10 Troubleshooting.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 38
7 Optional modules and cards.............................................................................................................................39
7.1 Example of combinations............................................................................................................................................................................ 40
8 Appendix A ULC programming requirements.................................................................................................43
4007ES and 4007ES Hybrid Fire Alarm Systems Installation Manual
1 Cautions, warnings, and regulatory information


EYE SAFETY HAZARD Under certain fiber optic application conditions, the optical output of this device may exceed eye safety
limits. Do not use magnification (such as a microscope or other focusing equipment) when viewing the output of this device.
SULFURIC ACID WARNING Battery contains sulfuric acid, which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and can
destroy fabric. Replace any leaking or damaged battery while wearing appropriate protective gear. If you come in contact with
sulfuric acid, immediately flush skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention.
FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS – PART 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
SYSTEM REACCPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in
accordance with NFPA-72, after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after
any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All
components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to
NFPA 72® is a registered trademark of the National Fire Protection Association.
page 3 579-1102 Rev N

2 Overview
The 4007ES fire alarm control panel provides audible and visible indication of alarms, troubles, and supervisory conditions. The 4007ES
panels supports addressable notification and initiating devices and the 4007ES Hybrid panels supports non-addressable notification
devices and addressable initiating devices*. The panel can be configured by using a panel programmer.
*From this point on, the 4007ES and the 4007ES hybrid is referred to as 4007ES, unless stated otherwise.
4007ES operator instructions are described in the 4007ES Operator’s Manual 579-1165.
4007ES programming instructions are described in the 4007ES Programmer’s manual 579-1167.
2.1 4007ES product list

Table 1: Product list
Part number Base panels
4007-9101 4007ES Hybrid, red
4007-9201 4007ES, red
4007-9102 4007ES Hybrid, platinum
4007-9202 4007ES, platinum
Table 2: Product list and manual
Part number Optional modules: field installed Manual
4007-9801 Zone/Relay Module 579-1103
4007-9802 25V Regulator Module 579-812
4007-9803 IDNet+ Loop Expansion Module 579-1106
4007-9804 Dual Class A Module 579-1029
4007-9805 LED Module 579-1105
4007-9806 DACT Module 579-954
4007-9807 City Circuit with Disconnect Module 579-955
4007-9808 City Circuit without Disconnect Module 579-955
4007-9809 Relay Module 579-955
4007-9810 4120 NIC 579-956
4007-9812 Dual RS-232 Module 579-910
4007-9813 4120 Wired Media Card 579-956
4007-9814 4120 Dual Fiber-Optic Media Card 579-956
4190-6106 TrueInsight Remote Service Gateway and Programming 579-953
4007-9818 IP Communicator Module 579-1296
4007-6401 IP Gateway GSM Cellular Module, 3G 579-1248
4007-6403 IP Gateway GSM Cellular Module for External Box, AT&T/Rogers 579-1248
4007-2501 Power Over Ethernet Switch 579-1250
4007-6301 4120 SM-L Duplex Fiber Media Card 579-1238
4007-6302 4120 SM-R Duplex Fiber Media Card 579-1238
4007-6303 4120 MM-L Duplex Fiber Media Card 579-1238
4007-6304 4120 MM-R Duplex Fiber Media Card 579-1238
4007-9817 ES Net Interface Card Assy - Flat 579-1257
4007-6306 ES Net Dual Channel Ethernet Media Card 579-1258
4007-6307 ES Net Dual Channel DSL Media Card 579-1258
4007-6308 ES Net Dual Channel Single-Mode Fiber Media Card 579-1258
4007-6309 ES Net Dual Channel Multimode Fiber Media Card 579-1258
page 4 579-1102 Rev N

2.2 Glossary
Table 3: Glossary
Term Definition
Aux Abbreviation for Auxiliary; typically used to describe Auxiliary Power.
EOL End-of-Line, typically in reference to and end-of-line resistor or EOL resistor.
FACP Fire Alarm Control Panel.
In this document, “Hybrid” the 4007ES Hybrid models that provide both addressable and conventional
Hybrid
initiation with conventional non addressable Notification Appliance Circuits.
IDC Initiating Device Circuit.
IDNet Addressable SLC for up to 250 addressable devices.
IDNet+ IDNet which is electrically isolated from internal panel electronics.
IDNAC Individual Device Notification Appliance Circuit (Addressable).
NAC Notification Appliance Circuit, formerly called signal circuit.
NIC Network Interface Card for the 4120 network.
Notification appliance operation that meets the minimum listing requirements; inrush currents typically
Regulated 24 DC
require power supply and NAC rating.
The Dual RS-232 interface module provides a serial communication interface to an AC or DC printer, a
RS-232 module
PC Annunciator, or a third party computer.
RUI Remote Unit Interface; SLC for communications with remote annunciators.
A Reverse Polarity Supervised Notification Appliance Circuit that is capable of on steady or coded
Simple NAC
operation. Sync or SmartSync operation is not supported.
SLC Signaling Line Circuit
A reverse polarity monitored NAC capable of synchronizing and controlling both horns and strobes
SmartSync on the same circuit using a proprietary signaling protocol. Used as the protocol for TrueAlert Non-
Addressable Devices.
User interface The user interface is a 4.3 in. (109mm) diagonal color LCD with a built-in resistive touch panel and 12 indicating LEDs. The
color LCD provides system status and access to perform system functions and to change the system configuration.
Figure 1 shows an inside view of the 4007ES panel with the optional LED module (4007-9805) installed.
Figure 1: 4007ES panel inside view
page 5 579-1102 Rev N

3 Installation
This chapter describes how to install the 4007ES panel. It can be semi-flush or surface mount.
3.1 Mounting the 4007ES panels

• Due to the danger of metal fragments falling into electronics when drilling the holes for the conduits, remove the electronics in the
system:
- To remove the electronics, unscrew the ten screws. Remove the power supply and store it in a safe, clean, and dry location until the
panel installation is completed, see Figure 2.
- If installing a 4007ES hybrid panel, also remove the Zone/Relay card (three screws).
• Use a suitable punch where a conduit entrance is required. The knockouts are not provided. Locate and create on-site as required
during installation.
Figure 2: Screws location

• For surface or semi-flush mounting to a wooden wall structure, the panel must be attached with four 1 1/2 in. (38 mm) long lag bolts
and four 1/2 in. (13 mm) diameter washers, supplied by others.
• For surface mounting, secure the box to the wall using the tear-drop mounting holes on the back surface. For semi-flush mounting,
secure the box along the sides to the wall studs. Note that the front surface of the back box must protrude at least 1-1/2 in. (38mm)
from the wall surface for semi-flush installation. A trim kit is supplied for semi-flush mounting, see the Trim kit application section for
more information.
• To install the panel, see Figure 3 for the dimensions and use the holes in the back box to secure it to the wall.
page 6 579-1102 Rev N

Figure 3: Back Box Installation dimensions and Semi-Flush Mounting (Right)
3.2 Trim Kit
3.2.1 Trim kit application

Trim kits are used to cosmetically cover wall openings when boxes are mounted semi-flush into the wall. The kit includes:
• Two top trim bands (shorter).
• Two side trim bands (longer).
• Four corner pieces.
Figure 4: Semi-flush trim kit

After mounting the box semi-flush to the wall, attach the trim per the following procedure:
1. The strips need to be cut before being attached. Carefully cut them to length using a hacksaw or sharp utility knife. Cut the strips
approximately 1in. (25 mm) shorter than the box dimension. The box is 20-7/8 in. (530 mm) wide and 20-3/16 in. (512 mm) high.
2. Attach the strips one at the time. Peel off the adhesive tape release and center the strip on the box placing the edge of the strip
against the box surface, then press solidly to assure adhesion.
3. Each corner piece overlaps the trim strip slightly less than 3/4 in. (19 mm). Align the corner pieces tight to the box corner and
attach with a drywall or similar screw, suitable for the wall material. The screws are not supplied.
Figure 5: Applying the trim
page 7 579-1102 Rev N

3.3 Wiring
Wiring guidelines
Follow these guidelines when connecting power-limited (PL) systems. For more information about these guidelines, contact your
• Non-power limited (NPL) field wiring (AC power, batteries, City connection, DACT) must be installed and routed in the shaded areas
shown in Figure 6
• You must maintain a minimum of 0.25 in. (6.35 mm) space between NPL and PL field wiring.
• The AC harness is pre-wired and tied to back of the box.
Figure 6: Field wiring guidelines (NAC power supply shown as reference)

• The conductors must test free of all grounds.
• A system ground must be provided for earth detection and lightning protection devices. This connection must comply with approved
earth detection per NFPA780.
• Splicing is permitted. All spliced connections must either be soldered (resin-core solder), crimped in metal sleeves, or encapsulated
with an epoxy resin. When soldering or crimped metal sleeves are used, the junction must be insulated with a high-grade electrical
tape that is as sound as the original insulating jacket. Shield continuity must be maintained throughout.
• Excess slack should be kept to a minimum inside the back box enclosure. The wiring should be neatly dressed and bundled together
using wire ties.
• All wiring must use copper conductors only, unless noted otherwise.
• For IDNet, shielded wire is not recommended. If shielded wires are present, cut and tape off the shield at each end in the panel
to prevent it coming into contact with other components. The metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained and insulated
throughout the entire length of the cable.
• If shielded wire is used, the metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained throughout the entire cable length, and the entire
length of the cable must have a resistance greater than 1 megohm to earth ground. Underground wiring must be free of all water.
Figure 7: EOL relay diagram

• In areas of high lightning activity, or in areas that have large power surges, use the 2081-9027 or the 2081-9044 Transient Suppressor
on monitor points.
• Wires must not be run through elevator shafts.
• Only system wiring can be run together in the same conduit. When powering remote units using relay contacts, power for these
circuits must be provided by a PL power supply listed for fire-protective signaling use. An end-of-line (EOL) relay must be used to
supervise the auxiliary power circuit.
• Connect the output of the EOL relay to cause a trouble. Wire in series with the EOL resistor on an available initiating device circuit
(IDC) or individual addressable module (IAM).
page 8 579-1102 Rev N

3.3.1 Safety ground/ ferrite bead

Correct operation and protection against transient energy in accordance with UL 864 and ULC-S527 require the connection of safety
ground wire to cabinet chassis. Connect the safety ground before wiring any other circuits to the panel. Ferrite beads must be attached
to the incoming AC power line as shown in Figure 8. Wrap the line leg twice through a ferrite bead, and the neutral leg of the power line
twice through the other ferrite bead.
Figure 8: Safety ground and ferrite bead
Note: The ferrite bead should be installed as close as possible to where power enters the panel.
3.3.2 AC supply wiring

Adhere to the following guidelines when wiring AC Power. See Safety ground/ ferrite bead for information about attaching the ferrite bead
to the AC power wires.
• The AC power must be wired from a dedicated circuit breaker or fuse, rated no more than 20 A, in accordance with NFPA-72, NEC, and
local codes.
• Before handling the AC feed, verify that it is not live using a voltmeter. Make sure the circuit is de-energized and tagged to prevent
injury.
• The AC supply wiring must be 14 AWG minimum to 12 AWG maximum.
• Connect a 12 AWG copper ground wire from safety ground in the electrical distribution panel to the panel safety ground stud.
• Input voltage:
- 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
- 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz.
• No configuration settings required to select.
page 9 579-1102 Rev N

3.3.3 Battery guidelines

A fused harness is required to connect the backup batteries. Use harness 734-304 for a NAC power supply, and harness 734-303 for an
IDNAC power supply. The harness is shipped with the panel. The mating spade lug on the battery should be 0.250 in. X 0.032 in. (6.35 mm
X 0.81 mm). If another size is needed, you need to replace the battery terminal connectors on the supplied battery harness.
• The 4007ES battery charger supports up to 33 Ah batteries (maximum) within UL864 and ULCS527 guidelines.
- 18 Ah batteries can fit inside the box.
- 25 Ah and 33 Ah batteries use 2081-9282(red 25 Ah or 33 Ah) or 4009-9801 (beige 25 Ah).
• To minimize the power losses due to wiring from the external battery box to the 4007ES, use at least a 12 AWG wire. Mount the
battery box within 20 feet (609.6 cm) of the panel in accordance with the mounting instruction label in the box. All interconnecting
wiring must be enclosed in conduit.
• Seismic battery brackets can be used internally in the 4007ES box (the 2081-9401: 12.7 Ah bracket, and the 2081-9402: 18 Ah
bracket). For more information on how to install the seismic brackets, see the Battery Bracket installation instructions (579-944).
3.4 Power
Final installation To finalize the installation:
1. Reinstall the power supply and the electronics.
2. To install the batteries:
a. Place the first battery on the left side of the panel to avoid interference with the DACT, if installed.
Note: The battery terminals should face the front of the box.
b. Insert the second battery and make sure it is snugly positioned beside the first battery.
c. Wire the batteries in series such that you have 24 V. Use the white wire provided to bridge the batteries together, see Figure 9.
Important: Verify all field wiring before applying any power to the panel.
Power up the system:

1. Connect the negative lead to the battery.
2. Apply AC.
3. Connect the positive to the battery.
page 10 579-1102 Rev N

Figure 9: Power supply
page 11 579-1102 Rev N

4 NAC power supply

A conventional reverse polarity NAC power supply is used in a 4007ES hybrid panel. It provides 6A and can support the following:
• Non-addressable notification devices.
• Addressable initiating devices.
See Figure 10 and Table 4 for the main components of the NAC power supply.
Figure 10: NAC power supply
Table 4: Main components information

P1 RUI Class A/B jumpers P2 IDNet Class A/B jumper
TB4 Battery connection TB2 NAC 1 and NAC 2
P10 AC Power Connection TB3 NAC 3 and NAC 4
J5 and J15 Zone / Relay J7 IDNet Loop B
J16 CPU Connection J8 IDNet Loop C
J17 Option Connection P4 NAC Power Supply Card On-line
P11 City/Relay Connection P6 Battery Depleted Jumper
P8 1-2 (default) / IDNet card on line
IDNet Loop 1, Aux Power, RUI 25V Regulator Jumpers 1-2, 3-4
TB1
Connection P9 default. Power is fed to the zone/ relay card. No
jumpers. Using 4007-9802, 25V Regulator Module.
page 12 579-1102 Rev N

4.1 NAC power supply specifications

The NAC power supply can supply 6 A of 24 V power in addition to the base draw of the CPU/ Power Supply cards. The current draw taken
from optional cards, IDNet Devices, Aux Power, and NACs must be subtracted from 6 A.
Important: See the 4007-9801 8-Point Zone/Relay Card Installation Instructions 579-1103, to determine the draw of the pre-installed Zone/
Relay card.
13.6.2.1 ítem 13
Table 5: 4007ES hybrid system current draw
2 A at 120 VAC, 50/60Hz
Maximum AC input
1 A at 240 VAC, 50/60Hz
Current
Standby conditions
(battery standby 24 V)
No alarms (NACs normal). No IDNet devices connected. 145 mA
Add to above for each additional IDNet device in standby. 0.8 mA
Total current for fully loaded IDNet channel in standby. 345 mA
Current
Alarm conditions
(battery alarm 24 V)
4 NACs ON: TBL Relay Activated: IDNet LED On. No IDNet devices connected. 190 mA
Add to above for each IDNet device in alarm. 1 mA
Add to above for each IDNet LED On (20 maximum IDNet devices LEDs On). 2 mA
Total current for fully loaded IDNet channel in alarm. 480 mA
4.2 NAC section overview

The NAC power supply allows connection to up to four Class A NAC circuits. Notification appliances within the 4007ES system are
synchronized including any attached 4009 series NAC extenders. Do not mix Wheelock and Simplex branded devices in the same system,
they will not be synchronized. The following TrueAlert non-addressable appliances are Special Application compatible with the NAC power
supply:
• 4098-9772 Sensor Base with 520 Hz Sounder
• 4098-9773 CO Sensor Base with 520 Hz Sounder
• 4901-series-horn
• 4906-multicandela-series
• 49CMT series Horn
• 49CMTV series A/V
• Wheelock Series: AS, HS, NS, ZNS, RSS, RSSP, STR, ZRS, MT, AMT, MTWP, ET, CH, E50, E60, E70, E80, E90, S8, SA
Figure 11: NAC terminal on NAC power supply
page 13 579-1102 Rev N

4.3 Specifications
Table 6: Specifications
Maximum appliances 70 per circuit.*
* Each 49CMT series appliance counts as 5 regular appliances for the maximum 70 appliances that can be supported per NAC. As the
earth fault sensitivity with thirteen MT appliances drops from 10 K to 9.6K ohms, no more than thirteen 49CMT series appliances may be
placed on one circuit.
Electrical specifications:
Voltage 24 VDC nominal.
Alarm current The maximum alarm current is 3 A per circuit.
Supervisory current Refer to Table 8.
Special application appliances (TrueAlert Non-
6 A total.
Addressable)
Note:
When NACs are used for Regulated 24DC appliances, maximum current per NAC is reduced to 2 A and total power supply notification cur-
rent rating is reduced to 3 A. Current used by modules powered from the 4007ES power supply must be deducted from the total current.
4.3.1 Wiring parameters 13.6.2.1 ítem 10

The NAC power supply is supervised and power-limited. See Table 8 for the NACs’ supported EOL resistors and the related supervisory
current, and see Table 8 for the wiring parameters.
Note: If a shielded wire is used, cut it and tape it at both ends.
Table 7: Wiring parameters
Maximum wiring distance
Maximum cable load 10,000 ft (3,048 m) per channel
Maximum wire length from panel to any device 4,000 ft (762 m)
Maintain the correct polarity on terminal connections. Do not loop wires under terminals.
Table 8: Supported EOLR and supervisory current
EOLR Current
3.9 k 5.7 mA
4.7 k 4.8 mA
5.1 k 4.4 mA
5.6 k 4.0 mA
10 k 2.2 mA
15 k 1.4 mA
page 14 579-1102 Rev N

4.3.2 Wiring distances

Table 9 lists the maximum distances from the NAC terminal block to the last appliance in a Class A configuration, depending on wire gauge
and current. Use Table 9 to calculate the wire distances for your application if you are using Class A wiring. Table 10 gives the values for a
Class B configuration.
Table 9: Class A wiring distances
Max distance w/ 18 Max distance w/ 16 AWG Max distance w/ 14 Max distance w/ 12
Alarm current 2 2 2 2 DC resistance
AWG (0.8231 mm ) (1.309 mm ) AWG (2.081 mm ) AWG (3.309 mm )
0.25 A 420 ft (128 m) 667 ft (203 m) 1,063 ft (324 m) 1,691 ft (515 m) 6 Ohms
0.50 A 210 ft (64 m) 334 ft (102 m) 532 ft (162 m) 845 ft (258 m) 3 Ohms
1.00 A 105 ft (32m) 167 ft (51 m) 266 ft (81 m) 423 ft (129 m) 1.5 Ohms
1.25 A 84 ft (26 m) 133 ft (41 m) 213 ft (65 m) 338 ft (103 m) 1.2 Ohms
1.50 A 70 ft (21 m) 111 ft (34 m) 177 ft (54 m) 282 ft (86 m) 1 Ohm
1.75 A 60 ft (18 m) 95 ft (29 m) 152 ft (46 m) 242 ft (74 m) 0.86 Ohm
Table 10: Class B wiring distances
Max distance w/ 18 Max distance w/ 16 Max distance w/ 14 Max distance w/ 12
Alarm current 2 2 2 2 DC resistance
AWG (0.8231 mm ) AWG (1.309 mm ) AWG (2.081 mm ) AWG (3.309 mm )
0.25 A 840 ft (256 m) 1,335 ft (407 m) 2,126 ft (648 m) 3,382 ft (1,031 m) 12 Ohms
0.50 A 420 ft (128 m) 667 ft (203 m) 1,063 ft (324 m) 1,691 ft (515 m) 6 Ohms
0.75 A 280 ft (85 m) 445 ft (136 m) 709 ft (216 m) 1,127 ft (344 m) 4 Ohms
3.00 A 70 ft (21 m) 111 ft (34 m) 177 ft (54 m) 282 ft (86 m) 1 Ohm
Note:
• Max distance = distance from the power supply to last appliance.
• This table is calculated at 49°C (120°F). If you are installing in locations that could be exposed to higher temperatures, refer to NEC
Table 8.
• Distances are based on a 3 V drop, and take into account the worst-case panel output voltage.
• If circuit integrity wire is used instead of housing cable in a fire rated enclosure, reduce the wiring distances by 38 ft (12 m) for every
10 ft (3 m) of potential exposure.
page 15 579-1102 Rev N

4.3.3 Class A wiring

Note: The Class A wiring style is set up in the ES Panel Programmer. See the 4007ES Programmer’s Manual (579-1167), for more informa-
tion.
To connect the power supply to reverse-polarity, non-addressable notification appliances using Class A wiring, complete the following
steps:
1. Route wire from the B+ and B- outputs of the power supply to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral notification appliance. Use
NAC1, NAC2, NAC3, or Figure 12.
2. Route the wire from the first appliance to the next. Repeat this for each appliance.
Figure 12: Class A NAC wiring
3. Route the wire from the last appliance to the A+ and A- inputs on the same NAC circuit of the power supply.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each NAC output you want to use.
5. Leave the 10 KOhms, 1/2 W, brown/black/orange resistor (378-030) on each unused circuit. No external end-of-line resistor is
needed for circuits in use.
page 16 579-1102 Rev N

4.3.4 Class B wiring

Note: The Class B wiring style is set up in the ES Panel Programmer. See the 4007ES Programmer’s Manual (579-1167), for more informa-
tion.
To connect the power supply to appliances using Class B wiring, complete the following steps:
1. Route the wire from the B+, B- outputs on TB2 and TB3 of the power supply to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral notification
appliance. Use NAC1, NAC2, NAC3, or NAC4.
Figure 13: Class B NAC wiring

2. Route the wire from the first appliance to the next. T-tapping is not permitted. Repeat this for each appliance.
3. Route the wire from the last appliance to the EOLR harness (10KOhms, 1/2 W: P/N 733- 894).
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each NAC output you want to use.
5. Leave the factory installed EOL resistor (10 KOhms*, 1/2 W; brown/black/orange) on each unused circuit. The circuit must
connect B+ to B- terminals.
6. Document the EOL value in the panel for each circuit.
*If using a 4007ES hybrid panel, keep the original value and set the ES Panel Programmer accordingly.
page 17 579-1102 Rev N

4.4 Troubleshooting
Figure 14 and Table 11 show the LED definition for the NAC power.
Figure 14: LEDs on the 4007ES hybrid power supply

Table 11: LEDs on the 4007ES hybrid power supply
LED10 AC Green. Off on AC failure.
LED2 RUI Trouble Yellow. On for Class A RUI trouble.
LED6 RUI OC Yellow. Indicates a short (overcurrent).
LED3 Comm Yellow. Indicates that the communication between the NAC power supply and the CPU is lost.
LED 4 Gen Power Steady On, yellow. Indicates AC power loss, earth fault, overcurrent and battery trouble.
LED5, 7, 8, NAC 1, 2, 3,
Steady On, yellow. Used to signal overcurrent, short, and open circuit.
and 9 4
LED1 Aux/SNAC Steady On, yellow. Use to signal overcurrent, short, and open circuit.
13.6.2.1 ítem 13
page 18 579-1102 Rev N

5 IDNAC power supply

An IDNAC power supply is used in the 4007ES panel, the non-hybrid panel. It provides 4 A and can support the following:
• Addressable notification devices.
• Addressable initiating devices.
See Figure 15 and Table 12 for the main components of the IDNAC power supply.
Figure 15: IDNAC power supply

Table 12: Main components information
P1 RUI Class A/B jumpers P2 IDNet Class A/B jumper
TB4 Battery connection TB2 IDNAC
P10 AC Power Connection TB3 Aux Relay 1 and 2
DCAI
J15 J10 IDNet Loop 2
Zone/Relay Connection
J7 Zone/Relay J11 IDNet Loop 3
J16 CPU Connection P5 Battery Depleted Jumper
J17 Option Connection P8 1-2 (default) / IDNet card on line
P11 City Circuit Connection 25V Regulator Jumpers 1-2, 3-4 default. Power is fed to
IDNet Loop 1, Aux Power, RUI P9 the zone/relay card. No jumpers. Using 4007-9802, 25V
TB1
Connection Regulator Module
page 19 579-1102 Rev N

5.1 Power supply specifications

The IDNAC Power Supply can supply 4A of 24V power in addition to the base draw of the CPU/power supply cards. The current draw taken
from optional cards, IDNet Devices, Aux Power, and NACs must be subtracted from 4A.
Table 13: 4007ES system current draw
2 A at 120 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Maximum AC input
1 A at 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Current (see Note 1) (Battery Standby 24
Standby conditions (see Note 1)
V)
No alarms (NACs normal). No IDNet devices connected 180 mA
Add to above for each additional IDNet or IDNAC device in standby 0.8 mA
Total current for fully loaded IDNet or IDNAC channel in standby 431 mA
Alarm conditions (see Note 1) Current (see Note 1) (Battery Alarm 24 V)
IDNAC ON: No IDNet LED On. No IDNet devices connected 185 mA
Add to above for each IDNet device in alarm (see note 2) 1 mA
Add to above for each IDNet LED On (20 maximum IDNet devices LEDs On) 2 mA
Total current for fully loaded IDNet channel in alarm (20 LEDs On) (see note 2) 475 mA
Note:
1. Add an additional 9 mA per active auxiliary relay (Alarm or Standby).
2. The IDNAC Alarm current depends on the IDNAC device used. See the relevant device manual for more information on currents.
5.2 IDNAC section overview

The IDNAC power supply has a single SLC for connecting addressable IDNAC devices. The power supply is compatible with TrueAlertES and
TrueAlert Addressable product lines, both multi and fixed candela. The IDNAC output is Class B only. Class A operation requires use of the
optional module 4007-9804, IDNAC dual Class A isolator.
The output is duplicated on the terminal block to facilitate T-tapping on the circuit at the panel. EOL resistors are not required.
All wiring is supervised and power-limited.
Figure 16: IDNAC terminal
page 20 579-1102 Rev N

5.3 Specifications
Table 14: IDNAC specifications
• Up to 12 4905-9929 remote TrueAlert Addressable Isolators per IDNAC Circuit.
• Up to 30 devices connected directly to any isolator terminal pair*.
Supports • Up to six isolators between any appliance and the IDNAC SLC terminals. All wiring is 20 AWG to
12 AWG. *For more information on the isolator, refer to the 4905 Isolator+ Installation Instructions,
574-769.
29.5 VDC nominal. In alarm the IDNAC circuit provides 29 V throughout the listed operating voltage
Channel voltage
range for both AC and battery power.
Circuit requirements The maximum alarm current is 3 A per circuits.
Isolator
To wire an IDNAC as a Class A circuit, the DCAI modules (4007-9804) is required (2 Class A circuits with
Isolator (DCAI) fault isolation). For more information about Dual Class A isolators and on how to calculate Class B
wiring with isolation, see the DCAI Installation Instructions (579-1029).
5.4 Wiring parameters

Table 15 identifies the wiring parameters for the IDNAC.
Table 15: IDNAC Wiring parameters
IDNAC wiring limits
127 devices (IDNAC devices or other compatible devices). See Compatible devices and
Channel loading
appliances for more information.
Max. wiring distance
Max. cable load 10,000 ft (3,048m) per channel.
Max. wire length from panel to any
4,000ft (762m).
device
Note: If a shielded wire is used, cut it and tape it. The required wiring is unshielded twisted pair (UTP). This wiring must have a capacitive
rating of less than 60pF/ft and a minimum of 3 twists (turns) per foot.
page 21 579-1102 Rev N

5.5 IDNAC Class B wiring tables

Use the following tables to calculate the wiring distance to farthest appliance. The maximum wiring distance is the shorter of the distance
limits as calculated by alarm current voltage drop or by reaching the communications distance limit.
Figure 17: Class B wiring tables
Note: Although the required wiring for IDNAC circuits is twisted pair (controlled impedance) wiring, some applications will wish to take
advantage of existing wiring that is not twisted pair. This is only allowed if both conductors of the IDNAC circuit reside in the same metal
conduit, and only under certain conditions. Check with your local sales office before using wiring that is not twisted pair.
page 22 579-1102 Rev N

5.6 IDNAC Class B wiring

To connect the power supply to appliances using Class B wiring:
1. Route the wire from the + and the - outputs on the IDNAC terminal block (TB2) to the appropriate inputs on a peripheral
notification appliance.
2. Route the wire from the first appliance to the next. T- tapping is permitted. Repeat this for each appliance.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each IDNAC output you want to use.
Figure 18: Class B wiring
Note:
1. Notification appliances are rated using an individual nameplate label. Maintain the correct polarity on terminal connections.
2. Each IDNAC + and - terminal is rated for 2 identical wires. This allows up to 4 Class B T-TAP circuits directly from each IDNAC
terminal block, see IDNAC Class B wiring.
page 23 579-1102 Rev N

5.7 Compatible devices and appliances

The devices and appliances listed in Table 16 are compatible with the IDNAC power supply. Notification devices are synchronized within the
4007ES system, including any attached 4009 series NAC extenders.
Table 16: Compatible devices and appliances
Addressable device description Model numbers
4009-9601 (platinum)
4009 IDNAC Repeater
4009-9602 (red)
Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI) 4007-9804
TrueAlert Addressable Isolator+ module 4905-9929
Addressable device appliance TrueAlert appliance model
TrueAlert ES appliance model numbers
description numbers
49AO-WRF 49AO-APPLW-BA
1
49AO-WRF-BA 49MT-WRF
49AO-WRS-BA 49MT-WRF-BA
1
49AO-WRS 1
49MT-WRS-BA
49AO-WRQ 1
Audible only (AO) horn 49MT-WWS-BA 4901-9850
49AO-WWF
notification appliances 1 4901-9853
49AO-WWF-BA 49MT-WWF-BA
1
49AO-WWS-BA 49MT-APPLW
49AO-APPLC 49MT-APPLW-BA
1
49AO-APPLC-BA 49CHO-APPLW
49AO-APPLW 49CHO-APPLW-BA
49AV-WRS
49AV-APPLW-BA
49AV-APPLW
49AV-WRF
49AV-WRQ
49AV-WWF
2
49AV-WRF-BA 49MTV-WWS-BA
2
49AV-WRQ-BA 49MTV-WRF
49AV-WRS-BA 49MTV-WRF-BA
2
49AV-APPLC 2
49MTV-WRS-BA 4906-9227
49AV-APPLC-BA
Audible/visible (A/V) notification 49MTV-WWF
2 4906-9229
49AVH-APPLC
appliances 2 4906-9228
49AVH-APPLC-BA 49MTV-WWF-BA
4906-9230
49AVH-APPLCA 49MTV-APPLW
2
49AVH-APPLCA-BA 2
49MTV-APPLW-BA
49AVH-APPLCB
49AVH-APPLCR
49AVH-APPLCB-BA
49AVH-APPLCR-BA
49AV-WWF-BA
49AVH-APPLCG
49AV-WWS-BA
49AVH-APPLCG-BA
49CHV-APPLW
49CHV-APPLW-BA
page 24 579-1102 Rev N


description numbers
49VO-WWS-BA
49VO-WRF 49VO-WWF-BA
49VO-WWF 49VO-WWA-BA
49VO-WRA-A 49VO-WWA-A-BA
49VO-WRA-A-BA 49VO-WWS-A-BA
49VO-WWA-A 49VO-WRS
49VO-WRA-BA 49VO-WWS
49VO-WRF-BA 49VO-WWA
4906-9201
49VO-WRQ-BA 49VO-WWQ
Visible only (VO) notification 4906-9203
49VO-APPLC 49VO-WRA
appliances 4906-9202
49VO-APPLC-BA 49VO-WRQ
4906-9204
49VOH-APPLC 49VO-APPLW49VO-APPLW
49VOH-APPLC-BA 49VO-APPLW-BA
49VOH-APPLCA 49VO-APPLWE
49VOH-APPLCA-BA 49VO-APPLWE-BA
49VOH-APPLCB 49VOH-APPLCR
49VOH-APPLCB-BA 49VOH-APPLCR-BA
49VO-WRS-BA 49VOH-APPLCG
49VOH-APPLCG-BA
4906-9251
Speaker/visible (S/V) notification
- - 4906-9253
appliances (visible/strobe)
4906-9254
49AV-WRFO 49AV-WRQO-C
Audible/visible (A/V) weatherproof 49AV-WRFO-BA 49AV-WRFO-C
N/A
notification appliances 49AV-WWFO-BA 49AV-APPLW-O
49AV-APPLW-CO 49AV-APPLW-O-BA
49VO-WRFO 49VO-WRFO-C
49VO-WRFO-BA 49VO-WRQO-C
Visible only (VO) weatherproof
49VO-WRSO-BA 49VO-WRSO N/A
notification appliances
49VO-WWFO-BA 49VO-APPLW-O
49VO-APPLW-CO 49VO-APPLW-O-BA
TrueAlert adapter N/A 4905-9816
59VO-WRF 59VO-WRFAB-BA
59VO-WRF-BA 59VO-WWFAB
LED visible only (VO) wall mount 59VO-WWF 59VO-WWFAB
59VO-WWF-BA 59VO-APPLWR
59VO-WRFAB 59VO-APPLWW
59VO-WRFH-BA 59VO-WWFABH-BA
LED visible only (VO) high candela
59VO-WWFH-BA 59VO-APPLWRH
wall mount
59VO-WRFABH-BA 59VO-APPLWWH
59VO-WRFO 59VO-WRFABO-BA
LED visible only (VO) wall mount 59VO-WRFO-BA 59VO-WWWFABO-BA
weatherproof 59VO-WWFO-BA 59VO-APPLWR-O
59VO-WRFABO 59VO-APPLWW-O
LED visible only (VO) high candela 59VO-APPLWRH-O
wall mount weatherproof 59VO-APPLWWH-O
page 25 579-1102 Rev N


description numbers
59AV-WRF
59AV-WRF-BA 59AV-WWFAB
LED audible/visible (A/V) wall 59AV-WWF 59AV-WWFAB-BA
mount 59AV-WWF-BA 59AV-APPLWR
59AV-WRFAB 59AV-APPLWW
59AV-WRFAB-BA
59AV-WRFH 59AV-WRFABH
LED audible/visible (A/V) wall
59AV-WRFH-BA 59AV-WWFABH-BA
mount
59AV-WWFH-BA 59AV-APPLWRH
high candela
59AV-WRFABH 59AV-APPLWRH
59AV-WRFO 59AV-WRFABO-BA
LED audible/visible (A/V) wall 59AV-WRFO 59AV-WRFABO-BA
mount weatherproof 59AV-WWFO-BA 59AV-APPLWR-O
59AV-WWFO-BA 59AV-APPLWW-O
59AV-APPLWR-O 59AV-APPLWRH-O
59AV-APPLWW-O 59AV-APPLWRH-O
59AO-WRS 59AO-WWS-BA
Audible only (AO) wall mount 59AO-WRS-BA 59AO-APPLWR
59AO-WWS 59AO-APPLWR
59AO-APPLWW
Audible only (AO) wall mount 59AO-APPLWR-O
59AO-WRSO-BA
weatherproof 59AO-APPLWW-O
59AO-WWSO-BA
Plate 59AP-EUROBB
Notes:
1. Maximum thirty-two (32) 49MT appliances per circuit.
2. Maximum twenty-one (21) 49MTV appliances per circuit.
page 26 579-1102 Rev N

5.8 Auxiliary relays section overview

Table 18: Electrical specifications for Auxiliary relays
Relay circuit rated to switch: 2 A at 30 VAC or 30 VDC, resistive load.
Relay contacts are Form C dry contacts. Transorbs provide suppression to earth. Do not switch
Contacts:
voltages greater than rating, or damage may result.
Table 19: Power specifications for auxiliary relays
Power
When power through auxiliary contacts is provided by the power supply, the wiring is power-limited.
When power through auxiliary contacts is not provided by the power supply, use in-line fuse holder 208-165 with 208-183, 1A fuse with
attached cap (supplied separately). If the power source is not power-limited to the requirements of UL864, wiring is to be segregated to
the non-power-limited spaces of the cabinet.
Note:
The Aux relay terminals on the IDNAC power supply are controlled by two on-board programmable relays. The relay circuits are not
supervised.
Figure 19: Aux relay terminals
page 27 579-1102 Rev N

5.9 Troubleshooting
The code produced by the illuminated yellow indicator LEDs corresponds to a trouble that is either occurring on the system, or on the SLC
channels. See Table 20 for the 4007ES LED definitions, and see Figure 21 for the 4007ES LEDs and their codes.
IDNAC channel troubles are indicated by yellow LEDs labeled IDNAC TBL and letters A to D. When the IDNAC TBL LED illuminates, the
IDNAC channel is experiencing a trouble. Refer to Figure 22 or the trouble codes for LEDs A to D. The LED SCROLL pushbutton can be
used to scroll through multiple trouble indicators.
Table 20: 4007ES indicator LEDs
Signal various trouble conditions on the 4007ES and its SLC. Refer to Figure 21 and
LED: A, B, C, D
Figure 22 for troubles details.
IDNAC TBL When On steady, refer to Figure 21 for detailed troubles indicated by LEDs A-D.
Indicates that the communication between the IDNAC power supply and the CPU is
LED COMM Loss
lost.
Used to scroll through multiple troubles, since only one trouble can be displayed at a
Scroll Push Button (SW1)
time.
Figure 20: LEDs on the 4007ES power supply
page 28 579-1102 Rev N

5.9.1 SLC channel trouble LED codes

SLC channel troubles are indicated by LEDs A to D, as well as IDNAC. See Figure 21 for the description of the LEDs.
Figure 21: SLC channel trouble LED codes
page 29 579-1102 Rev N

5.9.2 System trouble LED codes

System troubles are indicated by LEDs A to D.
Figure 22: System trouble LED codes
page 30 579-1102 Rev N

6 4007ES power supplies

This chapter describes the common sections of both the 4007ES Hybrid NAC power supply and the 4007ES IDNAC power supply.
6.1 Power supplies specifications

Table 21: Operating conditions
Operating conditions:
Operating temperature range 32 °F - 120 °F (0 °C - 49 °C).
Operating humidity range Up to 93% relative humidity at 90 °F (32 °C), non-condensing.
6.2 Wiring guidelines
Class A: Using Class A wiring allows devices to communicate with the FACP even in the event of a single open circuit somewhere on the
loop. Class A wiring requires that two wires are routed from the power supply to each device, and then back to the power supply.
Class B: T-tapping is permitted on Class B wiring. Class B wiring therefore requires less cable distance per installation than Class A.
Auxiliary power only: Supervision must be provided if the auxiliary power circuit is to be wired as a power-limited circuit. In order to
connect a circuit using PL wiring, the devices being powered must all be addressable, or a UL Listed EOL relay must be used to supervise
the circuit.
6.3 IDNet Section overview

The power supply provides an isolated IDNet channel. This section is compatible with IDNet communicating initiating devices and enables
the system CPU to communicate with up to 250 peripheral devices, such as smoke detectors and pull stations.
Figure 23: IDNET on the power supply

Specifications
Table 22: IDNet specifications
Up to 250 addressable IDNet devices and up to 43 coded piezo sounders may be coded by the
Supports: IDNet channel. Base panel supports 100 points, with 75 additional points per additional IDNet+
Loop Expansion Module (refer to manual 579-1106).
30 VDC (normal); 35 VDC Alarm.
Channel voltage 13.6.2.1 ítem 10
Data rate is 3333 bps.
to remote devices
Output circuits are supervised and power-limited.
Earth detection threshold: 10k ohms minimum from either positive or negative terminals.
Refer to Table 5 for the IDNet current on a NAC power supply. Refer to Table 13 for the IDNet
Circuit requirements:
current on a IDNAC power supply.
LEDS:
For detailed information on LEDs troubleshooting, refer to Figure 21 and Figure 22 in the Troubleshooting section.
page 31 579-1102 Rev N

6.4 Device addressing, Class A and Class B

The IDNet section can be wired as a Class A circuit or a Class B circuit.
Class A wiring: Class A wiring provides an alternate communication path that maintains communication to all devices when a single open
circuit fault occurs. Class A wiring requires two wires to be routed from the IDNet Primary Terminals (B+, B-) to each device, and then back
to the IDNet Secondary Terminals (A+, A-). Wiring is in/out, and T-tapping is not permitted.
Class B wiring: T-tapping is permitted on Class B wiring. IDNet wiring is inherently supervised due to individual device level
communications. EOL resistors are not required.
• If there are no remote isolators or isolator bases on the loops, device addressing can be assigned without concern for sequence.
• If there are remote isolators or isolator bases on the loops, the required addressing approach is to start from the B side and
assign each successive isolator a higher address than the isolator it precedes.
• For Class B wiring only, the A output and B output on a loop are connected in parallel using a jumper.
page 32 579-1102 Rev N

6.5 Wiring parameters

Table 23 identifies the IDNet wiring parameters that you must consider when installing this card. For additional wiring information, see
Simplex Addressable Fire Alarm Panels Field Wiring Specifications (900-408).
Table 23: IDNet wiring parameters
IDNet wiring capacitance parameters
Parameter Value
The sum of line-to-line capacitance, plus the capacitance of either
Maximum supported channel capacitance
line-to-shield (if shield is present) = 0.6 µF
IDNet wiring Class A and Class B limits
Channel loading Up to 125 devices 126 to 250 devices
Max. resistance to compatible devices. (Include the
2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector resistance when 50 ohms maximum 35 ohms maximum
applicable)
Maximum wiring distance*:
4000 ft (1219 m) 2500 ft (762 m)
(18 AWG, 16 AWG, 14 AWG, 12 AWG)
Note:
• The maximum wiring distance is the maximum distance from both the IDNet control terminals (primary and return) to the farthest
device on the circuit. See Figure 24.
• The maximum wiring distance is determined by either reaching the maximum resistance, the maximum capacitance, or the stated
maximum distance, whichever occurs first.
• The total circuit cable load (amount of cable used) must not exceed 12,500ft (3,8km).
• Twisted wiring is recommended for improved noise immunity.
Figure 24: Maximum wiring distance

Table 24: IDNet wiring considerations
External wiring must be shielded (for lightning suppression) and 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors
must be installed at building exit and entrance locations.
IDNet wiring considerations
For more information, refer to the Model 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector Installation Instructions
using 2081-9044 Overvoltage
(579-832).
Protectors
Capacitance; each protector adds 0.006 µF across the connected line.
(2081-9044 is UL listed to Standard
Resistance; each protector adds 3 ohms per line of series resistance; both IDNet wires are
1459, Standard for Telephone
protected; 6 ohms per protector will be added to the total loop resistance.
Equipment)
The maximum distance of a single protected wiring run is 3270 ft (1 km).
See the 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protector Installation Instructions (574-832) for additional information.
page 33 579-1102 Rev N

6.6 Class A Wiring

To wire an IDNet section as a Class A circuit:
1. Make sure the jumpers on P2 are set to positions 3-5 and 4-6.
2. Route the wiring from the IDNet circuit primary terminals (B+, B-) on TB1 of the IDNet to the corresponding inputs on the first
device.
3. Route the wiring from the first device to the next as in/out. See Figure 25. Repeat this for each device.
4. Route the wiring from the last device to the terminals A+, A- to the panel, maintaining polarity.
5. Shielded wire is not recommended. If shielded wires are present, cut and tape off the shield at each end in the panel to prevent
it from coming into contact with other components. The metallic continuity of the shield must be maintained and insulated
throughout the entire length of the cable.
Figure 25: IDNet Class A wiring
6.7 Class B Wiring

When wiring the circuit as Class B, both the B+, B- and A+, A- terminals are available for parallel connections. Within the IDNet circuitry, A+
is connected to B+, and A- is connected to B- so circuits can stem from either one. Additionally, two wires can be connected to each screw
terminal.
To wire an IDNet as a Class B circuit, complete the following steps:
1. Set the jumpers on P2 to positions 1-3 and 2-4.
2. Route the wiring from the IDNet circuit primary terminals (B+, B-) to the corresponding inputs on the first device. It is possible to
add up to 4 circuits on the terminal block when using Class B wiring. See Figure 26 for the diagram.
3. Route the wiring from the first device to the next as in/out, see Figure 26. Repeat this for each device.
4. Shielded wire is not recommended. If shielded wires are present, cut and tape off the shield at each end (in the panel and at the
last device in each run) in the panel to prevent it coming into contact with other components. The metallic continuity of the shield
must be maintained and insulated throughout the entire length of the cable.
Figure 26: IDNet Class B wiring
page 34 579-1102 Rev N

6.8 Auxiliary power selection

AUX PWR/SNAC overview
The AUX PWR/SNAC terminal block is located on the top left corner of the power supply. Using the ES Panel Programmer, this point can be
configured as either a 24V Auxiliary (AUX) power or as a simple reverse polarity Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC). This circuit does not
support TrueAlert addressable devices nor non-addressable SmartSync appliances.
The AUX PWR/SNAC is rated 2 A maximum. The current used is deducted from the total available power supply current.
Figure 27: AUX/SNAC terminal
Output rating: 29.5 V maximum

Current Rating: 2 A, maximum.
Earth Detection 10K ohms minimum from either positive
Threshold or negative terminals.
18 AWG (min.)
Wiring Gauge:
to 12 AWG (max.).
Wiring Notes:
1. All wiring from the AUX/SNAC is power limited.
2. The conductors must test free of all grounds and stray voltages before connection to appliances and panel.
3. Terminate Class B NACs, as shown, using a 733-894 EOL. For Canadian applications, mount end-of-line resistor to a Simplex-US
Model 431537 EOL plate in accordance with ULC-S527.
4. If the wiring is routed outside the building, use of a listed secondary protector is required. Use 2081-9028 (rated 5 A) or
2081-9044 (rated 0.2 A). A protector must be installed at each building exit or entrance. Each 2081-9028 adds 0.2 ohms wiring
resistance. 2081-9044 adds 6 ohms wiring resistance, and greatly reduces the wiring distance.
Figure 28: Simple NAC wiring
page 35 579-1102 Rev N

Table 25: Simple NAC wiring limits

Alarm current 20 AWG 18 AWG 16AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG Line resistance (Ohms)
0.25 617 ft 981 ft 1560 ft 2480 ft 3944 ft 14.00
0.50 308 ft 490 ft 780 ft 1240 ft 1972 ft 7.00
0.75 206 ft 327 ft 520 ft 827 ft 1315 ft 4.67
1.00 154 ft 245 ft 390 ft 620 ft 986 ft 3.50
1.25 123 ft 196 ft 312 ft 496 ft 789 ft 2.80
1.50 103 ft 163 ft 260 ft 413 ft 657 ft 2.33
1.75 88 ft 140 ft 223 ft 354 ft 563 ft 2.00
2.00 77 ft 123 ft 195 ft 310 ft 493 ft 1.75
Note: This chart indicates the maximum distance for 1/4 -2A loads. The wiring distance is from the panel terminals to the last appliance.
Use of a 2081-9044 protector reduces wiring distance.
Output of AUX or NAC is 24 V nominal. The minimum voltage is 19.5 at minimum battery; the maximum is 29.5 V. Aux Loads include the
compatible 4007ES annunciators series, 4090 series of IDNet ZAMs and IAMs, and any listed device operating within the output limits of
the AUX. Calculate the wiring loss for the actual devices used. Compatible appliances include 4904 series of free-run strobes, 4901 series
non-SmartSync horns, 4098 series TrueAlarm Sounder Base and 4009 NAC extenders, used in reverse-polarity activation mode.
Table 26: Compatible devices with 24V Aux.power
2088-series relays 2098-series four-wire smoke detectors
4098-series four-wire smoke detectors 4190-9050/9051 4-20mA ZAMs
4090-series IDNet ZAMs
4602-6001, 4602-7001, 4602-7101, and 4100-7401, -7402 Graphic Annunciator Modules
4602-9150 RCU/SCU Modules
6.9 RUI section

RUI overview
The 4007ES RUI channel supports the following devices:
• 4100-7401, 7402 Graphic Modules.
• 4602-6001, 7001, 7101, 9150 RCU/SCU Modules.
• 4100-7401, 4100-7402 Graphic Modules.
• 4602-6001, 4602-7001, 4602-7101, RCU/SCU Modules.
Wire from the power supply's RUI channel on terminal block TB1 to each RUI device. The wiring can be Class A or Class B.
Figure 29: Location of the RUI terminal block

Table 27: RUI specifications
Supports: Up to 10 RUI devices.
Channel voltage 29.5 V nominal.
page 36 579-1102 Rev N

Table 27: RUI specifications

Earth detection threshold 10K ohms minimum from either positive or negative terminals.
The maximum allowed line-to-line capacitance (“+” to “-” terminals) is 0.58uF.
Capacitance For applications with shielded wire, be sure that the total capacitance from
line-to-line plus the shield to either line is not more than 0.58uF.
Wiring
Maximum wiring distance:
2,500 feet (762 m) to device from PSU card.
(18 AWG, 16 AWG, 14 AWG, 12 AWG)
Maximum T- tapping length 10,000 feet (3,048 m).
Notes:
Maintain the correct polarity on terminal connections. Do not loop wires under terminals. If Class A is not used, configure jumpers P1
accordingly.
Shielded wire is not required. Twisted wire is recommended for improved noise immunity.
Figure 30 depicts Class A and Class B wiring.
Figure 30: RUI wiring to the host panel
page 37 579-1102 Rev N

6.10 Troubleshooting
The code produced by the illuminated indicator LEDs corresponds to a trouble occurring on the system. See Table 28 for the IDNet LED
definitions, and see Table 29 for the 4007ES trouble messages.
Table 28: LEDs on the 4007ES power supplies
Comm trouble Normally off. Turns on steady if the IDNet is not communicating with the FACP CPU.
Normally off. Illuminates to indicate a problem
with the IDNet channel:
IDNet trouble • Channel failure.
• Line short.
• Class A failure or an open line.
Earth fault+ Illuminates to indicate a positive earth fault.
Earth fault - Illuminates to indicate a negative earth fault.
IDNet LEDs: A, B, and C Steady ON: Indicates an open or short condition on indicated loop.
Figure 31: LEDs on the 4007ES power supplies

Table 29: 4007ES system trouble messages
Message Definition
AC Fail AC power is not present or is too low for proper system operation.
Low Battery The battery voltage is below the 22.8 V nominal level by 10% or more.
Depleted/Missing Battery The battery is either below 19.4 V or completely undetected.
Card Overcurrent The module is drawing more current than it should. Check for faults on the circuit.
The battery charger is either defective or being heavily loaded by batteries. Read charger current at front
13.6.2.1 ítem 13 panel, if charger current is approximately 1.4 A, batteries are likely loading the charger. Remove battery
connection and measure the output. If the output is 27.6 (or close, temperature dependent), there is a
Charger trouble possibility of depleted batteries or a bad set of batteries. Allow batteries to charge or replace them if they
do not take a charge.
If the current is ~1.4 A with batteries and charger voltage below 20 V, remove the batteries and recheck the
charger voltage. If the voltage is around ~27.3 V, then the batteries are heavily depleted.
Appears if one or more extra devices (i.e., devices that have not been configured for the IDNAC or IDNet
Extra Device
channel) are on the system. Only one message appears, regardless of the number of extra devices found.
Comes up during the Earth Fault Search diagnostic function. Once the search is initiated, the front panel
display indicates how far along the search process has progressed (10%, 25%…75%), and then shows the
Earth Fault Search results of the search. The result either identifies the offending circuit or indicates that the earth fault could
not be found. During the search of circuits (IDNet, NAC, IDNAC, and aux power), system alarm and trouble
13.6.2.1 ítem 10 processing is suspended.
Positive Earth Appears when a positive earth fault is detected.
Negative Earth Appears when a negative earth fault is detected.
Appears when a short is detected on the IDNAC/NAC channel. This status clears automatically when the
Short Circuit
short circuit is removed.
Appears when each device on the IDNet channel has been configured, and when none of the devices are
Channel Fail communicating on the channel. This message does not appear if there are no configured devices on the
IDNAC channel.
page 38 579-1102 Rev N

7 Optional modules and cards

The 4007ES can be ordered with a variety of optional cards and modules, depending on the system requirements.
8 Point Zone/ Relay Card
The 8-point Zone/relay Card (4007-9801) mounts in the 4007ES panel. Up to four cards can be added. Each card monitors up to eight
Class B or four Class A zones, or eight relay contacts. For more information about the 8-point zone/relay card, see the 4007-9801 8-Point
Zone/Relay Card installation instructions (579-1103).
25V Regulator Module
The 25V Regulator Module (4007-9802) regulates the panel power supply output received from the NAC power supply (4007ES) or
the IDNAC power supply (4007ES hybrid) to a 25VDC level. The 25VDC regulated output is isolated from the panel and complies with
power-limited requirements. For more information about the 25V regulator module, see the 25 V Regulator Module installation instructions
(579-812).
IDNet+ Loop Expansion Card
The IDNet+ loop expansion card (4007-9803) mounts directly on the IDNAC/NAC power supply. Up to two cards can be added. Each card
adds a single Class A/Class B IDNet+ loop and increases the device capacity by 75 points. For more information about the IDNet+ loop
expansion card, see the 4007-9803 IDNet+ Loop Expansion Card installation instructions (579-1106).
LED module
The operator uses the LED module (4007-9805) to view the simultaneous signaling of alarm and trouble conditions on up to 24 zones. All
the LEDs have configurable colors, red or yellow, except the LEDs in the last column, which are configurable as red or green.
For more information about the LED module, see the 4007-9805 LED Module installation instructions (579-1105).
The SDACT card
The SDACT card (4007-9806) can be mounted in the 4007ES panel. It is used to notify a central station when an event occurs, to report
changes to a specific point, and to connect a transmitter to a central station. For more information, see the 4010 ES and 4007ES Serial
Digital Alarm Communications Transmitters installation instructions (579-954).
City Circuit
The city circuit card with disconnect switches 4007-8907, and without disconnect switches (4007-9808), are used to annunciate alarms
and other urgent indications to remote facilities. Each city circuit module has two configurable circuits (alarm, trouble, or supervisory
reporting) and supports Reverse Polarity and Local Energy Master Box Applications. Only one city card can be installed on a system. It is
not available when an alarm relay is used.
For more information about city circuits cards, see the City and Relay Cards installation instructions (579-955).
Alarm Relay Card
The Alarm relay card (4007-9809) is used to provide common unsupervised control functions or indications for devices. Each relay module
has three circuits (alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals). It is not available when a city circuit card is used. For more information about
alarm relay card, see the City and Relay Cards installation instructions (579-955).
IP Communicator Module
The 4007-9818 IP Communicator Module notifies central station when an event occurs, to report changes to a specific point, and to
connect a transmitter. It connects to central station through telephone lines, LAN Ethernet, or a cellular connection. For more information
about the IP Communicator Module, see IP Communicator Installation Instructions (579-1296).
IP Gateway GSM Cellular Module
The 4007-6401/4007-6403 IP Gateway GSM Cellular Module enables a cellular connection for the IP Gateway Module. For more
information see IP Gateway GSM Cellular Module Installation Guide 579-1248.
Simple Power over Ethernet Switch Module
The 4007-2501 Simple Power over Ethernet Switch Module (SPES) enables power and Ethernet connection for remote devices, such as
the IP Gateway Module. A SPES is required if a remote IP Gateway is connected to the FACP. For more information see Power over Ethernet
Switch Card Installation Guide 579-1250.
Dual Class A Isolator
The Dual Class A Isolator (DCAI) (4007-9804) card converts the Class B output of the IDNAC SLC into two isolated Class A outputs. For more
information about the DCAI, see the , 4007-9804 DCAI Cards installation instructions (579-1029).
4120 NIC
The panel connects to a 4120 network using a NIC slave card. This enables communication between each panel by fiber, modem, or
twisted shielded pair wire in a Style 4 or Style 7 wiring configuration.
Two types of cards can be used with the NIC:
• The Fiber-Optic Media card can be used for noisy electrical environments, or for connecting externally to other buildings.
• The Wired Media Card is used for all other applications.
The 4007ES NIC is part of the 4007-9810 kit which also includes the mounting bracket used to mount the card inside the 4007ES panel.
See the 4010ES and 4007ES Network Interface and Media Cards Installation Instructions (579-956 ) for more information about installing the
NIC.
page 39 579-1102 Rev N

ES Net NIC
The panel connects to an ES Net network using a flat type ES Net NIC card. This enables communication between each panel by Ethernet,
Fiber or DSL in a Class X (style-7) or Class B (style 4) wiring configuration.
In addition to the on-board Ethernet ports that can be used to connect the panel to an ES Net network, four types of ES Net media cards
can be used with the NIC:
• The Single-Mode and Multimode Fiber-Optic Media card
• The Ethernet media card for distances up to 100m (328ft)
• The DSL media card for retrofit installation where twisted-pair copper wire is used
The ES Net NIC is part of the 4007-9817 kit which also includes the mounting bracket used to mount the card inside the 4007ES panel. See
the Flat Type ES Net NIC Installation Instructions (579-1257) for more information about installing the ES Net NIC.
Dual RS-232 Module
The Dual RS-232 interface module provides a serial communication interface to an AC or DC printer, a PC Annunciator, or a third party
computer. Power to both ports can be either isolated or non-isolated. The isolated power is intended for AC printers or PC Annunciators.
Ground faults can result if isolated power is not used for AC devices and third party computers. DC printers use the non-isolated power.
The 4007-9812 Dual RS-232 Interface Module is pre-installed on a bracket and it must be mounted in the top left corner (Block E) of the
4007ES box. To complete the module installation, complete the following steps:
Note: The Dual RS-232 Interface Module cannot be installed if a module such as a 25 V Regulator, DCAI or a Zone Relay Card is already
mounted in Block E inside the panel.
1. Connect one end of the provided harness (734-308) to connector P7 on the back of the RS-232 card.
2. Use the provided hardware to secure the RS-232 bracket to the 4007ES box.
3. Connect the free end of harness 734-308 to connector J17 (Zone/Relay) on the IDNAC PSU.
See the Dual RS-232 Interface Module installation instructions (579-910) for more information about installing the module.
7.1 Example of combinations

Figure 32, Figure 33, and Figure 34 are examples of some of the combinations that can be made in a 4007ES using the available optional
cards and modules.
Figure 32: Example 1
page 40 579-1102 Rev N

page 41 579-1102 Rev N

page 42 579-1102 Rev N

8 Appendix A ULC programming requirements

Common earth fault ground and common trouble indicator
This application monitors a system pseudo that counts the number of ground faults or troubles that occur on the system. Each time this
counter increments, such as when a ground fault or trouble occurs, a yellow LED on the operator interface panel illuminates.
Step 1. Add a Custom Control equation to monitor all ground faults:
2. Add a new equation.
3. Paste the following equation:
[INPUTS]
STATUS ON
A112 | ANALOG | COUNTER | GROUND TROUBLE COUNTER
OR STATUS ON
[END INPUTS]
[OUTPUTS]
TRACK ON PRI=9,9
P535 | DIGITAL | UTILITY |
[END OUTPUTS]
Note: P535 is shown as an example; use any digital point.
Step 2. Open Color User Interface Card Properties Dialog

1. Click the Hardware tab and expand the Unit 0, Box 1, Bay 1 icons to display the Color User Interface Card. Click the + signs
to the left of the Unit 0, Box 1, and Bay 1 icons to expand them.
Figure 35: Selecting the Color User Interface Card
2. Right-click the Color User Interface card icon and select Properties.
3. Click the Point Editing tab, see Figure 36.
Figure 36: The Display tab:Display Checkboxes

Step 3. Program the LED
1. Select one of the multicolor LEDs (3-2-1, 3-2-2, or 3-2-3) to program.
2. Click the Point Type drop down list and select LEDYELLOW.
3. Click the Mode drop down list and select ON.
4. Enter P535, or your chosen digital point number from the equation, in the Reference Address field to program the LED for
ground faults.
OR
5. Enter A2 (no spaces) in the Reference Address field to program the LED to illuminate whenever a general system trouble is
present.
page 43 579-1102 Rev N

579-1102 Rev N
TrueAlarm Multi-Point Analog Sensing
UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; FM Approved; TrueAlarm Multi-Sensor Model 4098-9754
MEA (NYC) Acceptance* 13.6.2.1
13.6.2.2 ítem 24
11 Providing TrueSense Early Fire Detection
Features
TrueAlarm photoelectric smoke sensing and heat
sensing combined in one housing to provide:
 Smoke activity accurately monitored by TrueAlarm
photoelectric sensing technology
 Thermal activity accurately monitored by TrueAlarm
thermistor sensing technology 13.6.2.2
13.6.2.1ítem
ítem6 19
 And TrueSense detection, a correlation of smoke
activity and thermal activity providing intelligent fire
detection earlier than with either activity alone
For use with Simplex® 4007ES, 4010ES, 4100ES,
TrueAlarm Multi-Sensor 4098-9754
and 4100U fire alarm control panels:
Mounted in Standard Sensor Base
 TrueAlarm analog sensor information is digitally
communicated to the control panel via IDNet TrueAlarm Multi-Sensor Description
two-wire communications 13.6.2.2
13.6.2.1 ítem 821
 Special point types allow the 4098-9754 multi-sensor TrueAlarm multi-sensor model 4098-9754 combine the
to communicate smoke and heat analog sensing data established performances of a TrueAlarm photoelectric
using only one IDNet address smoke sensor with a fast-acting and accurate TrueAlarm
thermal sensor to provide both features in a single
 Individual sensor information is processed by the host
sensor/base assembly.
control panel to determine sensor status and to
determine whether conditions are normal, off-normal, Digital Communication of Analog Sensing.
or alarm 13.6.2.2
13.6.2.1ítem
ítem1225 Analog information from each sensor is digitally
 (4100U fire alarm control panels require software communicated to the control panel where it is analyzed.
revision 11 or higher with multi-point compatible IDNet Photoelectric sensor input is stored and tracked as an
transmission modules) average value with an alarm or abnormal condition being
determined by comparing the sensor’s present value
Alarms can be determined by either: against its average value. Thermal data is processed to
 Smoke detection with selectable sensitivity from look for absolute or rate-of-rise temperature as desired.
0.2 to 3.7 %/ft obscuration (refer to additional
information on page 2) Intelligent Data Evaluation. Monitoring each
photoelectric sensor’s average value provides a software
 Heat detection selectable as fixed temperature or fixed filtering process that compensates for environmental
with selectable rate-of-rise factors (dust, dirt, etc.) and component aging, providing
 TrueSense intelligent analysis of the combination of an accurate reference for evaluating new activity. The
smoke and heat activity result is a significant reduction in the probability of false
Additional design features: or nuisance alarms caused by shifts in sensitivity, either
up or down. Status indications of dirty and excessively
 Functional and architecturally styled enclosures for
dirty are automatically generated allowing maintenance to
ceiling or wall mounting
be performed per device. 13.6.2.2
13.6.2.1 ítem
ítem 316
 Smoke sensor louver design that directs air flow to
chamber enhancing smoke capture Control Panel Selection. Peak activity per sensor is
 Built-in magnetic test feature stored to assist in evaluating specific locations. The alarm
set point for each TrueAlarm sensor is determined at the
 Compatible with standard bases (including relay control panel, selectable as more or less sensitive as the
control), sounder bases, and isolator bases individual application requires.
 Designed for EMI compatibility
Multi-Point Reporting and CO Base Reference.
UL listed to Standard 268 Reporting 4098-9754 “sub-points” under its single
address varies with the base used. Muti-point details are
* This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to
Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listings
listed in data sheet S4090-0011.
7272-0026:218 and 7300-0026:217 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning
material presented in this document. Accepted for use – City of New York Department of Using the 4098-9754 with CO sensor bases is detailed in
Buildings – MEA35-93E. Refer to page 4 for ULC listing status. Additional listings may be data sheet S4098-0052.
applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and
approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection
Products.
S4098-0024-12 11/2016
Description (Continued) Heat Sensing Details
Timed/Multi-Stage Selection. Alarm set points can be TrueAlarm heat sensors monitor a fast reacting
programmed for timed automatic sensitivity selection thermistor providing operation that is self-restoring and
(such as more sensitive at night, less sensitive during rate compensated. Due to its small thermal mass, the
day). Control panel programming can also provide sensor accurately and quickly measures the local
multi-stage operation per sensor. For example, a 0.2% temperature for analysis at the fire alarm control panel.
level may cause a warning to prompt investigation while a The control panel allows alarm selection to be per sensor
2.5% level may initiate an alarm. as fixed temperature, or rate-of-rise temperature, or the
combination of both.
Sensor Alarm and Trouble LED Indication. Each
sensor base’s LED pulses to indicate communications Temperature Detection. Rate-of-rise temperature
with the panel. If the control panel determines that a detection is selectable at the control panel for either 15° F
sensor is in alarm, or that it is dirty or has some other type (8.3° C) or 20° F (11.1° C) per minute. Fixed temperature
of trouble, the details are annunciated at the control panel sensing is independent of rate-of-rise sensing and
and that sensor base’s LED will be turned on steadily. selectable to operate at 135° F (57.2° C) or 155° F
During a system alarm, the control panel will control the (68° C). In a slow developing fire, the temperature may
LEDs such that an LED indicating a trouble will return to not increase rapidly enough to operate the rate-of-rise
pulsing to help identify the alarmed sensors. feature. However, an alarm will be initiated when the
temperature reaches its selected fixed temperature setting.
TrueAlarm Analog Sensor Features
Utility Temperature Monitoring. TrueAlarm heat
General mechanical: sensors can be programmed as a utility device to monitor
 Housing is sealed against rear air flow entry for temperature extremes in the range from 32° F to
 Electronics are EMI/RFI shielded 122° F (0° C to 50° C). This feature can provide freeze
warnings or alert to HVAC system problems.
Smoke sensing:
 Photoelectric light scattering sensing technology TrueSense Detection Details
 360° smoke entry for optimum response Control Panel Sensor Analysis. Each multi-sensor’s
 Chamber screen provides protection from dirt, dust, and smoke and heat sensing element provides data for
insects evaluation at the fire alarm control panel where four
Heat sensing: independent detection modes are evaluated. They are:
 Fast response thermistor design  Fixed temperature heat detection
13.6.2.2 ítem
13.6.2.1 2 15
ítem
 Rate compensated, self-resetting operation  Rate-of-rise heat detection
 Control panel can select per sensor for fixed temperature  TrueAlarm photoelectric smoke detection
sensing, rate-of-rise temperature sensing, or the  And TrueSense correlation detection
combination of both Comparing Photoelectric Activity and Thermal
Photoelectric Sensing Details Activity. TrueSense analysis correlates both thermal
activity and smoke activity at a single multi-sensor
TrueAlarm photoelectric sensors use a stable, location using an extensively tested covariance
pulsed infrared LED light source and a silicon photodiode relationship. As a result, TrueSense detection improves
receiver to provide consistent and accurate low power response to conditions indicative of faster acting, hot
smoke sensing. Seven levels of sensitivity are available flaming fires when compared to the response of either
for each individual sensor, ranging from 0.2% to 3.7% per photoelectric smoke activity or thermal activity alone.
foot of smoke obscuration. Sensitivities of 0.2%, 0.5%,
and 1% are for special applications in clean areas. High Integrity Detection. TrueSense operation
Standard sensitivities are 1.5%, 2.0%, 2.5%, 3.0%, and provides early fire detection and maintains the established
3.7%. Application type and sensitivity are selected and high level of immunity to false alarms and nuisance
then monitored at the fire alarm control panel.* alarms that is inherent with TrueAlarm sensor operation.
Sensor head design provides 360° smoke entry for Application Reference
optimum smoke response. Because of the photoelectric Sensor locations should be determined after careful
sensing technology, the 4098-9754 sensor is UL listed for consideration of the physical layout and contents of the
air velocity of up to 4000 ft/min. However, care must be area to be protected. Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire
taken in determining sensor locations to avoid areas Alarm and Signaling Code. On smooth ceilings, smoke
where local airflow may also impact any smoke flow. sensor spacing of 30 ft (9.1 m) may be used as a guide.*
(Refer to the application reference section on this page.)
* For detailed application information, refer to 4098
Detectors, Sensors, and Bases Application Manual,
document number 574-709.
2 S4098-0024-12 11/2016
13.6.2.2 ítem
13.6.2.1 ítem 14
1
Multi-Sensor Base Features Fire Alarm Control Panel Features (Cont’d)
Base mounted address selection allows the address  Peak value logging allows accurate analysis for
of the multi-sensor base to remain with its programmed sensitivity selection
location when the sensor is removed for service.  Automatic, once per minute individual sensor calibration
Integral red LED indicates power-on by pulsing, or check verifies sensor integrity
alarm or trouble when steady on, reflecting status of either  Multi-stage alarm operation
sensor. The exact status of the specific sensing element is  Selectable alarm verification 13.6.2.1 ítem 22
annunciated at the fire alarm control panel.
 Automatic environmental compensation and
13.6.2.2 ítem 9
Fire Alarm Control Panel Features determination of dirty and excessively dirty
 TrueSense analysis of smoke and heat activity
 Individual smoke sensitivity and temperature operation
is selectable for each sensor 13.6.6.2
13.6.2.1 ítem
ítem 417  Ability to display and print detailed sensor information
in plain English language
 Sensitivity monitoring that satisfies NFPA 72 sensitivity
testing requirements 13.6.2.1
13.6.6.2 ítem
ítem 185  Smoke sensitivity displayed in percent per foot and
temperature readings selectable as Fahrenheit or Celsius
Mounting Reference
Electrical boxes are supplied by others, refer to notes below for additional information
Surface mount reference
4" (102 mm) 4" (102 mm)

square box octagonal box
1-1/2" (38 mm) Flush mount reference, mount even with final
minimum box depth surface, or with up to 1/4" (6.4 mm) maximum recess
2098-9737 Relay (mounts 4098-9822 Relay 4098-9860 Supervised Standard Size Base Mounting
in base electrical box or (mounts in base Relay (mounts in base
remotely) electrical box) electrical box or remotely; 4098-9832 Adapter Plate, required for mounting
2-3/8" X 1-1/4" X 11/32" to surface mounted boxes and 4" square flush box
(1 in3 ) (60.4 mm X
31.8 mm X 8.6 mm)
4098 Series Base
Relay Size: 2-1/2" X 1-1/2" X 1" (3.75 cubic

inches) (64 mm X 38 mm X 25.4 mm)
4098-9794 Sounder Base Mounting
For 4098-9794 only, when using 4" square box flush mount, a single
gang adapter plate (RACO No. 787 or equal, by others) is required
4098-9832 Adapter Plate, required for mounting
to surface mounted boxes (mounts inverted)
4098-9794
Sounder Base
4098-9754 Multi-Sensor
NOTES:
1. Review wire size, wire count, box type, and whether a locally mounted relay is used before determining box size.
2. When a locally mounted relay is used, mount relay in electrical box and use 1-1/2" extension ring (by others) on
4" square or octagonal box of 1-1/2" or 2-1/8" depth as required.
3. Flush mounting also fits a single gang box, 2-1/8" (51 mm) deep if compatible with wiring requirements. (Not
applicable if a locally mounted relay is used.)
4. Refer to Systems Manual 574-709 for additional information.
3 S4098-0024-12 11/2016
Product Selection
TrueAlarm Multi-Sensor (ordered separately, refer to page 3 for mounting requirements)
Model* Color Description
4098-9754
White
4098-9754 IND Multi-sensor, photoelectric sensor with integral thermal sensor; select base from list below
4098-9779 Black
TrueAlarm Multi-Sensor Bases (ordered separately, refer to page 3 for mounting requirements)
For More
Model* Color Description Detail See
Data Sheet
4098-9792 White
4098-9776 Black
Standard Sensor Base, no options 13.6.2.2
13.6.2.1 ítem
ítem 114
4098-9789
White
4098-9789 IND Sensor Base with connections for remote LED alarm indicator or unsupervised relay.
4098-9775 Black S4098-0019
4-Wire Sensor Relay
4098-9791 White
Base Includes connections for Supervised Remote Relay and for remote LED alarm
2-Wire Sensor Relay indicator or unsupervised relay; see below for details
4098-9780 White
Base
4098-9793 White Isolator Base with built-in IDNet communications isolator, no options 13.6.2.2 ítem 10 S4098-0025
4098-9794 White Sounder Base with connections for remote LED alarm indicator or unsupervised relay S4098-0028
Accessories Reference (ordered separately as required, refer to page 3 for additional mounting requirements)
Model Description
4098-9832 Adapter Plate, 6-3/8” (162 mm) diameter, 1/4” (6.4 mm) deep, matches bases, see page 3 for required applications
Red LED Alarm Indicator on single gang stainless steel plate, mounts on single gang box, 1-1/2” (38 mm) minimum
2098-9808
depth
Choose one Relay with operation that tracks base led status, mounts in base electrical box, 4” square or octagonal box with 1-1/2”
if applicable (38 mm) extension ring, select box depth per actual wiring requirements; DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed loads,
4098-9822
power limited rating of 2 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited rating of 1/2 A @ 120 VAC, (requires external 24 VDC coil
power)
Supervised Relay for use with 4098-9791 only; DPDT contacts for resistive/suppressed Mount remotely or in base electrical box;
2098-9737 loads, power limited rating of 3 A @ 28 VDC; non-power limited rating of 3 A @ 120 VAC remote mounting requires 4” octagonal or
(requires external 24 VDC coil power) 4” square box, 1-1/2” minimum depth; base
mounting requires 4” octagonal box, 2-1/8”
Supervised Relay for use with 4098-9780 only; SPDT dry contacts, power limited rating
4098-9860 deep with 1-1/2” extension ring; see page 3 for
of 2 A @ 30 VDC, resistive; non-power limited rating of 0.5 A @ 125 VAC, resistive
dimension reference
* Note: Model numbers ending in IND are assembled in India.
Specifications
General Operating Specifications (refer to data sheet list for additional detail)
Communications and Sensor Supervisory Power IDNet communications, 1 address per base
UL Listed Operating Temperature Range 32° F to 100° F (0° C to 38° C)
Operating Temperature Range 15° F to 122° F (-9° C to 50° C)
Storage Temperature Range 0° F to 140° F (-18° C to 60° C)
Humidity Range 10 to 95% RH
0.2 % to 3.7% per foot of smoke obscuration, selected at control panel (refer to additional
Smoke Sensor Sensitivity Range 13.6.2.2 ítem 4 information on page 2)
Smoke Sensor Air Velocity Range 0-4000 ft/min (0-1220 m/min)
Fixed alarm temperature setting of 135° F (57.2° C), and/or rate-of-rise temperature alarm at 15°
Thermal Sensor Operation
F (8.3° C) or 20° F (11.1° C), also selectable as utility monitoring operation from 32° F to 122° F
(selected at control panel)
(0° C to 50° C)
Housing Color Frost White or Black
4098-9754 Sensor and Base Dimensions
4-7/8" (124 mm) 6-7/16" (164 mm)
2-1/4"
(57 mm) 2-7/16"
(62 mm)
LED status LED status
indicator indicator
Sound output
louvers extend
Thermistor guard Thermistor guard from front and side
Standard Size Base Mounting Sounder Base Mounting

TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm
and Signaling Code are trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
Tyco Fire Protection Products • Westminster, MA • 01441-0001 • USA S4098-0024-12 11/2016

www.simplex-fire.com
© 2016 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. All specifications and other information shown were current as of document revision date and are subject to change without notice.
4098 Detectors, Sensors, and Bases
Application Manual
574-709 Rev. AK
*0574709AK*
1 Cautions, warnings, and regulatory information..............................................................................................3
Contents
2 Overview................................................................................................................................................................ 4
2.1 Special considerations....................................................................................................................................................................................4
2.1.1 Special considerations for smoke detectors and sensors...................................................................................................................................4
2.1.2 Smoke detector and sensor applications................................................................................................................................................................ 4
2.2 Where to place detectors and sensors.........................................................................................................................................................4
2.2.1 Correct locations for detectors and sensors.......................................................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 Where not to place detectors and sensors..................................................................................................................................................6
2.3.1 Incorrect locations for detectors and sensors....................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.4 Principles of operation................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.4.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.4.2 Heat detector operation...............................................................................................................................................................................................7
2.4.3 Photoelectric smoke detectors or sensors..............................................................................................................................................................8
2.4.4 Ionization smoke detectors or sensors.................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.5 Carbon monoxide gas detectors or sensors.......................................................................................................................................................... 8
3 4098 Smoke Detectors, Heat Detectors and Bases..........................................................................................9
3.1 4098 Smoke Detectors................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1.1 Smoke detector limitations..........................................................................................................................................................................................9
3.1.2 Specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................................................9
3.1.3 Mounting requirements................................................................................................................................................................................................9
3.2 4098 Heat Detectors.....................................................................................................................................................................................10
3.2.1 Heat detector types.....................................................................................................................................................................................................10
3.2.2 Specifications................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10
3.3 4098 Bases.....................................................................................................................................................................................................11
3.3.1 Mounting........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 11
3.3.2 Wiring.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 13
4 TrueAlarm Sensors, Sensor Bases, and QuickConnect Smoke Sensors...................................................... 18
4.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................................................................... 18
4.2 4098-9733, 4098-9734, and 4098-9778 spacing........................................................................................................................................18
4.3 4098 TrueAlarm Sensors.............................................................................................................................................................................. 19
4.3.1 Special applications..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
4.3.2 Mounting........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 19
4.4 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases.................................................................................................................................................................... 19
4.4.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 20
4.4.2 Setting the address of the base...............................................................................................................................................................................21
4.4.3 Address setting for the 2120 CDT System............................................................................................................................................................ 22
4.4.4 Address Setting for the 4010, 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4010ES, 4007ES, 4008, or 4120 System................................................22
4.4.5 Address setting for sounder bases and Multi-Sensor Bases 4098-9795 and 4098-9796........................................................................23
4.4.6 Wiring.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 24
4.4.7 CORC Replacement Instructions..............................................................................................................................................................................26
4.5 4098 TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors........................................................................................................................................27
4.5.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 27
4.5.2 Setting the address of the sensor........................................................................................................................................................................... 28
4.5.3 Wiring.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 28
4.6 Setting the Tone for the 4098-9773 CO Sounder Base and the 4098-9772 Sounder Base................................................................. 29
5 Accessories.......................................................................................................................................................... 30
5.1 2098-9737 Relay Module wiring..................................................................................................................................................................30
5.4 Relay Module installation.............................................................................................................................................................................31
5.5 Remote LED Module.....................................................................................................................................................................................32
6 Compatibility and testing...................................................................................................................................33
6.1 Compatibility for 4098 Detectors and Detector Bases.............................................................................................................................33
6.2 Compatibility for 4098 Sensors and Sensor Bases...................................................................................................................................33
6.3 Maintenance and testing............................................................................................................................................................................. 34
6.3.1 Maintenance..................................................................................................................................................................................................................34
6.3.2 Testing.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................34
6.3.3 Preferred method of testing smoke detectors or sensors............................................................................................................................... 35
6.3.4 Test Equipment Available...........................................................................................................................................................................................35
6.3.5 Alternate method for testing sensors.................................................................................................................................................................... 36
4098 Detectors, Sensors, and Bases Application Manual
6.3.6 Magnetic Test for photoelectric detectors............................................................................................................................................................ 37

6.3.7 Magnetic Test for ionization detectors...................................................................................................................................................................38
6.3.8 Ion detector sensitivity test....................................................................................................................................................................................... 38
6.3.9 Maintenance of the CO Sensor................................................................................................................................................................................ 38
6.3.10 End of life service...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 38
6.3.11 Standard maintenance.............................................................................................................................................................................................38
6.3.12 CO sensor testing flowcharts................................................................................................................................................................................. 39
6.3.13 Cleaning....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
6.3.13.1 Photoelectric smoke detector or sensor cleaning......................................................................................................................................40
6.3.13.2 Special considerations for ion detectors and sensors.............................................................................................................................. 40
6.3.14 Trouble indications....................................................................................................................................................................................................40
6.3.14.1 Trouble indications for TrueAlarm sensors.................................................................................................................................................. 40
6.3.15 Fire Alarm trouble and maintenance log.............................................................................................................................................................41
page ii 574-709 Rev. AK

1 Cautions, warnings, and regulatory information


EYE SAFETY HAZARD Under certain fiber optic application conditions, the optical output of this device may exceed eye safety
limits. Do not use magnification (such as a microscope or other focusing equipment) when viewing the output of this device.
SULFURIC ACID WARNING Battery contains sulfuric acid, which can cause severe burns to the skin and eyes and can
destroy fabric. Replace any leaking or damaged battery while wearing appropriate protective gear. If you come in contact with
sulfuric acid, immediately flush skin or eyes with water for 15 minutes and seek immediate medical attention.
FCC RULES AND REGULATIONS – PART 15 This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
SYSTEM REACCPTANCE TEST AFTER SOFTWARE CHANGES To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in
accordance with NFPA-72, after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is required after
any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware or wiring. All
components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition, to
NFPA 72® is a registered trademark of the National Fire Protection Association.
page 3 574-709 Rev. AK

2 Overview
This document provides information about the correct application of both heat and smoke detectors/sensors in conjunction with fire
alarm systems.
The information in this publication is intended to be used as a technical guide only. Ensure that the requirements of applicable codes and
standards, as well as the directives of Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJs) are followed.
2.1 Special considerations

Before installing detectors or sensors, make a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with the information provided in NFPA 72, an
excerpt of this is provided in Smoke detector and sensor applications. For additional information, refer to NFPA 72 and the NEMA Guide
for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors.
2.1.1 Special considerations for smoke detectors and sensors

Consider the following before installing detectors or sensors:
• Is there human occupancy?
• The contents to be protected.
• The type of construction and use.
• The burning characteristics of contents.
• The air movement - stratification.
• The deflections and obstructions.
• The height of ceilings.
• The surface conditions of ceilings.
• The type of ceiling construction.
• The total area.
• The vent locations: velocities and dilution.
2.1.2 Smoke detector and sensor applications

Each detector/sensor can provide up to 900 square feet, or 84 square meters of coverage, depending on the following:
• The requirements of local codes.
• The results of engineering evaluation.
2.2 Where to place detectors and sensors
2.2.1 Correct locations for detectors and sensors

Important: The guidelines in this section are adapted from standards published by the National Fire Protection Association, Quincy, Mass-
achusetts, U.S.A. These standards include NFPA 72, “National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code”; NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code”, Article 760;
and NFPA 90A, “Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.”
To provide effective early warning of a developing fire situation, install smoke detectors or sensors in all areas of the protected premises.
Total coverage as defined by NFPA 72 includes all rooms, halls, storage areas, basements, attics, lofts, and spaces above suspended
ceilings including plenum areas utilized as part of the HVAC system. In addition, this includes all closets, elevator shafts, enclosed stairways,
dumbwaiter shafts, chutes, and other subdivisions and accessible spaces.
Fire detection systems installed to meet local codes or ordinances may not be adequate for early warning of the fire. Some codes or
ordinances have minimum objectives, such as capturing elevators, or preventing circulation of smoke through HVAC systems instead of
early detection of fire.
Weigh the costs against the benefits of installing a complete fire detection system when any detection system is being installed. The
location, quantity, and zoning of detectors or sensors is determined by the objectives of the installation, rather than the minimum
requirements of any local codes or ordinances.
Detectors or sensors can be omitted from combustible blind spaces when any of the following conditions prevail:
• Where the ceiling is attached directly to the underside of the supporting beams of a combustible roof or floor deck.
• Where the concealed space is entirely filled with noncombustible insulation. In solid joist construction, the insulation need only fill the
space from the ceiling to the bottom edge of the joist of the roof or floor deck.
• Where there are small concealed spaces over rooms, provided the space does not exceed 50 square feet, or 4.6 square meters.
• In spaces formed by sets of facing studs or solid joists in walls, floors, or ceilings where the distance between the facing studs or solid
joists does not exceed 6 inches, or 15 centimeters.

Detectors or sensors can also be omitted from below open grid ceilings where all of the following conditions are met:
• The openings of the grid are at least 1/4 inch, or 6 millimeters in the smallest dimension.
• The thickness of the material does not exceed the smallest of the grid openings.
• The openings constitute at least 70% of the area of the ceiling material.
Detectors or sensors are usually required or recommended underneath open loading docks or platforms and their covers, and in
accessible under-floor areas in buildings without basements. Detectors or sensors may be omitted from combustible blind spaces when all
of the following conditions prevail:
1. The space is not accessible for storage purposes, it is protected against the entrance of unauthorized persons, and it is protected
against the accumulation of windblown debris.
2. The space contains no equipment or structures, such as steam pipes, electrical wiring, ducts, shafts, or conveyors that could
potentially ignite or conduct the spread of fire.
3. The floor over the space is tight.
4. Non flammable liquids are processed, handled, or stored on the floor above the space.
“Total coverage” as described in NFPA 72, is the definition of a complete fire detection system. In some of the specified areas of coverage,
such as attics, closets, under open loading docks or platforms, a heat detector may be more appropriate than a smoke detector. Give
careful consideration to the detector manufacturer’s instructions and the following recommendations in this guide.
When only one detector/sensor is required in a room or space, install the detector or sensor as close to the center of the ceiling as
possible. Central location of the detector or sensor is best for sensing smoke or fire in any part of the room. If a center location is not
possible, place it no closer than 4 inches, or 10 centimeters from the wall, or if it is listed for wall mounting, it can be mounted on the wall.
Wall mounted detectors or sensor should be located approximately 4 to 12 inches, or 10 to 30 centimeters from the ceiling to the top of
the detector, and at least 4 inches, or 10 centimeters from any corner wall junction, see Figure 1.
Figure 1: Wall and ceiling mounted detector or sensor

When an air supply or an air return duct opening is present in a room or space, install the detectors or sensors in the path of the air flow
toward the return air duct opening, see Figure 2.

Figure 2: Detector placement - air supply or return ducts

Smoke tests help determine the correct placement of detectors and sensors. Observe the smoke travel directions and velocity, as these
factors can affect detector and sensor performance.
Placement of a detector or sensor near air conditioning or incoming air vents can cause excessive accumulations of dust and dirt on
the detector or sensor. This dirt can cause the detector or sensor to malfunction and cause nuisance alarms. Do not locate detectors or
sensors closer than 3 feet, or 0.9 meters from an air supply diffuser.
Spot type detectors or sensors in correctly engineered systems, can also be installed in return air ducts, or in approved duct detector
housings designed for this application. Although duct detectors are not a substitute for open area detectors, they can provide an effective
method of initiating building control functions to prevent smoke being transported from the fire area to other parts of a building.
2.3 Where not to place detectors and sensors
2.3.1 Incorrect locations for detectors and sensors

Installing detectors or sensors in an incorrect location is a major cause of nuisance alarms. To avoid nuisance alarms do not install
detectors or sensors in environments that can cause them to malfunction. See the following table and examples:
Table 1: Environmental conditions that influence detector response*
Atm. pressure
Detection Air velocity >300 ft. Humidity Temp. <32°F (0°C)
3000 ft. (914 m) Color of smoke
protection (91.4 m) / min. >93% RH >100°F (38°C)
above sea level
Ion X X X X O
Photo O O X X X
Beam O O X X O
Air Sampling O O X X O
*See Table A-5-3.6.1.1 in NFPA 72
X = May affect detector or sensor responses
O = Generally does not affect detector or sensor responses
Do not install detectors or sensors in the following areas:
• In excessively dusty or dirty areas, such as feed rooms, steel mills, etc. Dust and dirt can accumulate on the detector or sensor’s
sensing chamber and make it overly sensitive, or block the air entrances to the sensing chamber and make the detector or sensor less
sensitive to smoke. Be especially careful to avoid areas where fumigants, fog or mist-producing materials, or sweeping and cleaning
compounds are used. These substances can cause nuisance alarms.
• Outdoors, in stables, open storage sheds, or other open structures affected by dust, air currents, or excessive humidity and
temperature.
• In damp or excessively humid areas, or next to bathrooms with showers. Water droplets can accumulate inside the sensing chamber
and make the detector or sensor overly sensitive. A large amount of humid air is produced during a hot shower. The moisture in this
humid air can enter the sensing chamber as water vapor, then cool and condense into droplets causing a nuisance alarm.
• In elevator lobbies over ashtrays or where people smoke while waiting for the elevator.
• In very cold or very hot environments, or in unheated buildings or rooms where the temperature can fall below or exceed the
operating temperature range of the detector or sensor. At temperatures below 32°F, or 0°C, ice crystals or condensation can appear
inside the sensing chamber and make it overly sensitive or cause a nuisance alarm. At temperatures above the operating range of the
detector or sensor greater than 120°F, or 49°C, its internal components may not function correctly.
• In or near areas where combustion particles are normally present, such as in kitchens or other areas with ovens and burners; in
garages, where particles of combustion are present in vehicle exhausts; within 15 feet, or 4.5 meters of any type of furnace, hot water
heater, or gas space heater; or in welding shops or other types of work areas where some form of combustion is used in the activity

normally conducted in that area. When a detector must be located in, or adjacent to such an area, a fixed temperature heat detector
can be appropriate.
• In air streams passing by or through kitchens. Air often enters a residence or a residential unit of an apartment building through
cracks around the front or back doors. If the air return is in the bedroom hallway or in the bathroom, and if air from the kitchen easily
enters the air stream going from the door to the air return, combustion particles from cooking can cause nuisance alarms. Install
detectors or sensors so that they protect the bedrooms but are out of the air stream.
• In or near manufacturing areas, battery rooms, or other areas where substantial quantities of vapors, gases or fumes may be present.
Strong vapors, like excessive humidity, can make detectors or sensors overly sensitive or less sensitive than normal. In very large
concentrations, gases heavier than air, such as carbon dioxide, may make detectors or sensors more sensitive, while gases lighter
than air, such as helium, may make them less sensitive. Aerosol particles may collect on detector or sensor chamber surfaces and
cause nuisance alarms.
• In insect-infested areas. If insects enter a detector or sensor’s sensing chamber, they can cause a nuisance alarm. Perform insect
eradication procedures before installing detectors or sensors in these locations. If spraying is part of this process, do not allow insect
spray to enter the detectors or sensors.
• Near fluorescent light fixtures. Electrical noise generated by fluorescent light fixtures may cause nuisance alarms. Install detectors or
sensors at least 1 foot, or 0.3 meters away from these light fixtures.
• When using the CO Base for CO fire detection, do not install in locations that can have potentially high non-fire levels of CO.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) has three standards for smoke detectors:
• One for duct detectors or sensors, UL 268A.
• One for single and multiple station detectors/sensors, UL 217.
• One for system type detectors or sensors, UL 268.
Only use detectors or sensors in the applications for which they are specifically listed.
The NFPA 101 Life Safety Code states that single station smoke detectors shall sound an alarm only within an individual living unit or similar
area and shall not actuate the building fire alarm system. It also states, “All systems and components shall be approved for the purpose for
which they are installed.”
In addition to possible code noncompliance, the following deficiencies exist in a series of residential smoke detectors connected in a fire
alarm system mode:
• Because the fire alarm system is not supervised, vandals or others can disconnect a detector or the entire system, leaving a building
without protection. In this situation the residents are unaware of the serious life threatening condition.
• Residential detectors do not latch in alarm, the detector self-resets. One detector in alarm sounds all the detectors that are
connected together. In this situation, after the alarm condition is cleared, it is difficult to identify or locate a specific detector that
initially put the system into alarm,.
System detectors or sensors latch in alarm. They do not reset until the power is momentarily disconnected. This makes it easier to identify
the location of the detector or sensor that caused the control panel to alarm. In addition, system detectors are specifically designed to
connect to a supervised control panel. Two-wire detectors require a UL compatibility review to verify that the detector and panel operate
correctly together.
A typical life safety fire alarm system for an apartment complex uses system detectors or sensors and manual fire alarm stations in the
hallways and common areas of the complex, and residential single station type detectors and heat detectors in the individual apartments.
The system detectors or sensors, manual stations and heat detectors are connected to a supervised control panel, sound a general
alarm, and automatically notify the proper authorities that a fire condition exists. The residential detectors located in the apartments are
interconnected only within the individual living quarters of each apartment. These residential units sound an alarm only in the apartment
unit.
2.4 Principles of operation
2.4.1 Introduction
This section describes how the different types of detectors and sensors work. For additional information about TrueAlarm sensor
operation, refer to the TrueAlarm Concepts publication (PER-91-024).
2.4.2 Heat detector operation

The heat detector senses the heat or the Rate-of-Rise (ROR) in the air temperature of the environment in which it is located. The heat
detector is comprised of electronic circuitry and a mechanical package that is designed to sense the ROR of the air temperature in an
expedient and reliable fashion. Upon detection of an abnormal increase in air temperature, or ROR in air temperature, the electronics
indicate an alarm by increasing the amount of current draw from the monitor zone it is connected to. The monitor zone is a supervised
detection circuit that is connected to a main control panel that takes appropriate action to indicate an alarm has been reported, if the zone
current is substantially increased.

Heat detectors are an electronic design, the temperature of the air is sensed using two negative temperature coefficient thermistors. The
resistance of the thermistors goes down with an increase in temperature. One thermistor is placed in a position that senses the open
air temperature very rapidly (RT1). The second thermistor is positioned in a small cavity that protrudes out from the main body of the
detector (RT2). The location of RT2 detects a quick change in the air temperature, but for a slow or medium rate of temperature change,
the detector does not signal an alarm due to the ROR feature. For a slower change in temperature, the detector signals an alarm due to a
set fixed temperature that is sensed by RT1. For a fast temperature rise, when a difference in temperature is sensed by RT1 and RT2 has
reached a predetermined amount, the detector signals an alarm.
2.4.3 Photoelectric smoke detectors or sensors

These devices operate on a light scattering principle. The smoke sensing chamber contains an infrared LED source with a peak spectral
emission of 880 nanometers. This source is placed at an angle from a spectrally matched photo-diode receiver. During a NO SMOKE
condition, only light reflected from the chamber walls enters the receiver and shows up as a small photo-current. As smoke particles enter
the sensing chamber and cross the light beam of the LED, more light reaches the receiver due to scattering. The receiver circuitry converts
this photo-current into a signal voltage. In a detector, when this voltage reaches a preset level, an alarm is signaled. In a sensor, this signal
voltage goes into an 8-bit, analog to digital (A to D) converter. A digital representation of this signal voltage is then transmitted to the fire
alarm panel for further processing.
2.4.4 Ionization smoke detectors or sensors

These devices use a small radiation source, Americium-241, which emits alpha particles that ionize air molecules between two electrically
charged electrodes. With the application of a DC voltage to these electrodes, a small ionization current flows within the chamber. As smoke
enters the chamber, a decrease in ionization current results. This current is converted into a signal voltage by a transimpedance circuit. In
a detector, when this signal voltage drops below a preset level, an alarm is produced. In a sensor, this signal voltage goes into an 8-bit A to
D converter. A digital representation of this signal voltage is then transmitted to the fire alarm panel for further processing.
2.4.5 Carbon monoxide gas detectors or sensors

The CO Sensor and Sounder Bases with a CO Replacement Cartridge (CORC) modules work in conjunction with existing detector heads.
The CO Sensor Base enhances fire detection and combines fire and toxic gas leakage detection in a single device. The CO sensor measures
the concentration of carbon monoxide gas in the air in part per million (PPM). When toxic gas operation is selected, the FACP panel can
generate either a supervisory, utility, or priority 2 alarm. The alarm level is calculated within the panel based on the time integrated CO
levels that are measured at the detector.

3 4098 Smoke Detectors, Heat Detectors and Bases

This chapter contains specification and mounting information for 4098 Smoke Detectors, 4098 Heat Detectors, and 4098 Bases.
3.1 4098 Smoke Detectors

CAUTION: Install the detectors described in this publication in accordance with applicable NFPA standards, local codes, and the Author-
ities Having Jurisdiction (AHJs). Failure to follow these instructions may result in failure of the detector to initiate an alarm condition. The
manufacturer is not responsible for detectors that have been improperly installed, tested, or maintained.
3.1.1 Smoke detector limitations

The smoke detectors used with these bases are designed to activate and initiate emergency action, but do so only when used in
conjunction with other equipment. They are designed for installation in accordance with NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code.
• Smoke detectors do not work without power. AC or DC powered smoke detectors do not work if the power supply is cut off for any
reason.
• Smoke detectors do not sense fires when smoke does not reach the detectors. Smoke from fires in chimneys, in walls, on roofs or on
the other side of closed doors may not reach the smoke detector and alarm it.
• A detector may not detect a fire developing on another level of a building. For this reason, locate detectors on every level of a building.
• Smoke detectors have sensing limitations. Ionization detectors are better at detecting fast, flaming fires than slow, smoldering fires.
Photoelectric detectors sense smoldering fires better than flaming fires. Because fires develop in different ways, and are often
unpredictable in their growth, neither type of detector is always best, and a given detector may not always provide warning of a fire.
In general, detectors do not provide warning for fires resulting from inadequate fire protection practices, violent explosions, escaping
gases, incorrect storage of flammable liquids such as cleaning solvents, other safety hazards, or arson.
• Smoke detectors do not last forever. Smoke detectors contain electronic parts. Even though detectors are made to last for many
years, any of these parts can fail at any time. Therefore, test smoke detector systems according to NFPA 72 at least annually. Clean
and maintain smoke detectors regularly. See the Compatibility and testing section of this publication for the cleaning instructions.
3.1.2 Specifications
Table 2: Smoke Detector Specifications
Specifications Smoke Detector Data
Detector PID (4098) 4098-9601, 4098-9605 4098-9602 4908-9603
Type of detector Photoelectric Photoelectric with Heat Ionization
Working voltage (2-wire) 8.5 – 33 VDC 8.5 – 33 VDC 8.5 – 33 VDC
Rated voltage (4-wire) 15 – 32 VDC 15 – 32 VDC 15 – 32 VDC
Input ripple voltage 25% Max. 25% Max. 25% Max.
Max. alarm current 86 mA 86 mA 86 mA
Surge current <200 µA <200 µA <200 µA
Standby current <100 µA <100 µA <100 µA
Heat element rating N/A 135ºF N/A
Humidity range (non-condensing) 10-95% RH 10-95% RH 10-95% RH
Air velocity range 0-2000 FPM 0-2000 FPM 0-200 FPM
3.1.3 Mounting requirements

All smoke detectors identified in Table 2 mount to a detector base, refer to 4098 Bases for more information. Use the following
considerations when mounting smoke detectors.
Important: Smoke must enter the chamber of the detector. Air flow, air stratification, air velocity, air stagnation, and air migration affects
detector efficiency.
Note: Where the possibility of positive airflow from the electrical conduit or junction box exists, use 3M Weatherban number 606, or an
equivalent, non-flammable sealing compound to seal the conduit openings.
• Do not install detectors in areas where temperatures are likely to exceed 100°F or 38°C or fall below 32°F, or 0°C.
• Because the 4098-9602 detector combines heat sensing, DO NOT install this detector in locations where the ambient temperatures
exceed 100°F, or 38°C or where temperature fluctuations above 6°F per minute occur.
• Do not install detectors on a ceiling within 4 inches, or 10 centimeters of a wall.
• Do not install detectors where forced air ventilation can dilute the smoke before it reaches the detector.
• Do not install detectors in areas where smoke is normally present, such as kitchens, furnace rooms, laundry rooms, loading docks,
rooms with fireplaces, rooms with candles, soldering rooms, and so on.

• Do not install detectors in areas where there is likely to be steam, such as in hospital patient rooms with vaporizers, near shower
rooms, above large sinks, and so on.
• Do not install detectors above ashtrays in elevator lobbies.
• Wall-mounted detectors should be located 4 to 12 inches, or 10 to 30.5 centimeters from the ceiling to the detector head.
• Protect all detector heads during construction to avoid infiltration of construction debris. Remove any protective covers before
activating the system.
• If using an adapter plate, tighten the mounting screws without warping the adapter plate.
3.2 4098 Heat Detectors

This section contains general notes, specifications, and mounting information about the heat detectors in Specifications.
Warning: Heat detectors are NOT life-safety devices: USE HEAT DETECTORS FOR PROPERTY PROTECTION ONLY! For life-safety require-
ments, use smoke detectors.
Note:
• For all heat detectors, provide electronic supervision with a battery back-up at the fire alarm control panel.
• Where the possibility of positive airflow from the electrical conduit or junction box exists, use 3M Weatherban number 606, or an
equivalent, non-flammable sealing compound to seal the conduit openings.
• Refer to NFPA 72 for application, test and maintenance requirements.
3.2.1 Heat detector types

Fixed temperature heat detectors
Electronic fixed temperature heat detectors use a fast response, thermistor based design that senses temperatures quickly and accurately,
and consistently identifies when fixed temperatures are exceeded. For this reason, the fixed temperature detectors are recommended for
most applications. With a UL spacing distance of 60 X 60 foot, the fixed temperature electronic heat detectors replace both the mechanical
fixed and the mechanical ROR heat detectors.
ROR temperature heat detectors
Electronic ROR heat detectors detect fixed temperature alarm thresholds in the same way as the fixed temperature heat detectors, and
also detect a ROR alarm with a patented ROR detection design that quickly responds to sudden temperature variations. Due to the nature
of the fast response to temperature changes, the correct installation of ROR heat detectors is important. Install ROR heat detectors in sta-
ble environmentally controlled areas. Do not install these detectors where hot or cold air can be blown on them, such as near ductwork,
industrial equipment, air vents, and so on. Do not install ROR detectors where more than 6ºF per minute temperature changes can nor-
mally occur.
Features
• Rate-of-Rise and Fixed Temperature, see Table 3.
• Alarm LED.
• Compatible with 2-Wire Initiating Device Circuits (IDCs).
• Current-Limited Alarm State.
Electrical Specifications
• Typical standby current - 80 mA.
• Typical alarm current - 40 mA.
• Maximum current - 80 mA while in an alarm state.
• Operating range - 15-32 VDC.
• Maximum ripple voltage permitted - 30%.
Table 3: Heat detector models and features
Detector Model Rating or Class* Area / Language Color Code
4098-9612 (UL) 135°F (57°C) FT English —
4098-9613 (UL) 135°F (57°C) FT and RR English —
4098-9614 (UL) 200°F (93°C) FT English White
4098-9615 (UL) 200°F (93°C) FT and RR English White
4098-9616E A1 European Green
4098-9617E C European Red
4098-9618E A Australian White
page 10 574-709 Rev. AK

Table 3: Heat detector models and features

Detector Model Rating or Class* Area / Language Color Code
4098-9619E B Australian Blue
4098-9621E D Australian Red
4098-9622E I Chinese Green
4098-9624E 134°F (56.7°C) FT Korean —
4098-9625E 134°F (56.7°C) FT and RR Korean —
4098-9626E 134°F (56.7°C) FT Taiwanese —
4098-9627E 134°F (56.7°C) FT and RR Taiwanese —
4098-9628E 190°F (87.8°C) FT Korean —
4098-9629E 190°F (87.8°C) FT and RR Korean —
4098-9630E 190°F (87.8°C) FT Taiwanese —
4098-9631E 190°F (87.8°C) FT and RR Taiwanese —
* RR abbreviates Rate-of-Rise; FT abbreviates Fixed-Temperature.
All heat detectors identified in the following table mount to a detector base, refer to 4098 Bases for more information. Use the information
in Mounting when mounting detector bases.
Table 4: Heat detector specifications
Max. Spacing
Product ID Description Application FM
Allowed (UL)
Fixed-Temp. Only, 135°F Unusually violent temp. fluctuations and ceiling 70 X 70 ft. (21 X 21 RTI = Quick 20 X 20 ft.
4098-9612
(57°C) temperatures not exceeding 100°F (38°C) m) (6.1 X 6.1 m)
Fixed-Temp. and Rate-of- Normal temp. fluctuations and ceiling 70 X 70 ft (21 X 21 RTI = Quick 20 X 20 ft
4098-9613
Rise, 135°F (57°C) temperatures not exceeding 100°F (38°C) m) (6.1 X 6.1 m)
Unusually violent temp. fluctuations and ceiling
Fixed-Temp. Only, 200°F 70 X 70 ft.(21 X 21 RTI = Quick 20 X 20 ft.
4098-9614 temperatures exceeding 100°F (38°C) but not
(93°C) m) (6.1 X 6.1 m)
150° F (68°C)
Normal temp. fluctuations and ceiling
Fixed-Temp. and Rate-of- 70 X 70 ft.(21 X 21 RTI = Ultra Fast 50 X
4098-9615 temperatures exceeding 100°F (38°C) but not
Rise, 200°F (93°C) m) 50 ft.(15.2 X 15.2 m)
150°F (68°C)
3.3 4098 Bases

The 4098-9788 base is designed for use with the 4098 Series smoke and heat detectors, and the QuickConnect2 photo sensor. To use a
4 wire configuration, you must use the 4098-9682 relay base. Heat detectors require the 4098-9684 base when used with a remote LED.
This section only covers the information necessary for mounting and wiring these base configurations. Before installing these bases, make
a survey of the area to be covered in accordance with the information provided in NFPA 72. For additional information, refer to the NEMA
Guide for Proper Use of System Smoke Detectors.
CAUTION: Install the bases in this section in accordance with applicable NFPA standards, local codes, and Authorities Having Jurisdiction
(AHJs). Failure to follow these instructions can result in the detector failing to initiate an alarm condition. The manufacturer is not responsi-
ble for detectors that have been incorrectly installed, tested, or maintained.
3.3.1 Mounting
The 4098-9788 base mounts to the following electrical boxes:
• A 4 inch, or 10.16 centimeter octagonal electrical box.
• A 4 inch, or 10.16 centimeter square electrical box.
• A single gang electrical box.
Use the 4098-9832 adapter plate kit when mounting to a 4 inch square or any surface mounted box.
page 11 574-709 Rev. AK

Figure 3: Typical detector or sensor mounting

Note 1:
To lock and unlock a detector or sensor into a base, complete the following steps:
1. Break off the plastic lock tab to engage the locking mechanism.
2. To lock a detector or sensor into a base, turn the unit until the locking tab clicks into place.
3. To unlock a detector or sensor, insert the blade of a screwdriver into this slot and pull down on the handle. Turn and remove the
detector or sensor, see Figure 3.
Note 2:
Refer to Compatibility and testing for detailed information about compatible detectors and sensors.
Note 3:
Bases with relay modules require that a 1.5 inch, or 38.1 millimeter extension ring, not supplied, is mounted to the 4 inch square or
octagonal electrical box to meet the space requirement of the relay cube and its wires. The relay modules cannot be used in single-gang
electrical box installations. Ensure the relay cube 4098-9822 is installed in the electrical box directly behind the sensor base.
Note 4:
Use the Adapter Plate Kit, 4098-9832, when mounting the following detectors or sensors to a surface mounted 4 inch, or 10.16 centimeter,
square or octagonal box:
4098-9794, 4098-9770, 4098-9771, 4098-9797, 4098-9798, and 4098-9795.
For this installation only, ensure the adapter plates are installed with the textured side towards the electrical box.
Note 5:
4098-9775, 4098-9776, 4098-9780, 4098-9789, 4098-9791, 4098-9792, 4098-9796 and all detector bases flush mounted (box to be flush
mounted or recessed 1/4” max).
Note 6:
4098-9770, 4098-9771, 4098-9794, 4098-9795, 4098-9797, 4098-9798 only flush mounted (box with adapter bracket to be flush or
recessed 1/4” max).
Note 7:
4098-9772, 4098-9773: Use Adapter plate kit 4098-9863 to mount 4098-9772 or 4098-9773 to 4” square box
page 12 574-709 Rev. AK

3.3.2 Wiring
All screw terminals accommodate 14 to 18 American Wire Gauge (AWG) solid or stranded wire. When tightening screws, the range of
torque is 8 to 12 inch pounds. Connect the wiring to the terminals shown in the following figure, Figure 4 through Figure 8 show typical
wiring applications for the 4098 bases.
CAUTION: Do not loop the wire under the terminals. Break the wire run to provide supervision of the connections.
Figure 4: Wiring and mounting the bases

Note:
1. Break off the plastic tab where indicated to engage the locking mechanism.
2. When the locking mechanism is engaged, insert a flat-head screwdriver in the slot indicated to release the detector from the
base.
3. Use the slotted hole indicated for the first screw when mounting the base.
page 13 574-709 Rev. AK

Figure 5: 4098-9788 Base connections for Style B or D initiating circuits

Table 5: Figure symbol reference
Symbol Reference
• 2120 Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel
• 4100+ Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel
• 4100U Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel
*
• 4100ES Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel
• 4007ES Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel
• 4007ES hybrid Listed Fire Alarm Control Panel
Note:
1. If used, the 4098-9830 Remote LED is polarized. Refer to Figure 8 to wire the remote LED to the heat detector. Observe color-
coded wiring.
2. Refer to the wiring diagrams provided with the system panel for the correct End-Of-Line (EOL) resistor value.
3. Wire the Primary-1 and the Backup-2 lines separate wire runs, and in compliance with local requirements.
4. For a Style D initiating circuit, wire according to the dotted lines and do not use EOL resistor.
5. Break the wires before connecting to Terminal 4 to maintain supervision. Do not loop the wire underneath Terminal 4.
page 14 574-709 Rev. AK

Figure 6: 4098-9683 2-Wire Relay Base connections for Style B or D initiating circuits
Note:
1. If used, the 4098-9830 remote LED is polarized. Refer to Figure 8 to wire the remote LED to a heat detector. Observe color-coded
wiring.
2. Only wire one relay base to an initiating circuit.
3. For a Style D initiating circuit, wire according to the dotted lines and do not use an EOL resistor. If it is a Style B initiating circuit,
refer to the wiring diagrams provided with the system panel for the correct EOL resistor value.
4. Wire the Primary-1 and the Backup-2 lines in separate wire runs, and in compliance with local requirements.
5. Aux. Relay contacts, each rated 1 A at 28 VDC / 0.5 A at 125 VAC, resistive.
page 15 574-709 Rev. AK

Figure 7: 4098-9682 4-Wire Base Connections for Style B Initiating

Circuits, featuring the 24VDC EOL Relay, 2098-9735 or 2098-9739
Note:
1. The figure shows the 4098-9830 remote LED. If used, the 4098-9830 remote LED is polarized. Observe color-coded wiring. Refer
to Figure 8 to wire the remote LED to the heat detector.
2. Aux. Alarm contacts - Form C - each rated 3 A at 28 VDC / 115 VAC, resistive.
3. Refer to the wiring diagrams provided with the system panel for the correct EOL resistor value.
page 16 574-709 Rev. AK

Figure 8: 4098-9684 Heat Detector LED Base Connections for Style B or D Initiating Circuits
Note:
1. Figure shows 4098-9830 Remote LED. If used, the 4098-9830 remote LED is polarized. Observe color-coded wiring.
2. Wire the Primary-1 and the Backup-2 lines in separate wire runs, and in compliance with local requirements.
3. For a Style D initiating circuit, wire according to the dotted lines and do not use an EOL resistor. If it is a Style B initiating circuit,
refer to the wiring diagrams provided with the system panel for the correct EOL resistor value.
page 17 574-709 Rev. AK

4 TrueAlarm Sensors, Sensor Bases, and QuickConnect Smoke Sensors

4.1 Introduction
This chapter contains general notes, specifications, and mounting information about the TrueAlarm Sensors, Sensor Bases and
QuickConnect Smoke Sensors.
Warning:
Ensure that the location of each smoke sensor and each heat sensor has been planned according to local and national fire codes, see
NFPA 72.
Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control panel. This functionality complies with NFPA 72. When
functional testing of these sensors is required in accordance with NFPA 72, use the test methods described in Compatibility and testing.
Refer to NFPA 72 for application, test and maintenance requirements.
The 4098-9733, 4098-9734, and 4098-9778 heat sensor, and the 4098-9754 and 4098-9779 multi-sensor provide a ROR function that
is software programmed and selectable at 15°F, or 8.3°C, and 20°F, or 11.1°C per minute. The 4098-9733, 4098-9754, 4098-9778 and
4098-9779 also provide general temperature monitoring within the range of 32° to 122°F, or 0° to 50°C. The 4098-9734 also provides
general temperature monitoring within the range of 32°F to 150°F, or 0°C to 66°C.
4.2 4098-9733, 4098-9734, and 4098-9778 spacing

Table 6: 4098-9733, 4098-9734, 4098-9778 spacing
Agency Program selection Spacing
60 ft. X 60 ft. (18.3 m X 18.3 m) Ceiling
UL 135°F / 190°F (57°C / 88°C)*
30 ft. X 30 ft. (9.15 m X 9.15 m) Wall
40 ft. X 40 ft. (12.2 m X 12.2 m) Ceiling
UL 155°F (68°C)
20 ft. X 20 ft. (6.1 m X 6.1 m) Wall
RTI = Quick
FM 135°F / 155°F / 190°F (57°C / 68°C / 88°C)* 20 X 20 ft.
(6.1 X 6.1 m)
RTI = Ultra Fast
135°F / 155°F / 190°F (57°C / 68°C / 88°C)* with 15 or 20°F/min
FM 50 X 50 ft.
(8.3 or 11.1°C/min) Rate of Rise
(15.2 X 15.2 m)
* 190°F (88°C) ratings apply only to the 4098-9734.
page 18 574-709 Rev. AK

4.3 4098 TrueAlarm Sensors

Specifications
Table 7: TrueAlarm sensor specifications
4098-9714 4098-9733 4098-9754 4098-9746
Sensor PID 4098-9717 4098-9734
4098-9774 4098-9778 4098-9779 4098-9747
Type of sensor Photoelectric Ionization Heat Heat Photo/Heat Gas
Average 6 µA at 68°F (20°C)
80 µA 80 µA 90 µA 90 µA 50 µA
operating current 13 µA at 135°F (57°C)
135°F (57°C)**
135°F (57°C)** 135°F (57°C)**
UL temperature rating* — — 155°F (68°C)†
155°F (68°C)† 155°F (68°C)†
190°F (88°C)#
15-95% RH
Humidity range (15-90% for
10-95% RH 10-95% RH 10-95% RH 10-95% RH 10-95% RH
(non-condensing) long term
exposure)
Air velocity range 0 - 4000 FPM 0-200 FPM — — 0 - 4000 FPM 0 - 1000 FPM
* Fixed temperature functions are software programmed and selectable from the UL temperature rating.
** UL Max. Ambient Ceiling Temp. of 100°F (38°C) at 3600 sq. ft. of Max. Coverage.
† UL Max. Ambient Ceiling Temp. of 100°F (38°C) at 1600 sq. ft. of Max. Coverage.
# UL Max. Ambient Ceiling Temp. of 150°F (66°C) at 3600 sq. ft. of Max. Coverage.
4.3.1 Special applications

1. Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control unit. The sensitivity range, or setting for the
4098-9714, 4098-9774, 4098-9754, and 4098-9779 sensor is 0.2%/FT to 3.7%/FT smoke obscuration. Smoke sensor sensitivities
are set and continuously monitored by the control unit. The sensitivity range, or setting for the 4098-9717 is 0.5%/FT to 1.3%/FT
2. The 0.2%/FT, 0.5%/FT, and 1.0%/FT settings for the 4098-9714, 4098-9754, 4098-9774, and 4098-9779 sensor, and the 0.5%/
FT and 0.9%/FT settings for the 4098-9717 sensor are for special applications only. The 0.2%/FT, 0.5%/FT, 0.9%/FT, and 1.0%/FT
settings are very sensitive settings: only use the 0.2%/FT setting when a sensor is located in a totally smoke-free and
controlled temperature environment, such as a computer room or telephone switching exchange.
3. To determine if an area is suitable for the 0.2%/FT setting, complete the following steps:
a. Set the sensitivity for the installed sensor at 1.5%/FT.
b. Monitor the peak values for 90 days. If you record a peak value of 0.1%/FT or higher during the 90 days, do not use the 0.2%/
FT setting.
4. To determine if an area is suitable for the 0.2%/FT setting, complete the following steps:
a. Set the sensitivity for the installed sensor at 1.5%/FT.
b. Monitor the peak values for 90 days. If you record a peak value of 0.25%/FT or higher during the 90 days, do not use the 0.5%/
FT setting.
5. To determine if an area is suitable for the 0.9%/FT or 1.0%/FT setting, complete the following steps:
a. Set the sensitivity for the installed sensor at 1.3%/FT (Ion), or 1.5%/FT (Photo).
b. Monitor the peak values for 90 days. If you record a peak value of 0.5%/FT or higher during the 90 days, do not use the 0.9%/FT
(Ion) or 1.0%/FT (Photo) settings.
4.3.2 Mounting
All sensors identified in 4098 TrueAlarm Sensors mount to a sensor base, refer to 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases for more information.
Refer to the following information and Figure 3 when mounting TrueAlarm sensors.
4.4 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases

TrueAlarm smoke or heat sensor bases are connected to a 2120 Multiplex Communicating Device Transponder (CDT), 4020, 4100+, 4100U,
4100ES, 4010ES, 4007ES, 4007ES Hybrid*, 4120, 4008, or 4010 panel by a single wire pair, MAPNET II/IDNet. The 4098-9770, 4098-9775,
4098-9776, 4098-9777, 4098-9780, 4098-9789, 4098-9792, 4098-9793, 4098-9796, and 4098-9797, bases and their sensors receive both
power and data over MAPNET II/IDNet wiring. The 4098-9791 sensor base requires 24VDC power for relay operation, and the 4098-9771
through 4098-9773, 4098-9794, 4098-9795, and 4098-9798 sensor bases with sounders require 24 VDC or Notification Appliance Circuit
(NAC) power. The 4098-9770 through 4098-9773, 4098-9780, 4098-9791, 4098-9794, 4098-9795, 4098-9796, 4098-9797 and 4098-9798
are NOT compatible with the 2120 CDT. The 4098-9793 and 4098-9777 are only compatible with the 4010, 4008, 4100U, 4100ES and
4010ES, 4007ES, except with the 4100-3103 Quad Panel Isolator.
*From this point on, the 4007ES and the 4007ES Hybrid panels are referred to as 4007ES.
page 19 574-709 Rev. AK

The following table contains specifications for TrueAlarm Sensor Bases.
Table 8: TrueAlarm Sensor Bases specifications
4098-9780 2-Wire Relay 4098-9789, 4098-9775 4098-9791 (w/ Relay and
Sensor base PID 4098-9792, 4098-9776
Base (w/ Remote LED) Remote LED)
Working voltage (MAPNET II/
24-40 VDC 24-40 VDC 24-40 VDC 24-40 VDC
IDNet)
24V Working voltage (relay
— — 18 – 32 VDC —
or sounder power)
MAPNET II/IDNet current * 450 µA 400 µA 400 µA 400 µA
24V standby current (relay or
— — 270 µA —
sounder)
24V current (relay or
— — 28 mA —
sounder activated)
LED output Yes Yes Yes —
Sounder output — — — —
* MAPNET II/IDNet current with a Photo Sensor plugged into the base
Table 9: TrueAlarm Sensor Bases specifications (continued)
4098-9795 4098-9796
4098-9770, 4098-9771,
4098-9793, (Multi- (Multi- 4098-9772 (Sounder
Sensor base 4098-9794 (Sounder 4098-9797 4098-9798
4098-9777 (Isolator Sensor Sensor w/ Base); 4098-9773 (CO
PID Base) (CO Sensor (CO Sounder
Base) Sounder Remote Sounder Base)
Base) Base)
Base) LED)
Working
voltage
24-40 VDC 24-40 VDC 24-40 VDC 24-40 VDC 24-40 VDC 24-40 VDC 24-40 VDC
MAPNET II/
IDNet)
24V Working
voltage (relay
— 18 – 32 VDC 18 – 32 VDC — — 18 – 32 VDC 16-32 VDC
or sounder
power)
MAPNET II/
400 µA (4098-9772)
IDNet current 500 µA 400 µA 500 µA 500 µA 450 µA 500 µA
500 µA (4098-9773)
*
24V standby
current (relay — 270 µA 270 µA — — 270 µA 270 µA
or sounder)
520 Hz: 115mA @ 18
24V current
VDC 129mA @ 16 VDC
(relay or
— 17 mA 20 mA — — 17 mA Broadband: 125mA @
sounder
18 VDC 139mA @ 16
activated)
VDC
LED output — Yes Yes Yes — Yes Yes
Sounder 88 dBA 88 dBA
— 88 dBA minimum — — See Note 1
output minimum minimum
* MAPNET II/IDNet current with a Photo Sensor plugged into the base
Note:
1. 4098-9772 Sounder output - Low Frequency alarm: 86 dBA per UL268; 80 dBA per UL464; Broadband: 87 dBA per UL268; 81
dBA per UL464.
2. 4098-9773 CO Sounder output - Low Frequency alarm: 85.5 dBA per UL268 and UL2034; 79.5 dBA per UL464; Broadband: 87
dBA per UL268 and UL2034; 81 dBA per UL464.
page 20 574-709 Rev. AK

4.4.2 Setting the address of the base

Each sensor base has a unique address. This address is associated with a custom label that identifies its physical location within a building.
Ensure that the address and location of the base match the address listed in the specification sheets of the following:
• 2120 Job Configuration Report
• Programmer’s Report for the 4020 System
• Programmer’s Report for the 4100+ System
• Programmer’s Report for the 4100U System
• Programmer’s Report for the 4007ES System
See Figure 9 for the DIP Switch location for 4098-9775, 4098-9776, 4098-9777, 4098-9780, 4098-9789, 4098-9791, 4098-9792,
4098-9793, and 4098-9796 Sensor Bases. See Figure 10 for the DIP Switch locations of 4098-9770, 4098-9771, 4098-9772, 4098-9773,
4098-9794, 4098-9795, 4098-9798 Sensor Bases.
Each sensor base has a unique address. This address is associated with a custom label that identifies its physical location within a building.
Ensure that the address and location of the base match the address listed in the specification sheets of the 2120 Job Configuration Report
or the Programmer’s Report for the FACP.
Figure 9: 4098-9775, 4098-9776, 4098-9777, 4098-9789, 4098-9790,

4098-9791, 4098-9792, 4098-9793, and 4098-9796 location of the DIP switches
Figure 10: 4098-9770, 4098-9771, 4098-9772, 4098-9773, 4098-9794,

4098-9795, 4098-9798 Sensor Bases location of DIP switches
page 21 574-709 Rev. AK

Note: The 4098-9771, 4098-9772, 4098-9773, 4098-9794, 4098-9795, and 4098-9798 Sounder Bases have a 9-position DIP Switch. The
first eight DIP Switches set the sounder base address. DIP Switch Position 9 is set to OFF or ON depending on the sounder base power
source. When the sounder base is connected to a 24 VDC power source, DIP Switch Position 9 is set to “OFF” and the 24 VDC power is
supervised by the sounder base. When the sounder base is powered by the panel’s Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC), DIP Switch Position
9 is set to “ON” and the power is supervised by the NAC and not the sounder base. The 4098-9770 and 4098-9797 bases have the same
layout, but do not have sounder functionality. They use an 8-way DIP switch only.
4.4.3 Address setting for the 2120 CDT System

1. Using the 2120 Job Configuration Report, find the entry for the sensor base, 4098-9775, 4098-9776, 4098-9792 and 4098-9789
only, you are installing. The CUSTOM LABEL column indicates the location while the DEVICE ADDRESS column indicates the switch
setting data.
2. Using the switch setting data for the base you are installing, set the address of the base. See Setting the address of the base for
the location of the switches. Use a non-metallic stylus, or the equivalent, to set the switches.
3. Double-check the location and address of the sensor base before proceeding to the electrical installation, see Figure 3.
4.4.4 Address Setting for the 4010, 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4010ES, 4007ES, 4008, or 4120
System
1. Using the Programmer’s Report, find the entry for the sensor base you are installing. The device ADDRESS and CUSTOM LABEL
are located in the SYSTEM POINT SUMMARY under “M”. For example, Address M1-7, is circled in Figure 12. M1 is the addressable
channel and '-7' is the device address on the channel. For a base with Address M1-7, ensure Address 7 is set on the base’s DIP
Switches (SW1).
2. Using the example given in Step 1 as guideline, set the address on the base using the information in Figure 13. See Setting the
address of the base for the location of the DIP Switches. Use a non-metallic stylus, or the equivalent, to set the switches.
3. Mark an address label with the appropriate address for the base by shading a label box for each base DIP Switch in the ON
position. Apply the label near the DIP Switch on the base.
4. Double-check the location and address of the sensor base before proceeding to electrical installation.
Figure 11: 4020 Programmer’s Report
Figure 12: 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4010ES, 4007ES, 4120, 4008, or 4010 Programmer’s Report
The figure below shows the address DIP Switch settings. Refer to Compatibility and testing for compatibility information for the various
FACPs.
Note: The 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, and 4120 systems support up to 127 devices on each MAPNET II channels. The 4010, 4100U,
4100ES, 4010ES, and 4007ES support up to 250 devices on the IDNet channel. The 4008 supports up to 200 devices on the IDNet channel.
page 22 574-709 Rev. AK

Figure 13: MAPNET/IDNet addresses
4.4.5 Address setting for sounder bases and Multi-Sensor Bases 4098-9795 and 4098-9796
The 4098-9795 and 4098-9796 Multi-Sensor Bases are only for use with the 4098-9754 and 4098-9779 multi-sensor and are not
compatible with the 2120 CDT.
Both bases have remote LED output and the 4098-9795 also has an integrated sounder similar to the 4098-9794 Sounder Base. The
4098-9795 and 4098-9796 Multi-Sensor Bases must be used with the 4098-9754 or 4098-9779 multi-sensor when connected to a 4010,
4020, 4100+, 4008, or 4120 system.
When connected to a 4100U, 4100ES, a 4010ES, or a 4007ES, the 4098-9754 and 4098-9779 multi-sensor can be used with the
4098-9770, 4098-9771, 4098-9772, 4098-9773, 4098-9775, 4098-9776, 4098-9777, 4098-9780, 4098-9789, 4098-9791, 4098-9792,
4098-9793, 4098-9794, 4098-9797, and 4098-9798 bases.
The Multi-Sensor Base answers to two addresses, therefore the DIP Switch must be set for even addresses only. The even address is a
photo sensor/sounder base (4098-9795) or a photo sensor/standard base (4098-9796), and the odd address (DIP Switch + 1) is a heat
sensor/standard base. The figure shows the permitted addresses for the Multi-Sensor Bases.
Important: Switch Position 1 is not used and must always be OFF (0) for the Multi-Sensor Bases to function properly. The odd address
immediately after the DIP Switch setting must not be used by any other sensor base or MAPNET/IDNet device.
Note: A Sounder Base with a 9-pin DIP switch can use a single odd or even address when a 4098-9754 and 4098-9779 base is not
required.
page 23 574-709 Rev. AK

Figure 14: Multi-Sensor Base DIP switch address settings
Note: The 4098-9795 Multi-Sensor Sounder Base has a 9-position DIP Switch that is used for setting base address and selecting the
sounder power source. See Setting the address of the base for DIP Switch location.
4.4.6 Wiring
Sensor bases are connected to the fire alarm control panel using a single wire pair for the 4098-9770, 4098-9775, 4098-9776, 4098-9777,
4098-9780, 4098-9789, 4098-9792, 4098-9793, 4098-9796, and 4098-9797 and two pairs of wires for the 4098-9771, 4098-9772
4098-9773, 4098-9791, 4098-9794, 4098-9795, and 4098-9798.
Using Figure 15 as a reference, connect the bases to the MAPNET II/IDNet wire pair and 24V power, if used.
Important: For additions to existing installations, remove the power from the panel before wiring any bases to avoid damage to the
equipment.
Figure 15: Smoke/Heat sensor base connections
Note:
1. If the 2098-9808 Remote LED or 4098-9822 relay is used, the remote LED and relay wires are not supervised.
2. The maximum quantity of devices on a circuit is 127 for 4020, 4100+, 4100U/4100ES/4010ES (MAPNET), or 4120, 128 for the
2120 CDT panel, 200 for the 4008 panel, and 250 for the 4010 and 4100U/4100ES/4010ES/4007ES (IDNET) panel. The maximum
page 24 574-709 Rev. AK

quantity of 4098-9795 and 4098-9796 Multi-Sensor bases is 63 with 4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4010ES, 4007ES, and 4120,
100 for 4008 panel, and 124 for the 4010 panel.
3. If a shield is used, twist the shield wires together and cap with a wire nut. Insulate the shield from the electrical box.
4. Contact A or B: Dry, Form C - each rated 2 A at 24 VDC / 0.5 A at 110 VAC, resistive.
5. 18 to 32 VDC, 0.008 A typical / 0.013 A max.
6. Do not use a remote LED if the 4098-9822 relay module is used.
7. Contact A or B: Dry, Form C - each rated at 3 A at 28 VDC / 115 VAC, resistive.
8. Remove the protective tape over the CO Sensor on the 4098-9770, 4098-9771, 4098-9773 bases only after the sensor head has
been installed.
9. Remove the protective tape over the CO Sensor on the 4098-9797 and 4098-9798 bases only after the sensor head has been
installed.
10. The maximum wire length between 4098-9791 sensor base and 2098-9737 relay module is 100 feet, or 30.48 meters.
11. The maximum quantity of sensors with 4098-9771, 4098-9772, 4098-9773, 4098-9794, 4098-9795, and 4098-9798 sounder
bases is limited to 43 if output is coded, Temporal code, and so on, using MAPNET II/IDNet control. If coding is performed using a
24 VDC or NAC circuit, see note 2.
12. The maximum line resistance between the panel and the isolator, or between two isolators is 10 ohms, 780 feet, or 237.74
meters at 18 AWG.
13. Contacts Dry Form C, rated at 2 A at 30 VDC / 0.5 A at 125 VAC, resistive.
14. The maximum wire length between 4098-9780 sensor base and 4098-9860 relay module is 100 feet, or 30.48 meters.
Figure 16 shows the wiring connections for the isolator sensor base. All screw terminals accept 14 to 18-gauge AWG solid or stranded wire.
Ensure the maximum torque does not exceed 12-inch-pounds.
CAUTION: Do not loop the wire under the terminals. Break wire runs to provide supervision.
Figure 16: 4098-9793, 4098-9777 Isolator Sensor Base connections

Note:
1. The isolator base is compatible with the 4010, 4100U, 4100ES, 4010ES, 4007ES, or 4008 panel ONLY.
2. The maximum quantity of devices on a circuit is 250 for 4010, 4100U, 4100ES, 4010ES, and 4007ES panels.
3. If shield is used, twist the shield wires together and cap with a wire nut. Insulate the shield from electrical box.
4. The maximum line resistance between the panel and the isolator, or between two isolators is 10 ohms (780 feet, or 237.74
meters at 18 AWG).
page 25 574-709 Rev. AK

4.4.7 CORC Replacement Instructions

This section contains the instructions for the end-of-life replacement of the 4098-9746 and 4098-9747 CO Replacement Cartridge
(CORC), in the CO SSD Bases (Carbon Monoxide Smoke Sensor and Detector Bases). Replacement is necessary due to normal component
degradation over time. It is standard maintenance for the CO SSD Bases in order to prolong normal function without requiring base
replacement.
Warning: During installation, you can be exposed to live circuits - attention is required to ensure personal safety and to avoid product
damage.
Table 10: Model number reference
Model Name Model Name
4098-9746 CORC Replacement 4098-9747 CORC Replacement 10 yr
4098-9797 CO SSD Sensor Base 4098-9770 CO SSD Sensor Base 10 yr
4098-9798 CO SSD Sounder Base 4098-9771 CO SSD Sounder Base 10 yr
Removing the expired CORC
1. Remove the sensor head, not shown, and set aside for later re-installation.
2. Insert a fine blade screwdriver into the slot, as shown below.
Figure 17: Inserting a Fine Slot Screwdriver
3. Gently free the CORC from the sensor base by pushing straight in. Do not pry. Remove the CORC and dispose
Figure 18: Removing the CORC from the Sensor Base

Installing the replacement CORC, refer to the following photo
1. Remove the replacement CORC from the packaging.
2. Hook the loop of the CORC on the tab in the outer rim of the base, the center of the CORC below the CO sensor cylinder.
3. Gently rotate the CORC inward until it snaps onto the CO SSD Sensor Base.
page 26 574-709 Rev. AK

4. Re-install the detector head.

5. Remove the dust cover from the CORC, as shown in the following figure.
6. The CORC replacement is complete.
Figure 19: Installing the Replacement CORC
Note: The fire alarm panel must be set to the correct date. Otherwise a false End of Life trouble for the CORC may be annunciated.
4.5 4098 TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensors

Overview
This section contains general notes, specifications, and mounting information for the TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensor shown in
Table 11.
Warning: Ensure that the location of each smoke sensor has been planned in accordance with local and national fire codes, see NFPA 72.
Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control panel. This functionality complies with NFPA 72. When
functional testing of these sensors is required per NFPA 72, use the test methods described in the “Compatibility and Testing” chapter of
this publication. The sensitivity range, or settings of the 4098-9757 is 1.5%/ft to 3.7%/ft smoke obscuration.
Refer to NFPA 72 for application, test and maintenance requirements.
Table 11: TrueAlarm QuickConnect Smoke Sensor Specifications
Sensor PID 4098-9757
Type of Sensor Photoelectric
Operating Current 500 µA max.
Humidity Range (Non-Condensing) 10-95% RH
Air Velocity Range 0-2000 FPM
Working Voltage (MAPNET II and IDNet) 24-40 VDC
24V Working Voltage (Sounder Power) —
Sounder Output —
24V Standby Current (Sounder) —
24V Current (Sounder Activated) —
Remote LED Output NO
The 4098-9757 QuickConnect2 sensor requires the 4098-9788 base.
The 4098-9757 QuickConnect2 sensor is only compatible with the 4010, 4010ES, 4100U, 4100ES, and 4007ES (with 4100-3106) panels.
The sensors obtain both power and data over IDNet wiring.
page 27 574-709 Rev. AK

4.5.2 Setting the address of the sensor

Each QuickConnect sensor has a unique address. This address is associated with a custom label that identifies its physical location within a
building. The sensor’s address and location must match the address listed in the Programmer’s Report for the 4010, 4100U,4100ES or the
4010ES.
Use the method described in 4098 TrueAlarm Sensor Bases to complete the sensor setup. Refer to the following figure for the location
of the DIP Switches. Double-check the location of the QuickConnect sensor and its address before proceeding to the electrical installation,
see Figure 20 and Figure 21.
Figure 20: 4098-9757, Location of DIP switches on QuickConnect sensor
4.5.3 Wiring
Use the following information to wire the QuickConnect smoke sensors.
CAUTION: Do not loop the wire under the terminals. Break wire runs to provide supervision.
Figure 21: QuickConnect Sensor connections

Notes:
1. The 4098-9757 QuickConnect sensor uses the 4098-9788 base.
2. The maximum quantity of devices on an IDNet circuit is 250 for the 4010, 4010ES, 4100U and 4100ES (with 4190-3106) panels.
3. If shield is used, twist the shield wires together and cap with a wire nut. Insulate the shield from the electrical box.
page 28 574-709 Rev. AK

4.6 Setting the Tone for the 4098-9773 CO Sounder Base and the 4098-9772 Sounder
Base
These bases can output either a Low Frequency Alarm Tone 520 Hz, or a Broadband Horn Tone. 520 Hz is the factory default, but the tone
can be manually selected using a DIP switch near the relay/Remote LED wire pair exit hole.
Figure 22: Setting the Tone for 4098-9772 Sounder Base and 4098-9773 CO Sounder Base
page 29 574-709 Rev. AK

5 Accessories
This section contains information about relay module accessories.
5.1 2098-9737 Relay Module wiring

The 2098-9737 Relay module is used with the 4098-9791 Sensor Base. Install the relay module using the Figure 15 and Figure 23 as a
reference.
Figure 23: 2098-9737 Relay Module Wiring

Note:
1. 18 VDC to 32 VDC 24 mA typical / 35 mA maximum.
2. Contact A or B: dry, Form C, each rated 3 A at 28 VDC / 115 VAC, resistive.
3. The maximum wire length between the 4098-9791 sensor and the relay module is 100 feet, or 30.48 meters.

The 4098-9860 Relay Module is used with the 4098-9780 Sensor Base. Install the relay module using Figure 15 and Figure 24 as a
reference.
Figure 24: 4098-9860 Relay Module wiring

Note:
1. Maximum wire length between sensor 4098-9780 and relay module is 100 ft.
2. Contact Dry Form C, rated at 2 A at 30 VDC / 0.5 A at 125 VAC, resistive.
page 30 574-709 Rev. AK


The 4098-9822 Relay Module is used with the 4098-9771 through 4098-9773, 4098-9775, 4098-9780, 4098-9789, 4098-9791, 4098-9794,
4098-9795, and 4098-9796 Sensor Bases. Install the relay module using Figure 15 and Figure 25 as a reference.
Important:
Do not use a remote LED when using the 4098-9822 relay module. The 4098-9822 relay module is not supervised and can only be used
for non-critical supplementary functions. There is a limit of ten control outputs activated on a MAPNET II/IDNet channel. If the channel
capacity is exceeded, the relay module can fail to function correctly.
Figure 25: 4098-9822 Relay Module wiring

Note:
1. Do not use a remote LED.
2. 18 VDC to 32 VDC, 0.008 A typical / 0.013 A maximum.
3. Contact A or B: Dry, Form “C” - each rated 2 A resistive at 24 VDC / 0.5 A at 110 VAC, resistive.
4. Contact A from 4098-9771, 4098-9772, 4098-9773, 4098-9775, 4098-9780, 4098-9789, 4098-9791, 4098-9794, 4098-9795,
4098-9796 sensor base
5.4 Relay Module installation

To install the relay module complete the following steps:
1. Mount a 1-1/2 inch, or 3.81 centimeter extension ring, that is not supplied, to an octagonal or square electrical box, also not
supplied. The extension ring is required to meet the minimum box volume requirement of 32.3 cubic inches, or 529.4 cubic
centimeters for relay module installation.
2. Mount the relay module inside the extension ring directly behind the base and sensor. Do not mount it remotely. See Figure 23
or Figure 25 for the relay module connections.
Note: Use the exact configuration of electrical box, square or octagonal, with an extension to mount the sensor base, when installing the
relay module.
page 31 574-709 Rev. AK

5.5 Remote LED Module

The 2098-9808 Remote LED Module is compatible with the 4098-9772, 4098-9775, 4098-9780, 4098-9789, 4098-9791, 4098-9794,
4098-9795, 4098-9796 Sensor Bases.
Use the following figure as a reference when installing the Remote LED Module to a sensor base.
Figure 26: 2098-9808 Remote LED Module wiring
Note: To 4098-9772, 4098-9775, 4098-9780, 4098-9789, 4098-9791, 4098-9794, 4098-9795, 4098-9796 Sensor Base
page 32 574-709 Rev. AK

6 Compatibility and testing

This section covers the compatibility, maintenance, and testing of 4098 Sensors, Detectors, and Bases.
6.1 Compatibility for 4098 Detectors and Detector Bases

This section describes the compatibility between FACPs, detectors, and detector bases.
Table 12: 4098 Detector and Detector Base compatibility
Max. quantity
Compatible 2-Wire
Detectors System of bases on an
detector base
initiating circuit
2120 ET/FADM 25
2120 FABT/VPBT 18
4098-9601 2120/4100+ ZAM 20
4098-9602 4098-9788 4001 18
4908-9603 4098-9684 4002 30
4098-9605 (LED base for Heat 4020 30
4098-9612 Detectors Only) 4100ES/4010ES/4007ES/4100U/4100+/4120/UT 30
4098-9613 4004/4005 20
4098-9614 4006 30
4098-9615 4004/4005 High Current 30
(Relay base not used with 4004 and 4005 Low 1
4098-9683
Current systems) (See note 1)
Note:
1. The relay operation cannot be guaranteed unless it is the only device on that zone.
2. The panel compatibility identification marker is the model number of the module or panel.
3. The detector compatibility identification marker is the model number found on the detector label.
4. For detailed interconnection data, see the wiring diagrams for the specific panels.
5. For additional compatibility listings, see document 579-832, 2-Wire Detector Compatibility Chart.
6.2 Compatibility for 4098 Sensors and Sensor Bases

This section describes the compatibility between FACPs, sensors, and sensor bases.
Table 13: 4098 Sensor and Sensor Base compatibility
Sensors Compatible bases Max. quantity of devices on a circuit
4098-9775
4098-9714
4098-9776 MAPNET II:
4098-9717
4098-9780 127 (4020), 127 (4100+), 127 (4120), 127 (4100U), 127 (4100ES), 250
4098-9733
4098-9789 (4010ES/4007ES)
4098-9774
4098-9791 Addresses 1-127
4098-9778
4098-9792
4098-9714
4098-9775
4098-9717
4098-9776 128 (CDT TrueAlarm)
4098-9733
4098-9789 Addresses 0-127
4098-9774
4098-9792
4098-9778
4098-9775
4098-9714 4098-9792
4098-9776
4098-9717 4098-9793 IDNET:
4098-9777
4098-9733 4098-9770, -9797 250 (4010), 250 (4100U), 250 (4100ES), 250 (4010ES, 4007ES)
4098-9780
4098-9774 (4100U, 4100ES, Addresses 1-250
4098-9789
4098-9778 4010ES, 4007ES only)
4098-9791
page 33 574-709 Rev. AK

Table 13: 4098 Sensor and Sensor Base compatibility

Sensors Compatible bases Max. quantity of devices on a circuit
4098-9714 4098-9775 4098-9789
IDNET:
4098-9733 4098-9776 4098-9791
200 (4008)
4098-9774 4098-9777 4098-9792
Addresses 1-200
4098-9778 4098-9780 4098-9793
MAPNET II:
4098-9714 4098-9772, -9794
127 (4020), 127 (4100+), 127 (4100U), 127 (4100ES), 127 (4120)
4098-9717 (See note 5)
Addresses 1-127
4098-9733 4098-9771, -9773, -9798
IDNET:
4098-9774 (See note 5)
250 (4010), 250(4100U), 250 (4100ES), 250 (4010ES, 4007ES)
4098-9778 (4100U/4100ES, 4010ES, 4007ES, IDNet only)
Addresses 1-250
MAPNET II:
63 (4020, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4120)
4098-9795
4098-9754 Addresses 2 to 126
(See note 5)
4098-9779 IDNET:
4098-9796
124 (4010), 124 (4100U), 124 (4100ES), 124 (4010ES, 4007ES)
Addresses 2 to 248
4098-9775 4098-9772, 4098-9794
4098-9776 (See note 5)
IDNET:
4098-9754 4098-9780 4098-9770, 4098-9771,
250 (4100U), 250 (4100ES), 250 (4010ES, 4007ES)
4098-9779 4098-9792 4098-9773
Addresses 1-250
4098-9789 4098-9797, 4098-9798
4098-9791 (See note 5)
IDNET:
250 (4100U/4100ES with 4100-3106), 250 (4010ES, 4007ES),
4098-9757 4098-9788
250 (4010)
Addresses 1-250
4098-9770, 4098-9771, 4098-9773 IDNET:
4098-9746
4098-9797, 4098-9798 250 (4100U), 250 (4100ES), 250 (4010ES, 4007ES)
4098-9747
(See note 5) Addresses 1-250
Note:
1. For detailed interconnection data, see the wiring diagrams for the specific panels.
2. The panel compatibility identification marker is the model number of the module or panel.
3. The sensor compatibility identification marker is the model number found on the sensor label.
4. The 4098-9754 and 4098-9779 sensors are NOT compatible with bases that have a RED DOT located in the sensor mounting
area.
5. The maximum quantity of 4098-9772, 4098-9794 Sounder Bases, 4098-9795 Multi-Sensor Sounder Bases, and 4098-9771 and
4098-9773 CO Sounder bases when the output is coded using MAPNET II/ IDNet control (Temporal Code) is 43. If the coding is
performed using 24 VDC or NAC circuit, use the limits specified in Table 13 .
6.3 Maintenance and testing
6.3.1 Maintenance
The minimal requirement for detector and sensor maintenance requires clearing of surface dust using a vacuum cleaner. Ensure that the
cleaning programs comply with the NFPA and local environments. Ensure that cleaning of the internal chamber is only done by a qualified
technical representative.
For service, return to your local branch office.
6.3.2 Testing
Smoke sensor sensitivities are set and continuously monitored by the control unit. Dirty or out-of-range sensors are annunciated by the
control unit. This functionality complies with NFPA 72.
page 34 574-709 Rev. AK

Note: When testing detectors or sensors, refer to NFPA 72, or contact your local branch office.
CAUTION: Before functionally testing the detectors or sensors, be sure to disconnect the city connection, releasing devices, and extin-
guishing systems. For the 4120, 4006, 4008, 4020, 4010, 4100+, 4100U, 4100ES, 4010ES, or 4007ES panel, put the panel in the Walk Test
mode.
6.3.3 Preferred method of testing smoke detectors or sensors

NFPA minimally requires annual functional testing of smoke detectors or sensors at their installed location. To perform this annual test, use
the Solo 336 Aerosol Smoke Dispenser.
Important: After testing detectors, reset the fire alarm panel to restore the fire alarm system to a normal status. After testing sensors,
ensure you clear the peak values.
6.3.4 Test Equipment Available

The following test equipment is available. Follow the instructions included with the equipment for testing.
• 553-760: Test and Removal Tool, attached to Mr. Longarm 4 foot, or 121.92 centimeter pole (Item number 7508) or 6 foot, or 182.88
centimeter pole (Item number 7512).
• 553-761: Heat Detector or Sensor Removal Adapter, use this with the Test and Removal Tool, 553-760.
• 553-805: Removal Adapter Head Attachment (attaches to the 553-760 tool).
• 553-810: Magnet Tester, attached to Mr. Longarm 4 foot, or 121.92 centimeter pole (Item number 7508) or 6 foot, or 182.88
centimeter pole (Item number 7512).
• 553-832: Ion Detector Test Cable.
• Gemini Sensitivity Tester (Model 501 or 502).
• Solo 336 Aerosol Smoke Dispenser –attached to either the Solo 100 (15 ft.) telescopic fiberglass pole or the Solo 101 (4 ft.) fiberglass
pole.
• Solo Red Cup (709-024). Use to hold the 553-635 Aerosol Spray Can.
• Solo (708-021) Adapter for Solo Poles. Use to adapt 553-760 Test and Removal Tool to the Solo Pole.
• TrueTest 801, Smoke Detector Sensitivity Test Equipment.
• Smoke 400, Smoke aerosol for TrueTest.
• Testifire 2000-024, Smoke, Heat and CO Detector Tester.
• Testifire 2001-024, Smoke, Heat and CO Detector Test Kit (includes 2 battery batons and
• ac/dc charger).
• TS3-024 Smoke capsule, for use with Testifire Smoke, Heat and CO Detector Tester.
• TC3-024 CO Capsule, for use with Testifier Smoke, Heat and CO Detector Tester.
Note: The TrueTest 801 or the Testifier 2000-024 are the only testers for use with the 4098-9770, 4098-9771, 4098-9797 and 4098-9798
bases.
Table 14: Available smoke test aerosols
Product name Description
PurCheck® HO-30S Smoke alarm tester
SmokeCheck® HO-25S Smoke alarm tester
CHEKKIT® - Smoke detector tester
Solo A4 - Smoke detector tester
page 35 574-709 Rev. AK

6.3.5 Alternate method for testing sensors

The following test method is suitable for functional checks of sensor bases or QuickConnect sensors during installation, however, testing
with smoke must be performed to comply with NFPA requirements.
For all sensor bases, position the 553-810 Magnet Tester ½ inch to ¾ inch, or 12 millimeters to 20 millimeters counterclockwise from the
visible LED on the sensor base, see Figure 27.
For the 4098-9757 QuickConnect2 Photo Sensor, position the 553-810 Magnet Tester as shown in Figure 28.
For MAPNET II devices, testing a sensor using a magnet reports a value of 255 for actual/peak. This does not occur for IDNet devices. Clear
the peak value after testing.
Note: For the 4098-9795 and 4098-9796 Multi-Sensor Bases both the photo and heat address, even and odd, must alarm.
Figure 27: Magnet Test location for 4098-9775, 4098-9776, 4098-9777, 4098-9780, 4098-9789,
4098-9791, 4098-9792, 4098-9793, and 4098-9796 Sensor Bases using the 553-810 Magnet Tester
page 36 574-709 Rev. AK

6.3.6 Magnetic Test for photoelectric detectors

Test the 4098 Photoelectric Detectors by placing a magnet above the location indicated by a “|” mark embossed on the cover for 4
seconds. Use the Magnetic Tester, Part No. 553-810, Table 15, and the following information to test the detectors.
Table 15 describes the LED reaction during Normal and MAG TEST modes to the Normal, More Sensitive, Less Sensitive, and Non-
Functional states of the detector.
Figure 28: Magnet Test Location for 4098-9601, 4098-9602, 4908-9603,

4098-9605 Smoke Detectors using the 553-810 Magnet Tester
Table 15: MAG TEST/Normal Modes - states and reactions
State Normal Mode MAG TEST Mode
LED flashes every 4 LED Flashes Quickly LED Flashes Latches in Alarm
secs. 6 Times Slowly 4 Times Mode/LED stays “ON”
Normal X X
More Sensitive X X X
Less Sensitive X X X
Non-Functional X
When placing the magnet at the location indicated by a “|” mark embossed on the cover, the visible LED flashes indicating the condition of
the detector.
The following are descriptions of the detector when it is in MAG TEST:
• NORMAL - When in MAG TEST, the detector latches into alarm if the detector is within calibration range and the visible LED stays ON.
• MORE SENSITIVE - When in MAG TEST, if the detector is more sensitive than the maximum calibration, the visible LED quickly flashes,
twice a second. Following the sixth flash, the detector latches into alarm and the visible LED stays ON.
• LESS SENSITIVE - When in MAG TEST, if the detector is less sensitive than the minimum calibration, the visible LED slowly flashes four
times, once every two seconds. Following the fourth flash, the detector latches into alarm and the visible LED stays ON.
• NON-FUNCTIONAL DETECTOR - If the detector is less sensitive than the minimum permitted sensitivity, or if there is a fault in the
temperature sensing circuit (4098-9602), the visible LED does not flash normally. When in MAG TEST, the visible LED slowly flashes
four times, once every two seconds. After the fourth flash, the detector does NOT latch into alarm, the LED stops flashing and turns
OFF.
If the detector is outside the normal operating range, clean it. If after cleaning the detector still indicates an abnormal sensitivity, replace
the detector.
page 37 574-709 Rev. AK

6.3.7 Magnetic Test for ionization detectors

Test the 4098 Ionization Detectors using a magnet to verify that the Fire Alarm Control Panel is operating correctly.
Note: When ionization detectors alarm, the red LED indicator activates and latches into the ON position.
Place a magnet against the detector’s side, over the location marked by a “|” on the head of the ionization detector. Hold the magnet for
ten seconds to activate an internal reed switch. Use the Magnet Tester, Part No. 553-810.
6.3.8 Ion detector sensitivity test

Plug the 553-832 Ion Detector Test Cable into the sensitivity voltage pins located on the Ion Detector Head. Complete the following steps
to test the sensitivity of the ion detector:
1. Connect a 10 MV digital voltmeter to the 553-832 test cable. Connect the negative terminal of the voltmeter to the red wire of the
test cable, and connect the positive terminal of the voltmeter to the white wire of the test cable. The black wire of the 553-832
test cable is not used.
2. Ensure the voltage measured by the voltmeter is between 0.2 and 0.8 volts. Clean or replace detectors that output a voltage
outside this range.
3. If the Ion Detector voltage output is outside the range, remove and clean it as described in the cleaning section. Re-check the
voltage measurement on the Ion Detector, if it is still outside the voltage range after cleaning, replace the device.
6.3.9 Maintenance of the CO Sensor

The CO Sensor is not as susceptible to dirt as the photo or ion sensors, and does not compensate for a loss of sensitivity over the period
of its lifetime.
The following two operations to inform a qualified or trained service person that a CO sensor has reached its end of life:
• The FACP panel generates an End of Life trouble notifying the user that a replacement sensor is required.
• Manual standard maintenance testing by a qualified or trained service person checks that the device is fully operational.
6.3.10 End of life service

The end of life of a CO Sensor is based on the manufacture date of the device, not the installation date.The FACP panel daily checks each
IDNet CO combination sensor for the End of Life trouble expiration date.The FACP panel generates the following status report based on
the condition of the CO Sensor:
• None: the CO Sensor has not reached the expiration date.
• Almost Expired 6M: the CO Sensor is within 6 months of the expiration date.
• Almost Expired 12M: the CO Sensor is within 12 months of the expiration date.
• Expired (End of Life): the CO Sensor’s date has expired.
To clear the trouble at the panel:
1. Install a new CRS with a valid date.
2. Perform a hardware reset of the FACP.
Note: For the panel to annunciate these warnings, enable the logging of the Almost Expired trouble, with the exception being the
Expired trouble condition which does not require any activation.
The TrueAlarm CO report can also be used to list all End of Life dates of CO sensors in the panel. The report is a quick and easy way to
check if any sensors will expire before the next visit to the site.
6.3.11 Standard maintenance

To verify that the sensors are operating correctly, standard maintenance of the CO sensors is required. The standard maintenance process
is as follows:
1. The FACP panel is put into the service test mode using either the diagnostic function menu item on the front panel or the system
diagnostic computer port command.
2. A trouble displays at the panel indicating that the panel is in the Device Test Mode.
3. A tester introduces CO gas, heat and smoke simultaneously into the detector.
4. The device LED on the base turns ON steady if any, but not all of the sensors on the device cross an alarm threshold.
5. The device LED on the base flashes slowly if all of the sensors cross an alarm threshold.
6. The appropriate action based on the point type of the CO sensor is taken at the panel.
7. Device Test Mode shall is entered if a faster response time is needed during Walktest.
Note: There is a 20 device LED maximum that can be ON/Flashed at any given time. This limit applies during testing, and during alarm
operation. Reset the panel before this limit is reached during testing so that the LED can be used as an indication of a successful test.
page 38 574-709 Rev. AK

6.3.12 CO sensor testing flowcharts
Figure 29: Testing a single CO sensor
Note: The LED on the base can turn ON prior to slow flashing
depending on when the individual sensors alarm. Only the last LED
requested to flash will slow flash. All others will turn to steady ON.
Flashing of the LED will only be performed when the IDNet CO algo-
rithms are disabled for testing. During Walktest, a reset timer is
activated so that the LED is reset to the OFF state without needing
a reset at the panel. This reset is user programmable and can be as
short as 15 seconds long. This automatic reset may cause the LED
on the base to turn OFF before the test is complete. For example,
it's possible that depending on the test tool, the LED (if all of the
sensors are good) could turn ON then reset to OFF, turn ON then
reset to OFF then finally slow flash then reset to OFF.
Note:
The following describes the LED states:

LED OFF - No sensors have exceeded their thresholds
LED ON - At least one sensor exceeded its threshold
LED FLASHING - All sensors for this device have exceeded their
thresholds (Note: This could be 2 or 3 sensors depending on what
type of CO combination device is configured)
Flashing will only be performed when in testing (IDNet CO algo-

rithms are disabled).
Figure 30: Simultaneous testing

of multiple sensor technologies
page 39 574-709 Rev. AK

6.3.13 Cleaning
Introduction
If the sensitivity of the device does not match what is marked on the device’s label, clean the device using a source of oil-free, filtered,
compressed air such as Dust-Off, or Tech Duster, and so on.
CAUTION: Notify the appropriate building personnel prior to removing any detectors or sensors from service.
6.3.13.1 Photoelectric smoke detector or sensor cleaning 13.6.2.2

13.6.2.1 ítem
ítem 720
Blow the compressed air through the open vents around the device so that air enters and cleans the black chamber cover and insect
screen assembly, Part No. 677-224, located under the white protective cover.
If the sensitivity of the device does not match what is marked on the device’s label after cleaning, replace the device.
6.3.13.2 Special considerations for ion detectors and sensors

Note: Do not remove the protective cover on the Ion Detector or Sensor.
Blow compressed air through the open vents around the device so that air enters and cleans the black chamber cover assembly located
under the white protective cover. If the device sensitivity is still outside the marked range replace the device and return the failed device to
130 Perinton Parkway, Fairport, NY 1 4450-9199.
Important: After cleaning, test the detector or sensor with smoke per NFPA 72.
6.3.14 Trouble indications
6.3.14.1 Trouble indications for TrueAlarm sensors

The TrueAlarm smoke sensor is a measuring device that sends data regarding smoke density to the 2120, 4008, 4010, 4020, 4100, 4100+,
4100U, 4100ES, 4010ES, and 4007ES FACPs. The TrueAlarm heat sensor operation is similar, but sends temperature data instead of smoke
density data. The FACP uses this data to determine whether a trouble has occurred.
The TrueAlarm sensor has two automatic trouble indications:
• Dirty
• Excessively Dirty
A “Smoke Sensor Dirty” trouble condition is reported when the average value on an individual sensor reaches a set threshold value. At this
time, the FACP is still compensating for environmental factors and is holding the set sensitivity level.
A “Smoke Sensor is Excessively Dirty” trouble condition is reported when the average value of an individual sensor reaches a slightly higher
set threshold level. At this point, the FACP no longer compensates for environmental factors, and the sensitivity level drifts. Although an
“Excessively Dirty” trouble is reported, the sensor continues to operate and reports an alarm condition when one is detected.
In addition to the two automatic trouble conditions, the FACPs have digital pseudo points that must be turned ON so that a TrueAlarm
sensor that is close to being a dirty sensor reports as if it is “almost dirty”. This is useful when scheduling maintenance for dirty sensors, it
provides a means of checking if other sensors are approaching a dirty state.
The following table shows appropriate action to take when certain trouble indications occur:
Table 16: TrueAlarm troubles and descriptions
Trouble Indication Description
Using the front panel keys, it is possible for a technical representative to turn ON a digital pseudo
point in the FACP so that an “almost dirty” sensor to reports a trouble. Although the “almost dirty”
Almost Dirty
sensor is holding its sensitivity level, you can schedule maintenance for the sensor before the
dirty sensor trouble occurs.
A “dirty” indication means that the sensor is holding its sensitivity level, schedule maintenance for
Dirty the sensor. Clean the sensor as required and, when necessary, call your local branch office for
service.
The “excessively dirty” indication means that the sensor is no longer compensating for dirt and
Excessively Dirty dust. Because nuisance alarms are possible with this condition, clean or replace the sensors
immediately. When necessary, call your local branch office for service.
All FACP system sensors are automatically tested once every minute. When a sensor fails to report
Self-Test Abnormal properly to the FACP, a “Self-Test Abnormal” condition occurs. Because the sensor is not working
properly, it must be replaced. Replace it, or call your local branch office for service.
The FACP panel generates an Expired trouble to notify the user that a replacement sensor is
Expired required. To clear the trouble, install a new CORC with a valid date must, and perform a hardware
reset of the FACP.
page 40 574-709 Rev. AK

Table 17: Analog value of the sensor

The panel automatically indicates when a sensor is outside the sensitivity calibration. If the sensor has an analog value
below what is listed in the table, the sensor is within its sensitivity setting.
Type Almost Dirty Dirty Excessively Dirty
Photo 115 120 135
Ion 135 140 155
To view the analog value of a sensor, refer to the operating instructions of the FACP.
6.3.15 Fire Alarm trouble and maintenance log

Date Time Event/Description Initials
page 41 574-709 Rev. AK

574-709 Rev. AK
TrueAlert Notification Appliances
UL, CSFM Listed; FM, and 13.6.3
13.6.2.1 ítem
ítem 3 28 Non-Addressable Audible/Visible Notification
MEA (NYC) Approved* Appliances for 4-Wire Operation (Horn/Strobe)
Features
Wall mount audible/visible notification appliances
with efficient piezoelectric horn and high output
xenon strobe for 4-wire control applications
Xenon strobe visible notification appliance:
 24 VDC operation with switch selection for free-run or
synchronized flash rate
 Models available with 15, 75, or 110 candela 13.6.3
13.6.2.1ítem 2 27
ítem
 UL listed to Standard 1971
 Compatible with ADA requirements (refer to important
installation information on page 4)
 Strobe candela rating is clearly indicated on reflector
Electronic horn audible notification appliance:
 Low current operation (25 mA @ 24 VDC)
 Harmonically rich output sound suitable for either
coded or steady operation
Available housing colors:
 Red cover with white "FIRE" lettering 13.6.2.1
13.6.3 ítem
ítem2 27
 White cover with red "FIRE" lettering
Flexible, easy, and convenient semi-flush or
surface wall mounting:
TrueAlert Non-Addressable A/V Notification Appliances
 Easily mounts to single gang, double gang, or 4-inch are available in Red with White Lettering and White with
square outlet box Red Lettering
 Optional mounting adapters are available to cover
surface mounted electrical boxes and to adapt to Description
Simplex® 2975-9145 boxes
TrueAlert non-addressable audible and visible
 Diode polarized inputs for connection to reverse
notification. For applications requiring audible/visible
polarity, supervised notification appliance circuit (NAC)
(A/V) notification with horn tones, these Simplex 4903
 In/out wiring terminals for 18 AWG to 12 AWG, series appliances combine a high intensity strobe with a
accessible from front of housing, providing easy access low current electronic horn in a compact package that is
for installation, inspection and testing easy and quick to install. Each appliance can be controlled
 Rear of housing assembly does not extend into box independently from each other using conventional reverse
 Rugged, high impact, flame retardant thermoplastic polarity NACs.
housing with optional covers available to convert Multiple models with flexible mounting choices.
housing color These 4-wire operation A/V appliances are available with
 Optional UL listed red wire guard is available for semi- three strobe intensity levels (15, 75, or 110 cd) and with
flush or surface mounting red or off-white housings. Mounting can be semi-flush or
surface mount on a standard single or double gang, or 4”
square (102 mm) electrical box. Optional accessories are
* This product has been approved by the California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to available to increase mounting and application flexibility.
Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing
7125-0026:239 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material presented in this Strobe Selection
document. Accepted for use – City of New York Department of Buildings – MEA35-93E.
This product was not ULC listed as of document revision date. Additional listings may be Proper selection of visible notification is dependent on
applicable; contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and
approvals under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection occupancy, location, local codes, and proper applications
Products. of: the National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72); ANSI
A117.1; the appropriate model building code, BOCA,
ICBO, or SBCCI, and the application guidelines of the
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
S4903-0011-6 11/2014
Strobe Operation Horn Operation
TrueAlert non-addressable A/V strobes can be set TrueAlert non-addressable A/V horns provide an
for free-run operation or synchronized operation using an audible notification output that is a loud and penetrating,
on-board selection switch. When selected for harmonically rich sound capable of a continuous or coded
synchronized operation, flash operation is controlled output per the controlling NAC’s capabilities.
from:
 Synchronized Flash Modules, 4905-9914 (Class B)
or 4905-9922 (Class A)
 4006, 4007ES Hybrid, 4008, 4010, 4010ES, 4100ES,
and 4100U Fire Alarm Control Panels (refer to
individual product data sheets for details)
 4009 IDNet NAC Extender, models 4009-9201 and
4009-9301 (refer to data sheet S4009-0002)
Product Selection
Audible/Visible Notification Appliances (Horn/Strobe)

Visible Notification Appliance Output
Model Housing Color
15 cd 75 cd 110 cd
4903-9425
Red with white
4903-9426
“FIRE” lettering
4903-9427
4903-9431
White with red
4903-9432
“FIRE” lettering
4903-9433
Adapters
Model Description Dimensions
4905-9937 Surface mount red adapter skirt Use to cover 1-1/2” 5-3/8” H x 5-1/4” W x 1-5/8” D
deep surface (136 mm x 133 mm x 41 mm)
4905-9940 Surface mount white adapter skirt mounted boxes Total depth with strobe = 4-3/8” (111 mm)
Red adapter plate, for mounting to Simplex 2975-9145 box 8-5/16” x 5-3/4” x 0.060” Thick
4905-9931
(typically for retrofit, may be mounted vertical or horizontal) (211 mm x 146 mm x 1.5 mm)
7-7/8" x 5-1/8" x 2-3/4" Deep
2975-9145 Red mounting box, requires 4905-9931 adapter plate
(130 mm x 200 mm x 70 mm)
Synchronized Flash Control Modules
Synchronized Flash Module, Epoxy encapsulated with
4905-9914
Class B operation in/out 18 AWG wire 1-3/8” W x 2-7/16” L x 13/16” H
Synchronized Flash Module, leads, rated for 2 A NAC, (35 mm x 62 mm x 20 mm)
4905-9922 requires 10 mA for power
Class A operation
Optional Covers and Guard
4905-9994 Red cover with white “FIRE” lettering 5-1/8” H x 5” W x 1-1/2” D
4905-9995 White cover with red “FIRE” lettering (130 mm x 127 mm x 38 mm)
Wire guard with mounting plate, red, compatible with surface 6-1/16” H x 6-1/16” W x 3-1/8” D
4905-9961*
or semi-flush mounted boxes (154 mm x 154 mm x 79 mm)
* UL listed by Space Age Electronics Inc.
2 S4903-0011-6 11/2014
Specifications
General Specifications
Housing Dimensions (including lens) 5-1/8” H x 5” W x 2-3/4” D (130 mm x 127 mm x 70 mm)

Temperature Range 32° to 122° F (0° to 50° C)
Humidity Range 10% to 93%, non-condensing at 100° F (38° C)
2 2
Terminal blocks for 18 AWG to 12 AWG (0.82 mm to 3.31 mm ); two
Connections
wires per terminal for in/out wiring
Strobe Specifications
Rated Voltage Range UL Listed Range Regulated 24 VDC; see Note 1 below
Flash Rate and Synchronized NAC Loading 1 Hz; with up to 35 synchronized strobes maximum per NAC 13.6.3
13.6.2.1 ítem
ítem 2 27
Maximum RMS Current Rating per Strobe Output 15 cd 75 cd 110 cd
(see Note 2 below) 13.6.2.1
13.6.3ítem
ítem28
3 76 mA 192 mA 227 mA
Reference Currents 18 VDC 68 mA 171 mA 202 mA

at other voltages 24 VDC 51 mA 128 mA 151 mA
Horn Specifications
Rated Voltage Range UL Listed Range 16 VDC to 33 VDC, see Notes 3 and 4 below
Sound Output Characteristics 2400 to 3700 Hz sweep, modulated at 120 Hz rate
Voltage 16 VDC 24 VDC 33 VDC
Sound Type (see Note 5) Steady Coded Steady Coded Steady Coded
Sound Output and
Current Ratings Current 15 mA 10 mA 25 mA 15 mA 28 mA 20 mA
@ 10 ft (3 m) Reverberant Chamber,
85 dBA 82 dBA 88 dBA 84 dBA 91 dBA 87 dBA
UL 464 Test
Anechoic Chamber 90 dBA 86 dBA 91 dBA 86 dBA 91 dBA 87 dBA
NOTES: 13.6.3 ítem 3

13.6.2.1 28
1. “Regulated 24 VDC” refers to the voltage range of 16 to 33 VDC per UL Standard 1971, Signaling Devices for the
Hearing Impaired. This voltage range is the absolute operating range. Operation outside of this range may cause
permanent damage to the appliance. Please note that 16 VDC is the lowest operating voltage that is allowed at the last
appliance on the NAC under worst case conditions. The strobe of this A/V is field selectable for free-run or synchronized
operation.
2. The maximum RMS current listed is the device nameplate rating. Strobe designs are constant wattage and the maximum
RMS current rating occurs at the lowest allowable operating voltage. (RMS is root mean square and refers to the
effective value of a varying current waveform.)
3. Terminals are provided for wiring the horn and strobe of these A/Vs to separate NACs. Operation of the horn and strobe
is not separately controlled when they are both wired to the same NAC.
4. The rated voltage range listed is the absolute operating range. Operation outside of this range may cause permanent
damage to the appliance. Please note that 16 VDC is the lowest operating voltage that is allowed at the last appliance on
the notification appliance circuit under worst case conditions.
5. Coded values are typical of the output measured with a Temporal coded or a March Time coded pulse and with a sound
level meter reading on a “fast” setting. Under the same test conditions, coded horn output “peak” sound level readings
are typically 4 dBA higher.
3 S4903-0011-6 11/2014
Installation Reference, Surface or Semi-Flush Mounting
Mounting is compatible with

single gang, double gang, and
4" (102 mm) square boxes,
1-1/2" (38 mm) deep, by others IMPORTANT! WALL MOUNT
INSTALLATION HEIGHT REFERENCE
Horn wiring Bottom of lens
terminals
is either even
with, or slightly Electrical
above bottom box outline
4
Strobe mode 3 of compatible
selection switch boxes
2
Wiring access hole
1
Strobe wiring
terminals NFPA 72 requires 80" (2.03 m)
Mounting Holes: that the entire lens minimum
4" square (4) be not less than
a
Single gang (2) 80" and not greater
Double gang (3) than 96" above the
finished floor
Transparent housing
and lens assembly
Removable cover
(tool required)
Installation Reference, Adapter Plate, Guard, and Adapter Skirt
Surface Mounting Reference

2975-9145 Box with Optional Adapter Skirt
and Optional Wire Guard
Surface mount conduit and
box shown for reference
4" (102 mm) square

box profile, 1-1/2"
(38 mm) deep
Optional
4905-9961
Wire Guard
A/V
4905-9931 Adapter Plate

Optional Surface Mount Adapter Skirt,
4905-9961 Optional Wire Guard 1-1/2" deep: 4905-9937, Red;
(shown here for reference only, 4905-9940, White (conduit knockouts
4905-9931 Adapter Plate can be used on other mounting options) are provided on all four sides)
TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm and
Signaling Code are trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

Multi-Application Peripherals
13.6.5.2 UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; IDNet or MAPNET II Communicating Devices
FM Approved * 13.6.4 ítem 2 Addressable Manual Stations
Features
Individually addressable manual fire alarm
stations with:
 Power and data supplied via IDNet or MAPNET II
addressable communications using a single wire pair
 Operation that complies with ADA requirements
 Visible LED indicator that flashes during
communications and is on steady when the station has 4099-9021 4099-9805
been activated 4099-9004
NO GRIP NO GRIP
 The NO GRIP Single Action Station and Retrofit Kit Single action
Single action Retrofit kit
are available with a more easily operated pull lever for
applications where anticipated users may find the
standard station lever difficult to activate FIRE ALARM FIRE ALARM
 Pull lever that protrudes when alarmed
PUSH
 Break-rod supplied (use is optional)
 Models are available with single or double action PULL DOWN
KEY
(breakglass or push) operation OPERATED
ONLY
Compatible with the following Simplex® control

panels:
 Model Series 4007ES, 4008, 4010, 4010ES, 4100ES, With 2099-9828
4099-9005 4099-9006
4100U, 4020, 4100, and 4120 fire alarm control Institutional
Breakglass Push
Cover kit
panels equipped with either IDNet or MAPNET II
communications Operation
 Model Series 2120 Communicating Device
Activation of the 4099-9004 single action manual station
Transponders (CDTs) equipped with MAPNET II
requires a firm downward pull to activate the alarm switch.
communications
Completing the action breaks an internal plastic break-rod
Compact construction: (visible below the pull lever, use is optional). The use of a
 Electronics module enclosure minimizes dust break-rod can be a deterrent to vandalism without
infiltration interfering with the minimum pull requirements needed for
 Allows mounting in standard electrical boxes easy activation. The pull lever latches into the alarm
 Screw terminals for wiring connections position and remains extended out of the housing to provide
a visible indication.
Tamper resistant reset key lock (keyed same as
Simplex fire alarm cabinets) Single Action NO GRIP Station 4099-9021. For
applications such as California Building Code, Title 24,
Multiple mounting options: which requires “Controls and operating mechanisms shall
 Surface or semi-flush with standard boxes or matching be operable with one hand and shall not require tight
Simplex boxes grasping, pinching or twisting of the wrist” the model
 Flush mount adapter kit 4099-9021 station provides a more easily operated pull
 Adapters are available for retrofitting to commonly lever compared to standard stations. Retrofit of existing
available existing boxes stations is available using the 4099-9805 Retrofit kit.
13.6.5 ítem 1 Double Action Stations (Breakglass) require the
Description
operator to strike the front mounted hammer to break the
The Simplex addressable manual station combines the glass and expose the recessed pull lever. The pull lever then
familiar Simplex manual station housing with a compact operates as a single action station. 13.6.4 ítem 1
communication module that is easily installed to satisfy Double Action Stations (Push Type) require that a
demanding applications. Its integral individual spring loaded interference plate (marked PUSH) be pushed
addressable module (IAM) constantly monitors status and back to access the pull lever of the single action station.
communicates changes to the connected control panel via
IDNet or MAPNET II communications wiring. Station reset requires the use of a key to reset the manual
station lever and deactivate the alarm switch. (If the break-
* Refer to page 2 for specific model listings. This product has been approved by the rod is used, it must be replaced.)
California State Fire Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California Health
and Safety Code. See CSFM Listing 7150-0026:224 for allowable values and/or conditions Station testing is performed by physical activation of the
concerning material presented in this document. Additional listings may be applicable;
contact your local Simplex product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals pull lever. Electrical testing can be also performed by
under Simplex Time Recorder Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products. unlocking the station housing to activate the alarm switch.
S4099-0005-1 8/2016
Addressable Manual Station Product Selection
Addressable Manual Stations, Red Housing with White Letters and White Pull Lever
Model Description Housing Pull Lever Listings
4099-9004 Single Action, English FIRE ALARM PULL DOWN UL, ULC, FM, CSFM
4099-9004CB Single Action, Bilingual English and French FEU FIRE TIREZ PULL
ULC
4099-9004CF Single Action, French ALARME FEU ABAISSEZ
4099-9004PO Single Action, Portuguese FOGO ALARME PUXE
UL, FM
4099-9004SP Single Action, Spanish ALARMA FUEGO JALE
4099-9005 Double Action, Breakglass operation, English FIRE ALARM PULL DOWN UL, ULC, FM, CSFM
4099-9005PO Double Action, Breakglass operation, Portuguese FOGO ALARME PUXE
UL, FM
4099-9005SP Double Action, Breakglass operation, Spanish ALARMA FUEGO JALE
4099-9006 Double Action, Push operation, English FIRE ALARM PUSH PULL DOWN UL, ULC, FM, CSFM
4099-9006PO Double Action, Push operation, Portuguese FOGO ALARME EMPURRE PUXE
UL, FM
4099-9006SP Double Action, Push operation, Spanish ALARMA FUEGO EMPUJE JALE
4099-9021 Single Action NO GRIP operation, English FIRE ALARM PULL DOWN UL, ULC, FM, CSFM
Accessories (refer to pages 3 and 4 for details)
Model Description Model Description
2975-9022 Cast aluminum surface mount box, red 2099-9803 Replacement breakglass
2975-9178 Surface mount steel box, red 2099-9804 Replacement break-rod
Semi-flush trim plate for double gang switch Institutional cover kit for field installation on 4099-9004;
2099-9813 2099-9828
box, red Note: Covers LED indicator
2099-9819 Flush mount adapter kit, black 2099-9814 Surface trim plate for Wiremold box V5744-2, red
2099-9820 Flush mount adapter kit, beige 2099-9822 Replacement retaining clip for breakglass
Retrofit Kit for field conversion of a single action station to a NO GRIP station; refer to Installation Instructions
4099-9805
579-1007 for details
Specifications (refer to Installation Instructions 579-1135 for additional information)

Power and Communications IDNet or MAPNET II communications, 1 address per station
Address Means DIP switch, 8 position
Wire Connections Screw terminal for in/out wiring, for 18 to 14 AWG wire (0.82 mm2 to 2.08 mm2)
UL Listed Temperature Range 32° to 120° F (0° to 49° C) intended for indoor operation
Humidity Range Up to 93% RH at 100° F (38° F)
Housing Color Red with white raised lettering
Material Housing and pull lever are Lexan polycarbonate or equal
Pull Lever Color White with red raised lettering
Housing Dimensions 5” H x 3 ¾” W x 1” D (127 mm x 95 mm x 25 mm)
Addressable Manual Station Semi-Flush Mounting

4" Square Box Mount
4" (102 mm) square box, 2 1/8" (54 mm) minimum
depth, RACO #231 or equal (supplied by others)
Mount flush or with
1/16" (2 mm)
maximum extension
4" Square box
Single Gang Box Mount DO NOT RECESS
with cover plate
Single gang box, 2 1/2" deep
(64 mm), RACO #500 or equal
(supplied by others)
FIRE ALARM Station

side view
Single gang cover plate, 3/4"

PULL DOWN (19 mm) extension, RACO #773
or equal (supplied by others)
Single gang
box outline
LED Indicator
Wall surface
Semi-Flush Mount Side View
2 S4099-0005-1 8/2016
Addressable Manual Stations Surface Mounting
2975-9178 Box 2975-9022 Cast Box

Preferred Mounting. For surface 5-3/16" H x 4" W x 2-3/16" D 5" H x 3-7/8" W x 2-3/16" D
(132 mm x 102 mm x 56 mm) (127 mm x 98 mm x 56 mm)
mounting of these addressable (ordered separately) (ordered separately)
manual stations, the preferred
electrical boxes are shown in the
illustration to the right.
Additional Mounting
Reference. Refer to page 4 for Knockouts located
Wiremold box mounting top and bottom
compatibility.
FIR
FIRE ALARM
E
PULL DOWN
Access for 3/4" threaded
5" conduit located top and bottom
(127 mm)
1" (25.4 mm)
3-3/4" (95 mm)
4099 Series Addressable Manual Station
Surface Mount Side View with Internal Detail Application Reference

Refer to NFPA 72, the National Fire
Alarm and Signaling Code, and all
1-1/4" applicable local codes for complete
(32 mm) Simplex 2975-9178 box
Field wiring requirements for manual stations. The
(shown for reference)
(shown for reference) following summarizes the basic
requirements.
1. Stations shall be located in the
normal path of exit and distributed
Address setting under in the protected area such that they
resealable label (accessible are unobstructed and readily
with cover open)
accessible.
2-5/8"
(67 mm) 2. Mounting shall be with the
operable part not less than 42 in
Station cover (1.07 m) and not more than 48 in
hinges open for
(1.22 m) above floor level.
installation access
3. At least one station shall be
Switch wiring provided on each floor. Additional
(prewired)
stations shall be provided to obtain
a travel distance not more than
200 ft (61 m) to the nearest station
from any point in the building.
4. When manual station coverage
appears limited in any way,
additional stations should be
installed.
3 S4099-0005-1 8/2016
Addressable Manual Station, Additional Mounting Information
For retrofit and new installations,

additional compatible mounting Wiremold
boxes and the required adapter plates receptacle box
are shown in the illustration to the 2099-9814 Surface trim model V5744-2
for Wiremold box (supplied by
right. 5-1/8" H x 5" W others)
(130 mm x 127 mm)
Two gang switch box, each

3" H x 2" W x 2-3/4" D
(76 mm x 51 mm x 70 mm)
(supplied by others)
Addressable
station
2099-9813 Semi-flush trim for 2 gang

switch box, 6" H x 4-1/2" W
(152 mm x 114 mm)
Addressable Manual Station, Flush Mounting Information

Flush mount adapter kit
2099-9819, Black
2099-9820, Beige
Box must be recessed into wall

1" to 1-1/8" (25.4 mm to 29 mm)
8"
(203 mm)
Hole cutout must be a
minimum of 6" H by 5" W
6" (152 mm by 127 mm)
(152
mm)
4-11/16" (119 mm)

square box, 2-1/8"
(54 mm) minimum
Wall depth (by others)
4-3/4" (121 mm) surface
6-3/4" (171 mm)
Front View Side View
TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire
Alarm and Signaling Code are trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Lexan is a trademark of the General Electric Co. Wiremold is a trademark of
the Wiremold Company.

EQUIPMENT: FM-200® (UL/FM)
PUBLICATION: 14A-07H
ISSUE No. 02
DATE: 2010-03
FM-200® TOTAL FLOOD

FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS
ENGINEERED SYSTEM
DESIGN AND INSTALLATION MANUAL
(UL/FM VERSION)
© 2010 Macron Safety Systems (UK) Limited

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 CONTENTS
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION Manifold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Table 6: Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Table 6: Manifolds (Continued) . . . . . . . . 23
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Manifold Inlets (Sockets) . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Table 7: Manifold Inlets . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Construction of Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Table 8: Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Table 8: Manifolds (Continued) . . . . . . . . 26
Approvals and Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Manifold Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 27
FM-200®Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Flexible Pilot Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Manufactured Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Male Adaptors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Health and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Male Pilot Hose Connector . . . . . . . . . . 28
First Aid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Street Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Male Tee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
FM-200® Agent Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Male Elbow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Agent Physical Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Table 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Discharge Nozzle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Table 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Table 9: Discharge Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . 32
Table 3: Toxicology/Environmental . . . . . . 8
Door Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SECTION 2 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS Manual Release Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Liquid Level Measuring Device . . . . . . . . 34
System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Typical Manifold System . . . . . . . . . . . 35
FM-200® Container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Table 4: DOT Container details . . . . . . . . 10 SECTION 3 - SYSTEM DESIGN
Table 5: UL/TPEDContainer details. . . . . . 10
System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Table 4a: DOT Container - valve equivalent
Hazard Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Hazard Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Table 5a: UL/TPEDContainer - valve equivalent
Hazard Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Container Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Hazard Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Valve Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Hazard Fuels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Principle of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Personnel Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Burst Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Agent Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Low Pressure Switch (Standard Open On Fall) 14
Agent Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Low Pressure Switch (Special Close On Fall) 14
Manifolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Low Pressure Switch (Alternate - Transfer On
Agent Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fall - Option #1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Low Pressure Switch (Alternate - Transfer On Agent Flow Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Fall - Option #1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Nitrogen Superpressurisation . . . . . . . . . 40
Fixing Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Flow in Pipe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Manual Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Initial Vapour Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Pneumatic Actuator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Trailing Vapour Pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Removable Electrical Actuator (Suppression Nozzle Selection and Location. . . . . . . . . 40
Diode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Maximum Limits (Elevation) in Pipe Work. . 41
Removable Electrical Actuator (Bridge Rectifier) Nozzle Discharge Radius . . . . . . . . . . . 42
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Example: Nozzle Selection. . . . . . . . . . . 42
25 mm (1") and 50 mm (2") Flexible Discharge System Design Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Example: Tee Split Designs . . . . . . . . . . 43
80 mm (3") Discharge Hose/Check Valve
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Design Example - Calculations . . . . . . . . . . 44
80 mm (3") Discharge Hose . . . . . . . . . . 20 Example: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
80 mm (3") Valve Single Tank Adaptors . . . 21 Piping Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Manifold Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2
ISSUE No. 02
CONTENTS DATE: 2010-03
SECTION 4 - FLOW CALCULATIONS Hand-over Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 SECTION 6 - INTEGRITY TESTING

Table 10: FM-200® Weight Calculations Metric
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 11: FM-200® Weight Calculations Principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Imperial. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Table 12: Altitude Correction Factor . . . . . 48 Equivalent Leakage Area (ELA) . . . . . . . . . 67
FM-200® Equation Calculations . . . . . . . . . 49 Below Ceiling Leakage Area (BCLA) . . . . . . 67
Engineered Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Predicting Retention Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Slab to Slab Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 13 : Max. & Min. Flow Rates. . . . . . 49
Table 14 : Equivalent Length for Pipe Fittings 50 Coordination and Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Table 15 : Equivalent Length for other system Integrity Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Enclosure Evaluation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
SECTION 5 - INSTALLATION
Leakage Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SECTION 7 - SYSTEM OPERATION
Container Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Single Container Installation . . . . . . . . . . . 52 General Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 16: Bracket Fixing Heights . . . . . . . 53 System Detection and Actuation . . . . . . . . . 70
Multiple Container Installation . . . . . . . . . . 54 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Manifold Bracket Installation . . . . . . . . . 54 Manual System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Table 17: Manifold Bracket Fixing Heights. . 55 Fully Automatic System . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fully Automatic System with Manual Inter-
Pipe Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 vention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 18: UK Steel Pipework Requirements . 56
Table 19: UK Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Conditions During a Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 20: US Steel Pipe Requirements . . . . 57 FM-200® Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Table 21: US Fittings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 FM-200® Decomposition. . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Pipe Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 FM-200® Discharge Conditions . . . . . . . . 71
Table 22: Hanger Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Actions Following a Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Earthing and Electrical Clearance. . . . . . . . . 58 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Table 23: Safety Clearances. . . . . . . . . . . 58 Actions Immediately Following a Fire . . . . 72
Nozzles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 SECTION 8 - MAINTENANCE

Actuation Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Single Container Actuation . . . . . . . . . . 59
User’s Programme of Inspection . . . . . . . . . 73
Multiple Container Actuation . . . . . . . . . 61
Contract Service and Maintenance . . . . . . . . 74
Ancillary Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Discharge Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Mechanical Servicing Procedure . . . . . . . . . 77
Discharge Pressure Switch (Continued) . . . . 64
Specialised Maintenance Duties . . . . . . . . . 77
Low Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Finally. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Door Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Manual Release Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Completion Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Pre-checks and Visual Inspections. . . . . . . 65
Final Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
© 2010 Macron Safety Systems (UK) Limited 3

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 CONTENTS
SECTION 9 - RECHARGING PROCEDURE
Recharging (O.E.M Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Valve Refurbishment (O.E.M Only). . . . . . 78
Testing (O.E.M Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Replacing Valve Assembly to container. . . . 81
Field Installing Liquid Level Measuring Device
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Table 24 :Fill Tolerance Table. . . . . . . . . 83
Table 25: Temperature Correction Chart. . . . 84
Container / Valve Assy leakage Test . . . . . 85
Container Leak Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
SECTION 10 - WARRANTY, DISCLAIMERS &

LIMITATIONS
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Disclaimers and Limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . 86
SECTION 11 - APPENDICES
APPENDIX A - Temperature Correction Chart
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
APPENDIX B - Hughes Program Printout . . 89
APPENDIX C - FM-200® Material Safety Data
Sheet (MSDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
APPENDIX D - FM-200® Liquid Level
Indicator Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
APPENDIX E - Dual Supply System
Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Table 26: Primary and Secondary Supply System
Components.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
4
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION DATE: 2010-03
About this Manual Introduction 13.6.6 ítem 1

This manual is a comprehensive guide that contains all FM-200® is a clean, safe fire fighting agent for use in total
the information necessary to design, install and maintain flooding automatic extinguishing systems. It is intended
the FM-200® Engineered Extinguishing system. However as a long term replacement for Halon 1301 and, whilst
the manual does not address information relating to fire maintaining the excellent fire suppression properties of
detection. Halon, has none of the environmental problems. Storage
and distribution requirements are similar to Halon and the
Users of this manual are assumed to be competent majority of system components are identical. However,
fire engineers with a basic knowledge of such systems. FM-200® is not a direct replacement for existing Halon
The contents are arranged in a logical order describing the 1301 installations due to the difference in agent quantity
various procedures in turn, alternatively specific sections and discharge characteristics. The minimum FM-200®
can be referred to as required. Users who are not familiar design concentration for Class A hazards is 6.4% for UL
with the equipment should first read the complete Listed systems or 7.17% for FM Approved systems, and
manual. for Class B hazard is at least 9.0%.
13.6.6 ítem 3 The US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

accepts use in normally occupied areas where the
Definitions concentration doesn't exceed 9%. The safe use criteria has
further been confirmed by the Halon Alternative Group
FM-200® ®
FM-200 is a registered trade mark of (HAG) report. Refer to NFPA 2001, 2008 edition “Clean
the Du Pont. Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems,” Section 1-5 “Safety,”
for additional exposure requirements.
System In this manual ‘system’ refers to the The systems described in this manual are ‘engineered’.
extinguishing equipment and does not Engineered systems for example, may consist of several
include any detection system which FM-200® containers, modularised or manifolded together
may initiate an agent release. and connected via a pipe network to a number of discharge
nozzles.
Engineered Hydraulic flow program used to Systems may be activated mechanically or electrically.
predict the two phase flow of Mechanical manual actuation is via a manual actuator
FM-200® through a pipe network. attached to the container valve. Electrical actuation is
via a removable side mounted solenoidor a top mounted
electrical actuator. Actuation can occur automatically via
Contacts a signal from a detection and alarm control panel.
Should any part of this manual not be understood, or there Users of this manual should find that sufficient
are any queries concerning a system, please contact: information is provided to plan, design, purchase
components, install, operate and maintain the system.
Macron Safety Systems (UK) Limited However, in the event that part of the document is not
Burlingham House understood, or if there is any concern as to the suitability
Hewett Road of the protection, do not hesitate to contact one of our
Gapton Hall Industrial Estate specialist engineers for the matter to be quickly resolved.
Great Yarmouth
Norfolk Approvals and Standards
NR31 0NN
The manufactured equipment and the FM-200® agent
England
have comprehensive approvals and listings providing
further support to the overall product.
Tel. (+44) (0)1493 417600
Fax. (+44) (0)1493 417700

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION
FM-200® Agent 13.6.6 ítem 5 Therefore, exposure to FM-200® at the design

concentration of 7.17%*, and up to 9.0%, is not hazardous
Approvals include, but are not limited to: to health. Exposure to higher concentrations is permissible
• FM Approved for limited periods. Refer to NFPA 2001, 2008 edition
Section 1-5 “Safety,” for exposure requirements. As with
• Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) Recognised
halons, the US EPA and the National Fire Protection
Component
Association (NFPA) recommend that unnecessary
• NFPA 2001 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems exposure to any agent be avoided and that personnel
(Listed Alternative) evacuate protected areas as quickly as possible to avoid
the decomposition products of the fire.
• US EPA SNAP Rpt. (Unrestricted Listed Alternative)
• Australian Industrial Chemicals Notification FM-200® can decompose at high temperatures to form
(Approved) halogen acids. If so, their presence is readily detected as
a sharp, pungent odour long before hazardous maximum
• German Institute for Environmental Hygiene and exposure levels are reached. Fire toxicity studies conclude
Medicine (Approved) that generally decomposition products from the fire itself,
especially carbon monoxide, smoke, heat, and oxygen
Manufactured Systems depletion, create a greater hazard.
• Underwriters Laboratories Inc. The noise created by the FM-200® agent discharging
can be loud enough to startle people in the vicinity, but is
• Loss Prevention Certification Board
unlikely to cause any permanent injury. Turbulence caused
• Factory Mutual (FM) by the high velocity discharge can dislodge substantial
objects directly in its path, and cause enough general
FM-200® systems are manufactured in strict accordance turbulence within the protected area to move paper and
with the internationally recognised Quality assurance light objects.
Standard, BS EN IS0 9000 and approved to ISO 9001.
FM-200® Extinguishing System units are to be designed, Direct contact with the vaporising liquid discharged
installed, inspected, maintained, tested and recharged from an FM-200® nozzle has a chilling effect on objects
by qualified, trained personnel in accordance with The and in extreme cases can cause frostbite to the skin. The
Standard on Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems, liquid phase vaporises rapidly when mixed with air and
NFPA2001, 2008 edition and to be used in accordance therefore limits the risk to the immediate vicinity of the
with Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Significant nozzle. Minor reduction in visibility may occur for a brief
New Alternatives Program (SNAP). Where determined period due to the condensation of water vapour.
to be appropriate by the authority having jurisdiction, HMIS: 2-0-0/heptafloropropane/contents under
other applicable standards may additionally be utilised to pressure. 0-0-0/nitrogen expellant gas/very cold, contents
specific system requirements for these purposes. under pressure.
Health and Safety Consult: DuPont de Nemours (Nederland) B.V.,

Baanhoekweg 22, NL-3313 LA Dordrecht, The
A properly designed and installed extinguishing system
Netherlands.
should not present any significant health or safety
problems, however, there are basic precautions to be taken Emergency phone number: +44 (0)8456 006640.
to avoid accidents, and aspects of the system operation that
should be understood. End-users often require reassurance
regarding the safety of personnel, and this can only be
WARNING
given if a thorough understanding of the properties of the The discharge of clean agent systems to extinguish
a fire can result in a potential hazard to personnel
agent and its effects in different situations are known. Best
from the natural form of the clean agent or from the
practice should be observed.
products of combustion that results from exposure
FM-200® extinguishes primarily through heat of the agent to the fire or hot surfaces. Unnecessary
absorption, and does not sufficiently deplete oxygen exposure of personnel either to the natural agent or
levels. to the products of decomposition shall be avoided.
* UL Design Concentration - See Page 5
6
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION DATE: 2010-03
First Aid The present understanding of the functioning of

FM-200® is that 80% of its fire fighting effectiveness is
Refer to the FM-200® Material Safety Data Sheet within achieved through heat absorption and 20% through direct
Appendix C. chemical means (action of the fluorine radical on the chain
reaction of a flame). Complete suppression using FM-
FM-200® Agent Characteristics 200® has the following advantages:
FM-200® (HFC-227ea) is a clean agent containing no
particles or oily residues. It is produced under ISO 9002 • Less visual obscurity and minimal risk to
guidelines to strict manufacturing specifications ensuring personnel.
product purity. FM-200® leaves no residue or oily deposits
on delicate electronic equipment, and can be removed • Low toxicity.
from the protected space by ventilation. • Most effective when used with automatic detection to
®
FM-200 is thermally and chemically stable, introduce FM-200® with a 10 second discharge.
but without the extremely long atmospheric lifetimes • The ability to prevent re-ignition providing
associated with some other clean agents. The atmospheric concentration levels are maintained.
lifetime of FM-200® has been determined to be 36.5 years.
The US EPA SNAP does not consider FM-200® to be a FM-200® is stored as a liquified compressed gas and is
long lived substance when discharged, and as such has discharged into the protected area as a vapour. It is stored
placed no restrictions on its use. (Environmental Protection in approved DOT or TPED containers and is super-
Agency’s Significant New Alternatives Program). pressurised with dry nitrogen to 25 bar @ 21 °C (360 psi
@ 70 °F).
Typical areas that may be protected by an FM-
200® system are detailed below; the list is by no means
exhaustive: WARNING
Bank Vaults FM-200® shall not be used on fires involving the
Libraries following materials unless they have been tested to
Rare Book Stores the satisfaction of the authority having jurisdiction:
Electronic Data Processing
Telephone Exchanges • Certain chemicals or mixtures of chemicals, such
as cellulose nitrate and gunpowder, that are capable
Studios
of rapid oxidation in the absence of air.
Communication Centres
Transformer and Switchrooms • Reactive metals such as lithium, sodium,
Control Rooms potassium, magnesium, titanium, zirconium,
Test Laboratories uranium and plutonium.
Flammable Liquid Stores
• Metal hydrides.
• Chemicals capable of undergoing autothermal

decomposition, such as certain organic peroxidase
and hydrazine.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION
Agent Physical Properties
Table 1.
Agent Physical Properties HFC-227ea
Chemical structure CF3CHFCF3
Chemical name Heptafluoropropane
Molecular weight 170
Boiling point -16.40 °C (2.4°F)
Freezing point -131 °C (-204 °F)
Critical temperature 101.7 °C (214 °F)
Critical pressure 2912 kPa (424 psi)
274 cc/mole
Critical volume
(0.0280 ft3/lbm.)
Critical density 621 kg/m3 (35.77lbm./ft3)
Saturated vapour density
31.18 kg/m3 (1.95 lb./ft3)
@20 °C (68 °F)
(Reference: NFPA 2001, 2008 edition)
Table 2.
Agent Physical Properties

Chemical structure N2
Chemical name Nitrogen
Molecular weight 28.0
Boiling point -195.80 °C (-320.4 °F)
Freezing point -210.00 °C (-346 °F)
Critical temperature -146.90 °C (-232.4 °F)
Critical pressure 3399 kPa (492.9 psi)
Table 3: Toxicology/Environmental
FM-200®
Environmental
Ozone Depletion (ODP) 0
Atmospheric Lifetime (yrs) 36.5
Toxicology
Acute Exposure LC50 >80%
Cardiac Sensitization
9.0%
No Observed Adverse Effect Level (NOAEL)
Lowest Observed Adverse Effect Level (LOAEL) 10.5%
(Reference: NFPA 2001, 2008 edition)
8
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 2 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS DATE: 2010-03
System Components Technical Information
This section describes the individual components that The 4.5, 8, 16, 32, 52, 106, 147 and 180 litre containers
comprise a complete system. Some items are optional are manufactured in accordance with DOT 4BW500
depending on the application, and are indicated as such. or 4BW450, the 343 litre container in accordance with
DOT 4BW450 and the 40, 67.5 and 80 litre containers in
FM-200® Container accordance with DOT 3AA 580.
The container assembly consists of a container fitted
with a valve and internal syphon tube, factory filled with Material: Carbon Steel
FM-200®, and super-pressurised with dry nitrogen to 4BW500
25 bar @ 21 °C (360 psi @ 70 °F). Containers sharing the Hydraulic test pressure: 69.0 bar (1000 psi)
same manifold shall be equal in size and fill density. Working Pressure: 34.5 bar (500 psi)
Containers are finished in red and are available in various
4BW450
sizes. A nameplate is fixed to the container displaying
Hydraulic test pressure: 62.1 bar (900 psi)
the agent weight, tare weight, gross weight, fill density,
Working Pressure: 31.0 bar (450 psi)
charge date and fill location.
3AA580
Figure 1 - FM-200® Container Working Pressure: 40.0 bar (580 psi)
Paint Specification: Red epoxy polyester or
red polyester powder
coated
The 8, 16, 32, 52, 106 and 147 litre containers are
also available manufactured in accordance with EN
13322-1.
Material: Carbon Steel

Working Pressure: 34.5 bar (500 psi)
Paint Specification: Red epoxy polyester or
red polyester powder
coated

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 2 - SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Table 4: DOT Container details.

Height from Nominal
Minimum and Valve
Part No. floor to outlet Diameter Tare
Maximum Fills Size
(nominal) Weight
(Nominal Volume) kg (lbs) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) kg (lbs)
303.205.026 (4.5 litre) 2.3 to 4.5 (5 to 10) 25 (1”) 280 (11”) 178 (7”) 7.7 (17)
303.205.015 (8 litre) 4.0 to 8.0 (9 to 18) 25 (1”) 304 (12”) 254 (10”) 14.8 (32.6)
303.205.016 (16 litre) 8.0 to 16.0 (18 to 35) 25 (1”) 502 (19.8”) 254 (10”) 18.4 (40.6)
303.205.017 (32 litre) 16.0 to 32.0 (35 to 71) 25 (1”) 833 (32.8”) 254 (10”) 26.1 (57.5)
303.205.030 (40 litre) * 20.0 to 40.0 (44 to 88) 50 (2”) 1352 (53.2”) 227.2 (9”) 52.2 (115)
303.205.018 (52 litre) 26.0 to 52.0 (58 to 115) 50 (2”) 596 (23.5”) 406 (16”) 49.1 (108.3)
303.205.031 (67.5 litre) * 33.8 to 67.5 (75 to 149) 50 (2”) 1526 (60”) 265 (10.4”) 81.6 (180)
303.205.032 (80 litre) * 40.0 to 80.0 (88 to 176) 50 (2”) 1685 (66.3”) 276 (11”) 95.3 (210)
303.205.019 (106 litre) 53.0 to 106.0 (117 to 234) 50 (2”) 1021 (40.2”) 406 (16”) 71.8 (158.3)
303.205.020 (147 litre) 73.5 to 147.0 (162 to 324) 50 (2”) 1354 (53.3”) 406 (16”) 89.9 (198.2)
303.205.021 (180 litre) 90.0 to 180.0 (198 to 397) 50 (2”) 1634 (64.3”) 406 (16”) 105.8 (233.2)
303.205.022 (343 litre) 171.5 to 343 (378 to 756) 80 (3”) 1466 (57.7”) 610 (24”) 207 (456)
* For UL Listed Systems Only (Not FM Approved)
Table 5: TPED Container details.

Height from Nominal
Minimum and Valve
Part No. floor to outlet Diameter Tare
Maximum Fills Size
(nominal) Weight
(Nominal Volume) kg (lbs) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in) kg (lbs)
303.205.045 (8 litre) 4.0 to 8.0 (9 to 18) 25 (1”) 304 (12”) 254 (10”) 17.4 (38.4)
303.205.046 (16 litre) 8.0 to 16.0 (18 to 35) 25 (1”) 502 (19.8”) 254 (10”) 23.4 (51.6)
303.205.047 (32 litre) 16.0 to 32.0 (35 to 71) 25 (1”) 833 (32.8”) 254 (10”) 27.5 (60.6)
303.205.048 (52 litre) 26.0 to 52.0 (58 to 115) 50 (2”) 596 (23.5”) 406 (16”) 68.7 (151.5)
303.205.049 (106 litre) 53.0 to 106.0 (117 to 234) 50 (2”) 1021 (40.2”) 406 (16”) 88.8 (195.8)
303.205.050 (147 litre) 73.5 to 147.0 (162 to 324) 50 (2”) 1354 (53.3”) 406 (16”) 108.8 (239.9)
Table 4a: DOT Container - valve Table 5a: TPED Container - valve
equivalent lengths. equivalent lengths.
Part No. Equivalent Lengths Part No. Equivalent Lengths
(Nominal Volume) (m) (Nominal Volume) (m)
303.205.026 (4.5 litre) 6.096 303.205.045 (8 litre) 6.096
303.205.015 (8 litre) 6.096 303.205.046 (16 litre) 6.096
303.205.016 (16 litre) 6.096 303.205.047 (32 litre) 6.096
303.205.017 (32 litre) 6.096 303.205.048 (52 litre) 10.668
303.205.030 (40 litre) 10.668 303.205.049 (106 litre) 10.668
303.205.018 (52 litre) 10.668 303.205.050 (147 litre) 10.668
303.205.031 (67.5 litre) 10.668
303.205.032 (80 litre) 10.668
303.205.019 (106 litre) 10.668
303.205.020 (147 litre) 10.668
303.205.021 (180 litre) 10.668
303.205.022 (343 litre) 25.91
10
ISSUE No. 02
Container Label Technical Information

®
The container label details the weight of FM-200 Material: Aluminum
contained, empty weight, fill density and charge date.
Once the label is applied to the container surface, and to Adhesive: Pre-applied 3M adhesive 9485
avoid possible tampering it can not be removed intact.
Certification: UL Recognised
Overall Size: 241.3 mm x 165.1 mm (9.5” x 6.5”)

(Part No. 314.205.021)
(Part No. 314.205.045)*
558 mm x 50.8 mm (22” x 2”)
(Part No. 314.205.022)
(Part No. 314.205.046)*
Weight: 0.0416 kg (0.092 lbs)
(Part No. 314.205.021)
(Part No. 314.205.045)*
0.0300 kg (0.066 lbs)
(Part No. 314.205.022)
(Part No. 314.205.046)*
Figure 2 - Container Label (Part No. 314.205.021 Shown)
INSPECTION OF EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

WARNING
MONTHLY INSPECTION
- EXAMINE PIPING AND NOZZLES TO MAKE CERTAIN
THEY ARE UNOBSTRUCTED
THE DISCHARGE OF CLEAN AGENT
- CHECK CONTAINER PRESSURE IF LOSS EXCEEDS 10%
(WHEN ADJUSTED FOR TEMPERATURE), REFILL OR
SYSTEMS TO EXTINGUISH A FIRE
REPLACE CONTAINER. CAN RESULT IN A POTENTIAL
6-MONTHLY INSPECTION HAZARD TO PERSONNEL FROM
- CHECK AGENT QUANTITY AND PRESSURE. REFILL OR
REPLACE IF A LOSS IN AGENT QUANTITY OF MORE THE NATURAL FORM OF THE CLEAN
THAN 5% OR A LOSS IN PRESSURE (ADJUSTED FOR
TEMPERATURE) OF MORE THAN 10% IS DETERMINED. AGENT OR FROM THE PRODUCTS
REFER TO ENGINEERED SYSTEM INSTALLATION OF COMBUSTION THAT RESULT
MANUAL, PART NO. 14a-07H, (AVAILABLE FROM
MACRON), AND NFPA 2001, FOR ADDITIONAL FROM EXPOSURE OF THE AGENT
INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS.
TO THE FIRE OR HOT SURFACES.
THIS SYSTEM IS MADE UP OF UNITS TESTED WITHIN 1S66
LIMITATIONS CONTAINED IN THE DETAILED
RECYCLING PROTECTS THE ENVIRONMENT UNNECESSARY EXPOSURE OF
INSTRUCTION MANUAL. CLEAN AGENT DO NOT DISPOSE. DISCHARGE ONLY IN CASE OF FIRE. IF
FIRE EXTINGUISHING CONTAINER CONTENTS MUST BE REMOVED FOR SERVICE. PERSONNEL EITHER TO THE
THIS SYSTEM SHOULD BE PERIODICALLY INSPECTED SYSTEM UNIT MAINTENANCE OR DISMANTLING OF THE CLEAN AGENT
BY TRAINED PERSONNEL. THE SYSTEM DESIGNER NATURAL AGENT OR TO THE
MUST BE CONSULTED WHENEVER CHANGES ARE SYSTEM - PRIOR TO REMOVAL, CONTACT YOUR LOCAL
PLANNED FOR THE SYSTEM OR AREA OF PROTECTION. INSTALLER OR MANUFACTURER FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON PRODUCTS OF DECOMPOSITION
HANDLING EQUIPMENT AND ON RECLAIMING OR RECYCLING
CAUTION SHALL BE AVOIDED.
CLEAN AGENT.
UNCONTROLLED VALVE OPERATION COULD RESULT IN
SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH TO OPERATORS OR DO NOT COVER, REMOVE OR DEFACE THIS LABEL
CONTACT MACRON IMMEDIATELY
BYSTANDERS, ENSURE SAFETY OUTLET CAP IS IN
PLACE IF CONTAINER IS DISCONNECTED FROM PIPE
AFTER A DISCHARGE OR FIRE
WORK. CONTAINERS SHOULD NOT BE POSITIONED IN FM-200® HMIS 2-0-0/HEPTAFLUOROPROPANE / SEE WARNINGS ON CONSULT DUPONT DE NEMOURS (NEDERLAND) B.V., BAHNHOEKWEG 22,
DIRECT SUNLIGHT. PRODUCT LABEL / CONTENTS UNDER PRESSURE. NITROGEN EXPELLENT NL-3313 LA DORDRECHT, THE NETHERLANDS. +31-78-630-1011 FOR SITUATION.
GAS HMIS 0-0-0 / VERY COLD DISCHARGE. CONTENTS UNDER HIGH MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEET.
PRESSURE.
THIS CONTAINER IS FILLED WITH THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE IS ON THE CONTAINER

FM-200® (HEPTAFLUOROPROPANE) AND IS SUPERPRESSURIZED
TO 25 BAR (360 PSI)
SUITABLE FOR USE IN AMBIENT TEMPERATURES OF
AT 21°C (70°F) WITH DRY NITROGEN
0°C TO 54°C (32°F TO +130°F)
PART NO.:
AGENT WEIGHT: KG (lb) 16, 32 AND 52 LITRE CONTAINERS
TARE WEIGHT: KG (lb) MUST BE TRANSPORTED AND STORED
Macron Safety Systems (UK) Ltd., IN THE VERTICAL POSITION
GROSS WEIGHT: KG (lb)
Burlingham House,
FILL DENSITY: KG/L (lb/ft3) Gapton Hall Industrial Estate,
Great Yarmouth, Norfolk, NR31 0NN FACTORY TESTED TWICE
CHARGE DATE: Tel no. +44 (0)1493 417600 DOT SERVICE PRESSURE
FILL LOCATION: Fax no. +44 (0)1493 417700 STAMPED ON THE CONTAINER

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Valve Assembly Technical Information

The container valve is the result of extensive research and
development and incorporates many unique safety features. 25 mm (1”) Valve
The valve assembly is factory-fitted to the container and is Body Material: Brass CZ 121
supplied pre-assembled with a low pressure switch (to be Outlet Anti-Recoil Cap CZ122
ordered seperately), pressure gauge and burst disc. Material:
Max. Working Pressure: 34 bar (493 psi)
Outlet: 25mm (1” BSPP)
Figure 3 - Valve Assembly Low Pressure Switch Port: 1/8” NPT
Gauge Port: 1/8” NPT
Pilot Pressure Port: 1/4” BSPP
Solenoid Adaptor Port: 1/8” NPT
Overall Size: 130mm (L) x 62mm (Dia)
(5.12” (L) x 2.44” (Dia))
Weight: 2.96 kg (6.526 lbs)
Equivalent Length: 6.096 m (20 ft)
50 mm (2”) Valve
Body Material: Brass CZ 121
Outlet Anti-Recoil Cap CZ122
Material:
Outlet: 50mm (2”BSPP)
Low Pressure Switch Port: 1/8” NPT
Pilot Pressure Port: 1/4” BSPP
25 mm (1”) Valve Assembly Solenoid Adaptor Port: 1/8” NPT
Part No. 302.209.001 Overall Size: 173mm (L) x 100mm (Dia)
(6.12” (L) x 3.94” (Dia))
50 mm (2”) Valve Assembly
Weight: 9.18 kg (20.238 lbs)
Part No. 302.209.002
80 mm (3”) Valve Assembly
Part No. 302.205.002 80 mm (3”)Valve
Material: Brass UNS36000
Outlet: 80mm (3” Flared*)
Low Pressure Switch Port: 1/8” NPT
Pilot Pressure Port: 1/4” NPT
Solenoid Adaptor Port: None
Overall Size: 241mm (L) x 129mm (Dia)
(9.50” (L) x 5.06” (Dia))
Weight: 18.82 kg (41.491 lbs)
*Outlet adaptors are available for 3” NPT, BSP and grooved.
12
ISSUE No. 02
Principle of Operation Burst Disc

The FM-200® valve is a high-flow-rate device specially A burst disc is factory fitted to every valve assembly. It
designed for use in fire systems. Operation is by means of is designed to rupture when the container becomes over
a pressure-differential piston. Container pressure is used pressurised when subjected to temperatures above the
within the valve to create a positive force on the piston, designed storage temperature of the container.
sealing the valve closed. Operation of the valve occurs
when the upper chamber is vented faster than the ‘make Figure 4 - Burst Disc
up device’ in the shuttle can replace the pressure. Thereby
allowing, the shuttle to be forced up, and free flow of FM-
200® from the valve. Upper chamber pressure is released
by the electrical, mechanical or pneumatic actuator.
The valve incorporates the following features:

• A pressure operated safety release device (burst disc).
• Main outlet, fitted with anti-recoil cap.
• A connection for a pneumatic, mechanical or
electrical actuator, fitted with safety cap.
• A connection for an electrical solenoid.
Burst Disc for 25 mm (1”) Valve
• A connection for the pneumatic actuation port. Part No. 20915

Part No. 20915

Part No. 15330
Technical Information
25 mm (1”) Valve & 50 mm (2”) Valve

Body: Brass CZ 121
Rating: 53.4 bar (774.5 psi) @ 50 °C (122 °F)
Thread: M18 x 1.00
Hole Orientation: 90° to Body
Torque: 35 Nm (25.8 Ibs.ft)
Overall Size : 20mm (L) x 18mm (Dia)
(0.79” (L) x 0.71” (Dia))
Weight: 0.028 kg (0.062 lbs)
80 mm (3”)Valve
Body: Brass UNS-C36000
Rating: 52 bar (760 psi) @ 50 °C (122 °F)
Thread: 0.9375-16UN-3A
Hole Orientation: 90° to Body
Torque: 68 Nm (50 Ibs.ft)
Overall Size : 33.3mm (L) x 18mm (Dia)
(1.3125” (L) x 0.71” (Dia))
Weight: 0.088 kg (0.195 lbs)

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Low Pressure Switch Low Pressure Switch

(Standard Open On Fall) (Special Close On Fall)
A low pressure warning switch is fitted to every container A low pressure warning switch is fitted to every container
and must be ordered seperately. The device continuously and must be ordered seperately. The device continuously
monitors the container pressure and in the event of the monitors the container pressure and in the event of the
pressure dropping below 20 bar (290 psi) the switch pressure dropping below 20 bar (290 psi) the switch
operates to enable the condition to be signalled to a control operates to enable the condition to be signalled to a control
unit. unit.
Figure 5 - Low Pressure Switch (Part No. 304.205.006) Figure 6 - Low Pressure Switch (Part No. 305.209.005)
Technical Information Technical Information

Body: Hermetically sealed Body: Hermetically sealed
Stainless Steel Stainless Steel
Switch Type: Normally Open at Atmospheric Switch Type: Normally Closed at Atmospheric
Pressure Pressure
Switch Point: Open on Fall at 20 bar (290 psi) Switch Point: Close on Fall at 20 bar (290 psi)
Close on Rise at 24.1 bar (350 psi) Open on Rise at 24.1 bar (350 psi)
Tolerance: +/-0.7 bar (± 10 psi) Tolerance: +/-0.7 bar (± 10 psi)
Proof Pressure: 345 bar (5003 psi) Proof Pressure: 345 bar (5003 psi)
Electrical Housing: Epoxy Sealed terminals Electrical Housing: Epoxy Sealed terminals
Connection: Brass 1/8” NPT Connection: Brass 1/8” NPT
Max. Current: 2.9 A Max. Current: 2.9 A
Voltage Range: 5-28 v dc Voltage Range: 5-28 v dc
Electrical Connection: 0.9m (3ft) x 2 Core Cable Electrical Connection: 0.9m (3ft) x 2 Core Cable
Certification: UL Recognised Certification: UL Recognised
IP Rating: IP65 IP Rating: IP65
Wire Leads: 1.82 m (6 ft) Wire Leads: 1.82 m (6 ft)
Overall Size: 38mm (L) x 16mm (Dia) Overall Size: 38mm (L) x 16mm (Dia)
(1.50” (L) x 0.63” (Dia)) (1.50” (L) x 0.63” (Dia))
Weight: 0.087 kg (0.192 lbs) Weight: 0.087 kg (0.192 lbs)
14
ISSUE No. 02
Low Pressure Switch Low Pressure Switch

(Alternate - Transfer On Fall - Option #1) (Alternate - Transfer On Fall - Option #2)
A low pressure warning switch is fitted to every container A low pressure warning switch is fitted to every container
and must be ordered seperately. The device continuously and must be ordered seperately. The device continuously
monitors the container pressure and in the event of the monitors the container pressure and in the event of the
pressure dropping below 20.3 bar (294 psi) the switch pressure dropping below 20 bar (290 psi) the switch
operates to enable the condition to be signalled to a control operates to enable the condition to be signalled to a control
unit. unit.
This low pressure switch is the primary supply, (option This low pressure switch is the secondary supply, (option
#1), of a dual source component used in order to maintain #2), of a dual source component used in order to maintain
the supply chain and ensure that adequate stock levels are the supply chain and ensure that adequate stock levels are
available to fully support customers and installers. available to fully support customers and installers.
Figure 7 - Alternate Low Pressure Switch (Part No. 305.209.007) Figure 8 - Alternate Low Pressure Switch (Part No. 305.209.007)
Option #1 Option #2

Body: Zinc Plated Steel and Kapton Body: Brass and Anodised Aluminium
Switch Type: Single Pole, Double Throw (SPDT) Switch Type: Single Pole, Double Throw (SPDT)
Switch Point: Transfers on Fall at 20.3 bar (294 psi) Switch Point: Transfers on Fall at 20 bar (290 psi)
Resets on Rise at 24.1 bar (350 psi) Resets on Rise at 22.8 bar (330 psi)
Tolerance: +/-0.7 bar (± 10 psi) Tolerance: +/-1.0 bar (± 15 psi)
Proof Pressure: 206.8 bar (3000 psi) Proof Pressure: 413.7 bar (6000 psi)
Contact Reset Method: Auto Resetting Contacts Contact Reset Method: Auto Resetting Contacts
Connection: 1/8” NPT Male Connection: 1/8” NPT Male
Electrical Rating: 5 A at 24 v dc (Resistive) Electrical Rating: 5 A at 24 v dc (Resistive)
Electrical Connection: DIN 43650A Connector with Electrical Connection: DIN 43650A Connector with
1/2” NPT Female Conduit Connection 1/2” NPT Female Conduit Connection
IP Rating: IP65 IP Rating: IP65
(4.10” (L) x 1.12” (Dia)) (4.40” (L) x 1.25” (Dia))

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Fixing Brackets Technical Information
The bracket assembly consists of one back channel and a Material: Mild Steel
nut and bolt with two bracket half straps. To securely hold Coating: Black Polyethylene powder-Plascoat LDPE
the container in position during the system discharge, two Mounting: Unistrut Channel
bracket assemblies are required per container. The only Weight: 0.34 kg (0.75 lbs) (Part No. 311.205.020)
exceptions are the 4.5 and 8 litre containers which only 0.30 kg (0.66 lbs) (Part No. 311.205.013)
require one. 0.46 kg (1.01 lbs) (Part No. 311.205.014)
0.28 kg (0.62 lbs) (Part No. 311.205.021)
Each strap is notched for insertion into the back channel 0.30 kg (0.66 lbs) (Part No. 311.205.017)
allowing the container to be properly aligned. The bracket 0.34 kg (0.75 lbs) (Part No. 311.205.018)
assembly is designed to be mounted to a rigid vertical 0.71 kg (1.56 lbs) (Part No. 311.205.019)
surface with the container assembly resting fully on the
floor.
Figure 9 - Fixing Bracket (Strap Style) Length of Back
Part Number Container Size
Channel
mm (in)
311.205.020 4.5 litre 400 (15.75”)
178 mm dia. (7”)
311.205.013 8, 16, 32 litre 500 (19.69”)

254 mm dia. (10”)
311.205.014 52, 106, 147, 180 litre 600 (23.6”)

406 mm dia. (16”)
311.205.021* 40 litre (Seamless) 400 (15.75”)

227 mm dia. (9”)
311.205.017* 67.5 litre (Seamless) 400 (15.75”)

265 mm dia. (10.4”)
311.205.018* 80 litre (Seamless) 400 (15.75”)

276 mm dia. (11”)
311.205.019 343 litre 693 (27.3”)

610 mm dia. (24”)
16
ISSUE No. 02
Manual Actuator Pneumatic Actuator

The manual actuator is used to mechanically operate the The pneumatic actuator is used to pneumatically operate
system at the container position and is fitted to the top the system at the container position and is fitted to the top
of the valve assembly or removable electrical actuator. of the valve assembly or removable electrical actuator.
Inadvertent operation is prevented by a safety clip which Pressure from a ‘master’ container is used to actuate the
has to be removed before activation. valve, via small bore piping or a flexible hose.
Figure 10 - Manual Actuator (Part No. 304.209.002) Figure 11 - Pneumatic Actuator (Part No. 304.209.004)

Body: Brass CZ 121 Body: Brass CZ121
Knob: PVC (Colour: Red) Actuation Pin: Stainless Steel
Safety Pin: Stainless Steel 303 Piston Rod: Brass CZ 121
Piston Rod: Brass CZ 121 Pipe connection: 1/4” NPT Female
Min. Actuation Force: 25.5 N (5.73 Ibf) Min. Actuation Pressure: 4 bar (58 psi)
Overall Size: 52mm (L) x 41.5mm (Dia) Max. Working Pressure: 56 bar (812 psi)
(2.05” (L) x 1.63” (Dia)) Overall Size: 48mm (L) x 41.5mm (Dia)
Weight: 0.265 kg (0.584 lbs) (1.89” (L) x 1.63” (Dia))
Weight: 0.228 kg (0.503 lbs)

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Removable Electrical Actuator Removable Electrical Actuator

(Suppression Diode) (Bridge Rectifier)
The removable electrical actuator locates to the top of the The removable electrical actuator locates to the top of the
container valve. 24 v dc is required for solenoid operation. container valve. 24 v dc is required for solenoid operation.
Provision is made for the connection of a manual actuator Provision is made for the connection of a manual actuator
to the top of the actuator assembly. The suppression to the top of the actuator assembly. Due to the design of
diode electrical actuator must be wired up correctly with the bridge rectifier it will operate regardless of how it is
the positive supply from the control panel connected to wired up; the positive supply from control panel can be
terminal 1, and the negative supply connected to terminal connected to either terminal 1 or 2 with the reverse for the
2.The removable electrical actuator has a life span of 10 negative supply. The removable electrical actuator has a
years from manufacture, which is indicated on the label. life span of 10 years from manufacture, which is indicated
on the label.
Figure 12 - Electrical Actuator - Suppression Diode (Part No. Figure 13 - Electrical Actuator - Bridge Rectifier (Part No.
304.205.010) 304.209.001)

Body: Mild Steel & Dull Nickel Body: Mild Steel & Dull Nickel
Swivel nut: Brass CZ121 Swivel nut: Brass CZ121
Actuation Pin: Stainless Steel Actuation Pin: Stainless Steel
Actuation Type: Latching Actuation Type: Latching
Reset Requirement: Manually via Reset Tool Reset Requirement: Manually via Reset Tool
supplied supplied
Connection: 1” BSPP Brass Connection: 1” BSPP Brass
Nominal Voltage: 24 v dc Nominal Voltage: 24 v dc
Nominal Current: 0.25 A Nominal Current: 0.25 A
Max. Monitoring Current: 25 mA Max. Monitoring Current: 25 mA
Manual Actuation Force: 50 N (11.24 Ibf) Manual Actuation Force: 50 N (11.24 Ibf)
Nominal Pin Travel: 4.4 mm (0.17”) Nominal Pin Travel: 4.4 mm (0.17”)
Electrical connection: 3-pin plug connector Electrical connection: 3-pin plug connector
Back EMF Protection: Suppression Diode Back EMF Protection: Bridge Rectifier
(4.09” (L) x 1.73” (Dia)) (4.09” (L) x 1.73” (Dia))
18
ISSUE No. 02
25 mm (1") and 50 mm (2") Flexible Technical Information

Discharge Hose 25 mm (1") Hose
Hose Construction: Twin steel wire braided oil resistant
FM-200® container installations may be connected to the
seamless synthetic rubber core to
system by means of a flexible discharge hose. This enables DIN EN 853 1SN
containers to be disconnected for maintenance or recharge Connection: Zinc Passivated Mild Steel
without dismantling other container mountings, manifold 25 mm (1” NPT) Straight Fixed Male
connections and pipework, etc. The flexible discharge
25 mm (1” BSPP) 90° Female Swivel
hose is provided with a swivel fitting at the inlet. Union
Max. Bend Angle: 15° @ 0 °C (32 °F)
Figure 14 - Flexible Discharge Hose Max. Working Pressure: 88 bar (1276 psi)
Overall Size: 405mm (L) x 92mm (W)
(15.95” (L) x 3.62” (W))
Equivalent Length: 3.14 m (10.3 ft)
50 mm (2") Hose
Hose Construction: Twin steel wire braided oil resistant
seamless synthetic rubber core to
DIN EN 853 2SN
Connection: Zinc Passivated Mild Steel
50 mm (2” NPT) Straight Fixed Male
50 mm (2” BSPP) 90° Female Swivel
Union
Max. Bend Angle: 15° @ 0 °C (32 °F)
(20.47” (L) x 4.92” (W))
Equivalent Length: 5.36 m (17.6 ft)
25 mm (1”) Hose Part No. 306.207.002

50 mm (2”) Hose Part No. 306.207.003

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
80 mm ( 3”) Discharge Hose/Check 80 mm ( 3”) Discharge Hose

Valve Assembly The discharge hose is used with the 3” NPT single tank
The discharge hose/check valve assembly combines adaptor and 90° elbow to connect the container valve
the elbow, hose, check valve, and swivel coupling for outlet to the distribution piping in single tank systems. The
connection to the valve discharge outlet and the discharge hose is constructed of corrugated stainless steel tubing
manifold. The check valve provides the facility for a with stainless braid cover.
40 mm (1½”) height adjustment.
Figure 15 - 80 mm ( 3") Discharge Hose / Check Valve Figure 16 - 80 mm ( 3") Discharge Hose (Part No. 306.205.005)
Assembly (Part No. 306.205.006)

Hose: Double braid stainless steel Hose Construction: Double braid stainless steel
Elbow: Stainless steel UNS 30400 Max. Working Pressure: 35 bar (507.5 psi)
Valve Swivel Nut: Stainless steel UNS 30400 Min. Bend Radius: 460mm (18”)
Check Valve Swivel Nut: Cadmium plated mild steel Overall Size: 406mm (L) x 76mm (Dia)
Check Valve Body: Cadmium plated mild steel (15.98” (L) x 2.99” (Dia))
Check Valve Seal and Seat: Brass UNS 36000 Weight: 3.00 kg (6.61 lbs)
Spring: Stainless steel 2.84 kg (6.27 Equivalent Length: 1.55 m (5.1 ft)
lbs)
Max. Working Pressure: 35 bar (507.5 psi)
Overall Size 619mm (L) x 254mm (W)
(Minus Check Valve): (24.37” (L) x 10.00” (W))
Weight: 20.50 kg (45.20 lbs)
20
ISSUE No. 02
80 mm ( 3”) Valve Single Tank Adaptors Manifold Check Valve

When a single 343 litre container is being used without Manifold check valves are of mushroom pattern type and
a manifold, three swivel adaptors are available for lift into the manifold as discharge occurs. The function of
connection to the discharge outlet, either NPT, BSP or the check valve is to prevent loss of extinguishing agent
grooved. during discharge from an outlet, should a container have
been removed. All check valves are ordered seperately to
the manifold assembly.
Figure 17 - 80mm (3” ) Valve Single Tank Adaptor Figure 18 - Manifold Check Valve
3” Flared to 3” BSPT Part No. 309.002.013

3” Flared to 3” NPT Part No. 309.002.014
25 mm (1”) Check Valve Assembly
3” Flared to 3” Grooved Part No. 309.002.015
Part No. 302.209.004
50 mm (2”) Check Valve Assembly

Part No. 302.209.005

Body: Cadmium plated mild steel Body: Brass CZ122
Stem: Stainless Steel
3” Flared to 3” BSPT Spring: Stainless Steel
Overall Size: 115mm (L) x 102mm (W) Bottom Plate: Brass CZ122
(4.51” (L) x 4.00” (W)) Top Plate: Stainless Steel
Weight: 2.84 kg (6.27 lbs) Seal Material: Nitrile
Equivalent Length: 0.55m (1.8 ft)
25 mm (1") Check Valve
3” Flared to 3” NPT Inlet Connection Thread: 25 mm (1" NPT) Female
Overall Size: 115mm (L) x 102mm (W) Outlet Connection Thread: 40 mm (1½" NPT) Male
(4.51” (L) x 4.00” (W)) Overall Size: 54mm (L) x 52.4mm (W)
Weight: 2.84 kg (6.27 lbs) (2.13” (L) x 2.06” (W))
Equivalent Length: 0.55m (1.8 ft) Weight: 0.63 kg (1.39 lbs)
3” Flared to 3” Grooved
Overall Size: 72mm (L) x 102mm (W) 50 mm (2") Check Valve
(2.82” (L) x 4.00” (W)) Inlet Connection Thread: 50 mm (2" NPT) Female
Weight: 1.95 kg (4.30 lbs) Outlet Connection Thread: 65 mm (2½" NPT) Male
Equivalent Length: 0.55m (1.8 ft) Overall Size: 73mm (L) x 83mm (W)
(2.87” (L) x 3.25” (W))

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Manifold
Manifolds are fabricated sections of steel pipework. They enable multiple containers to be connected to a common pipe
network. They may also be used in systems where main / reserve containers arrangements are required.
Figure 19 - Typical Manifold Assembly
Material: ASTM A106 Gr B / BS 3601 Schedule 80
Inlet: NPT socket
Outlet: BSP Taper / NPT Taper / 6” Flange
Test Press. 90 bar (1305 psi)
Finish: Primed, Ready to paint on site.
Note: Assemblies do not include check valves and end caps.

For 343 litre manifolds the check valves are part of the hose.
Table 6: Manifolds
Inlet to Inlet to Inlet to End
Part No. of Manifold Container Overall EndThread
End Cap Inlet Connection
No. Inlets Pipe Size Size Length Connection
Distance Distance Distance
mm mm mm mm
307.209.022 2 65mm (2.5”) 150 (6”) 350 (14”) 150 (6”) 4.5 L to 32 L 650 (25.6”) BSPT
307.209.023 3 65mm (2.5”) 150 (6”) 350 (14”) 150 (6”) 4.5 L to 32 L 1000 (39.4”) BSPT
307.209.024 4 65mm (2.5”) 150 (6”) 350 (14”) 150 (6”) 4.5 L to 32 L 1350 (53.1”) BSPT
307.209.001 2 65mm (2.5”) 150 (6”) 350 (14”) 150 (6”) 4.5 L to 32 L 650 (25.6”) NPT
307.209.002 3 65mm (2.5”) 150 (6”) 350 (14”) 150 (6”) 4.5 L to 32 L 1000 (39.4”) NPT
307.209.003 4 65mm (2.5”) 150 (6”) 350 (14”) 150 (6”) 4.5 L to 32 L 1350 (53.1”) NPT
307.209.025 2 80mm (3”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 808 (31.8”) BSPT
307.209.026 3 80mm (3”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 1316 (51.8”) BSPT
307.209.027 4 80mm (3”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 1824 (71.8”) BSPT
307.209.028 5 80mm (3”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 2332 (91.8”) BSPT
307.209.029 6 80mm (3”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 2840 (111.8”) BSPT
307.209.004 2 80mm (3”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 808 (31.8”) NPT
307.209.005 3 80mm (3”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 1316 (51.8”) NPT
307.209.006 4 80mm (3”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 1824 (71.8”) NPT
307.209.007 5 80mm (3”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 2332 (91.8”) NPT
307.209.008 6 80mm (3”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 2840 (111.8”) NPT
22
ISSUE No. 02
Table 6: Manifolds (Continued)

Inlet to Inlet to Inlet to End
Part No. of Manifold Container Overall EndThread
End Cap Inlet Connection
No. Inlets Pipe Size Size Length Connection
Distance Distance Distance
mm mm mm mm
307.209.030 2 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 808 (31.8”) BSPT
307.209.031 3 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 1316 (51.8”) BSPT
307.209.032 4 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 1824 (71.8”) BSPT
307.209.033 5 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 2332 (91.8”) BSPT
307.209.034 6 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 2840 (111.8”) BSPT
307.209.009 2 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 808 (31.8”) NPT
307.209.010 3 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 1316 (51.8”) NPT
307.209.011 4 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 1824 (71.8”) NPT
307.209.012 5 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 2332 (91.8”) NPT
307.209.013 6 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 150 (6”) 52 L to 180 L 2840 (111.8”) NPT
307.209.014 3 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 200 (8”) 52 L to 180 L 1416 (55.7”) Flange
307.209.015 4 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 200 (8”) 52 L to 180 L 1924 (75.7”) Flange
307.209.016 5 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 200 (8”) 52 L to 180 L 2432 (95.7”) Flange
307.209.017 6 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 200 (8”) 52 L to 180 L 2940 (115.7”) Flange
307.209.018 7 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 200 (8”) 52 L to 180 L 3448 (135.7”) Flange
307.209.019 8 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 200 (8”) 52 L to 180 L 3956 (155.7”) Flange
307.209.020 9 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 200 (8”) 52 L to 180 L 4464 (175.7”) Flange
307.209.021 10 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 200 (8”) 52 L to 180 L 4972 (195.7”) Flange
307.209.038 2 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 150 (6”) 343 L 1011 (40”) BSPT
307.209.039 3 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 150 (6”) 343 L 1722 (68”) BSPT
307.209.040 4 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 150 (6”) 343 L 2433 (96”) BSPT
307.209.035 2 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 150 (6”) 343 L 1011 (40”) NPT
307.209.036 3 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 150 (6”) 343 L 1722 (68”) NPT
307.209.037 4 100mm (4”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 150 (6”) 343 L 2433 (96”) NPT
307.209.041 2 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 200 (8”) 343 L 1111 (43.7”) Flange
307.209.042 3 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 200 (8”) 343 L 1822 (71.7”) Flange
307.209.043 4 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 200 (8”) 343 L 2533 (99.7”) Flange
307.209.044 5 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 200 (8”) 343 L 3244 (127.7”) Flange
307.209.045 6 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 200 (8”) 343 L 3955 (155.7”) Flange
307.209.046 7 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 200 (8”) 343 L 4666 (183.7”) Flange
307.209.047 8 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 200 (8”) 343 L 5377 (211.7”) Flange
307.209.048 9 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 200 (8”) 343 L 6088 (239.7”) Flange
307.209.049 10 150mm (6”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 200 (8”) 343 L 6799 (267.7”) Flange
Note: For ease of assembly flanged manifolds are available for 150 mm diameter.
150mm flanged manifolds with either 3 or 4 ports are supplied as a one piece assembly. Whilst manifolds with 5 to 10
ports are made up from smaller sections due to the size and weight as listed below:
5 port manifold - 3 port end and 2 port mid section
9 port manifold - 3 port end and two 3 port mid sections
10 port manifold - 4 port end and two 3 port mid sections
All 150mm flanged manifolds include an end cap.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Manifold Inlets (Sockets)

Manifold inlets are available for the construction of system
manifolds.
Figure 20 - Threaded Inlet for Manifolds.
Material: Carbon Steel to
ASTM A105 / ASTM A350 LF2
Dimensions: ANSI B16.11 / BS3799
Pressure Rating: 3000lb
Table 7: Manifold Inlets

Manifold Container Overall Thread Overall
Part No. Weight
Pipe Size Size Diameter Connection Height
mm mm kg
17036 65mm (2½”) 4.5 L to 32 L 75 dia. (2.95”) 1½ in. NPT 44 (1.73”) 0.71 (1.57 lbs)
17037 80mm (3”) 52 L to 180 L 100 dia. (3.94”) 2½ in. NPT 63 (2.48”) 1.20 (2.65 lbs)
15332 100mm (4”) 343 L 122 dia. (4.80”) 3 in. NPT 70 (2.76”) 2.05 (4.52 lbs)
15333 150mm (6”) 343 L 122 dia. (4.80”) 3 in. NPT 63 (2.48”) 1.53 (3.37 lbs)
24
ISSUE No. 02
Construction of Manifolds
For customers wishing to manufacture their own
manifolds they must be constructed as detailed
below, and use the manifold inlets specified on Page 24,
(Figure 20 and Table 7).
Figure 21 - Manifold construction
- PIPING MUST BE SCHEDULE 80

- TEST PRESSURE - 90 BAR (1300 psi)
- ALL DIMENSIONS MUST BE WITHIN± 1/8”
- AFTER WELDING, MAKE CERTAIN ALL INLET HOLES IN THE PIPE
ARE CLEAN OF ANY WELD SPATTER AND OPEN COMPLETELY
Table 8: Manifolds
Inlet Inlet
No. of End Overall Container Socket
to End Cap to Inlet
Inlets Connection Length Size Part No.
Distance Distance
mm mm mm
2 2½ in. BSPT / 2½ in. NPT 650 (25.6”) 150 (6”) 350 (14”) 4.5 L to 32 L 17036
2 3 in. BSPT / 3 in. NPT 808 (31.8”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 52 L to 180 L 17037
3 6 in. Flange 1366 (53.8”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 52 L to 180 L 17467
4 6 in. Flange 1874 (73.8”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 52 L to 180 L 17467
5 6 in. Flange 2382 (93.8”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 52 L to 180 L 17467
6 6 in. Flange 2890 (113.8”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 52 L to 180 L 17467
7 6 in. Flange 3398 (133.8”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 52 L to 180 L 17467
8 6 in. Flange 3906 (153.8”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 52 L to 180 L 17467
9 6 in. Flange 4414 (173.8”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 52 L to 180 L 17467
10 6 in. Flange 4922 (193.8”) 150 (6”) 508 (20”) 52 L to 180 L 17467

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Table 8: Manifolds (Continued)

Inlet Inlet
No. of End Overall Container Socket
to End Cap to Inlet
Inlets Connection Length Size Part No.
Distance Distance
mm mm mm
2 4 in. BSPT / 4 in. NPT 1011 (40”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15332
3 4 in. BSPT / 4 in. NPT 1722 (68”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15332
4 4 in. BSPT / 4 in. NPT 2433 (96”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15332
2 6 in. Flange 1061 (42”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15333
3 6 in. Flange 1772 (70”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15333
4 6 in. Flange 2483 (98”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15333
5 6 in. Flange 3192 (126”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15333
6 6 in. Flange 3905 (154”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15333
7 6 in. Flange 4616 (182”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15333
8 6 in. Flange 5327 (210”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15333
9 6 in. Flange 6038 (238”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15333
10 6 in. Flange 6749 (266”) 150 (6”) 711 (28”) 343 L 15333
26
ISSUE No. 02
Manifold Bracket Assembly Flexible Pilot Hose

A manifold bracket assembly consists of two lengths The flexible pilot hose is used to connect pressure activated
of unistrut, mounted vertically on a wall or bulk head devices to the system, e.g. the pilot cylinder to the slave
to enable height adjustment of the manifold assembly. container to the pressure switch.
Cantilever brackets are fastened to the unistrut and each
are held in position using a uninut long spring, washer and
hex head screw. Manifold brackets slot into the cantilever
and are clamped using a hex head screw and plain nut.
Each manifold bracket assembly is supplied in pairs.
Figure 22 - Manifold Bracket Figure 23 - Flexible hose (Part No. 306.205.003)

65 mm (2.5”) Manifold Bracket (Part No. 311.205.015) Outer sheath: Stainless Steel Braided
Unistrut Channel Length: 400 mm (15.75”) Inner sheath: PTFE to BS 4976
Cantilever Arm Length: 150 mm (5.91”) Max. Working Pressure: 190 bar (2755 psi)
Max. Bend Radius: 60 mm (2.4”)@ 0 °C (32 °F)
80 mm (3”) Manifold Bracket (Part No. 311.205.010) Connections: Zinc Passivated Mild Steel
Unistrut Channel Length: 500 mm (16.69”) 2 off 1/4” BSP Female Swivel
Cantilever Arm Length: 300 mm (11.81”) Overall Size: 710mm (L) x 7mm (Dia)
(27.95” (L) x 0.28” (Dia))
100 mm (4”) Manifold Bracket (Part No. 311.205.011) Weight: 0.15 kg (0.33 lbs)
Unistrut Channel Length: 500 mm (16.69”)
Cantilever Arm Length: 300 mm (11.81”)
150 mm (6”) Manifold Bracket (Part No. 311.205.012)

Unistrut Channel Length: 500 mm (16.69”)
Cantilever Arm Length: 300 mm (11.81”)

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Male Adaptors Male Pilot Hose Connector

This adaptor (309.013.005) connects the pilot hose to the The male pilot hose connector is used to connect two pilot
25 mm (1") and 50 mm (2") container valve assembly. hoses together for systems where a second container of
The male adapter (309.013.006) connects to the 80 mm a different size is used to protect a different enclosure.
(3") container valve assembly and also to the pressure For example: a large container is protecting a room and a
switch. separate smaller container protects the subfloor, and both
containers are to actuate simultaneously, and a hose longer
than Part No. 306.205.003 is required.
Figure 24 - Male Adaptor Figure 25 - Male Pilot Hose Connector (Part No. 309.013.007)

Material: Steel 230 M07 Pb Material: Steel 230 M07 Pb
Connection: 1/4”BSPP x 1/4” BSPT Connection: 1/4” BSPP x 1/4” BSPP
(Part No. 309.013.005) Max. Working Pressure: 350 bar (5076 psi)
1/4” BSPP x 1/4” NPT Overall Size: 30mm (L) x 19mm (W)
(Part No. 309.013.006) (1.18” (L) x 0.75” (W))
Max. Working Pressure: 350 bar (5076 psi) Weight: 0.034 kg (0.08 lbs)
(1.35” (L) x 0.75” (W))
28
ISSUE No. 02
Street Elbow Male Tee

This elbow can be used to connect a pilot hose to an 80 This is used primarily in manifold systems for connecting
mm (3”) valve. The street elbow’s 1/4” NPT male thread pilot lines from one slave container to the next.
screws into the valve body actuation port. The 1/4” NPT
thread of the male adaptor (Part No. 309.013.006) screws
into the street elbow. The flexible pilot hose (Part No.
306.205.003) would then screw onto the male adaptor.
Figure 26 - Street Elbow (Part No. 309.013.008) Figure 27 - Male Tee (Part No. 309.013.021)

Material: Brass Material: Brass
Connection: 1/4” NPT x 1/4” NPT Connection: 1/4” BSPP x 1/4” BSPP x 1/4” NPT
Overall Size: 28mm (L) x 18mm (W) Max. Working Pressure: 450 bar (6527 psi)
(1.10” (L) x 0.71” (W)) Overall Size: 42mm (L) x 29mm (W)
Weight: 0.042 kg (0.09 lbs) (1.65” (L) x 1.14” (W))

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Male Elbow Pressure Switch

This elbow can be used on the last slave container when The pressure switch is activated by pressure from the
the pressure switch connection is taken from the manifold agent during discharge and can be used to signal to a
or piping networks. control panel that the system has actually discharged.
The pressure switch latches on operation and has a reset
button. The pressure switch is supplied with a 1/4” BSPP
x 1/4” NPT male adaptor (Part No. 309.013.006).
Figure 28 - Male Elbow (Part No. 309.013.009) Figure 29 - Pressure Switch (Part No. 304.205.007)

Material: Brass Housing: Die-cast Aluminium
Connection: 1/4” BSPP x 1/4” NPT Pressure Connection: Nickel Plated Brass
Max. Working Pressure: 450 bar (6527 psi) Switch Point: 4 bar Rising (58 psi)
Overall Size: 28mm (L) x 25mm (W) Tolerance: ± 0.34 bar (± 5 psi)
(1.10” (L) x 1.00 (W)) IP Rating: IP65
Weight: 0.050 kg (0.11 lbs) Connection: 1/4” NPT Female
Conduit Thread: 1/2” NPT Female
Max. Working Pressure: 103.4 bar (1500 psi)
DC Switch Rating: 1A 24v dc
Installation Environment: non-corrosive / indoor
(6.50” (L) x 3.98 (W))
30
ISSUE No. 02
Discharge Nozzle
FM-200® is distributed within the protected area by the
discharge nozzle which is sized to ensure the correct flow
of agent for the risk. Nozzles are available with seven or
eight ports to allow for 180° or 360° horizontal discharge
patterns. Ports are drilled in 0.1 mm (0.004 in) increments
to the specified system design. Nozzles are supplied as
standard in Brass as BSPP or NPT with Stainless Steel
as an option.
Figure 30 - 7 & 8 Port Nozzle Brass Configuration
Material: Brass / Stainless Steel
Thread Type: BSPP / NPT
Drill Incrementation: 0.1 mm
Nozzle Type: 8 Port 360° / 7 Port 180°
Max. Distance from Ceiling: 300mm
Max. Agent per Nozzle: 100 kg (220 lbs)
Orientation: Pendant / Upright

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Table 9: Discharge Nozzles

Part Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Thread Part Nozzle Nozzle Nozzle Thread
Number Size Type Material Type Number Size Type Material Type
310.205.201 10 mm (3/8”) 7 Port 180° Brass BSPP 310.205.301 10 mm (3/8”) 7 Port 180° Stainless BSPP
310.205.207 25 mm (1”) 7 Port 180° Brass BSPP 310.205.307 25 mm (1”) 7 Port 180° Stainless BSPP
310.205.209 32 mm (1¼”) 7 Port 180° Brass BSPP 310.205.309 32 mm (1¼”) 7 Port 180° Stainless BSPP
310.205.210 32 mm (1¼”) 8 Port 360° Brass BSPP 310.205.310 32 mm (1¼”) 8 Port 360° Stainless BSPP
310.205.211 40 mm (1½”) 7 Port 180° Brass BSPP 310.205.311 40 mm (1½”) 7 Port 180° Stainless BSPP
310.205.212 40 mm (1½”) 8 Port 360° Brass BSPP 310.205.312 40 mm (1½”) 8 Port 360° Stainless BSPP
310.205.215 10 mm (3/8”) 7 Port 180° Brass NPT 310.205.315 10 mm (3/8”) 7 Port 180° Stainless NPT
310.205.221 25 mm (1”) 7 Port 180° Brass NPT 310.205.321 25 mm (1”) 7 Port 180° Stainless NPT
310.205.223 32 mm (1¼”) 7 Port 180° Brass NPT 310.205.323 32 mm (1¼”) 7 Port 180° Stainless NPT
310.205.224 32 mm (1¼”) 8 Port 360° Brass NPT 310.205.324 32 mm (1¼”) 8 Port 360° Stainless NPT
310.205.225 40 mm (1½”) 7 Port 180° Brass NPT 310.205.325 40 mm (1½”) 7 Port 180° Stainless NPT
310.205.226 40 mm (1½”) 8 Port 360° Brass NPT 310.205.326 40 mm (1½”) 8 Port 360° Stainless NPT
Nozzle Weights Nozzle Overall Sizes

Nozzle Size Brass Stainless Steel Nozzle Size Length Diameter
10 mm (3/8”) 0.10 kg (0.22 lbs) 0.09 kg (0.20 lbs) 10 mm (3/8”) 33.5 mm (1.32” ) 25 mm (0.98” )
15 mm (1/2”) 0.15 kg (0.33 lbs) 0.14 kg (0.31 lbs) 15 mm (1/2”) 41 mm (1.61” ) 29 mm (1.14” )
20 mm (3/4”) 0.21kg (0.46 lbs) 0.20 kg (0.44 lbs) 20 mm (3/4”) 47 mm (1.85” ) 34.5 mm (1.36” )
25 mm (1”) 0.27 kg (0.60 lbs) 0.25 kg (0.55 lbs) 25 mm (1”) 52 mm (2.05” ) 41.3 mm (1.63” )
32 mm (1¼”) 0.41 kg (0.90 lbs) 0.38 kg (0.84 lbs) 32 mm (1¼”) 62 mm (2.44” ) 50 mm (1.97” )
40 mm (1½”) 0.46 kg (1.01 lbs) 0.43 kg (0.95 lbs) 40 mm (1½”) 68 mm (2.68” ) 60 mm (2.36” )
50 mm (2”) 0.83kg (1.83 lbs) 0.78 kg (1.72 lbs) 50 mm (2”) 89 mm (3.50” ) 76 mm (2.99” )
32
ISSUE No. 02
Door Notice Manual Release Notice

A door notice is required at each entrance to the risk to A notice should be located at each manual release
advise personnel that they are entering a protected area. position.
Figure 31 - Door Notice (Part No. 314.205.001) Figure 32 - Manual Release Sign (Part No. 314.205.003)
FM-200®
CAUTION!
RELEASE
DO NOT enter unless Manual

Control Point
extinguishing system
is locked off.
When alarm sounds

FM-200® evacuate hazard area. FM-200®
After FM-200®
discharge do NOT CAUTION!
Ensure all
re-enter until personnel are
evacuated
thoroughly ventilated. before
releasing
FM-200®
For areas protected by concentrations greater than NOAEL

(unoccupied spaces only).
CAUTION! Material 2 mm (0.08 in) Craylon
This area is protected by Finish Gloss, scratch resistant
a FM-200® fire
extinguishing system. Overall Size: 212mm (L) x 75mm (W)
(8.35” (L) x 2.95” (W))
When alarm sounds Weight: 0.011 kg (0.024 lbs)
or upon gas discharge
FM-200® evacuate hazard area
immediately.
After discharge do NOT

re-enter until
thoroughly ventilated.
For areas protected by concentrations less than NOAEL (Part

No. 314.205.002).
Material 2 mm (0.08” ) Craylon
Finish Gloss, scratch resistant
(8.27” (L) x 8.27” (W))
Weight: 0.025 kg (0.055 lbs)

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Liquid Level Measuring Device

The measuring device is used to measure the level of 106 litre Part No. 300.015.127
liquid FM-200® in 106, 147, 180, and 343 litre containers. 147, 180, 343 litre Part No. 300.015.128
The weight of the FM-200® in the container is determined
by converting the level measurement into a weight Technical Information
measurement using the weight conversion tables in
Mounting Thread: 1.3125-12UN-2A
appendix D of this manual. The operating temperature
Stem Material: Brass
range for the liquid level measuring device is 0 to 54 °C
Mounting Material: Brass
(32 to 130 °F).
Float Material: ECCO
The liquid level is found by lifting the measuring tape Model: Diptape Indicator
from inside the tube to the end (or approximately 75 mm Approximate Length: 814 mm (32”) (Part No. 300.015.127)
(3”) above the anticipated liquid level) and slowly lowering 1093 mm (43”) (Part No. 300.015.128)
the tape until a magnetic interlock with the float is felt. Weight: 1.13 kg (2.49 lbs) (Part No. 300.015.127)
The tape will then remain in the up position, allowing a 1.52 kg (3.36 lbs) (Part No. 300.015.128)
reading at the top of the housing. This measurement is
accomplished without removing the tank from the fire
suppression system.
The device must be installed in an empty container
assembly before filling, the liquid level measuring device
must be ordered as a separate line item.
Figure 33 - Liquid Level Measuring Device
34
ISSUE No. 02
Typical Manifold System

Figure 34 indicates a typical two container system complete with electrical actuation, manual actuator, pressure switch,
2 x low pressure switch, flexible connections, distribution pipework and nozzles.
Figure 34 - Typical Manifold System

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 3 - SYSTEM DESIGN
System Design
There are two main elements of system design. The first The FM-200® cupburner value** is 6.7% for commercial
is the risk assessment; determining the type of protection grade Heptane.
required, considerations such as ventilation, openings Nozzle distribution test concentration = 6.9%
and restrictions; equipment location. etc. The second is
calculating the quantity of FM-200® required, including Calculations to determine minimum design concentration:
floor and/or ceiling voids, positioning of nozzles, electrical
Cupburner or fire test concentration x nozzle
requirements, etc.
efficiency factor x safety factor.
All systems are designed in accordance with NFPA
2001. Nozzle efficiency factor = 6.9 = 1.03
6.7
Hazard Analysis Safety factor: Class A = 1.2
The first, and one of the most important, exercises in Class B = 1.3
planning an FM-200® extinguishing system is the hazard Class C = Class A
survey. The information derived from the survey should
For Class A (Determined by fire test) -
include risk assessment, environmental conditions,
5.8% x 1.03 x 1.2 = 7.17%
personnel considerations, system operation both in normal
For UL 5.2% x 1.03 x 1.2 = 6.4%
conditions and after a discharge, access and construction
limitations, dimensions, volumes, and any special For Class B (Commercial grade Heptane)-
requirements. 6.7% x 1.3 = 8.7%
13.6.6 ítem 4 FM-200® systems are suitable for use in normal For Class B (Other class B fuels)-
commercial and industrial environments. The minimum cupburner x 1.03 x 1.3 = design concentration,
design concentration for Class A & C fires is 7.17%* but but not less than 9.0%
differs for Class B fires. To determine other recommended
design concentrations for Class B flammable liquids, refer For Class C -
to the methodology within NFPA 2001, 2008 edition. Use at least design concentration for Class A
All design concentration calculations are based on surfaces fires (7.17%)*
extinguishing concentrations plus 20% safety factor for For systems with only manual actuation -
Class A & C and 30% safety factor for Class B. cupburner x 1.03 x 1.3 = design concentration
All agent quantities are calculated at minimum but not less than 9.0%
design temperature to determine agent quantity. Rugged environments, and those requiring
Maximum achieved concentration should be calculated intrinsically safe or flameproof equipment, require special
at the maximum anticipated enclosure temperature, and consideration and should be discussed fully with the
compared to NOAEL / LOAEL values , see table 3. technical support centre before finalising a system design.
FM-200® is suitable for use with the following materials:
Class A Fires involving solid materials usually of

an organic nature, in which combustion
normally takes place with the formation of
glowing embers.
Class B Fires involving flammable liquids or
liquefiable solids and flammable gases.
Class C Fires involving energized electrical
equipment where the electrical
nonconductivity of the extinguishing
media is of importance

** Cupburner and Cupburner value as defined in NFPA
2001 Annex B
36
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 3 - SYSTEM DESIGN DATE: 2010-03
Note. Certain materials in this group may require

Hazard Volume
increased concentrations to achieve satisfactory In total flooding applications the risk area must comprise
extinguishment. Consult the technical support an enclosed space with no significant openings so that the
centre for details of specific risk. design concentration can be achieved and maintained.
Generally, the calculation is based on an empty area;
the subsequent furniture and fittings having little effect
Caution. FM-200® is not effective on the following: - on the actual concentration. Similarly, large equipment
cabinets and control panels should not be considered in
• Class A Deep seated fires. the calculation as it is assumed that the internal area is
required to be filled with agent.
• Class D Combustible metals.
Each enclosed space is considered as a risk area and
• Chemicals capable of auto-thermal recomposition. requires at least one nozzle. A floor void, ceiling void,
• Chemicals capable of rapid oxidation. cable duct, etc., is treated as a separate adjacent area and
requires simultaneous discharge to occur.
• Enclosures with hot surfaces (>400 °C) (752 °F)
Ceiling obstructions such as beams that are less than
Hazard Structure 300 mm (12”) below the slab need not be considered.
Obstructions greater than 300 mm (12”) can affect the
The protected enclosure shall be bounded by rigid distribution of agent and may require additional nozzles.
elements of building construction. The ceiling should be Consult the technical support centre if in doubt.
not less than 0.3 m (1. ft) above the hazard.
To determine the volume refer to the site drawings,
During agent discharge, the hazard enclosure will ensuring that the scale is accurate and that heights are
experience a pressure change. Consideration should be denoted, or make a sketch of the area adding dimensions
given to mitigating these pressure changes. and any relevant details. Calculate the volume of each
area.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Ventilation Hazard Fuels

If the hazard enclosure has no means of adequate All fuels in the hazard must be identified and the
venting after discharge, consideration should be given corresponding agent concentration requirements assessed.
to installing a normally closed means of ventilation with The design concentration (percent by volume) required
extraction arrangements which will discharge directly to for the hazard will be the highest concentration required
atmosphere. by any one of the fuels present in the hazard.
Air conditioning and/or forced ventilation can Personnel Safety
affect the system performance and the quantity of agent
required.
Natural Agent: To avoid possible injury, avoid any
(i) Self-contained air conditioning unit exposure to FM-200® in volume concentrations
A self-contained unit conditions the air within the greater than 9% unless using self contained breathing
enclosure and does not rely on a fresh air supply, or draw apparatus. Limit exposure times as in NFPA 2001,
air from other parts of the building. Section 1.5 “Safety.”
If the hazard has a self-contained unit and it is located

Symptoms of overexposure to concentrations greater
within the area without an outside air supply, no additional
than 10.5% may include dizziness, impaired coordination,
agent is required. It is not necessary to shut down the unit
reduced mental acuity, cardiac effects or unconsciousness.
prior to a discharge as the mixing effect is beneficial.
In the event of overexposure, remove to fresh air
(ii) Central air conditioning unit immediately and summon medical assistance.
A central air conditioning unit relies on air from outside
Frostbite: Direct skin contact with FM-200® in the
and is often linked by ducts to other parts of the building,
immediate area of discharge may cause frostbite.
therefore, prior to a discharge, the unit should be shut down
and/or dampers operated to close the ducts. Sufficient time
must be allowed for the plant to stop, or dampers to close, Agent Quantities
before discharge occurs.
Normally the agent quantity is the weight required to
Dampers should be installed in both supply and return produce the desired concentration at the lowest temperature
air ducts, as close as possible to the area. The duct volume within the hazard enclosure.
between the hazard and the damper must be added to the
overall volume. Agent Storage
FM-200® is stored as a liquified compressed gas
Hazard Temperature in appropriate containers to meet DOT4BW450,
Determine as accurately as possible the anticipated DOT4BW500 and EN 13322-1 requirements. Nitrogen
minimum and maximum temperatures likely to be in the container maintains a superpressurisation of 25 bar
experienced within the protected area. Minimum agent at 21 °C (360 psi at 70 °F). The chosen location should
quantity requirements are based on minimum hazard. At provide protection from severe weather, mechanical,
maximum temperature, hazard concentration must not chemical, or other types of damage.
exceed the NOAEL/LOAEL values for normally occupied
Once assembled, filled and pressurised the FM-
spaces, reference NFPA 2001, Section 1.5 “Safety.”
200® extinguishing system should not be exposed to
temperatures other than the storage / operating temperature
range of 0 to 54 °C. (32 °F to 130 °F). This also includes
while being in storage or transported.
Hydraulic calculations assume an agent temperature
of 21 °C (70 °F). When the storage temperature varies
by 5.5 °C (10 °F) , there is a risk that the system will not
supply the designed quantity of extinguishing agent.
38
ISSUE No. 02
Manifolds
It may be necessary to manifold agent containers to
provide the required amount of agent for a hazard, or to 13.6.6 ítem 2
make available the proper increments of agent weight for
the protection of multiple hazards.
Whenever containers are manifolded, the following
rules must be observed.
1. All containers connected to the same manifold or

pipe must be the same size and filled with the same
agent weight, pressure and fill density.
2. Agent containers must be located in a single row

and spaced according to section.
3. A connected reserve may be employed in some 13.6.6 ítem 2

circumstances providing a secondary supply of agent.
4. Flexible discharge hoses and check valves must be

used at each inlet.
Agent Distribution
Distribution piping will be installed only with approved
piping as indicated in Section 5.
Pipe size reductions may be made by using reducing
tees or reducing bushings or reducing couplings.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Agent Flow Characteristics Nozzle Selection and Location

The number of nozzles required is based on the hazard
Nitrogen Superpressurisation size and configuration and the coverage provided by the
Nitrogen is added to the FM-200® containers. This nozzle. Nozzles are available in 7-port or 8-port versions to
addition of nitrogen, known as superpressurisation, will provide 180 or 360 degree discharge patterns respectively.
cause a portion of the nitrogen to mix with the FM-200®, When considering the optimum nozzle location, the
the remaining portion of the nitrogen will remain in the following factors should be taken into account.
vapour space above the liquid providing the increased
propulsion necessary to discharge the FM-200® from the • Nozzle location is affected by the shape of the hazard
container. area.
• The maximum discharge radius is 8.7 m (28.6 ft) for
Flow in Pipe a 360° nozzle and 10.05 m (33 ft) for a 180° nozzle.
In a properly designed distribution piping network the
• The maximum coverage area for either nozzle is
flow of FM-200® will consist of a two phase mixture of
95.3 m² (1026 ft²).
liquid and vapour. The properties of this mixture will vary
with its composition; therefore, when the mixture contacts • Nozzle orifices must not be placed where they may
the pipeline walls, the friction decreases the density of discharge into nearby objects.
the mixture resulting in a non-linear pressure drop and an • Nozzles must be installed a maximum of 300 mm
increase in flow velocity. (12”) below the ceiling.
Another consequence of two-phase flow is the • 4.87 m (16 ft) maximum protection height for 360°
potential for separation of liquid and vapour. In a properly and 180° nozzle.
designed pipe network, the velocity of the mixture will be
high enough to maintain highly turbulent flow. However, • 180 degree nozzles must be mounted adjacent to a
if the pipeline diameter is too large for the design flow wall and must be located to cover the entire area.
rate, the two phases may separate, leading to alternate • 300 mm (12”) minimum void height (i.e. Sub-floors
discharges of liquid and vapour (slugging) or layering of and false ceilings).
the two phases. Therefore, the pipeline must be properly
sized to keep the FM-200® flow turbulent enough to • Maximum distance 180 degree nozzles should be
prevent phase separation. placed from a wall 300 mm (12”), the minimum
50 mm (2”). Measured from centre of the nozzle to
Initial Vapour Discharge the wall.
At the instant the discharge valve is opened, rapid • Nozzles located both above and below the container
expansion of the agent will cool the piping network. outlet, Maximum distance between them 9.1 m
(30 ft).
Trailing Vapour Pressure • Nozzles located either above or below the container
Discharge time is defined as the average liquid discharge outlet, maximum distance between them 9.1 m
time through all nozzles in the system. After the liquid (30 ft).
portion of the discharge has been completed, there will be
a short transition period followed by the delivery of the
remaining FM-200® nitrogen mixture as a vapour. This is
due to flashing of the trailing edge of the fluid as it moves
from the tank to the nozzles. In some systems the transition
period is relatively long; this can lead to confusion as to
when the discharge is complete, possibly resulting in an
inaccurate measurement of the discharge time.
40
ISSUE No. 02
Maximum Limits (Elevation) in Pipe Work.

Examples:
If nozzles are only located above the container outlet, then the maximum elevation difference between the container
outlet and the furthest horizontal pipe run or discharge nozzle (whichever is furthest) shall not exceed 9.1 m (30 ft). See
Figure 35.
Figure 35 - Nozzles Located Above the Container Outlet
9.1 m (30 ft) 9.1 m (30 ft)

4.5 m (15 ft)
If nozzles are only located below the container outlet, then the maximum elevation difference between the container
outlet and the furthest horizontal pipe run or discharge nozzle (whichever is furthest) shall not exceed 9.1 m (30 ft). See
Figure 36.
Figure 36 - Nozzles Located Below the Container Outlet
4.5 m (15 ft)

9.1 m (30 ft) 9.1 m (30 ft)
If nozzles are located both above and below the container outlet, then the maximum distance between the furthest
horizontal pipe runs, or discharge nozzles (whichever is further) shall not exceed 9.1 m (30 ft). See Figure 37.
Figure 37 - Nozzles Located Above and Below the Container Outlet
9.1 m (30 ft)
Note: If a system design violates these

limits, contact the technical support centre
to determine what action has to be taken.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Nozzle Discharge Radius System Design Procedure

The following procedure must be followed when designing
The maximum discharge radius is 8.7 m (28.6ft) for a FM-200® systems.
360° nozzle and 10.05 m (33ft) for a 180° nozzle.
• Determine hazard material and required design
Figure 38 - Nozzle Discharge Radius concentration.
• Identify individual enclosure volumes and deduct any
impermeable volumes where appropriate.
8.7 m
8.7m • Determine hazard altitude and correction factor.
• Calculate quantity of FM-200® per enclosure, at
minimum design temperature.
• Determine container size and fill density.
8 PORT
• Select nozzle type and location.
• Design pipe network.
28.6 ft
(28.6ft)
• Calculate quantity of FM-200® per nozzle.
• Check percentage agent split at tee’s.
• Identify all pipe lengths, rises, falls and nozzle
reference numbers.
10.05 m
10.05m
7 PORT
Note: The side tee splits shall be between 10-30%, bull
tee splits will be between 30-70%. All Tee outlets must
be in the same horizontal plane.
33 ft
(33ft) See examples figures 39 to 44.
Example: Nozzle Selection
Switch Room: 120.7 m3 1 x 7 port nozzle

(4262.6 ft3)
Computer Room: 543.3 m3 4 x 8 port nozzles

(19237.1 ft3)
Floor Void: 63.36 m3 2 x 8 port nozzles

(2275.4 ft3)
Nozzle placement and piping arrangements for the

example are shown in Figure 45.
42
ISSUE No. 02
Example: Tee Split Designs
Figure 39 - Side Tee Split limits. Figure 40 - Bull Tee Split limits.
90-70%
Minimum length
of 10 x nominal 30-70%
pipe diameter
w
Flo Minimum length
w of 10 x nominal
Flo
pipe diameter
Minimum length
of 10 x nominal
pipe diameter 10-30% 70-30%
Figure 41 - Side tee orientation “correct” Figure 42 - Side tee orientation “incorrect”
Correct Tee Incorrect Tee

Splits Splits
w
Flo
w
Flo
Figure 43 - Bull tee orientation “correct” Figure 44 - Bull tee orientation “incorrect”
Incorrect Tee
Correct Tee Splits
Splits
w
Flo
w
Flo
NOTE: Incorrect orientation of side and bull tee could result in separation of the FM-200® from the Nitrogen (due to FM-200® greater
density). The design would also be outside the parameters permitted by the calculation software. See figures 42 and 44.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Design Example - Calculations When the minimum quantity of FM-200® has been
calculated the weight is compared to the available agent
Minimum Agent Quantity is based on the hazard volume container size. The container size must be equal to or
at the minimum anticipated temperature and concentration greater then the weight of agent (see Table 4).
required. To determine the minimum agent quantity the
following equation is used: With the appropriate container selected, the previous
equation can be rearranged to determine the concentration
W = (V/S)* (C/100-C) based on the actual weight as containers are filled to the
nearest kg.
C= 100 WS
W = Weight of agent required (kg)
WS + V
V = Hazard volume (m³)
To calculate the required agent for each hazard volume as
S = Specific Vapour Volume (m³/kg) a percentage of the total agent required;
S = 0.1269 + 0.0005131t % Hazard Agent = Individual hazard volume

Sum of hazard volumes
t = Design Temperature in Hazard Area (°C)
C = Required FM-200® Design Conc. (% by volume) at Design

Switch Room: 120.8/723.7 = 16.7% of agent
Temperature (t).
Computer Room: 537.6/723.7 = 74.3% of agent
Example: Floor Void: 65.3/723.7 = 9.0% of agent
Calculation for two rooms and floor void with the
following dimensions: It is determined from the above that both the Switch
Room and the Computer Room can be fed by one
Switch Room: 7.0 x 6.9 x 2.5 = 120.8 m³ manifolded system using 3 x 180 litre containers, each
filled with 124 kg of agent. The Floor Void would use 1 x
Computer Room: 16.0 x 12.0 x 2.8 = 537.6 m³ 52 litre container filled with 37 kg as it requires less than
Floor Void: 16.0 x 12.0 x 0.34 = 65.3 m³ 10% of the total agent and therefore equates as follows.
(Separate tank is required for floor voids. If protected with
t = 21 °C for calculation example nozzle from computer room system, the piping would be
Switch Room: (7.20% required design concentration outside the tee split limits.)
example only)
Switch Room: 120.8/658.4 = 18.3% of agent
Computer Room: 537.6/658.4 = 81.7% of agent
W= 120.8 x 7.2 = 68.1 kg
0.1376751 (100-7.2) Floor Void: 65.3/65.3 = 100% of agent
Computer Room: (7.2% required design concentration

example only) Actual agent to Switch Room :
0.183 x 3 x 124 = 68.1 kg

W= 537.6 x 7.2 = 303.0 kg
0.1376751 (100-7.2) Agent to Computer Room :
3 x 124 - 68.1 = 303.9 kg

Floor Void: (7.2% required design concentration example
only)
W= 65.3 x 7.2 = 36.8 kg

0.1376751 (100-7.2)
44
ISSUE No. 02
The minimum enclosure concentrations can be calculated After determining the minimum weight and concentration,
based on the actual container fill (21 °C minimum design the maximum concentration can be determined by
temperature). recalculating the equation based on the maximum
temperature anticipated in each enclosure 27 °C
maximum design temperature. This calculation is required
Switch Room: C = 100 x 68.1 x 0.1376751 = 7.20% to determine if the maximum concentration is below the
(68.1 x 0.1376751) + 120.8 NOAEL limit for normally occupied areas.
Computer C= 100 x 303.9 x 0.1376751 = 7.22% Switch Room: C = 100 x 68.1 x 0.1407537 = 7.35%
Room: (303.9 x 0.1376751) + 537.6 (68.1 x 0.1407537) + 120.8
Floor Void: C= 100 x 36.8 x 0.1376751 = 7.20% Computer C= 100 x 303.9 x 0.1407537 = 7.37%
(36.8 x 0.1376751) + 65.3 Room: (303.9 x 0.1407537) + 537.6
Floor Void: C= 100 x 36.8 x 0.1407537 = 7.35%

(36.8 x 0.1407537) + 65.3
Figure 45 - Example Nozzle Location

Figure 28 - Example Nozzle Location

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Piping Practices
Due to the two phase flow of FM-200®, certain piping
practices must be adhered to. Mainly that the flow split
must be on the horizontal plane. There are two types of tee
used in FM-200® systems, a through /side tee and a bull
tee. Both have limitations on the minimum and maximum
allowable flow splits which are detailed on page 43.
It should also be noted that system designers shall
allow a minimum of 10 times the nominal pipe diameter
around tee splits before any change of direction.
System designers should aim to design as far as
possible balanced pipe networks, use minimum lengths
of pipe, use minimum numbers of elbows, maximize pipe
volume before the 1st tee and incorporate similar pipe run
lengths to nozzles.
46
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 4 - FLOW CALCULATIONS DATE: 2010-03
Introduction
In determining the quantity of FM-200® required for a Example:
particular application, it is important to assess the hazard
area correctly. The following information will need to be
determined as discussed in Section 3. Hazard Volume: 280 m³
Room Temperature: 20 °C
1. Hazard Volume.
Agent Concentration: 7.17%*
2. Minimum Room Temperature. Flooding Factor: 0.5625
3. Hazard Type.
Quantity of FM-200® required: 0.5625 x 280
4. Height above sea-level. =175.5 kg
The Hazard volume can be determined by calculating
the room volume and deducting any impermeable volumes
that may be contained within the area. The anticipated Note: Specific Vapour Volume data shown in Tables
temperature of the Hazard area will normally be advised 10 and 11 are experimentally derived values and the
by the client. The agent concentration is dependant upon specific vapour volume equation (S) has a correlation
the type of hazard being protected and hazard altitude. coefficient of 0.99. However the equation can be
The quantity of FM-200® can be calculated by using the used to give a close approximation of required agent
flooding factors (Table 10. metric / 11. imperial) or by quantities.
using the formula (FM-200® Equation Calculations) and
then multiplying by the altitude correction factor (Table
12).
Table 10: FM-200® Weight Calculations Metric

Temp Specific Weight Requirements of Hazard Volume, W/V (kg/m3)
Vapor Design Concentration (% per volume)
Volume 6.4 7 7.17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
t s
(°C)c (m3/kg)d
-10 0.1215 0.5615 0.6196 0.6357 0.7158 0.8142 0.9147 1.0174 1.1225 1.2301 1.3401 1.4527
-5 0.1241 0.5499 0.6064 0.6223 0.7005 0.7987 0.8951 0.9957 1.0985 1.2038 1.3114 1.4216
0 0.1268 0.5388 0.5936 0.6091 0.6858 0.78 0.8763 0.9748 1.0755 1.1785 1.2839 1.3918
5 0.1294 0.5281 0.5816 0.5968 0.6719 0.7642 0.8586 0.955 1.0537 1.1546 1.2579 1.3636
10 0.132 0.5179 0.57 0.5851 0.6585 0.749 0.8414 0.936 1.0327 1.1316 1.2328 1.2264
15 0.1347 0.5080 0.5589 0.5734 0.6457 0.7344 0.8251 0.9178 1.0126 1.1096 1.2089 1.3105
20 0.1373 0.4985 0.5483 0.5625 0.6335 0.7205 0.8094 0.9004 0.9934 1.0886 1.1859 1.2856
25 0.1399 0.4894 0.5382 0.5520 0.6217 0.7071 0.7944 0.8837 0.975 1.0684 1.164 1.2618
30 0.1425 0.4805 0.5284 0.5420 0.6104 0.6943 0.78 0.8676 0.9573 1.049 1.1428 1.2388
35 0.145 0.4720 0.519 0.5326 0.5996 0.6819 0.7661 0.8522 0.9402 1.0303 1.1224 1.2168
40 0.1476 0.4638 0.5099 0.5232 0.5891 0.6701 0.7528 0.8374 0.9230 1.0124 1.1029 1.1956
45 0.1502 0.4559 0.5012 0.5142 0.579 0.6586 0.7399 0.823 0.0908 0.995 1.084 1.1751
50 0.157 0.4482 0.4929 0.4919 0.5694 0.6476 0.7276 0.8093 0.8929 0.9784 1.066 1.1555
55 0.1553 0.4408 0.4847 0.4973 0.56 0.6369 0.7156 0.796 0.8782 0.9623 1.0484 1.1365

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 4 - FLOW CALCULATIONS
Table 11: FM-200® Weight Calculations Imperial
Temp Specific Weight Requirements of Hazard Volume, W/V (lb/ft3)

Vapor Design Concentration (% per volume)
Volume
6.4 7 7.17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
t s
(°F)c (ft3/lb)d
10 1.9264 0.0354 0.0391 0.0401 0.0451 0.0513 0.057 0.0642 0.0708 0.0776 0.0845 0.0916
20 1.9736 0.0346 0.0381 0.0391 0.0441 0.0501 0.0563 0.0626 0.0691 0.0757 0.0825 0.0894
30 2.0210 0.0338 0.0372 0.0382 0.0430 0.0489 0.0550 0.0612 0.0675 0.0739 0.0805 0.0873
40 2.0678 0.0330 0.0364 0.0373 0.0421 0.0478 0.0537 0.0598 0.0659 0.0723 0.0787 0.0853
50 2.1146 0.0323 0.0356 0.0365 0.0411 0.0468 0.0525 0.0584 0.0645 0.0707 0.0770 0.0835
60 2.1612 0.0316 0.0348 0.0357 0.0402 0.0458 0.0514 0.0572 0.0631 0.0691 0.0753 0.0817
70 2.2075 0.0310 0.0341 0.0349 0.0394 0.0448 0.0503 0.056 0.0618 0.0677 0.0737 0.0799
80 2.2538 0.0303 0.0334 0.0342 0.0386 0.0439 0.0493 0.0548 0.0605 0.0663 0.0722 0.0783
90 2.2994 0.0297 0.0327 0.0335 0.0378 0.0430 0.0483 0.0538 0.0593 0.0650 0.0708 0.0767
100 2.3452 0.0292 0.0321 0.0329 0.0371 0.0422 0.0474 0.0527 0.0581 0.0637 0.0694 0.0752
110 2.3912 0.0286 0.0315 0.0323 0.0364 0.0414 0.0465 0.0517 0.0570 0.0625 0.0681 0.0738
120 2.4366 0.0281 0.0309 0.0316 0.0357 0.0406 0.0456 0.0507 0.0560 0.0613 0.0668 0.0724
130 2.4820 0.0275 0.0303 0.0311 0.0350 0.0398 0.0448 0.0498 0.0549 0.0602 0.0656 0.0711
140 2.572 0.0270 0.0298 0.0306 0.0344 0.0391 0.0440 0.0489 0.0540 0.0591 0.0644 0.0698
Table 12: Altitude Correction Factor

At elevations above sea-level, FM-200® has a greater
Altitude above Correction
specific volume because of the reduced atmospheric
sea-level Factor
pressure. A system designed for sea-level conditions will
ft (km) therefore develop an actual higher concentration at levels
-3000 (-0.92) 1.11 above sea-level and an actual lower concentration at levels
-2000 (-0.61) 1.07 below sea-level. The adjusted agent quantity is calculated
-1000 (-0.30) 1.04 by multiplying W (from the equation on the left) by the
0 (0.00) 1.00 altitude correction factor. The design quantity of the
1000 (0.30) 0.96 clean agent shall be adjusted to compensate for ambient
2000 (0.61) 0.93 pressure that vary more than 11 percent (equivalent to
3000 (0.91) 0.89 approximately 915 m (3000 ft) of elevation change) from
4000 (1.22) 0.86 standard sea level pressure 760 mm Hg at 0 °C (29.92 in
5000 (1.52) 0.82 Hg at 70 °F).
6000 (1.83) 0.78
7000 (2.13) 0.75
8000 (2.45) 0.72
9000 (2.74) 0.69
10000 (3.05) 0.66
(BS5306-5.1 / NPFA2001 Table 3-6)
48
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 4 - FLOW CALCULATIONS DATE: 2010-03
FM-200® Equation Calculations Program Parameters

The weight of agent required for a hazard area can also be When designing pipe network systems, the following
calculated from the formula shown below; design parameters should be considered to avoid system
reject when running the calculation.
W = (V/S) * (C/100-C)
• 4.87 bar (70.6 psi) minimum nozzle pressure.
W = Weight of agent required kg (lbs) • 80% maximum agent in pipe.
V = Hazard volume m³ (ft³) • Between 6 - 10 seconds discharge time.

• 10 - 30 % side tee split.
S = Specific Vapour Volume cu.m/kg (ft³/lbs)
• 30 -70 % bull tee split.
where S = 0.1269 + 0.0005131 t (°C) • 0.5 kg/l (31.2 lbs/ft³) - 1.0 kg/l (62.4 lbs/ft³) fill
density.
or (S= 1.885 + 0.0046 t °F) • Max. liquid arrival time imbalance of 1.0 seconds.
• Maximum liquid run out time of 2.0 seconds.
t = Design Temperature in Hazard Area °C (°F)
• Maximum nozzle height is 4.87 m (16.0 ft)
C = Required FM-200® Design Conc. (% by volume) at
• Minimum of 10% agent in pipe before first tee.
Design Temperature (t).
• Maximum of 20 nozzles per system.
• Maximum of 10 enclosures per system.
Engineered Systems
• The ratio between the nozzle area and the pipe cross
Engineered systems are based on a Hydraulic Flow
sectional area immediately preceding the nozzle is
Program developed by Hughes Associates Inc. The
limited to a minimum of 0.20 (20%) and a maximum
program predicts the two phase flow of FM-200® and
of 0.80 (80%).
nitrogen through a pipe network. Information detailing
the enclosure is entered and the program calculates the (For extended discharge consult the technical support centre)
required pipe sizes, nozzle drill sizes, average nozzle
pressures and discharge time. For further information on
Table 13 : Max. & Min. Flow Rates
the Flow Program, refer to the Hughes Flow Program
User’s Manual.
Pipe Size mm Minimum Maximum
(in) flow rate flow rate
As system design calculations are critical to the kg/s (lb/s) kg/s (lb/s)
success of the extinguishing system, only trained 10 (3/8) 0.272 (0.60) 0.907 (2.00)
personnel are permitted to perform system calculations.
15(½) 0.454 (1.00) 1.361 (3.00)
If in the future, other companies wish to use the program,
20 (¾) 0.907 (2.00) 2.495 (5.50)
representatives will be required to attend a formal training
session. All system calculations are conducted ‘in house’ 25 (1) 1.588 (3.50) 3.855 (8.50)
or by authorised suppliers. 32 (1¼) 2.722 (6.00) 5.67 (12.50)
40 (1½) 4.082 (9.00) 9.072 (20.00)
50 (2) 6.35 (14.00) 13.61 (30.00)
NOTE: The calculation method has been designed
65 (2½) 9.072 (20.00) 24.95 (55.00)
for specific types of fittings, pipes, and pipe inside
diameter. When these limitations are not maintained, 80 (3) 13.61 (30.00) 44.92 (99.00)
there is a risk that the system will not supply the 100 (4) 24.95 (55.00) 56.7 (125.00)
required quantity of extinguishing agent. 125 (5) 40.82 (90.00) 90.72 (200.00)
150 (6) 54.43 (120.00) 136.1 (300.00)
Note: This information is for Schedule 40 pipe, and serves as
an estimate only.
Pipe and nozzle sizes need to be confirmed by the
computer programme.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 4 - FLOW CALCULATIONS
Table 14 : Equivalent Length for Pipe Fittings

Diameter 90° Elbow 45° Elbow Thru Tee Side Tee Union
m (in) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft) m (ft)
10 (3/8) 0.4 (1.2) 0.18 (0.5) 0.24 (0.7) 0.82 (2.5) 0.09 (0.3)
15 (1/2) 0.52 (1.6) 0.24 (0.7) 0.3 (0.9) 1.04 (3.2) 0.12 (0.4)
20 (3/4) 0.67 (2.0) 0.3 (0.9) 0.42 (1.3) 1.37 (4.2) 0.15 (0.5)
25 (1) 0.85 (2.6) 0.4 (1.2) 0.55 (1.7) 1.74 (5.3) 0.18 (0.6)
32 (1¼) 1.13 (3.4) 0.52 (1.6) 0.7 (2.1) 2.29 (7.0) 0.24 (0.7)
40 (1½) 1.31 (4.0) 0.61 (1.7) 0.82 (2.5) 2.65 (8.0) 0.27 (0.8)
50 (2) 1.68 (5.1) 0.79 (2.4) 1 .06 (3.2) 3.41 (10.4) 0.37 (1.1)
65 (2½) 2.01 (6.1) 0.94 (1.5) 1.25 (3.8) 4.08 (12.4) 0.43 (1.3)
80 (3) 2.5 (7.6) 1.16 (3.5) 1.55 (4.7) 5.06 (15.4) 0.55 (1.7)
100 (4) 3.26 (10.0) 1.52 (4.6) 2.01 (6.1) 6.64 (20.2) 0.73 (2.2)
125 (5) 4.08 (12.4) 1.92 (5 .9) 2.56 (7.8) 8.35 (25.5) 0.91 (2.8)
150 (6) 4.94 (15.0) 2.32 (7.1) 3.08 (9.4) 10 (30.5) 1.07 (3.3)
Equivalent length table for pipe fittings.
Figures based upon schedule 40 ASTM A 106 - 77 pipe
(nominal pipe size given in table).
Table 15 : Equivalent Length for other system components

Hardware Set Size Equivalent length
25 mm (1 ”) 6.096 m (20 ft)
Valve 50 mm (2 ”) 10.668 m (35 ft)
80 mm (3 ”) 25.91 m (85.0 ft)
25 mm (1 ”) 3.14 m (10.3 ft)
Flex Hose 50 mm (2 ”) 5.36 m (17.6 ft)
80 mm (3 ”) 1.55 m (5.1 ft)
25 mm (1 ”) 3.54 m (11.6 ft)
Flex Hose and Check
50 mm (2 ”) 12.02 m (39.4 ft)
Valve Combination
80 mm (3 ”) 15.85 m (52 ft)
25 mm (1 ”) 0.18 m (0.6 ft)
50 mm (2 ”) 0.37 m (1.2 ft)
Valve Outlet Adaptor 80 mm Flared to NPT 0.55 m (1.8 ft)
80 mm Flared to Grooved 0.55 m (1.8 ft)
80 mm Flared to BSP 0.55 m (1.8 ft)
Figures based upon schedule 40 ASTM A 106- 77 pipe
(nominal pipe size given in table).
50
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 5 - INSTALLATION DATE: 2010-03
General Information
All installation shall be carried out by an approved Installation drawings shall be submitted for approval to
contractor with the correct equipment and previous the appropriate authority prior to system installation.
experience of gaseous extinguishing systems. The supplier On receipt, unpack the supplied items and ensure
can provide this service or provide a list of their factory that the components comply with the packing list and
trained installation contractors. Installation instructions installation drawings.
are described under the following main headings, and in
the order of installation. The container weight is checked at the factory prior
to dispatch, and recorded on the label attached to the
• Container Installation
container. If there is any doubt regarding the weight, or
leakage is suspected, the container should be weighed to
• Piping and Nozzles
confirm there is no weight loss.To check agent weight in
106, 147, 180 and 343 litre containers with an installed
• Actuation Controls
liquid level measuring device, see Maintenance Section of
• Ancillary Equipment this manual. Determine the container storage temperature
and refer to the Temperature Correction Chart to check the
pressure within the container (see Appendix A).
• Completion Procedures
Specific installation drawings must be prepared

Container Installation
for the hazard area in accordance with system design as The container location is identified on the system drawings
calculated by the FM-200® Hydraulic Flow Program. and should be protected from extremes of temperature, and
These drawings should be followed closely in order be accessible for service and maintenance. The containers
to ensure the system meets its design criteria. The pipe must be firmly secured to a wall or bulkhead, in a vertical
network is sized in order to obtain correct discharge orientation only.
time, nozzle pressures, agent quantity and various other
design considerations. If for any reason, the pipe network Figure 46 - Outlet Anti-Recoil and Actuation Caps
requires modifications the system must be recalculated
ACTUATION CAP
before proceeding with installation. Installation drawings
contain the following information;
• Enclosure Volumes.
• Agent Quantities.
• Scaled Pipe Network Plan. ANTI-RECOIL

CAP
• Pipe Network Isometric.
• Pipe Diameters, Pipe Length Drops & Rises.
• Nozzle Data.
• Container Data.
• Solenoid Actuator Technical Data. Anti-recoil Caps

25 mm (1”) 1” BSP Brass Part No. 12687
• Low Pressure Switch Wiring Chart 50 mm (2”) 2” BSP Brass Part No. 14004
80 mm (3”) 3” Flared Brass Part No. 15148
• Fittings Data.
Actuation Cap
25 mm (1”) Plastic Part No. 12569

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 5 - INSTALLATION
Single Container Installation

1. Fix the back channels of the mounting brackets to the
Caution. Do not over tighten the container
wall at the appropriate heights (see table 16), using
connection. Excessive tightening may cause the valve
suitable anchor type bolts (not supplied).
outlet thread to be damaged and adversely affect the
2. Position the container against the back channel with system operation.
the valve outlet pointing left.
3. Insert the container straps at top and bottom and secure 6. Install the initial pipe run and then disconnect the
with the bolts provided (see Figure 48). container and refit the anti-recoil cap to the valve
4. Remove the anti-recoil cap from the valve outlet outlet.
adaptor (see Figure 46). 7. Re-connect the pipe to the container after the pipework
5. For 8 - 180 litre containers (25 mm (1” ) and 50 mm system is complete and the discharge nozzles have
(2”) valves): With the anti-recoil cap removed from been installed.
the valve outlet adaptor, install a union coupling. Note: For 343 litre container (80 mm (3” ) valve): Connect
elbow and discharge hose or pipe directly to the
For 343 litre container (80 mm (3” ) valve): Install
adaptor. A union is not required as the adaptor has
single container adaptor onto the discharge outlet.
swivel couplings to allow for pipe removal during
Either a grooved pipe, NPT, or BSPT threaded adaptor
recharging or maintenance.
may be used. See Figure 47.
Figure 47 - Discharge Outlet Connections.
DISCHARGE
HOSE OR
PIPE PIPE
UNION
COUPLING SINGLE
TANK
ADAPTOR
ELBOW
ELBOW
8 THROUGH 180 LITRE CONTAINERS 343 LITRE CONTAINER
52
ISSUE No. 02
Table 16: Bracket Fixing Heights

No. of Height From Floor to
Container
Unistrut Bracket
Size
Channels mm (in)
4.5 litre: 2.3 to 4.5 kg * For UL Listed Systems Only
1 130 (5”)
(5 to 10 lbs.) (Not FM Approved)
8 litre: 4.0 to 8.0 kg
1 130 (5”)
(9 to 18 lbs.)
16 litre: 8.0 to 16.0 kg
2 60, 330 (2.5”, 13”)
(18 to 35 lbs.)
32 litre: 16.0 to 32.0 kg
2 160, 595 (6.25”, 23.5”)
(35 to 71 lbs.)
40 litre*: 20.0 to 40.0 kg
2 300, 1000 (11.75”, 39.25”)
(44 to 88 lbs.)
52 litre: 26.0 to 52.0 kg
2 110, 343 (4.25”, 13.5”)
(57 to 115 lbs.)
67.5 litre*: 33.8 to 67.5 kg
2 300, 1100 (11.75”, 43.25”)
(75 to 149 lbs.)
80 litre*: 40.0 to 80.0 kg
2 300, 1200 (11.75”, 47.25”)
(88 to 176 lbs.)
106 litre: 53.0 to 106.0 kg
2 300, 750 (11.75”, 29.5”)
(117 to 234 lbs.)
147 litre: 73.5 to 147.0 kg
2 300, 1000 (11.75”, 39.25”)
(162 to 324 lbs.)
180 litre: 90.0 to 180.0 kg
2 300, 1200 (11.75”, 47.25”)
(198 to 397 lbs.)
343 litre: 171.5 to 343 kg
2 300, 1100 (11.75”, 43.25”)
(378 to 756 lbs.)
Figure 48 - Container Strap Location (106L Example)
750 mm
300 mm

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Multiple Container Installation

Containers are manifolded together for three main 6. For 80mm (3”) valve: To install hose/check valve
reasons; assembly between the valve discharge outlet and the
pipe manifold, complete the following steps.
• To reduce the amount of piping required by (see Figure 49).
connection to one feeder pipe.
• For systems that require main and reserve. Caution. (80 mm Valve Only). Make certain the
swivel nut covers the paint on the check valve threads
• Combining the correct containers to obtain the or malfunction of the hose/check valve combination
required quantity of agent within a specific hazard may result. Do not overtighten, as the nut will bend the
area. hose, resulting in flow restriction.
A typical 80 mm (3”), three port manifold assembly
consists of the manifold, three check valves and an end a. Install the check valve into the manifold inlet.
cap. Each check valve is screwed to manifold (25 mm (1”) b. Align the valve outlet with the inlet of the discharge
and 50 mm (2”) valves only). hose. Install the swivel nut on the discharge valve.
Wrench tighten.
1 Fix the back channels of the mounting brackets to the
wall at the appropriate heights (see table 16), using c. Thread the hose swivel nut onto the check valve until
suitable anchor type bolts (not supplied). the swivel nut covers the paint on the check valve
threads. Secure the nut with the locking set screw
2 Position the containers against the back channels with (provided) to prevent the nut from loosening with
the valve outlets pointing left at the required spacing vibration.
for the manifold ports (see Figure 19, and Table 6).
3 Insert the container straps at top and bottom and secure Figure 49 - 80mm (3") Hose/Check Valve Installation
with the bolts provided (see Figure 48).
MANIFOLD TEE
Manifold Bracket Installation OR ELBOW
1. Fix the two back vertical channels to the wall at the CHECK VALVE
appropriate height using suitable anchor type bolts LOCKING GRUB
(see table 17). SWIVEL NUT SCREW
Back channels are used to ensure that the appropriate

height adjustment is available when connecting the
discharge hose from the valve outlet to the manifold check
valve (see figure 50).
SWIVEL
2. Locate and secure the cantilever brackets to each NUT
channel using M10 x 40 mm Hex Head screw and
uninut long spring 10 mm.
3. Locate manifold brackets in cantilever channel and
unirax end caps.
4. For 25 mm (1”) and 50 mm (2”)Valves: Remove anti-
recoil cap and attach discharge hose between valve
and manifold. Adjust cantilever height as required and
secure in position.
5. For safety remove discharge hose and replace safety
caps, while pipework is installed.
54
ISSUE No. 02
Table 17: Manifold Bracket Fixing Heights

Container Valve Manifold Nominal Height from
Size Size Size Floor to top of cantilever
(L) mm (in) mm (in) mm (in)
4.5
25 65 727
2.3 to 4.5 kg
(1”) (2.5”) (28.6”)
(5 to 10 lb)
8
25 65 750
4.0 to 8.0 kg
(1”) (2.5”) (29.5”)
(9 to 18 lb)
16
25 65 949
8.0 to 16.0 kg
(1”) (2.5”) (37.4”)
(18 to 35 lb)
32
25 65 1289
16.0 to 32.0 kg
(1”) (2.5”) (50.75”)
(35 to 71 lb)
40*
50 80 1932
20.0 to 40.0 kg
(2”) (3”) (76.1”) Figure 50 - Manifold Assembly
(44 to 88 Ib)
52
50 80 1133
26.0 to 52.0 kg
(2”) (3”) (44.6”)
(57 to 115 lb)
67.5*
50 80 2106
33.8 to 67.5 kg
(2”) (3”) (82.9”)
(75 to 149 Ib)
67.5*
50 100 2106
33.8 to 67.5 kg
(2”) (4”) (82.9”)
(75 to 149 Ib)
80*
50 80 2265
40.0 to 80.0 kg
(2”) (3”) (89.2”)
(88 to 176 Ib)
80*
50 100 2265
40.0 to 80.0 kg
(2”) (4”) (89.2”)
(88 to 176 Ib)
106
50 80 1601
53.0 to 106.0 kg
(2”) (3”) (63.0”)
(117 to 234 lb)
106
50 100 1061
53.0 to 106.0 kg
(2”) (4”) (63”)
(117 to 234 lb)
147
50 80 1931
73.5 to 147.0 kg
(2”) (3”) (76”)
(162 to 324 lb)
EL
147
50 100 1931 R LEV
73.5 to 147.0 kg O
(162 to 324 lb)
(2”) (4”) (76”) FLO
ED
ISH
147
50 150 1931 FIN
73.5 to 147.0 kg
(2”) (6”) (67”)
(162 to 324 lb)
180
50 100 2210
90.0 to 180.0 kg
(2”) (4”) (87”)
(198 to 397 lb)
180
50 150 2210
90.0 to 180.0 kg
(2”) (6”) (87”)
(198 to 397 lb)
343 100 (4”)
80 2274
171.5 to 343.0 kg 150 (6”)
(3”) (89.5”)
(378 to 756 lb) NPT

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Pipe Installation Table 19: UK Fittings

In general, the installation should commence at the union
elbow / manifold assembly and progress along to the Fitting Description Pipe
discharge nozzles. Install the Pipework to the installation Size
drawings provided, ensuring that the following is adhered Screwed, complying with BS1256,BS1740 or Class up to &
150 of ANSI B16.3; or including
to: 20 mm
Forged Steel, Screwed complying with grade WPA
or WPB of BS3799; or
• The piping material must conform to the Forged Steel, Socket Weld, complying with grade
requirements of NFPA 2001 4.2 WPA or WPB of BS3799; or
Forged Steel, Butt Weld, complying with grade WPA
• The pipe must be reamed, blown clear and swabbed or WPB of BS1640: Part 3 or Class 300 of ANSI B16.9;
with an appropriate solvent to remove mill varnish Screwed, complying with BS1740 or Class 150 of above
and cutting oil before assembly as required by NFPA ANSI B16.3; or 20 mm
2001 4.2. Forged Steel, Screwed complying with grade WPA up to &
or WPB of BS3799; or including
• PTFE (Teflon) tape is the only acceptable pipe 80 mm
Forged Steel, Socket Weld, complying with grade
sealant and must be applied to the male threads. WPA or WPB of BS3799; or
or WPB of BS1640: Part 3 or Class 300 of ANSI B16.9;
Screwed, complying with BS1740; or above
Forged Steel, Screwed complying with grade WPA 80 mm
or WPB of BS3799; or
Forged Steel, Socket Weld, complying with grade
WPA or WPB of BS3799; or
or WPB of BS1640: Part 3;
(Note: Only use Fittings from table 20 that comply with US
requirements specified in table 21. Do not use 90° sharp elbows/
tees for system installation)
Table 18: UK Steel Pipework

Requirements
Grade of Minimum Wall
Nominal Pipe Size Publication Type of Pipe1)
Steel Thickness2)
BS1387 (BS EN 10255) BW - Heavy
Up to and including BS 3601 (BS EN 10216-1) S 430
50 mm BS 3602-1 (BS EN 10216-1) HFS or CFS 360 or 430
ASTM A106-77 HF or CD A or B Schedule 40
BS3601 (BS EN 10216-1) S 430 (Schedule 80 for screwed joints)
Over 50 mm up to and
BS 3602-1 (BS EN 10216-1) HFS or CFS 360 or 430
including 100 mm
ASTM A106-77 HF 0R CD A or B
BS3601 (BS EN 10216-1) S 430 Schedule 80
Above 100 mm Schedule 40
BS 3602-1 (BS EN 10216-1) HFS or CFS 360 or 430
(Schedule 80 for screwed joints)
ASTM A1 06-77 HF or CD A or B
1) Abbreviations:
BW - butt welded / CD - cold drawn / HFS - hot finished seamless / CFS - cold finished seamless / S - seamless
2) Where schedule numbers are given, these determine the minimum wall thickness in accordance with BS1600.
Where the specified pipe is not obtainable in these dimensions, the next larger thickness should be used.
56
ISSUE No. 02
Table 20: US Steel Pipe Requirements

Pipe Reference Connection Pipe Type Nominal Pipe
Size
ASTM A -106 seamless Grade C Threaded Schedule 40 3/8” - 69” NPS
ASTM A -106/A-53 seamless Grade B Threaded Schedule 40 3/8” - 6” NPS
ASTM A -106/A-53 seamless Grade A Threaded Schedule 40 3/8” - 6” NPS
ASTM A -53 ERW Grade B Threaded Schedule 40 3/8” - 6” NPS
ASTM A -53 ERW Grade A Threaded Schedule 40 3/8” - 6” NPS
ASTM A -53 Furnace Weld Class F Threaded Schedule 40 3/8” - 6” NPS
ASTM A -106 seamless Grade C Welded Schedule 40 3/8” - 6” NPS
ASTM A -106/A-53 seamless Grade B Welded Schedule 40 3/8” - 6” NPS
ASTM A -106/A-53 seamless Grade A Welded Schedule 40 3/8” - 6” NPS
ASTM A -53 ERW Grade B Welded Schedule 40 3/8” - 6” NPS
ASTM A -53 ERW Grade A Welded Schedule 40 3/8” - 6” NPS
ASTM A -53 Furnace Weld Class F Welded Schedule 40 3/8” - 6” NPS
Table 21: US Fittings

Fitting Description Pipe Size
Class 300 Malleable or Ductile Iron Up to or < 3” NPS
1000 -Ib Rated Ductile Iron or Forged Steel Class 300 Flanged Joints > 3” NPS All
Note: Cautionary information indicating the calculation Table 22: Hanger Spacing
method has been investigated for specific types of fittings,
type of pipe and pipe inside diameter. Also that when the Pipe Maximum Spacing
specified limitations are not maintained there is the risk Size mm m
that the system will not supply the required quantity of
10 (3/8”) 1. (3 ft)
extinguishing agent. The Flow Program contains pipe
15 (1/2”) 1.5 (5 ft)
and fittings options together with Equivalent Length
20 (3/4”) 1.8 (6 ft)
information for UK / US pipe and fittings.
25 (1”) 2.1 (7 ft)
Pipe Hangers 32 (1¼”) 2.4 (8 ft)
40 (1½”) 2.7 (9 ft)
Pipe hangers must be spaced according to the size of pipe 50 (2”) 3.4 (11 ft)
(see table 22).
65 (2½”) 3.5 (11.5 ft)
80 (3”) 3.7 (12 ft)
• Hangers must be placed within 300 mm (12”) of the 100 (4”) 4.3 (14 ft)
discharge nozzle (see Figure 51). 150 (6”) 5.2 (17 ft)
• Hangers must be placed between elbows that are (Reference: BS IS0 14520-1:2000)
more than 600 mm (24”) apart (see Figure 52).
• Hangers must be fixed to a structure capable of
supporting the Pipework.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Figure 51 - Nozzle Fixing Table 23: Safety Clearances.

Max. Rated Min. Section Min. Ground
Voltage Clearance Clearance
(kV) (m) (m)
15 2.59 (8.5 ft) -
33 2.74 (9 ft) -
44 2.89 (9.5 ft) -
66 3.05 (10 ft) -
88 3.20 (10.5 ft) 2.44 (8 ft)
110 3.35 (11 ft) 2.44 (8 ft)
132 3.50 (11.5 ft) 2.44 (8 ft)
165 3.81 (12.5 ft) 2.44 (8 ft)
220 4.27 (14.0 ft) 2.44 (8 ft)
275 4.57 (15 ft) 2.44 (8 ft)
Minimum clearance from any point on or about the

permanent equipment where a person may be required to
Figure 52 - Elbow Support stand (measure from position of the feet). Section clearance
- to the nearest unscreened live conductor in air. Ground
clearance - to the nearest part not at earth potential of an
insulator supporting a live conductor. Reference NFPA
2001, section 1.5.2
Nozzles
All nozzles require the installation of a dirt trap comprising
1 side tee, 2 nipples, and 1 pipe cap. Fit the nozzle to the
nipple on the dirt trap and check the nozzle orifice to
ensure proper orientation. Dirt trap lengths should be no
more than 10 times nominal pipe diameter.
A false ceiling comprising loose tiles must have the
tiles retained within a 2 m (6.5 ft) radius of the nozzle,
to prevent movement during system discharge. Nozzles
should be installed a maximum of 300 mm (12”) below
the ceiling.
Figure 53 - Dirt Trap
Earthing and Electrical Clearance

10 x Nominal
Systems within electrical substations or switchrooms shall Pipe Diameter
be efficiently earthed to prevent the metalwork becoming
electrically charged. Adequate earthing of systems will
minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge. Where
exposed electrical conductors are present and, where
practicable, clearances no smaller than those given in table
24 shall be provided, between the electrical conductors
and all parts of the system that may be approached during
maintenance.
58
ISSUE No. 02
Actuation Installation
The method of actuation depends on the system Figure 54 - Actuator Non-Fire Position
configuration and any specific contract requirements and
can be broken down as follows:
• Single Container Actuation
• Multiple Container Actuation
Single Container Actuation
Removable Electrical Actuator
The removable electrical actuator is fitted to the top of the

valve assembly as follows:
• Check the actuator mechanism to ensure that it is in 4.8-5.2 mm

the non-fired position by fully screwing in the reset (0.189-0.205 in)
tool, i.e. pin retracted (see Figure 54). WITH NUT
AGAINST BODY
• Remove the actuator cap from the top of the valve
assembly (see Figure 46).
• Carefully screw the actuator to the valve assembly
(see Figure 55).
Note: The actuator must be hand tight only.
If no other actuators are to be installed ensure that the Figure 55 - Electrical Actuator Location
protective cap on the actuator is retained in position.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Electrical Actuator - Suppression Diode Electrical Actuator - Bridge Rectifier
The electrical signal from the detection and/or control The electrical signal from the detection and/or control
equipment is connected in accordance with the wiring equipment is connected in accordance with the wiring
diagram detailed in Figure 56 when all other installations diagram detailed in Figure 57 when all other installations
have been completed. have been completed.
Figure 56 - Electrical Actuator Wiring Diagram - Suppression Figure 57 - Electrical Actuator Wiring Diagram - Bridge
Diode Rectifier

This Electrical Actuator is fitted with a suppression diode This Electrical Actuator is fitted with a bridge rectifier
in parallel to the coil as indicated. Connect +ve from as indicated. Connect +ve from control panel to either
control panel to terminal 1 and -ve from control panel terminal 1 or 2 with the reverse for the -ve supply from
to terminal 2, on plug connector. End of line monitoring control panel, on plug connector. End of line monitoring
device (if required) to be fitted on site. device (if required) to be fitted on site.
Before this system is put into operation, the removable Before this system is put into operation, the removable
solenoid can be checked by firing the system. To do this, solenoid can be checked by firing the system. To do this,
REMOVE THE ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR from the REMOVE THE ELECTRICAL ACTUATOR from the
valve. With power to the actuator, the pin should be firmly valve. With power to the actuator, the pin should be firmly
in the down position. Ensure that the electrical actuator is in the down position. Ensure that the electrical actuator is
reset prior to fitting on to the conatainer valve. FAILURE reset prior to fitting on to the conatainer valve. FAILURE
TO RESET THE ACTUATOR WILL RESULT IN THE TO RESET THE ACTUATOR WILL RESULT IN THE
POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS DISCHARGE OF THE POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS DISCHARGE OF THE
CONTAINER. CONTAINER.
60
ISSUE No. 02
Manual Actuator Multiple Container Actuation

The manual actuator can be fitted to the top of the electrical Where several containers comprise one system and are
actuator or directly onto the valve, after first removing the discharged simultaneously, one container is designated as
protective cap. the ‘master’ container, and the others are ‘slave’ containers.
Caution. Before attaching the manual actuator to the The master container can be actuated electrically or
electrical actuator or valve, ensure that the firing pin is manually. The slave containers are actuated pneumatically
retracted and the safety pin is in place (see Figure 58). by the action of the master container discharging.
Note. The actuator must be hand-tight only. Pneumatic Actuator
Check that the actuating plungers are in the raised position

(see Figure 60). Remove the actuation cap from the top of
the valve assembly (see Figure 46) and carefully screw the
pneumatic actuator to the valve on each slave container.
Note. The actuator must be hand-tight only.
Figure 58 - Manual Actuator Non-Fire Position Figure 60 - Pneumatic Actuator Non-Fire Position
4.0 mm (0.157”) 4.0 mm (0.157”)

MINIMUM MINIMUM
Figure 59 - Manual Actuator Location Figure 61 - Pneumatic Actuator Location

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Slave Actuation Pilot Line
For slave containers the pneumatic connection is made

using flexible pilot hoses. To fit the pilot hoses, remove
the 1/4” pilot pressure port plug from the master container
valve assembly and install the 1/4” male adaptor (Part No.
309.013.005) for the 25 mm (1” ) and 50 mm (2” )valves,
and a 1/4” NPT street elbow and male adaptor for the 80
mm (3” ) valve.
Install the pilot line tee, Part No. 309.013.003 on to all

pneumatic actuators (wrench tight). Connect one end of
the pilot hose Part No. 306.205.003 to the adaptor on the
master container and one end to the pilot line tee on the
pneumatic actuator. Connect a pilot hose between pilot
line tees on all pneumatic actuators (see Figure 62).
The maximum number of slave actuated containers is 9
(10 containers system in total). After every 10 containers
another master container must be created, using either an
electrical actuator or pneumatically by removing the 1/4”
pilot pressure port plug on the tenth container, installing
the 1/4” male adaptor (Part No. 309.013.005) and another
pilot hose (Part No. 306.205.003) and tee (Part No.
309.013.003) into the pneumatic actuation line. All the
electrical actuators must operate simultaneously to ensure
the correct discharge time.
Figure 62 - Multiple Container Actuation
62
ISSUE No. 02
Ancillary Equipment
Discharge Pressure Switch
Single Container Systems Multiple Container Systems
On single container installations the pressure switch should On multi-container installations the pressure switch should
be located close to the valve assembly and connected with be located close to the last slave container and connected
a pilot hose from the pressure port outlet on the valve to by pilot hose to the tee connector on the pneumatic actuator
the connector on the pressure switch (see Figure 63). (see Figure 64).
Figure 63 - Discharge Pressure Switch Installation (Single Figure 64 - Discharge Pressure Switch Installation (Multiple
Container System) Container System)

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Discharge Pressure Switch (Continued)

To wire the discharge pressure switch to the control panel, NOTE: When the device (i.e. pressure switch) is
unscrew and remove the switch cover plate. Connect to connected to a standard supervisory input circuit, there
the appropriate terminals on the microswitch or if supplied will be no distinction between a wiring fault and device
with wires, to the coloured wires which are labelled as actuation . This device is to only be utilised when accepted
follows:- by the authority having jurisdiction.
Common (C) (violet)
Accessories
Normally Open (NO) (blue)
Door Notices
Normally Closed (NC) (black)
Warning notices are required at all exits and entrances
to protected area, ideally mounted on the door. Plates
Low Pressure Switch may be drilled and screw fixed or attached using suitable
All container valves are ‘Factory fitted’ with low pressure adhesive.
warning switches. Voltage input can be applied to either
terminal. Manual Release Notices
Manual release notices are required at all manual
Figure 65 - Low Pressure Switch to Control Panel diagram. actuators, remote manual actuators and call points. Plates
may be drilled and screw fixed or attached using suitable
Low Pressure Switch adhesive.
4.7 K EOL
TB2-15 Resistor
Completion Procedures
For ease of reference completion procedures may be
subdivided into the following sections;
TB2-16
Connections to Pyrochem PCR-100

• Pre Checks and Visual Inspections.
NOTE: Program output circuit 4 as a supervisory input circuit. • Final Connections.
See Pyrochem PCR-100 manual for programming details.
• Hand over Procedures.
CAUTION:
Low Pressure Switch
47 K EOL The completion of the installation system,
Resistor commissioning tests and hand-over may occur
before the area is ready for use. In the event
of delay between hand-over and the risk area
being available for protection, then the system
must be left in a ‘safe’ condition to avoid
accidental discharge. The system must only be
Connections to Pyrochem FMM-101 or FMM-1 Module
made operative once the area for protection has
been completed and is operational.
NOTE: Program the addressable module as supervisory. See

Pyrochem PCR-400 manual for programming details.
64
ISSUE No. 02
Pre-checks and Visual Inspections
General During detection system actuation verify the following

functions operate;
When the installation is complete, and before making the
final connections, the following checks should be made: • All apertures in hazard enclosure are closed by
dampers or other suitable methods.
Mechanical Checks
• Electrical equipment in the protected area is tripped
Inspect protected area closely for conformance to original and isolated.
risk specifications and for enclosable openings or sources
of agent loss which may have been overlooked in the Pneumatic Checks
original specification.
The slave actuators on manifolded systems are fired by
• Building work should be thoroughly checked to agent discharge. Pneumatic checks are detailed below;
ensure that enclosures have been properly constructed
and that voids in floors and above suspended ceilings • Remove all pneumatic actuators from container
have been sealed. valves.
• All back channels should be secured firmly to the • Disconnect pilot hose from the master container
wall or bulk head. valve adaptor (see Figure 62).
• Containers should be securely held within brackets. • Provide 4 bar (58 psi) pressure to the master
• Piping should be securely fixed within hangers. container valve pilot hose.
• All pipe connections must be tight. • Verify all pneumatic actuator pistons are in the fired
position.
• Nozzles to be the proper type, correctly placed, and
properly orientated. • Check for leaks. There must be less than 10% loss in
pressure within 1 minute).
• Check model and weight markings on container
nameplates to verify that correct containers and • Provide 34 bar (493 psi) pressure to the master
charges have been installed as required. container valve pilot hose.
• Verify that all warning and instruction plates are • Verify all pneumatic actuator pistons are in the fired
mounted where required. position.
• Check for leaks. There must be less than 10% loss in
Electrical Checks pressure within 1 minute).
The electrical systems may include interfaces with many Before replacing the pneumatic actuators, ensure that
other systems for alarm, indication, actuation, shutdown, all pistons are fully reset (see Figure 60). After reinstalling
etc. For complex electrical systems the scope and operating the pneumatic actuators, reconnect the pilot hose to the
requirements will be described in other documents. master container valve adaptor (see Figure 62).
Electrical checks are given below for a basic system using
electrical actuation of the container valve; Final Connections
• Remove top mounted electrical actuator or side Discharge Piping

mounted solenoid (which is connected via the
solenoid adaptor) from valve. Check that solenoid is The final connection of the discharge piping occurs at the
activated when system is triggered. If the solenoid container valve assembly. For single container systems,
adaptor is not present, remove electrical connections the valve anti-recoil cap can be removed and the discharge
from side mounted solenoid and check wiring voltage pipe connected to the container outlet. For multi-container
is correct for actuation when system is triggered. systems, the valve anti-recoil caps can be removed and all
discharge hoses fitted.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Hand-over Procedures
The entire system shall be thoroughly inspected to make
sure that it is complete and that all tests required during
installation have been properly carried out. In addition, the
following items are particularly important.
1. A container should be refilled or replaced when it
shows a loss in agent quantity of more than 5% or a
loss in pressure (adjusted for temperature) of more
than 10%. (Operating pressure of unit at 25 bar at
21 °C, 360 psi at 70 °F). Refer to Appendix A for
pressures at other container temperatures.
2. Check container weight information label against
system requirement. If there is any doubt or if there
has been a loss of weight, then the container must be
weighed.
3. Make sure the system is armed and the actuating
systems are operational.
Ensure adequate escape routes with directional signs

are provided. Issue of the appropriate documentation shall
constitute completion of the Hand-over procedure.
Appropriate records shall be issued by fire and/or
insurance authorities as to the suitability, acceptability and
availability of the system for the hazard area.
66
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 6 - INTEGRITY TESTING DATE: 2010-03
Introduction Below Ceiling Leakage Area (BCLA)

The hazard integrity is the ability to retain the discharged Experience has shown that leakage above a suspended
FM-200®. For a total flooding extinguishing system to be ceiling has a negligible effect on the FM-200®
effective, the design concentration must be achieved and concentration. Like water leaking from the holes in the
then maintained for at least ten minutes. The only method bottom of a swimming pool, FM-200® tends to escape
of testing the agent retention within the protected area is from leaks in the lower part of the enclosure due to the
to verify the integrity of the enclosure by applying proven weight of the mixture above it. The rate at which FM-200®
test procedures. is lost is therefore primarily governed by the leakage below
the floor, and walls beneath the ceiling. This is called the
The enclosure integrity test has been developed to Below Ceiling Leakage Area.
locate the source of leaks and, from the data collected,
predict the retention time, proving system performance
and removing the need for actual FM-200® discharge.
Predicting Retention Time
In order to determine with any degree of confidence that Once the ELA, BCLA and static pressures have been
the hazard area will hold the gas for the required time measured the next step is to calculate the retention time
period, where necessary an Enclosure Integrity Test in of the enclosure. The formula is derived from a standard
accordance with NFPA 2001 appendix C or the authority engineering/fluid dynamics principle. The result of the
having jurisdiction must be conducted. calculation is the number of minutes it takes for the FM-
200®/air interface to reach the minimum protected height
Principle required, normally about 75% of the enclosure area.
The test is conducted with a device known as a door fan,
which has been used in the energy conservation field for
Slab to Slab Walls
over 25 years. It has three basic components as follows: The only major limitation is that it cannot be used to
accurately predict a retention time if the perimeter walls
• An adjustable panel that fits in the doorway of the do not extend from slab to slab. The enclosure will almost
protected area invariably fail due to extensive leakage through the ceiling
tiles.
• A calibrated fixed speed fan
• A variable speed fan Coordination and Planning
It should only be necessary to conduct one integrity test,
The pressure created by the door fan causes the air to therefore it is essential to ensure that the enclosure is ready,
move through leaks in the enclosure at high speed making and that the relevant people have been informed. Having
it easy to pinpoint where leaks exist. A cool chemical established that any outstanding works are completed prior
smoke or other air current indicator is used to detect the to the test date, advise all interested parties in writing, if
approximate size and location of leaks. necessary outlining the testing method and principles
involved.
Equivalent Leakage Area (ELA)
The test to measure the ELA is conducted by blowing air
into or out of the enclosure to develop the same pressure
differential as would be created by the discharging FM-
200®. By measuring the air flow required it becomes
possible to calculate the ELA, which is the total of all
cracks, gaps and holes in the enclosure. The leakage
measurement achieved by taking air out of the enclosure
(depressurisation), and then blowing air into the enclosure
(pressurisation), is then averaged.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 6 - INTEGRITY TESTING
Integrity Test Procedure

Evaluation. The enclosure and immediate surrounding Dampers should be installed in both supply and return
area is initially examined visually to assess the readiness air ducts, as close as possible to the area. The duct volume
for testing, the existence of any attached spaces that could between the hazard and the damper must be added to the
affect the results, and that there is an adequate relief overall volume.
area and return air path. The volume of the enclosure Door Fan Installation. A door fan unit is installed in the
is confirmed and the highest equipment measured to designated test door in accordance with the manufacturer’s
ascertain the required level for retention time. instructions.
Preparation. All doors outside the area that are required to The gauges are zeroed by taking them to full scale
be open for the test are wedged open with suitable notices deflection and holding for approximately ten seconds,
posted to advise personnel. Where voids are protected by after which the gauges are gently tapped and zeroed.
FM-200®, tiles are removed to ensure a uniform air flow.
Enclosure Evaluation
The enclosure is put in the state it would be in prior
to a discharge, e.g. ventilation system shut down, dampers Static Pressure Measurements. With the door fan
closed, etc. equipment fully installed and set up, but with all openings
closed, a measurement of any pressure difference
Note. Equipment within the enclosure that does not affect
between the enclosure and the relief area is made. If the
the integrity may be left running even if it will be shut
measurement is unduly high its causes are ascertained and
down in the event of a discharge, preventing unnecessary
if possible permanently reduced or eliminated.
disruption and inconvenience.
Total Enclosure Leakage Method. Using an adequate
Ventilation. Air conditioning and/or forced ventilation
range on one fan, or a number of fans, a pressure difference
can affect the system performance and the quantity of
of between column pressure and column pressure plus
agent required.
30% is created. The pressure difference, and the air flow
required to generate this, is then recorded. This is carried
(i) Self-contained air conditioning unit out for both pressurisation and depressurisation modes.
The total equivalent leakage area and the predicted
A self-contained unit conditions the air within the retention time is calculated.
enclosure and does not rely on a fresh air supply, or draw
air from other parts of the building. If the hazard has a self- Suspended Ceiling Leakage Neutralisation Method.
contained unit and it is located within the area without an This procedure is used to improve the accuracy of the
outside air supply, no additional agent is required. It is not predicted retention time where a reasonable air-tight
necessary to shut down the unit prior to a discharge as the ceiling exists, whether or not the ceiling is protected with
mixing effect is beneficial. However if the air-conditioning FM-200®.
unit is left running, a depleting concentration rather than
a descending FM-200®/air interface will be formed. The Note. Leak paths through the ceiling may be temporarily
concentration will be depleted due to leakage. Therefore sealed.
overgassing the enclosure may help to obtain the required
ten minute retention time at minimum concentration. The volumes above and below the false ceiling are
depressurised to the same extent but using separate fans.
(ii) Central air conditioning unit This is confirmed by using cool chemical smoke to check
A central air conditioning unit relies on air from outside that no air is flowing through the false ceiling.
and is often linked by ducts to other parts of the building, Readings of the pressure difference between the
therefore, prior to a discharge, the unit should be shut down enclosure, relief area, and the air flow through the fan(s)
and/or dampers operated to close the ducts. Sufficient time used to depressurise the room and false ceiling are made,
must be allowed for the plant to stop, or dampers to close, and then the procedure is repeated in the pressurisation
before discharge occurs. mode. The below ceiling leakage area is then calculated
and used in conjunction with the ELA to predict a revised
retention time.
68
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 6 - INTEGRITY TESTING DATE: 2010-03
Calculation Leakage Location

A portable computer is used to collate the data and calculate If the enclosure fails the test, or if the client requests, an
the values. The associated printer provides a detailed hard inspection of the enclosure with the door fan running can
copy of the data on site. be made. This makes it possible to locate the source of any
leakage by using cool chemical smoke. This procedure
also tests the efficiency of any dampers, etc.
Figure 66 - Typical Printout
---------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------
RETROTEC DISCHARGE SIMULATION VER. HA5.1 FAN TEST READINGS & DATA
RETENTION TIME PREDICTION MODEL
---------------------------------------------------------- ----------------------------------------------------------
Location: Hygood. Test Enclosure Location: Hygood. Test Enclosure

Room Name: Test House Room Name: Test House
Testing Company: HYGOOD LIMITED
Technician: C Uzzell Temperature IN: 20 Temperature OUT: 20
Date: 12.12.96 Static Pressure@FanTest: 0
Whole Room Test.
All Outputs are in METRIC Units. DEPRESSURE PRESSURE
Operator and Gauges Location OUT OUT
Gas Being Modelled: FM200 Room Pressure Gauge Reading 14.0 14.0
Lbs/Kgs of Agent in Cylinder(s): 17.00 Corrected Room Delta P (pa) -14.0 14.0
Net Room Volume (m3): 30.00 Blower Range Config Used 0.1 0.1
Room Height (m): 3.20 Flow Pressure Gauge Reading 45.0 45.0
Minimum Protected Height (m). 2.90 Corrected Flow Pressure 31.0 45.0
Minimum Retention Time (min): 10.00 Calculated Air Flow (1s) 13.4 16.2
Initial Gas Concentration (%): 7.22 Temp. Corrected Flow 13.4 16.2
Static Pressure @ Discharge: 0.00 Leakage Area (m²) 0.0046 0.0055
---------------------------------------------------------- Average Leakage Area (m²) 0.0050
----------------------------------------------------------
Equivalent Leakage Area (ELA m²): 0.0050
Hole in Ceiling (m²): 0.0025 RM= 1.639 PC= 13.7
Hole in Floor (BCLA m²): 0.0025 A T= 0.003 ALL- 0.002
This Room PASSES the Test as the Predicted Retention Time is 10.1 minutes for C3= 3.019 C 4= 0.000
the agent/air interface to drop below the minimum protected height. GD= 7.260 K 1- 1.8850
AR= 9.374 T= 605.679
Witnessed By: PA= 13.7 FA= 0.500
X ___________________________________ CF= 1.000 K 2= 0.0046
EL= 0.000 TD = 20.000
Software Conforms to 1992 NFPA 12A/2001 TCD Room Integrity Procedure.
Page 2 Of 2 Licensed to: MARCRON SAFETY SYSTEMS (UK) LIMITED
Maximum Allowable ELA (m²): 0.005
Registration # : 207
Interface Height @ 10 minutes: 2.903
----------------------------------------------------------
Page 1 Of 2 Licensed to: MARCRON SAFETY SYSTEMS (UK) LIMITED
Registration # : 207

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 7 - SYSTEM OPERATION
General Comments Fully Automatic System

Personnel required to work in the protected area should be Where a sensitive fire detection system is included for the
conversant with the detection and extinguishing equipment automatic release of extinguishing agent, the system shall
installed, and trained in fire procedures. All life-saving only be capable of automatic release once two or more
equipment must be properly maintained. sensors detect the fire.
The method of system operation is chosen at the The number of detectors and their spacing is designed
design stage to suit the protection required for the hazard to ensure a satisfactory response time. To ensure personnel
area and the environmental factors appropriate to that may safely evacuate the risk area an adjustable time delay
area. This part of the document provides information should be fitted such that sufficient time may elapse prior
relevant to ALL the standard operational systems to cover to system discharge. Ideally, the delay period shall not
the eventuality of changes to, or expansion of the original exceed 30 seconds (BS5306-5).
design.
Prior to system discharge (and at the commencement
System Detection and Actuation of any time delay period) a clearly audible alarm different
from any other used shall sound and continue until the
complete system is reset. In areas of high ambient noise
General level, a visual indication may also be required, in addition
Each system is designed to suit the hazard area, whether to the audible warning.
the area is normally manned or unmanned, and whether The design of a system for automatic detection, signal
the detection/actuation devices are to be manual or distribution, alarms, etc. is not always of our supply.
automatic. The permutation of systems is large but from Therefore, details appertaining to fire detection and
an operational point of view, the systems are best grouped alarm operation and maintenance are not included in this
as:- document.
• Manual.
UL Listed Detection & Control Equipment
• Fully Automatic.
Detectors shall be UL Listed for the intended application.
• Automatic with Manual Intervention. Control Panels shall be UL Listed for releasing device
service and compatible with detection and FM-200®
Engineered Total Flooding Fire Extinguishing System.
Manual System
Manual systems depend on human detection of a fire in
the hazard area and prompt action to actuate the manual
actuator for the FM-200® system to discharge and flood
the protected area and extinguish the fire.
All other instructions associated with manual
operation form part of the user’s procedures on safety
precautions and fire drill. If required assistance can be
provided to help the user prepare procedures for safety
and fire precautions.
70
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 7 - SYSTEM OPERATION DATE: 2010-03
Fully Automatic System with Manual FM-200® Decomposition

Inter-vention FM-200® decomposes when exposed to temperatures
Manual intervention of an automatic system may be exceeding 482 °C (900 °F); such as flames, hot metal
included for the following condition; surfaces, etc. The rate of this decomposition is dependent
upon the size of the area where extreme temperatures are
• Where personnel are required to work within the found, and also upon the length of FM-200® exposure
protected area. time.
In protected areas where personnel are present To reduce decomposition, FM-200® systems are
and the concentration is greater than NOAEL, it is designed to discharge and extinguish the fire quickly.
recommended that the automatic feature of the system The maximum duration of discharge for these systems
is isolated during occupation. This may be achieved at 21 °C (70 °F) is 10 seconds, so the minimum amount
either by an electrically contacted lock assembly or of decomposition occurs. Hydrogen Fluoride is the most
by a clearly marked key switch at a suitable location toxic decomposition product. This material generates a
outside the risk area. sharp acrid odour, which is easily detected and acts as a
warning and a good safeguard to personnel.
Conditions During a Fire
FM-200® Discharge Conditions
The user’s fire and safety instructions to personnel should
include advice on the conditions prevailing during the FM-200® has low boiling point, consequently the discharge
discharge of an FM-200® system. This advice is intended is very cold at the point where it leaves the nozzle. Care
to prepare the personnel for the situations likely to arise should be taken to avoid working within 1 metre (3.28 ft)
and therefore minimise the risks of panic. Three major of FM-200® discharge nozzles.
conditions prevail during FM-200® discharge of which The velocity of discharge of FM-200® from a discharge
personnel should be made aware: nozzle is very high, care should be taken to insure that
objects which may become dangerous projectiles are
FM-200® Concentration secured or removed from the hazard area.
FM-200® total flooding systems greater than 9% design
concentration should only be used with manual actuation
in normally occupied areas. A normally occupied area is
defined as an area intended for occupancy.
Any area protected by FM-200® should be evacuated
prior to start of system discharge. Where egress of
normally occupied areas cannot be accomplished within
one minute, FM-200® total flooding systems shall be
designed not to exceed 9.0% concentration.
Refer to NFPA 2001, Paragraph 1.5.1.2.1 for
additional information.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 7 - SYSTEM OPERATION
Actions Following a Fire

General
These notes are only applicable to the hazard area(s) Should it be necessary to enter a space containing FM-
protected by a FM-200® fire extinguishing system. Where 200® or decomposition products the following precautions
such a system may form part of, or combine with other forms should be taken;
of fire protection systems then composite instructions for
all systems are necessary to ensure the safety of personnel • Use a fresh air mask or self contained breathing
and property following a fire. Assistance is available to help equipment.
a client prepare composite instructions. If the organisation
• Do Not use a filter mask or canister type mask.
has appointed, or nominated, a responsible person to act
as a ‘Fire Officer’. Actions following a fire should be co- • Do Not enter space unless you are under observation
ordinated and/or directed by the Fire Officer. from outside the space, or tethered by a lifeline.
Actions Immediately Following a Fire • Ensure that all pressurised equipment is isolated or
safe from release.
These actions should, at a minimum, include the
following:
• Advise the emergency services, Fire, Accident, Police

if appropriate.
• Organize a ‘roll-call’ of employees and any visitors.
• Prevent unauthorised personnel from entering the
hazard area.
• In the case of deep seated fires, the hazard space
should be kept tightly closed for at least 60 minutes
after discharge of the FM-200® extinguishing agent.
It is essential that the fire be completely extinguished

before ventilating the space. Before permitting any
one to enter the space, ventilate thoroughly or ensure
self-contained breathing equipment is used.
• Do not enter the hazard area in which fire has been

extinguished with an open flame or lighted cigarette
as the possible presence of flammable vapours may
cause re-ignition or explosion.
72
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 8 - MAINTENANCE DATE: 2010-03
Introduction
This section provides user inspection and maintenance Weekly Check of System Components
guidance for FM-200® Engineered Systems. A log book
will be provided to record all inspections, maintenance, Make a visual inspection of the system components,
measurements and actions taken. The continued capability distribution piping and nozzles. Check the immediate
for effective performance of an FM-200® Total Flooding vicinity of all equipment to ensure that no accidental
Fire Suppression System depends on fully adequate damage or tampering has occurred.
maintenance procedures, with periodic testing. Reference
Weekly General Check
NFPA 2001 section 7-1 to 7-6 and ISO 14520-1.
Inspect the hazard area, access routes, container storage
User’s Programme of Inspection area, floor voids and areas above suspended ceilings
The installer should provide the user with an inspection to ensure housekeeping is good and that no refuse has
programme for the system and components. The accumulated. Ensure that access to the system container
programme shall include instructions on the action to be assemblies and local remote controls is unobstructed.
taken in respect of faults. The user’s inspection programme
is intended to detect faults at an early stage to allow Monthly Check of Notices
rectification before the system may have to operate.
Inspect system and protected spaces to ensure that warning
A suitable programme is as follows:- signs, safety precautions and operating instructions are
posted and clearly visible.
Weekly Check of Hazard Area
Monthly Personnel Training Check
Inspect the hazard area against the original layout to
ensure that there have been no changes that might affect Check that all personnel who may have to operate
the proper performance of the fire protection system. the equipment or system are properly trained and are
Changes might include: authorized to do so, and in particular that new employees
have been instructed in its use.
• Contents of area.
• Use of area.
• Air Handling equipment in area.
• Openings in area.
• Floor/ceiling voids.
• Partitioning.
Weekly Check of Containers
Check storage container pressure gauges and ambient

temperature, compare these pressures to the Temperature
Correction Chart to determine temperature corrected
pressure. If the container corrected pressure shows a loss
of more than 10%, the containers should be removed for
weighing. All measurements and actions shall be recorded
in the log book.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 8 - MAINTENANCE
Contract Service and Maintenance

Systems shall be thoroughly inspected and tested for proper Container Weighing
operation by qualified contract personnel in accordance
Where a Client does not wish to use an approved
with the requirements of NFPA as well as any other standard
distributors maintenance contract or the specialised
accepted to the authority having jurisdiction. Before any
liquid level detection equipment, then containers must be
checks are carried out, ensure the extinguishing system
weighed to establish the FM200® content. The weighing
is isolated electrically and mechanically and remove all
procedure is as follows:
electrical and pneumatic actuators. No maintenance work
should be carried out without obtaining approval from the
Fire Officer and advising any personnel within the hazard • Remove all manual controls, pressure actuators
area. The following Programme should be carried out and pressure actuation pipe or tubing and flexible
in addition to the User’s Programme of Inspection. The electrical connectors.
user shall be provided with a signed and dated report of
• Disconnect and remove discharge piping / discharge
the inspection advising any rectification carried out or
hoses from container valves.
needed.
• Fit anti-recoil caps onto container valves.
3 Monthly Actuator Check .
• Remove containers from bracketing and weigh
Test and service all actuating mechanisms. containers. Any container showing more than the
maximum allowable weight loss must be recharged
3 Monthly Electrical Systems Check by a qualified recharge agent.
• Record weight of container on record tag.
Test and service all electrical detection and alarm systems
as recommended in NFPA as well as any other standard • Replace containers in bracketing and remove anti-
accepted to the authority having jurisdiction. recoil caps.
• Reconnect discharge piping / discharge hoses and all
6 Monthly Container Check
control heads, pressure actuators, pressure actuation
Externally inspect containers for signs of damage or pipe or tubing and flexible electric connectors.
unauthorised modifications. Check container labels are
securely fixed and legible. Check container brackets and Using the Liquid Level Measuring Device
fittings.
The liquid level measuring device is used to determine
6 Monthly Contents Check the liquid FM-200® level in 106, 147, 180 and 343 litre
container assemblies. During a maintenance examination,
Examine the container pressure gauge reading and refer to the measuring device will enable a service representative
the temperature correction chart. If the container pressure to convert a linear measurement to agent weight in
corrected to temperature is below 10% of the stated order to determine if the tank has any weight loss. This
pressure it must be replaced or recharged. measurement is accomplished without removing the FM-
200® tank from the fire suppression system.
Verification of the content of FM200® in the containers
may be achieved through either liquid level detection or
container weighing. If containers show a extinguishant
loss of more than 5% or a pressure loss (adjusted for
temperature) of more than 10%, the container should be
refilled or replaced.
74
ISSUE No. 02
Operation Figure 68 - Reading Liquid Level
To measure the liquid FM-200® level:

1. Remove the protective cap from the measuring device
housing.
2. Lift the measuring tape to the end (or approximately
75 mm (3”) above the expected level). Slowly lower
the tape until a magnetic interlock is felt (see Figure
67).
Figure 67 - Liquid Level Measuring Device
READ LEVEL
HERE
MEASURING
TAPE
4. To reinstall tape, quickly pull on the tape to disengage

the magnetic interlock. Then slide the tape into the
housing and replace the protective cap.
5. Using the Weight Conversion Table located in
Appendix D, determine the FM-200® weight of charge
MAGNETS as follows:
INTERLOCKED
a. Find the liquid level reading along the left hand vertical
line of the table.
b. From that point, follow the horizontal line to the point
3. Read the measurement on the tape directly at the top where it intersects with the temperature column (using
of the plastic sleeve in the measuring device housing the FM-200® tank temperature noted in Step 3).
(see Figure 68). Record this measurement and note the c. Read the weight of FM-200® at the level / temperature
temperature of the container module. column intersection.
6. Compare the weight from the table to the weight of
Notice. The container module temperature can be charge stamped on the container nameplate. If the
determined by measuring the ambient temperature at measurement shows a net weight loss of more than
the container location. The container must be stored 5%, the tank must be weighed to verify the liquid level
at this temperature for at least 24 hours to obtain an measurement. If the weight loss still exceeds 5% of the
accurate liquid level reading. weight of charge, the container requires recharging.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 8 - MAINTENANCE
Example: Using the Container Weight Conversion 6 Monthly Control Valve & Actuator Check
Table
Check all manual and pneumatic actuators for free
movement of the piston. Replace whole unit where
A semi-annual weight check is being performed on
appropriate. Check all control valves for correct manual
a 180 litre FM-200® tank filled with 137 kg (301 lbs.)
function and automatic valves additionally, for correct
of FM- 200®. The temperature of the container is 16 °C
automatic function.
(60 °F). The liquid level measuring device reading is
36.2 cm. (14¼ in.) 6 Monthly Pipe Network Check
Find the 36.2 cm (14¼ in.) line on the left side of
Externally check pipework to determine its conditions.
the 180 litre container table and read horizontally across
Replace or pressure test and repair as necessary Pipework
the table to the 16 °C (60 °F)column. Then, by reading
showing corrosion or mechanical damage.
the weight of FM-200® at the level/temperature column
intersection, it is determined that the weight of FM-200®
6 Monthly Nozzle Check
is 136 kg. (299.2 lbs.)
Inspect nozzles for dust and debris, clean out where
To determine if this is within the 5% weight loss
necessary.
tolerance, multiply the weight of charge (taken from the
container nameplate) by 0.95 to determine the minimum
6 Monthly Enclosure Check
weight of FM-200® required in this container:
137 kg x 0.95 = 130 kg (301 lb. x 0.95 = 286 lb.) Carry out a full visual check of the enclosure for integrity
and confirm the dimensions and the configuration of the
Because the measured weight of FM-200®, 136 kg, hazard are as the original drawings or previous visit. If
(299.2 lb.) is more than the minimum required FM-200® drawings are not available and this is the first visit then
weight of 130 kg (286 lb.), the weight of FM-200® is dimensions should be taken and passed to the engineering
within the 5% weight loss tolerance. department together with the quantity of agent to enable a
calculation to be carried out to ensure the correct quantity
If the measured weight had been less than the 5% of gas has been used.
weight loss tolerance, the container should be weighted to
verify the liquid level measurement. If the weight loss still 12 Monthly Hose Check
exceeds 5% of the weight of charge, the container must All system hoses should be examined for damage. If visual
be recharged. examination shows any deficiency, the hose shall
be replaced.
12 Monthly Integrity Test
Integrity test the enclosure to determine if the leakage

area has changed sufficiently from that measured during
installation.
Electrical Actuator Ten Year Lifespan
The removable electrical actuator has a life span of 10

years from manufacture, which is indicated on the label,
and so should be replaced before this date is reached.
Personnel Training
All persons who may be expected to inspect, test, maintain

or operate the fire extinguishing system shall be kept
adequately trained in the functions they are expected to
perform.Personnel working in an enclosure protected
by a gaseous extinguishant shall receive training in the
operation, use of the system and safety issues.
76
ISSUE No. 02
Mechanical Servicing Procedure

a. Remove valve actuator(s) from the container iii) Examine the auxiliary electrical device/alarm,
valve(s). door closers etc., have all operated correctly.
b. For master/slave system complete the following iv) Ensure actuator is reset before refitting, using the
steps to check the slave actuation system:- reset tool provided.
1. Disconnect pneumatic valve actuators from the d. For master/slave system, remove the appropriate
slave container valves. port plug and reconnect the pilot actuation line to
the slave port on the back of the master valve.
2. Disconnect the pilot loop from the master container
valve and install the appropriate plug. e. Reset pressure switches after the test has been
completed.
3. Introduce 4 bar (58 psi) pressure into the pilot
actuation line to the pneumatic actuators. (1) An approved distributor is carrying out the
maintenance on the detection system.
4. Check that the pistons in the pneumatic valve
actuators have fully operated. (2) If the servicing of the detection system is being
carried out at the same time as the mechanical
5. Check for leaks. There must be less than 10% loss in service by another nominated body.
Specialised Maintenance Duties
6. Vent pressure in the pilot actuation line and re-set all
of the actuators.
Container Hydrostatic Pressure Testing
7. Introduce 34 bar (493 psi) pressure into the pilot In countries where NFPA 2001 applies the following
actuation line to the pneumatic actuators. criteria are used for hydrostatic pressure testing :
8. Check that the pistons in the pneumatic valve Containers only need hydrostatic pressure testing after
actuators have fully operated. discharge. Systems under local jurisdiction may have
other rules of hydrostatic pressure testing, please follow
9. Check for leaks. There must be less than 10% loss in these rules.
Finally
10. Vent pressure in the pilot actuation line and re-set all Carry out a final visual inspection of the system and
of the actuators. the protected area to ensure that all equipment has been
reinstalled and reconnected properly. Ensure that any
c. To check the electrical actuation system (for single associated control/indication panel is displaying normal
container systems only electrical actuators are operation. Complete the site log book, recording work
fitted): carried out and parts used. Inform the responsible person
that the work is complete and that the system is back
i) Remove electrical actuators from valve on-line.
assembles.
ii) Activate the detection system in accordance with

procedures provided with the system. When this
test is performed, the release circuit of the detection
system must operate the electric actuators causing
the plungers to be firmly extended.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 9 - RECHARGING PROCEDURE
Refurbishment of container valves can only be carried out by the Original

Equipment Manufacturer (O.E.M). This section is for information only
Recharging (O.E.M Only)

This section describes the procedures to enable the refilling 9. Replace O-ring seal for the top cap with new :
of a container that has been discharged and will require
25 mm (1”) valve O-ring (Part No.12869)
recharging. This covers 25 mm (1”), 50 mm (2”) and 80
mm (3”) container valve assemblies. 50 mm (2”) valve O-ring (Part No.17035)
Valve Refurbishment (O.E.M Only) 80 mm (3”) valve O-ring (Part No.570295)

On receiving a container that requires to be recharged the 10. Screw new schrader into top cap using schrader tool
following operations are carried out. See figure 69 or 70 set to 0.275 Nm, (0.25 to 0.3 Nm tolerance). Replace
for component description. Ensure all parts are cleaned top cap to valve and lock into place with grub screw. (80
fully before any part is replaced. mm (3”) valve does not use grub screw).
1. Check that the container is empty. 11. If valve has been removed from neck ring, replace
neck seal : (This is to pre-dome burst disc if required)
2. Remove valve, syphon tube grub screw and syphon
tube from container. Siphon tube for 343 litre container 25 mm (1”) valve Neck O-ring (Part No. 12853)
stays in the container collar, (This operation only needs
50 mm (2”) valve Neck O-ring (Part No. 12855)
to be undertaken if the burst disc needs replacing).
80 mm (3”) valve- Neck O-ring (Part No.570294)
3. Unscrew top cap by removing locking grub screw
located behind safety cap chain fixing screw. Once that 12. The outlet adapter may require to be replaced, if this
has been taken off the schrader should also be removed. is so the outlet will need to be removed and threads
(80 mm (3”) valve does not use a grub screw, external cleaned. Apply Loctite 648 to the thread of the new
type valve cap). outlet adapter and screw fully home. Re-fit anti-recoil
cap.
All O-ring seals must be lubricated using PTFE silicone
grease. In the event that the pressure gauge or pressure switch
needs to be replaced:
4. O-ring seal for the top cap has to be removed :
13. Remove to reveal grub screw. Check the grub screw
25 mm (1”) valve O-ring (Part No.12869)
setting, this should be initially tighten fully and then
50 mm (2”) valve O-ring (Part No.17035) loosen by 1/2 a turn.
80 mm (3”) valve O-ring (Part No.570295) 14. Apply PTFE tape to replacement components and
refit.
5. Remove shuttle from valve body and dispose.
15. Remove 53.4 bar (775 psi) burst disc assy if damaged
6. Locate replacement suttle assembly : from burst disc port and replace with a new assy.
25 mm (1”) valve shuttle (Part No. 16855). 25 mm (1”) and 50 mm (2”) valve:
50 mm (2”) valve shuttle(Part No.19490). M18 assembly, torque to 20 Nm, (Part No. 20915)
80 mm (3”) valve shuttle (Part No. 570373) 80 mm (3”) valve:

torque to 20.3 Nm, (Part No. 15330)
7. Apply PTFE silicone grease to new top cap O-ring.
16. Valve assembly is now ready to be leak tested.
8. Replace shuttle into valve, spray a small quantity of See testing section.
PTFE silicone grease into the bore of the valve body.
78
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 9 - RECHARGING PROCEDURE DATE: 2010-03
Figure 69 - 50 mm (2”) Valve exploded view.
PLASTIC CAP
SCHRADER VALVE
TOP CAP
TOP CAP O-RING
SHUTTLE O-RING
SHUTTLE
BOTTOM CAP O-RING
BOTTOM CAP
1/8” PLUG
PRESSURE SWITCH
BURST DISC ASSEMBLY

OUTLET
ANTI-RECOIL
CAP PRESSURE GAUGE
CHAIN WASHER
CHAIN
SCREW
CHAIN SCREW LOCK NUT
CHAIN COLLAR O-RING

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Figure 70 - 3” Valve exploded view.
SCHRADER VALVE
CAP
SHUTTLE O-RING
SHUTTLE
BOTTOM CAP O-RING
BOTTOM CAP
CHAIN SCREW
BODY O-RING
ANTI-RECOIL
CAP
1/4 IN. PIPE PLUG
BURST DISC ASSEMBLY
GAUGE
INSERT
PRESSURE SWITCH
PRESSURE GAUGE SCHRADER
VALVE
COLLAR O-RING
80
ISSUE No. 02
Testing (O.E.M Only)

On completion of a valve refurb the valve assy is subjected 5. Slowly release the gas from the test rig, vent from
to two tests - Valve Assy Pre-dome and Leak Test. closing down adapter and ensure that the outlet cap
(Test required if burst disc was replaced) adapter tap is opened before attempting to remove the
adapter.
The tests are conducted on a Nitrogen rig using
a outlet filling adapter cap, test bottom cap and closing If a leak is identified it should be rectified, if the leak
down adaptor. (See figure 71) persists the valve assembly should be rejected.
Replacing Valve Assembly to container

Figure 71 - Nitrogen Test Station Component Layout
1. Take container and clean neck thread using a power drill
NEEDLE PRESSURE NEEDLE REGULATOR and the appropriate attachment. Use care when cleaning
VALVE GAUGE VALVE NITROGEN neck threads as the O-ring seal could be damaged.
2. Remove debris from inside the container as well as from
the neck thread, this should be done using the workshop
NEEDLE
VENT VALVE
vacuum cleaner and airline.
PRESSURE
GAUGE
3. PTFE grease must be applied to the clean container
neck thread.
CLOSING
DOWN NEEDLE
VALVE
4. Take the appropriate syphon tube for the correct
ADAPTOR TEST BOTTOM container and valve assy, making sure that the syphon
CAP
VENT tube and grub screw hole has been properly de-burred.
NEEDLE
VALVE
5. The syphon must be cleaned either by hand with paper
OUTLET CAP
towels or in the workshop washer.
6. Ensure the siphon tube O-ring is in place. Fit the syphon
PRESSURE
GAUGE
tube into the valve assy, ensuring that the grub screw
hole’s line up (does not apply to 80 mm (3”) valve - tube
1. The valve assy is assembled to the nitrogen rig bottom remains in container).
cap using PTFE/silicon greased O-ring on the valve neck
7. Remove excess loctite adhesive and screw in grub
thread. The outlet adapter cap is also fitted, ensuring that
screw.
the vent tap is closed.
8. Fit valve and syphon tube assembly to container,
2. The nitrogen regulator is opened to 40 bar (580 psi)
insuring that the neck O-ring is in place.
and the pressure to the valve is slowly increased to this
pressure, this is to pre-dome the burst disc. This pressure 25 mm (1”) valve - Neck O-ring (Part No. 12853)
is held for 1 minute ensuring that there is no drop in
pressure indicated by nitrogen rig gauge. 50 mm (2”) valve - Neck O-ring (Part No. 12855)
3. A Water /soap solution is poured into the top cap 80 mm (3”) valve- Neck O-ring (Part No.570294)
schrader and leak detection spray is applied to all ports 9. Secure the container in to the pneumatic belt vice and
on the valve to check for leakage. If no leaks are present tighten the valve using the spanner, until the valve
the pressure to the valve must be reduced to 25 bar bottoms onto the top of the neck ring.
(362.5 psi) and the closing down adapter fitted. To
close the valve shuttle down, 40 bar (580 psi) is applied
through the closing down adapter.
4. Once again check for leaks.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Field Installing Liquid Level Measuring

Device
8. Slowly increase the nitrogen pressure on the
Caution. Container must be completely empty before approved pressure regulator to the stated pressure on the
removing the liquid level device or the port plug. filling instruction sheet, making the relevant allowances in
Severe injury or damage could accur if container pressure to compensate for the current room temperature
contains pressure. (see the temperature correction chart Table 25). Read off
the calibrated external fill pressure gauge to determine
If desired, and the container is equipped with a port for when the intended charging pressure has been reached.
liquid level measuring device, it must be installed before (Check that the container pressure gauge reads within ±
filling the container. 1 bar (± 14.5 psi) of the fill gauge, replace container gauge
To install the liquid liquid level measuring device, if outside this tolerance).
remove the plug the plug in the liquid level port on the
container. Caution. When superpressurising, a pressure
regulator must be used when the pressure source is a
Make certain the O-ring on the device, the thread on
tank of high pressure gas.
the device and the container port, are clean. Apply a small
amount of PTFE silicone grease to the O-ring and the
Ensure that the test box registers a change in state
thread on the device.
(normally open to normally closed or normally closed to
Install the device into the port and tighten to a metal normally open) at approximately 24 bar rising (350 psi).
to metal contact.
9. Agitate the container to accelerate nitrogen
absorption into the agent and top up the pressure
accordingly. Switch off nitrogen supply once absorption
Filling has stopped.
Filling can only be undertaken by trained and authorised
10. Attach the closing down adaptor to the container
UL and FM fill stations.
valve top cap and connect the nitrogen closing down line.
Regulate the nitrogen pressure to 40 bar (580 psi) with the
1. With the Container ready for filling a check is made
fill rig.
to the filling instruction sheet and the container fill weight,
time, date and fill details record. 11. Open the closing down valve for 1 second only to
force the valve shuttle down. The container valve can be
2. The container is placed on a scales and the
heard to close. Turn off the nitrogen supply and vent the
appropriate filling adapter attached to the container valve
closing down line with the needle valve.
discharge port.
12. Vent the fill hose to atmosphere. If the pressure
3. Attach the fill hose / vent line from the filling rig
drops to zero as shown on fill rig gauge marked outlet
outlet to filling adapter.
within 10 seconds, the valve has closed. (Top up if
4. Reset the scale to zero to compensate for weight of necessary)
container and fill hose.
13. Remove the closing down line adapter.
5. Switch on the pump marked ‘Liquid’ on filling
14. If valve does not close after 5 applications, the
cabinet and fill container to required weight, refer to fill
cylinder must be de-pressurised. Ensure vent valve is
tolerances table 24. (less approximately 0.7 kg (1.5 lbs)
closed when not required to prevent contamination on fill
which is present in pipework and will be forced through
line.
during pressurisation). When the fill is reached switch off
pump. 15. Test all ports with leak detection spray, and
Schrader with water/soap solution.
6. Remove container from scales, zero scales and
weigh to verify fill is within tolerance, adjust if required. If a leaks is observed, minor leaks may be cured by
tightening the offending components.
7. Attach low pressure switch wires to test box and
regulate nitrogen pressure to 13.8 bar (200 psi) on fill rig
and switch on supply.
82
ISSUE No. 02
16. Remove fill hose and filling adapter, leak test the
outlet and attach anti-recoil cap. Note : When leak testing
outlet with spray, do not look directly into port, examine
quickly from an angle.)
17. Reset scales and note down gross weight.
18. Make certain all safety caps are in place, schrader
protection cap Part No. 12569.
19. Attach label to container stating the following
information. Job number, Customer, Project, Container
size, Fill weight, Gross weight, Date filled, Type of
agent.
20. Place container in bonded area for leak monitoring
for at least 24 hours prior to dispatch.
21. After 24 hours a Leak Test on the container is
conducted - see section on Container / valve assy leakage
test.
22. Insert fill information on to container label.
4.5 to 16 litre Container: Label part No. 314.205.021

Label part No. 314.205.045*
32 to 343 litre Container: Label part No. 314.205.022
Label part No. 314.205.046*
23. Adhere label to container 50 mm (2”) below the
container top fixing bracket height.
Table 24 :Fill Tolerance Table.

Container Size FillTolerance Tolerance
4.5 litre +0.04, -0 kg (+0.09, -0 lb) +0.75, -0 bar (+11, -0 psi)
8 litre +0.04, -0 kg (+0.09, -0 lb) +0.75, -0 bar (+11, -0 psi)
40 litre* +0.16, -0 kg (+0.35, -0 lb) +0.75, -0 bar (+11, -0 psi)
67.5 litre* +0.26, -0 kg (+0.57, -0 lb) +0.75, -0 bar (+11, -0 psi)
80 litre* +0.50, -0 kg (+1.10, -0 lb) +0.75, -0 bar (+11, -0 psi)

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Table 25: Temperature Correction Chart.

Temperature Developed Temperature Developed Temperature Developed
Pressure Pressure Pressure
°C (°F) Bar (psi) °C (°F) Bar (psi) °C (°F) Bar (psi)
0.0 (32) 20.2 (292.8) 18.3 (65) 24.6 (356.7) 36.7 (98) 29.0 (420.6)
0.6 (33 20.3 (294.8) 18.9 (66) 24.7 (358.7) 37.2 (99) 29.1 (422.6)
1.1 (34) 20.5 (296.7) 19.4 (67) 24.9 (360.6) 37.8 (100) 29.3 (424.5)
1.7 (35) 20.6 (298.6) 20.0 (68) 25.0 (362.5) 38.3 (101) 29.4 (426.4)
2.2 (36) 20.7 (300.6) 20.6 (69) 25.1 (364.5) 38.9 (102) 29.5 (428.4)
2.8 (37) 20.9 (302.5) 21.1 (70) 25.3 (366.4) 39.4 (103) 29.7 (430.3)
3.3 (38) 21.0 (304.5) 21.7 (71) 25.4 (368.4) 40.0 (104) 29.8 (432.2)
3.9 (39) 21.1 (306.4) 22.2 (72) 25.5 (370.3) 40.6 (105) 29.9 (434.2)
4.4 (40) 21.3 (308.3) 22.8 (73) 25.7 (372.2) 41.1 (106) 30.1 (436.1)
5.0 (41) 21.4 (310.3) 23.3 (74) 25.8 (374.2) 41.7 (107) 30.2 (438.1)
5.6 (42) 21.5 (312.2) 23.9 (75) 25.9 (376.1) 42.2 (108) 30.3 (440.0)
6.1 (43) 21.7 (314.1) 24.4 (76) 26.1 (378.0) 42.8 (109) 30.5 (441.9)
6.7 (44) 21.8 (316.1) 25.0 (77) 26.2 (380.0) 43.3 (110) 30.6 (443.9)
7.2 (45) 21.9 (318.0) 25.6 (78) 26.3 (381.9) 43.9 (111) 30.7 (445.8)
7.8 (46) 22.1 (319.9) 26.1 (79) 26.5 (383.8) 44.4 (112) 30.9 (447.7)
8.3 (47) 22.2 (321.9) 26.7 (80) 26.6 (385.8) 45.0 (113) 31.0 (449.7)
8.9 (48) 22.3 (323.8) 27.2 (81) 26.7 (387.7) 45.6 (114) 31.1 (451.6)
9.4 (49) 22.5 (325.8) 27.8 (82) 26.9 (389.6) 46.1 (115) 31.3 (453.5)
10.0 (50) 22.6 (327.7) 28.3 (83) 27.0 (391.6) 46.7 (116) 31.4 (455.5)
10.6 (51) 22.7 (329.6) 28.9 (84) 27.1 (393.5) 47.2 (117) 31.5 (457.4)
11.1 (52) 22.9 (331.6) 29.4 (85) 27.3 (395.5) 47.8 (118) 31.7 (459.4)
11.7 (53) 23.0 (333.5) 30.0 (86) 27.4 (397.4) 48.3 (119) 31.8 (461.3)
12.2 (54) 23.1 (335.4) 30.6 (87) 27.5 (399.3) 48.9 (120) 31.9 (463.2)
12.8 (55) 23.3 (337.4) 31.1 (88) 27.7 (401.3) 49.4 (121) 32.1 (465.2)
13.3 (56) 23.4 (339.3) 31.7 (89) 27.8 (403.2) 50.0 (122) 32.2 (467.1)
13.9 (57) 23.5 (341.2) 32.2 (90) 27.9 (405.1) 50.6 (123) 32.3 (469.0)
14.4 (58) 23.7 (343.2) 32.8 (91) 28.1 (407.1) 51.1 (124) 32.5 (471.0)
15.0 (59) 23.8 (345.1) 33.3 (92) 28.2 (409.0) 51.7 (125) 32.6 (472.9)
15.6 (60) 23.9 (347.1) 33.9 (93) 28.3 (410.9) 52.2 (126) 32.7 (474.8)
16.1 (61) 24.1 (349.0) 34.4 (94) 28.5 (412.9) 52.8 (127) 32.9 (476.8)
16.7 (62) 24.2 (350.9) 35.0 (95) 28.6 (414.8) 53.3 (128) 33.0 (478.7)
17.2 (63) 24.3 (352.9) 35.6 (96) 28.7 (416.8) 53.9 (129) 33.1 (480.7)
17.8 (64) 24.5 (354.8) 36.1 (97) 28.9 (418.7) 54.4 (130) 33.3 (482.6)
Note: Filling can only be carried out by UL approved fill stations using containers assembled and tested by the O.E.M.
84
ISSUE No. 02
Container / Valve Assy leakage Test

A leakage test is required for all filled FM-200® valves However, if the repeatability check is inconclusive,
and container assemblies after being left to stand in a repeat check in an alternative clean environment. If
bonded area for at least 24 hours. Two test options are repeatability problems persist, contact R&D department
available. The test equipment used for both test options is for instruction. Close the hand valve of the leak standard
a leak detector and calibration gas. after use.
Halotek Leak Detector Test Helium Sniffer Test (Alternative Test)
1. After 24 hours standing, the valve pressure gauge Details of the procedure and equipment required are
should be checked for pressure loss (refer to temperature available from the Original Equipment Manufacturer
correction chart to adjust for temperature change). The (O.E.M) on request.
container and valve assembly should then be checked for
leakage using the Halotek leak detector unit.
Container Leak Test
2. Testing should take place in an area free of FM-
200® contamination. Carefully probe the container/valve assembly at all probes
and openings. Ensure that the probe is not brought into
3. Take the Halotek unit & calibration gas and within direct contact with any objects as this can lead to spurious
the FM-200® free environment, calibrate the unit. results and ensure that the dwell time of the probe is
sufficiently long (more than 5 seconds) to ensure any
4. Adjust the Halotek leak detector to gain a steady
leak is detected. Any significant and repeatable increase
audible pulse, in free air, of about 2 to 4 pulses per
of the audible pulse rate should be taken as an indication
second.
of a leak and the container and valve assembly should be
5. Conduct a stability check by leaving the Halotek unit rejected.
for approximately 3 minutes in a clean air environment. If
Once the leakage source has been rectified, the
the pulse rate is observed to stay within the range of 2 to 4
container and valve assembly should be subjected to a
pulses per second, proceed to the repeatability check.
further leak test using the Halotek unit.
If the stability check is inconclusive, repeat
stability check in an alternative clean environment. If
stability problems persist, contact R&D department for
instruction.
6. The leak standard of 0.13 oz/year should be condi-
tioned to a temperature of 20 °C +/-5 °C (68 °F ± 9 °F) for
at least 24 hours.
7. Conduct a calibration repeatability test.
8. Remove the cap from the leak standard, screw the
calibration nozzle into the outlet of the bottle and open the
hand valve fully.
9. Place the Halotek probe into the calibration nozzle.
Within 5 seconds the pulse rate should start to increase
and be a continuous tone within 15 seconds.
10. Remove the probe from the nozzle and position
the Halotek unit away from the gas source. The pulse rate
should revert back to the original rate of 2 to 4 pulses per
second within 15 seconds.
11. Repeat test a further two times. If repeatability
test indicates that the unit is functioning within the set
parameters, proceed to the container leak test.

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 SECTION 10 - WARRANTY, DISCLAIMERS & LIMITATIONS
Warranty
Following the commissioning of the system, all equipment
will be covered by the company’s twelve month parts
warranty (excluding parts accidentally or maliciously
damaged by others). For further information, refer to the
company’s ‘Terms and conditions’ document.
Disclaimers and Limitations

Whilst every care has been taken in the publication of
this user’s guide to describe our products accurately, it
is not considered binding. The right is reserved to make
any alterations without notice. All issues are uncontrolled
copies.
86
ISSUE No. 02
SECTION 11 - APPENDICES DATE: 2010-03

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 APPENDIX A - TEMPERATURE CORRECTION CHART
FM-200® PRESSURISED TO 24.8 BAR (360 psig)

WITH NITROGEN AT 21˚C
88
ISSUE No. 02
APPENDIX B - HUGHES PROGRAM PRINTOUT DATE: 2010-03
FM-200®
Calculation Program
Computer printout
Example Calculation
Consolidated Report
10 pages

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 APPENDIX B - HUGHES PROGRAM PRINTOUT
TFS & BP FM-200 FLOW CALCULATION TEPG3.03b

UL: EX4678/EX6077
Project: Example Calculation
File Name: example for UL Design Manual-updated.FLC
Consolidated Report
Customer Information
Company Name: TFS&BP

Address: Hewett Road
Great Yarmouth
Norfolk, N231 ONN
Phone: 44(0) 1493 417 600
Contact: Tim Broughton
Title: Engineering Manager
Project Data
Project Name: Example Calculation
Designer: Tim Broughton
Number: 001
Account: 001
Location: Example
Description: Computer Suite
Page: 1 of 10
Calculation Date/Time: Sunday, June 29, 2008, 12:24:17 PM
Copyright (c) Hughes Associates, Inc. Licensed to: Tyco Fire Suppression and Building Products
90
ISSUE No. 02
Consolidated Report
Enclosure Information
Elevation: 0 m (relative to sea level)

Atmospheric Correction Factor: 1
Enclosure Number: 1
Name: Switch Room
Enclosure Temperature...
Minimum: 20.0 C
Maximum: 20.0 C
Maximum Concentration: 6.429 %
Design Concentration...
Adjusted: 6.428 %
Minimum: 6.400 %
Minimum Agent Required: 60.4 kg
Width: 6.98 m
Length: 6.92 m
Height: 2.50 m
Volume: 120.75 cubic m
Non-permeable: 0.00 cubic m
Total Volume: 120.75 cubic m
Adjusted Agent Required: 60.6 kg
Number of Nozzles: 1
Page: 2 of 10

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Consolidated Report
Enclosure Information
Elevation: 0 m (relative to sea level)

Atmospheric Correction Factor: 1
Enclosure Number: 2
Name: Computer Room
Enclosure Temperature...
Minimum: 20.0 C
Maximum: 20.0 C
Maximum Concentration: 6.422 %
Design Concentration...
Adjusted: 6.422 %
Minimum: 6.400 %
Minimum Agent Required: 271.4 kg
Width: 12.00 m
Length: 16.00 m
Height: 2.83 m
Volume: 543.36 cubic m
Non-permeable: 0.00 cubic m
Total Volume: 543.36 cubic m
Number of Nozzles: 4
Page: 3 of 10
92
ISSUE No. 02
Consolidated Report
Agent Information
Agent: FM-200 / Propellant N2

(FM-200 is a Trademark of DuPont.)

Container Name: 180L DOT Container Assy
Container Part Number: 304.205.021
Number of Main Containers: 3
Number of Reserve Containers: 0
Manifold: 3 Port 80mm End Manifold Assy (BSP) -
52-180L
Pipe Take Off Direction: Horizontal
Agent Per Container: 111.0 kg
Fill Density: 0.617 kg / l
Container Empty Weight: 105.8 kg
Weight, All Containers + Agent: 650.4 kg
Floor Area Per Container: 0.13 square m
Floor Loading Per Container: 1681 kg /square m
Pipe Network
Part 1 - Pipe Pipe
Description Start End Type Diameter Length Elevation
Main Cyl. X 3 0 1 50 mm 1.63 m 1.63 m
Manifold X 3 1 2 US40B 50 mm 0.74 m 0.62 m
TS
Manifold X 1 2 3 UK80B 80 mm 1.17 m 0.00 m
WS
Pipe 3 4 UK80G 80 mm 0.45 m 0.45 m
TS
Pipe 4 5 UK80G 80 mm 0.45 m 0.00 m
TS
Pipe 5 6 UK80G 80 mm 2.25 m 0.00 m
TS
Pipe 6 7 UK80G 80 mm 3.75 m 0.00 m
TS
Page: 4 of 10

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Consolidated Report
Part 1 - Pipe Pipe
Description Start End Type Diameter Length Elevation
Pipe 7 8 UK80G 80 mm 8.00 m 0.00 m
TS
Pipe 8 9 UK80G 65 mm 3.00 m 0.00 m
TS
Pipe 9 10 UK80G 40 mm 4.00 m 0.00 m
TS
Pipe/E2-N1 10 11 UK80G 40 mm 0.10 m -0.10 m
TS
Pipe 9 12 UK80G 40 mm 4.00 m 0.00 m
TS
Pipe/E2-N2 12 13 UK80G 40 mm 0.10 m -0.10 m
TS
Pipe 8 14 UK80G 50 mm 3.00 m 0.00 m
TS
Pipe 14 15 UK80G 40 mm 4.00 m 0.00 m
TS
Pipe/E2-N3 15 16 UK80G 40 mm 0.10 m -0.10 m
TS
Pipe 14 17 UK80G 40 mm 4.00 m 0.00 m
TS
Pipe/E2-N4 17 18 UK80G 40 mm 0.10 m -0.10 m
TS
Pipe 6 19 UK80G 40 mm 0.42 m 0.00 m
TS
Pipe 19 20 UK80G 40 mm 6.30 m 0.00 m
TS
Pipe/E1-N1 20 21 UK80G 40 mm 0.10 m -0.10 m
TS
Part 2 - Equivalent Length

Start End 90 45 Thru Side Union Other Added Total
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0.00 m 10.67 m
1 2 0 0 0 0 0 50mmDH&CV 0.00 m 12.74 m
2 3 0 0 2 1 0 0.00 m 6.28 m
3 4 1 0 0 0 0 0.00 m 2.96 m
4 5 1 0 0 0 0 0.00 m 2.96 m
5 6 1 0 0 0 0 0.00 m 4.75 m
Page: 5 of 10
94
ISSUE No. 02
Consolidated Report
Part 2 - Equivalent Length
Start End 90 45 Thru Side Union Other Added Total
6 7 0 0 1 0 0 0.00 m 5.30 m
7 8 1 0 0 0 0 0.00 m 10.52 m
8 9 0 0 0 1 0 0.00 m 7.07 m
9 10 0 0 0 1 0 0.00 m 6.64 m
10 11 1 0 0 0 0 0.00 m 1.40 m
9 12 0 0 0 1 0 0.00 m 6.64 m
12 13 1 0 0 0 0 0.00 m 1.40 m
8 14 0 0 0 1 0 0.00 m 6.40 m
14 15 0 0 0 1 0 0.00 m 6.64 m
15 16 1 0 0 0 0 0.00 m 1.40 m
14 17 0 0 0 1 0 0.00 m 6.64 m
17 18 1 0 0 0 0 0.00 m 1.40 m
6 19 0 0 0 1 0 0.00 m 3.08 m
19 20 1 0 0 0 0 0.00 m 7.62 m
20 21 1 0 0 0 0 0.00 m 1.40 m
Part 3 - Nozzles
Start End Flow Name Size Type Nozzle Area
0 1 111.0 kg
1 2 111.0 kg
2 3 333.0 kg
3 4 333.0 kg
4 5 333.0 kg
5 6 333.0 kg
6 7 272.4 kg
7 8 272.4 kg
8 9 136.4 kg
9 10 68.2 kg
10 11 68.2 kg E2-N1 40 mm 360-BR (BSP) 760.27 square mm
9 12 68.2 kg
8 14 136.0 kg
14 15 68.0 kg
Page: 6 of 10

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Consolidated Report
Part 3 - Nozzles
Start End Flow Name Size Type Nozzle Area
14 17 68.0 kg
6 19 60.6 kg
19 20 60.6 kg
Parts Information
Total Agent Required: 333.0 kg

Container Name: 180L DOT Container Assy (Part: 304.205.021)
Number Of Containers: 3
Manifold: 3 Port 80mm End Manifold Assy (BSP) - 52-180L (Part: 307.209.026)
Nozzle Type Diameter Nozzle Area Part Number

E1-N1 180-BR 40 mm 765.51 square mm 310.205.211
(BSP)
E2-N1 360-BR 40 mm 760.27 square mm 310.205.212
(BSP)
E2-N2 360-BR 40 mm 760.27 square mm 310.205.212
(BSP)
E2-N3 360-BR 40 mm 860.11 square mm 310.205.212
(BSP)
E2-N4 360-BR 40 mm 860.11 square mm 310.205.212
(BSP)
Nozzle Drill Diameter Drill Size

E1-N1 11.8000 mm 11.8 mm
E2-N1 11.0000 mm 11 mm
E2-N2 11.0000 mm 11 mm
E2-N3 11.7000 mm 11.7 mm
E2-N4 11.7000 mm 11.7 mm
Pipe: Type Diameter Length
Page: 7 of 10
96
ISSUE No. 02
Consolidated Report
Pipe: Type Diameter Length
UK80BWS 80 mm 1.17 m
UK80GTS 40 mm 23.22 m
UK80GTS 50 mm 3.00 m
UK80GTS 65 mm 3.00 m
UK80GTS 80 mm 14.90 m
'Other' Items:
3 - 50 mm Check&Flex (Part: 306207002/302209004)
List of 90 degree elbows:

6 - 40 mm
4 - 80 mm
List of Tees:
1 - 50 mm
1 - 65 mm
2 - 80 mm
System Acceptance
System Discharge Time: 8.4 seconds

Percent Agent In Pipe: 53.9%
Percent Agent Before First Tee: 14.3%
Enclosure Number: 1
Enclosure Name: Switch Room
Minimum Design Concentration: 6.400%
Adjusted Design Concentration: 6.428%
Predicted Concentration: 6.479%
Maximum Expected Agent Concentration: 6.479% (At 20.0 C)
Minimum Adjusted Predicted Nozzle

Agent Agent Agent Pressure
Nozzle Required Required Delivered (Average)
E1-N1 60.4 kg 60.6 kg 61.1 kg 8.538 bar
Enclosure Number: 2
Enclosure Name: Computer Room
Minimum Design Concentration: 6.400%
Adjusted Design Concentration: 6.422%
Page: 8 of 10

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
Consolidated Report
Predicted Concentration: 6.411%
Maximum Expected Agent Concentration: 6.411% (At 20.0 C)
Minimum Adjusted Predicted Nozzle

Agent Agent Agent Pressure
Nozzle Required Required Delivered (Average)
E2-N1 67.9 kg 68.2 kg 68.5 kg 6.887 bar
E2-N2 67.9 kg 68.2 kg 68.5 kg 6.887 bar
E2-N3 67.8 kg 68.0 kg 67.5 kg 6.069 bar
E2-N4 67.8 kg 68.0 kg 67.5 kg 6.069 bar
Standard Isometric View
Page: 9 of 10
98
ISSUE No. 02
Consolidated Report
Standard Plan View
Standard Elevation View
Page: 10 of 10

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 APPENDIX C - FM-200® DATA SHEET
FM-200® Material Safety Data Sheet
(MSDS)
(5 PAGES)
100
ISSUE No. 02
APPENDIX C - FM-200® DATA SHEET DATE: 2010-03
6$)(7<'$7$6+((7DFFRUGLQJWR5HJXODWLRQ(&1R

)0
9HUVLRQ
5HYLVLRQ'DWH 5HI

7KLV6'6DGKHUHVWRWKHVWDQGDUGVDQGUHJXODWRU\UHTXLUHPHQWVRI*UHDW%ULWDLQDQGPD\QRWPHHWWKHUHJXODWRU\
UHTXLUHPHQWVLQRWKHUFRXQWULHV

,'(17,),&$7,212)7+(68%67$1&(35(3$5$7,21$1'2)7+(&203$1<81'(57$.,1*
3URGXFWLQIRUPDWLRQ
3URGXFWQDPH )0

6\QRQ\PV +)&

8VHRIWKH )LUHH[WLQJXLVKLQJDJHQW
6XEVWDQFH3UHSDUDWLRQ

&RPSDQ\ 'X3RQWGH1HPRXUV1HGHUODQG%9
%DDQKRHNZHJ
1//$'RUGUHFKW
7KH1HWKHUODQGV

7HOHSKRQH

(PHUJHQF\WHOHSKRQH

(PDLODGGUHVV VGVVXSSRUW#FKHGXSRQWFRP

+$=$5'6,'(17,),&$7,21
5DSLGHYDSRUDWLRQRIWKHOLTXLGPD\FDXVHIURVWELWH
9DSRXUVDUHKHDYLHUWKDQDLUDQGFDQFDXVHVXIIRFDWLRQE\UHGXFLQJR[\JHQDYDLODEOHIRUEUHDWKLQJ

&20326,7,21,1)250$7,2121,1*5(',(176
&KHPLFDO1DPH &$61R (&1R &ODVVLILFDWLRQ &RQFHQWUDWLRQ>@

+HSWDIOXRURSURSDQH !

),567$,'0($685(6
*HQHUDODGYLFH ,IXQFRQVFLRXVSODFHLQUHFRYHU\SRVLWLRQDQGVHHNPHGLFDODGYLFH1HYHUJLYH

DQ\WKLQJE\PRXWKWRDQXQFRQVFLRXVSHUVRQ,IEUHDWKLQJLVLUUHJXODURU
VWRSSHGDGPLQLVWHUDUWLILFLDOUHVSLUDWLRQ,IV\PSWRPVSHUVLVWFDOODSK\VLFLDQ

,QKDODWLRQ 0RYHWRIUHVKDLU.HHSSDWLHQWZDUPDQGDWUHVW$UWLILFLDOUHVSLUDWLRQDQGRU
R[\JHQPD\EHQHFHVVDU\

6NLQFRQWDFW :DVKRIIZLWKZDUPZDWHU7DNHRIIDOOFRQWDPLQDWHGFORWKLQJLPPHGLDWHO\

(\HFRQWDFW 5LQVHWKRURXJKO\ZLWKSOHQW\RIZDWHUDOVRXQGHUWKHH\HOLGV&RQVXOWD
SK\VLFLDQ

1RWHVWRSK\VLFLDQ
7UHDWPHQW 'RQRWJLYHDGUHQDOLQHRUVLPLODUGUXJV

Print Date: 2008 - 6 - 20

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02

)0
9HUVLRQ
5HYLVLRQ'DWH 5HI

),5(),*+7,1*0($685(6
6SHFLILFKD]DUGVGXULQJILUH SUHVVXUHEXLOGXS

ILJKWLQJ

6SHFLDOSURWHFWLYH ,QWKHHYHQWRIILUHZHDUVHOIFRQWDLQHGEUHDWKLQJDSSDUDWXV
HTXLSPHQWIRUILUHILJKWHUV

)XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ 8VHH[WLQJXLVKLQJPHDVXUHVWKDWDUHDSSURSULDWHWRORFDOFLUFXPVWDQFHVDQGWKH
VXUURXQGLQJHQYLURQPHQW&RROFRQWDLQHUVWDQNVZLWKZDWHUVSUD\

$&&,'(17$/5(/($6(0($685(6
3HUVRQDOSUHFDXWLRQV (YDFXDWHSHUVRQQHOWRVDIHDUHDV9HQWLODWHWKHDUHD5HIHUWRSURWHFWLYH

PHDVXUHVOLVWHGLQVHFWLRQVDQG

(QYLURQPHQWDOSUHFDXWLRQV 6KRXOGQRWEHUHOHDVHGLQWRWKHHQYLURQPHQW

0HWKRGVIRUFOHDQLQJXS (YDSRUDWHV

+$1'/,1*$1'6725$*(
+DQGOLQJ
$GYLFHRQVDIHKDQGOLQJ 3URYLGH VXIILFLHQW DLU H[FKDQJH DQGRU H[KDXVW LQ ZRUN URRPV )RU SHUVRQDO
SURWHFWLRQVHHVHFWLRQ

$GYLFHRQSURWHFWLRQ 1RVSHFLDOSURWHFWLYHPHDVXUHVDJDLQVWILUHUHTXLUHG
DJDLQVWILUHDQGH[SORVLRQ

6WRUDJH
5HTXLUHPHQWVIRUVWRUDJH .HHSFRQWDLQHUWLJKWO\FORVHGLQDGU\DQGZHOOYHQWLODWHGSODFH6WRUHLQRULJLQDO
DUHDVDQGFRQWDLQHUV FRQWDLQHU

$GYLFHRQFRPPRQVWRUDJH 1RPDWHULDOVWREHHVSHFLDOO\PHQWLRQHG

*HUPDQVWRUDJHFODVV $&RPSUHVVHGOLTXHILHGRUSUHVVXULVHGJDV

(;32685(&21752/63(5621$/3527(&7,21

(QJLQHHULQJPHDVXUHV
(QVXUHDGHTXDWHYHQWLODWLRQHVSHFLDOO\LQFRQILQHGDUHDV

3HUVRQDOSURWHFWLYHHTXLSPHQW
5HVSLUDWRU\SURWHFWLRQ )RUUHVFXHDQGPDLQWHQDQFHZRUNLQVWRUDJHWDQNVXVHVHOIFRQWDLQHGEUHDWKLQJ
DSSDUDWXV9DSRXUVDUHKHDYLHUWKDQDLUDQGFDQFDXVHVXIIRFDWLRQE\UHGXFLQJ
R[\JHQDYDLODEOHIRUEUHDWKLQJ

Print Date: 2008 - 6 - 20
102
ISSUE No. 02

)0
9HUVLRQ
5HYLVLRQ'DWH 5HI

+DQGSURWHFWLRQ +HDWLQVXODWLQJJORYHV

(\HSURWHFWLRQ 6DIHW\JODVVHV

+\JLHQHPHDVXUHV +DQGOHLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWKJRRGLQGXVWULDOK\JLHQHDQGVDIHW\SUDFWLFH

3+<6,&$/$1'&+(0,&$/3523(57,(6

)RUP /LTXHILHGJDV

&RORXU FRORXUOHVV

2GRXU VOLJKWHWKHUOLNH

S+ QHXWUDO

0HOWLQJSRLQWUDQJH &

%RLOLQJSRLQWERLOLQJUDQJH &DWK3D

)ODVKSRLQW GRHVQRWIODVK

([SORVLYHSURSHUWLHV 1RWH[SORVLYH

9DSRXUSUHVVXUH K3DDW&

9DSRXUSUHVVXUH K3DDW&

'HQVLW\ JFPDW&DVOLTXLG

'HQVLW\ JFPDW&K3D

'HQVLW\ JFPDW&K3D

5HODWLYHYDSRXUGHQVLW\

67$%,/,7<$1'5($&7,9,7<
&RQGLWLRQVWRDYRLG 7KHSURGXFWLVQRWIODPPDEOHLQDLUXQGHUDPELHQWFRQGLWLRQVRIWHPSHUDWXUHDQG

SUHVVXUH:KHQSUHVVXULVHGZLWKDLURUR[\JHQWKHPL[WXUHPD\EHFRPH
IODPPDEOH&HUWDLQPL[WXUHVRI+&)&VRU+)&VZLWKFKORULQHPD\EHFRPH
IODPPDEOHRUUHDFWLYHXQGHUFHUWDLQFRQGLWLRQV

0DWHULDOVWRDYRLG $ONDOLPHWDOV$ONDOLQHHDUWKPHWDOV3RZGHUHGPHWDOV3RZGHUHGPHWDOVDOWV

+D]DUGRXVGHFRPSRVLWLRQ +\GURJHQKDOLGHV&DUERQGLR[LGH&2&DUERQPRQR[LGH)OXRURFDUERQV
SURGXFWV &DUERQ\OKDOLGHV

72;,&2/2*,&$/,1)250$7,21
$FXWHLQKDODWLRQWR[LFLW\

Print Date: 2008 - 6 - 20

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02

)0
9HUVLRQ
5HYLVLRQ'DWH 5HI

v /&KUDWPJO
+HSWDIOXRURSURSDQH
&DUFLQRJHQLFLW\ 'LGQRWVKRZFDUFLQRJHQLFHIIHFWVLQDQLPDOH[SHULPHQWV
DVVHVVPHQW

7R[LFLW\WRUHSURGXFWLRQ 'LGQRWVKRZPXWDJHQLFRUWHUDWRJHQLFHIIHFWVLQDQLPDOH[SHULPHQWV
DVVHVVPHQW

+XPDQH[SHULHQFH ([FHVVLYHH[SRVXUHVPD\DIIHFWKXPDQKHDOWKDVIROORZV

,QKDODWLRQ
6HYHUHVKRUWQHVVRIEUHDWKQDUFRVLV,UUHJXODUFDUGLDFDFWLYLW\

)XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ 5DSLGHYDSRUDWLRQRIWKHOLTXLGPD\FDXVHIURVWELWH

(&2/2*,&$/,1)250$7,21

2]RQHGHSOHWLRQSRWHQWLDO

*OREDOZDUPLQJSRWHQWLDO
*:3

',6326$/&216,'(5$7,216
3URGXFW &DQEHXVHGDIWHUUHFRQGLWLRQLQJ

&RQWDPLQDWHGSDFNDJLQJ (PSW\SUHVVXUHYHVVHOVVKRXOGEHUHWXUQHGWRWKHVXSSOLHU

75$163257,1)250$7,21
$'5
&ODVV
&ODVVLILFDWLRQ&RGH $
+,1R
811XPEHU
/DEHOOLQJ1R
3URSHUVKLSSLQJQDPH +HSWDIOXRURSURSDQH

,$7$B&
&ODVV
811XPEHU
/DEHOOLQJ1R

,0'*
&ODVV
811XPEHU
/DEHOOLQJ1R

Print Date: 2008 - 6 - 20
104
ISSUE No. 02

)0
9HUVLRQ
5HYLVLRQ'DWH 5HI

5(*8/$725<,1)250$7,21
/DEHOOLQJDFFRUGLQJWR(&'LUHFWLYHV
6SHFLDOODEHOOLQJRIFHUWDLQ &RQWDLQVIOXRULQDWHGJUHHQKRXVHJDVFRYHUHGE\WKH.\RWR3URWRFRO
SUHSDUDWLRQV

7KHSURGXFWGRHVQRWQHHGWREHODEHOOHGLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK(&GLUHFWLYHVRUUHVSHFWLYHQDWLRQDOODZV

27+(5,1)250$7,21
)XUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQ
%HIRUHXVHUHDG'X3RQW
VVDIHW\LQIRUPDWLRQ)RUIXUWKHULQIRUPDWLRQFRQWDFWWKHORFDO'X3RQWRIILFHRU'X3RQW
V
QRPLQDWHGGLVWULEXWRUV'X3RQW
VUHJLVWHUHGWUDGHPDUN

6LJQLILFDQWFKDQJHIURPSUHYLRXVYHUVLRQLVGHQRWHGZLWKDGRXEOHEDU

7KHLQIRUPDWLRQSURYLGHGLQWKLV6DIHW\'DWD6KHHWLVFRUUHFWWRWKHEHVWRIRXUNQRZOHGJHLQIRUPDWLRQDQGEHOLHIDW
WKHGDWHRILWVSXEOLFDWLRQ7KHLQIRUPDWLRQJLYHQLVGHVLJQHGRQO\DVDJXLGDQFHIRUVDIHKDQGOLQJXVHSURFHVVLQJ
VWRUDJHWUDQVSRUWDWLRQGLVSRVDODQGUHOHDVHDQGLVQRWWREHFRQVLGHUHGDZDUUDQW\RUTXDOLW\VSHFLILFDWLRQ7KH
DERYHLQIRUPDWLRQUHODWHVRQO\WRWKHVSHFLILFPDWHULDOVGHVLJQDWHGKHUHLQDQGPD\QRWEHYDOLGIRUVXFKPDWHULDOV
XVHGLQFRPELQDWLRQZLWKDQ\RWKHUPDWHULDOVRULQDQ\SURFHVVRULIWKHPDWHULDOLVDOWHUHGRUSURFHVVHGXQOHVV
VSHFLILHGLQWKHWH[W

Print Date: 2008 - 6 - 20

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 APPENDIX D - FM-200® LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR CHARTS
FM-200® Liquid Level Indicator Charts
(13 PAGES)
106
ISSUE No. 02
APPENDIX D - FM-200® LIQUID LEVEL INDICATOR CHARTS DATE: 2010-03
106L Tank
LLI “Temperature, Degrees F”
Inches 32 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
“Weight of FM-200, pounds”
7.5
7.75 110.9 110.4 109.8
8 113.2 112.8 112.2 110.9 109.7
8.25 115.6 115.1 114.5 113.2 112.0 111.2 110.4
8.5 118.0 117.5 116.8 115.5 114.2 113.4 112.5 111.7 110.8
8.75 120.4 119.8 119.1 117.8 116.5 115.6 114.7 113.8 112.9
9 122.8 122.2 121.4 120.1 118.7 117.8 116.9 115.9 114.9 112.0
9.25 125.1 124.5 123.7 122.4 121.0 120.0 119.0 118.0 116.9 114.0
9.5 127.5 126.9 126.1 124.6 123.2 122.2 121.2 120.1 119.0 116.0
9.75 129.9 129.2 128.4 126.9 125.5 124.4 123.4 122.2 121.0 118.0
10 132.3 131.6 130.7 129.2 127.7 126.6 125.5 124.3 123.0 120.0
10.25 134.7 133.9 133.0 131.5 130.0 128.9 127.7 126.4 125.1 122.0
10.5 137.1 136.3 135.3 133.8 132.3 131.1 129.9 128.5 127.1 124.0
10.75 139.4 138.6 137.6 136.1 134.5 133.3 132.0 130.6 129.1 126.0
11 141.8 141.0 140.0 138.4 136.8 135.5 134.2 132.7 131.2 128.0
11.25 144.2 143.3 142.3 140.6 139.0 137.7 136.4 134.8 133.2 130.0
11.5 146.6 145.7 144.6 142.9 141.3 139.9 138.5 136.9 135.3 132.0
11.75 149.0 148.1 146.9 145.2 143.5 142.1 140.7 139.0 137.3 134.1
12 151.4 150.4 149.2 147.5 145.8 144.3 142.9 141.1 139.3 136.1
12.25 153.7 152.8 151.5 149.8 148.0 146.5 145.0 143.2 141.4 138.1
12.5 156.1 155.1 153.8 152.1 150.3 148.7 147.2 145.3 143.4 140.1
12.75 158.5 157.5 156.2 154.4 152.6 151.0 149.4 147.4 145.4 142.1
13 160.9 159.8 158.5 156.6 154.8 153.2 151.5 149.5 147.5 144.1
13.25 163.3 162.2 160.8 158.9 157.1 155.4 153.7 151.6 149.5 146.1
13.5 165.7 164.5 163.1 161.2 159.3 157.6 155.9 153.7 151.5 148.1
13.75 168.0 166.9 165.4 163.5 161.6 159.8 158.0 155.8 153.6 150.1
14 170.4 169.2 167.7 165.8 163.8 162.0 160.2 157.9 155.6 152.1
14.25 172.8 171.6 170.1 168.1 166.1 164.2 162.4 160.0 157.6 154.1
14.5 175.2 173.9 172.4 170.4 168.3 166.4 164.5 162.1 159.7 156.1
14.75 177.6 176.3 174.7 172.6 170.6 168.6 166.7 164.2 161.7 158.1
15 179.9 178.6 177.0 174.9 172.9 170.9 168.9 166.3 163.7 160.1
15.25 182.2 180.9 179.2 177.2 175.1 173.1 171.0 168.4 165.8 162.1
15.5 184.6 183.2 181.5 179.4 177.4 175.3 173.2 170.5 167.8 164.2
15.75 186.9 185.5 183.7 181.6 179.6 177.5 175.4 172.6 169.8 166.2
16 189.3 187.8 185.9 183.8 181.8 179.6 177.5 174.7 171.9 168.2
16.25 191.6 190.1 188.2 186.1 184.0 181.8 179.7 176.8 173.9 170.2
16.5 194.0 192.4 190.4 188.3 186.2 184.0 181.8 178.9 175.9 172.2
16.75 196.3 194.7 192.6 190.5 188.4 186.2 184.0 181.0 178.0 174.2
17 198.6 197.0 194.8 192.7 190.6 188.3 186.1 183.0 180.0 176.2
17.25 201.0 199.2 197.1 194.9 192.8 190.5 188.3 185.1 182.0 178.2
17.5 203.3 201.5 199.3 197.1 195.0 192.7 190.4 187.2 184.0 180.2
17.75 205.7 203.8 201.5 199.3 197.2 194.9 192.6 189.3 186.0 182.3
18 208.0 206.1 203.8 201.6 199.4 197.0 194.7 191.4 188.1 184.3
18.25 210.4 208.4 206.0 203.8 201.6 199.2 196.8 193.5 190.1 186.3
18.5 212.7 210.7 208.2 206.0 203.8 201.4 199.0 195.5 192.1 188.4
18.75 215.0 213.0 210.5 208.2 206.0 203.6 201.1 197.6 194.1 190.4
19 217.4 215.3 212.7 210.4 208.2 205.7 203.3 199.7 196.1 192.4
19.25 219.7 217.6 214.9 212.6 210.4 207.9 205.4 201.8 198.1 194.4
19.5 222.1 219.9 217.2 214.9 212.6 210.1 207.6 203.9 200.2 196.5
19.75 224.4 222.2 219.4 217.1 214.8 212.2 209.7 206.0 202.2 198.5
20 226.8 224.5 221.6 219.3 217.0 214.4 211.9 208.0 204.2 200.5
20.25 229.1 226.8 223.8 221.5 219.2 216.6 214.0 210.1 206.2 202.6
20.5 231.4 229.1 226.1 223.7 221.4 218.8 216.2 212.2 208.2 204.6
20.75 233.8 231.3 228.3 225.9 223.6 220.9 218.3 214.3 210.2 206.6
21 236.1 233.6 230.5 228.1 225.8 223.1 220.5 216.4 212.3 208.6
21.25 238.5 235.9 232.8 230.4 228.0 225.3 222.6 218.4 214.3 210.7
21.5 240.8 238.2 235.0 232.6 230.2 227.5 224.8 220.5 216.3 212.7
21.75 237.2 234.8 232.4 229.6 226.9 222.6 218.3 214.7
22 239.5 237.0 234.6 231.8 229.1 224.7 220.3 216.7
22.25 236.8 234.0 231.2 226.8 222.3 218.8
22.5 239.0 236.2 233.4 228.9 224.4 220.8
22.75 235.5 230.9 226.4 222.8
23 237.7 233.0 228.4 224.9
23.25 239.8 235.1 230.4 226.9
23.5 242.0 237.2 232.4 228.9
23.75 234.4 230.9
24 236.5 233.0
24.25 235.0
24.5 237.0

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
147L Tank
Inches 32 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
10
10.25 154.2 153.8 153.3
10.5 156.7 156.3 155.8 154.4 153.0
10.75 159.2 158.7 158.2 156.7 155.3 154.2 153.0
11 161.7 161.2 160.6 159.1 157.6 156.4 155.2 153.2 151.2
11.25 164.2 163.7 163.0 161.5 159.9 158.7 157.4 155.4 153.4
11.5 166.7 166.1 165.4 163.8 162.3 161.0 159.7 157.6 155.5
11.75 169.2 168.6 167.8 166.2 164.6 163.2 161.9 159.7 157.6
12 171.7 171.1 170.2 168.6 166.9 165.5 164.1 161.9 159.8 153.3
12.25 174.2 173.5 172.7 170.9 169.2 167.7 166.3 164.1 161.9 155.4
12.5 176.7 176.0 175.1 173.3 171.6 170.0 168.5 166.2 164.0 157.6
12.75 179.2 178.5 177.5 175.7 173.9 172.3 170.7 168.4 166.2 159.7
13 181.7 180.9 179.9 178.1 176.2 174.5 172.9 170.6 168.3 161.9
13.25 184.2 183.4 182.3 180.4 178.5 176.8 175.1 172.7 170.4 164.0
13.5 186.7 185.8 184.7 182.8 180.9 179.1 177.3 174.9 172.5 166.2
13.75 189.2 188.3 187.2 185.2 183.2 181.3 179.5 177.1 174.7 168.3
14 191.7 190.8 189.6 187.5 185.5 183.6 181.7 179.2 176.8 170.5
14.25 194.2 193.2 192.0 189.9 187.8 185.9 183.9 181.4 178.9 172.6
14.5 196.7 195.7 194.4 192.3 190.2 188.1 186.1 183.6 181.1 174.8
14.75 199.2 198.2 196.8 194.7 192.5 190.4 188.3 185.8 183.2 176.9
15 201.7 200.6 199.2 197.0 194.8 192.7 190.5 187.9 185.3 179.0
15.25 204.3 203.1 201.7 199.4 197.1 194.9 192.7 190.1 187.5 181.2
15.5 206.8 205.6 204.1 201.8 199.5 197.2 194.9 192.3 189.6 183.3
15.75 209.3 208.0 206.5 204.1 201.8 199.4 197.1 194.4 191.7 185.5
16 211.8 210.5 208.9 206.5 204.1 201.7 199.3 196.6 193.9 187.6
16.25 214.3 213.0 211.3 208.9 206.4 204.0 201.5 198.8 196.0 189.8
16.5 216.8 215.4 213.7 211.3 208.8 206.2 203.7 200.9 198.1 191.9
16.75 219.3 217.9 216.2 213.6 211.1 208.5 205.9 203.1 200.3 194.1
17 221.8 220.4 218.6 216.0 213.4 210.8 208.1 205.3 202.4 196.2
17.25 224.3 222.8 221.0 218.4 215.7 213.0 210.3 207.4 204.5 198.4
17.5 226.8 225.3 223.4 220.7 218.1 215.3 212.5 209.6 206.7 200.5
17.75 229.3 227.7 225.8 223.1 220.4 217.6 214.7 211.8 208.8 202.6
18 231.8 230.2 228.2 225.5 222.7 219.8 216.9 213.9 210.9 204.8
18.25 234.3 232.7 230.7 227.8 225.0 222.1 219.1 216.1 213.0 206.9
18.5 236.8 235.1 233.1 230.2 227.4 224.4 221.3 218.3 215.2 209.1
18.75 239.3 237.6 235.5 232.6 229.7 226.6 223.6 220.4 217.3 211.2
19 241.8 240.1 237.9 235.0 232.0 228.9 225.8 222.6 219.4 213.4
19.25 244.3 242.5 240.3 237.3 234.3 231.1 228.0 224.8 221.6 215.5
19.5 246.6 244.9 242.7 239.7 236.7 233.4 230.2 226.9 223.7 217.7
19.75 249.0 247.3 245.1 242.0 239.0 235.7 232.4 229.1 225.8 219.8
20 251.4 249.6 247.3 244.3 241.3 237.9 234.6 231.3 228.0 221.9
20.25 253.7 251.9 249.6 246.6 243.6 240.2 236.8 233.4 230.1 224.1
20.5 256.1 254.2 251.8 248.8 245.8 242.4 239.0 235.6 232.2 226.2
20.75 258.5 256.5 254.1 251.1 248.0 244.6 241.2 237.8 234.4 228.4
21 260.8 258.8 256.3 253.3 250.2 246.8 243.4 239.9 236.5 230.5
21.25 263.2 261.2 258.6 255.5 252.4 249.0 245.5 242.1 238.6 232.7
21.5 265.6 263.5 260.8 257.7 254.6 251.1 247.6 244.2 240.8 234.8
21.75 267.9 265.8 263.1 260.0 256.8 253.3 249.8 246.3 242.9 237.0
22 270.3 268.1 265.3 262.2 259.0 255.5 251.9 248.4 245.0 239.1
22.25 272.7 270.4 267.6 264.4 261.2 257.6 254.0 250.5 247.0 241.3
22.5 275.0 272.7 269.8 266.6 263.4 259.8 256.1 252.6 249.1 243.4
22.75 277.4 275.0 272.1 268.9 265.6 261.9 258.2 254.7 251.1 245.5
23 279.8 277.4 274.3 271.1 267.8 264.1 260.4 256.7 253.1 247.6
23.25 282.1 279.7 276.6 273.3 270.0 266.3 262.5 258.8 255.2 249.6
23.5 284.5 282.0 278.8 275.5 272.2 268.4 264.6 260.9 257.2 251.7
23.75 286.9 284.3 281.1 277.8 274.4 270.6 266.7 263.0 259.2 253.7
24 289.2 286.6 283.3 280.0 276.6 272.7 268.8 265.1 261.3 255.8
24.25 291.6 288.9 285.6 282.2 278.8 274.9 270.9 267.1 263.3 257.9
24.5 294.0 291.2 287.8 284.4 281.0 277.0 273.1 269.2 265.4 259.9
24.75 296.3 293.6 290.1 286.7 283.2 279.2 275.2 271.3 267.4 262.0
25 298.7 295.9 292.3 288.9 285.4 281.4 277.3 273.4 269.4 264.1
25.25 301.1 298.2 294.6 291.1 287.6 283.5 279.4 275.4 271.5 266.1
25.5 303.4 300.5 296.8 293.3 289.8 285.7 281.5 277.5 273.5 268.2
25.75 305.8 302.8 299.1 295.5 292.0 287.8 283.7 279.6 275.5 270.3
26 308.2 305.1 301.3 297.8 294.2 290.0 285.8 281.7 277.6 272.3
26.25 310.5 307.4 303.6 300.0 296.4 292.2 287.9 283.7 279.6 274.4
26.5 312.9 309.8 305.8 302.2 298.6 294.3 290.0 285.8 281.6 276.4
26.75 315.3 312.1 308.1 304.4 300.8 296.5 292.1 287.9 283.7 278.5
27 317.6 314.4 310.3 306.7 303.0 298.6 294.2 290.0 285.7 280.6
27.25 320.0 316.7 312.6 308.9 305.2 300.8 296.4 292.1 287.8 282.6
27.5 322.4 319.0 314.8 311.1 307.4 302.9 298.5 294.1 289.8 284.7
27.75 324.7 321.3 317.1 313.3 309.6 305.1 300.6 296.2 291.8 286.8
108
ISSUE No. 02
147L Tank (Continued)

Inches 32 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
28 327.1 323.6 319.3 315.6 311.8 307.3 302.7 298.3 293.9 288.8
28.25 329.4 326.0 321.6 317.8 314.0 309.4 304.8 300.4 295.9 290.9
28.5 323.8 320.0 316.2 311.6 307.0 302.4 297.9 293.0
28.75 326.1 322.2 318.4 313.7 309.1 304.5 300.0 295.0
29 328.3 324.5 320.6 315.9 311.2 306.6 302.0 297.1
29.25 330.6 326.7 322.8 318.1 313.3 308.7 304.1 299.2
29.5 325.0 320.2 315.4 310.8 306.1 301.2
29.75 327.2 322.4 317.5 312.8 308.1 303.3
30 329.4 324.5 319.7 314.9 310.2 305.3
30.25 331.6 326.7 321.8 317.0 312.2 307.4
30.5 323.9 319.1 314.2 309.5
30.75 326.0 321.1 316.3 311.5
31 328.1 323.2 318.3 313.6
31.25 330.3 325.3 320.4 315.7
31.5 322.4 317.7
31.75 324.4 319.8
32 326.5 321.9
32.25 323.9
32.5 326.0
180L Tank
Inches 32 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
2.5 189.9 188.9 187.5
2.75 192.4 191.3 190.0 188.7 187.4
3 195.0 193.8 192.4 191.1 189.7 189.2 188.7
3.25 197.5 196.3 194.9 193.5 192.1 191.5 190.9
3.5 200.0 198.8 197.3 195.9 194.5 193.8 193.1 189.5 185.9
3.75 202.5 201.3 199.7 198.3 196.8 196.1 195.4 191.7 188.0
4 205.0 203.8 202.2 200.7 199.2 198.4 197.6 193.9 190.2
4.25 207.5 206.2 204.6 203.1 201.6 200.7 199.8 196.1 192.4
4.5 210.1 208.7 207.0 205.5 203.9 203.0 202.1 198.3 194.5
4.75 212.6 211.2 209.5 207.9 206.3 205.3 204.3 200.5 196.7 190.4
5 215.1 213.7 211.9 210.3 208.7 207.6 206.5 202.7 198.8 192.5
5.25 217.6 216.2 214.4 212.7 211.0 209.9 208.8 204.9 201.0 194.7
5.5 220.1 218.7 216.8 215.1 213.4 212.2 211.0 207.1 203.2 196.8
5.75 222.7 221.1 219.2 217.5 215.8 214.5 213.2 209.3 205.3 198.9
6 225.2 223.6 221.7 219.9 218.1 216.8 215.5 211.5 207.5 201.0
6.25 227.7 226.1 224.1 222.3 220.5 219.1 217.7 213.7 209.6 203.1
6.5 230.2 228.6 226.6 224.7 222.9 221.4 219.9 215.9 211.8 205.2
6.75 232.7 231.1 229.0 227.1 225.2 223.7 222.2 218.1 214.0 207.3
7 235.2 233.6 231.4 229.5 227.6 226.0 224.4 220.3 216.1 209.5
7.25 237.8 236.0 233.9 231.9 230.0 228.3 226.6 222.5 218.3 211.6
7.5 240.3 238.5 236.3 234.3 232.3 230.6 228.9 224.7 220.4 213.7
7.75 242.8 241.0 238.8 236.7 234.7 232.9 231.1 226.9 222.6 215.8
8 245.3 243.5 241.2 239.1 237.1 235.2 233.4 229.1 224.8 217.9
8.25 247.8 246.0 243.6 241.5 239.4 237.5 235.6 231.3 226.9 220.0
8.5 250.3 248.4 246.1 243.9 241.8 239.8 237.8 233.5 229.1 222.2
8.75 252.9 250.9 248.5 246.3 244.2 242.1 240.1 235.7 231.3 224.3
9 255.4 253.4 251.0 248.8 246.5 244.4 242.3 237.8 233.4 226.4
9.25 257.9 255.9 253.4 251.2 248.9 246.7 244.5 240.0 235.6 228.5
9.5 260.4 258.4 255.8 253.6 251.3 249.0 246.8 242.2 237.7 230.6
9.75 262.9 260.9 258.3 256.0 253.7 251.3 249.0 244.4 239.9 232.7
10 265.5 263.3 260.7 258.4 256.0 253.6 251.2 246.6 242.1 234.8
10.25 268.0 265.8 263.1 260.8 258.4 255.9 253.5 248.8 244.2 237.0
10.5 270.5 268.3 265.6 263.2 260.8 258.2 255.7 251.0 246.4 239.1
10.75 273.0 270.8 268.0 265.6 263.1 260.5 257.9 253.2 248.5 241.2
11 275.5 273.3 270.5 268.0 265.5 262.8 260.2 255.4 250.7 243.3
11.25 278.0 275.8 272.9 270.4 267.9 265.1 262.4 257.6 252.9 245.4
11.5 280.6 278.2 275.3 272.8 270.2 267.4 264.6 259.8 255.0 247.5
11.75 283.1 280.7 277.8 275.2 272.6 269.7 266.9 262.0 257.2 249.6
12 285.6 283.2 280.2 277.6 275.0 272.0 269.1 264.2 259.3 251.8
12.25 288.1 285.7 282.7 280.0 277.3 274.3 271.3 266.4 261.5 253.9
12.5 290.6 288.2 285.1 282.4 279.7 276.6 273.6 268.6 263.7 256.0
12.75 293.1 290.7 287.5 284.8 282.1 278.9 275.8 270.8 265.8 258.1
13 295.7 293.1 290.0 287.2 284.4 281.2 278.0 273.0 268.0 260.2
13.25 298.2 295.6 292.4 289.6 286.8 283.5 280.3 275.2 270.1 262.3
13.5 300.7 298.1 294.9 292.0 289.2 285.8 282.5 277.4 272.3 264.5
13.75 303.1 300.5 297.3 294.4 291.5 288.1 284.7 279.6 274.5 266.6
14 305.4 302.9 299.7 296.8 293.9 290.4 287.0 281.8 276.6 268.7

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02

Inches 32 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
14.25 307.7 305.2 302.1 299.2 296.3 292.7 289.2 284.0 278.8 270.8
14.5 310.1 307.6 304.4 301.5 298.6 295.0 291.4 286.2 280.9 272.9
14.75 312.4 309.9 306.7 303.9 301.0 297.3 293.7 288.4 283.1 275.0
15 314.8 312.2 309.0 306.1 303.2 299.5 295.9 290.6 285.3 277.1
15.25 317.1 314.5 311.3 308.3 305.4 301.7 298.1 292.8 287.4 279.3
15.5 319.4 316.8 313.6 310.6 307.5 304.0 300.4 295.0 289.6 281.4
15.75 321.8 319.2 315.9 312.8 309.7 306.1 302.5 297.1 291.8 283.5
16 324.1 321.5 318.2 315.0 311.9 308.2 304.6 299.2 293.9 285.6
16.25 326.4 323.8 320.5 317.3 314.1 310.4 306.7 301.4 296.1 287.7
16.5 328.8 326.1 322.8 319.5 316.2 312.5 308.8 303.5 298.2 289.8
16.75 331.1 328.4 325.1 321.8 318.4 314.6 310.8 305.6 300.4 291.9
17 333.5 330.8 327.4 324.0 320.6 316.8 312.9 307.7 302.5 294.1
17.25 335.8 333.1 329.7 326.2 322.8 318.9 315.0 309.7 304.5 296.2
17.5 338.1 335.4 332.0 328.5 325.0 321.0 317.1 311.8 306.5 298.3
17.75 340.5 337.7 334.3 330.7 327.1 323.1 319.2 313.8 308.5 300.4
18 342.8 340.1 336.6 333.0 329.3 325.3 321.3 315.9 310.5 302.5
18.25 345.2 342.4 338.9 335.2 331.5 327.4 323.3 317.9 312.6 304.5
18.5 347.5 344.7 341.2 337.4 333.7 329.5 325.4 320.0 314.6 306.5
18.75 349.8 347.0 343.5 339.7 335.8 331.7 327.5 322.1 316.6 308.6
19 352.2 349.3 345.8 341.9 338.0 333.8 329.6 324.1 318.6 310.6
19.25 354.5 351.7 348.1 344.2 340.2 335.9 331.7 326.2 320.6 312.6
19.5 356.8 354.0 350.4 346.4 342.4 338.1 333.8 328.2 322.7 314.7
19.75 359.2 356.3 352.7 348.6 344.6 340.2 335.8 330.3 324.7 316.7
20 361.5 358.6 355.0 350.9 346.7 342.3 337.9 332.3 326.7 318.8
20.25 363.9 360.9 357.3 353.1 348.9 344.5 340.0 334.4 328.7 320.8
20.5 366.2 363.3 359.6 355.3 351.1 346.6 342.1 336.4 330.7 322.8
20.75 368.5 365.6 361.9 357.6 353.3 348.7 344.2 338.5 332.8 324.9
21 370.9 367.9 364.2 359.8 355.4 350.8 346.3 340.5 334.8 326.9
21.25 373.2 370.2 366.5 362.1 357.6 353.0 348.3 342.6 336.8 328.9
21.5 375.6 372.6 368.8 364.3 359.8 355.1 350.4 344.6 338.8 331.0
21.75 377.9 374.9 371.1 366.5 362.0 357.2 352.5 346.7 340.9 333.0
22 380.2 377.2 373.4 368.8 364.2 359.4 354.6 348.7 342.9 335.0
22.25 382.6 379.5 375.7 371.0 366.3 361.5 356.7 350.8 344.9 337.1
22.5 384.9 381.8 378.0 373.3 368.5 363.6 358.8 352.8 346.9 339.1
22.75 387.2 384.2 380.3 375.5 370.7 365.8 360.8 354.9 348.9 341.1
23 389.6 386.5 382.6 377.7 372.9 367.9 362.9 356.9 351.0 343.2
23.25 391.9 388.8 384.9 380.0 375.0 370.0 365.0 359.0 353.0 345.2
23.5 394.3 391.1 387.2 382.2 377.2 372.2 367.1 361.0 355.0 347.3
23.75 396.6 393.4 389.5 384.4 379.4 374.3 369.2 363.1 357.0 349.3
24 398.9 395.8 391.8 386.7 381.6 376.4 371.3 365.1 359.0 351.3
24.25 401.3 398.1 394.1 388.9 383.8 378.5 373.3 367.2 361.1 353.4
24.5 403.6 400.4 396.4 391.2 385.9 380.7 375.4 369.3 363.1 355.4
24.75 406.0 402.7 398.7 393.4 388.1 382.8 377.5 371.3 365.1 357.4
25 408.3 405.1 401.0 395.6 390.3 384.9 379.6 373.4 367.1 359.5
25.25 403.3 397.9 392.5 387.1 381.7 375.4 369.1 361.5
25.5 405.6 400.1 394.6 389.2 383.8 377.5 371.2 363.5
25.75 407.9 402.4 396.8 391.3 385.8 379.5 373.2 365.6
26 399.0 393.5 387.9 381.6 375.2 367.6
26.25 401.2 395.6 390.0 383.6 377.2 369.6
26.5 403.4 397.7 392.1 385.7 379.3 371.7
26.75 405.5 399.8 394.2 387.7 381.3 373.7
27 407.7 402.0 396.3 389.8 383.3 375.8
27.25 398.3 391.8 385.3 377.8
27.5 400.4 393.9 387.3 379.8
27.75 402.5 395.9 389.4 381.9
28 404.6 398.0 391.4 383.9
28.25 406.7 400.0 393.4 385.9
28.5 408.8 402.1 395.4 388.0
28.75 397.4 390.0
29 399.5 392.0
29.25 401.5 394.1
29.5 396.1
29.75 398.1
30 400.2
30.25 402.2
110
ISSUE No. 02
343L Tank
Inches 32 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
7.75 356.4 354.7 352.4 350.2 347.9
8 362.1 360.2 357.8 355.5 353.1
8.25 367.7 365.7 363.3 360.8 358.3
8.5 373.4 371.3 368.7 366.1 363.5
8.75 379.0 376.8 374.1 371.4 368.6 361.4 354.1 346.8 339.5 332.2
9 384.6 382.4 379.5 376.7 373.8 366.5 359.2 351.8 344.5 337.2
9.25 390.3 387.9 384.9 382.0 379.0 371.6 364.2 356.8 349.5 342.1
9.5 395.9 393.4 390.4 387.3 384.2 376.7 369.3 361.9 354.4 347.0
9.75 401.6 399.0 395.8 392.6 389.4 381.9 374.4 366.9 359.4 351.9
10 407.2 404.5 401.2 397.9 394.5 387.0 379.4 371.9 364.3 356.8
10.25 412.8 410.1 406.6 403.2 399.7 392.1 384.5 376.9 369.3 361.7
10.5 418.5 415.6 412.0 408.5 404.9 397.2 389.6 381.9 374.3 366.6
10.75 424.1 421.1 417.4 413.8 410.1 402.3 394.6 386.9 379.2 371.5
11 429.7 426.7 422.9 419.0 415.2 407.5 399.7 392.0 384.2 376.4
11.25 435.4 432.2 428.3 424.3 420.4 412.6 404.8 397.0 389.2 381.4
11.5 441.0 437.8 433.7 429.6 425.6 417.7 409.9 402.0 394.1 386.3
11.75 446.7 443.3 439.1 434.9 430.8 422.8 414.9 407.0 399.1 391.2
12 452.3 448.9 444.5 440.2 435.9 428.0 420.0 412.0 404.1 396.1
12.25 457.9 454.4 450.0 445.5 441.1 433.1 425.1 417.0 409.0 401.0
12.5 463.6 459.9 455.4 450.8 446.3 438.2 430.1 422.1 414.0 405.9
12.75 469.2 465.5 460.8 456.1 451.5 443.3 435.2 427.1 419.0 410.8
13 474.9 471.0 466.2 461.4 456.6 448.5 440.3 432.1 423.9 415.7
13.25 480.5 476.6 471.6 466.7 461.8 453.6 445.3 437.1 428.9 420.7
13.5 486.1 482.1 477.1 472.0 467.0 458.7 450.4 442.1 433.8 425.6
13.75 491.8 487.6 482.5 477.3 472.2 463.8 455.5 447.1 438.8 430.5
14 497.4 493.2 487.9 482.6 477.3 468.9 460.6 452.2 443.8 435.4
14.25 503.0 498.7 493.3 487.9 482.5 474.1 465.6 457.2 448.7 440.3
14.5 508.7 504.3 498.7 493.2 487.7 479.2 470.7 462.2 453.7 445.2
14.75 514.3 509.8 504.2 498.5 492.9 484.3 475.8 467.2 458.7 450.1
15 520.0 515.3 509.6 503.8 498.0 489.4 480.8 472.2 463.6 455.0
15.25 525.6 520.9 515.0 509.1 503.2 494.6 485.9 477.2 468.6 459.9
15.5 531.2 526.4 520.4 514.4 508.4 499.7 491.0 482.3 473.6 464.9
15.75 536.9 532.0 525.8 519.7 513.6 504.8 496.0 487.3 478.5 469.8
16 542.5 537.5 531.2 525.0 518.7 509.9 501.1 492.3 483.5 474.7
16.25 548.2 543.0 536.7 530.3 523.9 515.0 506.2 497.3 488.5 479.6
16.5 553.8 548.6 542.1 535.6 529.1 520.2 511.3 502.3 493.4 484.5
16.75 559.4 554.1 547.5 540.9 534.3 525.3 516.3 507.4 498.4 489.4
17 565.1 559.7 552.9 546.2 539.4 530.4 521.4 512.4 503.3 494.3
17.25 570.6 565.1 558.3 551.4 544.6 535.5 526.5 517.4 508.3 499.2
17.5 576.0 570.5 563.6 556.7 549.8 540.7 531.5 522.4 513.3 504.1
17.75 581.4 575.8 568.9 561.9 555.0 545.8 536.6 527.4 518.2 509.1
18 586.8 581.2 574.2 567.1 560.1 550.9 541.7 532.4 523.2 514.0
18.25 592.2 586.5 579.5 572.4 565.3 556.0 546.7 537.5 528.2 518.9
18.5 597.6 591.9 584.7 577.6 570.4 561.1 551.8 542.4 533.1 523.8
18.75 603.0 597.2 590.0 582.7 575.5 566.1 556.8 547.4 538.1 528.7
19 608.4 602.5 595.2 587.8 580.5 571.1 561.8 552.4 543.0 533.6
19.25 613.8 607.8 600.4 593.0 585.5 576.1 566.7 557.3 547.9 538.5
19.5 619.2 613.2 605.6 598.1 590.6 581.2 571.7 562.3 552.9 543.4
19.75 624.6 618.5 610.9 603.3 595.6 586.2 576.7 567.3 557.8 548.4
20 630.0 623.8 616.1 608.4 600.7 591.2 581.7 572.2 562.7 553.3
20.25 635.4 629.1 621.3 613.5 605.7 596.2 586.7 577.2 567.7 558.2
20.5 640.8 634.5 626.6 618.7 610.8 601.2 591.7 582.2 572.6 563.1
20.75 646.2 639.8 631.8 623.8 615.8 606.2 596.7 587.1 577.6 568.0
21 651.6 645.1 637.0 628.9 620.8 611.1 601.4 591.7 582.0 572.2
21.25 657.0 650.4 642.3 634.1 625.9 616.0 606.1 596.3 586.4 576.5
21.5 662.4 655.8 647.5 639.2 630.9 620.9 610.9 600.8 590.8 580.7
21.75 667.8 661.1 652.7 644.3 636.0 625.8 615.6 605.4 595.2 585.0
22 673.2 666.4 658.0 649.5 641.0 630.7 620.3 609.9 599.6 589.2
22.25 678.6 671.7 663.2 654.6 646.1 635.5 625.0 614.5 604.0 593.5
22.5 684.0 677.1 668.4 659.8 651.1 640.4 629.7 619.1 608.4 597.7
22.75 689.4 682.4 673.6 664.9 656.1 645.3 634.5 623.6 612.8 602.0
23 694.8 687.7 678.9 670.0 661.2 650.2 639.2 628.2 617.2 606.2
23.25 700.2 693.0 684.1 675.2 666.2 655.1 643.9 632.8 621.6 610.5
23.5 705.6 698.4 689.3 680.3 671.3 660.0 648.6 637.3 626.0 614.7
23.75 711.0 703.7 694.6 685.4 676.3 664.8 653.4 641.9 630.4 618.9
24 716.4 709.0 699.8 690.6 681.4 669.7 658.1 646.5 634.8 623.2
24.25 721.8 714.3 705.0 695.7 686.4 674.6 662.8 651.0 639.2 627.4
24.5 727.2 719.7 710.3 700.9 691.4 679.5 667.5 655.6 643.6 631.7
24.75 732.6 725.0 715.5 706.0 696.5 684.4 672.3 660.1 648.0 635.9
25 738.0 730.3 720.7 711.1 701.5 689.3 677.0 664.7 652.4 640.2
25.25 743.4 735.6 726.0 716.3 706.6 694.1 681.7 669.3 656.8 644.4
25.5 748.8 741.0 731.2 721.4 711.6 699.0 686.4 673.8 661.3 648.7

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02

Inches 32 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
25.75 754.2 746.3 736.4 726.5 716.7 703.9 691.2 678.4 665.7 652.9
26 759.6 751.6 741.6 731.7 721.7 708.8 695.9 683.0 670.1 657.2
26.25 765.0 756.9 746.9 736.8 726.7 713.7 700.6 687.5 674.5 661.4
26.5 770.4 762.3 752.1 741.9 731.8 718.6 705.3 692.1 678.9 665.6
26.75 775.8 767.6 757.3 747.1 736.8 723.4 710.1 696.7 683.3 669.9
27 781.2 772.9 762.6 752.2 741.9 728.3 714.8 701.2 687.7 674.1
27.25 786.6 778.2 767.8 757.4 746.9 733.2 719.5 705.8 692.1 678.4
27.5 752.0 738.1 724.2 710.4 696.5 682.6
27.75 757.0 743.0 728.9 714.9 700.9 686.9
28 762.0 747.9 733.7 719.5 705.3 691.1
28.25 767.1 752.7 738.4 724.0 709.7 695.4
28.5 772.1 757.6 743.1 728.6 714.1 699.6
28.75 777.2 762.5 747.8 733.2 718.5 703.8
29 782.2 767.4 752.6 737.7 722.9 708.1
29.25 787.3 772.3 757.3 742.3 727.3 712.3
29.5 792.3 777.2 762.0 746.9 731.7 716.6
29.75 797.3 782.0 766.7 751.4 736.1 720.8
30 802.4 786.9 771.5 756.0 740.5 725.1
30.25 807.4 791.8 776.2 760.6 744.9 729.3
30.5 812.5 796.7 780.9 765.1 749.3 733.6
30.75 817.5 801.6 785.6 769.7 753.8 737.8
31 822.6 806.5 790.4 774.3 758.2 742.1
31.25 746.3
31.5 750.5
31.75 754.8
32 759.0
106L Tank
LLI “Temperature, Degrees C”
cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
“Weight of FM-200, kilograms”
19.5
20 50.8 50.6 50.3
20.5 51.6 51.4 51.1 50.6 50.1
21 52.5 52.2 52.0 51.5 50.9 50.6 50.3
21.5 53.3 53.1 52.8 52.3 51.7 51.4 51.0 50.7 50.3
22 54.2 53.9 53.6 53.1 52.6 52.2 51.8 51.4 51.0 50.3 50.8
22.5 55.1 54.8 54.5 53.9 53.4 53.0 52.6 52.2 51.8 51.0 51.5
23 55.9 55.6 55.3 54.7 54.2 53.8 53.4 53.0 52.5 51.8 52.2
23.5 56.8 56.4 56.1 55.5 55.0 54.5 54.2 53.7 53.2 52.5 52.9
24 57.6 57.3 56.9 56.4 55.8 55.3 54.9 54.5 54.0 53.2 53.7
24.5 58.5 58.1 57.8 57.2 56.6 56.1 55.7 55.2 54.7 53.9 54.4
25 59.3 59.0 58.6 58.0 57.4 56.9 56.5 56.0 55.5 54.6 55.1
25.5 60.2 59.8 59.4 58.8 58.2 57.7 57.3 56.8 56.2 55.4 55.8
26 61.0 60.6 60.3 59.6 59.0 58.5 58.1 57.5 56.9 56.1 56.5
26.5 61.9 61.5 61.1 60.5 59.8 59.3 58.8 58.3 57.7 56.8 57.2
27 62.7 62.3 61.9 61.3 60.6 60.1 59.6 59.0 58.4 57.5 57.9
27.5 63.6 63.2 62.7 62.1 61.5 60.9 60.4 59.8 59.1 58.3 58.6
28 64.4 64.0 63.6 62.9 62.3 61.7 61.2 60.6 59.9 59.0 59.3
28.5 65.3 64.8 64.4 63.7 63.1 62.5 62.0 61.3 60.6 59.7 60.0
29 66.1 65.7 65.2 64.6 63.9 63.3 62.7 62.1 61.4 60.4 60.7
29.5 67.0 66.5 66.1 65.4 64.7 64.1 63.5 62.9 62.1 61.2 61.4
30 67.8 67.4 66.9 66.2 65.5 64.9 64.3 63.6 62.8 61.9 62.1
30.5 68.7 68.2 67.7 67.0 66.3 65.7 65.1 64.4 63.6 62.6 62.8
31 69.5 69.0 68.5 67.8 67.1 66.5 65.9 65.1 64.3 63.3 63.5
31.5 70.4 69.9 69.4 68.6 67.9 67.3 66.6 65.9 65.1 64.1 64.2
32 71.2 70.7 70.2 69.5 68.7 68.1 67.4 66.7 65.8 64.8 65.0
32.5 72.1 71.6 71.0 70.3 69.5 68.9 68.2 67.4 66.5 65.5 65.7
33 73.0 72.4 71.9 71.1 70.4 69.7 69.0 68.2 67.3 66.2 66.4
33.5 73.8 73.2 72.7 71.9 71.2 70.5 69.8 68.9 68.0 67.0 67.1
34 74.7 74.1 73.5 72.7 72.0 71.3 70.5 69.7 68.7 67.7 67.8
34.5 75.5 74.9 74.3 73.6 72.8 72.0 71.3 70.5 69.5 68.4 68.5
35 76.4 75.8 75.2 74.4 73.6 72.8 72.1 71.2 70.2 69.1 69.2
35.5 77.2 76.6 76.0 75.2 74.4 73.6 72.9 72.0 71.0 69.8 69.9
36 78.1 77.4 76.8 76.0 75.2 74.4 73.7 72.8 71.7 70.6 70.6
36.5 78.9 78.3 77.6 76.8 76.0 75.2 74.5 73.5 72.4 71.3 71.3
37 79.8 79.1 78.5 77.6 76.8 76.0 75.2 74.3 73.2 72.0 72.0
37.5 80.6 80.0 79.3 78.5 77.6 76.8 76.0 75.0 73.9 72.7 72.7
38 81.5 80.8 80.1 79.3 78.4 77.6 76.8 75.8 74.7 73.5 73.4
38.5 82.3 81.6 80.9 80.1 79.2 78.4 77.6 76.6 75.4 74.2 74.1
39 83.1 82.4 81.7 80.9 80.1 79.2 78.4 77.3 76.1 74.9 74.8
39.5 84.0 83.2 82.5 81.7 80.8 80.0 79.1 78.1 76.9 75.6 75.5
112
ISSUE No. 02

cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
40 84.8 84.1 83.3 82.5 81.6 80.8 79.9 78.8 77.6 76.4 76.3
40.5 85.6 84.9 84.1 83.3 82.4 81.6 80.7 79.6 78.4 77.1 77.0
41 86.5 85.7 84.9 84.1 83.2 82.3 81.5 80.4 79.1 77.8 77.7
41.5 87.3 86.5 85.7 84.9 84.0 83.1 82.2 81.1 79.8 78.5 78.4
42 88.1 87.3 86.5 85.6 84.8 83.9 83.0 81.9 80.6 79.3 79.1
42.5 89.0 88.1 87.3 86.4 85.6 84.7 83.8 82.6 81.3 80.0 79.9
43 89.8 89.0 88.1 87.2 86.4 85.5 84.5 83.4 82.0 80.7 80.6
43.5 90.6 89.8 88.9 88.0 87.1 86.2 85.3 84.1 82.8 81.4 81.3
44 91.5 90.6 89.7 88.8 87.9 87.0 86.1 84.9 83.5 82.1 82.0
44.5 92.3 91.4 90.5 89.6 88.7 87.8 86.9 85.6 84.2 82.9 82.8
45 93.2 92.2 91.3 90.4 89.5 88.6 87.6 86.4 85.0 83.6 83.5
45.5 94.0 93.0 92.1 91.2 90.3 89.4 88.4 87.2 85.7 84.3 84.2
46 94.8 93.9 92.9 92.0 91.1 90.1 89.2 87.9 86.4 85.0 84.9
46.5 95.7 94.7 93.7 92.8 91.9 90.9 89.9 88.7 87.1 85.7 85.7
47 96.5 95.5 94.5 93.6 92.7 91.7 90.7 89.4 87.9 86.5 86.4
47.5 97.3 96.3 95.3 94.4 93.4 92.5 91.5 90.2 88.6 87.2 87.1
48 98.2 97.1 96.1 95.1 94.2 93.3 92.3 90.9 89.3 87.9 87.9
48.5 99.0 97.9 96.9 95.9 95.0 94.0 93.0 91.7 90.1 88.6 88.6
49 99.8 98.8 97.7 96.7 95.8 94.8 93.8 92.4 90.8 89.4 89.3
49.5 100.7 99.6 98.5 97.5 96.6 95.6 94.6 93.2 91.5 90.1 90.0
50 101.5 100.4 99.3 98.3 97.4 96.4 95.3 93.9 92.3 90.8 90.8
50.5 102.4 101.2 100.1 99.1 98.2 97.1 96.1 94.7 93.0 91.5 91.5
51 103.2 102.0 100.8 99.9 99.0 97.9 96.9 95.5 93.7 92.2 92.2
51.5 104.0 102.8 101.6 100.7 99.7 98.7 97.7 96.2 94.5 93.0 93.0
52 104.9 103.7 102.4 101.5 100.5 99.5 98.4 97.0 95.2 93.7 93.7
52.5 105.7 104.5 103.2 102.3 101.3 100.3 99.2 97.7 95.9 94.4 94.4
53 106.5 105.3 104.0 103.1 102.1 101.0 100.0 98.5 96.6 95.1 95.1
53.5 107.4 106.1 104.8 103.9 102.9 101.8 100.7 99.2 97.4 95.8 95.9
54 108.2 106.9 105.6 104.7 103.7 102.6 101.5 100.0 98.1 96.6 96.6
54.5 109.0 107.7 106.4 105.4 104.5 103.4 102.3 100.7 98.8 97.3 97.3
55 109.9 108.5 107.2 106.2 105.2 104.2 103.1 101.5 99.6 98.0 98.1
55.5 110.7 109.4 108.0 107.0 106.0 104.9 103.8 102.2 100.3 98.7 98.8
56 111.5 110.2 108.8 107.8 106.8 105.7 104.6 103.0 101.0 99.5 99.5
56.5 106.5 105.4 103.8 101.8 100.2 100.2
57 107.3 106.1 104.5 102.5 100.9 101.0
57.5 106.9 105.3 103.2 101.6 101.7
58 106.0 104.0 102.3 102.4
58.5 106.8 104.7 103.1 103.1
59 105.4 103.8 103.9
59.5 106.2 104.5 104.6
60 106.9 105.2 105.3
60.5 106.0 106.1
61 106.7 106.8
61.5 107.4
62
62.5
63
147L Tank
cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
26
26.5 70.8 70.6 70.4 69.8
27 71.7 71.5 71.3 70.7 70.1 69.6
27.5 72.6 72.4 72.1 71.5 70.9 70.5 70.0
28 73.5 73.3 73.0 72.4 71.8 71.3 70.8 70.1
28.5 74.4 74.1 73.9 73.2 72.6 72.1 71.6 70.9 69.9
29 75.3 75.0 74.7 74.1 73.5 72.9 72.4 71.6 70.7
29.5 76.2 75.9 75.6 74.9 74.3 73.7 73.2 72.4 71.5 69.8
30 77.1 76.8 76.5 75.8 75.1 74.6 74.0 73.2 72.2 70.6
30.5 78.0 77.7 77.3 76.6 76.0 75.4 74.8 74.0 73.0 71.4
31 78.9 78.6 78.2 77.5 76.8 76.2 75.6 74.8 73.8 72.1 70.0
31.5 79.8 79.4 79.1 78.4 77.6 77.0 76.4 75.6 74.6 72.9 70.8
32 80.7 80.3 79.9 79.2 78.5 77.8 77.2 76.3 75.3 73.7 71.6
32.5 81.6 81.2 80.8 80.1 79.3 78.6 78.0 77.1 76.1 74.4 72.4
33 82.5 82.1 81.7 80.9 80.2 79.5 78.8 77.9 76.9 75.2 73.1
33.5 83.4 83.0 82.5 81.8 81.0 80.3 79.6 78.7 77.6 76.0 73.9
34 84.3 83.8 83.4 82.6 81.8 81.1 80.4 79.5 78.4 76.7 74.7
34.5 85.2 84.7 84.3 83.5 82.7 81.9 81.2 80.3 79.2 77.5 75.5
35 86.1 85.6 85.1 84.3 83.5 82.7 82.0 81.0 80.0 78.3 76.2

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02

cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
35.5 87.0 86.5 86.0 85.2 84.3 83.6 82.8 81.8 80.7 79.0 77.0
36 87.9 87.4 86.9 86.0 85.2 84.4 83.6 82.6 81.5 79.8 77.8
36.5 88.8 88.3 87.7 86.9 86.0 85.2 84.4 83.4 82.3 80.6 78.6
37 89.7 89.1 88.6 87.7 86.9 86.0 85.2 84.2 83.0 81.3 79.3
37.5 90.6 90.0 89.5 88.6 87.7 86.8 86.0 85.0 83.8 82.1 80.1
38 91.5 90.9 90.3 89.4 88.5 87.6 86.8 85.7 84.6 82.9 80.9
38.5 92.4 91.8 91.2 90.3 89.4 88.5 87.6 86.5 85.3 83.6 81.7
39 93.3 92.7 92.1 91.1 90.2 89.3 88.4 87.3 86.1 84.4 82.4
39.5 94.2 93.6 92.9 92.0 91.0 90.1 89.2 88.1 86.9 85.2 83.2
40 95.1 94.4 93.8 92.8 91.9 90.9 90.0 88.9 87.7 85.9 84.0
40.5 96.0 95.3 94.7 93.7 92.7 91.7 90.8 89.7 88.4 86.7 84.8
41 96.9 96.2 95.5 94.5 93.5 92.6 91.6 90.4 89.2 87.5 85.5
41.5 97.8 97.1 96.4 95.4 94.4 93.4 92.4 91.2 90.0 88.2 86.3
42 98.7 98.0 97.3 96.3 95.2 94.2 93.2 92.0 90.7 89.0 87.1
42.5 99.6 98.9 98.1 97.1 96.1 95.0 94.0 92.8 91.5 89.8 87.9
43 100.4 99.7 99.0 98.0 96.9 95.8 94.8 93.6 92.3 90.5 88.6
43.5 101.3 100.6 99.9 98.8 97.7 96.6 95.6 94.4 93.1 91.3 89.4
44 102.2 101.5 100.8 99.7 98.6 97.5 96.4 95.1 93.8 92.1 90.2
44.5 103.1 102.4 101.6 100.5 99.4 98.3 97.2 95.9 94.6 92.8 91.0
45 104.0 103.3 102.5 101.4 100.2 99.1 98.0 96.7 95.4 93.6 91.7
45.5 104.9 104.1 103.4 102.2 101.1 99.9 98.8 97.5 96.1 94.4 92.5
46 105.8 105.0 104.2 103.1 101.9 100.7 99.5 98.3 96.9 95.1 93.3
46.5 106.7 105.9 105.1 103.9 102.8 101.6 100.3 99.0 97.7 95.9 94.1
47 107.6 106.8 106.0 104.8 103.6 102.4 101.1 99.8 98.4 96.7 94.8
47.5 108.5 107.7 106.8 105.6 104.4 103.2 101.9 100.6 99.2 97.4 95.6
48 109.4 108.6 107.7 106.5 105.3 104.0 102.7 101.4 100.0 98.2 96.4
48.5 110.3 109.4 108.6 107.3 106.1 104.8 103.5 102.2 100.8 99.0 97.2
49 111.2 110.3 109.4 108.2 106.9 105.6 104.3 103.0 101.5 99.7 97.9
49.5 112.1 111.2 110.3 109.0 107.8 106.5 105.1 103.7 102.3 100.5 98.7
50 112.9 112.0 111.1 109.9 108.6 107.3 105.9 104.5 103.1 101.3 99.5
50.5 113.7 112.8 111.9 110.7 109.4 108.1 106.7 105.3 103.8 102.0 100.3
51 114.6 113.7 112.8 111.5 110.3 108.9 107.5 106.1 104.6 102.8 101.0
51.5 115.4 114.5 113.6 112.3 111.1 109.7 108.3 106.9 105.4 103.6 101.8
52 116.3 115.3 114.4 113.1 111.9 110.5 109.1 107.7 106.2 104.3 102.6
52.5 117.1 116.1 115.2 113.9 112.7 111.3 109.9 108.4 106.9 105.1 103.3
53 118.0 117.0 116.0 114.7 113.5 112.1 110.7 109.2 107.7 105.9 104.1
53.5 118.8 117.8 116.8 115.5 114.3 112.9 111.5 110.0 108.5 106.6 104.9
54 119.7 118.6 117.6 116.3 115.1 113.7 112.3 110.8 109.2 107.4 105.7
54.5 120.5 119.5 118.4 117.1 115.8 114.4 113.0 111.5 110.0 108.2 106.5
55 121.4 120.3 119.2 117.9 116.6 115.2 113.8 112.3 110.8 108.9 107.3
55.5 122.2 121.1 120.0 118.7 117.4 116.0 114.5 113.1 111.5 109.7 108.1
56 123.1 121.9 120.8 119.5 118.2 116.8 115.3 113.8 112.3 110.4 108.9
56.5 123.9 122.8 121.6 120.3 119.0 117.6 116.1 114.6 113.0 111.2 109.6
57 124.7 123.6 122.4 121.1 119.8 118.3 116.8 115.3 113.7 111.9 110.4
57.5 125.6 124.4 123.2 121.9 120.6 119.1 117.6 116.1 114.5 112.7 111.1
58 126.4 125.2 124.0 122.7 121.4 119.9 118.4 116.8 115.2 113.4 111.9
58.5 127.3 126.1 124.8 123.5 122.1 120.7 119.1 117.6 115.9 114.1 112.6
59 128.1 126.9 125.6 124.3 122.9 121.4 119.9 118.3 116.7 114.9 113.4
59.5 129.0 127.7 126.4 125.1 123.7 122.2 120.7 119.1 117.4 115.6 114.2
60 129.8 128.5 127.2 125.9 124.5 123.0 121.4 119.8 118.1 116.3 114.9
60.5 130.7 129.4 128.0 126.7 125.3 123.8 122.2 120.6 118.9 117.1 115.7
61 131.5 130.2 128.8 127.5 126.1 124.5 122.9 121.3 119.6 117.8 116.4
61.5 132.4 131.0 129.7 128.3 126.9 125.3 123.7 122.1 120.3 118.5 117.2
62 133.2 131.8 130.5 129.1 127.7 126.1 124.5 122.8 121.1 119.3 117.9
62.5 134.1 132.7 131.3 129.9 128.5 126.9 125.2 123.6 121.8 120.0 118.7
63 134.9 133.5 132.1 130.7 129.2 127.7 126.0 124.3 122.6 120.7 119.4
63.5 135.7 134.3 132.9 131.5 130.0 128.4 126.8 125.1 123.3 121.5 120.2
64 136.6 135.1 133.7 132.2 130.8 129.2 127.5 125.8 124.0 122.2 120.9
64.5 137.4 136.0 134.5 133.0 131.6 130.0 128.3 126.6 124.8 122.9 121.7
65 138.3 136.8 135.3 133.8 132.4 130.8 129.1 127.3 125.5 123.7 122.4
65.5 139.1 137.6 136.1 134.6 133.2 131.5 129.8 128.1 126.2 124.4 123.2
66 140.0 138.4 136.9 135.4 134.0 132.3 130.6 128.8 127.0 125.1 123.9
66.5 140.8 139.3 137.7 136.2 134.8 133.1 131.4 129.6 127.7 125.9 124.7
67 141.7 140.1 138.5 137.0 135.6 133.9 132.1 130.3 128.4 126.6 125.4
67.5 142.5 140.9 139.3 137.8 136.3 134.6 132.9 131.1 129.2 127.3 126.2
68 143.4 141.7 140.1 138.6 137.1 135.4 133.6 131.8 129.9 128.1 126.9
68.5 144.2 142.6 140.9 139.4 137.9 136.2 134.4 132.6 130.6 128.8 127.7
69 145.1 143.4 141.7 140.2 138.7 137.0 135.2 133.3 131.4 129.5 128.4
69.5 145.9 144.2 142.5 141.0 139.5 137.7 135.9 134.1 132.1 130.3 129.2
70 146.8 145.0 143.3 141.8 140.3 138.5 136.7 134.8 132.8 131.0 129.9
70.5 147.6 145.9 144.1 142.6 141.1 139.3 137.5 135.6 133.6 131.7 130.7
71 148.4 146.7 144.9 143.4 141.9 140.1 138.2 136.3 134.3 132.5 131.4
114
ISSUE No. 02

cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
71.5 149.3 147.5 145.8 144.2 142.6 140.9 139.0 137.1 135.1 133.2 132.2
72 150.1 148.3 146.6 145.0 143.4 141.6 139.8 137.8 135.8 133.9 132.9
72.5 151.0 149.2 147.4 145.8 144.2 142.4 140.5 138.6 136.5 134.7 133.7
73 151.8 150.0 148.2 146.6 145.0 143.2 141.3 139.3 137.3 135.4 134.4
73.5 152.7 150.8 149.0 147.4 145.8 144.0 142.0 140.1 138.0 136.1 135.2
74 153.5 151.6 149.8 148.2 146.6 144.7 142.8 140.8 138.7 136.9 135.9
74.5 154.4 152.5 150.6 149.0 147.4 145.5 143.6 141.6 139.5 137.6 136.7
75 146.3 144.3 142.3 140.2 138.3 137.4
75.5 147.1 145.1 143.1 140.9 139.1 138.2
76 147.8 145.9 143.8 141.7 139.8 138.9
76.5 146.6 144.6 142.4 140.5 139.7
77 147.4 145.3 143.1 141.3 140.4
77.5 146.1 143.9 142.0 141.2
78 146.8 144.6 142.7 141.9
78.5 147.6 145.3 143.5 142.7
79 146.1 144.2 143.5
79.5 146.8 144.9 144.2
80 147.6 145.7 145.0
80.5 146.4 145.7
81 147.1 146.5
81.5 147.8 147.2
82
82.5
83
83.5
180L Tank
cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
6
6.5 86.5
7 87.4 86.9 86.3
7.5 88.3 87.8 87.2 86.6
8 89.2 88.6 88.0 87.5 86.9 86.6 86.4
8.5 90.1 89.5 88.9 88.4 87.8 87.5 87.2 86.2
9 91.0 90.4 89.8 89.2 88.6 88.3 88.0 87.0
9.5 91.9 91.3 90.7 90.1 89.5 89.1 88.8 87.8
10 92.9 92.2 91.5 90.9 90.3 90.0 89.6 88.6 86.9
10.5 93.8 93.1 92.4 91.8 91.2 90.8 90.4 89.4 87.7
11 94.7 94.0 93.3 92.7 92.0 91.6 91.3 90.2 88.5 86.5
11.5 95.6 94.9 94.2 93.5 92.9 92.5 92.1 90.9 89.2 87.3
12 96.5 95.7 95.0 94.4 93.7 93.3 92.9 91.7 90.0 88.1
12.5 97.4 96.6 95.9 95.3 94.6 94.1 93.7 92.5 90.8 88.8 86.8
13 98.3 97.5 96.8 96.1 95.5 94.9 94.5 93.3 91.6 89.6 87.5
13.5 99.2 98.4 97.7 97.0 96.3 95.8 95.3 94.1 92.4 90.4 88.2
14 100.1 99.3 98.5 97.8 97.2 96.6 96.1 94.9 93.1 91.1 89.0
14.5 101.0 100.2 99.4 98.7 98.0 97.4 96.9 95.7 93.9 91.9 89.7
15 101.9 101.1 100.3 99.6 98.9 98.3 97.7 96.5 94.7 92.7 90.5
15.5 102.8 102.0 101.2 100.4 99.7 99.1 98.5 97.3 95.5 93.4 91.2
16 103.7 102.9 102.0 101.3 100.6 99.9 99.4 98.1 96.3 94.2 91.9
16.5 104.6 103.7 102.9 102.2 101.4 100.8 100.2 98.9 97.0 95.0 92.7
17 105.5 104.6 103.8 103.0 102.3 101.6 101.0 99.7 97.8 95.7 93.4
17.5 106.4 105.5 104.7 103.9 103.1 102.4 101.8 100.5 98.6 96.5 94.2
18 107.3 106.4 105.5 104.7 104.0 103.3 102.6 101.3 99.4 97.3 94.9
18.5 108.2 107.3 106.4 105.6 104.8 104.1 103.4 102.1 100.2 98.0 95.6
19 109.1 108.2 107.3 106.5 105.7 104.9 104.2 102.8 100.9 98.8 96.4
19.5 110.0 109.1 108.2 107.3 106.5 105.8 105.0 103.6 101.7 99.6 97.1
20 110.9 110.0 109.0 108.2 107.4 106.6 105.8 104.4 102.5 100.4 97.8
20.5 111.8 110.8 109.9 109.1 108.2 107.4 106.6 105.2 103.3 101.1 98.6
21 112.7 111.7 110.8 109.9 109.1 108.3 107.5 106.0 104.1 101.9 99.3
21.5 113.6 112.6 111.6 110.8 109.9 109.1 108.3 106.8 104.9 102.7 100.1
22 114.5 113.5 112.5 111.6 110.8 109.9 109.1 107.6 105.6 103.4 100.8
22.5 115.4 114.4 113.4 112.5 111.6 110.7 109.9 108.4 106.4 104.2 101.5
23 116.3 115.3 114.3 113.4 112.5 111.6 110.7 109.2 107.2 105.0 102.3
23.5 117.2 116.2 115.1 114.2 113.3 112.4 111.5 110.0 108.0 105.7 103.0
24 118.1 117.1 116.0 115.1 114.2 113.2 112.3 110.8 108.8 106.5 103.8
24.5 119.0 117.9 116.9 116.0 115.0 114.1 113.1 111.6 109.5 107.3 104.5
25 119.9 118.8 117.8 116.8 115.9 114.9 113.9 112.4 110.3 108.0 105.2
25.5 120.8 119.7 118.6 117.7 116.7 115.7 114.7 113.2 111.1 108.8 106.0
26 121.7 120.6 119.5 118.5 117.6 116.6 115.6 114.0 111.9 109.6 106.7

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02

cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
26.5 122.6 121.5 120.4 119.4 118.4 117.4 116.4 114.7 112.7 110.3 107.4
27 123.5 122.4 121.3 120.3 119.3 118.2 117.2 115.5 113.4 111.1 108.2
27.5 124.4 123.3 122.1 121.1 120.1 119.1 118.0 116.3 114.2 111.9 108.9
28 125.3 124.2 123.0 122.0 121.0 119.9 118.8 117.1 115.0 112.6 109.7
28.5 126.2 125.0 123.9 122.8 121.8 120.7 119.6 117.9 115.8 113.4 110.4
29 127.1 125.9 124.8 123.7 122.7 121.6 120.4 118.7 116.6 114.2 111.1
29.5 128.0 126.8 125.6 124.6 123.5 122.4 121.2 119.5 117.3 114.9 111.9
30 128.9 127.7 126.5 125.4 124.4 123.2 122.0 120.3 118.1 115.7 112.6
30.5 129.8 128.6 127.4 126.3 125.2 124.0 122.8 121.1 118.9 116.5 113.4
31 130.7 129.5 128.3 127.2 126.1 124.9 123.7 121.9 119.7 117.2 114.1
31.5 131.6 130.4 129.1 128.0 126.9 125.7 124.5 122.7 120.5 118.0 114.8
32 132.5 131.3 130.0 128.9 127.8 126.5 125.3 123.5 121.2 118.8 115.6
32.5 133.4 132.2 130.9 129.7 128.6 127.4 126.1 124.3 122.0 119.5 116.3
33 134.3 133.0 131.7 130.6 129.5 128.2 126.9 125.1 122.8 120.3 117.0
33.5 135.2 133.9 132.6 131.5 130.3 129.0 127.7 125.9 123.6 121.1 117.8
34 136.1 134.8 133.5 132.3 131.2 129.9 128.5 126.6 124.4 121.8 118.5
34.5 137.0 135.7 134.4 133.2 132.0 130.7 129.3 127.4 125.1 122.6 119.3
35 137.9 136.5 135.2 134.1 132.9 131.5 130.1 128.2 125.9 123.4 120.0
35.5 138.7 137.4 136.1 134.9 133.7 132.4 130.9 129.0 126.7 124.1 120.7
36 139.5 138.3 137.0 135.8 134.6 133.2 131.8 129.8 127.5 124.9 121.5
36.5 140.4 139.1 137.8 136.6 135.4 134.0 132.6 130.6 128.3 125.7 122.2
37 141.2 139.9 138.6 137.4 136.3 134.9 133.4 131.4 129.0 126.5 123.0
37.5 142.0 140.7 139.4 138.3 137.1 135.7 134.2 132.2 129.8 127.2 123.7
38 142.9 141.6 140.3 139.1 137.9 136.5 135.0 133.0 130.6 128.0 124.4
38.5 143.7 142.4 141.1 139.9 138.7 137.3 135.8 133.8 131.4 128.8 125.2
39 144.5 143.2 141.9 140.7 139.5 138.0 136.6 134.6 132.2 129.5 125.9
39.5 145.4 144.1 142.7 141.5 140.2 138.8 137.4 135.4 132.9 130.3 126.6
40 146.2 144.9 143.6 142.3 141.0 139.6 138.1 136.1 133.7 131.1 127.4
40.5 147.1 145.7 144.4 143.1 141.8 140.4 138.9 136.9 134.5 131.8 128.1
41 147.9 146.5 145.2 143.9 142.6 141.1 139.6 137.6 135.2 132.6 128.9
41.5 148.7 147.4 146.0 144.7 143.4 141.9 140.4 138.4 136.0 133.4 129.7
42 149.6 148.2 146.8 145.5 144.2 142.7 141.1 139.1 136.8 134.1 130.5
42.5 150.4 149.0 147.7 146.3 144.9 143.4 141.9 139.9 137.6 134.9 131.3
43 151.2 149.9 148.5 147.1 145.7 144.2 142.6 140.6 138.3 135.6 132.1
43.5 152.1 150.7 149.3 147.9 146.5 145.0 143.4 141.4 139.0 136.4 132.9
44 152.9 151.5 150.1 148.7 147.3 145.7 144.1 142.1 139.8 137.1 133.6
44.5 153.7 152.3 151.0 149.5 148.1 146.5 144.9 142.9 140.5 137.9 134.3
45 154.6 153.2 151.8 150.3 148.9 147.3 145.6 143.6 141.2 138.6 135.1
45.5 155.4 154.0 152.6 151.1 149.6 148.0 146.4 144.3 141.9 139.3 135.8
46 156.2 154.8 153.4 151.9 150.4 148.8 147.1 145.1 142.7 140.0 136.5
46.5 157.1 155.7 154.2 152.7 151.2 149.6 147.9 145.8 143.4 140.8 137.3
47 157.9 156.5 155.1 153.5 152.0 150.3 148.6 146.5 144.1 141.5 138.0
47.5 158.8 157.3 155.9 154.3 152.8 151.1 149.4 147.3 144.8 142.2 138.7
48 159.6 158.2 156.7 155.1 153.6 151.9 150.1 148.0 145.6 142.9 139.5
48.5 160.4 159.0 157.5 155.9 154.3 152.6 150.9 148.8 146.3 143.7 140.2
49 161.3 159.8 158.4 156.7 155.1 153.4 151.7 149.5 147.0 144.4 140.9
49.5 162.1 160.6 159.2 157.5 155.9 154.2 152.4 150.2 147.8 145.1 141.7
50 162.9 161.5 160.0 158.3 156.7 154.9 153.2 151.0 148.5 145.8 142.4
50.5 163.8 162.3 160.8 159.1 157.5 155.7 153.9 151.7 149.2 146.6 143.1
51 164.6 163.1 161.6 159.9 158.2 156.5 154.7 152.5 149.9 147.3 143.9
51.5 165.4 164.0 162.5 160.8 159.0 157.2 155.4 153.2 150.7 148.0 144.6
52 166.3 164.8 163.3 161.6 159.8 158.0 156.2 153.9 151.4 148.7 145.3
52.5 167.1 165.6 164.1 162.4 160.6 158.8 156.9 154.7 152.1 149.5 146.1
53 168.0 166.4 164.9 163.2 161.4 159.5 157.7 155.4 152.8 150.2 146.8
53.5 168.8 167.3 165.8 164.0 162.2 160.3 158.4 156.1 153.6 150.9 147.5
54 169.6 168.1 166.6 164.8 162.9 161.1 159.2 156.9 154.3 151.6 148.3
54.5 170.5 168.9 167.4 165.6 163.7 161.8 159.9 157.6 155.0 152.4 149.0
55 171.3 169.8 168.2 166.4 164.5 162.6 160.7 158.4 155.8 153.1 149.7
55.5 172.1 170.6 169.0 167.2 165.3 163.4 161.4 159.1 156.5 153.8 150.5
56 173.0 171.4 169.9 168.0 166.1 164.1 162.2 159.8 157.2 154.5 151.2
56.5 173.8 172.2 170.7 168.8 166.9 164.9 162.9 160.6 157.9 155.3 151.9
57 174.6 173.1 171.5 169.6 167.6 165.7 163.7 161.3 158.7 156.0 152.7
57.5 175.5 173.9 172.3 170.4 168.4 166.4 164.4 162.1 159.4 156.7 153.4
58 176.3 174.7 173.2 171.2 169.2 167.2 165.2 162.8 160.1 157.4 154.1
58.5 177.1 175.6 174.0 172.0 170.0 168.0 165.9 163.5 160.9 158.2 154.9
59 178.0 176.4 174.8 172.8 170.8 168.7 166.7 164.3 161.6 158.9 155.6
59.5 178.8 177.2 175.6 173.6 171.6 169.5 167.4 165.0 162.3 159.6 156.4
60 179.7 178.1 176.4 174.4 172.3 170.3 168.2 165.8 163.0 160.3 157.1
60.5 180.5 178.9 177.3 175.2 173.1 171.0 168.9 166.5 163.8 161.1 157.8
61 181.3 179.7 178.1 176.0 173.9 171.8 169.7 167.2 164.5 161.8 158.6
61.5 182.2 180.5 178.9 176.8 174.7 172.6 170.4 168.0 165.2 162.5 159.3
62 183.0 181.4 179.7 177.6 175.5 173.3 171.2 168.7 165.9 163.2 160.0
116
ISSUE No. 02

cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
62.5 183.8 182.2 180.6 178.4 176.3 174.1 171.9 169.4 166.7 164.0 160.8
63 184.7 183.0 181.4 179.2 177.0 174.9 172.7 170.2 167.4 164.7 161.5
63.5 185.5 183.9 182.2 180.0 177.8 175.6 173.4 170.9 168.1 165.4 162.2
64 186.3 184.7 183.0 180.8 178.6 176.4 174.2 171.7 168.9 166.1 163.0
64.5 187.2 185.5 183.8 181.6 179.4 177.2 174.9 172.4 169.6 166.9 163.7
65 188.0 186.3 184.7 182.4 180.2 177.9 175.7 173.1 170.3 167.6 164.4
65.5 188.9 187.2 185.5 183.2 181.0 178.7 176.5 173.9 171.0 168.3 165.2
66 189.7 188.0 186.3 184.0 181.7 179.5 177.2 174.6 171.8 169.0 165.9
66.5 190.5 188.8 187.1 184.8 182.5 180.2 178.0 175.4 172.5 169.8 166.6
67 181.0 178.7 176.1 173.2 170.5 167.4
67.5 181.8 179.5 176.8 173.9 171.2 168.1
68 182.5 180.2 177.6 174.7 171.9 168.8
68.5 181.0 178.3 175.4 172.7 169.6
69 181.7 179.0 176.1 173.4 170.3
69.5 182.5 179.8 176.9 174.1 171.0
70 180.5 177.6 174.8 171.8
70.5 181.3 178.3 175.6 172.5
71 182.0 179.0 176.3 173.2
71.5 182.7 179.8 177.0 174.0
72 180.5 177.7 174.7
72.5 181.2 178.5 175.4
73 182.0 179.2 176.2
73.5 182.7 179.9 176.9
74 180.6 177.6
74.5 181.4 178.4
75 182.1 179.1
75.5 182.8 179.8
76 180.6
76.5 181.3
77 182.0
77.5 182.8
78
78.5
79
79.5
343L Tank
cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
15
15.5
16
16.5
17
17.5
18
18.5
19
19.5
20
20.5 165.2 164.2 163.3 162.3
21 167.2 166.2 165.2 164.2 163.2
21.5 169.3 168.2 167.1 166.1 165.0 162.5
22 171.3 170.2 169.1 168.0 166.9 164.3
22.5 173.3 172.2 171.0 169.9 168.7 166.2 163.2
23 175.3 174.1 173.0 171.8 170.6 168.0 165.0 162.0
23.5 177.3 176.1 174.9 173.7 172.5 169.9 166.8 163.8
24 179.3 178.1 176.8 175.6 174.3 171.7 168.7 165.6 162.6 163.6
24.5 181.4 180.1 178.8 177.5 176.2 173.5 170.5 167.4 164.4 165.3
25 183.4 182.1 180.7 179.4 178.1 175.4 172.3 169.3 166.2 163.1 167.1
25.5 185.4 184.0 182.7 181.3 179.9 177.2 174.1 171.1 168.0 164.9 168.8
26 187.4 186.0 184.6 183.2 181.8 179.1 176.0 172.9 169.8 166.7 170.6
26.5 189.4 188.0 186.5 185.1 183.6 180.9 177.8 174.7 171.6 168.4 172.3
27 191.5 190.0 188.5 187.0 185.5 182.7 179.6 176.5 173.3 170.2 174.1
27.5 193.5 192.0 190.4 188.9 187.4 184.6 181.4 178.3 175.1 172.0 175.8
28 195.5 193.9 192.4 190.8 189.2 186.4 183.3 180.1 176.9 173.8 177.6
28.5 197.5 195.9 194.3 192.7 191.1 188.3 185.1 181.9 178.7 175.5 179.3
29 199.5 197.9 196.2 194.6 193.0 190.1 186.9 183.7 180.5 177.3 181.1
29.5 201.6 199.9 198.2 196.5 194.8 191.9 188.7 185.5 182.3 179.1 182.9
30 203.6 201.9 200.1 198.4 196.7 193.8 190.5 187.3 184.1 180.8 184.6

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02

cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
30.5 205.6 203.8 202.1 200.3 198.5 195.6 192.4 189.1 185.9 182.6 186.4
31 207.6 205.8 204.0 202.2 200.4 197.5 194.2 190.9 187.6 184.4 188.1
31.5 209.6 207.8 206.0 204.1 202.3 199.3 196.0 192.7 189.4 186.1 189.9
32 211.7 209.8 207.9 206.0 204.1 201.1 197.8 194.5 191.2 187.9 191.6
32.5 213.7 211.8 209.8 207.9 206.0 203.0 199.7 196.3 193.0 189.7 193.4
33 215.7 213.7 211.8 209.8 207.9 204.8 201.5 198.1 194.8 191.5 195.1
33.5 217.7 215.7 213.7 211.7 209.7 206.7 203.3 199.9 196.6 193.2 196.9
34 219.7 217.7 215.7 213.6 211.6 208.5 205.1 201.7 198.4 195.0 198.6
34.5 221.8 219.7 217.6 215.5 213.4 210.3 206.9 203.6 200.2 196.8 200.4
35 223.8 221.7 219.5 217.4 215.3 212.2 208.8 205.4 201.9 198.5 202.1
35.5 225.8 223.6 221.5 219.3 217.2 214.0 210.6 207.2 203.7 200.3 203.9
36 227.8 225.6 223.4 221.2 219.0 215.9 212.4 209.0 205.5 202.1 205.6
36.5 229.8 227.6 225.4 223.1 220.9 217.7 214.2 210.8 207.3 203.8 207.4
37 231.8 229.6 227.3 225.0 222.8 219.5 216.1 212.6 209.1 205.6 209.1
37.5 233.9 231.6 229.2 226.9 224.6 221.4 217.9 214.4 210.9 207.4 210.9
38 235.9 233.5 231.2 228.8 226.5 223.2 219.7 216.2 212.7 209.2 212.6
38.5 237.9 235.5 233.1 230.7 228.3 225.1 221.5 218.0 214.5 210.9 214.4
39 239.9 237.5 235.1 232.6 230.2 226.9 223.3 219.8 216.2 212.7 216.2
39.5 241.9 239.5 237.0 234.5 232.1 228.7 225.2 221.6 218.0 214.5 217.9
40 244.0 241.5 238.9 236.4 233.9 230.6 227.0 223.4 219.8 216.2 219.7
40.5 246.0 243.4 240.9 238.3 235.8 232.4 228.8 225.2 221.6 218.0 221.4
41 248.0 245.4 242.8 240.2 237.7 234.3 230.6 227.0 223.4 219.8 223.2
41.5 250.0 247.4 244.8 242.1 239.5 236.1 232.5 228.8 225.2 221.5 224.9
42 252.0 249.4 246.7 244.0 241.4 237.9 234.3 230.6 227.0 223.3 226.7
42.5 254.1 251.4 248.7 245.9 243.2 239.8 236.1 232.4 228.8 225.1 228.4
43 256.1 253.3 250.6 247.8 245.1 241.6 237.9 234.2 230.5 226.9 230.2
43.5 258.1 255.3 252.5 249.7 247.0 243.5 239.8 236.0 232.3 228.6 231.9
44 260.0 257.2 254.4 251.6 248.8 245.3 241.6 237.9 234.1 230.4 233.7
44.5 262.0 259.1 256.3 253.5 250.7 247.1 243.4 239.7 235.9 232.2 235.4
45 263.9 261.1 258.2 255.4 252.5 249.0 245.2 241.5 237.7 233.9 237.2
45.5 265.8 263.0 260.1 257.3 254.4 250.8 247.0 243.3 239.5 235.7 238.9
46 267.8 264.9 262.0 259.1 256.3 252.7 248.9 245.1 241.3 237.5 240.7
46.5 269.7 266.8 263.9 261.0 258.1 254.5 250.7 246.9 243.1 239.2 242.5
47 271.6 268.7 265.8 262.9 259.9 256.3 252.5 248.7 244.8 241.0 244.2
47.5 273.6 270.6 267.7 264.7 261.7 258.1 254.3 250.4 246.6 242.8 246.0
48 275.5 272.5 269.5 266.5 263.6 259.9 256.1 252.2 248.4 244.5 247.7
48.5 277.4 274.4 271.4 268.4 265.4 261.7 257.9 254.0 250.2 246.3 249.5
49 279.4 276.3 273.3 270.2 267.2 263.5 259.6 255.8 251.9 248.1 251.2
49.5 281.3 278.2 275.1 272.1 269.0 265.3 261.4 257.6 253.7 249.8 253.0
50 283.2 280.1 277.0 273.9 270.8 267.1 263.2 259.3 255.5 251.6 254.7
50.5 285.2 282.0 278.9 275.7 272.6 268.9 265.0 261.1 257.2 253.4 256.5
51 287.1 283.9 280.8 277.6 274.4 270.7 266.8 262.9 259.0 255.1 258.1
51.5 289.0 285.8 282.6 279.4 276.2 272.5 268.6 264.7 260.8 256.9 259.6
52 291.0 287.7 284.5 281.3 278.0 274.3 270.4 266.5 262.6 258.6 261.1
52.5 292.9 289.6 286.4 283.1 279.8 276.1 272.2 268.2 264.3 260.4 262.6
53 294.8 291.5 288.2 285.0 281.7 277.9 273.9 270.0 266.0 262.1 264.1
53.5 296.8 293.4 290.1 286.8 283.5 279.6 275.6 271.6 267.6 263.6 265.7
54 298.7 295.3 292.0 288.6 285.3 281.4 277.3 273.3 269.2 265.2 267.2
54.5 300.6 297.2 293.9 290.5 287.1 283.1 279.0 274.9 270.8 266.7 268.7
55 302.6 299.1 295.7 292.3 288.9 284.9 280.8 276.6 272.4 268.3 270.2
55.5 304.5 301.0 297.6 294.2 290.7 286.7 282.5 278.3 274.1 269.9 271.7
56 306.4 302.9 299.5 296.0 292.5 288.4 284.2 279.9 275.7 271.4 273.2
56.5 308.4 304.8 301.3 297.8 294.3 290.2 285.9 281.6 277.3 273.0 274.7
57 310.3 306.8 303.2 299.7 296.1 292.0 287.6 283.2 278.9 274.5 276.2
57.5 312.2 308.7 305.1 301.5 297.9 293.7 289.3 284.9 280.5 276.1 277.7
58 314.2 310.6 307.0 303.4 299.8 295.5 291.0 286.6 282.1 277.7 279.2
58.5 316.1 312.5 308.8 305.2 301.6 297.3 292.7 288.2 283.7 279.2 280.7
59 318.0 314.4 310.7 307.0 303.4 299.0 294.5 289.9 285.3 280.8 282.2
59.5 320.0 316.3 312.6 308.9 305.2 300.8 296.2 291.6 286.9 282.3 283.8
60 321.9 318.2 314.4 310.7 307.0 302.5 297.9 293.2 288.6 283.9 285.3
60.5 323.8 320.1 316.3 312.6 308.8 304.3 299.6 294.9 290.2 285.5 286.8
61 325.8 322.0 318.2 314.4 310.6 306.1 301.3 296.5 291.8 287.0 288.3
61.5 327.7 323.9 320.1 316.2 312.4 307.8 303.0 298.2 293.4 288.6 289.8
62 329.6 325.8 321.9 318.1 314.2 309.6 304.7 299.9 295.0 290.1 291.3
62.5 331.6 327.7 323.8 319.9 316.0 311.4 306.4 301.5 296.6 291.7 292.8
63 333.5 329.6 325.7 321.8 317.9 313.1 308.2 303.2 298.2 293.3 294.3
63.5 335.4 331.5 327.5 323.6 319.7 314.9 309.9 304.9 299.8 294.8 295.8
64 337.4 333.4 329.4 325.4 321.5 316.7 311.6 306.5 301.4 296.4 297.3
64.5 339.3 335.3 331.3 327.3 323.3 318.4 313.3 308.2 303.1 297.9 298.8
65 341.2 337.2 333.2 329.1 325.1 320.2 315.0 309.8 304.7 299.5 300.4
65.5 343.1 339.1 335.0 331.0 326.9 321.9 316.7 311.5 306.3 301.1 301.9
66 345.1 341.0 336.9 332.8 328.7 323.7 318.4 313.2 307.9 302.6 303.4
118
ISSUE No. 02

cm 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
66.5 347.0 342.9 338.8 334.6 330.5 325.5 320.1 314.8 309.5 304.2 304.9
67 348.9 344.8 340.6 336.5 332.3 327.2 321.9 316.5 311.1 305.7 306.4
67.5 350.9 346.7 342.5 338.3 334.1 329.0 323.6 318.1 312.7 307.3 307.9
68 352.8 348.6 344.4 340.2 336.0 330.8 325.3 319.8 314.3 308.9 309.4
68.5 354.7 350.5 346.3 342.0 337.8 332.5 327.0 321.5 315.9 310.4 310.9
69 356.7 352.4 348.1 343.9 339.6 334.3 328.7 323.1 317.6 312.0 312.4
69.5 358.6 354.3 350.0 345.7 341.4 336.1 330.4 324.8 319.2 313.5 313.9
70 360.5 356.2 351.9 347.5 343.2 337.8 332.1 326.5 320.8 315.1 315.4
70.5 339.6 333.8 328.1 322.4 316.7 317.0
71 341.3 335.6 329.8 324.0 318.2 318.5
71.5 343.1 337.3 331.4 325.6 319.8 320.0
72 344.9 339.0 333.1 327.2 321.3 321.5
72.5 340.7 334.8 328.8 322.9 323.0
73 342.4 336.4 330.4 324.5 324.5
73.5 344.1 338.1 332.0 326.0 326.0
74 339.7 333.7 327.6 327.5
74.5 341.4 335.3 329.1 329.0
75 343.1 336.9 330.7 330.5
75.5 344.7 338.5 332.3 332.0
76 340.1 333.8 333.6
76.5 341.7 335.4 335.1
77 343.3 336.9 336.6
77.5 344.9 338.5 338.1
78 340.1 339.6
78.5 341.6 341.1
79 343.2 342.6
79.5 344.7 344.1
80
80.5
81
81.5

FM-200® (UL/FM)
14A-07H
02
2010-03 APPENDIX E - DUAL SUPPLY COMPONENTS
Dual Supply System Components

Primary and Secondary supply components are used in
order to maintain the supply chain and ensure that adequate
stock levels are available to fully support customers and
installers.
The customer may receive items of either primary or
secondary supply, there is no difference between each
supply, except for the source.
Table 26: Primary and Secondary Supply System Components

System Component Primary Supply Secondary Supply Manual Page
Part No. Part No. Reference
25mm (1") Valve Assembly 302.209.001 302.207.001 Page 12
50mm (2") Valve Assembly 302.209.002 302.207.002 Page 12
Manual Actuator 304.209.002 304.207.002 Page 17
Pneumatic Actuator 304.209.004 304.207.004 Page 17
25mm (1") Manifold Check Valve Assembly 302.209.004 302.207.004 Page 21
50mm (2") Manifold Check Valve Assembly 302.209.005 302.207.005 Page 21
120
MANUAL DE INSTALACIÓN, MANTENIMIENTO
Y USO DE LOS SISTEMAS DE EXTINCIÓN DE
INCENDIOS CON DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO2)
LPG Técnicas en Extinción de Incendios, S.A. DOC. MUCO04ES00M1

INFORMACIÓN TÉCNICA
FECHA DE EMISIÓN DEL DOCUMENTO: Noviembre de 2005
LISTADO DE CONTROL DE CAMBIOS.
PAGINA PÁRRAFO MODIFICACIÓN FECHA AUTOR
56 5.3.2. Sustitución dibujo 11/12/06 A. Llorente
Cambio en cuadro
de texto
84-85 7.0 Inserción texto 11/12/06 A. Llorente
LPG Técnicas en Extinción de Incendios S.A. MU/CO/04/ES/M1 Rev. 00 Pag. 2/145

ÍNDICE.
1 INTRODUCCIÓN. 6
2 UTILIZACIÓN DEL MANUAL. 7
3 GENERALIDADES. 8
4 DESCRIPCIÓN DE LOS SISTEMAS DE DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO2). 9
4.1 SISTEMA 1. BATERÍAS DE 8 Ó MENOS CILINDROS DE 40’2 Y 67 LITROS. 10
4.2 SISTEMA 2. BATERÍAS DE 9 O MÁS CILINDROS DE 40’2 Y 67 LITROS. 11
4.3 SISTEMA 3. BATERÍAS CON DIRECCIONALES. 12
4.4 SISTEMA 4. BATERÍAS CON SISTEMA DE PESAJE. 14
4.5 SISTEMA 5. CILINDRO AUTÓNOMO. 16
5 INSTALACIÓN DE SISTEMAS DE DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO2). 17
5.1 INSTALACIÓN MECÁNICA/NEUMÁTICA. 18
5.1.1 SISTEMA DE SUJECIÓN Y SUPORTACIÓN. 18
5.1.2 INSTALACIÓN DE HERRAJES. 19

5.1.2.1 Instalación de herrajes con pies de apoyo vertical. 19
5.1.2.2 Instalación de herrajes para cilindros autónomos. 22
5.2 SISTEMA DE ALMACENAMIENTO. 24
5.2.1 VÁLVULA DE DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO2): LPG 128-20. 24
5.2.2 VÁLVULA DE DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO2): LPG 110-00. 29
5.2.3 MANÓMETRO PARA DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO2). 33
5.2.4 PRESOSTATO. 34
5.2.5 TUBO COLECTOR DE DESCARGA. 35
5.2.6 VÁLVULAS DE RETENCIÓN DE ½”. 36
5.2.7 DESVIADOR ½”. 37
5.2.8 CILINDROS AUXILIARES DE ALTA PRESIÓN. 38

5.2.8.1 Inscripciones en los cilindros. 39
5.2.8.2 Etiquetas identificativas para cilindros cargados con dióxido de carbono (CO2). 40
5.2.9 LATIGUILLO RIGIDO DE DESCARGA ½” R2F. 41
5.2.10 LATIGUILLO DE DESCARGA DE TEFLÓN (PTFE) ½ ”. 42
5.2.11 RETARDADOR NEUMÁTICO. 43

5.2.12 DERIVADOR. 44
5.2.13 CONTACTOR DE PASO CON ENCLAVAMIENTO. 45
5.2.14 ODORIZADOR. 46
5.2.15 VÁLVULA DIRECCIONAL. 47
5.2.16 MEMBRANA DE SEGURIDAD CON ESCAPE CONDUCIDO 48
5.2.17 SISTEMA ANALÓGICO DE PESAJE. 49
5.2.18 SISTEMA MECÁNICO DE PESAJE. 50
5.3 SISTEMA DE DISPARO. 51
5.3.1 BOTELLÍN PILOTO. 52
5.3.2 DISPARO MANUAL DE PALANCA. 53
5.3.3 VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE. 54
5.3.4 CABEZALES DE DISPARO NEUMÁTICOS LPG 110. 55
5.3.5 TORNILLO DE DESCOMPRESIÓN. 56
5.3.6 VÁLVULA DE DESPRESURIZACIÓN R. ¼”. 57
5.3.7 LATIGUILLOS FLEXIBLES DE TEFLÓN PARA LÍNEA DE DISPARO. 58
5.3.8 VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE + DISPARO MANUAL. 59
5.3.9 SISTEMA DE DISPARO CON RETARDADOR + SIRENA NEUMÁTICA. 61
5.3.10 SISTEMA DE DISPARO PARA VÁLVULAS DIRECCIONALES. 63
5.3.11 VÁLVULA CUT-OFF. 66
5.4 SISTEMA DE DISTRIBUCIÓN. 67
5.4.1 TUBERÍA Y ACCESORIOS. 67
5.4.2 SOPORTES. 68
5.4.3 DIFUSORES. 71
5.5 INSTALACIÓN ELÉCTRICA. 72
5.6 REQUISITOS FINALES SOBRE LA INSTALACIÓN. 74
6 PUESTA A PUNTO DEL SISTEMA. 75
6.1 RECEPCIÓN Y PUESTA A PUNTO DEL SISTEMA. 75
6.1.1 REVISIÓN DE COMPONENTES. 75
6.1.2 OPERACIONES DE PUESTA A PUNTO Y PRUEBAS DE FUNCIONAMIENTO. 75

6.1.3 BARRIDO CON NITRÓGENO. 76
6.1.4 PRUEBA NEUMÁTICA DE ESTANQUEIDAD PARA TUBERÍAS ABIERTAS. 77
6.1.5 PRUEBA DE FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL CONTACTOR DE PASO CON ENCLAVAMIENTO. 78
6.1.6 PRUEBA DE ESTANQUEIDAD DEL CIRCUITO DE DISPARO. 79
6.1.7 PRUEBA DE FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LAS VÁLVULAS SOLENOIDES DE DISPARO EN

CILINDROS MÁSTER. 81
7 MANTENIMIENTO. 84
8 USO DE LA INSTALACIÓN. 86
8.1 FUNCIONAMIENTO GENERAL DEL SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN. 86
8.2 CONSIDERACIONES GENERALES DE SEGURIDAD. 87
8.3 USO MANUAL DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS. 89
8.3.1 REARME DEL CONTACTOR DE PASO CON ENCLAVAMIENTO. 90
8.3.2 ACCIONAMIENTO DEL DISPARO MANUAL DE PALANCA Y DISPARO MANUAL NEUMÁTICO.90
8.3.3 ACTUACIÓN MANUAL DEL CONJUNTO VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE + DISPARO MANUAL. 91
8.3.4 DISPOSITIVO DE ABORTO DEL TIEMPO DE RETARDO. 91
8.3.5 ABERTURA/CIERRE MANUAL DE LAS VÁLVULAS DIRECCIONALES. 92
8.3.6 DESCOMPRESIÓN DE LA LÍNEA DE DISPARO. 93
8.4 ACTUACIÓN EN CASO DE FALLO DE LA ACTIVACIÓN AUTOMÁTICA DEL SISTEMA DE

EXTINCIÓN. 94
8.5 ACTUACIÓN TRAS LA DESCARGA DE LA BATERÍA. 95
9 ANEXO I. Planos estándar de sistemas dióxido de carbono (CO2). 97
10 ANEXO II: Fichas técnicas componentes de sistemas de DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO

(CO2)®. 106
11 ANEXO III. Extracto normativa y lista de comprobación para la recepción e

inspección rutinaria de instalaciones de extinción de incendios. 134
12 ANEXO IV. Instrucción técnica componentes de sistemas dióxido de carbono

(CO2). 142
13 ANEXO V: Ficha de seguridad del dióxido de carbono (CO2). 144

1 INTRODUCCIÓN.
Este manual está dirigido a instaladores, mantenedores y usuarios de los sistemas de extinción de incendios, que
utilizan dióxido de carbono (CO2) como agente extintor, fabricados en LPG Técnicas en Extinción de Incendios, S.A.
IMPORTANTE
Esta información es propiedad de LPG Técnicas en Extinción de Incendios, S.A. quien se reserva el derecho de
efectuar cambios sin previo aviso. No se permite la reproducción, modificación, traducción parcial o total para
otros fines que no sean su uso interno. Se ha hecho todo esfuerzo para asegurar la exactitud de la información
aquí contenida, sin embargo, LPG no se hace responsable de su utilización. Cualquiera que use este manual lo
hace bajo su propio riesgo y asume toda consecuencia resultante.
Cualquier cuestión concerniente a la información presentada en este manual debe ser dirigida a:
LPG Técnicas en Extinción de Incendios, S.A.

C/ Mestre Joan Corrales, 107-109
08950, ESPLUGUES DE LLOBREGAT
Barcelona - ESPAÑA
Fax: + 34 93 473 74 92
Tel: + 34 93 480 29 25
e-mail lpg@lpg.es / www.lpg.es

2 UTILIZACIÓN DEL MANUAL.

Existen dos maneras de proceder para la utilización de este manual. La primera es seguir paso a paso el índice de
este manual (este procedimiento está orientado a personal sin experiencia previa que instala el sistema por
primera vez). La segunda manera está enfocada a personal con experiencia, el cual debe utilizar el manual como
referencia. En ambos casos es necesario seguir las indicaciones de la documentación que se adjunta con el
sistema.
En el primer caso, el manual permite la instalación del sistema de manera cronológica. Es conveniente la utilización
de las fichas técnicas para identificar de manera correcta la posición, y el número de los componentes que deben
ser instalados.
En el segundo caso el manual se usa cuando el instalador, con experiencia previa, comprueba los planos que se
adjuntan con el sistema. Como la denominación y el código de cada pieza aparecen en el plano, cada componente
está localizado en el índice y es fácil de encontrar en el capítulo adecuado.
El objetivo de este manual, es el de suministrar instrucciones especificas para la instalación, el mantenimiento y el
ensayo de los componentes de los sistemas de extinción de incendios LPG. En ningún caso, los requisitos
especificados en este manual pretenden reemplazar, anular o modificar los requisitos especificados en las normas
que les sean aplicables de diseño e instalación de sistemas.

3 GENERALIDADES.
Los sistemas diseñados y fabricados por LPG para la extinción de incendios mediante dióxido de carbono (CO2),
están concebidos para ser equipos robustos, fiables y de fácil montaje, que permiten comprobar su estado de
funcionamiento siguiendo unas sencillas operaciones de verificación recogidas en el presente manual.
No obstante, LPG Técnicas en Extinción de Incendios S.A. aclara los siguientes puntos:
• Todas las personas que deban dedicarse a operaciones de puesta en marcha, inspección, pruebas y
mantenimiento de estos equipos deben estar perfectamente instruidas para realizar las distintas
verificaciones. LPG recomienda que en todo momento se adopten prácticas de trabajo seguras de
acuerdo con la legislación vigente en temas de seguridad laboral. Se recomienda que el personal
encargado de la instalación y mantenimiento del sistema contra incendios reciba formación en el área de
seguridad, así como realizar una lectura completa del presente manual antes de iniciar cualquiera de las
operaciones descritas.
• Todo personal que trabaje en un recinto protegido con dióxido de carbono (CO2) debe estar informado de
las propiedades del agente extintor, de sus efectos sobre las personas y sobre los bienes protegidos. Se
debe instruir al personal del área protegida en los modos de actuación en caso de alarma y en los
diferentes tipos de activación de los sistemas.
• Durante las operaciones de instalación y mantenimiento los operadores deben ir protegidos con traje de
trabajo y calzado de seguridad. En caso necesario, se utilizará casco duro y guantes. Se deben utilizar
gafas o careta de seguridad siempre que se taladren agujeros para los soportes de tubería o para la
colocación de los herrajes de las baterías de cilindros. También es precisa esta protección cuando se
realicen operaciones con desprendimiento de partículas.
• Debido a posibles falsas alarmas del sistema de detección (si existe), producidas por el polvo o humo
debido a las obras de instalación, el sistema de detección de la zona estará aislado o desconectado antes
y durante las operaciones de montaje.
• Todo el equipo y la red de tuberías deben ser instalados según lo planificado en proyecto. Cualquier
variación de los planos debe ser aprobada por escrito por la propiedad y la ingeniería responsable,
debiendo ser rectificados los planos constructivos e incluidas las modificaciones en el proyecto.
• Después de la descarga del sistema se debe consultar con un instalador autorizado, o bien con el
diseñador del mismo, el procedimiento a seguir.
• La movilización del cilindro debe realizarse siempre con el capuchón protector de la válvula colocado
hasta su ubicación final.
• Como elementos sellantes de rosca utilizar uno o varios de los siguientes:

o Pasta selladora de roscas para holguras de 0’4 mm.
o Cinta de teflón
Independientemente del elemento sellante utilizado, nunca cubrir los dos primeros hilos de rosca para asegurar la
limpieza interior de la red de tubería.

4 DESCRIPCIÓN DE LOS SISTEMAS DE DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO ). 2
Los sistemas centralizados fabricados y diseñados por LPG para la extinción de incendios con dióxido de carbono
(CO2) están concebidos para ser equipos fiables y de fácil montaje.
Los sistemas centralizados LPG se descomponen en 4 elementos:
1. Sistema de Almacenamiento.
Compuesto por los cilindros de acero que contienen el agente extintor.
2. Sistema de Disparo.
Controla la activación y posterior descarga del gas contenido en los cilindros. Esta compuesto por una válvula
piloto que integra los diferentes dispositivos de disparo como son disparadores manuales, eléctricos por válvula
solenoide y neumáticos, que comanda la apertura de las válvulas de los cilindros auxiliares. Este es un sistema
flexible que permite incorporar más de una válvula piloto y comandar el disparo de varias baterías a la vez
adaptándose a cada necesidad.
3. Sistema de Distribución.
Conduce la descarga del gas desde los cilindros hasta la zona protegida.
4. Sistema de Soporte.
Compuesto por un chasis metálico (herraje) que soporta el bloque de cilindros. Según configuración existen
modelos en simple fila, doble fila y ambos adaptados para la utilización con sistema de pesaje.
Todas las personas que deban dedicarse a operaciones de puesta en marcha, inspección, pruebas y
mantenimiento de estos equipos deben estar perfectamente instruidas para realizar las distintas verificaciones.
El número de cilindros de dióxido de carbono (CO2) necesarios para cubrir el área de riesgo viene determinado por
cálculos específicos para cada aplicación.
Las baterías de cilindros siempre deben estar dispuestas fuera de la zona de riesgo. Todos los sistemas podrán
ser activados automáticamente por medio de la válvula solenoide o manualmente. Los sistemas de activación
manual incorporan dispositivos para prevenir descargas involuntarias.
Se debe instruir al personal del área protegida en los modos de actuación en caso de alarma y de activación
manual de los sistemas.

4.1 SISTEMA 1. BATERÍAS DE 8 Ó MENOS CILINDROS DE 40’2 Y 67 LITROS.

(Como referencia consultar el plano 50040676 “Batería Tipo 67, 40 l para CO2 SF/SP 2 ZUNCHOS” incluido
en el Anexo I)
El cilindro máster es uno de los cilindros de la batería y está cargado con el mismo contenido que los cilindros
auxiliares. En este sistema la presión liberada a través del cilindro máster es dirigida hacia los cabezales de
disparo neumático de los cilindros auxiliares para perforar las membranas de disparo que incorporan sus válvulas.
La válvula LPG 128-20 (FT Nº 140) se utiliza para cilindros máster. La válvula LPG 110-00 y LPG 110-10 (FT Nº
006 y 007) se utilizan en los cilindros auxiliares.
El circuito de disparo incorpora una válvula de retención para mantener el nivel de presión óptimo para la
activación de todos los cilindros.
El sistema puede ser actuado automáticamente mediante una central de control a través de la válvula solenoide.
Para activación manual es necesario acceder al sistema de disparo del cilindro máster, retirar los precintos de
seguridad y tirar de la palanca.
Pos Descripción Pos Descripción

1 Cilindro Máster (LPG 128-20) 11 Odorizador
2 Cilindro Auxiliar (LPG 110-00/LPG 110-10) 12 Colector de Descarga (hasta 4”)
3 Disparo Manual Neumático 13 Válvula de retención
4 Válvula Solenoide 14 Derivador
5 Válvula LPG-128 15 Latiguillo descarga PTFE ¼” x 350 mm
6 Válvula LPG 110 16 Contactor de paso con enclavamiento
8 Brida LPG 128 19 Cap Ciego colector con rosca NPT
9 Tornillo Descompresión 21 Válvula antirretorno ¼”
10 Latiguillo de descarga R2 22 Asiento colector

4.2 SISTEMA 2. BATERÍAS DE 9 O MÁS CILINDROS DE 40’2 Y 67 LITROS.

(Como referencia consultar el plano 50090673 “Batería Tipo 67, 40 l para CO2 SF/SP Y BOTELLÍN PILOTO 1
ZUNCHO” incluido en el Anexo I).
Se utiliza un botellín piloto de volumen reducido cargado con Nitrógeno seco a 100 bar. El contenido del botellín
piloto no es utilizado como carga efectiva extintora. La presión liberada por la apertura del botellín piloto es dirigida
hacia los cabezales de disparo neumático de los cilindros auxiliares para perforar las membranas de disparo que
incorporan sus válvulas. La válvula utilizada en el botellín piloto es el modelo LPG 128-90 (FT Nº 132). Los cilindros
auxiliares utilizan la válvula LPG 110-00 y la LPG 110-10 (FT Nº 006 y 007).
La batería de cilindros se suministra con dispositivos contra activación por microfugas y para la evacuación
controlada de la presión residual en el circuito neumático de disparo.
El sistema puede ser actuado automáticamente mediante central de control a través de válvula solenoide. Para la
activación manual es necesario acceder al disparo manual de palanca del botellín piloto, retirar los precintos de
seguridad y tirar de la palanca.
Tras una activación real del sistema es preciso evacuar la presión residual atrapada en el circuito neumático de
disparo. Para ello, ver instrucciones de utilización del Tornillo de Descompresión en el apartado 8.3.6.
Descompresión de la línea de disparo.
Pos Descripción Pos Descripción Pos Descripción

2 Cilindro Auxiliar 11 Odorizador 24 Herraje Botellín Piloto
3 Disparo Manual 12 Colector 25 Manómetro
4 Válvula Solenoide 13 Válvula de Retención 26 Válvula de Descompresión ¼”
Latiguilo de PTFE de ¼” x 350
5 Válvula LPG 110-00 15 27 “T” ¼” macho central 2 x ¼” hembra
mm
Cap Ciego colector con rosca
6 Asiento Colector 16 28 Reducción de 21’7 a ¼” H-H
NPT
Contactor de paso con
7 20 Cabezal Neumático de 2 vías 29 Unión de ¼” a latiguillo
enclavamiento
10 Latiguillo de descarga R2 23 Botellín Piloto de N
2 30 Llave de cuello de cigüeña

4.3 SISTEMA 3. BATERÍAS CON DIRECCIONALES.

(Como referencia consultar el plano 15042053 “Batería 4 Cilindros 67 l SF/SP con 2 direccionales” incluido
en el Anexo I).
Las válvulas direccionales pueden ser adaptadas a cualquiera de los sistemas descritos anteriormente.
En estas baterías el tubo colector de descarga incorpora un tramo especialmente diseñado que dispone de los
acoplamientos necesarios para las válvulas direccionales. El sistema de alimentación neumática de las válvulas
direccionales está construido en tubo de cobre de diámetro 4 x 6 mm. Según los requisitos del diseño se pueden
realizar sistemas de ataque y reserva con válvulas direccionales, y determinar el número exacto de cilindros que
deben ser descargados en cada zona de riesgo.
Un sistema con válvulas direccionales siempre incluye botellín piloto de volumen reducido cargado con nitrógeno
seco a 100 bar. Este puede ser actuado automáticamente por central de control a través de válvula solenoide o
manualmente. En el caso de activación automática, las válvulas solenoide de cilindro piloto y las válvulas solenoide
+ disparador manual para la activación de las válvulas direccionales son activadas al mismo tiempo.
En el caso de activación manual es preciso acceder a la válvula solenoide + disparador manual de la válvula
direccional que cubre la zona del incendio, retirar los precintos de seguridad y tirar de la palanca. Posteriormente
retirar los precintos de seguridad del disparo manual de palanca del botellín piloto y tirar de la palanca.
Tanto las válvulas como el sistema de activación neumático son idénticos a los detallados en el Sistema 2.

Pos Denominación Pos Denominación Pos Denominación

3 Disparo Manual 15 Latiguillo descarga PTFE ¼” x 350 27 Té ¼” macho central 2 x ¼” hembra
4 Válvula solenoide 16 Contactor de paso con enclavamiento 28 Reducción de 21’7 a ¼” H-H
6 Válvula LPG 110 19 Cap Ciego colector con rosca NPT 37 Té de cobre para tubo de 6
7 Herraje 20 Cabezal Neumático de 2 vías 38 Membrana de seguridad con escape
conducido
9 Tornillo descompresión 22 Asiento Colector 39 Válvula direccional
10 Latiguillo descarga R2 23 Botellín piloto N2 (LPG 128-90) 40 Acoplamiento ¼” a tubo cobre 4 x 6
11 Odorizador 24 Herraje Botellín Piloto 41 Tubo de cobre 4 x 6 mm
12 Colector de descarga 25 Manómetro 42 Válvula solenoide + disparador manual
13 Válvula de retención 26 Válvula de descompresión de ¼” 43 Herraje válvula direccional

4.4 SISTEMA 4. BATERÍAS CON SISTEMA DE PESAJE.

(Como referencia consultar plano 5105067N “Batería 5 cilindros 67 l CO2 SF/CP Mecánico” incluido en
Anexo I)
El sistema de pesaje puede ser adaptado a cualquiera de los sistemas antes descritos. El sistema puede ser
mecánico o electrónico por célula.
Dada la alta presión vapor del dióxido de carbono (CO2) (57’2 bar a 20 ºC; Densidad de llenado 0’67 y 0’75 Kg/l
de acuerdo con las normas NFPA 12:2005; CEA 4007:2003 y CEPREVEN R.T.4. CO2:1998) no es necesario
sobre presurizar los cilindros con nitrógeno seco para conseguir la descarga completa de los cilindros. La presión
interna del cilindro no depende de la cantidad de gas contenida en el mismo. Por este motivo no es posible
detectar la presencia de fugas con la única observación del manómetro de las válvulas. Para controlar el nivel de
carga en baterías de dióxido de carbono (CO2), LPG dispone de sistemas de pesaje analógicos y mecánicos que
realizan un control continuo del peso de cada uno de los cilindros. En caso de fuga o descarga de los cilindros el
sistema de pesaje emite una señal de alarma.
Ambos sistemas de pesaje permiten la monitorización de alarmas mediante sistemas externos (central de
incendios)
La utilización de un sistema de pesaje no requiere modificaciones de las válvulas o de los modos de activación
descritos en los anteriormente.

1 Cilindro master (LPG128) 8 Brida de suspensión 15 Latiguillo de descarga PTFE G ¼ ” x 700 mm
2 Cilindro auxiliar (LPG 110) 9 Tornillo de descompresión 16 Contactor de paso con enclavamiento
3 Disparo manual 10 Latiguillo de descarga PTFE ½” 17 Módulo de pesaje mecánico
4 Válvula solenoide 11 Odorizador 19 Cap ciego colector con rosca NPT
5 Válvula LPG 128-20 12 Colector 20 Cabezal neumático de 2 vías
6 Válvula LPG 110-00 13 Válvula de retención 21 Válvula antirretorno de ¼”
7 Herraje 14 Derivador

(Como referencia consultar el plano 5104067N “Batería Tipo 67, 40 l CO2 SF/CP por Célula” incluido en
Anexo I)

1 Cilindro master 8 Brida de suspensión 15 Latiguillo de descarga PTFE G ¼ ” x 700 mm
2 Cilindro auxiliar 9 Tornillo de descompresión 16 Contactor de paso con enclavamiento
3 Disparo manual 10 Latiguillo de descarga PTFE ½” 17 Módulo de pesaje por célula
4 Válvula solenoide 11 Odorizador 18 Panel de control sistema de pesaje por célula
5 Válvula LPG 128-20 12 Colector 19 Cap ciego colector con rosca NPT
6 Válvula LPG 110-00 13 Válvula de retención 20 Cabezal neumático de 2 vías
7 Herraje 14 Derivador 21 Válvula antirretorno de ¼”

4.5 SISTEMA 5. CILINDRO AUTÓNOMO.

(Como referencia consultar plano 76702400 “Cilindro autónomo CO2 LPG-128” incluido en el Anexo I).
En este caso el sistema se compone de un solo cilindro que contiene el agente extintor y cuya válvula incorpora
todos los sistemas de disparo necesarios para la activación y descarga. La válvula aprovecha la presión contenida
en el cilindro para realizar su apertura. Normalmente incorpora sistema de activación eléctrico por válvula
solenoide y disparo manual. En aplicaciones especiales también es posible la activación neumática.
Como cilindro autónomo existen modelos de 5, 13’4, 26’8, 40’2 y 67 litros con la válvula LPG 128-20 (FT Nº
140). Esta válvula incorporan dispositivos de activación contra microfugas y membrana de seguridad contra
sobrepresiones en el cilindro.
Los cilindros autónomos pueden ser activados automáticamente mediante central de control a través de la válvula
solenoide. Para realizar la actuación manual es necesario acceder al disparo manual palanca, retirar los precintos
de seguridad y tirar de la palanca.
Pos. Descripción
1 Cilindro Autónomo (LPG 128-20)
2 Válvula Solenoide
3 Disparo Manual
4 Latiguillo Rígido de Descarga R2F
5 Herraje Cilindro
6 Difusor
7 Llave de cuello de cigüeña

5 INSTALACIÓN DE SISTEMAS DE DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO ). 2
Durante el montaje del sistema se recomienda hacer uso en todo momento de los planos de la instalación que se
adjuntan a la entrega de los componentes. Esto facilitará la comprensión del sistema.
A modo de ejemplo se incluyen en el “Anexo I” los planos estándar con diferentes modelos de baterías de dióxido
de carbono (CO2). En ellos se puede ver la disposición de la batería de cilindros, la conexión del sistema de disparo
simple y la disposición de los sistemas de soporte estándares. Estos planos se incluyen a modo de ejemplo por lo
que en las instalaciones que estén acompañadas de planos específicos serán estos últimos los que prevalezcan.
Antes de iniciar el montaje comprobar con los planos y la lista de materiales que todos los componentes han sido
suministrados. Verificar que los componentes no presentan señales de daño alguno. Cualquier componente
defectuoso debe ser reemplazado. Observar la posición de los cilindros y los tramos de tubería en los planos y
comprobar que no existan barreras físicas que requieran modificar la ubicación de los cilindros, herrajes y tramos
de tubería. La Ingeniería de Proyecto debe ser informada de cualquier modificación con respecto a los planos.
Antes de comenzar con el montaje de la instalación verificar la ubicación de la batería (normalmente indicada en
planos). La ubicación aconsejable de la batería sería una habitación lo más cercana posible pero fuera del riesgo
protegido, de dimensiones suficientes para alojar el equipo y facilitar las operaciones de montaje y mantenimiento.
El equipo no debe ser expuesto a condiciones climatológicas severas, acción directa de la llama, ambientes
excesivamente húmedos y a salvo de manipulaciones no autorizadas y agresiones de tipo mecánico o químico.
MATERIAL NECESARIO PARA PROCEDER A LA INSTALACIÓN DEL EQUIPO
Cinta de teflón, pasta selladora de juntas para Tacos de M.12 y calidad adecuada a la
holguras de 0’4 mm superficie de fijación.
Vaselina blanca. Brocas de vidia (para materiales de obra)
Juego de llaves fijas (6 a 22 mm) Sierra de metales de arco
Llave inglesa Corta tubos para tubo de cobre
Mordazas, alicates Escaleras, andamios
Juego de llaves Allen Flexómetro
Juego destornilladores cabeza plana y Phillips Nivel magnético
Taladro percutor eléctrico de mano Téster de comprobación eléctrico
Juego de llaves de cuello de cigüeña de hasta 4”
NOTA: Para realizar el INSTALACIÓN del equipo se precisará un mínimo de dos operarios
Llave de cuello de cigüeña

5.1 INSTALACIÓN MECÁNICA/NEUMÁTICA.

Los sistemas centralizados LPG que utilizan dióxido de carbono (CO2) como agente extintor se descomponen en 4
subsistemas:
1. Sistema de suportación
2. Sistema de almacenamiento
3. Sistema de disparo
4. Sistema de distribución
A continuación se describen los componentes de cada sistema y se explica cómo realizar su

INSTALACIÓN. El orden en que son descritos es a su vez el orden en el cual deben ser instalados.
5.1.1 SISTEMA DE SUJECIÓN Y SUPORTACIÓN.

Descripción:
Estructura metálica compuesta por un chasis (herraje) que soporta el bloque de cilindros y el colector.
Los herrajes van fijados únicamente a la pared (no disponen de pies de apoyo vertical) o con pies verticales
autoportantes. Existe un modelo especifico de sujeción para baterías que incorporan sistema de pesaje.
INSTALACIÓN:
A la hora de realizar la instalación se han de tener en cuenta los siguientes puntos:
• Limpiar el suelo sobre el que se va a montar la batería. Comprobar con las medidas de plano que la
batería coge perfectamente en la ubicación elegida.
• El suelo donde se monta el herraje debe ser lo más plano posible.
• El muro o pared donde se vaya a fijar el herraje (caso de ser necesario) ha de ser perpendicular con el
suelo y sólido (evitar tabiques de separación, Pladur o similar).
• En caso de tener que sujetar el herraje a un tabique de separación se deberán preparar unas pletinas
que permitan sujetar el herraje por la cara opuesta del tabique según dibujo:
Tuerca Tornillo Anclaje

M.12
Herraje
Pletina Apoyo
Tabique
El montaje de los herrajes y la posición del colector depende de que el herraje tenga o no pies laterales de apoyo
vertical y de que la conexión a la red de tuberías de distribución sea lateral o bien vertical.

5.1.2 INSTALACIÓN DE HERRAJES.

LPG suministra junto con sus equipos los herrajes de sujeción para los cilindros. Entre ellos se pueden distinguir 3
familias.
A) Herrajes con pies de apoyo vertical.
B) Herrajes sin pies de apoyo vertical.
C) Herrajes para cilindros autónomos.
Dentro de cada una de estas familias existen diferentes modelos para ajustarse a los requisitos de utilización del
sistema suministrado. En el presente manual se informa de las particularidades de instalación de cada una de las
familias sin entrar en los detalles de montaje de cada uno de los modelos que las componen. Para realizar la
instalación “in situ” se deberán utilizar los planos suministrados junto con el equipo y tener en cuenta las
instrucciones recogidas en el presente manual.
Atención: Siempre realizar la instalación definitiva de los herrajes, cilindros y colector antes de
realizar la conexión entre el tubo colector y la red de difusores. Esta medida evita multitud de
problemas de ajuste durante la instalación de los diferentes componentes de la batería.
A modo de ejemplo se adjuntan en el Anexo I los planos estándar en explosión de los herrajes descritos.
5.1.2.1 Instalación de herrajes con pies de apoyo vertical.
Pos Denominación
H3 Asiento colector derecho
H4 Travesero trasero 4 cilindros
H7 Soporte cilindro hexagonal
H8 Defensa de caucho
H10 Abarcón colector en “U”
H46 Travesero trasero 5 cilindros
H47 Pie lateral derecho
H48 Pie lateral izquierdo
H53 Pie central
Figura 5.1.2.1.1. Ejemplo de herraje con pie apoyo vertical en simple fila
La particularidad de esta familia de herrajes es que se incluyen unos pies de apoyo vertical que pueden ser fijados
directamente a pared y/o suelo. Esta configuración confiere estabilidad y rigidez al conjunto de la batería.

Dentro de esta familia se incluyen los siguientes modelos de herraje:

A) Herraje simple fila: En este herraje todos los cilindros de la batería están alineados en una sola fila y el
peso del tubo colector reposa sobre la estructura del herraje.
B) Herraje en doble fila: En este herraje todos los cilindros de la batería están alineados en dos filas paralelas
y el peso del tubo colector reposa sobre la estructura del herraje.
C) Herraje con sistema de pesaje: En este herraje todos los cilindros están alineados en una sola fila o en
dos filas paralelas. El peso de todos los cilindros reposa sobre la estructura del herraje.
En el Anexo I se incluyen planos en explosión de los diferentes modelos de herrajes. Referirse a ellos para
identificar cada uno de los elementos detallados en el procedimiento escrito.
Atención: Nunca comenzar a montar el herraje conectando el tubo colector con la red de tubería para
difusores. Esta práctica provoca múltiples problemas de ajuste durante la instalación del resto de
componentes de la batería.
Cuando se afronta la tarea de montar uno de estos de herrajes es preciso tener en cuenta los siguientes puntos:
1. Con todo equipo suministrado se entrega un plano del sistema montado y al menos un plano estándar con la
explosión del herraje. Es preciso comprender perfectamente estos planos antes de comenzar con el trabajo
de montaje.
2. En los planos suministrados se indican las medidas de la batería. Realizar una comprobación preliminar para
asegurar que la estructura coge perfectamente en el área prevista para ello.
3. Limpiar el área sobre la que se va a instalar el herraje.
4. De acuerdo con los planos del sistema realizar un premontaje de la estructura en el suelo. No es preciso
montar el herraje por completo, con montar los componentes de la estructura más cercanas a la pared es
suficiente.
5. Al realizar el premontaje es necesario tener en cuenta el sistema de fijación de las diferentes partes de la
estructura. Los pies de apoyo vertical incorporan unas orejetas soldadas o roscadas en sus laterales. Estas
orejetas sirven para sujetar los traveseros1 de la batería. La correcta unión entre el pie de apoyo vertical y el
travesero se detalla en la siguiente figura.
Pletina Roscada
Simple Asiento Colector
Pie Vertical
Travesero Pie Vertical
Tornillo
Orejeta
6. Los asientos de colector2 se montan directamente sobre los pies de apoyo vertical. En función del modelo de
batería puede ser que los asientos de colector sean diferentes entre sí en función de la posición que ocupen
en la batería. Es preciso consultar el plano del sistema para determinar la posición exacta de cada uno de
ellos.
1
Travesero: Pieza metálica que montada horizontalmente une dos pies de apoyo vertical.
2
Asiento de colector: Pieza metálica que soporta el peso del tubo colector. Tiene forma de escuadra y siempre va montada sobre los pies de
apoyo vertical.

Atención: Para evitar cualquier accidente durante la instalación del

sistema, roscar levemente el tornillo de bloqueo que viene incorporado
en el pie de apoyo vertical.
7. Una vez realizado el premontaje, disponerlo en su posición final teniendo en cuenta la distancia necesaria
para realizar la conexión entre el tubo colector y la red de tubería para los difusores. Una vez localizada la
situación idónea, apretar todos los tornillos que aseguran la unión entre pies verticales y traveseros para dar
rigidez a la estructura. Nivelar los diferentes componentes de la estructura vertical y horizontalmente para
no falsear la figura o posición del herraje.
8. Colocar los dos cilindros de la batería más alejados entre sí en el herraje y sujetarlos al mismo. Para baterías
de 8 o menos cilindros uno de ellos puede ser el cilindro máster. Orientar la salida de la válvula según se
indique en el plano del sistema.
NOTA: la movilización del cilindro debe realizarse siempre con el capuchón protector de la válvula
colocado.
9. Colocar el tubo colector3 sobre sus asientos. precaución: todo el sistema está todavía sin sujetar a partes
fijas del edificio. Tomar las precauciones oportunas para evitar la caída del conjunto.
10. Colocar las válvulas de retención de colector para cada uno de los dos cilindros presentados. No es preciso
realizar la instalación definitiva de estos elementos.
11. Colocar los latiguillos de descarga entre las válvulas de los cilindros y las válvulas de retención. No es preciso
realizar la instalación definitiva de los latiguillos.
12. Buscar la mejor posición del colector con respecto a la posición y postura de los latiguillos de descarga
presentados. Comparar con la representación de los planos de la batería. Una vez detectada la posición
idónea del colector esa es la posición final del herraje. Independientemente de la representación de los planos
es posible que para un ajuste perfecto todos los cilindros deban girarse un poco. Todos ellos deben girarse
en el mismo sentido.
13. Verificar el nivel vertical y horizontal de los cilindros y las piezas montadas del herraje antes de marcar los
puntos de anclaje en suelo y pared. Es posible taladrar utilizando como guía los taladros de fijación
mecanizados en el herraje. Fijar el herraje en su posición definitiva. La fijación al suelo y la pared ha de
realizarse utilizando tacos químicos o metálicos de alto poder de fijación (decoletaje). No utilizar tacos de
plástico.
14. Montar el resto de cilindros de la batería sobre el herraje y completar la estructura metálica. Es muy
importante que todos los cilindros tengan la misma orientación y que los mismos estén nivelados
verticalmente para evitar problemas posteriores en cuanto a la colocación de los latiguillos de descarga.
3
Tubo colector: Tramo de tubería que recoge todo el gas descargado por los cilindros de la batería y lo dirige hacia la red de difusores.

15. Fijar los tornillos de bloqueo. Si se considera necesario, una vez montado el sistema, taladrar el pie de apoyo
vertical y el asiento y atornillar tal y como se muestra en el siguiente dibujo.
16. Cuando todos los cilindros estén montados con sus latiguillos y válvulas de retención y todo el conjunto esté
fijado y asegurado, ya es posible realizar la conexión entre el tubo colector y la red de difusores.
17. Realizar la instalación del resto de elementos de la batería según las instrucciones detalladas más adelante,
en este manual.
5.1.2.2 Instalación de herrajes para cilindros autónomos.
Estos herrajes están pensados para la sujeción de un único cilindro. Su instalación es muy sencilla; Basta con
colocar el herraje sobre la pared a la altura indicada en los planos suministrados y sujetar el cilindro al mismo
cuidando que el manómetro y los sistemas de activación manual sean visibles y accesibles. Una vez instalado el
cilindro, conectarlo a la tubería con el latiguillo de descarga suministrado.
En el Anexo I se incluyen planos de los diferentes montajes en función del volumen del cilindro autónomo. Referirse
a ellos para identificar cada uno de los elementos detallados en el procedimiento escrito.
NOTA: La movilización del cilindro debe realizarse siempre con el capuchón protector de la válvula
colocado.
La fijación del herraje a la pared ha de realizarse utilizando tacos químicos o metálicos de alto poder de fijación
(decoletaje). No utilizar tacos de plástico. Si la pared no es suficientemente fuerte realizar el tipo de montaje
representado en la figura del apartado 5.1.1.
Es muy importante no instalar nunca el difusor directamente en la boca de salida del cilindro por dos motivos:
En primer lugar si el difusor se instala directamente sobre la salida de la válvula existen muchas posibilidades de
que el mismo quede a la altura de una persona, en el caso de descarga del cilindro (voluntaria o accidental) la
presión liberada podría producir daños muy graves al personal que pudiera estar en las inmediaciones del cilindro.

En segundo lugar, la fuerza de reacción provocada por la descarga siempre se da en el punto de salida del gas. Si
esa fuerza de reacción se aplica en la boca de salida del cilindro se provoca un par de fuerzas que podría llegar a
arrancar el herraje de la pared.
ACEPTADO PROHIBIDO

5.2 SISTEMA DE ALMACENAMIENTO.

El sistema de almacenamiento está compuesto por los cilindros de acero que contienen el agente extintor, las
válvulas de descarga y el colector. Existe la posibilidad de suministro de baterías con 2 filas de cilindros. El conjunto
se complementa con diversos componentes auxiliares y dispositivos de control.
A continuación se describen los componentes de un sistema de almacenamiento para CO2. El orden en el cual
deben ser montados, es el mismo en que están descritos.
5.2.1 VÁLVULA DE DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO2): LPG 128-20.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Válvula LPG 128-20

Ficha Técnica N. 140
La válvula LPG 128-20 se utiliza con cilindros modulares o pilotos de 5, 13’4 26’8, 40’2 y 67 litros de capacidad.
Para más detalle sobre los componentes de la válvula, referirse a la figura 5.2.1.1. En esa ilustración se muestra
un dibujo en explosión de la válvula LPG 128-20.
Esta válvula es de apertura diferencial. Puede ser activada mediante disparo manual, neumático, o eléctrico.
Permite el acoplamiento de un manómetro y de un presostato en el lugar de los tapones (13, 14 y 15) (no se
suministran como estándar en LPG). Incorpora membrana de seguridad contra sobrepresiones tarada a 190 bar
(10).

Pos Descripción
1 Cuerpo válvula
2 Eje válvula
33
3 Junta tórica
4 Muelle recuperación
5 Pistón de la válvula
6 Junta tórica cierre pistón
Junta tórica de cierre tapa
7
superior
8 Tapa superior
9 Tapón membrana seguridad
10 Membrana seguridad
11 Junta cierre válvula
12 Portajuntas
Tapón ciego alojamiento
13
presostato
14 Protector manómetro
Tapón ciego alojamiento
15
Manómetro
16 Tapa ciega membrana de rotura
Junta tórica cierre tapas ciegas
17
membrana de rotura y solenoide
18 Fijador membrana de rotura
19 Membrana de rotura
20 Fijador válvula de alivio
21 Pistón válvula de alivio
Muelle recuperación válvula de
22
alivio
Junta tórica de cierre válvula de
23
alivio
24 Tornillo fijación cadena-tapa salida
25 Tapa salida transporte
26 Cadena tapa salida
27 Tapa ciega válvula solenoide
28 Junta tórica válvula solenoide
29 Tornillo fijación
30 Fijador válvula solenoide
33 Orificio tapa cabezal
Figura 5.2.1.1. Explosión válvula LPG 128-20

El dispositivo de válvula de alivio alojado en la tapa superior (compuesto por los elementos 20, 21, 22 y 23) evita
que una microfuga de presión originada en alguno de los dispositivos de disparo pueda producir la descarga
accidental del cilindro.
La membrana de seguridad (10) está tarada para romperse y evacuar la presión interior del cilindro cuando esta
sube hasta un valor ligeramente inferior a la presión de prueba hidráulica del cilindro. Este dispositivo impide que
un aumento excesivo de la presión (debida por ejemplo a un calentamiento) pueda hacer explosionar el conjunto.
La membrana de rotura (19) permite la acción de dispositivos de disparo manuales y neumáticos. Cuando esta
membrana se rompe por la actuación del sistema de disparo conectado sobre ella, se produce la apertura de la
válvula. Su presión de tarado no permite que se rompa por el efecto de una sobrepresión en el cilindro.
Para evitar descargas accidentales no controladas durante las operaciones de instalación o mantenimiento y
siempre que se realice una manipulación sobre la válvula, quitar la tapa superior (8) y colocar la tapa (25) en la
boca de salida de la válvula. Realizando esta sencilla operación se eliminan riesgos ya que en caso de provocar un
disparo accidental el orificio (33) desalojará controladamente el gas del cilindro hacia el ambiente evitando la
activación de la válvula. El tapón (9) incorpora orificios que permiten la descarga controlada de gas en caso de que
una sobrepresión rompa la membrana de seguridad (10).
INSTALACIÓN:
La válvula se suministra montada sobre el cilindro. No intentar desmontar ninguno de los accesorios que lleva
incorporados. El montaje de los elementos que van acoplados sobre ella (latiguillo de descarga y dispositivos de
disparo) se realizará más adelante siguiendo el orden en que aparecen descritos.
NOTA: Consultar siempre las instrucciones recogidas en este manual antes de montar o desmontar
cualquier elemento de la válvula. Estos son equipos a presión. cualquier negligencia o mala manipulación
puede comportar descargas incontroladas y daños a personas y bienes. En caso de duda consultar
siempre con el departamento técnico de LPG.
NOTA: Para cualquier operación de instalación o mantenimiento la tapa superior (8) debe permanecer
desmontada como medida de seguridad. Al finalizar cualquier operación de instalación, mantenimiento y
pruebas, no olvidar poner de nuevo la tapa, apretando a mano. comprobar que la junta tórica de cierre
de la tapa (7) esté montada en su interior.

ACTIVACIÓN POR DISPARO MANUAL DE PALANCA.

Este sistema de activación se utiliza para los botellines piloto, cilindros máster y autónomos.
Descarga
Presión Presión
Cilindro Cilindro
REPOSO ACTIVADA
Las válvulas LPG aprovechan la presión interna del cilindro para realizar su apertura.
El único modo de activar la válvula es haciendo bajar el pistón (1).
Cuando la válvula está en reposo, la presión queda retenida por el elemento de cierre (2) y la membrana de
disparo (3).
Cuando se actúa manualmente el disparo tirando de la palanca (4) hacia atrás y hacia abajo, se empuja el pistón
percutor (5) produciendo la rotura de la membrana (3). En ese momento la presión retenida por la membrana de
disparo es liberada y conducida por encima del pistón (1). Dado que la relación de superficies entre el pistón (1) y
el elemento de cierre (2) es de 3:1, el pistón se desplaza hacia abajo abriendo la válvula.

ACTIVACIÓN POR VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE.

Este sistema de activación se utiliza para los cilindros autónomos.
Descarga
Presión Presión
Cilindro Cilindro
REPOSO ACTIVADA
Las válvulas LPG aprovechan la presión interna del cilindro para realizar su apertura.
Cuando la válvula está en reposo, la presión queda retenida por el elemento de cierre (2) y el pistón (4) de la
válvula solenoide (5).
Cuando se excita la válvula solenoide (5), el pistón (4) se mueve hacia atrás dejando libre el paso de la presión. Esa
presión se envía a través del paso interno (3) por encima del pistón (1). Dado que la relación de superficies entre
el pistón (1) y el elemento de cierre (2) es de 3:1, el pistón se desplaza hacia abajo abriendo la válvula.

5.2.2 VÁLVULA DE DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO2): LPG 110-00.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
La válvula LPG-110 se utiliza en los cilindros auxiliares de los sistemas centralizados o bien en cilindros modulares
de las siguientes capacidades: 5, 13’4, 26’8, 40 y 67 litros con actuación manual.
Para obtener una mayor información sobre los componentes de la válvula LPG-110, referirse a la figura 5.2.2.1.
En esta ilustración se muestran los componentes internos de la válvula.
El diseño de la válvula es muy básico y está enfocado a su utilización como cilindro auxiliar en los sistemas de
dióxido de carbono (CO2). Puede ser activado manual o neumáticamente. Como dispositivo de seguridad incorpora
una membrana de seguridad contra sobrepresiones tarada a 190 bar.
Pos Descripción
1 Cuerpo válvula
2 Tapa superior
3 Eje
4 Muelle de recuperación
5 Tapa membrana de seguridad
6 Porta juntas
7 Junta de cierre
8 Eje cuerpo interior
9 Junta tórica
10 Junta tórica
11 Membrana de seguridad
12 Junta tórica
Figura 5.2.2.1. Explosión válvula LPG 110-00

Cuando el cilindro es utilizado como auxiliar,

sobre la válvula se adapta un cabezal neumático
de 2 o 3 vías de conexión neumática según se
muestra en la figura.
Cuando el cilindro se utiliza como autónomo,

sobre la válvula se adapta un cabezal palanca
que permite la activación manual de la válvula
según se muestra en la figura.
En algunos casos especiales de activación
combinada, existe un modelo de cabezal palanca
con conexión para activación neumática.
El diseño de la válvula permite montar y desmontar los cabezales aún cuando los cilindros están cargados y
presurizados.
El cabezal (neumático o manual) debe ser retirado para evitar descargas accidentales durante las operaciones de
instalación y mantenimiento y en cualquier operación que requiera la manipulación de la válvula.
INSTALACIÓN:
La válvula se suministra montada sobre el cilindro. No intentar desmontar ninguno de los accesorios que lleva
incorporados. El montaje de los elementos que van acoplados sobre ella (latiguillo de descarga y dispositivos de
disparo) se realizará más adelante siguiendo el orden en que aparecen descritos.

ACTIVACIÓN POR CABEZAL NEUMÁTICO.
Descarga
escarga
Presión
Presión
Cilindro
Cilindro
Este sistema se utiliza para cilindros auxiliares

seguridad (3). Cuando a través de las conexiones neumáticas (5), se hace llegar presión por encima del pistón del
cabezal (4), este se desplaza hacia abajo empujando el pistón (1) y abriendo la válvula.

ACTIVACIÓN POR CABEZAL MANUAL PALANCA
Descarga
Descarga
Presión
Presión
Cilindro
Cilindro

seguridad (3). Cuando se tira de la palanca (5), la leva excéntrica mecanizada en la misma empuja el pistón (4),
este se desplaza hacia abajo empujando el pistón (1) y abriendo la válvula.
Para cerrar la válvula manualmente basta con tirar de la palanca en el sentido contrario al de apertura.

5.2.3 MANÓMETRO PARA DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO2).
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Este dispositivo permite la lectura de la presión interna de los cilindros. Rango 0-160 bar.
Manómetro
MANOMETRO
Filtro
FILTRO
Junta
JUNTA tórica DE
TORICA de CIERRE
cierre
Tuerca de
TUERCA DEajuste
AJUSTE
Figura 5.2.3.1. Manómetro para dióxido de carbono (CO2). Rango de 0-160 bar.
INSTALACIÓN:
El manómetro se suministra montado desde fábrica sobre la válvula del botellín piloto. Si por algún motivo fuera
necesario desmontarlo (por ejemplo para quitar la válvula solenoide) se debe seguir el procedimiento descrito en
este manual:
Quitar el protector del mismo desenroscando a mano. Con una llave fija aflojar la tuerca de ajuste posterior que
hay entre el manómetro y el cuerpo de la válvula y sacar el manómetro desenroscándolo manualmente.
Antes de comenzar el montaje del manómetro en la válvula comprobar que el mismo dispone de una junta tórica
de cierre y de una tuerca de ajuste. Antes de conectar el manómetro aproximar la tuerca contra la junta tórica
desenroscando la primera. Comenzar a enroscar el manómetro en su acoplamiento girando a mano a la vez que
con la ayuda de una llave fija se detiene el giro de la tuerca de ajuste. De esta manera la tuerca empuja la junta
tórica impidiendo que salga escupida por la presión del cilindro.
Si durante esta operación la tuerca hiciera tope con el cuerpo de la válvula (se detecta por que no se puede
apreciar el aplastamiento de la junta tórica), aflojar un poco la tuerca y proseguir.
Cuando el manómetro ha llegado a fondo y se observa que la junta tórica ejerce su función, verificar la posición de
la esfera y que la aguja marque presión. Si la esfera no estuviera en la posición normal de lectura, sujetando la
tuerca de ajuste con una llave fija para que no se afloje, girar el manómetro hasta la posición correcta. En la
posición correcta, apretar la tuerca de ajuste contra el cuerpo de la válvula para fijar su posición.
Verificar con agua jabonosa posibles fugas durante 10 minutos antes de dar por concluida la operación.

5.2.4 PRESOSTATO.
Ficha Técnica 145.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Presostato tarado a 25 bar. Es un elemento de control del agente contenido en el cilindro y permite el control de
la caída de presión producida por causa de fugas o de descarga mediante una señal eléctrica.
Figura 5.2.4.1. Presostato

INSTALACIÓN:
Montar el presostato en su alojamiento en la parte opuesta del puerto de conexión del manómetro. Previamente
retirar el tapón protector que viene instalado de fábrica.
Lentamente roscar manualmente el presostato (comprobar que dispone de la junta tórica de cierre) sobre el
acoplamiento hasta llegar al obús alojado en el interior de la válvula, en ese momento se puede oír una leve fuga de
gas. Aflojar la rosca ¼” de vuelta hasta observar que la fuga de gas se detiene y entonces volverla a apretar
rápidamente para prevenir la fuga de gas. La unión roscada no requiere añadir ningún elemento de sellado ya que
el cierre se realiza mediante una junta tórica.
Apretar el presostato utilizando una llave fija pero sin forzar unión.
Comprobar la presencia de fugas aplicando agua jabonosa en todos los puertos, antes de considerar finalizada la
operación.
Si durante la instalación del presostato, la presión liberada expulsara la junta tórica de cierre, empujar ligeramente
el filtro del presostato tal y como se muestra en la figura.
El conexionado eléctrico se debe realizar al final del montaje de la instalación. El procedimiento está especificado
en el apartado 5.5. Instalación eléctrica.

5.2.5 TUBO COLECTOR DE DESCARGA.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Tubo donde se descarga el contenido de todos los cilindros de la batería y que conduce el gas hacia la red de
tuberías de distribución.
Está fabricado en tubo de acero negro según ASTM, diámetros nominales entre ¾” y 4”. Soldado por proceso
SMAW bajo procedimiento homologado. Se prueba a 200 bar de presión.
Se suministra pintado en color negro. Dispone de salida roscada para su conexión a la red de tuberías de
distribución (1). Conexiones roscadas para la conexión de válvulas de retención (4), contactor de paso con
enclavamiento (2) y odorizador (6). El colector se suministra con tapón ciego (5). Tuerca de enlace opcional (3).
Figura 5.2.5.1. Colector de descarga
INSTALACIÓN:
El tubo colector va colocado encima de los cilindros de la batería sobre escuadras fijadas directamente a la pared
o bien sobre pies de suportación vertical. El montaje del tubo colector se realiza simultáneamente al montaje del
herraje. Evitar posicionar el colector conectándolo inicialmente a la red de tuberías de distribución, ya que esta
operación puede modificar las cotas entre las conexiones del colector y la posición de los cilindros de la batería.
Ver 5.1.2. Instalación de herrajes para mayor detalle.
Todas las conexiones roscadas del colector se deben sellar con cinta de teflón cuidando de no cubrir nunca los
dos primeros hilos de rosca.

5.2.6 VÁLVULAS DE RETENCIÓN DE ½”.
Ficha Técnica N. 022.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Dispositivo que evita el retorno del gas desde el tubo colector hacia los cilindros, asegurando la descarga
completa de todos los cilindros de la batería. Actúa como elemento de seguridad durante las operaciones de
mantenimiento ya que, en caso de haber cilindros desconectados y producirse una descarga fortuita hacia el
colector, tapona la salida del gas.
Se utiliza en cilindros de 40’2 y 67 litros de capacidad.
Figura. 5.2.6.1. Válvula de retención de ½ ”
INSTALACIÓN:
Una vez que el colector está montado sobre los soportes, instalar todas las válvulas de retención.
Las válvulas de retención van siempre dispuestas entre el latiguillo de descarga que se conecta a su vez con el
cilindro y el colector. Para montar, añadir pasta sellante o cinta de teflón a la conexión roscada del tubo colector
donde se adapta la válvula de retención sin cubrir nunca los dos primeros hilos de rosca. Realizar la misma
operación sobre la conexión macho roscada donde se adapta el latiguillo de descarga flexible.
Sobre el cuerpo de la válvula viene marcada de fabrica una flecha que indica el sentido del flujo de la descarga. La
válvula debe siempre instalarse con la flecha indicando hacia el colector.
Apretar la unión firmemente utilizando una llave fija.

5.2.7 DESVIADOR ½”.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Como estándar solo se utiliza en baterías de 8 o menos cilindros con cilindro máster. Se instala entre la boca de
salida del cilindro máster y el latiguillo de descarga. Durante la activación, el sistema desvía una parte de la presión
descargada por el cilindro máster hacia los cilindros auxiliares de la batería produciendo su descarga.
Figura 5.2.7.1. Desviador de ½”.
INSTALACIÓN:
El cilindro máster se conecta directamente a través de la conexión (1). El latiguillo de descarga se conecta
directamente en la conexión (2). En la conexión (3) se conecta el latiguillo de ¼” a través del cual se hace llegar la
presión hacia los cabezales neumáticos de los cilindros auxiliares.
Ninguna de las conexiones de este dispositivo necesita utilizar elementos de sellado debido a que disponen de
cierres esféricos. Es aconsejable utilizar vaselina para facilitar el roscado de los componentes.

5.2.8 CILINDROS AUXILIARES DE ALTA PRESIÓN.

DESCRIPCIÓN:
Recipientes a presión que contienen la carga de agente extintor dióxido de carbono (CO2). Cilindros de acero
estirado sin soldadura según especificaciones de la directiva 1999/36/EEC (Equipos a presión transportables),
tratados térmicamente, con una presión de prueba hidráulica de 250 bar.
La capacidad de los cilindros es de 40’2 y 67 litros en baterías. Para cilindros autónomos se dispone además de
cilindros de volumen 5, 13’4 y 26’8 litros.
Todos los modelos tienen aprobaciones según directivas europeas aplicables (marcado Π). Una vez ensamblada la
válvula sobre el cuello del cilindro (3) y brida de protección (5), el conjunto se protege con un tapón de seguridad
para transporte (4). Todos los cilindros incorporan etiquetas identificativas con instrucciones de manipulación.
Densidad de llenado mínima de 0’67 kg/l.
Densidad de llenado máxima de 0’75 kg/l.
Figura 5.2.8.1. Cilindros dióxido de carbono (CO2)
LLENADO LLENADO
CAPACIDAD FICHA TÉCNICA
MÍNIMO (kg) MÁXIMO (kg)
5’0 l N - 13 3’4 3’8
13’4 l N - 13 9’0 10’1
26’8 l N - 13 18’0 20’1
40’2 l N - 13 26’9 30’2
67’0 l N - 13 44’9 50’3
INSTALACIÓN:
El conjunto válvula-cilindro se suministra totalmente montado. Colocar todos los cilindros en el herraje. Para evitar
daños por caída accidental de los cilindros, colocar el travesero delantero del herraje antes de quitar el tapón
protector. Apretar el delantero del herraje concediendo cierta movilidad al cilindro. A continuación, quitar el tapón
protector del cilindro (4). Desmontar la tapa superior de la válvula.
No olvidar, tras finalizar el montaje del sistema de disparo, fijar los cilindros al herraje apretando a tope las
abrazaderas.
Al finalizar la instalación total del sistema (sistemas de disparo incluidos), montar y apretar manualmente
todas las tapas de las válvulas LPG.

5.2.8.1 Inscripciones en los cilindros.

Por requerimiento legal, todos los cilindros deben incluir una serie de inscripciones en su ojiva que detallen entre
otros datos el fabricante, marcas de calidad, presión de prueba hidráulica y gas a contenido. A continuación se
detalla la disposición de marcas en los cilindros LPG.
Figura 5.2.8.1.1. Inscripciones cilindro de alta presión
Pos Descripción
1 Nombre del fabricante
2 Diámetro de salida
3 Dimensiones del cilindro (espesor, peso y capacidad)
4 Nº Identificación cuerpo cilindro
5 Estándar europeo de referencia
6 Nº de serie
7 Presión de ensayo y de trabajo
8 Fecha de fabricación

5.2.8.2 Etiquetas identificativas para cilindros cargados con dióxido de carbono (CO2).
Con cada envío, LPG suministra una etiqueta identificativa adhesiva para cada cilindro suministrado. Para evitar su
deterioro durante el transporte e instalación del cilindro se entregan conjuntamente con la documentación que
acompaña al envío. Esta etiqueta identifica el gas contenido en el cilindro, la cantidad del mismo que contiene, peso
del cilindro en vacío, la presión de trabajo, el número de identificación del cilindro y la fecha de carga.
MASA MAX. AUTORIZADA

MAX. AUTHORIZED CHARGE
CHARGE MAX. AUTORISE
CILINDRO Nº
KG.
CO 2 AGENTE EXTINTOR
EXTINGUISHING AGENT
AGENT EXTINTEUR
CYLINDER Nº ONU: 1013

BOUTEILLE Nº
2
CARGA DE CO2 EN KG. FALSO TECHO
CHARGE OF CO2 IN KG. FALSE CEILING
CHARGE DE CO2 EN KG. FAUX PLAFOND
TARA CILINDRO EN KG. INCLUIDA VALVULA Y SONDA

CYLINDER TARE IN KG. INCLUDED VALVE AND SYPHON TUBE AMBIENTE
TUBE PLONGEUR ET VANNE INCLUS PARED
AMBIENT
TARE BOUTEILLE EN KG. WALL
AMBIANCE MUR
PESO TOTAL EN KG.
TOTAL WEIGHT IN KG. TARA + CARGA
TARE + CHARGE
MASSE TOTALE EN KG.
SUELO
FECHA CARGA FALSO SUELO FLOOR
FILLING DATE FLOOR VOID SOL
FAUX PLANCHER
DATE DE CHARGE
PELIGRO: Este cilindro está cargado con gas liquido a alta presión, con posible descarga violenta. Extremar
precaución. Puede causar graves lesiones.
DANGER: High pressure cylinder, capableof violent discarge, extremely hazardous. May cause severe injury.
DANGER: Cette bouteille est chargée avec gaz sous pression. Manipuler avec extreme precaution. Peut causer
des blessures graves.
Atenerse a las instrucciones de esta etiqueta y al manual de intalación. Para el almacenemiento e instalación del cilindro, seguir
escrupulosamente el procedimiento indicado en el manual. Periódicamente comprobar la presión del manometro.
1) Fijar el soporte (K) a la pared. 1) Retirar la tapa (D) de la válvula.

2) Situar el cilindro (J) en el soporte (K). 2) Retirar el dispositivo montado en (H).
3) Retirar el capuchón protector (E) de la válvula y colocar la boca de salida en posición correcta. 3) Desactivar y retirar la bobina de la solenoide (I).
4) Fijar el cilindro (J) al soporte (K) 4) Retirar la conexión de descarga (B).
5) Retirar la tapa (D) de la válvula. 5) Colocar tapón de seguridad (A).
6) Retirar el tapón de seguridad (A). 6) Colocar tapa de la válvula (D).
7) Instalar la conexión de descarga (B) a la válvula y de esta a la tuberia de distribución (C) o colector. 7) Colocar el capuchón protector (E).
8) Instalar en la válvula los accesorios si no los llevara incorporados. (Ver manual de instalación) 8) Retirar el cilindro (J) de su soporte(K).
9) Controlar con agua jabonosa que no haya fugas de gas por toda la válvula, sobre todo en la cabeza. Limpiar agua y secar.
10) Colocar nuevamente la tapa de la válvula.
Read and follow all instruction on this label and in the O+M manual. For safe handling indicated in the manual, safety procedures be followed
in exact sequence before storaging and installing.
1) Fix brackets (K) to the wall. 1) Remove upper tap (D).

2) Place cylinder (J) in bracket (K). 2) Remove the device assembled in (H).
3) Remove protection cap (E) and place valve outlet in correct position. 3) Desactive and remove solenoid coil (I).
4) Clamp cylinder (J) in bracket (K). 4) Remove discharge connection (B).
5) Remove upper tap (D) from the valve. 5) Place safety cap (A).
6) Remove safety cap (A). 6) Place upper tap (D) on to valve.
7) Install valve discharge connection (B) and connect it into system piping (C) or manifold. 7) Place protective cap (E).
8) Place all release devices on the valve if they are not installed, see O+M manual. 8) Remove cylinder (J) from bracket (K).
9) Check posible leakeages with soapy water all arround the valve, mainly in the valve head. Clean and dry.
10) Place upper tap (D) again.
Mises de garde. Ce consignes sont complétées par le manuel O+M. Pour le stockage, transport et installation nous vous recommadons de
suivre scrupuleusement les consines qui suivent. Verifier périodiquement la pression du manométre.
1) Fixer le support (K) de la bouteille au mur. 1) Retirer le bouchon (D).

2) Positionner la bouteille (J) dans le support (K). 2) Retirer le decléncheur vissé en (H).
3) Retirer le capot protecteur vanne (E) et orienter correctement la sortie d'emission de la vanne (A). 3) Désactiver la bobine de l'electrovanne (I).
4) Fixer la bouteille (J) au mur. 4) Retirer la connexion de décharge (B).
5) Retirer le bouchon supérieur de la vanne. 5) Placer le bouchon (A) de securité.
6) Retirer le bouchon de sécurité (A) en sortie d'emission de la vanne. 6) Remonter le capot protecteur (D).
7) Installer le réseau de tuyauterie et le relier (B) á la sortie d'emission (C). 7) Remonter le capot protecteur (E).
8) Monter les accessoires de declénchement de la vanne. )Voir le manuel correspondant) 8) Demonter la bouteille (J) du support (K).
9) Vérifier les éventuelles fuites en sortie de gas.
10) Vérifier si la vanne de décompression (F) est ouverte.
Diagrama P/T para CO2 -P/T Diagrama for CO2 -Diagrama P/T du CO2
Presión (bar) / Pressure (bar) / Pression (bar)
Temperatura (ºC) / Temperature (ºC) / Temperature (ºC)
DENSIDAD DE CARGA
Kg/m3
TAUX CHARGE
CENTRAL DELEGACIÓN
Mestre Joan Corrales,107-109 Mar Cantábrico,12
08950 Esplugues de Llobregat Pol. Ind. San Fernando I
BARCELONA 28830 San Fernando de Henares
Tel. 34 (9)3-4802925 MADRID
Fax. 34 (9)3-4737492 Tel. 34 (9)1-6775257
Fax. 34 (9)1-6775383
Como requerimiento legal, es obligatorio que cada cilindro disponga de su propia etiqueta identificativa. Es
importante para el instalador que cada cilindro disponga de su propia etiqueta adherida tan pronto como la
instalación esté finalizada. Para llevar a cabo esta operación, el número de identificación del cilindro (que debe
coincidir con el punto 4 del apartado 5.2.8.1) debe ser comparado con los números identificativos que aparecen
en las etiquetas suministradas.
Las etiquetas deben disponerse directamente en el cuerpo de los cilindros, en una localización visible que facilite la
lectura normal de la misma. Para facilitar la adhesión de las etiquetas se debe limpiar previamente la zona donde
se va a instalar para eliminar cualquier resto de suciedad, aceite o grasa,

5.2.9 LATIGUILLO RIGIDO DE DESCARGA ½” R2F.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Conducto de descarga del agente dióxido de carbono (CO2) que conecta los cilindros con el colector.
Este modelo se utiliza en baterías y cilindros modulares que no incorporan sistemas de pesaje.
Diámetro nominal ½ ” construidos en caucho sintético con 2 trenzados metálicos intermedios (R2) y una capa de
caucho sintético exterior resistente a los agentes atmosféricos.
Presión de trabajo 241 bar y presión de rotura 965 bar.
Figura. 5.2.9.1. Latiguillo Rígido de ½ ” R2F
INSTALACIÓN:
El extremo con salida hembra del latiguillo está adaptado para conectarlo a la válvula del cilindro o al desviador sin
necesidad de utilizar ningún elemento de sellado. Sin embargo, se recomienda añadir vaselina para facilitar el
ajuste de las roscas.
La extremo con salida macho del latiguillo se conecta a la válvula de retención y necesita añadir cinta de Teflón
(PTFE) con cuidado de no cubrir nunca los dos primeros hilos de rosca.

5.2.10 LATIGUILLO DE DESCARGA DE TEFLÓN (PTFE) ½ ”.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Este latiguillo se utiliza para la misma función descrita en el apartado anterior (latiguillos de R2) pero solo en
baterías que incorporan sistema de pesaje debido a su gran flexibilidad.
Latiguillo de diámetro ½” fabricado en teflón (PTFE) con terminales de latón y entramado externo de acero
inoxidable.
Figura. 5.2.10.1. Latiguillo de teflón ½”
INSTALACIÓN:
El extremo con salida hembra del latiguillo está adaptado para conectarlo a la válvula del cilindro o al desviador sin
necesidad de utilizar ningún elemento de sellado. Sin embargo, se recomienda añadir vaselina para facilitar el
ajuste de las roscas.
La extremo con salida macho del latiguillo se conecta a la válvula de retención y necesita añadir cinta de Teflón
(PTFE) con cuidado de no cubrir nunca los dos primeros hilos de rosca.

5.2.11 RETARDADOR NEUMÁTICO.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Consiste en un cilindro de pequeño volumen (1) cuya válvula (2) esta provista interiormente de elementos
mecánicos restrictores de caudal. El retardador neumático está diseñado para producir un tiempo de retardo
entre la activación del disparo y la descarga real de la batería de cilindros. Se encuentra calibrado de manera
estándar para producir un retardo de 30 ± 3 segundos. Incorpora un actuador manual para abortar el tiempo de
retardo (3).
Figura 5.2.11.1. Retardador Neumático
INSTALACIÓN:
El dispositivo retardador debe intercalarse en la línea de disparo, entre el botellín piloto y el primer cilindro auxiliar
de la batería.
Conectar el botellín piloto al retardador por el puerto (4), mediante un adaptador especial o un latiguillo flexible de
diámetro ¼”, según indiquen los planos. Conectar la salida del retardador (5) al primer cilindro de la batería.

5.2.12 DERIVADOR.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Dispositivo utilizado en sistemas de disparo de dióxido de carbono (CO2) provistos de retardador y sirena
neumática. Permite la activación de una sirena neumática de alarma durante el tiempo de retardo. Concluido el
tiempo de retardo corta el suministro neumático a sirena y lo desvía hacia la red de tuberías que van a los
difusores. Dispone de conexiones roscadas para el latiguillo de descarga (1), la válvula retención (2) la línea para
alimentar la sirena (3) y la línea proveniente del retardador (4).
A AColector
Colector
AA Sirena
Sirena
De Retardador
De Retardador
DeCilindro
De Cilindro
INSTALACIÓN:
Montar sobre la válvula de retención a través del puerto (2). La conexión requiere aplicar cinta de teflón en la
conexión. Conectar el latiguillo de descarga por el puerto (1) añadiendo cinta de teflón. Conectar tubo de cobre
4x6 entre el retardador y la entrada (4) y otra línea de cobre entre la sirena y el puerto de conexión (3). Para la
conexión de los tubos de cobre 4x6 a los puertos (3,4) montar los conectores de ¼” gas con bicono interior
suministrados por LPG junto al derivador. Los conductos de cobre deben verse rectos o curvados a 90º. Observar
que el tubo no esté aplastado ni dañado en toda su longitud para no estrangular el paso de la presión. En tramos
rectos y con curvas de longitud inferior a 300 mm realizar una curva de expansión en el medio, es decir, una
circunferencia completa que amortigüe el golpe de ariete. El cierre en las líneas de cobre se realiza mediante un
acoplamiento bicono. La fijación del bicono al tubo de cobre debe realizarse en un banco de trabajo y nunca en
posición ya que así se asegura una precisa conexión del bicono sobre el tubo evitando fugas. Una vez ajustado en
banco, montar en el circuito asegurando que el tubo y el bicono llegan al fondo del acoplamiento y apretar la
tuerca con llave fija.
Unión Tipo Bicono
Curva de Expansión

5.2.13 CONTACTOR DE PASO CON ENCLAVAMIENTO.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
El contactor de paso abre o cierra un circuito eléctrico cuando se realiza una descarga de gas en el tubo colector.
La señal eléctrica puede ser monitorizada en el panel de control o utilizada para la parada y/o puesta en marcha
de otros dispositivos eléctricos. Una vez activado sólo puede ser rearmado manualmente tirando de la esfera que
incorpora el sistema de enclavamiento (1). El rearme se debe realizar en el lugar del almacenamiento sobre el
propio colector.
Figura 5.2.13.1. Contactor de Paso con Enclavamiento.

INSTALACIÓN:
Va montado sobre el tubo colector. Añadir cinta de teflón a la conexión roscada cuidando de no cubrir los dos
primeros hilos de rosca. Apretar la unión con una llave fija sobre el cuerpo de latón, nunca sobre la caja de
conexiones. Realizar el conexionado eléctrico al final del montaje de la instalación según especificaciones recogidas
en el apartado 5.5 Instalación Eléctrica.

5.2.14 ODORIZADOR.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Dispositivo que se instala en el colector de descarga y desprende un olor característico cuando el sistema es
descargado. Debido a que el dióxido de carbono (CO2) es un gas incoloro e inodoro, el aroma desprendido por el
odorizador permite a la gente detectar la presencia de gas en la sala en caso de descarga.
El odorizador se suministra cargado con la esencia. Cuando el sistema es descargado la presión expulsa la
cubierta (3) y permite la mezcla del contenido con el caudal de descarga.
Figura 5.2.14.1. Odorizador
INSTALACIÓN:
Se rosca directamente en el colector a través de su conexión roscada. Añadir cinta de teflón a la conexión
roscada cuidando de no cubrir los dos primeros hilos de rosca.
El odorizador debe instalarse siempre en posición vertical (la conexión roscada hacia abajo y la tapa (2) hacia
arriba) lo más cerca posible de la salida del colector.

5.2.15 VÁLVULA DIRECCIONAL.
Ficha Técnica N. 032 (Desde 3/4” hasta 2 ½”).

Ficha Técnica N. 092 (Desde 3” hasta 4”).
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Dispositivo neumático que permite la cobertura de varios riesgos con la utilización de una sola batería de cilindros.
La apertura de este elemento se produce durante la activación del sistema de disparo. La entrada de la línea de
disparo se realiza a través del puerto de conexión (4) y la salida por el puerto de conexión (3). El puerto (2) permite
el escape del aire retenido en el interior del pistón durante la operación de apertura. La apertura de la válvula
direccional se produce antes de la apertura de los cilindros auxiliares. Cada válvula direccional dirige el caudal de
agente extintor hacia un riesgo diferente y hacia un sistema de tuberías diferente.
Opcionalmente la válvula solenoide puede equipar un contacto eléctrico (6) para control remoto de su posición
(abierta o cerrada). El pistón neumático dispone de un tornillo de venteo (7) para anular el efecto de vacio al cerrar
manualmente la válvula.
Figura 5.2.15.1. Válvulas Direccionales
INSTALACIÓN:
Las válvulas direccionales incorporan conexiones roscadas en (1) y (5) para diámetros hasta 2” y enlaces
soldados a partir de 2 ½”.
Conectar la válvula direccional entre el colector de descarga y la red de tuberías que protege un determinado
riesgo. Primero ensamblar la válvula direccional al tubo colector por (1). Para la conexión de válvulas direccionales
roscadas añadir cinta de teflón a la unión roscada (1) y apretar con una llave idónea (fija, Stensson, inglesa).
Conectar a red de tuberías por el puerto (5).
La línea de disparo neumático piloto conecta los puertos (3) y (4) tal y como se explica en el apartado 5.3.10.
Sistema de disparo para válvulas direccionales.

5.2.16 MEMBRANA DE SEGURIDAD CON ESCAPE CONDUCIDO
DESCRIPCIÓN:
66
Nº Denominación
1 Membrana de seguridad
2 Colector
3 Conexión a colector
5
4 Cuerpo de membrana
7
5 Cuerpo a tubería de alivio
1
1
6 Tubería de alivio
4
4
7 Tapón de apriete
2
33
Figura 5.2.16.1. Membrana de Seguridad con escape conducido
Dispositivo de seguridad para utilizar sólo en sistemas que utilizan válvulas direccionales. En caso de descarga
accidental de uno o varios cilindros, las válvulas direccionales permanecen cerradas reteniendo el agente extintor
dentro del colector. La función de la membrana de seguridad (1) es evacuar la sobrepresion del colector. El
escape del gas se realiza a través de un conducto con salida al exterior (6). La membrana está tarada según la
presión máxima de trabajo del colector que se utiliza.
INSTALACIÓN:
La membrana de seguridad se monta en fábrica con el par de apriete correspondiente. En caso de desmontaje o
recambio introducir la membrana (1) dentro del cuerpo (4) con la cara coloreada mirando hacia al tapón (7).
Apretar el tapón (7) aplicando un par de apriete 20 Nm. Montar sobre la conexión a colector (3) el cuerpo de
membrana (4). Instalar la tubería de alivio (6) y unirla a la membrana mediante el enlace (5). Es aconsejable que la
tubería de alivio evacue el gas en el exterior, en una zona segura fuera del área protegida y del área de
almacenamiento de la batería de cilindros.

5.2.17 SISTEMA ANALÓGICO DE PESAJE.
DESCRIPCIÓN.
El sistema de control de carga está pensado para permitir el control continuo del estado de carga de cilindros. El
equipo da señal de alarma cuando la pérdida supera el 5% o el 10% de la carga inicial, según normativa ISO,
CEPREVEN y NFPA.
Figura 5.2.17.1. Sistema analógico de pesaje

Los sistemas se dotan de una unidad central que puede ser conectada a la centralita de incendios y de varias
unidades de control de carga, una por cada cilindro a controlar. Las unidades de control de carga están formadas
por una célula de carga que permite detectar pérdidas con una resolución de 1 kg. La célula de carga incorpora
una galga extensiométrica. Todas las unidades de control de carga están conectadas hasta la unidad central
mediante una línea monitorizada (BUS).
Cada unidad central está diseñada para controlar un máximo de 31 unidades de control de carga. En aquellas
instalaciones que precisen más unidades de control de carga deberán ser suministradas con más unidades
centrales, en función del número de unidades de control de carga, considerándose equipos totalmente
independientes entre ellos.
El equipo que se describe en el presente manual está concebido para realizar el control de carga de cilindros
permitiendo saber el peso real de la carga que contienen. La unidad central consulta de forma continua el estado
de cada uno de los cilindros recibiendo la información de la unidad de control de carga asociada mecánicamente a
él. Para poder realizar las consultas a cada unidad se le asigna internamente una dirección. La asignación de la
dirección se realiza en la puesta a punto del equipo. Aquellas unidades a las que no se haya asignado una dirección
permanecerán fuera de servicio.
El presente equipo permite comprobar desde la unidad central la carga real, la carga nominal, el peso mínimo
permitido y el estado de cada una de las unidades de control de carga.
En caso de fallo de suministro eléctrico el equipo mantiene en memoria la configuración pero no realizará el
control de la carga. El sistema seguirá funcionando sin necesidad de realizar ninguna intervención en el momento
que se reponga el suministro eléctrico.
NOTA: Cada sistema de pesaje se suministra de fábrica con las instrucciones de instalación y puesta a
punto.

5.2.18 SISTEMA MECÁNICO DE PESAJE.
DESCRIPCIÓN.
Sistema mecánico para control del nivel de carga de cada uno de los cilindros que componen una batería. Su
funcionamiento se basa en la reducción de peso experimentado en un cilindro cuando este presenta una perdida
de gas. Este sistema no considera el peso real del cilindro
Figura 5.2.18.1. Sistema mecánico de pesaje
Cada cilindro es suspendido de un módulo de control mecánico (1). Una perdida del 10% de la carga es suficiente
para que el módulo de una señal óptica indicando el fallo (cae la caja metálica del módulo). Si es necesario, el
sistema puede ser suministrado con una fotocélula (2) y un espejo (3) que permite monitorizar el sistema por
elementos externos (central de incendios) y activar otros sistemas de alarma ópticos y acústicos. Una sola
fotocélula permite controlar baterías de hasta 10 metros de longitud.
La instalación y puesta a punto de este sistema de control de carga es muy sencillo y permite ajustes manuales
para modificar la sensibilidad de los módulos de control.
Bajo pedido y desde fábrica es posible suministrar módulos de control mecánico para diferentes tipos de cilindros
y niveles de perdida.
NOTA: Cada sistema de pesaje se suministra de fábrica con las instrucciones de instalación y puesta a
punto.

5.3 SISTEMA DE DISPARO.

Es el sistema que permite comandar la descarga del gas contenido en los cilindros. El sistema de disparo
estándar LPG para dióxido de carbono (CO2) es de acción neumática. En el Anexo I se encuentran, a modo de
ejemplo, los planos de los siguientes sistemas de disparo LPG para dióxido de carbono (CO2).
• Esquema sistema descarga y disparo: Batería para dióxido de carbono (CO2) con cilindro máster (baterías
de 8 o menos cilindros de 40’2 y 67 litros N. 50040676).
• Esquema sistema descarga y disparo: Batería para dióxido de carbono (CO2) con botellín piloto (hasta 40
cilindros de 40’2 y 67 litros N. 50090673).
En los planos anteriores se pueden observar conexionados de sistemas de disparo de diferente complejidad. No
obstante estos planos se incluyen a modo de ejemplo, por lo que para las instalaciones que estén acompañadas
de planos específicos serán estos últimos los que prevalezcan.
El disparo neumático está compuesto por un cilindro máster o bien 1 ó 2 botellines piloto, cada uno de los cuales
lleva incorporada una válvula piloto. La válvula piloto integra los diferentes dispositivos de disparo como son
disparadores manuales, eléctricos por válvula solenoide o percutores pirotécnicos que una vez activados realizan
la apertura de las válvulas de los cilindros auxiliares. Este es un sistema flexible que permite incorporar más de un
botellín piloto, comandar el disparo de varias baterías a la vez y obtener un tiempo de retardo en la descarga
adaptándose a cada necesidad.
Seguidamente se describen los componentes que pueden aparecer en un sistema de disparo dióxido de carbono
(CO2) y el montaje de cada uno de ellos. El montaje se realizará en el orden en que los elementos son descritos.

5.3.1 BOTELLÍN PILOTO.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Cilindro de volumen 3’0 litros (1) equipado con válvula LPG 128-90 (2), cargado con 100 bar de nitrógeno seco.
Puede ser activado de manera manual (4), eléctrica por solenoide (5). Una vez activada la descarga del piloto, el
nitrógeno circula por la línea de disparo hasta los cabezales neumáticos de disparo de disparo montados sobre los
cilindros auxiliares de la batería. La válvula lleva incorporado un manómetro (3). Una vez activado no es posible la
interrupción de la descarga de los cilindros.
Pos Descripción
1 Botellín piloto de N2
2 Válvula LPG 128-90
3 Manómetro
4 Disparo manual
5 Válvula solenoide
6 Herraje
7 Válvula de despresurización ¼”
8 Reducción de 21’7 a ¼” H-H
9 Té ¼” macho a 2 x ¼” hembra
10 Unión de ¼” a latiguillo
11 Latiguillo de PTFE ¼” x 700
Figura 5.3.1.1. Botellín Piloto con válvula LPG 128-90
La actuación de la válvula coincide con la descripción del apartado 5.2.1. “Válvula LPG para dióxido de carbono
(CO2) : LPG 128-20”.
INSTALACIÓN:
Sujetar el herraje del cilindro piloto a la pared en la posición aproximada que se muestra en los planos (ver ejemplo
incluido en plano del Anexo I). La altura del herraje del cilindro debe ser adecuada para un posible accionamiento
manual. Desembalar el botellín piloto, sujetarlo al herraje y quitar el tapón de protección. Una vez instalado, el
manómetro debe quedar perfectamente visible y el acceso a los sistemas de disparo manual debe quedar libre de
obstáculos. Desenroscar la tapa superior de la válvula del piloto para evitar descargas fortuitas durante el montaje
del resto de componentes del sistema de disparo. Al finalizar toda manipulación del sistema de disparo, instalar de
nuevo la tapa de la válvula piloto.

5.3.2 DISPARO MANUAL DE PALANCA.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Dispositivo que permite el accionamiento manual de los cilindros máster o modulares y botellines piloto de la
batería. Consiste en una palanca (1) que accionada manualmente hacia atrás y hacia abajo empuja una aguja (2)
contra una membrana de disparo colocada en el cuerpo de la válvula piloto. La rotura de la membrana provoca la
apertura de la válvula. Incorpora precinto (3) contra activaciones involuntarias.
Figura 5.3.2.1. Disparo Manual Palanca

INSTALACIÓN:
Comprobar que los precintos instalados en el pin de seguridad (3) no están dañados y que la junta tórica (5) se
encuentra en su lugar. El disparo se coloca sobre válvulas piloto o modulares en el puerto de conexión indicado en
5.2.1. Utilizar para su colocación una llave de cuello de cigüeña y no añadir sellantes a la unión roscada (4) ya que
el cierre se realiza por junta tórica (5). Se aconseja untar un poco de vaselina en la rosca para facilitar el montaje.
Cualquier dispositivo de actuación manual debe instalarse a la altura normal de operación y situarse en lugares
perfectamente visibles. Deben quedar protegidos contra la posibilidad de activaciones involuntarias. Cada
dispositivo de disparo manual de palanca debe estar señalizado para indicar la zona que protege.
NOTA: Antes de montar el disparo manual sobre la válvula comprobar que el pistón se encuentra en el
fondo del alojamiento empujando con un destornillador. Posteriormente, comprobar con una regla que la
aguja se encuentra retraída 3'0-4'5 mm tal y como indica el dibujo.

5.3.3 VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Dispositivo eléctrico que permite la apertura de las válvulas LPG. Conecta por (1) sobre la válvula de los botellines
piloto, cilindros máster o cilindros autónomos y permite la activación de los mismos por medio de una señal
eléctrica emitida por un panel de control o por un pulsador de disparo. Consiste en una bobina (3) montada sobre
un vástago. Cuando la bobina se excita atrae al núcleo interno produciendo la apertura de la válvula. La bobina es
alimentada eléctricamente a través del conector (4). Existe un modelo para aplicaciones normales y otro modelo
antideflagrante. Este dispositivo es desmontable incluso cuando el botellín piloto está en carga.
Figura 5.3.3.1. Válvula Solenoide

INSTALACIÓN:
La solenoide se suministra montada sobre la válvula del botellín piloto, el cilindro máster o el cilindro autónomo. No
realizar el conexionado eléctrico hasta terminar el montaje neumático de toda la instalación (Ver 5.5. Instalación
eléctrica).
En caso de tener que desmontar para prueba de funcionamiento, quitar el conector (4), aflojar la tuerca (2) y
extraer la bobina (3).
NOTA: LPG no recomienda retirar la válvula solenoide de la válvula piloto. en caso de disfunción, remitir el
conjunto válvula + cilindro + solenoide a LPG.
Si por algún motivo, avería o instrucción expresa del servicio técnico de LPG es imprescindible retirar la solenoide
de la válvula piloto, se deberá: En primer lugar , desmontar la tapa ciega (14) y el tapón (15) de la válvula. Como
se indica en la figura 5.2.1.1. al desconectar el manómetro se corta el suministro de presión a la solenoide. Esta
operación se debe realizar con suma precaución y operar con seguridad para evitar falsas maniobras, por lo
que el operario se situará lateralmente para prevenir una expulsión violenta del manómetro. Se puede producir la
descarga del cilindro máster, autónomo o botellín piloto e inducir a la descarga de la batería. Para evitarlo,
desmontar la tapa superior de la válvula del botellín piloto o cilindro autónomo. Seguidamente, se desmonta el
conector (4), la tuerca (2), se extrae la bobina (3) y por último se afloja la tuerca de fijación (1). En este momento
es posible retirar el resto de la solenoide. El montaje se realiza en orden inverso siendo la ultima operación la de
instalar el tapón (15) y la tapa ciega (14) en la válvula de la figura 5.2.1.1.
Tras el montaje de una válvula solenoide comprobar fugas añadiendo agua jabonosa a todo el cuerpo de la
solenoide, retirando previamente conector y bobina. Comprobar igualmente fugas en el cabezal de la válvula
(orificio superior) antes de dar por concluido el trabajo. El equipo queda en servicio cuando se coloca la tapa
superior de la válvula.

5.3.4 CABEZALES DE DISPARO NEUMÁTICOS LPG 110.
MÓDELO FICHA TÉCNICA

2 VIAS
023
3 VIAS
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Dispositivo que instalado directamente sobre la válvula de los cilindros auxiliares permite la descarga del cilindro
por medios neumáticos.
El cabezal neumático está equipado interiormente con un pistón interno (2) y con dos o tres conexiones
neumáticas (1) dependiendo de la posición que ocupe en la batería. Cuando se hace llegar presión neumática por
encima del pistón (2) esté produce la apertura de la válvula asociada al cabezal.
Figura 5.3.4.1. Cabezal de descarga neumático.
INSTALACIÓN:
Para montarlo sobre el cilindro, basta con desenroscar a mano la tapa del cabezal (3), introducir por su interior el
cabezal y volver a roscar a mano el cabezal sobre la válvula. Esta unión no precisa la utilización de elementos
sellantes. Sobre las conexiones neumáticas (1) se instalan directamente los latiguillos del circuito de disparo o el
tornillo de descompresión corto según sea la posición que ocupa el cabezal. Esta unión tampoco precisa la
utilización de sellantes.

5.3.5 TORNILLO DE DESCOMPRESIÓN.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Tras una activación de la batería, el circuito neumático de disparo queda presurizado con nitrógeno procedente
del cilindro máster o del botellín piloto. Para descomprimir el circuito de manera segura y conducida, se actuará
sobre el tornillo de despresurización. Ver apartado 8.3.6. Despresurización de la línea de disparo.
Figura 5.3.5.1. Tornillo de descompresión montado en cabezal neumático
INSTALACIÓN:
Roscar el tornillo de descompresión con la ayuda de una llave fija y no añadir elementos sellantes a la unión ya que
su cierre es cónico Su ubicación viene determinada en los planos del sistema de disparo.

5.3.6 VÁLVULA DE DESPRESURIZACIÓN R. ¼”.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
La válvula de despresurización para circuitos neumáticos de disparo evita que una acumulación de presión en la
línea de disparo producida por microfugas pueda producir accidentalmente la descarga de la batería de cilindros.
En reposo este dispositivo permite la salida al exterior de microfugas. En caso de activación real se cierra
automáticamente evitando la perdida de presión en el circuito de disparo.
Figura 5.3.6.1. Válvula de despresurización R. ¼”

INSTALACIÓN:
La válvula de despresurización ¼” se debe instalar según planos. Generalmente se monta sobre una Té entre la
salida de la válvula del botellín piloto de nitrógeno y el primer latiguillo de la línea de disparo (ver ejemplos en los
planos incluidos en el Anexo I). La unión no necesita elementos sellantes.
Este dispositivo solo se utiliza en baterías que utilizan botellín piloto. En baterías que no utilizan botellín piloto, la
función de este elemento es desarrollada por dispositivos semejantes integrados en otros componentes de la
batería.

5.3.7 LATIGUILLOS FLEXIBLES DE TEFLÓN PARA LÍNEA DE DISPARO.
MODELO FICHA TÉCNICA

1/4” X 350
DESCRIPCIÓN: 040
1/4” X 700
Latiguillos de teflón diámetro ¼” con terminales de latón utilizados para conducir el gas del sistema de disparo
desde los botellines piloto o cilindros máster hacia todos los cilindros auxiliares. Los latiguillos están diseñados
para una presión de trabajo de 260 bar y una presión de rotura de 780 bar. El radio mínimo de curvatura es de
30 mm y se suministran con dos longitudes 350 y 700 mm.
Figura 5.3.7.1. Latiguillo Flexible de Teflón

INSTALACIÓN:
Se montan entre los acoplamientos neumáticos de los cabezales de disparo. Intercalar los tornillos de
descompresión o las válvulas de despresurización según plano (Ver ejemplos en Anexo I). Asegurar las uniones
roscadas apretando con una llave fija sin añadir elementos sellantes. Añadir vaselina a la unión para facilitar la
unión roscada.
NOTA: Evitar retorcer los latiguillos durante las operaciones de INSTALACIÓN. para ello sujetar con un
alicate la cápsula de engarce mientras se aprieta la unión con una llave fija.
Figura 5.3.7.2. Latiguillo Flexible de Teflón en cabezal neumático

5.3.8 VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE + DISPARO MANUAL.
Ficha Técnica 083
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Dispositivo de activación eléctrica y manual para pilotaje de válvulas direccionales. Conjunto compuesto por una
válvula solenoide (1) + un disparador manual (2). La apertura manual permite el funcionamiento del sistema aún
en caso de fallo eléctrico. Es importante que cada válvula esté marcada con la zona que protege para evitar
cualquier confusión en caso de accionamiento manual. Tiene la función de seleccionar la válvula direccional que
debe ser abierta en baterías que cubran más de un riesgo. Para información adicional de la válvula solenoide
referirse al apartado 5.3.2. Para una mayor descripción del disparo manual de palanca referirse al apartado
5.3.3.
Figura. 5.3.8.1. Válvula Solenoide + Disparador Manual
INSTALACIÓN:
Estos dispositivos van siempre montados sobre un soporte fijado a pared a una altura cómoda para el
accionamiento manual. Posicionar la válvula de manera que el disparador manual siempre quede accesible. Fijar la
válvula al soporte mediante tornillos pasantes. Conectar una línea de tubo de cobre de 4 x 6 mm, desde el botellín
piloto a la entrada (3) y conectar la salida (4) a la válvula direccional que corresponda según el plano de la
instalación.
NOTA: Si se confunden las conexiones 3 y 4, la válvula direccional se abrirá independientemente de si la

válvula solenoide + disparo manual han sido activados o no.

Los conductos de cobre deben verse rectos o curvados a 90º. Observar que el tubo no esté dañado ni aplastado
en las curvas para no estrangular el paso de la presión. En tramos de longitud superior a 300 mm realizar una
curva de expansión en el medio, es decir, una circunferencia completa que amortigüe el golpe de ariete. El cierre
en las líneas de cobre se realiza mediante conexión bicono. La fijación del bicono al tubo de cobre debe realizarse
sobre un banco de trabajo y nunca en posición, ya que así se asegura una mordedura correcta del bicono sobre el
tubo evitando fugas. Una vez la conexión ha sido ajustada en el banco, montar en el circuito asegurando que el
tubo y el bicono llegan al fondo del acoplamiento y apretar la tuerca con llave fija.
Unión tipo Bicono Curva de Expansión

5.3.9 SISTEMA DE DISPARO CON RETARDADOR + SIRENA NEUMÁTICA.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Algunas instalaciones requieren completar el tiempo de retardo con una sirena neumática de preaviso de
descarga. En este caso, se instalará un conjunto retardador (1) + sirena (2).
Este conjunto requiere de un dispositivo derivador (3) para su correcto funcionamiento. La sirena se alimenta del
cilindro de la batería (4) durante el tiempo de retardo, hasta que la válvula del retardador se abre y el gas de la
línea de disparo entra en el derivador y corta el suministro de gas a la sirena. Al mismo tiempo, se abren el resto
de los cilindros y todo el agente extintor es descargado hacia el colector (5).
Los tubos de cobre (10, 11, 12) conectan el derivador, el retardador, el botellín piloto y la sirena. El conexionado
entre los elementos se puede realizar mediante diferentes configuraciones. Se pueden sustituir algunos tramos de
cobre por latiguillos flexibles de ¼” o sustituir la alargadera (8) por otro accesorio de conexión.
Figura. 5.3.9.1. Sistema de disparo con retardador + sirena neumática
INSTALACIÓN:
Para el montaje de configuraciones diferentes a la mostrada en la figura anterior, consultar el plano específico de
instalación.
Conectar el derivador (3) sobre la válvula de retención del primer cilindro de la batería. Conectar el latiguillo de
descarga al derivador y a continuación al cilindro. El latiguillo será para este cilindro un poco más corto (longitud
310 mm) que los restantes. Seguidamente, conectar el adaptador (8) a la boca de entrada al retardador y a la
reducción (9). Posteriormente, conectar el botellín piloto y el retardador mediante un adaptador.
Emplazar la sirena en su posición definitiva (siempre dentro del local protegido). Comprobar que en el puerto de
entrada a la sirena (6) se encuentra un diafragma roscado de 1 mm de diámetro. Excepto la unión entre el
adaptador (8) y la válvula del botellín piloto, el resto de conexiones roscadas deben ser selladas utilizando cinta de
Teflón (PTFE), teniendo cuidado de no cubrir nunca los primeros hilos de rosca para evitar obstrucciones en la
tubería.

Una vez fijados todos los componentes del conjunto, realizar las conexiones con tubo de cobre: desde la sirena
hasta el derivador (10), entre el adaptador y el primer cilindro de la batería (11) y entre el retardador y el
derivador (12). Los conductos de cobre deben verse rectos o curvados a 90º. Observar que el tubo no esté
dañado o aplastado en las curvas. En tramos de longitud superior a 300 mm realizar una curva de expansión en el
medio, es decir, una circunferencia completa que amortigüe el golpe de ariete. El cierre en las líneas de cobre se
realiza mediante un bicono. La fijación del bicono al tubo de cobre debe realizarse sobre un banco de trabajo y
nunca en posición, ya que así se asegura una mordedura correcta del bicono sobre el tubo evitando fugas.
Unión tipo Bicono Curva de expansión

5.3.10 SISTEMA DE DISPARO PARA VÁLVULAS DIRECCIONALES.
COMO REFERENCIA CONSULTAR EL PLANO N. 15042053 INCLUIDO EN EL ANEXO I.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
La instalación de válvulas direccionales (1,2) en el colector de descarga (3) permite cubrir varios riesgos con una
única batería de cilindros. El conexionado del sistema de disparo para válvulas direccionales depende del número
de válvulas direccionales y del número de cilindros que han de descargarse a través de cada válvula. Utilizar el
plano de instalación específico durante la instalación del sistema. En el ejemplo representado por la figura, la
batería cubre dos zonas con riesgo de incendio. Ambas zonas requieren para su protección los cuatro cilindros de
la batería. Una vez disparado el botellín piloto (6), el gas fluye hacia el conjunto válvula solenoide + disparador
manual (4,5).
• Cuando la válvula solenoide activada es la (4), el gas fluye hacia la direccional (1). La direccional se abre y
el gas continúa circulando por la línea de disparo hasta abrir los cuatro cilindros. El dióxido de carbono
(CO2) es descargado hacia el colector y sale por la válvula direccional abierta (1) hacia la red de tuberías
que conducen a la zona correspondiente.
• Cuando la válvula solenoide activada es la (5) el funcionamiento de la batería es análogo al caso anterior
pero la descarga se produce a través de la válvula direccional (2).
El conjunto válvula solenoide + disparador manual (4,5) puede ser accionado de forma eléctrica y manual. Es
importante que cada válvula esté marcada indicando de manera clara la zona que protege para evitar confusiones
en caso de accionamiento manual. Las conexiones entre el botellín piloto y los cilindros se realizan con tubo de
cobre (7). A la salida de la línea de disparo de las válvulas direccionales se encuentra dispuesta una válvula de
retención. La línea de disparo se complementa con un tornillo de descompresión (9) y una válvula de
despresurización (10).
Figura. 5.3.10.1. Sistema de disparo con válvulas direccionales.

INSTALACIÓN:
Una vez instalado el sistema de almacenamiento (herraje, cilindros, colector, direccionales y elementos de
conexión) se procede al montaje del sistema de disparo: Fijar el herraje del botellín piloto y sujetar el botellín (6).
Montar el soporte (11) y fijar el conjunto válvula solenoide + disparador manual (4,5).
Montar los cabezales de disparo neumáticos (12) en los cilindros. Montar la té de salida del botellín piloto, la
válvula de despresurización (10) y el tornillo de descompresión (9). Unir los cilindros mediante los latiguillos
flexibles (13). Finalmente, instalar la línea de tubo de cobre (7). Los conductos de cobre deben verse rectos o
curvados a 90º. Observar que el tubo no esté dañado ni aplastado en las curvas para evitar estrangular el paso de
la presión. En tramos de longitud superior a 300 mm realizar una curva de expansión en el medio, es decir, una
circunferencia completa que amortigüe el golpe de ariete. El cierre en las líneas de cobre se realiza mediante una
conexión bicono. La fijación del bicono al tubo de cobre debe realizarse sobre un banco de trabajo y nunca en
posición, ya que así se asegura una mordedura correcta del bicono sobre el tubo evitando fugas. Una vez ajustado
en banco, montar en el circuito asegurando que el tubo y el bicono llegan al fondo del acoplamiento y apretar la
tuerca con la ayuda de una llave fija.
Curva de expansión Unión tipo Bicono
En lo que concierne a la instalación eléctrica, es importante no confundir las conexiones eléctricas del conjunto
válvula solenoide + disparador manual (4 y 5). En caso de realizar una conexión errónea del conjunto, es posible
que la orden de extinción dada por el sistema de detección produzca la descarga de agente extintor en un riesgo
diferente al especificado. Por consiguiente, es necesario identificar cada bobina de solenoide.
IMPORTANTE: Es aconsejable que la longitud de los cables de las solenoides sea tal que no se pueda
confundir la posición de una con otra (el cable más largo será para la solenoide más alejada y el más corto
para la más cercana).

PRUEBA:
Durante la instalación de las válvulas direccionales, comprobar manualmente el recorrido de cada una de las
válvulas direccionales que componen el sistema. Para ello realizar movimientos de apertura y cierre para
comprobar que el recorrido de la válvula direccional es limpio y no golpea con partes móviles o fijas de obra civil o
del propio sistema (paredes, líneas de tubo de cobre, etc.).
s Para abrir/cerrar manualmente una válvula direccional LPG

La válvula dispone de una bieleta (1) conectada al pistón de la válvula.
En el extremo libre de la bieleta se conecta una palanca. Cuando la
palanca es accionada en sentido ascendente el pistón baja y la
direccional se abre. Para cerrar la direccional, accionar la palanca en
sentido descendente hasta que el pistón se introduzca en su
alojamiento hasta el tope.
LPG provee una palanca de este tipo para las direccionales que
suministra. Para evitar un efecto de vacio en el interior del pistón
neumático, desenroscar el tornillo de descompresión (2). Una vez
finalizado el test no olvidarse de enroscar el tornillo de descompresión
(2) otra vez.
PRUEBA NEUMÁTICA.
Referirse al esquema incluido al principio del presente apartado.
1. Desconectar la alimentación neumática entre las direccionales y los cabezales de disparo por el lado de
los cabezales. Realizar esta operación en todas las válvulas direccionales ya que de otra manera existe el
riesgo de provocar un disparo accidental.
2. Taponar el extremo libre de los conductos que alimentan a los cabezales de disparo.
3. Desconectar la alimentación neumática entre el botellín piloto (6) y el conjunto válvula solenoide +
disparador manual (4 o 5) por el lado del botellín. Conectar en su lugar una fuente de presión de
nitrógeno o aire comprimido limpio y seco tarado a unos 10-15 bar de presión.
4. Abrir lentamente el paso de la presión desde la fuente de presión. En ese momento la presión es retenida
por el conjunto válvula solenoide + disparador manual (4 y 5).
5. Si excitamos la bobina de una de las válvulas solenoides, como por ejemplo la (4) con la fuente de tensión
indicada, se debe observar que la válvula direccional asociada (1) se abre por efecto de la presión.
Comprobar en este momento la estanqueidad de ese circuito neumático con la ayuda de agua jabonosa.
6. Cortar el suministro de presión desde la fuente y despresurizar la línea mediante excitación de la válvula
solenoide probada (4). Para concluir la operación cerrar manualmente la válvula direccional con ayuda de
la palanca facilitada con el sistema.
7. Repetir el proceso con todas las válvulas direccionales del sistema.
8. Para concluir, dejar el sistema de disparo neumático conectado según esté especificado en los planos.
Prestar una especial atención para no confundir las conexiones entre las direccionales y los cilindros de la
batería.

5.3.11 VÁLVULA CUT-OFF.
Ficha Técnica Nº 165
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Válvula con contacto de vigilancia de posición que permite cortar la presión de pilotaje hacia los cilindros auxiliares
evitando descargas fortuitas durante el mantenimiento del sistema. Se instala intercalado entre el cilindro piloto o
master y los cilindros auxiliares. El dispositivo también incorpora un candado para bloqueo de la posición del
dispositivo.
Cuando está en la posición “MANTENIMIENTO” (marcado “ISOLATION” en la válvula) el circuito de disparo se
encuentra abierto al exterior de manera que no se puedan producir acumulaciones de presión peligrosas en el
mismo. Para disponer nuevamente el sistema en servicio se debe colocar la palanca en la posición “SERVICIO”
(marcado “OPERATION” en la válvula).
Figura. 5.3.11.1. Válvula Cut-off
INSTALACIÓN:
El dispositivo está preparado para ser alimentado a través de tubo de cobre de 4 x 6 mm tanto a la entrada como
a la salida. El botellín piloto se conecta por la conexión (1) y los cilindros auxiliares por la conexión (2) según indica
la flecha marcada en el cuerpo de la válvula.
La válvula se suministra preparada para ser fijada directamente a la pared. Antes de realizar su fijación, se debe
buscar la mejor posición en función de la posición del botellín piloto y la batería de cilindros.
El contacto de vigilancia (3) se suministra separado del cuerpo de la válvula y se fija con dos tornillos y tuercas
suministrados conjuntamente con la válvula. El conexionado eléctrico está representado sobre el cuerpo del
contacto.

5.4 SISTEMA DE DISTRIBUCIÓN.

Es el conjunto de tuberías y accesorios que conducen la descarga del gas desde los cilindros hasta la zona
protegida.
5.4.1 TUBERÍA Y ACCESORIOS.
• Las tuberías deben instalarse según el plano isométrico que se incluye en el proyecto. Deben respetarse
las medidas, dimensiones y calidades de las tuberías que se indican en el plano, puesto que un cambio
en las dimensiones o medidas de la tubería repercute en un mal funcionamiento del sistema. En caso de
ser necesaria alguna modificación, ésta debe ser previamente consultada a la Ingeniería que ha diseñado
el sistema.
• La tubería a utilizar debe ser de un material metálico no combustible, que posea unas propiedades físicas
y químicas tales que su deterioración por fatiga pueda ser prevista con fiabilidad. Cuando la tubería es
instalada en atmósferas especialmente corrosivas, se deben utilizar materiales o recubrimientos con una
resistencia especial a la corrosión.
• La tubería debe cumplir con los requisitos de presión de la tabla. Se recomienda tubería de acero sin
soldadura ASTM A-106 de grado A, B o C (de acuerdo con ANSI B-36-10) de las siguientes clases:
Tamaño tubería Sistema de Alta Presión

Presión Máxima de Trabajo Tipo de Tubería
¾” Sch 40 o superior
1”
1¼”
1½”
2” 140 bar Sch 80 o superior
2½”
3”
4”
• Los accesorios deben cumplir la norma ANSI/ASA 3000 y deben estar tarados por lo menos a 3000
lbs/in2.
• Conexión mediante accesorios roscados:
o Para tuberías de diámetro nominal inferior o igual a 2” no se realizarán soldaduras en posición.
Las conexiones que se realicen en posición serán roscadas.
o La instalación deberá estar puesta a tierra.
• El color de la pintura para la tubería será rojo (RAL 3000).

5.4.2 SOPORTES.
• Toda instalación debe tener como mínimo dos soportes que sujeten su tubería.
• La distancia máxima entre dos soportes a lo largo de la tubería nunca será superior a los valores
siguientes:
Diámetro Diámetro Distancia máxima

nominal (mm) nominal (pulgadas) entre soportes (m)
10 3/8 1’0
15 ½ 1’5
20 ¾ 1’8
25 1 2’1
32 1¼ 2’4
40 1½ 2’7
50 2 3’4
65 2½ 3’5
80 3 3’7
100 4 4’3
• Cuando la tubería sea superior a 2 pulgadas (DN 50) y no se puedan respetar las distancias de la tabla
por motivos estructurales, estas distancias se pueden ampliar hasta 6 m entre soportes, siempre que
éstos sean dobles.
• Los soportes de la tubería deben situarse cercanos a las uniones de la tubería, a los codos, a los
difusores y a los cambios de sentido de la tubería.
• Los soportes deberán unir la red de tuberías directamente a la estructura del edificio y no utilizarse para
soportar otros objetos. Las partes del edificio sobre las que se fijen los soportes deben ser lo
suficientemente resistentes como para soportar la carga (ver carga de diseño en la tabla). De no ser así,
se deben fijar tirantes adicionales a otros elementos resistentes. Sólo las tuberías de diámetro nominal
inferior o igual a 50 mm podrán fijarse a estructuras metálicas en forma de cerchas o losas de hormigón
(el diseño deberá ser aprobado por las autoridades). Los tacos en losas de hormigón deberán estar
situados por lo menos a 150 mm del borde de la losa.
• La distancia entre el difusor y su soporte deberá ser lo más corta posible:
o Para tubería de diámetro inferior o igual a 25 mm, la distancia máxima del último soporte al
difusor será de 100 mm.
o Para tubería de diámetro superior a 25 mm, la distancia máxima del último soporte al difusor
será de 250 mm.
• Se recomienda soportes tipo “cuelgue pera” o abarcones. Las abrazaderas y otros elementos de soporte
deberán rodear totalmente el tubo y ser cerrados.

• Los soportes deberán cumplir los siguientes requisitos mínimos de sección y profundidad de anclaje:
Carga Sección mínima Tamaño Profundidad mínima para

Diámetro nominal
de diseño de los soportes de rosca anclaje con tacos en
de la tubería
(N) (mm ) 2
(métrica) hormigón (mm)
Hasta DN 50 (2”) 2000 30 8 30
Entre DN 50 (2”) y DN 100

3500 50 10 40
(4”)
Entre DN 100 (4”) y DN
5000 70 12 40
150 (6”)
8500 125 16 50
200 (8”)
10000 150 20 60
250 (10”)
• La sección transversal mínima de los soportes no deberá ser inferior a 30 mm2.

• El material de los soportes deberá ser como mínimo de 3 mm de espesor. Si están galvanizados, bastará
con 2’5 mm de espesor. En el caso de soportes galvanizados en caliente, las dimensiones mínimas serán
de 25 mm x 1’5 mm para tuberías hasta un diámetro nominal de 50 mm (2”), y de 12 mm x 1’5 mm
para modelos aprobados.
A modo de ejemplo se incluyen los siguientes tipos de soporte.
SOPORTE FIJACIÓN HORIZONTAL PARED
SOPORTE FALSO SUELO

SOPORTE FIJO FALSO SUELO SOPORTE FALSO SUELO
SOPORTE FIJO SUELO
SOPORTE SUSPENDIDO TECHO SOPORTE FIJO SUSPENDIDO TECHO

5.4.3 DIFUSORES.
Ficha Técnica N.015.
DESCRIPCIÓN:
Son las boquillas a través de las cuales el gas es descargado hacia el interior del recinto protegido. Está
compuesto por un cabezal de latón (1) con 4 orificios laterales y un orificio central calibrado según cálculos
hidráulicos, y un cono metálico externo (2) para direccionar la descarga de gas.
Figura 5.4.3.1. Difusor para dióxido de carbono (CO )

2
La calibración del orificio central no debe ser inferior a 1 mm . Cuando el diámetro de calibrado es de 3 mm o
inferior, el difusor deberá estar provisto de un filtro interno para prevenir la obstrucción del mismo. Para
diámetros de orificio superiores no es necesario la disposición de este filtro.
INSTALACIÓN:
El difusor ha sido diseñado para ser instalado directamente a la tubería. Añadir pasta sellante de roscas o cinta de
teflón a la rosca de la tubería de distribución, conectar el difusor y apretar con llave fija.
ACEPTADO PROHIBIDO
NOTA: Es muy importante la buena sujeción de los difusores y que su orientación nunca sea hacia falsos
techos ni partes móviles, ya que la salida del gas podría levantar las placas del techo o arrastrar objetos.
Nunca deberá colocarse el difusor directamente en la boca de descarga de la válvula del cilindro.
Para evitar errores durante la instalación, todos los difusores deben incorporar inscripciones legibles y duraderas
que detallen el diámetro calibrado del diafragma y un identificador de su posición en el plano con respecto al
proyecto y cálculos hidráulicos del sistema. Normalmente LPG realiza un grabado mecánico (punzonado) con las
inscripciones descritas sobre el cuerpo de los difusores.

5.5 INSTALACIÓN ELÉCTRICA.
TODA INSTALACIÓN CONTRA INCENDIOS HA DE POSEER UN TOMA DE CONEXIÓN A TIERRA.
Tras realizar el montaje neumático de la instalación se debe, con la tapa superior del cabezal de la válvula piloto
desmontado, realizar la conexión eléctrica de los componentes que lo requieran. Cuando la alimentación de estos
componentes se realice a través de una central de control, se recomienda leer atentamente las instrucciones de
instalación de la central para evitar el accionamiento accidental de los dispositivos eléctricos que, en algunos
casos, puede causar la completa descarga de la batería.
NOTA: Los componentes eléctricos de LPG no tienen polaridad. Todas las conexiones eléctricas se deben
realizar de forma que los cables lleguen exactamente al dispositivo para evitar que se confundan los cables
en posteriores puestas en marcha y operaciones de mantenimiento.
CONEXIÓN ELÉCTRICA DEL CONTACTOR DE PASO CON ENCLAVAMIENTO:
Para circuito normalmente cerrado conectar a los terminales 21 y 22. Para circuito normalmente abierto
conectar a los terminales 13 y 14.
NOTA: La alimentación sólo deberá realizarse en el momento de detección de incendio ya que esto dará
lugar a la descarga de los cilindros. Asegurarse de que la alimentación a la solenoide está cortada durante
la conexión eléctrica

CONEXIÓN ELÉCTRICA DE LA SOLENOIDE:
Voltaje Nominal : 24 VDC

Consumo en frío: 13 W
Consumo en caliente: 10 W
Conectar a tierra.
2
+
1
3
NOTA: Una vez se ha realizado el montaje de toda la instalación, se deben montar las tapas superiores
de las válvulas pilotos.
CONEXIÓN ELÉCTRICA DEL PRESOSTATO:

5.6 REQUISITOS FINALES SOBRE LA INSTALACIÓN.

• Todos los cilindros, incluyendo los pilotos, deben incorporar una etiqueta adhesiva con su número de
identificación (coincidente con el que está grabado en su ojiva), peso bruto, neto y fecha de carga.
• La pintura de todos los componentes debe estar en perfecto estado. Repintar las áreas donde la pintura
haya sufrido daños. En el caso de existir óxidos sanear la superficie, aplicar capa de imprimación para
metales y terminar con una capa de pintura de acabado. Los colores del sistema contra incendios dióxido
de carbono (CO2) son: RAL 9011 negro para el cuerpo, RAL 7023 gris para la ojiva y RAL 3000 rojo para
la tubería.
• Cada batería de cilindros debe estar identificada con un cartel que indique:
o Riesgo protegido
o Precauciones
o Instrucciones de uso y accionamiento manual
• Los carteles deben estar fijados de forma sólida y visible a elementos fijos y deben ser resistentes a los
fenómenos climatológicos y ambientales a los que puedan estar sujetos (polvo, suciedad, etc).
• El manómetro del cilindro piloto debe indicar una lectura precisa de la presión.
• La válvula CUT-OFF debe estar en su posición correcta de trabajo.
• Ningún fallo o alarma del sistema debe estar presente en el panel de control.

6 PUESTA A PUNTO DEL SISTEMA.

Un sistema de extinción de incendios dióxido de carbono (CO2) debe ser inspeccionado y probado por personal
competente durante la puesta a punto del sistema, tras la fase de instalación. Además, se debe seguir un
calendario de inspecciones y de mantenimiento del sistema. La finalidad de la inspección periódica es la de
asegurar que el sistema esté en todo momento en perfectas condiciones de funcionamiento. Sirve también para
identificar problemas debidos al envejecimiento, daños accidentales y de entorno, manipulación no autorizada,
cambios de contenido del volumen protegido, de usos, de aberturas que se comunican con los locales, y en general
todos aquellos factores que pudieran afectar negativamente el rendimiento previsto del sistema de extinción.
6.1 RECEPCIÓN Y PUESTA A PUNTO DEL SISTEMA.
La puesta a punto del sistema de extinción consiste en una inspección de la instalación para evaluar la
conformidad del sistema instalado respecto al sistema proyectado y a la ejecución de una serie de pruebas que
garantizan el correcto funcionamiento del sistema de extinción.
En el presente documento sólo se recogen operaciones de puesta a punto e inspección sobre baterías y sistemas
de extinción. Para las operaciones de puesta a punto del sistema de detección consultar al proveedor o fabricante.
La inspección de recepción y la puesta a punto del sistema debe ser realizada por personal instruido en sistemas
de extinción.
Estudiar detalladamente la conexión de la batería y en especial el sistema de disparo.
Ocasionalmente se utiliza un único sistema de disparo para comandar la descarga de varias baterías que incluso
pueden estar ubicadas en lugares distantes. Se recomienda estudiar atentamente los planos de la instalación, que
muestran los esquemas de conexión y disparo de las baterías estándar LPG; en el caso de la puesta a punto de
una batería no estándar es necesario estudiar el plano que se suministra junto con los componentes de la batería.
Las pruebas a realizar para la puesta a punto del sistema deben seguir los pasos que se describen en el
presente manual ya que un fallo en la ejecución puede provocar la descarga fortuita del sistema. No se deben
realizar pruebas sobre componentes del sistema de extinción que no estén descritas en el presente manual.
Durante la ejecución de las pruebas todo personal ajeno a la puesta a punto debe ser desalojado del área de
almacenamiento de los cilindros y del área o las áreas protegidas por la batería.
Para la manipulación de componentes sometidos a presión deben utilizarse guantes y máscara de protección.
6.1.1 REVISIÓN DE COMPONENTES.
Tras la instalación de un sistema dióxido de carbono (CO2) se debe proceder a la inspección del sistema. Consiste
en la realización de una revisión de los componentes, en la que se inspecciona el estado de los mismos, su
correcta conexión y que la instalación esté conforme a proyecto.
En la lista de comprobación del Anexo III: Lista de Comprobación para Recepción de Instalaciones se incluyen
todas las comprobaciones a realizar sobre los componentes.
6.1.2 OPERACIONES DE PUESTA A PUNTO Y PRUEBAS DE FUNCIONAMIENTO.
Para la puesta a punto, se aconseja realizar la totalidad de las pruebas que se describen a continuación. Algunas
de estas pruebas se realizan también durante las operaciones de mantenimiento (ver calendario en apartado 7.
Mantenimiento). El material suministrado por LPG es sometido a controles de calidad en fábrica por lo que las
pruebas siguientes constituyen un complemento que asegura el correcto funcionamiento del sistema de extinción
y evita posibles fallos cometidos durante el montaje.

6.1.3 BARRIDO CON NITRÓGENO.

Un barrido de la instalación con nitrógeno (u otro gas adecuado) asegura la limpieza del interior de la tubería y
delata obstrucciones en la tubería o en los difusores. El flujo de nitrógeno debe ser continuo. Para efectuar el
barrido, seguir los siguientes pasos:
• Retirar la tapa superior de la válvula del cilindro máster o del botellín piloto.
• Retirar el contactor de paso con enclavamiento del colector.
• Conectar en el puerto liberado del colector, un cilindro de nitrógeno seco con salida regulada a 15 bar de
presión según esquema adjunto:
• Desmontar todos los difusores que penden de la red a barrer. Para su reinstalación posterior, es muy
importante disponer de los planos isométricos o el documento de proyecto donde se especifique la
colocación de cada difusor, ya que los diámetros interiores calibrados son diferentes para cada uno de
ellos.
• Tapar todos los extremos de tubería libre excepto uno.
• Abrir la válvula del cilindro de nitrógeno. Abrir la válvula de bola puesta en la salida del cilindro de
nitrógeno y mantener el barrido durante 5 segundos aproximadamente.
NOTA: La salida de presión por el extremo libre es peligrosa. Comprobar que no hay personal en el interior
de la sala y desalojar o fijar elementos que por efecto de la presión pudieran salir despedidos.
La realización de esta prueba puede producir nubes de polvo por la salida libre pueden ser proyectados
residuos líquidos y sólidos.
• Repetir la operación liberando cada vez un extremo de tubería diferente y tapando todos los demás, hasta
completar todos los extremos.
• Extraer todos los tapones y colocar los difusores en su posición original.
• Desconectar el cilindro de nitrógeno y conectar de nuevo el contactor de paso con enclavamiento.
• Instalar la tapa superior de la válvula del cilindro máster o del botellín piloto.

6.1.4 PRUEBA NEUMÁTICA DE ESTANQUEIDAD PARA TUBERÍAS ABIERTAS.

Esta prueba verifica la estanqueidad de la tubería de distribución.
¿Cuándo realizar esta prueba?

Siempre, a menos que:
- Se hayan realizado otras pruebas sobre la tubería que garanticen su estanqueidad
- La red de distribución sea muy sencilla, con no más de un accesorio que cambie la
dirección del flujo entre el colector y el difusor.
Limitaciones: En caso de que la temperatura a la que se encuentra la tubería sufriera variaciones
superiores a 10 º C durante los 10 minutos de prueba los resultados de esta prueba no serían fiables.
• Retirar la tapa superior de la válvula del cilindro máster o del botellín piloto.
• Retirar el contactor de paso con enclavamiento del colector.
• Sobre el colector, conectar en el puerto del contactor un cilindro de nitrógeno (u otro gas adecuado
limpio y seco) con salida regulada a 3 – 5 bar. Intercalar una Té con una válvula de esfera (escape) PN-16
de ½” o ¼”.
• Desmontar todos los difusores que penden de la red a probar. Para su reinstalación posterior, es muy
importante disponer de los planos isométricos o el documento de proyecto donde se especifique la
colocación de cada difusor, ya que los diámetros interiores calibrados son diferentes para cada uno de
ellos.
• Tapar todos los extremos de tubería libres excepto uno.
• Conectar al extremo libre un manómetro 0-10 bar o un dispositivo registrador de la presión. El registro
de presión puede ser continuo o realizarse únicamente al inicio y al final de la prueba.
• Presurizar lentamente la tubería con 3 – 5 bar de presión. Esperar 10 minutos y registrar el valor inicial
de la presión. Cortar el suministro de presión, manteniendo la presurización durante 10 minutos. Una vez
transcurridos los diez minutos, registrar de nuevo la presión.
¿Se ha superado la prueba?

La presión registrada al finalizar la prueba debe ser como mínimo el 80% de la presión registrada al
inicio. Si no es así, buscar las fugas del sistema: con la tubería presurizada, comprobar con agua
jabonosa las uniones de la tubería y los accesorios. Si no se encuentra la fuga, despresurizar y repasar
las uniones roscadas. Repetir la prueba.

• Despresurizar el sistema mediante la válvula de escape intercalado en la conexión de nitrógeno.

• Desconectar la alimentación de nitrógeno y conectar de nuevo el contactor de paso con enclavamiento.
• Desconectar el medidor de presión y destapar los extremos de tubería libres. Colocar los difusores en su
posición original.
• Instalar la tapa superior de la válvula del cilindro máster o del botellín piloto.
6.1.5 PRUEBA DE FUNCIONAMIENTO DEL CONTACTOR DE PASO CON ENCLAVAMIENTO.

Esta prueba se debe realizar una vez el contactor de paso está conectado (al colector y a la central de alarmas) y
no va a ser desconectado de nuevo. Realizar de nuevo esta prueba en caso de desconectar el contactor para
operaciones de mantenimiento o por cualquier otro motivo.
• Quitar la tapa de la caja del sistema eléctrico
• Extraer el cuerpo eléctrico de la caja sin desconectar el cableado. Con ayuda de un bolígrafo o una varilla,
presionar el pistón inferior hasta que los bornes superiores de la caja queden cortocircuitados por la
varilla de contacto. Comprobar que la central de control recibe la señal de alarma correspondiente.
• Introducir de nuevo el cuerpo del contactor en la caja, poner la tapa de la caja y rearmar el contactor de
paso.
Rearme del contactor de paso con enclavamiento LPG.

Para rearmar el dispositivo sólo es necesario tirar de la esfera que incorpora el sistema de
enclavamiento.

6.1.6 PRUEBA DE ESTANQUEIDAD DEL CIRCUITO DE DISPARO.

• Quitar la tapa superior de la válvula del cilindro máster o del botellín piloto.
• Desconectar el latiguillo (o tubo de cobre) que alimenta el cabezal de disparo del primer cilindro auxiliar:
• Desconectar los cabezales de disparo de las válvulas de los cilindros auxiliares. Con el cabezal en la mano,
extraer el conjunto pistón-aguja empujando con un alicate.
• Voltear el conjunto pistón-aguja e introducirlo de nuevo en el cabezal hasta que haga tope, con la aguja
apuntando hacia la parte más estrecha del cabezal. Volver a montar los cabezales sobre las válvulas con
el pistón volteado.
Atención: Es muy importante realizar esta operación en cada cilindro para evitar la descarga del
mismo durante la realización del test.
• Aplicar una fuente de presión de 50 bar en el extremo libre de la línea de latiguillos (en la figura). Se
recomienda un cilindro de nitrógeno con manorreductor, intercalando un Té con una válvula de escape
(PN-60 de ½” o ¼”).

• Presurizar la línea. Comprobar con agua jabonosa la estanqueidad de los latiguillos y que no exista salida
de gas por el orificio de la parte superior de la válvula de los cilindros auxiliares (sin tapa superior).
• Despresurizar y volver a colocar el conjunto pistón-aguja de cada cabezal en su posición original.
NOTA: Antes de montar el cabezal sobre la válvula es importante comprobar que el pistón se encuentra
totalmente retraído dentro del cabezal. Esto se realiza empujando con un destornillador. El extremo de la
aguja percutora no debe sobresalir de la tuerca.
• Conectar de nuevo el primer cilindro de la batería con la línea proveniente del botellín piloto.
• Instalar la tapa de lasválvula del cilindro máster o del botellín piloto.

6.1.7 PRUEBA DE FUNCIONAMIENTO DE LAS VÁLVULAS SOLENOIDES DE DISPARO EN

CILINDROS MÁSTER.
• Estudiar detenidamente sobre planos o sobre la instalación el circuito eléctrico que alimenta a las válvulas
solenoides de los cilindros máster.
COMPROBACIÓN SOBRE CILINDROS MÁSTER O AUTÓNOMOS CON VÁLVULA LPG 128-20, LPG 128-90.
NOTA: Los dibujos muestran la válvula LPG-128-90.
• Retirar la tapa superior de la válvula del cilindro.
• Quitar la tuerca dispuesta sobre la bobina de la solenoide y extraer esta última de su alojamiento sobre el
vástago central. Extraer todas las bobinas de las válvulas solenoide pertenecientes a un mismo sistema
de disparo. Es muy importante asegurarse de que todas están fuera de su emplazamiento a fin de evitar
que durante la prueba se pueda producir una descarga accidental.
• Ejecutar un disparo eléctrico desde la central de incendios para excitar la bobina.

• Una vez excitada la bobina, introducir por su orificio central un elemento adecuado fácilmente
magnetizable (por ejemplo un destornillador no muy pesado). Se comprueba el buen funcionamiento de la
misma si se produce un campo magnético que retiene el objeto metálico introducido en el orificio de la
bobina.

• Repetir la operación con cada una de las válvulas solenoides de un mismo sistema de disparo.
• Para evitar accidentes, antes de colocar de nuevo cada bobina sobre su vástago (es muy importante no
confundir la posición de las mismas) comprobar con el mismo objeto metálico que en el orificio de la
bobina no quedan restos de magnetismo que puedan activar la válvula.
IMPORTANTE: Es aconsejable que la longitud de los cables de las solenoides sea tal que no se pueda
confundir la posición de una con otra (el cable más largo será para la solenoide más alejada y el más
corto para la más cercana).
• Colocar muy lentamente la bobina sobre el vástago central. En el caso de que queden restos de
magnetismo se producirá una fuga controlada por la parte superior de la válvula del cilindro máster. Si
esto sucede retirar rápidamente la bobina para interrumpir la fuga. La fuga producida demuestra que la
solenoide todavía está siendo alimentada. Cortar esa alimentación.
Comprobar estanqueidad
aplicando agua jabonosa
sobre el orificio
• Si por cualquier motivo se produjera una fuga controlada por la parte superior de la válvula principal y la
misma fuera difícil de eliminar, para evitar la lenta descarga del cilindro proceder a realizar con la bobina
excitada 2 o 3 rápidas colocaciones (pulsos de no más de 1 segundo de duración) sobre el vástago para
intentar eliminarla. Si la misma no es controlable ponerse en contacto con el servicio técnico de LPG
Técnicas en Extinción de Incendios, S.A.
• Una vez colocada la bobina sobre el vástago, colocar de nuevo la tuerca hexagonal que la sujeta y la tapa
superior de la válvula.

NOTA: Si por cualquier motivo se decide SEPARAR DEL CUERPO DE LA VÁLVULA PRINCIPAL EL
VÁSTAGO* de una válvula solenoide, es imperativo desconectar primero el manómetro de la válvula
principal del cilindro máster. Esta maniobra corta el paso de presión a la válvula solenoide. PRECAUCIÓN:
EL CILINDRO SE ENCUENTRA CARGADO A ALTA PRESIÓN. Ver 5.2.1, 5.2.2, 5.3.8 para mayor
información
En caso de disfunción, LPG recomienda no desmontar el vástago sino enviar el conjunto cilindro máster +
válvula + solenoide para su verificación.
* O la tapa que hay instalada en la misma posición en los cilindros máster.

7 MANTENIMIENTO.
Los sistemas de extinción dióxido de carbono (CO2) deben estar sometidos a un programa de mantenimiento
preventivo que garantice su correcto funcionamiento en caso de incendio. El programa y operaciones de
mantenimiento deben cumplir con las normativas aplicables en el país o región donde se instala el sistema. En el
presente apartado se toman como base las Leyes Españolas aplicables para el mantenimiento de la instalación.
Como fabricante, LPG aconseja a todos los titulares o usuarios finales de sus sistemas que como mínimo exijan la
realización de las operaciones de mantenimiento recogidas en el presente manual.
Tanto el jefe de seguridad como el personal encargado de realizar el mantenimiento debe estar instruido en el
funcionamiento del sistema, en las condiciones de seguridad requeridas para el mantenimiento, en los efectos del
agente extintor dióxido de carbono (CO2) sobre las personas y sobre los bienes. Deberán también conocer y poder
acceder a los planos de conexionado del sistema, al proyecto de diseño, al historial de mantenimiento y al historial
de inspecciones, incluida la inspección de recepción.
Durante las operaciones de mantenimiento que requieran efectuar cualquiera de las pruebas descritas en el
apartado 6. Puesta a punto del sistema, se debe utilizar máscara de protección y guantes.
En el caso de que el sistema dióxido de carbono (CO2) esté proyectado para incluir un sistema de aborto de
disparo (Caja de Mantenimiento LPG o válvula CUT-OFF) antes de cada operación de mantenimiento dejar dicho
sistema en la posición de “MANTENIMIENTO” (ISOLATION). En esta posición de la válvula, la descarga del botellín
piloto es conducida hacia una vía de escape exterior al sistema evitando la activación de la batería. La salida de la
vía de escape debe estar instalada en una zona segura en el exterior del área de almacenamiento. Al finalizar las
operaciones de mantenimiento no olvidar volver a situar la válvula de aborto de disparo en su posición de servicio.
EXIGENCIAS REQUERIDAS POR LAS NORMATIVAS PARA EL CORRECTO MANTENIMIENTO DE LAS
INSTALACIONES DE DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO2).
Dado que los sistemas dióxido de carbono (CO2) son elementos para la lucha contra incendios, a nivel nacional
(España), los mismos están recogidos dentro del marco de aplicación del Reglamento de Instalaciones y Aparatos
Contra Incendios (R.D. 1942/1993). En el Anexo III se incluye extracto de los puntos más relevantes del
Reglamento en cuanto al mantenimiento de los sistemas. Como resumen, esta normativa especifica lo siguiente:
1º) El responsable último del mantenimiento de la instalación es el usuario final o el titular de la misma.
2º) En todos los casos, tanto el servicio de mantenimiento, como el usuario o titular de la instalación,
conservarán constancia documental del cumplimiento del programa de mantenimiento preventivo, indicando,
como mínimo: las operaciones efectuadas, el resultado de las verificaciones y pruebas y la sustitución de
elementos defectuosos que se hayan realizado. Las anotaciones deberán llevarse al día y estarán a disposición de
los servicios oficiales de inspección correspondientes.
3º) Las operaciones de mantenimiento trimestrales establecidas en el reglamento pueden ser realizadas
directamente por el usuario o titular de la instalación sin ser precisa la participación de servicios de
mantenimiento oficiales externos.
LPG ha elaborado un programa de mantenimiento que cumple con todas las especificaciones del Reglamento de
Instalaciones y Aparatos Contra Incendios ampliado con otras operaciones de mantenimiento que LPG
recomienda como fabricante. Este programa especifica los siguientes plazos y operaciones:
TRIMESTRALMENTE:
a) Comprobar el estado general de la instalación mediante la lista del Anexo III Lista de comprobación para
inspección rutinaria de instalaciones de extinción de incendios dióxido de carbono (CO2).
b) Comprobar que los carteles indentificativos de la instalación, los carteles de uso y precauciones, así como las
pegatinas de los cilindros se encuentran en su emplazamiento correcto.
c) El atuendo de seguridad para la manipulación y mantenimiento del sistema está en perfectas condiciones.
d) Realizar un examen general de las válvulas de retención, conexiones, que no existan obstrucciones que
impidan su perfecto funcionamiento y limpieza general.
ANUALMENTE:
a) Difusores: en ambientes muy polvorientos, comprobar que los orificios de salida no están obstruidos.
b) Disparos: efectuar prueba de funcionamiento sobre las válvulas solenoides. La prueba está descrita en el
apartado 6.1.7. del presente manual.
c) Alarmas: comprobar el funcionamiento óptico y acústico de los dispositivos eléctricos de alarma, dando la
orden desde la central de control. Comprobar el funcionamiento del contactor de paso con enclavamiento
según la prueba descrita en el apartado 6.1.5.

CADA DOS AÑOS:

a) En ambientes especialmente sucios o polvorientos efectuar un barrido de la tubería de distribución con
nitrógeno seco, según se describe en el apartado 6.1.3.
CADA DIEZ AÑOS:
a) Proceder al retimbrado de los cilindros de la batería (cilindros auxiliares y botellines piloto), según establece el
Ministerio de Industria y Energía en su Reglamento de Aparatos a Presión, Instrucción Técnica
Complementaria MIE AP-7 o aplicable.
b) Realizar prueba hidráulica de los latiguillos y del colector para comprobar si se conserva la estanqueidad. Esta
prueba consiste en someter ambos componentes a un ensayo hidráulico, presurizando hasta 1’5 veces la
presión de trabajo del componente.
Cualquier operación de reparación o mantenimiento realizada fuera del calendario anterior debe completarse con
la comprobación de inspección rutinaria del Anexo III.
CADA QUINCE AÑOS:
a) LPG recomienda realizar una inspección visual de las elementos sellantes desmontando la válvula y
reemplazándolas cuando sea necesario según los resultados de la inspección.

8 USO DE LA INSTALACIÓN.
8.1 FUNCIONAMIENTO GENERAL DEL SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN.
El siguiente esquema muestra una instalación típica de dióxido de carbono (CO2):
Pos Descripción Pos Descripción

1 Cilindro auxiliar 7 Panel de control
2 Válvula LPG 8 Pulsador de paro de la
descarga
3 Cilindro Máster 9 Pulsador de disparo de la
descarga
4 Colector de descarga 10 Alarma luminosa
5 Difusor 11 Contactor de paso con
enclavamiento
6 Detectores

8.2 CONSIDERACIONES GENERALES DE SEGURIDAD.

Los sistemas de dióxido de carbono (CO2) han sido diseñados para ser actuados mediante los siguientes métodos
de actuación:
- Operación automática: Una señal eléctrica produce la descarga del cilindro máster (3) para iniciar el
proceso de descarga.
- Operación manual: La descarga es activada por actuación sobre el disparo manual de palanca instalado
en el botellín piloto o cilindro máster (3).
La señal automática proviene de los detectores de incendio (6). Estos detectores, en caso de incendio, actúan
enviando una señal al panel de control (7) cuando el fuego es detectado dentro del riesgo.
El panel de control inicia entonces el protocolo de extinción de incendios. Dicho protocolo puede ser diferente para
cada instalación pero siempre incluye, como mínimo, la actuación de las señales de alarma (sirenas, dispositivos
visuales, ...) durante el tiempo de retardo, el cual generalmente dura 30 segundos. Este tiempo de retardo
permite la evacuación del personal de la zona protegida donde están actuando las señales visuales/acústicas
de alarma.
Simultáneamente, el panel de control envía una señal para la apertura de la válvula del cilindro máster (3). A partir
de este momento, es IMPOSIBLE DETENER LA DESCARGA DE AGENTE, la cual se produce inminentemente.
Es recomendable realizar simulacros de evacuación del personal que ocupa la zona protegida con dióxido de
carbono (CO2) durante los 30 s del tiempo de retardo.
El tubo donde se recoge el gas de todos los cilindros recibe el nombre de colector de descarga (4). En el colector
se encuentra un contactor de paso (11) que envía una señal a la central para indicar que la descarga del agente
extintor se ha iniciado.
El gas circula por el sistema de tuberías hasta llegar a los difusores (5) y es expulsado a gran velocidad hacia el
incendio.
También es posible la activación manual del sistema por el Pulsador Manual de descarga (9). Este dispositivo solo
debe ser utilizado UNA VEZ QUE LA SALA HA SIDO DESALOJADA. La utilización de este dispositivo implica el
mismo protocolo funcional descrito para la activación por el sistema automático de detección de incendios. Si
transcurrido el tiempo de retardo no se ha producido la descarga, activar la batería manualmente (ver 8.6
Actuación en caso de fallo de la activación automática del sistema de extinción).
El gas sale a gran velocidad a través de los difusores, por lo que las vías de evacuación de la sala deben disponerse
en lo posible fuera del alcance directo del difusor. La fuerza con que sale el agente extintor no es suficiente para
levantar objetos pesados (ordenadores, mesas, armarios, máquinas...) ni personas pero sí para levantar papeles,
libros livianos y partes móviles que se encuentren cerca de la salida del difusor. Se debe evitar colocar objetos
livianos y partes móviles en lugares comprendidos dentro del alcance del difusor.
Tanto el recinto protegido por la instalación como el área de almacenamiento de los cilindros deben estar
convenientemente señalizados. Deberán disponerse carteles explicativos con las instrucciones de actuación en
caso de alarma de incendio. En el área de almacenamiento deberán disponerse instrucciones para la activación
manual del sistema incluyendo el requisito de que se compruebe antes que el área a proteger ha sido desalojada
(ver 8.6 Actuación en caso de fallo de la activación automática del sistema de extinción).
En la sala protegida también deben existir carteles que informen a sus ocupantes sobre el tipo de protección con
que cuenta la sala y modos de actuación en caso de incendio. Todos estos carteles deben ser legibles y
resistentes a las condiciones del entorno. Se aconseja la realización de etiquetas adhesivas con fondo rojo o verde
y letra blanca. Los carteles deberían incorporar como mínimo los siguientes mensajes:
Letreros colocados en el interior del local protegido:
-ATENCIÓN-
LOCAL PROTEGIDO CON SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN
EN CASO DE ALARMA ABANDONAR EL LOCAL

Letreros colocados en el exterior del local protegido:
-ATENCIÓN-
LOCAL PROTEGIDO CON SISTEMA DE EXTINCIÓN
EN CASO DE DESCARGA NO ENTRAR
HASTA VENTILAR EL LOCAL
Letreros colocados en lugares próximos al local protegido:
-ATENCIÓN-
LA DESCARGA DE AGENTE EXTINTOR EN LOCAL
PROXIMO PUEDE PRODUCIR UNA ATMOSFERA
IRRESPIRABLE EN ESTA ZONA ABANDONAR EL
AREA EN CASO DE ALARMA
Letreros colocados en todos los dispositivos de activación manual del sistema:
-ATENCIÓN-
LA ACTUACIÓN DE ESTE DISPOSITIVO
PRODUCIRÁ LA ACTIVACIÓN DEL SISTEMA DE
EXTINCIÓN ANTES DE ACTIVARLO ASEGURARSE QUE
TODO EL PERSONAL HA ABANDONADO EL LOCAL
Para una mejor acción extintora se debe evitar toda entrada de aire que pueda reavivar el fuego. Una vez finalizada
la descarga se debe esperar un mínimo de 30 minutos antes de activar la ventilación de la sala, con el fin de evitar
la reignición del incendio. Es aconsejable la presencia de una brigada contra incendios en el momento de activar la
ventilación de la sala.

8.3 USO MANUAL DE LOS DISPOSITIVOS.
Operaciones manuales tras una activación:
Las siguientes operaciones deben ser siempre realizadas manualmente tras una descarga (ver 8.5 Actuación
tras la descarga de la batería).
1. Rearme del contactor de paso con enclavamiento.
2. Descompresión de la línea de disparo.
Operaciones manuales en caso de fallo del sistema automático:
En previsión de un fallo del sistema automático de descarga o de disfunción de alguno de sus componentes, LPG
ha diseñado sus sistemas para permitir un accionamiento manual (ver 8.4 Actuación en caso de fallo de la
activación automática del sistema de extinción). Se incluyen las siguientes operaciones:
- Accionamiento del disparo manual de palanca.

8.3.1 REARME DEL CONTACTOR DE PASO CON ENCLAVAMIENTO.
Desenclavar el contactor de paso tirando de la esfera (1)
El contactor se encuentra en el área de almacenamiento montado sobre el tubo colector de descarga.
8.3.2 ACCIONAMIENTO DEL DISPARO MANUAL DE PALANCA Y DISPARO MANUAL NEUMÁTICO.
El disparo manual de palanca se encuentra en la válvula del botella piloto o cilindro máster de la instalación, así
como en los cilindros autónomos.
Para actuar, retirar de un tirón el precinto (3). La palanca (1) debe ser accionada con fuerza hacia atrás y hacia
abajo. Los botellines piloto de nitrógeno están presurizados a 100 bar, por lo cual hay un cierto retorno de la
palanca.

8.3.3 ACTUACIÓN MANUAL DEL CONJUNTO VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE + DISPARO MANUAL.
En sistemas con válvulas direccionales, la abertura de las mismas es controlada mediante el conjunto válvula
solenoide + disparo manual.
Para actuar el sistema, extraer la anilla (1). Accionar la palanca (2) con fuerza hacia atrás y hacia abajo.
8.3.4 DISPOSITIVO DE ABORTO DEL TIEMPO DE RETARDO.
En sistemas equipados con dispositivos de retardo de la descarga, el botellín retardador incorpora una palanca (1)
de aborto del tiempo de retardo.
Retirar la anilla (2) estirando con fuerza. Accionar la palanca (1) con fuerza hacia atrás y hacia abajo

8.3.5 ABERTURA/CIERRE MANUAL DE LAS VÁLVULAS DIRECCIONALES.
La válvula dispone de una bieleta (1) conectada al pistón de la válvula y al carrete. En el extremo libre de la bieleta
se conecta una palanca. Cuando la palanca es accionada en sentido ascendente el pistón baja y la direccional se
abre. Para cerrar la direccional, accionar la palanca en sentido descendente hasta que el pistón se introduzca en
su alojamiento hasta el tope.
LPG suministra las válvulas direccionales equipadas con este tipo de palanca.
En la figura se observa un ejemplo de direccional abierta.
s Para abrir/cerrar manualmente una válvula direccional LPG

La válvula dispone de una bieleta (1) conectada al pistón de la válvula. En el extremo libre de la
bieleta se conecta una palanca. Cuando la palanca es accionada en sentido ascendente el
pistón baja y la direccional se abre. Para cerrar la direccional, accionar la palanca en sentido
descendente hasta que el pistón se introduzca en su alojamiento hasta el tope.
LPG provee una palanca de este tipo para las direccionales que suministra. Para evitar un
efecto de vacio en el interior del pistón neumático, desenroscar el tornillo de descompresión
(2). Una vez finalizado el test no olvidarse de enroscar el tornillo de descompresión (2) otra vez.

8.3.6 DESCOMPRESIÓN DE LA LÍNEA DE DISPARO.
Una vez se ha producido una descarga la línea de disparo ésta queda presurizada en toda su longitud, desde el
botellín piloto hasta el último cabezal de disparo. Los sistemas dióxido de carbono (CO2) incorporan un tornillo de
descompresión (colocado generalmente en el último cabezal de disparo) que permite realizar la evacuación
controlada del nitrógeno o agente extintor. Actuar sobre el tornillo de descompresión según el siguiente
procedimiento:
1. Quitar el tapón (7)

2. Con un destornillador de punta plana extraer el tapón interno (5)
3. Montar de nuevo el tapón (5) en posición inversa (hexágono hacia el exterior). Apretar con una llave Allen de 6
mm. En ese momento se escuchará cómo escapa la presión interior.
4. Una vez extraída toda la presión interna colocar el tapón (5) como estaba al principio (cara ranurada hacia el
exterior).
5. Colocar en su posición el tapón (7) cuidando que la junta tórica (6) esté en su posición.

8.4 ACTUACIÓN EN CASO DE FALLO DE LA ACTIVACIÓN AUTOMÁTICA DEL SISTEMA DE

EXTINCIÓN.
En caso de que no se produzca la descarga de extinción una vez ha transcurrido el tiempo de retardo marcado
por la central (consultar instrucciones técnicas de la central de control) además del retardo neumático (30 s)
desde la alarma de incendio, o se observa fuego y no ha funcionado el sistema de alarma, se esperará hasta que
el área esté desalojada para activar manualmente la extinción. Las siguientes operaciones se realizarán de
manera rápida y ordenada:
1. La persona encargada de la activación manual debe colocarse el casco y las gafas de seguridad que se
encontrarán siempre en el área de almacenamiento, junto a la batería y cerca de los carteles explicativos del
protocolo para la descarga manual.
2. Comprobar visualmente que la batería se encuentra en buen estado (no existe rotura de ningún latiguillo, las
válvulas direccionales se encuentran cerradas, no existen puntos de fuga apreciables).
3. Para baterías de cilindros equipadas con válvulas direccionales, identificar el conjunto válvula solenoide +
disparador manual de la zona a inundar. El conjunto válvula solenoide + disparador manual debe estar
perfectamente identificado indicando la zona que protege. Abrir manualmente (Ver. 8.3.5. Apertura/Cierre
de las válvulas direccionales) Es muy importante activar únicamente la válvula adecuada de la zona a
proteger, ya que en el caso de actuación de dos o más válvulas, el agente será descargado en varias zonas a
la vez.
4. En baterías de cilindros equipadas con dispositivos neumáticos de retardo, abortar el tiempo de retardo
tirando de la palanca del dispositivo (Ver 8.3.4. Aborto del tiempo de retardo).
5. Activar el disparo del botellín piloto (ver 8.3.2. Accionamiento del disparo manual). Esta operación provoca a
la apertura de la válvula del botellín piloto y de las válvulas de los cilindros auxiliares.

8.5 ACTUACIÓN TRAS LA DESCARGA DE LA BATERÍA.

En el riesgo:
1. Antes de abrir la puerta o activar la ventilación del riesgo donde se ha producido la descarga esperar la
llegada de una brigada contra incendios.
2. Una vez controlado el riesgo limpiar el área.
3. Comprobar visualmente el estado de la instalación dióxido de carbono (CO2) que se encuentra dentro del
riesgo (estado general de la tubería, estado de los difusores). Se recomienda seguir la Lista de comprobación
para inspección rutinaria de instalaciones de extinción de incendios de dióxido de carbono (CO2) (incluida
en el Anexo III) en los puntos que procedan.
En el emplazamiento de la batería:
4. Verificar que todos los cilindros de dióxido de carbono (CO2) de la instalación se hayan descargado totalmente
(comprobar que los manómetros de las válvulas marquen 0 bar. Comprobar todos los módulos de control del
sistema de pesaje, por si alguno, muestra el led iluminado de color rojo). En caso que no sea así quitar
manualmente las tapas superiores de los cilindros.
NOTA: Si no fuera posible quitar las tapas superiores manualmente NO FORZAR y avisar al personal
técnico de LPG.
5. Desenclavar el contactor de paso (ver 8.3.1. Rearme del contactor de paso con enclavamiento).
6. Cortar el suministro eléctrico a la solenoide del botellín piloto o cilindro máster.
7. Despresurizar la línea de disparo mediante el tornillo de descompresión (ver 8.3.6. Descompresión de línea
de disparo). En el caso de baterías de cilindros con válvulas direccionales, actuar sobre el conjunto válvula
solenoide + disparador manual, éste ultimo debe estar en posición de abierto.
8. En el caso del botellín piloto o cilindro máster desmontar lentamente el actuador manual que cierra la válvula.
Una pequeña presión puede ser liberada durante esta operación.
9. Cerrar el conjunto válvula solenoide + disparador manual que controla la válvula direccional, cortando su
suministro eléctrico.
10. Despresurizar el dispositivo neumático de retardo aflojando el tornillo (3).

11. Cerrar las válvulas direccionales (Ver 8.3.5. Apertura/Cierre manual de las válvulas direccionales) en el
caso que no se cierren después de descomprimir la línea de disparo.
12. Comprobar visualmente el estado de la instalación de dióxido de carbono (CO2) que se encuentra dentro del
riesgo (estado general de los componentes). Se recomienda seguir la Lista de comprobación para
inspección rutinaria de instalaciones de extinción de incendios dióxido de carbono (CO2) incluida en el
anexo III.
13. Desmontar los cilindros de sus herrajes y enviar a recargar a LPG. Enviar también todos los componentes que
estén dañados para su reparación o cambio.
14. Tras la reposición de cilindros y componentes, repasar todos los sistemas de disparo del equipo y rearmarlos
(ej. reponer los precintos de los disparos manuales, recambiar las membranas de disparo perforadas, etc.).
15. Se deberá realizar una nueva recepción y puesta a punto del sistema de extinción.
16. Cargar el odorizador.

Este documento incluye los siguientes anexos al Manual de Instalación, Uso y Mantenimiento de los sistemas de
DIÓXIDO DE CARBONO (CO2) Ref. MU/CO/04/ES
ANEXO I. Planos estándar de sistemas dióxido de carbono (CO2).
ANEXO II. Fichas técnicas componentes de sistemas dióxido de carbono (CO2).
ANEXO III. Extracto normativa y lista de comprobación para la recepción e inspección

rutinaria de instalaciones de extinción de incendios.
ANEXO IV. Instrucción técnica componentes sistemas dióxido de carbono (CO2).
ANEXO V Ficha Técnica de seguridad del dióxido de carbono (CO2).

9 ANEXO I. Planos estándar de sistemas dióxido de carbono (CO ). 2
PLANO DESCRIPCIÓN
15042053 BATERÍA 4 CILINDROS 67 l SIMPLE FILA/SIN PESAJE CON 2 VÁLVULAS

DIRECCIONALES
306046SS HERRAJE TIPO 67, 40 L SIMPLE FILA SIN PESAJE PARA 4 CILINDROS
306096SS HERRAJE TIPO 67, 40 L SIMPLE FILA SIN PESAJE PARA 9 CILINDROS
50040676 BATERÍA TIPO 67, 40 l. PARA CO2 SIMPLE FILA/SIN PESAJE 2 ZUNCHOS
50090673 BATERÍA TIPO 67, 40 l. PARA CO2 SIMPLE FILA/SIN PESAJE Y BOTELLÍN PILOTO 1
ZUNCHO
5104067N BATERÍA TIPO 67, 40 l PARA CO2 SIMPLE FILA/CON PESAJE POR CÉLULA
5105067N BATERÍA 5 CILINDROS 67 l PARA CO2 SIMPLE FILA/CON PESAJE MECÁNICO
76702400 CILINDRO AUTÓNOMO CO2 LPG 128









10 ANEXO II: Fichas técnicas componentes de sistemas de DIÓXIDO DE

CARBONO (CO2) . ®
DESCRIPCIÓN FICHA TÉCNICA
VÁLVULA LPG 110-00 FT 006

CILINDROS SIN SOLDADURA 5, 13’4, 26’8, 40’2, 67 l FT 013
DIFUSORES DE CO2 FT 015
VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE DE ALTA PRESIÓN FT 017
VÁLVULA DE RETENCIÓN DE ½” FT 022
CABEZAL NEUMÁTICO LPG 110 FT 023
RETARDADOR NEUMÁTICO DE DISPARO FT 024
VÁLVULA DIRECCIONAL DE ALTA PRESIÓN FT 032
LATIGUILLO DE TEFLÓN (PTFE) FT 040
MANÓMETRO T/W FT 046
CONTACTOR DE PASO CON ENCLAVAMIENTO FT 047
DISPARO MANUAL DE PALANCA DE ALTA PRESIÓN FT 051
BOTELLÍN PILOTO DE 3 l FT 052
DERIVADOR FT 066
TORNILLO DE DESCOMPRESIÓN R ¼” FT 070
VÁLVULA DE DESPRESURIZACIÓN R ¼” FT 075
VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE + DISPARO MANUAL FT 083
VÁLVULA DIRECCIONAL DE ALTA PRESIÓN FT 092
MEMBRANA DE SEGURIDAD CON ESCAPE CONDUCIDO FT 104
HERRAJE CILINDRO MODULAR 67 l FT 107
HERRAJE CILINDRO MODULAR 40’2 l FT 108
VÁLVULA LPG-128-90 PARA BOTELLÍN PILOT DE 3 l. FT 132
LATIGUILLO R2F FT 139
PRESOSTATO FT 145
VÁLVULA CUT OFF FT 165

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
NÚMERO F.TÉCNICA FECHA
PRESENTACIÓN
2
CARACTERÍSTICAS TÉCNICAS
P. MAX. P. PRUEBA PRUEBA TEMPERATURA MEMBRANA
PESO GASES Y CAUDALES MAX.
TRABAJO FUNCIONAL HIDRAULICA TRABAJO SEGURIDAD
166 bar. 60 bar. 250 bar. -20°C 60°C 190 ± 10 bar. 0.950 kg. 0.75
SIST. DISPARO OPCIONALES:
ACCESORIOS
MATERIALES DE CONSTRUCCIÓN
CUERPO EJE PORTAJUNTAS JUNTA CIERRE JUNTA TÓRICA
Latón
Acero INOX AISI-303 Acero INOX AISI-303 Teflón+FV Nitrilo
HOMOLOGACIONES:

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
PRESENTACIÓN
2
P. MAX. P. PRUEBA PRUEBA TEMPERATURA MEMBRANA
PESO GASES Y CAUDALES MAX.
TRABAJO FUNCIONAL HIDRAULICA TRABAJO SEGURIDAD
166 bar. 60 bar. 250 bar. -20°C 60°C 190 ± 10 bar. 0.950 kg. 0.75
ACCESORIOS
CUERPO EJE PORTAJUNTAS JUNTA CIERRE JUNTA TÓRICA
Latón
Acero INOX AISI-303 Acero INOX AISI-303 Teflón+FV Nitrilo
HOMOLOGACIONES:

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
013 REV. 09 03/05
PRESENTACIÓN Botellas de acero (Cr-Mo) sin soldadura, para contener gases comprimidos, líquidos o disueltos a presión.
CAPACIDAD ROSCAS
5 l.
1" NPT-NGT
13.4 l.
M30 x 1.5 DIN13
26.8 l.
W 28.8-14 DIN477
40.2 l.
R. 1½" ISO 228

67.0 l.
1" NPT-NGT
67.5 l.
75 l.
2½" 12UN 2A 60°
W 28.8-14 DIN477
80 l.
1" NPT - NGT
MATERIAL: Acero Cr-Mo -W 222-BW
COMPOSICIÓN TRATAMIENTO
QUÍMICA PROPIEDADES TÉRMICO
FÍSICAS
C = 0.45% Max. Límite elástico > 77 kg./mm.2

Mn= 1.10% Max. Carga de rotura> 88 kg./mm.2
Si = 0.10% Min. Alargamiento > 12% (Lo=5.65 So)
Templado en aceite y revenido
Cr = 0.70% Min. Resilencia (Charpy V; t=0° C)
Mo= 0.12% Min. Media > 6 kg./cm.2
P = 0.050% Max. Mínimo > 4 kg./cm.2
S = 0.050% Max.
CARACTERISTICAS TÉCNICAS
CAPACIDAD Ø EXT. ±1% ESPESOR MIN. PRUEBA HOMOLOGACIONES. REGISTRO TIPO DENSIDAD MAX.
LONGITUD ±10 mm PESO
HIDRAULICA LLENADO kg./l.
R.A.P. ITC-MIE-AP/7
5 l. 140 mm. 3.03 mm. 460 mm. 12 kg. HFC-125

0.93 kg./l.
13.4 l. 140 mm. 3.62 mm. 1060 mm. 20 kg. HFC-227
1.15 kg./l.
250 bar.
26.8 l. 229 mm. 4.8 mm. 940 mm. 43 kg. SIII:
0.90 kg./l.
40.2 l. 229 mm. 4.8 mm. 1240 mm. 47 kg. R77/01 CO2 :
0.75 kg./l.
67.0 l. 267 mm. 5.6 mm. 1485 mm. 74 kg.
FE-13:
0.85 kg./l.
67.5 l. 267 mm. 4.9 mm. 1450 mm. 68 kg.
solo para
ARGON: 80 l.
75 l. 267 mm. 5.6 mm. 1665 mm. 82 kg.
107 kg. 300 bar. 200 bar. (15°C.)

80 l. 267 mm. 5.6 mm. 1803 mm.

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
PRESENTACIÓN Difusor para CO . Permite influir sobre su caudal (tiempo de descarga) calibrando su orificio interno.
1
3
Ø Mínimo de calibrado: 1 mm Presión de Trabajo: 140 bar
POSICIÓN DENOMINACIÓN MATERIAL
Acero INOX AISI-302 (Ø 0.3 mm)

*3

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
PRESENTACIÓN
2 3 4 1 10 9
Muelles de recuperación 5 6 8
POSICIÓN DENOMINACIÓN MATERIAL POSICIÓN DENOMINACIÓN MATERIAL
Acero INOX AISI-303

1 6
Nitrilo / EPDM (UL)

2 7
Nitrilo / EPDM (UL) Acero INOX AISI-303

3 8
Latón Acero INOX AISI-430 F

4 9
Acero INOX AISI-303 Teflón

5 10
P. MIN. P. MAX. TENSIÓN CONSUMO CONSUMO TIEMPO
FUNCIMIENTO Ø ORIFICIO PROTECCIÓN
FUNCIMIENTO FUNCIMIENTO NOMINAL EN FRIO EN CALIENTE RESPUESTA
Normalmente cerrado 0.8 mm. 0 bar. 170 bar.

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
2
PRESENTACIÓN
descargado en el colector pueda entrar de nuevo en los cilindros.
CONEXIÓN A COLECTOR
POSICIÓN DE TRABAJO
CONEXIÓN A CILINDRO
PESO
CUERPO: LATÓN 0,473 kg.
BOLA DE CIERRE: 0,002 kg.
NOTA: ROSCAS SEGÚN ISO 228









REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
Botellin piloto de alta presión (PPH 250bar) para el disparo de cilindros auxiliares en sistemas de extinción en bateria.
PRESENTACIÓN
Permite la activación manual, neumática o eléctrica según necesidades.
POSICIÓN DENOMINACIÓN ROSCAS CARACTERISTICAS TÉCNICAS
VÁLVULA LPG 128-90B

LPCB
VÁLVULA LPG 128-90 W28.8 PPH: 250 bar.

UL DIN 477
VÁLVULA LPG 128-40

VDS
DISPARO MANUAL DE PALANCA ROSCA CONEXIÓN VAL.VULA:

M. 30x1.5
Ø TOMA NEUMÁTICA:
G. 1/8"
ROSCA CONEXIÓN VAL.:
M. 30x1.5
VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE
24V. - 0.41A.
CAPACIDAD Ø PRESIÓN TRABAJO
5 3 l. 150 bar.

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
Dispositivo utilizado en sistemas centralizados de CO 2 o Gases Inertes para áreas normalmente ocupadas con sistema neumatico
PRESENTACIÓN de retardo. Permite la activacion de una sirena neumatica de alarma durante el tiempo de retardo sin descarga del agente extintor
dentro de la sala, concluido el tiempo de retardo corta el suministro neumatico en la sirena y lo desvia hacia los difusores.
CODIGO DESCARGAS
CUERPO PISTÓN MUELLE RECUPERADOR JUNTAS TÓRICAS
Latón Acero INOX AISI-303 Acero INOX AISI-302 NBR(Nitrilo)
SIRENA
DERIVADOR
DIFUSOR
ESQUEMA CONEXION TIPICA
RETARDADOR
CILINDRO PILOTO

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
PRESENTACIÓN
PRESIÓN DE TRABAJO: 140 bar.
PRESIÓN DE PRUEBA: 420 bar.
MATERIALES
TORNILLO LARGO LATÓN EN12164:98tab2
TORNILLO CORTO LATÓN EN12164:98tab2

JUNTA TORICA NITRILO
OBUS M.10x1 VARIOS
ACCIONADOR LATÓN EN12164:98tab2
TAPON DE CIERRE LATÓN EN12164:98tab2

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
PRESENTACIÓN
PRESIÓN MAX. DE TRABAJO: 240 bar.
PRESIÓN MIN. CIERRE: 20 bar.
DENOMINACION MATERIAL
CUERPO SUPERIOR LATÓN EN12164:98tab2
MUELLE RECUPERACION Ac. INOX. AISI 302
PISTON LATÓN EN12164:98tab2
CUERPO INFERIOR LATÓN EN12164:98tab2
NOTA: ROSCAS SEGÚN M.(DIN 13), R.(ISO 228)

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
PRESENTACIÓN
POSICIÓN CÓDIGO DENOMINACIÓN MATERIAL
VÁLVULA SOLENOIDE VARIOS
DISPARO MANUAL LATÓN
Ø ORIFICIO P. MIN. P. MAX. TENSIÓN CONSUMO CONSUMO TIEMPO
FUNCIMIENTO PROTECCIÓN
SOLENOIDE FUNCIMIENTO FUNCIMIENTO NOMINAL EN FRIO EN CALIENTE RESPUESTA
Normalmente cerrado 0.8 mm. 0 bar. 170 bar.


REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
Dispositivo diseñado para evacuar sobre presiones peligrosas en el tubo colector. Normalmente es utilizada en colectores
PRESENTACIÓN
con válvulas direccionales.
SIII, FM-200,
Ø CO2 HALOTRON FE-13 INERTES
HALON, FE-36
95±7 bar 200-220 bar 200 bar

270±10 bar
190±10 bar
azul / blue rojo / red naranja / orange
10 mm.
blanco / white 55±5 bar 170±10 bar 300 bar
400-420 bar
marron / brown violeta / violet rosa / pink

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
PRESENTACIÓN Soporte de sujección a pared para cilindro autónomo de diámetro 267mm.

REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
PRESENTACIÓN Soporte de sujección a pared para cilindro autónomo de diámetro 229mm.



REALIZADO
ALFREDO
REVISADO
APROBADO
PRESENTACIÓN
2
P. MAX. P. MIN. P. PRUEBA PRUEBA TEMPERATURA MEMBRANA
PESO AREA LIBRE DE PASO
TRABAJO FUNCIMIENTO FUNCIONAL HIDRAULICA TRABAJO SEGURIDAD
166 bar. 6 bar. 60 bar. 250 bar. -20°C 60°C 190 ± 10 bar. 1.6 kg.
50.26 mm 2
ACCESORIOS
CUERPO PISTÓN EJE PORTAJUNTAS JUNTA CIERRE JUNTA TÓRICA
Latón Latón
Acero INOX AISI-303 Acero INOX AISI-303 Teflón / Teflón + F.V Nitrilo


REALIZADO
REVISADO
APROBADO
PRESENTACIÓN
CONEXION BICONO A TUBO 6mm

6mm PIPE OLIVE CONNECTION
13 14
21 22
ORIFICIO BLOQUEO
PAD LOCK ORIFICE
A B

11 ANEXO III. Extracto normativa y lista de comprobación para la recepción e

inspección rutinaria de instalaciones de extinción de incendios.
1. Los medios materiales de protección contra incendios se someterán al programa mínimo de mantenimiento
que se establece en las tablas I y II.
2. Las operaciones de mantenimiento recogidas en la tabla I serán efectuadas por personal de un instalador o un
mantenedor autorizado, o por personal del usuario o titular de la instalación.
3. Las operaciones de mantenimiento recogidas en la tabla II serán efectuadas por personal del fabricante,
instalador o mantenedor autorizado para los tipos de aparatos, equipos o sistemas de que se trate, o bien por
personal del usuario, si ha adquirido la condición de mantenedor por disponer de medios técnicos adecuados, a
juicio de los servicios competentes en materia de industria de la Comunidad Autónoma.
4. En todos los casos, tanto el mantenedor como el usuario o titular de la instalación, conservarán constancia
documental del cumplimiento del programa de mantenimiento preventivo, indicando, como mínimo: las
operaciones efectuadas, el resultado de las verificaciones y pruebas y la sustitución de elementos defectuosos que
se hayan realizado. Las anotaciones deberán llevarse al día y estarán a disposición de los servicios de inspección
de la Comunidad Autónoma correspondiente.
TABLA I
PROGRAMA DE MANTENIMIENTO DE LOS MEDIOS MATERIALES DE LUCHA CONTRA INCENDIOS
Operaciones a realizar por el personal del titular de la instalación del equipo o sistema.
Equipo o sistema CADA TRES MESES
Comprobación de que las boquillas del agente extintor o rociadores están

en buen estado y libres de obstáculos para su funcionamiento correcto.
Comprobación del buen estado de los componentes del sistema,

especialmente de la válvula de prueba en los sistemas de rociadores, o los
Sistemas fijos de extinción: mandos manuales de la instalación de los sistemas de polvo, o agentes
extintores gaseosos.
Rociadores de agua.
Agua pulverizada. Comprobación del estado de carga de la instalación de los sistemas de
polvo, anhídrido carbónico, o hidrocarburos halogenados y de las botellas
Polvo. de gas impulsor cuando existan.
Espuma.
Agentes extintores gaseosos. Comprobación de los circuitos de señalización, pilotos, etc., en los sistemas
con indicaciones de control.
Limpieza general de todos los componentes.

TABLA II
PROGRAMA DE MANTENIMIENTO DE LOS MEDIOS MATERIALES DE LUCHA CONTRA INCENDIOS
Operaciones a realizar por el personal especializado del fabricante o instalador del equipo o sistema.
Equipo o sistema CADA AÑO
Comprobación integral, de acuerdo con las instrucciones del fabricante o

instalador, incluyendo en todo caso:
Sistemas fijos de extinción: Verificación de los componentes del sistemas, especialmente los
dispositivos de disparo y alarma.
Rociadores de agua.
Agua pulverizada. Comprobación de la carga de agente extintor y del indicador de la misma
(medida alternativa del peso o presión).
Polvo.
Espuma.
Comprobación del estado del agente extintor.
Agentes extintores gaseosos.
Prueba de la instalación en las condiciones de su recepción.







12 ANEXO IV. Instrucción técnica componentes de sistemas dióxido de

carbono (CO ). 2
Descripción:
INSTRUCCIÓN TÉCNICA LLENADO DE CILINDROS CON VÁLVULAS LPG (REF. ITLC).


13 ANEXO V: Ficha de seguridad del dióxido de carbono (CO ). 2


CO Gaseous Fire
2
Suppression Systems
CO Gaseous Fire Suppression Systems
2
CO Total Flooding Fire Protection

2
CO was the original gaseous fire suppression agent and with
2
appropriate safety measures is still used today as an effective

and economical solution.
CO2 is the only gaseous agent where

the design rules specifically provide
guidance on the protection of deep
seated hazards.
13.6.6 ítem 6 13.6.6 ítem 7
Total flooding or local application
systems are designed to meet the
requirements of NFPA 12 or BS5306-
4 and are specifically designed using
hydraulic flow calculation software.
The system is VdS approved and
components meet the requirements
of EN12094 and Pressure Equipment
Directive (PED). 13.6.6 ítem 10
• Fast, effective fire protection

for critical assets & processes
• VdS Approved
• Tried and trusted
• Versatile & economical
• Worldwide CO support
2
HYGOOD High Pressure Carbon
® High pressure systems use individual To help ensure safety, all personnel
Dioxide Systems are especially storage cylinders that can be manifolded must be trained to the safety and
effective for non-occupied hazards. together for rapid simultaneous discharge. operational aspects of the CO system.
2
Whatever the application, from Cylinders valves can be operated

cylinders to nozzle, each system automatically or manually, and either Contact us and discuss your
is custom-designed for your locally or remotely using electric, requirements with our expert team.
specific fire hazards. pneumatic or mechanical actuators.
Odouriser scent emitted

during discharge
Lock-out
valve Discharge pressure switch
13.6.6 ítem 7
Manifold design allows single or multiple hazard
protection from one storage location (selector valves
available for multiple hazards)
Resettable/stackable electric valve

actuator with manual lever release
Wide range of
CO cylinders
2 nozzles available
CO Gaseous2
Fire Suppression Systems

Carbon Dioxide fire
suppression systems
have been proven
effective in numerous
unmanned applications:
• Commercial and Industrial Fryers
• Dip Tanks
• Electric Generators
• Electrical Panels
• Marine Applications
(including Cargo Holds and Engine Rooms)
• Spray Booths
• Waste Disposal Equipment
• Gas Turbines
• Coal Silos
• Hazardous Material Storage
• Quench Tanks
• Semiconductor Wet Benches
• Computer Room Subfloors
• Unmanned Control Rooms
• Coating Operations
• Paint Lines
• Wave Solder Machines
• Machining Operations
• Transformer Vaults
• Dust Collectors
• Printing Presses
Trusted gaseous
solutions using
pioneering technology
About Johnson Controls’ Building Technologies and Solutions
Johnson Controls’ Building Technologies & Solutions is making the world safer, smarter and more sustainable
– one building at a time. Our technology portfolio integrates every aspect of a building – whether security systems,
energy management, fire suppression or HVACR – to ensure that we exceed customer expectations at all times.
We operate in more than 150 countries through our unmatched network of branches and distribution channels, helping
building owners, operators, engineers and contractors enhance the full lifecycle of any facility. Our arsenal of brands
includes some of the most trusted names in the industry, such as Tyco®, YORK®, Metasys®, Ruskin®, Frick®, PENN®,
Sabroe®, Simplex® and Grinnell®.
For more information, visit www.johnsoncontrols.com or follow @HygoodFire on Twitter.
Americas Europe Middle East

One Stanton Street, Burlingham House, Block D, Floor 3,
Marinette, Hewett Road, Office Park Building #56,
WI 54143-2542, USA Great Yarmouth, UK, NR31 0NN Internet City, Dubai,
Tel. +1 715 735 7411 Tel. +44 (0) 1493 440 500 United Arab Emirates
Tel. +971 4455 0700
Asia-Pacific
2 Serangoon North Avenue 5,
#07-01, Singapore 554911,
Singapore
Tel. +65 6557 4360
© 2018 Johnson Controls. All rights reserved.

Releasing System Peripherals
UL, ULC, CSFM Listed; Fire Suppression System Abort Switches and Releasing
MEA (NYC) Acceptance* Appliance Circuit (RAC) Maintenance Switches
Features Description
Abort switches provide a manual Fire Suppression Releasing systems require maintenance disconnect switches
System release abort request: and often require abort switches. These abort and
 Pushbutton momentary switch is mounted on a maintenance switches are clearly labeled and combine easy
stainless steel single-gang plate 13.6.7 ítem 1 operation with rugged construction for high integrity
operation.
 A protruding collar protects the switch from
accidental contact (collar is removable if required)
 Available flush or surface mount
 Flush mounting requires standard single-gang box
 Surface mounting includes a red mounting box 13.6.7 ítem 1
 Models are available with internal 1.2 k resistor for NORMAL
current limited operation 0
DISC./
1
Maintenance switches provide a secure and visible DISABLE
disconnect means for servicing Fire Suppression
System Releasing Appliance Circuits (RACs): FIRE SUPPRESSION
 Maintained position keyswitch with key removable DISCONNECT / DISABLE
only in the normal position 13.6.8 ítem 1
 Disabled position opens connection to output circuit
13.6.8 ítem 2
and places a 16.2 k resistor across the input circuit Maintenance Switches, with and without Disconnect
to initiate a supervisory condition at the host panel Indicator Lamp
 Models with indicator lamp use a bright incandescent
bulb with red lens, powered from separate 24 VDC
 Available for flush or surface mount
 Flush mounting requires a standard double-gang box FIRE SUPPRESSION
for models with lamp or a standard single gang box SYSTEM ABORT
for models without lamp.
 Surface mount models includes a red mounting box 13.6.8 ítem 1
 Models with lamp provided with a double gang
stainless steel plate. Models without lamp provided
with a single gang stainless steel plate.
PUSH AND HOLD
UL listed to Standard 864
Abort Switch
* Refer to page 2 for specific product listings. NOTE: MEA is not applicable to
Maintenance Switches. FM is not applicable to Abort Switches.
As indicated on page 2, these products have been approved by the California State Fire
Marshal (CSFM) pursuant to Section 13144.1 of the California Health and Safety Code. See
CSFM Listing 7300-0026:313 for allowable values and/or conditions concerning material
presented in this document. Abort switches are accepted for use – City of New York
Department of Buildings – MEA35-93E. Maintenance switches were not approved by FM as
of document revision date. Additional listings may be applicable, contact your local Simplex®
product supplier for the latest status. Listings and approvals under Simplex Time Recorder
Co. are the property of Tyco Fire Protection Products.
S2080-0010-5 3/2017
Product Selection (see page 3 for specifications)
Abort Switches
Model Description Listing Status Details
2080-9056 Flush mount UL & CSFM listed;
Single-gang size; includes 3 position contact block housing
Surface mount; includes MEA (NYC)
2080-9057 with one contact block installed
red mounting box Acceptance
Abort Switches for 4004R Series Suppression Release Panel Current Limited Operation
2080-9067 Flush mount UL & CSFM listed; Single-gang size; includes 1.2 k, 1W resistor for current
Surface mount; includes MEA (NYC) limited operation and 3 position contact block housing with
2080-9068 Acceptance one contact block installed.
red mounting box
Note: For ULC listed abort switches, refer to datasheet S2080-0011.
Maintenance Switches with Disconnect Indicator Lamp

2080-9059 Flush mount Double-gang size; includes 3 position contact block housing
UL, ULC, & CSFM with 2 contact blocks installed; disabled position opens
Surface mount; includes listed connection to output and places a 16.2 k resistor across the
2080-9060
red mounting box input circuit; resistor is removable if required for retrofit
Maintenance Switches without Disconnect Indicator Lamp
2080-9069 Flush mount Single-gang size; includes 3 position contact block housing
UL, ULC, CSFM with 1 contact block installed; disabled position opens
Surface mount; includes listed; connection to output and places a 16.2 k resistor across the
2080-9070
red mounting box input circuit; resistor is removable if required for retrofit
Accessories for Field Installation
Model Description
Additional Contact Block for Abort or Maintenance Switch; 1 Form C contact; UL recognized component for use
2080-9061
with these switches; listings and approvals are not applicable
Abort Switch Installation Reference
2 S2080-0010-5 3/2017
2080-9059 and 2080-9060 Maintenance Switch Installation Reference
2080-9069 and 2080-9070 Maintenance Switch Installation Reference
3 S2080-0010-5 3/2017
Specifications
Electrical Ratings
Abort Switch; One Contact block Silver contacts; 1 N.O. & 1 N.C.; rated 2 A resistive @ 30 VDC 13.6.7 ítem 2
Maintenance Switch Control Circuit control: Silver contacts; 1 normally open & 1 normally closed; rated 2 A resistive
Contact Block (all models) @ 30 VDC
Maintenance Switch Lamp
Lamp control: Silver contacts; 1 normally open & 1 normally closed; rated 2 A resistive
Contact Block; (models 2080-
@ 30 VDC
9059 and 2080-9060)
Maintenance Switch Indicator
Replaceable 2 W incandescent bulb; 24 to 30 VDC typical; 83 mA @ 24 VDC; requires
Light (models 2080-9059 and
separate 24 VDC 13.6.8 ítem 3
2080-9060)
Wiring Connections
2 2
Abort Switch Terminal blocks for in/out wiring; 18 to 14 AWG wire (0.82 mm to 2.08 mm )
2 2
Abort Switch with Current Limited Terminal blocks for first wire connection; 18 to 14 AWG wire (0.82 mm to 2.08 mm );
Resistor 18 AWG wire lead for second wire connection
2
18 AWG (0.82 mm ) color coded wire leads for suppression circuit; terminal blocks for
Maintenance Switch 2 2
lamp wiring; 18 to 14 AWG wire (0.82 mm to 2.08 mm )
Additional Information 579-416, Installation Instructions
Environmental Ratings
Temperature Range 32° F to 120° F (0° C to 49° C) 13.6.7 ítem 3, 13.6.8 ítem 4
Humidity Range Up to 93% at 90°F (32° C) 13.6.7 ítem 4, 13.6.8 ítem 5
TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited. NFPA 72 and National Fire Alarm Code
are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

Specifications
Table 4: Suppression Release Peripheral 4090-9005 and 4090-9006 Specifications

Communications IDNet, one address13.6.9 ítem 1
with 4007ES 2 A maximum At nominal 24 VDC, regulated; refer to NAC Power Requirements for
RAC Output Rating
with 4009 IDNet NAC Extender 1 A maximum more detail 13.6.9 ítem 2
NAC Power Requirements Voltage 16 to 32 VDC (nominal 24 VDC)
Supervisory Current No additional current required, circuit appears as standard end-of-line (EOL) NAC loading
Note:
RAC Current NAC Current RAC Current NAC Current
4007ES NACs are rated at 3 Alarm Current Reference 0.5 A 0.845 A 1.25 A 2.14 A
A; 4009 IDNet NAC Extender (RAC current = actuator 0.75 A 1.28 A 1.5 A 2.56 A
NACs are rated at 2 A, Extender current) 0.87 A 1.5 A 1.75
3A
expansion NACs are rated 1.5 A 1A 1.71 A 2A
Wire Connections Screw terminals for input and output wiring, 18 to 12 AWG wire (0.82 mm² to 3.31 mm²)
Up to 2500 ft (762 m) from the IDNet source module
IDNet Wiring Distance Reference Up to 10,000 ft (3048 m) total Class B wiring distance including T-Taps
Compatible with Simplex 2081-9044 Overvoltage Protectors
Dimensions See installation reference in Compatible UL Listed Valves and Actuators
Operating Temperature 32° to 120° F (0° to 49° C) indoor operation only 13.6.9 ítem 4
Operating Humidity Range 10 to 90% RH at 90° F (32° C) 13.6.9 ítem 5
Table 5: Coil Supervision Module 2081-9046 Specifications
Construction Epoxy encapsulated
Dimensions 1-3/8" W x 2-7/16" L x 1-1/16" H (34 mm x 62 mm x 27 mm)
Wiring 18 AWG (0.82 mm²) wire leads, color coded
Current Rating 2 A Maximum; internally fused at 3 A, non-replaceable
Compatible UL Listed Valves and Actuators

AUTOMAN II-C Assembly (solenoid 17728; coil 25924) 24 VDC, 750 mA
AUTOMAN II-C Explosion-Proof Releasing Device (solenoid 31492;
24 VDC, 750 mA
coil 31438)
AUTOMAN II-C Assembly (solenoid 68739; coil 25924) 24VDC, 750 mA
Solenoid Electric Actuator (solenoid 73111; coil 73097) 24 VDC, 1 A
ANSUL
*CV90 HF Electric Actuator 73327 24 VDC, 570 mA
LP CO2 w/ASCO solenoid 422934 24 VDC, 442 mA
LP CO2 double action 24 VDC solenoid 430948 24 VDC, 438 mA
LP CO2 3-way selector valve solenoid 433419 24 VDC, 438 mA
Electric Actuator 24 VDC solenoid 570537 24 VDC, 250 mA
Solenoid Electric Actuator (uses solenoid: Flow Control
609500/671S)
LPG 24 VDC, 542 mA
LPG128/145/190/230-50/55 FM-200 valves (uses solenoid: Flow
LPG128-90UL iFLOW and FM-200 valve (uses solenoid: Flow
71395SN2ENJ1NOH111C2 (Skinner coil H111C2) 24 VDC, 420 mA
73212BN4TN00NOC111C2 (Skinner coil C111C2) 24 VDC, 420 mA
Skinner 73212BN4TNLVNOC322C2 (Skinner coil C322C2) 24 VDC, 830 mA
73218BN4UNLVNOH111C2 (Skinner coil H111C2) 24 VDC, 410 mA
73218BN4UNLVNOC111C2 (Skinner coil C111C2) 24 VDC, 410 mA
8210A107 (097617-005D coil) 24 VDC, 750 mA
ASCO 8210G207 (238310 coil) 24 VDC, 440 mA
8211A107 (097617-005D coil) 24 VDC, 750 mA
Page 7 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019


8262H182 (238910 coil) 24 VDC, 483 mA
HV2628571 (23810 coil) 24 VDC, 442 mA
HV2648581 (23810 coil) 24 VDC, 442 mA
EF8210G001MBMO (238714 coil) 24 VDC, 450 mA
R8210A107 (097617-005D coil) 24 VDC, 700 mA
T8210A107 (097617-005D coil) 24 VDC, 700 mA
ECH Electrical Control Head (551201) 24 VDC, 1700 mA
Pyro-Chem Explosion-Proof Electric Actuator (570147) 24 VDC, 396 mA
Removable Electric Actuator (570209) 24 VDC, 200 mA
304.205.010 – Electrical Actuator Suppression Diode 24 VDC, 250 mA
Hygood
304.209.001 – Electrical Actuator Bridge Rectifier 24 VDC, 250 mA
Minimax Model MX1230 without diode 24 VDC, 500 mA
Versa CGS-4292-NB3-S20000 24 VDC, 438 mA
Burkert 5282 2/2-Way Solenoid Valve 24 VDC, 333 mA
TSP 304205030 24 VDC, 0.5 A
Tyco Safety Products
TSP 304700001 24 VDC, 830mA
Masteco MSC-01 24 VDC, 1.7A
Note: * For 24 VDC, 450 mA activation, requires a 73886 (21.5 ohm, 23 watt) in-line resistor shipping assembly ordered separately. For additional
information refer to the manufacturer’s technical documentation.
Compatible FM Approved Water Control Valves

4007ES Control Panels are assigned to FM Release Control Panel Group 3. Group 3 FM Approved Release Control Panels are compatible will all
FM Approved Solenoid Valves rated at 22 Watts or less. For verification of agency listings and power requirements refer to the solenoid valve
manufacturer's technical documentation.
Page 8 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Suppression Release Peripheral Installation Reference Diagram
Figure 5: Suppression Release Peripheral Installation Reference Diagram
Note: Figure 5 shows:

1. 2975-9227 box, red with white lettering (supplied with 4090-9006) 13.6.9 ítem 3
2. 4090-9812 LED indicator option (supplied with 4090-9006)
3. 4090-9005 Suppression Release Peripheral assembly (supplied with 4090-9006)
Page 9 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Additional Product Data Sheet Reference
Table 7: Additional Product Data Sheet Reference

Subject Data Sheet
Releasing System Abort and Maintenance Switches S2080-0010
4007ES Panels with Conventional Notification S4007-0001
Addressable Manual Stations for Releasing Applications S4099-0006
S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019
2081-9046
Coil Supervision Module
Wiring Instructions
Cautions and Warnings
DO NOT INSTALL ANY SIMPLEX® PRODUCT THAT APPEARS
DAMAGED. Upon unpacking your Simplex product, inspect the contents of
the carton for shipping damage. If damage is apparent, immediately file a claim
with the carrier and notify an authorized Simplex product supplier.
ELECTRICAL HAZARD - Disconnect electrical field power when making
any internal adjustments or repairs. All repairs should be performed by a
representative or authorized agent of your local Simplex product supplier.
STATIC HAZARD - Static electricity can damage components. Handle as

follows:
 Ground yourself before opening or installing components.
 Prior to installation, keep components wrapped in anti-static material at all
times.
Overview This publication shows how to connect the 2081-9046 Coil Supervision Module
to a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). Refer to the 4010 Fire Alarm – Front
Panel Installing, Operating, and Programming Instructions (574-052) for
configuration information. Refer to the 842-058 Field Wiring Diagram for
additional 4010 wiring information. For other FACPs see Field Wiring
Drawings 841-669 for the 4002, 841-984 for the 4002 non-power limited,
841-940 for the 4020, and 841-941 for the 4100.
Overview of 2081-9046 Coil The 2081-9046 Coil Supervision Module (shown in Figure 1) supervises and
Supervision Module provides power for an electrically compatible suppression release solenoid coil,
when connected to a 24 VDC Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC). The input
voltage from the NAC must be connected between the Red and Black wires of
the module. The output control voltage to the solenoid is taken from the Yellow
and Black wires of the module. The output control voltage to the suppression
solenoid is activated when the NAC is activated, alarm state (for example, +24
VDC to the Red wire and 0 VDC to the Black wire). The output control voltage
to the suppression solenoid is non-active when the NAC is non-active in a
supervisory state (i.e. negative to the Red wire and positive to the Black wire).
13.6.10 ítem 4 The module allows for supervision of the connection to the solenoid coil. Diode
suppression is also provided for overvoltage inductive spikes.
FigureTag FD4-437-01
BLK
RED
BLK
YEL
Figure 1. Coil Supervision Module
 2004, 2013 Tyco Fire Protection Products. All rights reserved. 574-437
Specifications and other information shown were current as of publication and are subject to change without notice.
TYCO, SIMPLEX, and the product names listed in this material are marks and/or registered marks. Unauthorized use is strictly
Rev. D
prohibited.
2081-9046 Coil Supervision Module
Electrical Specifications The lists below show the input power requirements and the output specifications
for the 2081-9046 Coil Supervision Module.
Input Power Requirements
 Nominal Voltage 24 VDC
Output Specifications
 Nominal Voltage 24 VDC
13.6.10 ítem 1  Maximum Current 2 A @ 24 VDC

 Stand By Current 2.2 mA (Maximum) 13.6.10 ítem 2
Wiring
IMPORTANT: Yellow and Black wires connected to the solenoid are
non-power limited (indicated by shaded area in Figure 2).
You must maintain 1/4” separation between the Yellow
and Black wires and the two input Black and Red power
limited wires.

$
% &

% &

!

"

# "
#
Note 1: Separate conduit entrances are required for power limited (Red and Black)
and non-power limited (Yellow and Black) wire pairs.
Note 2: Power limited cabling must be either FPL, FPLR, FPLP, or equivalent type cable
per the NEC.
Figure 2. Wiring Connections for Coil Supervision Module

13.6.10 ítem 3
NOTE: This module contains a 3A fuse, which will clear (open) in case of overload. This fuse is intended to protect
the control panel from damage in case of mis-wired or faulty suppression equipment. Replace module if fuse is
blown.
574-437
Rev. D

Fichas Técnicas - Sistema de Extinción PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fichas Técnicas - Sistema de Extinción PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

4007ES Fire Control Panels

S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

Introduction Touchscreen Display with LED Status Indicators

For more detailed information on ES Net, consult datasheet S4100-0076,

Operator Interface and Software Features

Page 2 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

Page 3 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

Power Supply Output and Zone/Relay Module

Page 4 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

4007ES Mounting and Module Location Reference

Table 2: Module locations

Page 5 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

Module and Accessories Selection Information

Page 6 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

Network Interface and Network Media Card Product Selection

Page 7 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

Additional 4007ES and Network Product Reference

Page 8 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

4007ES Hybrid Additional Reference

Figure 6: 4606-9205 (Platinum) Color

Figure 5: 4007ES Hybrid with optional

Page 9 S4007-0001 Rev. 14 6/2019

Audible Escalation of Events:

4009 IDNet NAC Extenders provide:

4090-9005/4090-9006 Suppression Release Peripheral (SRP) with

Related system components:

S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Releasing System Requirements

Page 2 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Table 2: Releasing Appliqués, Required for 4007ES Suppression Releasing Applications

Table 3: Suppression Release Peripheral and Accessories

Page 3 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

4007ES Hybrid Panel Releasing System One-Line Connection Reference

Figure 2: 4007ES Hybrid Panel Releasing System One-Line Connection Reference

Page 4 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

4007ES Fully Addressable Panel Releasing System One-Line Connection Reference

Page 5 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Suppression Release Peripheral Wiring Reference

Figure 4: Suppression Release Peripheral Wiring Reference

Page 6 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Table 4: Suppression Release Peripheral 4090-9005 and 4090-9006 Specifications

Table 5: Coil Supervision Module 2081-9046 Specifications

Compatible UL Listed Valves and Actuators

Page 7 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Table 6: Compatible UL Listed Valves and Actuators

Compatible FM Approved Water Control Valves

Page 8 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Suppression Release Peripheral Installation Reference Diagram

Figure 5: Suppression Release Peripheral Installation Reference Diagram

Note: Figure 5 shows:

Page 9 S4007-0003 Rev. 7 4/2019

Additional Product Data Sheet Reference

Table 7: Additional Product Data Sheet Reference

7.7.2 Editing the NACs tab................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40

page ii 579-1167 Rev. K

11.1.3 TrueAlert ES VO-H Appliances Point Editing.......................................................................................................................................................71

page iii 579-1167 Rev. K

13.27.2 Use Case #1: 10 Second Delay Abort............................................................................................................................................................. 106

page iv 579-1167 Rev. K

18.2.1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 149

page v 579-1167 Rev. K

1 Cautions, Warnings, and Regulatory Information

STATIC HAZARD Static electricity can damage components. Handle as follows: